View Overview Information Batch RDR Page Overview Perform Tasks Perform Common DBS Tasks Submit an RDR Batch
To delete a parts order from the Create Parts Order or Edit Parts Order page: Click the Delete button. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm, or click the No button to close the window without confirming. To delete a parts order, the order must be in "New" or "Open" status.
Delete a Parts Order from the Create or Edit Parts Order Page To delete a parts order from the Create or Edit Parts Order page: Click the Delete button. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm, or click the No button to close the window without confirming. To delete a parts order, the order must be in "New" or "Open" status.
Create Create Order Create SVC Order Create Order Create Order Create SVC Order Create Order Create Order Create Order Create SVC Order Create Create Order Create Parts Order Workflow *** Nissan Canada Inc. (NCI) recommends dealers create parts orders in an NCI DBS certified dealer management system and then log into NCI DBS to review and submit the order to NCI. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating a parts order. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create Parts Order Workflow. Edit Parts Order Workflow Manage Parts Order Workflow Inquire on the Availability of Parts at the Parts Distribution Centers Workflow View Parts Order Workflow Edit Parts Order Workflow Manage Parts Order Workflow View Parts Order Workflow
Edit Edit Order Edit Order Edit SVC Order Edit Order Edit Order Edit SVC Order Edit Order Edit Order Edit Order Edit SVC Order Edit Order Edit Order Edit Parts Order Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for modifying an existing new or open parts order. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Edit Parts Order Workflow. Create Parts Order Workflow Manage Parts Order Workflow Inquire on the Availability of Parts at the Parts Distribution Centers Workflow View Parts Order Workflow
Activate/Deactivate Tracing Page Overview Purpose Use the Activate/Deactivate Tracing page to activate tracing and change the logging level. Description The content area of the Activate/Deactivate Tracing page displays the following sections: Logger Name - Enter the name of the logger. Different logger names are defined by the support team. Logger Level - Change the logging level if a different type of logging is desired. Each logger name has a default level assigned to it. Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Activate/Deactivate Tracing page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Activate Tracing Deactivate Tracing Change the Logging Level Page Preview
Note : Click the Step by Step button to view additional information for this topic. To use full help: The DBS help system is organized to match the navigation structure of DBS . Click a navigation tab to display the content for that function. Note : The DBS help system allows you to view information for all pages, tasks, and functions, even though you may not have permissions to access these functions in DBS . The navigation buttons allow you to quickly move around in the help system and print the help content. Note : Because the help content is constantly changing as the system changes, we strongly recommend that you do not print help content pages. Instead use the context-help from any DBS application page to quickly re-visit a task. The Search feature of DBS help allows you to perform a text search of the help content. Click here for more information on structuring your search to provide the best results. After you click a navigation tab, the Table of Contents area on the left side of the window updates to show the content specific to that tab. Click the plus sign for any area to display a list of tasks and overview content. Click a task title in the Table of Contents to display the help content in the content area. The Content Area of the help changes with each click you make to display the content specific to your choices. The Keywords function allows you to search for information in the help system using a keyword. Click here for more information on searching using keywords.
Navigate Full Help This topic is divided into the following sections: Understanding the Full Help Window Page Overviews Process Information The How To Window The Step by Step Window The Step by Step Window The Step by Step window provides a deeper look at a task topic than the How To information. Larger graphics highlighted with step numbers, together with expanded text, provide greater detail and supporting information and tips. The How To Window Each task topic in the help system has a topic structure similar to the graphic above. The Process and Tips tabs are optional. Click the How To button when viewing one of the other tabs to return to the How To information. Click the Step by Step button to view each step with additional graphics and supporting information. When available, click the Process tab to view the workflow information associated with this task. The workflow displays a graphical representation of the entire workflow process of which this task is a part. You can navigate to each step in the process using the built-in hyperlinks in the process graphic. The preview graphic in the center section serves primarily as a locating graphic to help you make sure you're performing the task on the correct page. The steps listed in the lower left section represent the most straightforward and simple steps to accomplish the task. These steps display when you open a task topic from the context-sensitive help. When available, click the Tips button to view tips and tricks to accomplish the task more quickly or with fewer errors. Click the Related Topics button to view a list of other help topics which may be of interest to you. Process/Workflow Information Workflows provide a unique way to view the help content available for a given subject. Each box on the process diagram provides a link to a help topic AND a view of each task that may be involved in a work process. Each workflow displays both required and optional tasks, and can be accessed from the main menu, by search or keyword, or thorough the associated task topics. Page Overviews Each application page in DBS has a matching Page Overview in the help system. These page overviews are exactly what you might think - an overview of the page purpose, tasks, and associated workflows or processes. The page overview allows you to view information about the page without actually looking at the page in DBS . This may be helpful in determining if you need access to a page you do not currently have permissions for. Understanding the Full Help Window To navigate full help: The DBS help system is organized to match the navigation structure of DBS . Click a navigation tab to display the content for that function. Note : The DBS help system allows you to view information for all pages, tasks, and functions, even though you may not have permissions to access these functions in DBS . The navigation buttons allow you to quickly move around in the help system and print the help content. Note : Because the help content is constantly changing as the system changes, we strongly recommend that you do not print help content pages. Instead use the context-help from any DBS application page to quickly re-visit a task. The Search feature of DBS help allows you to perform a text search of the help content. Click here for more information on structuring your search to provide the best results. After you click a navigation tab, the Table of Contents area on the left side of the window updates to show the content specific to that tab. Click the plus sign for any area to display a list of tasks and overview content. Click a task title in the Table of Contents to display the help content in the content area. The Content Area of the help, as you would expect, changes with each click you make to display the content specific to your choices. The Keywords function allows you to search for information in the help system using a keyword. Click here for more information on searching using keywords.
To create a report and select fields to display: Type the report name. Type the report title. Select an application. Select a report category. Select a view. Select the fields for the report. Note : To select multiple items, press and hold the CTRL key while selecting items. Click the Move button. Note : To move all fields into the Available Fields list, click the Move All button. To adjust the position of a column in the report, select one or more items in the Selected Fields list and use the First , Up , Down , and Last buttons. To add a count of records to the report, select the Check here to count records checkbox. Select the criteria operators for each field you want to filter. Click here for instructions to select criteria operators.
Select the Fields for a Report To select the fields for a report: In the Report Name field, type the report name. In the Report Title field, type the report title. From the Application drop-down list, select an application. From the Report category drop-down list, select a report category. From the View drop-down list, select a view. From the Available Fields list, select the fields for the report. Note : To select multiple items, press and hold the CTRL key while selecting items. Click the Move button. Note : To move all fields into the Selected Fields list, click the Move All button. To adjust the position of a column in the report, select one or more items in the Selected Fields list and use the First , Up , Down , and Last buttons. To add a count of records to the report, select the Check here to count records checkbox. Select the criteria operators for each field you want to filter. Click here for instructions to select criteria operators.
To create a report and select fields to display: Type the report name. Type the report title. Select an application. Select a report category. Select a view. Select the fields for the report. Note : To select multiple items, press and hold the CTRL key while selecting items. Click the Move button. Note : To move all fields into the Available Fields list, click the Move All button. To adjust the position of a column in the report, select one or more items in the Selected Fields list and use the First , Up , Down , and Last buttons. To add a count of records to the report, select the Check here to count records checkbox. Select the criteria operators for each field you want to filter. Click here for instructions to select criteria operators.
Select the Fields for a Report To select the fields for a report: In the Report Name field, type the report name. In the Report Title field, type the report title. From the Application drop-down list, select an application. From the Report category drop-down list, select a report category. From the View drop-down list, select a view. From the Available Fields list, select the fields for the report. Note : To select multiple items, press and hold the CTRL key while selecting items. Click the Move button. Note : To move all fields into the Selected Fields list, click the Move All button. To adjust the position of a column in the report, select one or more items in the Selected Fields list and use the First , Up , Down , and Last buttons. To add a count of records to the report, select the Check here to count records checkbox. Select the criteria operators for each field you want to filter. Click here for instructions to select criteria operators.
To create a report and select fields to display: Type the report name. Type the report title. Select an application. Select a report category. Select a view. Select the fields for the report. Note : To select multiple items, press and hold the CTRL key while selecting items. Click the Move button. Note : To move all fields into the Available Fields list, click the Move All button. To adjust the position of a column in the report, select one or more items in the Selected Fields list and use the First , Up , Down , and Last buttons. To add a count of records to the report, select the Check here to count records checkbox. Select the criteria operators for each field you want to filter. Click here for instructions to select criteria operators.
Select the Fields for a Report To select the fields for a report: In the Report Name field, type the report name. In the Report Title field, type the report title. From the Application drop-down list, select an application. From the Report category drop-down list, select a report category. From the View drop-down list, select a view. From the Available Fields list, select the fields for the report. Note : To select multiple items, press and hold the CTRL key while selecting items. Click the Move button. Note : To move all fields into the Selected Fields list, click the Move All button. To adjust the position of a column in the report, select one or more items in the Selected Fields list and use the First , Up , Down , and Last buttons. To add a count of records to the report, select the Check here to count records checkbox. Select the criteria operators for each field you want to filter. Click here for instructions to select criteria operators.
To create a report and select fields to display: Type the report name. Type the report title. Select an application. Select a report category. Select a view. Select the fields for the report. Note : To select multiple items, press and hold the CTRL key while selecting items. Click the Move button. Note : To move all fields into the Available Fields list, click the Move All button. To adjust the position of a column in the report, select one or more items in the Selected Fields list and use the First , Up , Down , and Last buttons. To add a count of records to the report, select the Check here to count records checkbox. Select the criteria operators for each field you want to filter. Click here for instructions to select criteria operators.
Select the Fields for a Report To select the fields for a report: In the Report Name field, type the report name. In the Report Title field, type the report title. From the Application drop-down list, select an application. From the Report category drop-down list, select a report category. From the View drop-down list, select a view. From the Available Fields list, select the fields for the report. Note : To select multiple items, press and hold the CTRL key while selecting items. Click the Move button. Note : To move all fields into the Selected Fields list, click the Move All button. To adjust the position of a column in the report, select one or more items in the Selected Fields list and use the First , Up , Down , and Last buttons. To add a count of records to the report, select the Check here to count records checkbox. Select the criteria operators for each field you want to filter. Click here for instructions to select criteria operators.
To create a report and select fields to display: Type the report name. Type the report title. Select an application. Select a report category. Select a view. Select the fields for the report. Note : To select multiple items, press and hold the CTRL key while selecting items. Click the Move button. Note : To move all fields into the Available Fields list, click the Move All button. To adjust the position of a column in the report, select one or more items in the Selected Fields list and use the First , Up , Down , and Last buttons. To add a count of records to the report, select the Check here to count records checkbox. Select the criteria operators for each field you want to filter. Click here for instructions to select criteria operators.
Select the Fields for a Report To select the fields for a report: In the Report Name field, type the report name. In the Report Title field, type the report title. From the Application drop-down list, select an application. From the Report category drop-down list, select a report category. From the View drop-down list, select a view. From the Available Fields list, select the fields for the report. Note : To select multiple items, press and hold the CTRL key while selecting items. Click the Move button. Note : To move all fields into the Selected Fields list, click the Move All button. To adjust the position of a column in the report, select one or more items in the Selected Fields list and use the First , Up , Down , and Last buttons. To add a count of records to the report, select the Check here to count records checkbox. Select the criteria operators for each field you want to filter. Click here for instructions to select criteria operators.
Note : If DBS receives multiple statements from the DMS, and a statement has not yet been submitted for processing, only the most recent statement will have the "Click here to Submit" option available. To submit a financial statement for processing: Select the financial statement you want to submit. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Click here to Submit option. Note : DBS submits the financial statement to the corporate financial management system and displays a processing message. Once transmitted (this takes approximately 30 seconds), the submission status displayed in the Status column changes to "Submitted". See the Step by Step tab in Full Help for additional information about the financial statement submission statuses. To view the updated financial statement status, click the Refresh button.
Submit a Financial Statement for Processing Note : If DBS receives multiple statements from the DMS, and a statement has not yet been submitted for processing, only the most recent statement will have the "Click here to Submit" option available. To submit a financial statement for processing: Select the financial statement you want to submit. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Click here to Submit menu option. Note : DBS submits the financial statement to the corporate financial management system and displays a processing message. Once transmitted (this takes approximately 30 seconds), the submission status displayed in the Status column changes to "Submitted". Note : The last status for the monthly statement should ALWAYS be "Accepted" or "Accepted with warning". After you submit a financial statement for processing, be sure to review the status of your submission to ensure that the financial statement has been accepted by the corporate financial management system. Click the Refresh button to view the updated financial statement status.
7D63A230-10BE-46C5-938A-34B597C068AE\DBS - How to SUBMIT Financial Statements v1.4.pdf
Financial Statement Financial Statements Financial Statements Processes Statement Status View Submit Financial Statements Workflow Note : This workflow is for NNA users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for submitting the financial statement.
Create Notification Page Overview Purpose Use the Create Notification page to create a new notification or edit an existing notification. Description The content area of the Create Notification page displays the following sections: Settings - Contains the Settings drop-down menu so you can select the type of notification which is email, SMS or both Recipients - Allows you to select who should receive the notification Header Information - Contains the information that is required and common for both emails and SMS notifications. It includes the title, date to send, time to send, and required approval check box. Email Content - Contains information that is specific to email notifications. This area only appears if you select email as the type of notification. SMS Content - Contains information specific to SMS notifications. This area only appears if you select SMS as the type of notification. Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Create Notification page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Create or Edit a Notification Select Internal User by Hierarchy Select Internal User by Geography Select Dealer User by Hierarchy Select Dealer User by Geography Select Dealer User by Input a Dealer Create or Edit a Notification Select Internal User by Hierarchy Select Internal User by Geography Select Dealer User by Hierarchy Select Dealer User by Geography Select Dealer User by Input a Dealer Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Create Notification page. Create or Edit a Notification Workflow Page Preview
Note : See the Step by Step tab in full help for additional information about the processing rules, processing results, and unwind schedule. To unwind (back out) a vehicle sale: Select a vehicle. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select Unwind RDR . Note : You can only unwind RDRs with a status of "Retailed", "Unwind Failed", or "Unwind Rejected". From the confirmation window, click Unwind . Note : If the RDR was submitted more than 90 days ago, contact your regional office DOM or NNA to unwind the vehicle. From the drop-down list, select a reason for the unwind request. Click Unwind . Note : If DBS rejects the unwind, you can view the reason in the Unwind Reason/Date column for the selected vehicle. You cannot unwind a vehicle on the same day an RDR is submitted for that vehicle. If the RDR date is greater than 90 days, you must contact NNA before the vehicle can be unwound. After an RDR is submitted, the RDR History Status shows "Unwind Pending"
Unwind an RDR Note : See the information at the bottom of this page for the unwind processing rules, processing results, and schedule. To unwind or back out Retail Delivery Report (RDR) sales: Select a vehicle. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select Unwind RDR . Note : You can only unwind RDRs with a status of "Retailed", "Unwind Failed", or "Unwind Refused". From the confirmation window, click Unwind . Note : To cancel the unwind, click Cancel . Note : If the RDR was submitted more than 90 days ago, contact your regional office DOM or NNA to unwind the vehicle. From the drop-down list, select a reason for the unwind request. Click Unwind . Note : A message displays that the unwind is in progress as the data is transmitted to the Host system. The vehicle status on the RDR History page changes to "Unwind Pending" and DBS the information in the Unwind Reason/Date column. Unwinds are processed each night following the schedule below. The vehicle will be added back into dealer inventory on the next day if the unwind is successful. You cannot unwind a vehicle on the same day an RDR is submitted for that vehicle. Unwind Processing Rules Dealers can only unwind an RDR within 90 days of the vehicle sale date. After 90 days, only regional or national staff can unwind an RDR. You cannot unwind an RDR on the month end close date. An RDR that is unwound and is marked as "Unwind Pending" cannot be unwound again by the user. Any unwind requests that fail the overnight batch processing will be marked as "Unwind Failed". Users may immediately re-submit failed requests. Unwind Processing Results After DBS completes the unwind batch processing, DBS updates the information in the Status column on the RDR History page as follows: If the host accepted the unwind request, the status is "Unwound", the vehicle is returned to vehicle inventory, and the vehicle's location status is "Dealer Inventory". If the host rejected the unwind request, the status is "Unwind Rejected", the Unwind Reason / Date field shows the rejection message, and there is no change to vehicle inventory. If there is no response received from the mainframe, the status is "Unwind Failed". Dealers may immediately re-submit any request with this status. Unwind Schedule Unwinds must be processed according to a timed schedule. 2:30 AM to 10 PM (US Central Time) : The unwind request processes during the overnight batch process. If an "Unwound" response is NOT received from the mainframe, the status of the unwind request changes to "Unwind Failed". Dealers may re-submit an unwind request for RDRs in "Unwind Failed" status. If the unwind request processes correctly, the status changes to either "Unwound" or "Unwind Rejected." If the status is "Unwound", the vehicle is returned to vehicle inventory and the request is complete. If the status is "Unwind Rejected", the dealer may immediately perform another unwind request. 10 PM to 1:30 AM (US Central Time) RDRs submitted between the hours of 10 PM and 1:30 AM have missed the batch cycle for the current day and will be processed during the next overnight batch cycle. The RDR response would be received the following morning. Unwind requests received during this time are marked as "Unwind Pending" and cannot be re-submitted for processing until the original request has been processed. If the unwind request processes correctly, the status changes to either "Unwound" or "Unwind Rejected. If the status is "Unwound", the vehicle is returned to vehicle inventory and the request is complete. If the status is "Unwind Rejected", the dealer may immediately perform another unwind request. 1:30 AM to 2:30 AM (US Central Time) The Unwind action is not available from 1:30 AM Central time to 2:30 AM Central time. Users will receive a pop-up message that the vehicle cannot be unwound at this time because the mainframe is unavailable.
History Processes RDR History RDR History Retail Delivery Reporting (RDR) History View RDR History Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing Retail Delivery Reporting (RDR) history. Related Workflows The following workflows may have similar tasks in common with the Viewing RDR History Workflow. RDR a Vehicle Workflow
View Overview Information Manage Host Report Page Overview Perform Tasks About the Manage Host Report Page Add a New Host Report on the Manage Host Report Page Edit a Host Report on the Manage Host Report Page Filter the Manage Host Report Page Perform Common DBS Tasks
To view the DBS system requirements: Scroll to the bottom of the Home page or any application page. Click the Support link. Review the System Requirements section to learn about the minimum hardware and software configuration required to run DBS .
View DBS System Requirements To view the DBS system requirements: Click the Support link. Review the System Requirements section to learn about the minimum hardware and software configuration required to run DBS .
To open the Edit Standard Operation Group page: Select a code. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Edit Code option. Note : The Edit Standard Operation Group page opens.
Open the Edit Standard Operation Group Page To open the Edit Standard Operation Group page: Select a code. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Edit Code option. Note : The Edit Standard Operation Group page opens.
Standard Operation Codes Standard Operation Code Standard Operation Codes Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating or editing standard operation groups and codes. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes workflow. Manage Dealer Operation Codes Workflow Manage Standard Operation Categories Workflow Manage Standard Operation Codes Workflow
Parts Return Summary Page Overview Purpose Use the Parts Return Summary page to quickly review, approve, or reject parts returns in one convenient location. The Parts Return Summary is available only to PDC users. Description The content area of the Parts Return Summary page displays the following sections: Summary Graph - The summary graph section displays a chart with information about the number of parts returns in each status. You can click any of the status columns in the graph to quickly filter the summary display below. Filter - The filter section allows you to apply filter criteria to reduce the amount of data displayed on the page. Summary - The summary section allows you to view the detailed parts return information and take action on those returns which have been submitted. You may view the full return detail by clicking the return number hyperlink, or use the Action icon to approve or reject a return. Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the xx page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Approve a Parts Return on the Parts Return Summary Page Approve All Returns on the Parts Return Summary Page Export Information on the Parts Return Summary Page Filter the Parts Return Summary Page Reject a Parts Return on the Parts Return Summary Page Reject all Returns on the Parts Return Summary Page Search for Information on the Parts Return Summary Page View Parts Return Details from the Parts Return Summary Page View the Parts Return Summary Graph Page Preview
To complete the Finance section of an RDR for a leased vehicle: In the Lessor Name field, type the lessor's name. In the Lease Term (months) field, type the lease term in months. Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. A will display for any missing or incorrect data. Correct all errors before submitting the RDR. Submit the RDR. Click here for more information.
Complete the Finance Section of an RDR To complete the Finance section of an RDR for a leased vehicle: In the Lessor Name field, type the lessor's name. In the Lease Term (months) field, type the lease term in months. Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. A will display for any missing or incorrect data. Correct all errors before submitting the RDR. Submit the RDR. Click here for more information.
Processes RDR RDR RDR a Vehicle Workflow Note : This workflow is for NNA users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for retail delivery reporting (RDR) or editing the sale of a vehicle. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Report or Edit the Sale of a Vehicle workflow. Vehicle Inventory Workflow Inventory Search Workflow View RDR History Workflow
To open a study to view the results: As desired, use the Filter By section to filter the list of studies to make it easier to locate the study you want to view. In the ID column, click the desired study ID link. Note : The One Study Result page opens and displays detailed information about the study and the study results. Click here for more information.
Open a Study to View Results To open a study to view the results: As desired, use the Filter By section to filter the list of studies to make it easier to locate the study you want to view. In the ID column, click the desired study ID link. Note : The One Study Result page opens and displays detailed information about the study and the study results. Click here for more information.
Dashboard Early Detection System (EDS) Hold Status Processes Study View Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow Note: The Manage Early Detection System Studies workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing Early Detection System (EDS) studies that integrate appointment and repair order data collected by the Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow. Define or Modify a Study Workflow View One Study Result Workflow View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow
Quick Entry Warranty Claim Page Overview Purpose Use the Quick Entry Warranty Claim page to edit or create repair order (RO) information in a warranty claim. The page is designed for you to be able to work on one RO after another without needing to start from the Manage Warranty Claim page. From this Quick Entry Warranty Claim page, you can also validate or submit a warranty claim, including the ability to validate claims in batches through the Batch Validation button. The batch validation process runs in the background so you can continue to edit or create RO information. This saves time and improves efficiency. Description The content area of the Quick Entry Warranty Claim page displays the following sections: Search - Allows you to search for an RO by the repair order number and line number. Quick Jump Menu - Appears on the left-hand side of the page. The Quick Jump menu allows you to jump from section to section without scrolling. The number next to the section name is the number of warnings or errors in that section. Summary - Displays warranty claim data and claims summary data, such as the RO number, VIN, odometer, and requested claim amounts. Also displays the determined and adjusted amounts if the warranty claim has been processed. Claims Detail Data - Displays sections of detailed data on the warranty claim, parts, operations, expenses, comments, customer, claim activity, and history. Alerts - Displays error or warning messages at the bottom of the claim detail data sections. Action Buttons - Buttons at the lower-right of the screen, including: RO, NSH, New Claim Line, Delete, Close, Save, Validate, Batch Validate and Submit. Tasks You can perform the following tasks from or on the Quick Entry Warranty Claim page. All of these tasks except Batch Validate have the same functionality as the Edit/Create Warranty Claim page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Batch Validate Create a Quick Entry Warranty Claim Complete the Claim Information Section Complete the Comments Section of a Claim Complete the Customer Section of a Claim Complete the Expenses Section of a Claim Complete the Operations Section of a Claim Complete the Parts Section of a Claim Complete the Summary Section of a Claim View the Claim Activity Section of a Claim View the History Section of a Claim Look Up Part Look Up Op Code Delete a Warranty Claim Print Warranty Claim Submit Warranty Claim Use the Quick Jump Menu Validate Warranty Claim View Dealer Claim Administration Limits View NSH View Repair Order Batch Validate Create a Quick Entry Warranty Claim Complete the Claim Information Section Complete the Comments Section of a Claim Complete the Customer Section of a Claim Complete the Expenses Section of a Claim Complete the Operations Section of a Claim Complete the Parts Section of a Claim Complete the Summary Section of a Claim View the Claim Activity Section of a Claim View the History Section of a Claim Look Up Part Look Up Op Code Delete a Warranty Claim Print Warranty Claim Submit Warranty Claim Use the Quick Jump Menu Validate Warranty Claim View NSH View Repair Order Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Quick Entry Warranty Claim page. Edit or Create a Warranty Claim Workflow Page Preview
View Overview Information Returns and Accrual Information Page Overview Perform Tasks Perform Common DBS Tasks Print the Returns and Accrual Information Page View Returns and Accrual Information
To filter the Serviced with Open Campaign Report page: From the Affiliate drop-down list, select whether you wish to view data from Nissan North America or Nissan Canada. Note : The Division drop-down list updates automatically based on the affiliate selected. From the Region drop-down list, select the region you wish to review. From the Area drop-down list, select the area you wish to review. From the District drop-down list, select the district you wish to review. If desired, enter information to further narrow the details displayed by dealer, VIN, model code, model line, or model year. In the Campaign ID field, type the unique campaign identification number you wish to review. To view a list of current campaigns, review the Campaign Master Table page. If desired, in the RO Close Date from and to fields, use the calendars to select a date range to limit the results displayed. When you have finished entering your search and filter criteria, click the Search icon. Note : The Vehicle Campaign List section updates to display only those records found which match the criteria you entered.
Filter the Serviced with Open Campaign Report Page To filter the Serviced with Open Campaign Report page: From the Affiliate drop-down list, select whether you wish to view data from Nissan North America or Nissan Canada. Note : The Division drop-down list updates automatically based on the affiliate selected. From the Region drop-down list, select the region you wish to review. From the Area drop-down list, select the area you wish to review. From the District drop-down list, select the district you wish to review. If desired, enter information to further narrow the details displayed by dealer, VIN, model code, model line, or model year. In the Campaign ID field, type the unique campaign identification number you wish to review. To view a list of current campaigns, review the Campaign Master Table page. If desired, in the RO Close Date from and to fields, use the calendars to select a date range to limit the results displayed. When you have finished entering your search and filter criteria, click the Search icon. Note : The Vehicle Campaign List section updates to display only those records found which match the criteria you entered.
Note : The adjustment reason entries appear in a drop-down list that is displayed to authorized users when they adjust the accrual amount of a parts return. The instructions below provide the steps required to add a new adjustment reason. To view the steps for editing or deleting an adjustment reason, click the Step by Step tab in full help. To add an accrual amount adjustment reason: At the bottom of the Manage Part Return Schedule page, click the Adjustment Reason Maintenance button. Note : The Adjustment Reason window appears. In the blank field at the top of the window, type the adjustment reason name. Click the Add icon.
Manage Parts Return Schedule Adjustment Reasons Manage Parts Return Schedule Adjustment Reasons Note : The adjustment reason entries appear in a drop-down list that is displayed to authorized users when they adjust the accrual amount of a parts return. Add an Accrual Amount Adjustment Reason To add an accrual amount adjustment reason: At the bottom of the Manage Part Return Schedule page, click the Adjustment Reason Maintenance button. Note : The Adjustment Reason window appears. In the blank field at the top of the window, type the adjustment reason name. Click the Add icon. Edit an Accrual Amount Adjustment Reason At the bottom of the Manage Part Return Schedule page, click the Adjustment Reason Maintenance button. Note : The Adjustment Reason window appears. Select the adjustment reason you want to edit. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Edit menu option. In the Adjustment Reason field, edit the adjustment reason name, as desired. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Save menu option to save the changes you made. Note : Select the Cancel menu option to cancel the changes made. Delete an accrual Amount Adjustment Reason At the bottom of the Manage Part Return Schedule page, click the Adjustment Reason Maintenance button. Note : The Adjustment Reason window appears. Select the adjustment reason you want to delete. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. Select the Delete menu option. Click the Yes button to confirm, or click the No button to close the window without confirming.
System Error Page Overview Purpose Use the System Error page to supply information necessary for error resolution to the Dealer Business System (DBS) help desk. Description The content area of the System Error page displays the following sections: Stack Trace - Use the Show Stack Trace section to provide information to the DBS Help desk about the system error. Steps to reproduce the issue - Use the text area provided to provide information to the Support taem about the activities you were performing just before you received the system error message. Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the System Error page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Report System Errors Show the Stack Trace Page Preview
This section of a study is not required, but provides the opportunity to customize or limit a study's results. Use optional study sections to clearly define study parameters, but use caution as conflicting selections will result in no data being returned. DBS maintains repair order information for the current model year and five previous model years (ten previous model years for Infiniti), beginning from the 2011 model year for both divisions. If desired, you can select one or more model years to limit the study results. To complete the Model Year section of a study: Select each model year which should be included in the study, and then use the center buttons as necessary to customize the Selected Model Year list. When you have selected all desired model years, click the Save button.
Complete the Model Year Section of a Study This section of a study is not required, but provides the opportunity to customize or limit a study's results. Use optional study sections to clearly define study parameters, but use caution as conflicting selections will result in no data being returned. DBS maintains repair order information for the current model year and five previous model years (ten previous model years for Infiniti), beginning from the 2011 model year for both divisions. If desired, you can select one or more model years to limit the study results. To complete the Model Year section of a study: Select each model year which should be included in the study, and then use the center buttons as necessary to customize the Selected Model Year list. When you have selected all desired model years, click the Save button.
Early Detection System (EDS) EDS: Study Dashboard Processes EDS: Study Dashboard Study Study Dashboard Technical Service Bulletin (TSB) Create or Modify a Study Workflow Note : The Create or Modify a Study workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for defining or modifying a study that integrates appointment and repair order data collected by the Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Define or Modify a Study Workflow. Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow View One Study Result Workflow
View Overview Information Emulate a Dealer by Hierarchy or Number Page Overview Perform Tasks Emulate a Dealership or User Perform Common DBS Tasks Emulate a Dealership or User Perform Common DBS Tasks
Note :This task applies only to internal users who have permissions for both the Nissan and Infiniti business hierarchies. Changing the brand changes the business hierarchy, and may result in a change of user permissions. To change the brand: From the Change Brand drop-down list, select the desired brand. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Continue button to change the brand.
Change the Brand Note :This task applies only to internal users who have permissions for both the Nissan and Infiniti business hierarchies. Changing the brand changes the business hierarchy, and may result in a change of user permissions. To change the brand: From the Change Brand drop-down list, select the desired brand. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Continue button to change the brand.
My Profile Page Overview Purpose Use the My Profile page to change your personal settings for language, time zone, date format, and cell phone information. If you need access to applications or pages within DBS , please contact your site's system administrator. Your Nissan or Infiniti profile provides the bulk of the information for your DBS profile. If you need to change information in your Nissan or Infiniti profile such as your name, phone number, email address, or position; please call the appropriate help desk listed below. Description The content area of the My Profile page displays the following sections: Navigation Pane - Lists all sections on the page. In this pane, you can select a section and move to it immediately. You can also collapse and expand all sections. User Information - Appears at the top of the page and contains the personal settings that you can change. Permission Information - Displays permission information as read-only fields that you can view to determine what you have access to in DBS . Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the My Profile page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Manage My Profile Manage My Profile Page Preview
Office Introduction Description The Office application within the Dealer Business System (DBS) provides access for dealer users to view the submission status of their financial statements, submit their financial statements to the corporate financial management system, and print the Financial Statements status page. Note : The items you see in the menu tabs and menu links vary based on your permissions. If you need to request changes to your permissions, please contact your dealership's System Administrator. You can find the System Administrator(s) for you dealership by viewing your profile. For more information, click here . The Office menu in DBS help shows content listed by application page. For ease of use, content is organized by application page following the DBS menu when possible. When you first begin using DBS and the DBS help system, we recommend that you review the help system menu and then view the page overview, workflow, and task information for the tasks you will be performing in DBS .
Manage Dealer Operation Codes Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing dealer operation codes. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Dealer Operation Codes Workflow. Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes Workflow Manage Standard Operation Categories Workflow Manage Standard Operation Codes Workflow
View Warranty Claim Page Overview Purpose Use the View Warranty Claim page to view decisions made on a warranty claim. On this page, you can also add a new claim line to a warranty claim and access the National Service History (NSH) page. Note : You can access the View Warranty Claim page from the View Claim option in the Action menu on the Manage Warranty Claim page. The View Claim option is available only for claims that are in Submitted, Suspended-Region, Suspended-National, Denied, Approved, or Approved-Adjusted status. This option is not available for claims that are in New, Open, Error, Warning, Suspended-Dealer, or Rejected status. You can open these claims in Edit mode. Description The content area of the View Warranty Claim page displays the following sections: Quick Jump menu - Appears on the left-hand side of the page. The Quick Jump menu allows you to jump from section to section without scrolling. Summary - Displays warranty claim data and the claims summary data such as claim status, VIN, odometer, repair order (RO) number, and so on. Also displays the total claim amount that was requested, determined, and adjusted. The requested, determined, and adjusted fields display only after a warranty claim has been processed. You cannot edit the information in these fields. Claims Detail Data - Displays sections of detailed data for the warranty claim, parts, operations, expenses, comments, customer, claim activity, and history. Tasks You can perform the following tasks from or on the View Warranty Claim page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Add a New Claim Line Print Warranty Claim View Dealer Claim Administration Limits View NSH View Repair Order Add a New Claim Line Print Warranty Claim View NSH View Repair Order Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the View Warranty Claim page. View Warranty Claim Workflow Page Preview
To view a Technical Service Bulletin (TSB): On the applicable row, move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the TSB option. Note : The TSB Detail window opens. View the list of TSBs. To view a specific TSB, click the desired link. Note : The View TSB PDF File window opens. To close the View TSB PDF File window, click the Close button. To close the TSB Detail window, click the Close button. If an option is not available, that option is not displayed.
View a Technical Service Bulletin (TSB) To view a Technical Service Bulletin (TSB): On the applicable row, move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the TSB option. Note : The TSB Detail window opens containing a list of TSBs. To view a specific TSB, click the desired link. Note : The View TSB PDF File window opens. To close the View TSB PDF File window, click the Close button. To close the TSB Detail window, click the Close button.
Dashboard Early Detection System (EDS) EDS: Service Dashboard EDS: Service Dashboard Service Dashboard Study Technical Service Bulletin (TSB) View the Service Dashboard Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing the Service Dashboard. You may view study alerts generated regarding vehicles that meet the criteria of informational or hold studies or technical service bulletins. You may also view open repair orders or National Service History.
To re-run a system event: Select the event you would like to re-run. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the ReRun option. Note : There is no warning or confirmation message for this task.
Re-Run a System Event To re-run a system event: Select the event you would like to re-run. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the ReRun option. Note : There is no warning or confirmation message for this task.
View Overview Information Office Landing Page Overview Perform Tasks Perform Common DBS Tasks View Alerts View Announcements and Other News
Financial Statement Financial Statements Financial Statements Processes Statement Status View Submit Financial Statements Workflow Note : This workflow is for NNA users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for submitting the financial statement.
To print the Returns and Accrual Information page: Click the Print button. Follow the instructions for your browser and/or printer to print the page information.
Print the Returns and Accrual Information Page To print the Returns and Accrual Information page: Click the Print button. Follow the instructions for your browser and/or printer to print the page information.
You have the option to print overnight reports from the Favorites section (only those reports that are listed in this section will be printed) or the Reports section (only those reports matching the existing search selections will be printed). Only those reports generated by the NNA Host during the applicable time period will be printed: By default, clicking the Print Overnight Reports button compiles a listing of all Host Reports generated by the NNA Host from 10:00 PM EST on the previous date to 6:00 AM on the current date) On Mondays, this option includes all reports generated from Friday at 10:00 PM EST through Monday at 6:00 AM. During holidays or vacations, this option allows you to select a date range to include all reports for a specific time period (up to the previous 15 days) To print overnight host reports: Click the Print Overnight Reports button in the Favorites section or in the Reports section. Note : The Print Overnight Host Report window appears. From the Report Date drop-down list, accept the default selection "Overnight" to print those reports generated within the last 24 hours, or select "Date Range" to specify a date range. Reports are archived for 15 days. If you selected "Date Range" from the Report Date drop-down list, in the date fields provided, use the calendars to select the start and end date for the report series. Click the Search icon to display available reports. Select the reports you wish to print. Note : If you want to print all of the displayed reports, select the Select All check box. Click the Print Selected button, and then click the Open button to view the reports in Adobe Acrobat Reader. Note : Click the Close button to close without printing any reports. The reports display in Adobe Acrobat as a single concatenated PDF file in landscape format.Click the Print icon in Adobe Acrobat or select additional printing options.
Print Overnight Host Reports You have the option to print overnight reports from the Favorites section (only those reports that are listed in this section will be printed) or the Reports section (only those reports matching the existing search selections will be printed). Only those reports generated by the Host during the applicable time period will be printed: By default, clicking the Print Overnight Reports button compiles a list of all Host Reports generated by the NNA Host from 10:00 PM EST on the previous date to 6:00 AM EST on the current date. On Mondays, the Print Overnight Reports option includes all reports generated from Friday at 10:00 PM EST through Monday at 6:00 AM EST. During holidays or vacations, the Print Overnight Reports option allows you to select a date range to include all reports for a specific time period (up to the previous 15 days). To print overnight host reports: Click the Print Overnight Reports button in the Favorites section or in the Reports section. Note : The Print Overnight Host Report window appears. From the Report Date drop-down list, accept the default selection "Overnight" to print those reports generated within the last 24 hours, or select "Date Range" to specify a date range. Reports are archived for 15 days. If you selected "Date Range" from the Report Date drop-down list, in the date fields provided, use the calendars to select the start and end date for the report series. Click the Search icon to display available reports. Select the reports you wish to print. Note : If you want to print all of the displayed reports, select the Select All check box. Click the Print Selected button, and then click Open to view the reports in Adobe Acrobat Reader. Note : Click the Close button to close without printing any reports. The reports display in Adobe Acrobat as a single concatenated PDF file in landscape format.Click the Print icon in Adobe Acrobat or select additional printing options.
You have the option to print overnight reports from the Favorites section (only those reports that are listed in this section will be printed) or the Reports section (only those reports matching the existing search selections will be printed). Only those reports generated by the NNA Host during the applicable time period will be printed: By default, clicking the Print Overnight Reports button compiles a listing of all Host Reports generated by the NNA Host from 10:00 PM EST on the previous date to 6:00 AM on the current date) On Mondays, this option includes all reports generated from Friday at 10:00 PM EST through Monday at 6:00 AM. During holidays or vacations, this option allows you to select a date range to include all reports for a specific time period (up to the previous 15 days) To print overnight host reports: Click the Print Overnight Reports button in the Favorites section or in the Reports section. Note : The Print Overnight Host Report window appears. From the Report Date drop-down list, accept the default selection "Overnight" to print those reports generated within the last 24 hours, or select "Date Range" to specify a date range. Reports are archived for 15 days. If you selected "Date Range" from the Report Date drop-down list, in the date fields provided, use the calendars to select the start and end date for the report series. Click the Search icon to display available reports. Select the reports you wish to print. Note : If you want to print all of the displayed reports, select the Select All check box. Click the Print Selected button, and then click the Open button to view the reports in Adobe Acrobat Reader. Note : Click the Close button to close without printing any reports. The reports display in Adobe Acrobat as a single concatenated PDF file in landscape format.Click the Print icon in Adobe Acrobat or select additional printing options.
Print Overnight Host Reports You have the option to print overnight reports from the Favorites section (only those reports that are listed in this section will be printed) or the Reports section (only those reports matching the existing search selections will be printed). Only those reports generated by the Host during the applicable time period will be printed: By default, clicking the Print Overnight Reports button compiles a list of all Host Reports generated by the NNA Host from 10:00 PM EST on the previous date to 6:00 AM EST on the current date. On Mondays, the Print Overnight Reports option includes all reports generated from Friday at 10:00 PM EST through Monday at 6:00 AM EST. During holidays or vacations, the Print Overnight Reports option allows you to select a date range to include all reports for a specific time period (up to the previous 15 days). To print overnight host reports: Click the Print Overnight Reports button in the Favorites section or in the Reports section. Note : The Print Overnight Host Report window appears. From the Report Date drop-down list, accept the default selection "Overnight" to print those reports generated within the last 24 hours, or select "Date Range" to specify a date range. Reports are archived for 15 days. If you selected "Date Range" from the Report Date drop-down list, in the date fields provided, use the calendars to select the start and end date for the report series. Click the Search icon to display available reports. Select the reports you wish to print. Note : If you want to print all of the displayed reports, select the Select All check box. Click the Print Selected button, and then click Open to view the reports in Adobe Acrobat Reader. Note : Click the Close button to close without printing any reports. The reports display in Adobe Acrobat as a single concatenated PDF file in landscape format.Click the Print icon in Adobe Acrobat or select additional printing options.
You have the option to print overnight reports from the Favorites section (only those reports that are listed in this section will be printed) or the Reports section (only those reports matching the existing search selections will be printed). Only those reports generated by the NNA Host during the applicable time period will be printed: By default, clicking the Print Overnight Reports button compiles a listing of all Host Reports generated by the NNA Host from 10:00 PM EST on the previous date to 6:00 AM on the current date) On Mondays, this option includes all reports generated from Friday at 10:00 PM EST through Monday at 6:00 AM. During holidays or vacations, this option allows you to select a date range to include all reports for a specific time period (up to the previous 15 days) To print overnight host reports: Click the Print Overnight Reports button in the Favorites section or in the Reports section. Note : The Print Overnight Host Report window appears. From the Report Date drop-down list, accept the default selection "Overnight" to print those reports generated within the last 24 hours, or select "Date Range" to specify a date range. Reports are archived for 15 days. If you selected "Date Range" from the Report Date drop-down list, in the date fields provided, use the calendars to select the start and end date for the report series. Click the Search icon to display available reports. Select the reports you wish to print. Note : If you want to print all of the displayed reports, select the Select All check box. Click the Print Selected button, and then click the Open button to view the reports in Adobe Acrobat Reader. Note : Click the Close button to close without printing any reports. The reports display in Adobe Acrobat as a single concatenated PDF file in landscape format.Click the Print icon in Adobe Acrobat or select additional printing options.
Print Overnight Host Reports You have the option to print overnight reports from the Favorites section (only those reports that are listed in this section will be printed) or the Reports section (only those reports matching the existing search selections will be printed). Only those reports generated by the Host during the applicable time period will be printed: By default, clicking the Print Overnight Reports button compiles a list of all Host Reports generated by the NNA Host from 10:00 PM EST on the previous date to 6:00 AM EST on the current date. On Mondays, the Print Overnight Reports option includes all reports generated from Friday at 10:00 PM EST through Monday at 6:00 AM EST. During holidays or vacations, the Print Overnight Reports option allows you to select a date range to include all reports for a specific time period (up to the previous 15 days). To print overnight host reports: Click the Print Overnight Reports button in the Favorites section or in the Reports section. Note : The Print Overnight Host Report window appears. From the Report Date drop-down list, accept the default selection "Overnight" to print those reports generated within the last 24 hours, or select "Date Range" to specify a date range. Reports are archived for 15 days. If you selected "Date Range" from the Report Date drop-down list, in the date fields provided, use the calendars to select the start and end date for the report series. Click the Search icon to display available reports. Select the reports you wish to print. Note : If you want to print all of the displayed reports, select the Select All check box. Click the Print Selected button, and then click Open to view the reports in Adobe Acrobat Reader. Note : Click the Close button to close without printing any reports. The reports display in Adobe Acrobat as a single concatenated PDF file in landscape format.Click the Print icon in Adobe Acrobat or select additional printing options.
You have the option to print overnight reports from the Favorites section (only those reports that are listed in this section will be printed) or the Reports section (only those reports matching the existing search selections will be printed). Only those reports generated by the NNA Host during the applicable time period will be printed: By default, clicking the Print Overnight Reports button compiles a listing of all Host Reports generated by the NNA Host from 10:00 PM EST on the previous date to 6:00 AM on the current date) On Mondays, this option includes all reports generated from Friday at 10:00 PM EST through Monday at 6:00 AM. During holidays or vacations, this option allows you to select a date range to include all reports for a specific time period (up to the previous 15 days) To print overnight host reports: Click the Print Overnight Reports button in the Favorites section or in the Reports section. Note : The Print Overnight Host Report window appears. From the Report Date drop-down list, accept the default selection "Overnight" to print those reports generated within the last 24 hours, or select "Date Range" to specify a date range. Reports are archived for 15 days. If you selected "Date Range" from the Report Date drop-down list, in the date fields provided, use the calendars to select the start and end date for the report series. Click the Search icon to display available reports. Select the reports you wish to print. Note : If you want to print all of the displayed reports, select the Select All check box. Click the Print Selected button, and then click the Open button to view the reports in Adobe Acrobat Reader. Note : Click the Close button to close without printing any reports. The reports display in Adobe Acrobat as a single concatenated PDF file in landscape format.Click the Print icon in Adobe Acrobat or select additional printing options.
Print Overnight Host Reports You have the option to print overnight reports from the Favorites section (only those reports that are listed in this section will be printed) or the Reports section (only those reports matching the existing search selections will be printed). Only those reports generated by the Host during the applicable time period will be printed: By default, clicking the Print Overnight Reports button compiles a list of all Host Reports generated by the NNA Host from 10:00 PM EST on the previous date to 6:00 AM EST on the current date. On Mondays, the Print Overnight Reports option includes all reports generated from Friday at 10:00 PM EST through Monday at 6:00 AM EST. During holidays or vacations, the Print Overnight Reports option allows you to select a date range to include all reports for a specific time period (up to the previous 15 days). To print overnight host reports: Click the Print Overnight Reports button in the Favorites section or in the Reports section. Note : The Print Overnight Host Report window appears. From the Report Date drop-down list, accept the default selection "Overnight" to print those reports generated within the last 24 hours, or select "Date Range" to specify a date range. Reports are archived for 15 days. If you selected "Date Range" from the Report Date drop-down list, in the date fields provided, use the calendars to select the start and end date for the report series. Click the Search icon to display available reports. Select the reports you wish to print. Note : If you want to print all of the displayed reports, select the Select All check box. Click the Print Selected button, and then click Open to view the reports in Adobe Acrobat Reader. Note : Click the Close button to close without printing any reports. The reports display in Adobe Acrobat as a single concatenated PDF file in landscape format.Click the Print icon in Adobe Acrobat or select additional printing options.
You have the option to print overnight reports from the Favorites section (only those reports that are listed in this section will be printed) or the Reports section (only those reports matching the existing search selections will be printed). Only those reports generated by the NNA Host during the applicable time period will be printed: By default, clicking the Print Overnight Reports button compiles a listing of all Host Reports generated by the NNA Host from 10:00 PM EST on the previous date to 6:00 AM on the current date) On Mondays, this option includes all reports generated from Friday at 10:00 PM EST through Monday at 6:00 AM. During holidays or vacations, this option allows you to select a date range to include all reports for a specific time period (up to the previous 15 days) To print overnight host reports: Click the Print Overnight Reports button in the Favorites section or in the Reports section. Note : The Print Overnight Host Report window appears. From the Report Date drop-down list, accept the default selection "Overnight" to print those reports generated within the last 24 hours, or select "Date Range" to specify a date range. Reports are archived for 15 days. If you selected "Date Range" from the Report Date drop-down list, in the date fields provided, use the calendars to select the start and end date for the report series. Click the Search icon to display available reports. Select the reports you wish to print. Note : If you want to print all of the displayed reports, select the Select All check box. Click the Print Selected button, and then click the Open button to view the reports in Adobe Acrobat Reader. Note : Click the Close button to close without printing any reports. The reports display in Adobe Acrobat as a single concatenated PDF file in landscape format.Click the Print icon in Adobe Acrobat or select additional printing options.
Print Overnight Host Reports You have the option to print overnight reports from the Favorites section (only those reports that are listed in this section will be printed) or the Reports section (only those reports matching the existing search selections will be printed). Only those reports generated by the Host during the applicable time period will be printed: By default, clicking the Print Overnight Reports button compiles a list of all Host Reports generated by the NNA Host from 10:00 PM EST on the previous date to 6:00 AM EST on the current date. On Mondays, the Print Overnight Reports option includes all reports generated from Friday at 10:00 PM EST through Monday at 6:00 AM EST. During holidays or vacations, the Print Overnight Reports option allows you to select a date range to include all reports for a specific time period (up to the previous 15 days). To print overnight host reports: Click the Print Overnight Reports button in the Favorites section or in the Reports section. Note : The Print Overnight Host Report window appears. From the Report Date drop-down list, accept the default selection "Overnight" to print those reports generated within the last 24 hours, or select "Date Range" to specify a date range. Reports are archived for 15 days. If you selected "Date Range" from the Report Date drop-down list, in the date fields provided, use the calendars to select the start and end date for the report series. Click the Search icon to display available reports. Select the reports you wish to print. Note : If you want to print all of the displayed reports, select the Select All check box. Click the Print Selected button, and then click Open to view the reports in Adobe Acrobat Reader. Note : Click the Close button to close without printing any reports. The reports display in Adobe Acrobat as a single concatenated PDF file in landscape format.Click the Print icon in Adobe Acrobat or select additional printing options.
To export warranty claims information: Select the desired radio button to list the corresponding warranty claims. Select the date range and/or filter to refine the list of claims further. Click the Export button. Select Excel . From the File Download window, save the file to your local drive. You can filter, sort, and print the data if you export the warranty claims summary information to Microsoft ® Excel ® .
Export Warranty Claims List From Manage Warranty Claims Page To export the warranty claims list: Select the desired radio button to list the corresponding warranty claims. Select the date range and/or filter to refine the list of claims further. Click the Export button. Select Excel . Note : DBS displays the File Download window. Click the Save button to save the file to your local drive. You can filter, sort, and print the data if you export the warranty claims summary information to Microsoft ® Excel ® .
Manage Warranty Claims Processes Manage Warranty Claims Manage Warranty Claims Manage Warranty Claims Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing warranty claims. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create or Edit Warranty Claims Workflow or View Warranty Claims Workflow. Edit or Create Warranty Claims Workflow View Warranty Claims Workflow
To re-run the translation process for standard operation codes, from the Service tab, select Standard Operation Codes : Click the Re-Run button. Note: The Re-Run Confirmation window opens. Click the Re-Run button to re-run the translation, or click the Cancel button to close without re-running the translation. Note : For Repair Orders (ROs) up to 180 days old, the system re-translates all RO lines that are flagged for re-run or that have an unknown operation code. The system updates the re-translated RO lines in the National Service History (NSH) RO table with a standard operation code and the re-translation date. Note : The system automatically flags lines for re-run when codes are modified or deleted. You can flag an RO line for re-run on the Create or Edit Standard Operation Code page. Use Report Writer to create a report of the NSH RO Table to review the re-translation results.
Re-Run Translation Process - Standard Operation Code To re-run the translation process for standard operation codes: Click the Re-Run button. Note: The Re-Run Confirmation window opens. Click the Re-Run button to re-run the translation, or click the Cancel button to close without re-running the translation. Note : For Repair Orders (ROs) up to 180 days old, the system re-translates all RO lines that are flagged for re-run or that have an unknown operation code. The system updates the re-translated RO lines in the National Service History (NSH) RO table with a standard operation code and the re-translation date. Note : The system automatically flags lines for re-run when codes are modified or deleted. You can flag an RO line for re-run on the Create or Edit Standard Operation Code page. Use Report Writer to create a report of the NSH RO Table to review the re-translation results.
ReRun Standard Operation Code Translation Manage Standard Operation Codes Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing standard operation codes. Related Workflows ( Note to developer : List the related workflows and link to them.) The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Standard Operation Codes Workflow. Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes Workflow Manage Dealer Operation Codes Workflow Manage Standard Operation Categories Workflow
To select a user to view the user's report list: From the list of users, select a user. Click the Submit button. Note : The selected user's list of reports appears.
Select a User to View the User's Reports List To select a user to view the user's report list: From the list of users, select a user. Click the Submit button. Note : Click the Cancel button to close without selecting a user. Note : The selected user's list of reports appears.
To select a user to view the user's report list: From the list of users, select a user. Click the Submit button. Note : The selected user's list of reports appears.
Select a User to View the User's Reports List To select a user to view the user's report list: From the list of users, select a user. Click the Submit button. Note : Click the Cancel button to close without selecting a user. Note : The selected user's list of reports appears.
To select a user to view the user's report list: From the list of users, select a user. Click the Submit button. Note : The selected user's list of reports appears.
Select a User to View the User's Reports List To select a user to view the user's report list: From the list of users, select a user. Click the Submit button. Note : Click the Cancel button to close without selecting a user. Note : The selected user's list of reports appears.
To select a user to view the user's report list: From the list of users, select a user. Click the Submit button. Note : The selected user's list of reports appears.
Select a User to View the User's Reports List To select a user to view the user's report list: From the list of users, select a user. Click the Submit button. Note : Click the Cancel button to close without selecting a user. Note : The selected user's list of reports appears.
To select a user to view the user's report list: From the list of users, select a user. Click the Submit button. Note : The selected user's list of reports appears.
Select a User to View the User's Reports List To select a user to view the user's report list: From the list of users, select a user. Click the Submit button. Note : Click the Cancel button to close without selecting a user. Note : The selected user's list of reports appears.
To view the position summary: Review the list of positions. To sort the displayed information, click the arrow beside a column title.
About the Position Summary Note : This task applies to internal users only. To view the position summary: Review the list of positions. To sort the displayed information, click the arrow beside a column title.
Copy All, Transfer All, or Delete All Report Definitions Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for copying, transferring, or deleting all of a user's report definitions in Report Writer. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Copy All, Transfer All, or Delete All Report Definitions Workflow. Change User in Report Writer Workflow Copy, Transfer, Delete, or Make Report Definition Public Workflow Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Workflow Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow View a Host Report Workflow
Copy All, Transfer All, or Delete All Report Definitions Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for copying, transferring, or deleting all of a user's report definitions in Report Writer. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Copy All, Transfer All, or Delete All Report Definitions Workflow. Change User in Report Writer Workflow Copy, Transfer, Delete, or Make Report Definition Public Workflow Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Workflow Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow View a Host Report Workflow
Copy All, Transfer All, or Delete All Report Definitions Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for copying, transferring, or deleting all of a user's report definitions in Report Writer. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Copy All, Transfer All, or Delete All Report Definitions Workflow. Change User in Report Writer Workflow Copy, Transfer, Delete, or Make Report Definition Public Workflow Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Workflow Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow View a Host Report Workflow
Copy All, Transfer All, or Delete All Report Definitions Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for copying, transferring, or deleting all of a user's report definitions in Report Writer. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Copy All, Transfer All, or Delete All Report Definitions Workflow. Change User in Report Writer Workflow Copy, Transfer, Delete, or Make Report Definition Public Workflow Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Workflow Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow View a Host Report Workflow
Copy All, Transfer All, or Delete All Report Definitions Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for copying, transferring, or deleting all of a user's report definitions in Report Writer. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Copy All, Transfer All, or Delete All Report Definitions Workflow. Change User in Report Writer Workflow Copy, Transfer, Delete, or Make Report Definition Public Workflow Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Workflow Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow View a Host Report Workflow
To open the Custom Search Group page to add, delete, or edit a custom group: Click the Compare Group link. Note : The application displays the Custom Search Group page.
Open the Custom Search Group Page To open the Custom Search Group page to add, delete, or modify a custom search group: Click the Compare Group link. Note : The application displays the Custom Search Group page.
Custom Search Group Manage Custom Search Group Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing custom search groups. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Custom Search Group (Parts Metrics) Workflow. View Parts Metrics Workflow
Report Writer Generate Page Overview (Dealer User) Purpose Use the Report Writer Generate page to generate reports. Description The content area of the Report Writer Generate page displays the following sections: Dealers - Allows you to select a dealer (Dealer users only) Search by - Allows you to search for records that match your criteria (Dealer users only) Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Report Writer Generate page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Generate a Report (Dealer Users) Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Generate Report page. Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow Page Preview
Report Writer Generate Page Overview (Dealer User) Purpose Use the Report Writer Generate page to generate reports. Description The content area of the Report Writer Generate page displays the following sections: Dealers - Allows you to select a dealer (Dealer users only) Search by - Allows you to search for records that match your criteria (Dealer users only) Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Report Writer Generate page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Generate a Report (Dealer Users) Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Generate Report page. Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow Page Preview
Report Writer Generate Page Overview (Dealer User) Purpose Use the Report Writer Generate page to generate reports. Description The content area of the Report Writer Generate page displays the following sections: Dealers - Allows you to select a dealer (Dealer users only) Search by - Allows you to search for records that match your criteria (Dealer users only) Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Report Writer Generate page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Generate a Report (Dealer Users) Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Generate Report page. Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow Page Preview
Report Writer Generate Page Overview (Dealer User) Purpose Use the Report Writer Generate page to generate reports. Description The content area of the Report Writer Generate page displays the following sections: Dealers - Allows you to select a dealer (Dealer users only) Search by - Allows you to search for records that match your criteria (Dealer users only) Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Report Writer Generate page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Generate a Report (Dealer Users) Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Generate Report page. Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow Page Preview
Report Writer Generate Page Overview (Dealer User) Purpose Use the Report Writer Generate page to generate reports. Description The content area of the Report Writer Generate page displays the following sections: Dealers - Allows you to select a dealer (Dealer users only) Search by - Allows you to search for records that match your criteria (Dealer users only) Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Report Writer Generate page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Generate a Report (Dealer Users) Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Generate Report page. Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow Page Preview
View Overview Information Sold with Open Campaign Page Overview Perform Tasks Export Data on the Sold with Open Campaign Report Page Filter the Sold with Open Campaign Report Page Perform Common DBS Tasks
To add a link for the current page to your My Links list: Move your cursor over the My Links link. Click the Add This Page link. Click the Yes button to add the link to your My Links list, or click the No button to close the message without adding the link. Links you add from "Create", "Edit" or "View" pages will point to the relevant summary page for the task. For example, if you try to add a link to the Modify User page, the resulting link actually points to the User Summary page.
Add a Link to My Links To add a link for the current page to your My Links list: Move your cursor over the My Links link. Click the Add This Page link. Click the Yes button to add the link to your My Links list, or click the No button to close the message without adding the link.
To view privacy information: Scroll to the bottom of the Home page or any DCS application page. Click the Privacy Policy link. Review the privacy information. Note : Additional Nissan privacy information can be found here .
View Privacy Information To view privacy information: Click the Privacy Policy link. Review the information contained in the information section. Note : Additional Nissan privacy information can be found here .
Batch RDR Page Overview Purpose The Batch RDR page allows dealers and corporate users to submit one, multiple, or all RDRs at one time. Description The content area of the Batch RDR page displays the following sections: RDR Summary List - Displays a list of all open RDRs which have not yet been submitted. Submit button - Allows you to submit the selected RDRs for processing. Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Batch RDR page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Submit an RDR Batch Page Preview
Custom Search Group Page Overview Note : The Custom Search Group Page applies to internal users only. Purpose Use the Custom Search Group page to add, edit, or delete a custom group when viewing parts metrics. You can also view, add, or remove dealers in a custom group. Description The content area of the Custom Search Group page displays the following sections: Text Entry Fields - Allow you to type a custom group name or a dealer code + Button - Allows you to add a custom group name Existing Search Groups - Allows you to view, edit, or delete existing search groups, if applicable, through the use of an action menu Add Button - Allows you to add a dealer based on a dealer code you specify Available and Selected Dealer Lists - Show available and selected dealers >> and << Buttons - Allow you to move dealers from one list to another Dealer Name or Dealer Code Links - Allow you to view the list of dealers by name only or by dealer code and name Available Dealer Name Index - Allows you to view the list of dealers based on the first letter of the dealer's name You can perform the following tasks on the Custom Search Group page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Add a Custom Search Group Delete a Custom Search Group Edit a Custom Search Group View a Custom Search Group Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Custom Search Group page. Manage Custom Search Group Workflow Page Preview
Custom Search Group Manage Custom Search Group Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing custom search groups. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Custom Search Group (Parts Metrics) Workflow. View Parts Metrics Workflow
Privacy Policy Page Overview Purpose Use the Privacy Policy page to learn how Nissan values and protects the private information contained within the Dealer Business System (DBS) . Description The content area of the Privacy Policy page displays the following sections: Privacy Information - The Privacy Policy Information section displays information about the commitment Nissan has made to protect the private information contained within DBS . Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Privacy Policy page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. View Privacy Information View Privacy Information Page Preview
To edit a dealer operation code: Select the row for the code you want to change. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Edit Code option. From the Dealer Op Code Type drop-down menu, select the desired option. From the Standard Op Code/Description drop-down menu, select the desired option. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon for the row you just modified. From the Action menu, select the Save Code option. Note : DBS places a "Y" in the Re-Run Flag column indicating you can re-run the translation process to update DBS with the information you changed.
Edit a Dealer Operation Code To edit a dealer operation code: Select the row for the code you want to edit. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Edit Code option. Note : DBS places the Dealer Op Code Type and Standard Op Code/Description columns for the row into edit mode. From the Dealer Op Code Type drop-down menu, select the desired option. From the Standard Op Code/Description drop-down menu, select the desired option. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon for the row you just modified. From the Action menu, select the Save Code option. Note : DBS places a "Y" in the Re-Run Flag column indicating you can re-run the translation process to update DBS with the information you changed.
Dealer Operation Code Dealer Operation Codes ReRun Dealer Operation Codes Translation Manage Dealer Operation Codes Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing dealer operation codes. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Dealer Operation Codes Workflow. Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes Workflow Manage Standard Operation Categories Workflow Manage Standard Operation Codes Workflow
View Overview Information Express Entry Warranty Claim Page Overview Add a New Claim Line on an Express Entry Warranty Claim Create an Express Entry Warranty Claim Page Complete the Summary Section of an Express Entry Warranty Claim Complete the Claim Information Section of an Express Entry Warranty Claim Complete the Parts Section of an Express Entry Warranty Claim Complete the Operations Section of an Express Entry Warranty Claim Complete the Expenses Section of an Express Entry Warranty Claim Complete the Comments Section of an Express Entry Warranty Claim Complete the Customer Section of an Express Entry Warranty Claim Delete a Warranty Claim Perform Common DBS Tasks Use the Quick Jump Menu View a Repair Order from the Express Entry Warranty Claim Page View National Service History from the Express Entry Warranty Claim Page View the Claim Activity Section of a Claim View the Claim History Section of a Claim Add a New Claim Line on an Express Entry Warranty Claim Create an Express Entry Warranty Claim Page Complete the Summary Section of an Express Entry Warranty Claim Complete the Claim Information Section of an Express Entry Warranty Claim Complete the Parts Section of an Express Entry Warranty Claim Complete the Operations Section of an Express Entry Warranty Claim Complete the Expenses Section of an Express Entry Warranty Claim Complete the Comments Section of an Express Entry Warranty Claim Complete the Customer Section of an Express Entry Warranty Claim Delete a Warranty Claim Perform Common DBS Tasks Use the Quick Jump Menu View a Repair Order from the Express Entry Warranty Claim Page View National Service History from the Express Entry Warranty Claim Page View the Claim Activity Section of a Claim View the Claim History Section of a Claim
To look up the dealer administrator: Move your cursor over the Administration tab. Click the User Summary menu option or the desired icon. Note : If you click the menu option the content opens in a new tab. Note : The User Summary appears, which is a list of all users at this dealership. Scroll right to view the right-hand side of the summary page. Scroll through the list. The Dealer Administrator for the dealership will have a check in the Sys Admin column. Note : There may be more than one Dealer Admin.
Look Up the Dealer Administrator To look up the dealer administrator: Move your cursor over the Administration tab. Click the User Summary menu option or the desired icon. Note : If you click the menu option the content opens in a new tab. Note : The User Summary appears, which contains a list of users for the dealer. Scroll through the list until you find a check in the Sys. Admin column. Note : The dealer administrator is designated by a check.
This section of a study is not required, but provides the opportunity to customize or limit a study's results. Use optional study sections to clearly define study parameters, but use caution as conflicting selections will result in no data being returned. DBS maintains production plant information for each vehicle produced, beginning from the 2011 model year for both divisions. Production plant information is maintained for the current model year and five previous model years for Nissan, and the current model year and ten previous model years for Infiniti. If desired, you can select one or more production plants to limit the study results to vehicles manufactured at the selected locations. To complete the Production Plant section of a study: Select each production plant which should be included in the study, and then use the center buttons as necessary to customize the Selected Production Plants list. When you have selected all desired production plants, click the Save button.
Complete the Production Plant Section of a Study This section of a study is not required, but provides the opportunity to customize or limit a study's results. Use optional study sections to clearly define study parameters, but use caution as conflicting selections will result in no data being returned. DBS maintains production plant information for each vehicle produced, beginning from the 2011 model year for both divisions. Production plant information is maintained for the current model year and five previous model years for Nissan, and the current model year and ten previous model years for Infiniti. If desired, you can select one or more production plants to limit the study results to vehicles manufactured at the selected locations. To complete the Production Plant section of a study: Select each production plant which should be included in the study, and then use the center buttons as necessary to customize the Selected Production Plants list. When you have selected all desired production plants, click the Save button.
Early Detection System (EDS) EDS: Study Dashboard Processes EDS: Study Dashboard Study Study Dashboard Technical Service Bulletin (TSB) Create or Modify a Study Workflow Note : The Create or Modify a Study workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for defining or modifying a study that integrates appointment and repair order data collected by the Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Define or Modify a Study Workflow. Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow View One Study Result Workflow
View Parts Order Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing a submitted parts order. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the View Parts Order Workflow. Create Parts Order Workflow Edit Parts Order Workflow Manage Parts Order Workflow Inquire on the Availability of Parts at the Parts Distribution Centers Workflow
To search for Campaign Master Table information: To search for information for a specific campaign, in the Campaign ID field, enter the campaign's unique ID. To search for information based on text within the campaign description field, in the Description field, type the desired search text. To search for information based on the location where repairs will be performed, from the Repair By drop-down list, select the desired location. To search for information based on when the campaign information was entered into DBS , in the Internal Effective Date From and To fields, enter the campaign's internal information. To search for information based on the campaign's effective date, in the CA Effective Date From and To fields, enter the campaign dates. From the Stop Sale drop-down list, select whether or not sales of vehicles impacted by this campaign should be halted until repairs are performed. From the Parts Restriction drop-down list, select whether or not the parts required to complete the campaign are on the list of restricted parts. Note : The Parts Restriction flag is set to "Yes" for a campaign when the parts required to repair the vehicle are required for two different campaigns. Click the Search icon to display the results which match the criteria you entered. After you have completed your search, use the summary display features to sort or navigate your displayed results.
Search for Campaign Master Table Information To search for Campaign Master Table information: To search for information for a specific campaign, in the Campaign ID field, enter the campaign's unique ID. To search for information based on text within the campaign description field, in the Description field, type the desired search text. To search for information based on the location where repairs will be performed, from the Repair By drop-down list, select the desired location. To search for information based on when the campaign information was entered into DBS , in the Internal Effective Date From and To fields, enter the campaign's internal information. To search for information based on the campaign's effective date, in the CA Effective Date From and To fields, enter the campaign dates. From the Stop Sale drop-down list, select whether or not sales of vehicles impacted by this campaign should be halted until repairs are performed. From the Parts Restriction drop-down list, select whether or not the parts required to complete the campaign are on the list of restricted parts. Note : The Parts Restriction flag is set to "Yes" for a campaign when the parts required to repair the vehicle are required for two different campaigns. Click the Search icon to display the results which match the criteria you entered. After you have completed your search, use the summary display features to sort or navigate your displayed results.
Dealer Summary Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing dealer information or permissions. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the View Dealer Information or Permissions Workflow. Edit Dealer Information Workflow Edit Dealer Permissions Workflow (NNA Only)
To open the Generate page: Select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Schedule option. Note : The Generating page appears.
Open the Generate Page To open the Generate page: In the report summary section, select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Schedule option. Note : The Generating page appears.
To open the Generate page: Select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Schedule option. Note : The Generating page appears.
Open the Generate Page To open the Generate page: In the report summary section, select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Schedule option. Note : The Generating page appears.
To open the Generate page: Select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Schedule option. Note : The Generating page appears.
Open the Generate Page To open the Generate page: In the report summary section, select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Schedule option. Note : The Generating page appears.
To open the Generate page: Select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Schedule option. Note : The Generating page appears.
Open the Generate Page To open the Generate page: In the report summary section, select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Schedule option. Note : The Generating page appears.
To open the Generate page: Select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Schedule option. Note : The Generating page appears.
Open the Generate Page To open the Generate page: In the report summary section, select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Schedule option. Note : The Generating page appears.
To view vehicle inventory summary and detail information: If desired, use filters to narrow your search. Note : Click here for information on how to filter the Vehicle Inventory page. View the list of vehicles. To sort the displayed information, click the arrow beside a column title. If multiple pages exist, click a page number or click the forward or backward arrow to navigate from page to page. To view a specific page, in the Go to Page field, type a page number, and then click the Go button. If a vehicle has a note, a red "*" appears beside the stock number. Move your cursor over the exterior color code or the interior color code to view a description of the color. The default sort order for this page is: Model Line (ascending), Model Year (ascending), and then Days in Stock (descending).
About the Vehicle Inventory Summary To view vehicle inventory summary and detail: If desired, filter the list of vehicles, or view the information in the Vehicle Inventory list. Note : Click here for instructions on how to filter the Vehicle Inventory page. To sort the displayed information, click the arrow beside a column title. If multiple pages exist, click a page number or click the forward or backward arrow to navigate from page to page. To view a specific page, in the Go to Page field, type a page number, and then click the Go button. Move your cursor over the exterior color code or the interior color code to view a description of the color. The default sort order for this page is: Model Line (ascending), Model Year (ascending), and then Days in Stock (descending). If a vehicle has a note, a red "*" appears beside the stock number.
Vehicle Inventory Management Inventory Managment Processes Inventory Managment Vehicle Inventory Management Vehicle Inventory Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing vehicle inventory data at the dealerships. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Vehicle Inventory workflow. Report the Sale of a Vehicle (RDR) Workflow Search Vehicle Inventory Workflow Search Vehicle Inventory Workflow
Create or Edit Announcement Page Overview Purpose Use the Create or Edit Announcement page to create or edit regional and national announcements. Description The content area of the Create or Edit Announcement page displays the following sections: Announcement Details - Allows you to type and format the announcement text and determine the announcement priority and dates Settings - Allows you to determine the page where the announcement will display, level of distribution, and display language for the announcement Image Upload - Allows you to upload two images to display with the announcement if it will appear in the center announcement display area Recipient - Allows you to select the internal and dealer users who will be able to view the announcement Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Create or Edit Announcement page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Create or Edit an Announcement Select Recipients Create or Edit an Announcement Select Recipients Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Create or Edit Announcement page. Create or Edit an Announcement Workflow Page Preview
To export information from the Sold with Open Campaign Report Page: Use the search and filter fields to customize the Vehicle Campaign List. Note : At a minimum, you must select an affiliate, region, area, district, and campaign. Click the Export button. Follow your browser-specific instructions to open or save the Microsoft ® Excel ® file.
Export Information from the Sold with Open Campaign Report Page To export information from the Sold with Open Campaign Report Page: Use the search and filter fields to customize the Vehicle Campaign List. Note : At a minimum, you must select an affiliate, region, area, district, and campaign. Click the Export button. Follow your browser-specific instructions to open or save the Microsoft ® Excel ® file.
To open the Copy User Permissions page: Select the user whose permissions you want to copy. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Copy Permissions option. Note : The Copy User Permissions page appears.
Access the Copy User Permissions Page To open the Copy User Permissions page: Select the user whose permissions you want to copy. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Copy Permissions option. Note : The Copy User Permissions page appears.
Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow Note: The Manage Early Detection System Studies workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing Early Detection System (EDS) studies that integrate appointment and repair order data collected by the Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow. Define or Modify a Study Workflow View One Study Result Workflow View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow
To create, modify, or replicate a report definition: Complete the Report Definition section of the Report page. Click here for more information. Note : You must complete the Report Definition section when creating a report. This is the only required section. If needed, complete each of the following optional sections on the Report page. Complete the Selection Criteria section. Click here for more information. Complete the Sort Criteria section. Click here for more information. Complete the Total/Sum Criteria section. Click here for more information. Complete the Printing Criteria section. Click here for more information. Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Click the Save and Generate button to save your changes and view the report. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm, or click the No button to close the window without confirming. Note : The report is added to the user's reports list. If you specify a grouping, the report will be broken into sections based on the first sort field selected. If you specify a grouping and specify a total, a total line appears at the end of each grouping section. A total line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you do not specify a grouping but specify a total, a total line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you specify a grouping and specify a count, a count line appears at the end of each grouping section. A count line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you do not specify a grouping but specify a count, a count line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents.
Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition To create, modify, or replicate a report definition:
To create, modify, or replicate a report definition: Complete the Report Definition section of the Report page. Click here for more information. Note : You must complete the Report Definition section when creating a report. This is the only required section. If needed, complete each of the following optional sections on the Report page. Complete the Selection Criteria section. Click here for more information. Complete the Sort Criteria section. Click here for more information. Complete the Total/Sum Criteria section. Click here for more information. Complete the Printing Criteria section. Click here for more information. Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Click the Save and Generate button to save your changes and view the report. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm, or click the No button to close the window without confirming. Note : The report is added to the user's reports list. If you specify a grouping, the report will be broken into sections based on the first sort field selected. If you specify a grouping and specify a total, a total line appears at the end of each grouping section. A total line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you do not specify a grouping but specify a total, a total line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you specify a grouping and specify a count, a count line appears at the end of each grouping section. A count line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you do not specify a grouping but specify a count, a count line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents.
Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition To create, modify, or replicate a report definition:
To create, modify, or replicate a report definition: Complete the Report Definition section of the Report page. Click here for more information. Note : You must complete the Report Definition section when creating a report. This is the only required section. If needed, complete each of the following optional sections on the Report page. Complete the Selection Criteria section. Click here for more information. Complete the Sort Criteria section. Click here for more information. Complete the Total/Sum Criteria section. Click here for more information. Complete the Printing Criteria section. Click here for more information. Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Click the Save and Generate button to save your changes and view the report. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm, or click the No button to close the window without confirming. Note : The report is added to the user's reports list. If you specify a grouping, the report will be broken into sections based on the first sort field selected. If you specify a grouping and specify a total, a total line appears at the end of each grouping section. A total line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you do not specify a grouping but specify a total, a total line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you specify a grouping and specify a count, a count line appears at the end of each grouping section. A count line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you do not specify a grouping but specify a count, a count line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents.
Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition To create, modify, or replicate a report definition:
To create, modify, or replicate a report definition: Complete the Report Definition section of the Report page. Click here for more information. Note : You must complete the Report Definition section when creating a report. This is the only required section. If needed, complete each of the following optional sections on the Report page. Complete the Selection Criteria section. Click here for more information. Complete the Sort Criteria section. Click here for more information. Complete the Total/Sum Criteria section. Click here for more information. Complete the Printing Criteria section. Click here for more information. Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Click the Save and Generate button to save your changes and view the report. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm, or click the No button to close the window without confirming. Note : The report is added to the user's reports list. If you specify a grouping, the report will be broken into sections based on the first sort field selected. If you specify a grouping and specify a total, a total line appears at the end of each grouping section. A total line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you do not specify a grouping but specify a total, a total line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you specify a grouping and specify a count, a count line appears at the end of each grouping section. A count line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you do not specify a grouping but specify a count, a count line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents.
Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition To create, modify, or replicate a report definition:
To create, modify, or replicate a report definition: Complete the Report Definition section of the Report page. Click here for more information. Note : You must complete the Report Definition section when creating a report. This is the only required section. If needed, complete each of the following optional sections on the Report page. Complete the Selection Criteria section. Click here for more information. Complete the Sort Criteria section. Click here for more information. Complete the Total/Sum Criteria section. Click here for more information. Complete the Printing Criteria section. Click here for more information. Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Click the Save and Generate button to save your changes and view the report. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm, or click the No button to close the window without confirming. Note : The report is added to the user's reports list. If you specify a grouping, the report will be broken into sections based on the first sort field selected. If you specify a grouping and specify a total, a total line appears at the end of each grouping section. A total line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you do not specify a grouping but specify a total, a total line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you specify a grouping and specify a count, a count line appears at the end of each grouping section. A count line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you do not specify a grouping but specify a count, a count line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents.
Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition To create, modify, or replicate a report definition:
To view the parts order: Review the list of parts in the order. To sort the displayed information, click a column title. To close the page, click the Close button.
View Parts Order To view the the parts order: Review the list of parts in the order. To sort the displayed information, click a column title. To close the page, click the Close button.
View RFC Detail Page Overview Purpose Use the View RFC Detail page to view RFC detail including carrier information and RFC part details. You can view RFC Detail from the View RFC Detail page. You must first search for and locate the desired RFC claim that you want to view. Use the Action menu to open the View RFC Detail page. Description The content area of the View RFC Detail page displays the following sections: View RFC Header - Contains general information for the selected RFC claim, such as RFC number, parts invoice number, and carrier information View RFC Detail - Contains line item detail for each part on the selected RFC claim, including part number; requested, authorized, and accepted quantities, line amount, reason code, and reject code, if applicable Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the View RFC Detail page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Access Reports View Detail from View RFC Detail Page Access Reports View Detail from View RFC Detail Page Workflow One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the View RFC Detail page. View Request for Credit Workflow Page Preview
To view the transactions status : Search for transactions. View the transactions that meet the selected criteria. Note : You may need to scroll to the right for more information. To sort the displayed information, click a column title. If you wish to see detailed information on a transaction, click the Detail link. Note : You may need to scroll to the right to see the Detail column. Note : DCS displays the editing page for the selected transaction where you can change the transaction related information.
View Transaction Status To view the transaction status : If desired, enter the criteria for searching the transaction logs. Click the Search button. In the Transaction Status area, view the transactions that meet your search criteria. Note : You may need to scroll to the right for more information. To sort the displayed information, click a column title. If more than one page of transactions appears, click a page number or click the Previous or Next arrows to view additional transactions. If more than one page of transactions appears, in the Go to Page field, type a page number and then click the Go button to view a specific page. If you wish to see detailed information about a transaction, click the Detail link. Note : You may need to scroll to the right to see the Detail column. Be sure to use the search options to limit the summary display.
Environment Processes Search System Transaction Search for Transactions Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for searching and viewing transactions.
To edit the name of a link in My Links: Move your cursor over the My Links link. Click the Edit icon for the link you want to edit. Type a nickname for the link in the field provided. Press the Enter key on your keyboard to accept the change, or click the Cancel icon to close the window without editing the link.
Edit a Link in My Links To edit the name of a link in My Links: Move your cursor over the My Links link. Click the Edit icon for the link you want to edit. Type a nickname for the link in the field provided. Press the Enter key on your keyboard to accept the change, or click the Cancel icon to close the window without editing the link.
To select trade dealer recipients for an alert, announcement, notification, or calendar event: Click the Dealer Users button. Select the Choose Trade Dealers option. Click the Next button to continue. Select a hierarchy by clicking on the box before the hierarchy. Note : To expand the hierarchy to select specific options, click the plus sign. Note : To de-select a hierarchy, click the box to remove the check mark. Click the Next button to continue, or click the Back button to return to the previous window. By default, the Ignore Dealer Eligibility selection checkbox is selected and all trade dealers will be included in the announcement, alert, event, or notification. To exclude dealers by eligibility, clear the Ignore Dealer Eligibility selection checkbox to activate the criteria selection buttons, then remove selections as desired. Click the Next button to continue, or click the Back button to return to the previous window. From the Available Fields box, select the positions. Click the Copy button to move the selected options to the Selected box, or click the Copy All button to move all options. Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the Back button to return to the previous window. To view your recipient selections after you select them, use the View/Print option in the Action menu.
Select Dealer Trade Users To select trade dealer recipients for an alert, announcement, notification, or calendar event: Click the Dealer Users button. Select the Choose Trade Dealers option. Click the Next button to continue. Select a hierarchy by clicking on the box before the hierarchy. Note : To expand the hierarchy to select specific options, click the plus sign. Note : To de-select a hierarchy, click the box to remove the check mark. Click the Next button to continue, or click the Back button to return to the previous window. By default, the Ignore Dealer Eligibility selection checkbox is selected and all trade dealers will be included in the announcement, alert, event, or notification. To exclude dealers by eligibility, clear the Ignore Dealer Eligibility selection checkbox to activate the criteria selection buttons, then remove selections as desired. Click the Next button to continue, or click the Back button to return to the previous window. From the Available Fields box, select the positions. Click the Copy button to move the selected options to the Selected box, or click the Copy All button to move all options. Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the Back button to return to the previous window. To view your recipient selections after you select them, use the View/Print option in the Action menu.
View Overview Information Quick Entry Warranty Claim Page Overview Edit or Create a Warranty Claim Workflow Perform Tasks Batch Validate Complete the Claim Information Section Complete the Comments Section of a Claim Complete the Customer Section of a Claim Complete the Expenses Section of a Claim Complete the Operations Section of a Claim Complete the Parts Section of a Claim Complete the Summary Section of a Claim Delete a Warranty Claim Look Up a Part Look Up an Operation Code Perform Common DBS Tasks Print Warranty Claim Submit Warranty Claim Use the Quick Jump Menu Validate a Warranty Claim View Dealer Claim Administration Limits View NSH View Repair Order View the Claim Activity Section of a Claim View the History Section of a Claim Batch Validate Complete the Summary Section of a Claim Complete the Claim Information Section Complete the Parts Section of a Claim Complete the Expenses Section of a Claim Complete the Operations Section of a Claim Complete the Comments Section of a Claim Complete the Customer Section of a Claim Delete a Warranty Claim Look Up a Part Look Up an Operation Code Perform Common DBS Tasks Print Warranty Claim Submit Warranty Claim Use the Quick Jump Menu Validate a Warranty Claim View NSH View Repair Order View the Claim Activity Section of a Claim View the History Section of a Claim
Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Edit Warranty Claims Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Warranty Claims Edit or Create Warranty Claims Workflow *** Nissan Canada Inc. (NCI) recommends dealers create Warranty Claims in an NCI DBS certified dealer management system and then log into NCI DBS to review, validate and submit the claim to NCI. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating and editing claims. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Warranty Claims Workflow or View Warranty Claims Workflow. Manage Warranty Claims Workflow View Warranty Claims Workflow
To remove publisher authorization: Show the Publishing section, if hidden. Click the Remove Authorizations button. Note : A confirmation message appears. Note : If the user is not currently an authorized publisher, the Remove Authorizations button does not appear. Click the Yes button to confirm, or click the No button to close the window without confirming. Note : The application clears all publication options for the user.
Remove Publishing Authorization To remove publisher authorization: Show the Publishing section, if hidden. Click the Remove Authorizations button. Note : If the user is not currently an authorized publisher, the Remove Authorizations button does not appear. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm, or click the No button to close the window without confirming. Note : The application clears all publication options for the publisher.
This section of a study is not required, but provides the opportunity to customize or limit a study's results. Use optional study sections to clearly define study parameters, but use caution as conflicting selections will result in no data being returned. To complete the Transmission Type section of a study: From the Transmission Type drop-down list, select the desired transmission type. Click the Save button.
Complete the Transmission Type Section of a Study This section of a study is not required, but provides the opportunity to customize or limit a study's results. Use optional study sections to clearly define study parameters, but use caution as conflicting selections will result in no data being returned. To complete the Transmission Type section of a study: From the Transmission Type drop-down list, select the desired transmission type. Click the Save button.
Early Detection System (EDS) EDS: Study Dashboard Processes EDS: Study Dashboard Study Study Dashboard Technical Service Bulletin (TSB) Create or Modify a Study Workflow Note : The Create or Modify a Study workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for defining or modifying a study that integrates appointment and repair order data collected by the Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Define or Modify a Study Workflow. Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow View One Study Result Workflow
View Overview Information Search Results Page Overview Perform Tasks Perform an Advanced Search Perform Common DBS Tasks View Search Results
Inventory Search Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for searching and viewing inventory for a particular vehicle model with specified features and options. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Inventory Search workflow. Vehicle Inventory Workflow
View Overview Information Campaign Part Management Page Overview Manage Campaign Part Management Workflow Perform Tasks Access Reports Add a Campaign Part Delete a Campaign Part Export Campaign Part Information Filter Campaign Part Management Summary Look Up a Part Perform Common DBS Tasks View Campaign Part Management Summary
Campaign Campaign Part Management Campaign Parts Campaign Campaign Part Management Campaign Part Management Manage Campaign Parts Workflow Note : This workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing campaign parts. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Campaign Parts Workflow. View Service Campaign Order Workflow Manage Service Campaign Order Workflow
To view the submission status of financial statements: View the list of financial statements and the corresponding submission status. Click the Refresh button to see the updated financial statement status.
View Financial Statements Submission Status Note : The Submit Financial Statements page displays the distinct action taken on each financial statement. By default, the Submit Financial Statements page displays all actions taken on financial statements sorted by date/time and period, with the most recent financial statement appearing first. To view the submission status of your financial statements: If desired, click the Refresh button to update the information in the Financial Statements section. View the list of financial statements and the corresponding submission status. Note : See the list below for additional information on the financial statement submission statuses. To view warning or error messages for a financial statement, click the View Processing Results link.
Financial Statement Financial Statements Financial Statements Processes Statement Status View Submit Financial Statements Workflow Note : This workflow is for NNA users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for submitting the financial statement.
To change the status of an event: Select an event. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Change Status option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm, or click the No button to close the window without confirming. If the event status is "Approved", changing the status updates the event status to "Needs Approval." If the event status is "Needs Approval", changing the status updates the event status to "Approved." An event will not display until it is in an approved status AND the scheduled time has passed. You cannot change the status of a published communication item. You must delete the item if you want to remove it from display.
Change the Status of an Event To change the status of an event: Select an event. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Change Status option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm, or click the No button to close the window without confirming. If the event status is "Approved", changing the status updates the event status to "Needs Approval." If the event status is "Needs Approval", changing the status updates the event status to "Approved." An event will not display until it is in an approved status AND the scheduled time has passed.
To copy an alert: Select an alert. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Copy option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Copy button to copy your selection, or click the Cancel button to close without copying. The default status of a copied alert is "Needs Approval".
Copy an Alert To copy an alert: Select the alert you want to copy. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Copy option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Copy button to copy your selection, or click the Cancel button to close without copying. The default status of a copied alert is "Needs Approval".
To deactivate or reactivate a user: Select the desired user. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select either the Deactivate User or Reactivate User option. Note : If the user is active, the Deactivate User option appears. If the user is inactive, the Reactivate User option appears.
Deactivate or Reactivate User To deactivate or reactivate a user: Select the desired user. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Deactivate User or Reactivate User option. Note : If the user is active, the Deactivate User option appears. If the user is inactive, the Reactivate User option appears.
To manage my profile: To change any of the information in the read-only fields on your profile, you must contact the help desk. Changes are processed in NNAnet and feed to DBS in an overnight batch process. To change your cell phone number, type your cell phone number. To change your cell phone carrier, select a different carrier. Note : When you select a different carrier, a message displays. Review the message and to accept text messages, click the I Accept SMS Messages button or to not accept, click the Do Not Send SMS Messages button. To change your language, select a different language. To change your date format, select a different date format. To change your time zone, select a different time zone. Note : The remaining fields are read-only fields. Permission information indicates the applications you can access. Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm and save, or click the No button to close the window without saving. If you need access to applications or pages within DBS , please contact your site's system administrator. Your Nissan or Infiniti profile provides the bulk of the information for your DBS profile. To update your profile information, please contact the appropriate help desk. Internal users may have additional Business Hierarchy sections to enter information for multiple cell phones. Internal users also have an additional section under Permission Information for Publishing that dealers users will not see on their My Profile page.
Manage My Profile To manage my profile: To add or change your cell phone number, in the Cell Phone Number field, type your cell phone number. To add or change your cell phone carrier, from the Cell Phone Carrier drop-down list, select a different carrier. Note : When you select a cell phone carrier, a message displays. Review the message and to accept text messages, click the I Accept SMS Messages button or to not accept, click the Do Not Send SMS Messages button. Note: Internal users may have multiple cell phone numbers and SMS carriers. To change your language, in the Language drop-down list, select a different language. To change your date format, in the Date Format drop-down list, select a different date format. To change your time zone, in the Time Zone drop-down menu, select a different time zone. Note : The remaining sections contain read-only fields. Permission information indicates which applications you have access to. Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm and save, or click the No button to close the window without saving. If you need access to applications or pages within DBS , please contact your site's system administrator. Your Nissan or Infiniti profile provides the bulk of the information for your DBS profile. To change any of the information in the read-only fields, you must contact the help desk. Changes are processed in NNAnet and feed to DBS in an overnight batch process. Internal users may have additional Business Hierarchy sections to enter information for multiple cell phones. Internal users also have an additional section under Permission Information for Publishing that dealers users will not see on their My Profile page.
To edit a PNC (Part Number Code): Select the PNC. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Edit option. Note : The selected PNC becomes editable. Type or look up the PNC. Note: To learn how to look up a PNC, click here . Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Save option, or select the Cancel option to preserve the PNC without changes.
Edit a PNC To edit a PNC (Part Number Code): Select the PNC. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Edit option. Note: The selected PNC becomes editable. Type or look up the PNC. Note: To learn how to look up a PNC, click here . Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Save option, or select the Cancel option to preserve the PNC without changes.
Standard Operation Codes Standard Operation Code Standard Operation Codes Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating or editing standard operation groups and codes. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes workflow. Manage Dealer Operation Codes Workflow Manage Standard Operation Categories Workflow Manage Standard Operation Codes Workflow
To edit a PNC (Part Number Code): Select the PNC. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Edit option. Note : The selected PNC becomes editable. Type or look up the PNC. Note: To learn how to look up a PNC, click here . Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Save option, or select the Cancel option to preserve the PNC without changes.
Edit a PNC To edit a PNC (Part Number Code): Select the PNC. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Edit option. Note: The selected PNC becomes editable. Type or look up the PNC. Note: To learn how to look up a PNC, click here . Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Save option, or select the Cancel option to preserve the PNC without changes.
Standard Operation Codes Standard Operation Code Standard Operation Codes Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating or editing standard operation groups and codes. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes workflow. Manage Dealer Operation Codes Workflow Manage Standard Operation Categories Workflow Manage Standard Operation Codes Workflow
To look up a part from the Create Parts Order or Edit Parts Order page: At the end of the Part Number field, click the Lookup icon. Note : The Part Lookup page appears. In the fields provided, type full or partial information. Note : You must include an asterisk (*) when typing partial information. Note : To remove search criteria, click the Clear icon. Click the Search icon. Note : DBS displays a list of records matching the search criteria in the Parts section. Select the part. Note : DBS displays part detail in the Part Detail section. To determine if the part is superseded, scroll down in the Part Detail section. Note : If a "Y" appears in the Supersession Flag field, the part is superseded. Note : The new part number appears in the New Part field above the Supersession Flag field. If the part is superseded, copy the value in the New Part field, paste it into the Part Number field, and repeat steps 3-6. To select the part, click the Select button. Note : To cancel the lookup, click the Cancel button.
Look Up a Part from the Create Parts Order or Edit Parts Order Page To look up a part from the Create Parts Order or Edit Parts Order page:
Create Create Order Create SVC Order Create Order Create Order Create SVC Order Create Order Create Order Create Order Create SVC Order Create Create Order Create Parts Order Workflow *** Nissan Canada Inc. (NCI) recommends dealers create parts orders in an NCI DBS certified dealer management system and then log into NCI DBS to review and submit the order to NCI. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating a parts order. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create Parts Order Workflow. Edit Parts Order Workflow Manage Parts Order Workflow Inquire on the Availability of Parts at the Parts Distribution Centers Workflow View Parts Order Workflow Edit Parts Order Workflow Manage Parts Order Workflow View Parts Order Workflow
Edit Edit Order Edit Order Edit SVC Order Edit Order Edit Order Edit SVC Order Edit Order Edit Order Edit Order Edit SVC Order Edit Order Edit Order Edit Parts Order Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for modifying an existing new or open parts order. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Edit Parts Order Workflow. Create Parts Order Workflow Manage Parts Order Workflow Inquire on the Availability of Parts at the Parts Distribution Centers Workflow View Parts Order Workflow
To view claim activity for a warranty claim, expand the Claim Activity section: Click a column title to sort information in the column. Click an RO link to view the corresponding repair order (RO) associated with the claim. Note : You cannot view an RO created by another dealer. Note : One RO can have multiple warranty claims associated with it. Note : One RO job line can have only one warranty claim associated with it. As applicable, move your mouse pointer over a code in the PFP/PO column to read the corresponding description. Note : The PFP/PO column displays the primary failed part or primary operation code associated with the claim line. You can view claim activity on any of the following pages: Edit/Create Warranty Claim, Quick Entry Warranty Claim, Express Entry Warranty Claim, and View Warranty Claim.
View the Claim Activity Section of a Claim In the Claim Activity section, to view claim activity for a vehicle: Click a column title to sort information in the column. Click an RO link to view the corresponding repair order (RO) associated with the claim. Note : You cannot view an RO created by another dealer. Note : One RO can have multiple warranty claims associated with it. Note : One RO job line can have only one warranty claim associated with it. As applicable, move your mouse pointer over a code in the PFP/PO column to read the corresponding description. Note : The PFP/PO column displays the primary failed part or primary operation code associated with the claim line. Additional Notes: You can view claim activity on any of the following pages: Edit/Create Warranty Claim, Quick Entry Warranty Claim, Express Entry Warranty Claim, and View Warranty Claim. The Close Date is the same as the RO close date in the Claim Information section.
Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Edit Warranty Claims Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Warranty Claims Edit or Create Warranty Claims Workflow *** Nissan Canada Inc. (NCI) recommends dealers create Warranty Claims in an NCI DBS certified dealer management system and then log into NCI DBS to review, validate and submit the claim to NCI. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating and editing claims. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Warranty Claims Workflow or View Warranty Claims Workflow. Manage Warranty Claims Workflow View Warranty Claims Workflow
To view claim activity for a warranty claim, expand the Claim Activity section: Click a column title to sort information in the column. Click an RO link to view the corresponding repair order (RO) associated with the claim. Note : You cannot view an RO created by another dealer. Note : One RO can have multiple warranty claims associated with it. Note : One RO job line can have only one warranty claim associated with it. As applicable, move your mouse pointer over a code in the PFP/PO column to read the corresponding description. Note : The PFP/PO column displays the primary failed part or primary operation code associated with the claim line. You can view claim activity on any of the following pages: Edit/Create Warranty Claim, Quick Entry Warranty Claim, Express Entry Warranty Claim, and View Warranty Claim.
View the Claim Activity Section of a Claim In the Claim Activity section, to view claim activity for a vehicle: Click a column title to sort information in the column. Click an RO link to view the corresponding repair order (RO) associated with the claim. Note : You cannot view an RO created by another dealer. Note : One RO can have multiple warranty claims associated with it. Note : One RO job line can have only one warranty claim associated with it. As applicable, move your mouse pointer over a code in the PFP/PO column to read the corresponding description. Note : The PFP/PO column displays the primary failed part or primary operation code associated with the claim line. Additional Notes: You can view claim activity on any of the following pages: Edit/Create Warranty Claim, Quick Entry Warranty Claim, Express Entry Warranty Claim, and View Warranty Claim. The Close Date is the same as the RO close date in the Claim Information section.
Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Edit Warranty Claims Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Warranty Claims Edit or Create Warranty Claims Workflow *** Nissan Canada Inc. (NCI) recommends dealers create Warranty Claims in an NCI DBS certified dealer management system and then log into NCI DBS to review, validate and submit the claim to NCI. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating and editing claims. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Warranty Claims Workflow or View Warranty Claims Workflow. Manage Warranty Claims Workflow View Warranty Claims Workflow
To view claim activity for a warranty claim, expand the Claim Activity section: Click a column title to sort information in the column. Click an RO link to view the corresponding repair order (RO) associated with the claim. Note : You cannot view an RO created by another dealer. Note : One RO can have multiple warranty claims associated with it. Note : One RO job line can have only one warranty claim associated with it. As applicable, move your mouse pointer over a code in the PFP/PO column to read the corresponding description. Note : The PFP/PO column displays the primary failed part or primary operation code associated with the claim line. You can view claim activity on any of the following pages: Edit/Create Warranty Claim, Quick Entry Warranty Claim, Express Entry Warranty Claim, and View Warranty Claim.
View the Claim Activity Section of a Claim In the Claim Activity section, to view claim activity for a vehicle: Click a column title to sort information in the column. Click an RO link to view the corresponding repair order (RO) associated with the claim. Note : You cannot view an RO created by another dealer. Note : One RO can have multiple warranty claims associated with it. Note : One RO job line can have only one warranty claim associated with it. As applicable, move your mouse pointer over a code in the PFP/PO column to read the corresponding description. Note : The PFP/PO column displays the primary failed part or primary operation code associated with the claim line. Additional Notes: You can view claim activity on any of the following pages: Edit/Create Warranty Claim, Quick Entry Warranty Claim, Express Entry Warranty Claim, and View Warranty Claim. The Close Date is the same as the RO close date in the Claim Information section.
Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Edit Warranty Claims Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Warranty Claims Edit or Create Warranty Claims Workflow *** Nissan Canada Inc. (NCI) recommends dealers create Warranty Claims in an NCI DBS certified dealer management system and then log into NCI DBS to review, validate and submit the claim to NCI. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating and editing claims. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Warranty Claims Workflow or View Warranty Claims Workflow. Manage Warranty Claims Workflow View Warranty Claims Workflow
To sort the links in My Links: Move your cursor over the My Links link. Click a link row and drag it to the desired order in your My Links list.
Sort Links in My Links To sort the links in My Links: Move your cursor over the My Links link. Click a link row and drag it to the desired order in your My Links list.
Campaign Master Table Page Overview Purpose Use the Campaign Master Table page to maintain the location source information for a campaign. By default, all campaigns are considered "Dealer" campaigns. Use the Campaign Master Table page to indicate that a campaign is a campaign impacting dealer vehicles only, or a campaign that impacts both dealer and fleet vehicles. Description The content area of the Campaign Master Table page displays the following sections: Search and Filter - Allows you to search for a specific campaign, or filter the campaign list by your desired criteria. Campaign Master - Displays the list of current campaigns with their description and effective dates. Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Campaign Master Table page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Edit the Repair By Information for a Campaign Export Campaign Master Table Information Search for Campaign Master Table Information Page Preview
To search for a dealer by hierarchy: Select the Choose dealer by Hierarchy option. From the drop-down lists, select a value. Note : If you want to search for all dealers in a division, only select values for Affiliate and Division . Click the Search icon. Note : The search results appear.
Search for a Dealer by Hierarchy To search for a dealer by hierarchy: Select the Choose dealer by Hierarchy option. From the Affiliate drop-down list, select the desired affiliate. From the Division drop-down list, select the desired division. Note : If you want to search for all dealers in a division, go to Step 8. From the Region drop-down list, select the desired region. From the Area drop-down list, select the desired area. From the District drop-down list, select the desired district. From the Dealer drop-down list, select the desired dealer. Click the Search icon. Note : The search result appears.
About Warranty Claims: What You Need to Know When a repair order (RO) is closed in the Dealer Management System (DMS), the Manage Warranty Claims Warranty page updates in real time with all the information that was entered in the RO. When a warranty claim is submitted from DBS , it is sent to the HOST and processed in a nightly batch. The following day you must check the status of your claims to determine if any were suspended or rejected so you can make the necessary corrections. Your submitted claims may have any of the following statuses: Approved - The claim was successfully processed and will be paid. Denied - The claim was processed and will not be paid. Rejected - The claim was unable to be processed, e.g., key data was missing or data invalid Suspended - The NNA Host found an error that needs to be corrected on the claim, e.g., replacement part / operation When manually creating a warranty claim or editing an existing claim, the following conditions MUST exist for technicians to display on the Create or Edit Warranty Claim page: The technician's employee ID in your DMS MUST be identical to the one entered in NNAnet.com. The technician must be registered in Virtual Academy. This is done by clicking the Register link in NNAnet on the Admin > Search User screen. Note : In some cases, it may be necessary for a technician to log into Virtual Academy to activate their account. Changes made in NNAnet are processed in a nightly batch. Any changes made may not be reflected in the Technician drop-down list for up to 48 hours. General Guidelines: Any field that displays a red asterisk indicates that this information is required. Any field with a red circle icon indicates that an error exists. To view error messages, hover over the icon to display what errors need to be corrected on the claim. Claims cannot be submitted with errors Any field with an orange circle icon indicates a warning message. To view warning messages, hover over the icon to display the messages. Claims can be submitted with warnings.
To filter Hold status summary information: At the bottom of the Early Detection System pane, click the Hold Status Summary link. Note: The Hold Study Result page opens. From the Filter By drop-down list, select a filter of your choice. Note: A second field appears beside the Filter By field. In the second field, type or select an additional filter criterion. From the Hold Type drop-down list, select the desired option. Click the Search icon. Note: The list of Studies updates to match the filter criteria.
Filter Hold Status Summary To filter Hold status summary information: At the bottom of the Early Detection System pane, click the Hold Status Summary link. Note: The Hold Study Result page opens. From the Filter By drop-down list, select a filter of your choice. Note: A second field appears beside the Filter By field. In the second field, type or select an additional filter criterion. From the Hold Type drop-down list, select the desired option. Click the Search icon. Note: The list of Studies updates to match the filter criteria.
Dashboard Early Detection System (EDS) Hold Status Processes Study View Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow Note: The Manage Early Detection System Studies workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing Early Detection System (EDS) studies that integrate appointment and repair order data collected by the Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow. Define or Modify a Study Workflow View One Study Result Workflow View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow
Dashboard Early Detection System (EDS) EDS: Study Dashboard Processes EDS: Study Dashboard Study Study Dashboard View View One Study Result Workflow Note : The View One Study Result workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing a study that integrates appointment and repair order data collected by the Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the View One Study Result workflow. Define or Modify Study Workflow Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow
Dashboard Early Detection System (EDS) EDS: Study Dashboard Processes EDS: Study Dashboard Study Study Dashboard View View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow Note : The View a Dealer's Study Results workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing one dealer's study results that integrate appointment and repair order data collected by the Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the View a Dealer's Study Results workflow. Define or Modify a Study Workflow Manage Early Detection Studies Workflow View One Study Result Workflow
View Overview Information Manage Part Return Schedule Page Overview Perform Tasks Adjust the Accrual Amount for a Parts Return Change the Parts Return Due Date Change the Parts Return Schedule for Multiple Dealers Change the Rollover Rate Filter the Manage Part Return Schedule Page Forfeit a Parts Return Period Manage Part Return Schedule Adjustment Reasons Manage Part Return Schedule Cancellation Reasons Perform Common DBS Tasks View the Accrual Adjustment History for a Dealer
View Overview Information View RFC Detail Page Overview View Request for Credit Status Workflow Perform Tasks Access Reports Perform Common DBS Tasks View Detail from View RFC Detail Page Access Reports Perform Common DBS Tasks View Detail from View RFC Detail Page
Applications Request for Credit RFC Request for Credit Status Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing Request for Credit (RFC) status.
Request Full Parts Master Page Overview Purpose Use the Request Full Parts Master page to request a full parts master file. You may request a full parts master file once a day. Access the Request Full Parts Master page by clicking the Request Full Parts Master link from the Parts menu. Description The content area of the Request Full Parts Master page displays the following sections: Dealer - Shows your dealer name and number Print Button - Allows you to print the request Time Stamp - Shows the date and time of your current request Last Request Date - Shows the date and time of your last request OK and Cancel Buttons - Allows you to confirm or cancel the request Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Request Full Parts Master page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Request a Full Parts Master Page Preview
By default, the Host Reports page displays a list of reports for the current month that is specific to the menu tab or application from which you accessed the Host Reports page. To maximize your search results, clear the default selections in the All Applications and Time Period drop-down lists. To filter and search for a Host report: If desired, from the All Applications drop-down list, select an application, or click the "Select" option to search for all reports. If desired, from the All Frequencies drop-down list, select a frequency. Note : Report frequency defines the time period when the Host generates the report and submits it to DBS . To quickly locate a report, in the Enter Report ID or Name field, type a portion of the report name or report ID, such as "Misc" for the Miscellaneous Invoices report, or "HOP" for the Parts Invoice report. If desired, from the Report Status drop-down list, select a report status. Note : "New" status is defined as those reports that have not been viewed or printed; "Accessed" status refers to reports that have been viewed/printed and "All Statuses" means any report regardless of status. If desired, from the Time Period drop-down list, select a time period, or click the "Select" option to search for all time periods. Note : If you select the "Date Range" option, you must select dates in the applicable fields. To search for information within a report such as a VIN, customer name, or campaign number, in the Full Word/Value Search field, type a word or value. Note : Use caution when using this field! Be as precise as possible to find what you're looking for without overtaxing the system. For example: Search for specific content such as QX80, 5N1AZ2MH2FN222780, or DCHRIR05 and avoid common terms such as vehicle, RO, or part. Note : You may use special characters such as the "$" in your search, but only when that character is part of a word. For example: a search of "$200" may produce results, but a search for "$" will not. Click the Search icon or press the Enter key on your keyboard to display a list of all reports generated that meet the specified search criteria, or click the Clear icon to remove the filters.
Filter and Search for a Host Report By default, the Host Reports page displays a list of reports for the current month that is specific to the menu tab or application from which you accessed the Host Reports page. To maximize your search results, clear the default selections in the All Applications and Time Period drop-down lists. To filter and search for a Host report: If desired, from the All Applications drop-down list, select an application, or click the "Select" option to search for all reports regardless of their assigned application. If desired, from the All Frequencies drop-down list, select a frequency. Note : When searching for a specific report, it is recommended that you keep the default option of "Select". Note : Report frequency defines the time period when the Host generates the report and submits it to DBS . To quickly locate a report, in the Enter Report ID or Name field, type a portion of the report name or report ID, such as "Misc" for the Miscellaneous Invoices report, or "HOP" for the Parts Invoice report. If desired, from the Report Status drop-down list, select a report status. Note : "New" status is defined as those reports that have not been viewed or printed; "Accessed" status refers to reports that have been viewed/printed and "All Statuses" means any report regardless of status. If desired, from the Time Period drop-down list, select a time period, or click the "Select" option to search for all time periods. Note : If you select the "Date Range" option, you must select dates in the applicable fields. Note : When searching by date range, it is recommended that you select a 1-3 month date range for the broadest results. To search for information within a report such as a VIN, customer name, or campaign number, in the Full Word/Value Search field, type a word or value. Note : Use caution when using this field! Be as precise as possible to find what you're looking for without overtaxing the system. For example: Search for specific content such as QX80, 5N1AZ2MH2FN222780, or DCHRIR05 and avoid common terms such as vehicle, RO, or part. Note : You may use special characters such as the "$" in your search, but only when that character is part of a word. For example: a search of "$200" may produce results, but a search for "$" will not. Click the Search icon or press the Enter key on your keyboard to display a list of all reports generated that meet the specified search criteria, or click the Clear icon to remove the filters and search criteria entered. Note : A list of reports that meet the filter criteria appears in the Reports section.
Host Reports Processes Host Reports Host Reports Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing, printing, filtering, searching, and adding or removing a Host report from the Favorites list.
By default, the Host Reports page displays a list of reports for the current month that is specific to the menu tab or application from which you accessed the Host Reports page. To maximize your search results, clear the default selections in the All Applications and Time Period drop-down lists. To filter and search for a Host report: If desired, from the All Applications drop-down list, select an application, or click the "Select" option to search for all reports. If desired, from the All Frequencies drop-down list, select a frequency. Note : Report frequency defines the time period when the Host generates the report and submits it to DBS . To quickly locate a report, in the Enter Report ID or Name field, type a portion of the report name or report ID, such as "Misc" for the Miscellaneous Invoices report, or "HOP" for the Parts Invoice report. If desired, from the Report Status drop-down list, select a report status. Note : "New" status is defined as those reports that have not been viewed or printed; "Accessed" status refers to reports that have been viewed/printed and "All Statuses" means any report regardless of status. If desired, from the Time Period drop-down list, select a time period, or click the "Select" option to search for all time periods. Note : If you select the "Date Range" option, you must select dates in the applicable fields. To search for information within a report such as a VIN, customer name, or campaign number, in the Full Word/Value Search field, type a word or value. Note : Use caution when using this field! Be as precise as possible to find what you're looking for without overtaxing the system. For example: Search for specific content such as QX80, 5N1AZ2MH2FN222780, or DCHRIR05 and avoid common terms such as vehicle, RO, or part. Note : You may use special characters such as the "$" in your search, but only when that character is part of a word. For example: a search of "$200" may produce results, but a search for "$" will not. Click the Search icon or press the Enter key on your keyboard to display a list of all reports generated that meet the specified search criteria, or click the Clear icon to remove the filters.
Filter and Search for a Host Report By default, the Host Reports page displays a list of reports for the current month that is specific to the menu tab or application from which you accessed the Host Reports page. To maximize your search results, clear the default selections in the All Applications and Time Period drop-down lists. To filter and search for a Host report: If desired, from the All Applications drop-down list, select an application, or click the "Select" option to search for all reports regardless of their assigned application. If desired, from the All Frequencies drop-down list, select a frequency. Note : When searching for a specific report, it is recommended that you keep the default option of "Select". Note : Report frequency defines the time period when the Host generates the report and submits it to DBS . To quickly locate a report, in the Enter Report ID or Name field, type a portion of the report name or report ID, such as "Misc" for the Miscellaneous Invoices report, or "HOP" for the Parts Invoice report. If desired, from the Report Status drop-down list, select a report status. Note : "New" status is defined as those reports that have not been viewed or printed; "Accessed" status refers to reports that have been viewed/printed and "All Statuses" means any report regardless of status. If desired, from the Time Period drop-down list, select a time period, or click the "Select" option to search for all time periods. Note : If you select the "Date Range" option, you must select dates in the applicable fields. Note : When searching by date range, it is recommended that you select a 1-3 month date range for the broadest results. To search for information within a report such as a VIN, customer name, or campaign number, in the Full Word/Value Search field, type a word or value. Note : Use caution when using this field! Be as precise as possible to find what you're looking for without overtaxing the system. For example: Search for specific content such as QX80, 5N1AZ2MH2FN222780, or DCHRIR05 and avoid common terms such as vehicle, RO, or part. Note : You may use special characters such as the "$" in your search, but only when that character is part of a word. For example: a search of "$200" may produce results, but a search for "$" will not. Click the Search icon or press the Enter key on your keyboard to display a list of all reports generated that meet the specified search criteria, or click the Clear icon to remove the filters and search criteria entered. Note : A list of reports that meet the filter criteria appears in the Reports section.
Host Reports Processes Host Reports Host Reports Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing, printing, filtering, searching, and adding or removing a Host report from the Favorites list.
By default, the Host Reports page displays a list of reports for the current month that is specific to the menu tab or application from which you accessed the Host Reports page. To maximize your search results, clear the default selections in the All Applications and Time Period drop-down lists. To filter and search for a Host report: If desired, from the All Applications drop-down list, select an application, or click the "Select" option to search for all reports. If desired, from the All Frequencies drop-down list, select a frequency. Note : Report frequency defines the time period when the Host generates the report and submits it to DBS . To quickly locate a report, in the Enter Report ID or Name field, type a portion of the report name or report ID, such as "Misc" for the Miscellaneous Invoices report, or "HOP" for the Parts Invoice report. If desired, from the Report Status drop-down list, select a report status. Note : "New" status is defined as those reports that have not been viewed or printed; "Accessed" status refers to reports that have been viewed/printed and "All Statuses" means any report regardless of status. If desired, from the Time Period drop-down list, select a time period, or click the "Select" option to search for all time periods. Note : If you select the "Date Range" option, you must select dates in the applicable fields. To search for information within a report such as a VIN, customer name, or campaign number, in the Full Word/Value Search field, type a word or value. Note : Use caution when using this field! Be as precise as possible to find what you're looking for without overtaxing the system. For example: Search for specific content such as QX80, 5N1AZ2MH2FN222780, or DCHRIR05 and avoid common terms such as vehicle, RO, or part. Note : You may use special characters such as the "$" in your search, but only when that character is part of a word. For example: a search of "$200" may produce results, but a search for "$" will not. Click the Search icon or press the Enter key on your keyboard to display a list of all reports generated that meet the specified search criteria, or click the Clear icon to remove the filters.
Filter and Search for a Host Report By default, the Host Reports page displays a list of reports for the current month that is specific to the menu tab or application from which you accessed the Host Reports page. To maximize your search results, clear the default selections in the All Applications and Time Period drop-down lists. To filter and search for a Host report: If desired, from the All Applications drop-down list, select an application, or click the "Select" option to search for all reports regardless of their assigned application. If desired, from the All Frequencies drop-down list, select a frequency. Note : When searching for a specific report, it is recommended that you keep the default option of "Select". Note : Report frequency defines the time period when the Host generates the report and submits it to DBS . To quickly locate a report, in the Enter Report ID or Name field, type a portion of the report name or report ID, such as "Misc" for the Miscellaneous Invoices report, or "HOP" for the Parts Invoice report. If desired, from the Report Status drop-down list, select a report status. Note : "New" status is defined as those reports that have not been viewed or printed; "Accessed" status refers to reports that have been viewed/printed and "All Statuses" means any report regardless of status. If desired, from the Time Period drop-down list, select a time period, or click the "Select" option to search for all time periods. Note : If you select the "Date Range" option, you must select dates in the applicable fields. Note : When searching by date range, it is recommended that you select a 1-3 month date range for the broadest results. To search for information within a report such as a VIN, customer name, or campaign number, in the Full Word/Value Search field, type a word or value. Note : Use caution when using this field! Be as precise as possible to find what you're looking for without overtaxing the system. For example: Search for specific content such as QX80, 5N1AZ2MH2FN222780, or DCHRIR05 and avoid common terms such as vehicle, RO, or part. Note : You may use special characters such as the "$" in your search, but only when that character is part of a word. For example: a search of "$200" may produce results, but a search for "$" will not. Click the Search icon or press the Enter key on your keyboard to display a list of all reports generated that meet the specified search criteria, or click the Clear icon to remove the filters and search criteria entered. Note : A list of reports that meet the filter criteria appears in the Reports section.
Host Reports Processes Host Reports Host Reports Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing, printing, filtering, searching, and adding or removing a Host report from the Favorites list.
By default, the Host Reports page displays a list of reports for the current month that is specific to the menu tab or application from which you accessed the Host Reports page. To maximize your search results, clear the default selections in the All Applications and Time Period drop-down lists. To filter and search for a Host report: If desired, from the All Applications drop-down list, select an application, or click the "Select" option to search for all reports. If desired, from the All Frequencies drop-down list, select a frequency. Note : Report frequency defines the time period when the Host generates the report and submits it to DBS . To quickly locate a report, in the Enter Report ID or Name field, type a portion of the report name or report ID, such as "Misc" for the Miscellaneous Invoices report, or "HOP" for the Parts Invoice report. If desired, from the Report Status drop-down list, select a report status. Note : "New" status is defined as those reports that have not been viewed or printed; "Accessed" status refers to reports that have been viewed/printed and "All Statuses" means any report regardless of status. If desired, from the Time Period drop-down list, select a time period, or click the "Select" option to search for all time periods. Note : If you select the "Date Range" option, you must select dates in the applicable fields. To search for information within a report such as a VIN, customer name, or campaign number, in the Full Word/Value Search field, type a word or value. Note : Use caution when using this field! Be as precise as possible to find what you're looking for without overtaxing the system. For example: Search for specific content such as QX80, 5N1AZ2MH2FN222780, or DCHRIR05 and avoid common terms such as vehicle, RO, or part. Note : You may use special characters such as the "$" in your search, but only when that character is part of a word. For example: a search of "$200" may produce results, but a search for "$" will not. Click the Search icon or press the Enter key on your keyboard to display a list of all reports generated that meet the specified search criteria, or click the Clear icon to remove the filters.
Filter and Search for a Host Report By default, the Host Reports page displays a list of reports for the current month that is specific to the menu tab or application from which you accessed the Host Reports page. To maximize your search results, clear the default selections in the All Applications and Time Period drop-down lists. To filter and search for a Host report: If desired, from the All Applications drop-down list, select an application, or click the "Select" option to search for all reports regardless of their assigned application. If desired, from the All Frequencies drop-down list, select a frequency. Note : When searching for a specific report, it is recommended that you keep the default option of "Select". Note : Report frequency defines the time period when the Host generates the report and submits it to DBS . To quickly locate a report, in the Enter Report ID or Name field, type a portion of the report name or report ID, such as "Misc" for the Miscellaneous Invoices report, or "HOP" for the Parts Invoice report. If desired, from the Report Status drop-down list, select a report status. Note : "New" status is defined as those reports that have not been viewed or printed; "Accessed" status refers to reports that have been viewed/printed and "All Statuses" means any report regardless of status. If desired, from the Time Period drop-down list, select a time period, or click the "Select" option to search for all time periods. Note : If you select the "Date Range" option, you must select dates in the applicable fields. Note : When searching by date range, it is recommended that you select a 1-3 month date range for the broadest results. To search for information within a report such as a VIN, customer name, or campaign number, in the Full Word/Value Search field, type a word or value. Note : Use caution when using this field! Be as precise as possible to find what you're looking for without overtaxing the system. For example: Search for specific content such as QX80, 5N1AZ2MH2FN222780, or DCHRIR05 and avoid common terms such as vehicle, RO, or part. Note : You may use special characters such as the "$" in your search, but only when that character is part of a word. For example: a search of "$200" may produce results, but a search for "$" will not. Click the Search icon or press the Enter key on your keyboard to display a list of all reports generated that meet the specified search criteria, or click the Clear icon to remove the filters and search criteria entered. Note : A list of reports that meet the filter criteria appears in the Reports section.
Host Reports Processes Host Reports Host Reports Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing, printing, filtering, searching, and adding or removing a Host report from the Favorites list.
By default, the Host Reports page displays a list of reports for the current month that is specific to the menu tab or application from which you accessed the Host Reports page. To maximize your search results, clear the default selections in the All Applications and Time Period drop-down lists. To filter and search for a Host report: If desired, from the All Applications drop-down list, select an application, or click the "Select" option to search for all reports. If desired, from the All Frequencies drop-down list, select a frequency. Note : Report frequency defines the time period when the Host generates the report and submits it to DBS . To quickly locate a report, in the Enter Report ID or Name field, type a portion of the report name or report ID, such as "Misc" for the Miscellaneous Invoices report, or "HOP" for the Parts Invoice report. If desired, from the Report Status drop-down list, select a report status. Note : "New" status is defined as those reports that have not been viewed or printed; "Accessed" status refers to reports that have been viewed/printed and "All Statuses" means any report regardless of status. If desired, from the Time Period drop-down list, select a time period, or click the "Select" option to search for all time periods. Note : If you select the "Date Range" option, you must select dates in the applicable fields. To search for information within a report such as a VIN, customer name, or campaign number, in the Full Word/Value Search field, type a word or value. Note : Use caution when using this field! Be as precise as possible to find what you're looking for without overtaxing the system. For example: Search for specific content such as QX80, 5N1AZ2MH2FN222780, or DCHRIR05 and avoid common terms such as vehicle, RO, or part. Note : You may use special characters such as the "$" in your search, but only when that character is part of a word. For example: a search of "$200" may produce results, but a search for "$" will not. Click the Search icon or press the Enter key on your keyboard to display a list of all reports generated that meet the specified search criteria, or click the Clear icon to remove the filters.
Filter and Search for a Host Report By default, the Host Reports page displays a list of reports for the current month that is specific to the menu tab or application from which you accessed the Host Reports page. To maximize your search results, clear the default selections in the All Applications and Time Period drop-down lists. To filter and search for a Host report: If desired, from the All Applications drop-down list, select an application, or click the "Select" option to search for all reports regardless of their assigned application. If desired, from the All Frequencies drop-down list, select a frequency. Note : When searching for a specific report, it is recommended that you keep the default option of "Select". Note : Report frequency defines the time period when the Host generates the report and submits it to DBS . To quickly locate a report, in the Enter Report ID or Name field, type a portion of the report name or report ID, such as "Misc" for the Miscellaneous Invoices report, or "HOP" for the Parts Invoice report. If desired, from the Report Status drop-down list, select a report status. Note : "New" status is defined as those reports that have not been viewed or printed; "Accessed" status refers to reports that have been viewed/printed and "All Statuses" means any report regardless of status. If desired, from the Time Period drop-down list, select a time period, or click the "Select" option to search for all time periods. Note : If you select the "Date Range" option, you must select dates in the applicable fields. Note : When searching by date range, it is recommended that you select a 1-3 month date range for the broadest results. To search for information within a report such as a VIN, customer name, or campaign number, in the Full Word/Value Search field, type a word or value. Note : Use caution when using this field! Be as precise as possible to find what you're looking for without overtaxing the system. For example: Search for specific content such as QX80, 5N1AZ2MH2FN222780, or DCHRIR05 and avoid common terms such as vehicle, RO, or part. Note : You may use special characters such as the "$" in your search, but only when that character is part of a word. For example: a search of "$200" may produce results, but a search for "$" will not. Click the Search icon or press the Enter key on your keyboard to display a list of all reports generated that meet the specified search criteria, or click the Clear icon to remove the filters and search criteria entered. Note : A list of reports that meet the filter criteria appears in the Reports section.
Host Reports Processes Host Reports Host Reports Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing, printing, filtering, searching, and adding or removing a Host report from the Favorites list.
Manage Dealer Operation Code Page Overview Purpose Use the Manage Dealer Operations Code page to update dealer operation codes and re-run the translation process. Description The content area of the Manage Dealer Operation Code page displays the following sections: Filter by - Allows you to filter records that match your criteria, export, and re-run the translation process Summary - Displays general information for all records on the page Tasks You can perform the following tasks from or on the Manage Dealer Operation Code page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Change a Dealer Operation Code Export the Dealer Operation Code Summary Filter the Dealer Operation Code Summary Re-Run Translation Process - Dealer Operation Code View the Dealer Operation Code Summary Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Manage Dealer Operation Code page. Manage Dealer Operation Codes Workflow Page Preview
Dealer Operation Code Dealer Operation Codes ReRun Dealer Operation Codes Translation Manage Dealer Operation Codes Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing dealer operation codes. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Dealer Operation Codes Workflow. Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes Workflow Manage Standard Operation Categories Workflow Manage Standard Operation Codes Workflow
To browse the site map: Scroll to the bottom of the Home page or any DBS application page. Click the Site Map link to open it. Expand the map hierarchy to display the application page names or external links. To open the desired page, click the hyperlinked page name. The Site Map is a central location where users can access multiple screens from a single location in the DBS application. Use it as an alternate way to access the pages and application links.
Browse the Site Map To browse the site map: Expand the map hierarchy to display the application page names or external links. To open the desired page, click the hyperlinked page name.
To complete the Parts section of a warranty claim. In the Part No./Part Cat. field, type the part number or a three-digit part category code. If you don't know the part number, click the Lookup icon to perform a search. Click here for instructions on how to search for a part number. Note : Use the three-digit part category code if you have a locally purchased part, such as a windshield wiper. In the Req Qty field, type the quantity requested for the repair part. In the Req Amt field, type the monetary amount requested for the part. If necessary, in the Coverage 1 Code field, update the coverage code. Note : The coverage code is automatically populated based on information entered in the Claim Information section. If the coverage amount is split between or among coverage types, complete the Coverage 2 Amt and Coverage 3 Amt fields as appropriate. Note : The payment amounts split among the coverage amount fields must be equal to the requested amount. If you entered line type "PP" in the Claim Information section, in the PFP (Primary Failed Part) field, you must enter a part number. Note : If you select the PFP checkbox, the PFP field will be auto-populated. If the primary failed part is a battery, alternator, or starter replacement parts, complete the TestCode field. Note : The test code is the same as the GR8 code. As appropriate, click the Plus Sign to add additional parts. To update the claim total to reflect the information you entered, in the Summary section at the top of the page, click the Refresh Claim Total link. To save the information, click the Save button at the bottom-right of the page.
Complete the Parts Section of a Claim To complete the Parts section of a warranty claim. In the Part No./Part Cat. field, type the part number or a three-digit part category code. If you don't know the part number, click the Lookup icon to perform a search. Note : Use the part category code if you have a locally purchased part, such as a windshield wiper. In the Req Qty field, type the quantity requested for the repair part. In the Req Amt field, type the monetary amount requested for the part. If necessary, in the Coverage 1 Code field, update the coverage code. Note : The coverage code is automatically populated based on information entered in the Claim Information section. If the coverage amount is split between or among coverage types, complete the Coverage 2 Amt and Coverage 3 Amt fields as appropriate. Note : The payment amounts split among the coverage amount fields must be equal to the requested amount. If you entered line type "PP" in the Claim Information section, in the PFP (Primary Failed Part) field, you must enter a part number. Note : If you select the PFP checkbox, the PFP field will be auto-populated. If the primary failed part is a battery, alternator, or starter replacement parts, complete the TestCode field. Note : The test code is the same as the a GR8 code. As appropriate, click the Plus Sign to add additional parts. To update the claim total to reflect the information you entered, in the Summary section at the top of the page, click the Refresh Claim Total link. To save the information, click the Save button at the bottom-right of the page.
Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Edit Warranty Claims Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Warranty Claims Edit or Create Warranty Claims Workflow *** Nissan Canada Inc. (NCI) recommends dealers create Warranty Claims in an NCI DBS certified dealer management system and then log into NCI DBS to review, validate and submit the claim to NCI. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating and editing claims. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Warranty Claims Workflow or View Warranty Claims Workflow. Manage Warranty Claims Workflow View Warranty Claims Workflow
To complete the Parts section of a warranty claim. In the Part No./Part Cat. field, type the part number or a three-digit part category code. If you don't know the part number, click the Lookup icon to perform a search. Click here for instructions on how to search for a part number. Note : Use the three-digit part category code if you have a locally purchased part, such as a windshield wiper. In the Req Qty field, type the quantity requested for the repair part. In the Req Amt field, type the monetary amount requested for the part. If necessary, in the Coverage 1 Code field, update the coverage code. Note : The coverage code is automatically populated based on information entered in the Claim Information section. If the coverage amount is split between or among coverage types, complete the Coverage 2 Amt and Coverage 3 Amt fields as appropriate. Note : The payment amounts split among the coverage amount fields must be equal to the requested amount. If you entered line type "PP" in the Claim Information section, in the PFP (Primary Failed Part) field, you must enter a part number. Note : If you select the PFP checkbox, the PFP field will be auto-populated. If the primary failed part is a battery, alternator, or starter replacement parts, complete the TestCode field. Note : The test code is the same as the GR8 code. As appropriate, click the Plus Sign to add additional parts. To update the claim total to reflect the information you entered, in the Summary section at the top of the page, click the Refresh Claim Total link. To save the information, click the Save button at the bottom-right of the page.
Complete the Parts Section of a Claim To complete the Parts section of a warranty claim. In the Part No./Part Cat. field, type the part number or a three-digit part category code. If you don't know the part number, click the Lookup icon to perform a search. Note : Use the part category code if you have a locally purchased part, such as a windshield wiper. In the Req Qty field, type the quantity requested for the repair part. In the Req Amt field, type the monetary amount requested for the part. If necessary, in the Coverage 1 Code field, update the coverage code. Note : The coverage code is automatically populated based on information entered in the Claim Information section. If the coverage amount is split between or among coverage types, complete the Coverage 2 Amt and Coverage 3 Amt fields as appropriate. Note : The payment amounts split among the coverage amount fields must be equal to the requested amount. If you entered line type "PP" in the Claim Information section, in the PFP (Primary Failed Part) field, you must enter a part number. Note : If you select the PFP checkbox, the PFP field will be auto-populated. If the primary failed part is a battery, alternator, or starter replacement parts, complete the TestCode field. Note : The test code is the same as the a GR8 code. As appropriate, click the Plus Sign to add additional parts. To update the claim total to reflect the information you entered, in the Summary section at the top of the page, click the Refresh Claim Total link. To save the information, click the Save button at the bottom-right of the page.
Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Edit Warranty Claims Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Warranty Claims Edit or Create Warranty Claims Workflow *** Nissan Canada Inc. (NCI) recommends dealers create Warranty Claims in an NCI DBS certified dealer management system and then log into NCI DBS to review, validate and submit the claim to NCI. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating and editing claims. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Warranty Claims Workflow or View Warranty Claims Workflow. Manage Warranty Claims Workflow View Warranty Claims Workflow
To filter the Notifications summary list: From the Filter By drop-down list, select a filter option. If a text-entry field appears, type a filter value and then click the Search icon. If a drop-down list appears, select an option from the list. Note : The page refreshes to display only those notifications that match your selection. Note : To reset the filter criteria to the default options and clear the search criteria, click the Clear icon.
Filter the Notification Summary To filter the notification summary: From the Filter By drop-down list, select a filter option. If a text-entry field appears, type a filter value and then click the Search icon. If a drop-down list appears, select an option from the list. Note : The page refreshes to display only those notifications that match your selection. Note : To reset the filter criteria to the default options and clear the search criteria, click the Clear icon.
Create Edit Modify Notifications Processes Text Message Create or Edit a Notification Workflow Note : This workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating and editing a notification. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create or Edit a Notification Workflow. Create or Edit an Alert Workflow Create or Edit an Announcement Workflow Create or Edit a Calendar Event Workflow
View Overview Information Vehicle Inventory Page Overview Manage Vehicle Inventory Workflow Report or Edit the Sale of a Vehicle (RDR) Workflow Vehicle Inventory Page Overview Manage Vehicle Inventory Workflow Perform Tasks Perform Common DBS Tasks View Announcements and Other News View the Sales Quick Look Chart Perform Common DBS Tasks View Announcements and Other News View the Sales Quick Look Chart
Vehicle Inventory Management Inventory Managment Processes Inventory Managment Vehicle Inventory Management Vehicle Inventory Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing vehicle inventory data at the dealerships. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Vehicle Inventory workflow. Report the Sale of a Vehicle (RDR) Workflow Search Vehicle Inventory Workflow Search Vehicle Inventory Workflow
Processes RDR RDR RDR a Vehicle Workflow Note : This workflow is for NNA users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for retail delivery reporting (RDR) or editing the sale of a vehicle. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Report or Edit the Sale of a Vehicle workflow. Vehicle Inventory Workflow Inventory Search Workflow View RDR History Workflow
Vehicle Inventory Management Inventory Managment Processes Inventory Managment Vehicle Inventory Management Vehicle Inventory Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing vehicle inventory data at the dealerships. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Vehicle Inventory workflow. Report the Sale of a Vehicle (RDR) Workflow Search Vehicle Inventory Workflow Search Vehicle Inventory Workflow
The updated user experience allows users to more quickly accomplish tasks in DBS . Pages will migrate to the new user experience over several months, and announcements will be made as new pages are made available. To use the new features of DBS on the Retailed Vehicle Open Campaign Report page: By default, the Summary section displays all results for the dealership. If desired, select a filter from the Filter section, then click the check box to accept the usage agreement. Finally, click the Search button to view the filtered results. A new drop-down list of pages allows you to quickly navigate directly to the page you need when more than one page is available. Filter content using drop-downs and text entry fields. Note : Click here for more information on how to search for information using the advanced filter features of the new user experience. Click and drag a column header to a new location, then drop it in place to customize the summary area display. Click and drag the line between columns to change the column width. You no longer have to migrate from the summary page to a secondary page to edit items. Click the Edit icon for a line item to edit the information displayed. Note : Click here for more information on how to edit information on the Retailed Vehicle Open Campaign Report Page.
About the Retailed Vehicle Open Campaign Report Page To use the new features of DBS on the Retailed Vehicle Open Campaign Report page: By default, the Summary section displays all results for the dealership. If desired, select a filter from the Filter section, then click the check box to accept the usage agreement. Finally, click the Search button to view the filtered results. A new drop-down list of pages allows you to quickly navigate directly to the page you need when more than one page is available. Filter content using drop-downs and text entry fields. Note : Click here for more information on how to search for information using the advanced filter features of the new user experience. Click and drag a column header to a new location, then drop it in place to customize the summary area display. Click and drag the line between columns to change the column width. You no longer have to migrate from the summary page to a secondary page to edit items. Click the Edit icon for a line item to edit the information displayed. Note : Click here for more information on how to edit information on the Retailed Vehicle Open Campaign Report Page.
View Overview Information Copy User Permissions Page Overview User Summary Workflow Perform Tasks Copy User Permissions Perform Common DBS Tasks Copy User Permissions Perform Common DBS Tasks
Edit User Processes User Permissions Users User Summary Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for editing user permissions. Related Workflows The following workflow may have one or more tasks in common with the User Summary workflow . View User Permissions Workflow
RDR a Vehicle Workflow Note : This workflow is for NNA users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for retail delivery reporting (RDR) or editing the sale of a vehicle. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Report or Edit the Sale of a Vehicle workflow. Vehicle Inventory Workflow Inventory Search Workflow View RDR History Workflow
Request for Credit Status Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing Request for Credit (RFC) status.
To delete a part number code (PNC): Select a PNC. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Delete option.
Delete a Part Number Code (PNC) To delete a part number code (PNC): Select a PNC. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Delete option.
Standard Operation Codes Standard Operation Code Standard Operation Codes Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating or editing standard operation groups and codes. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes workflow. Manage Dealer Operation Codes Workflow Manage Standard Operation Categories Workflow Manage Standard Operation Codes Workflow
To delete a part number code (PNC): Select a PNC. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Delete option.
Delete a Part Number Code (PNC) To delete a part number code (PNC): Select a PNC. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Delete option.
Standard Operation Codes Standard Operation Code Standard Operation Codes Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating or editing standard operation groups and codes. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes workflow. Manage Dealer Operation Codes Workflow Manage Standard Operation Categories Workflow Manage Standard Operation Codes Workflow
Manage Campaign Parts Workflow Note : This workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing campaign parts. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Campaign Parts Workflow. View Service Campaign Order Workflow Manage Service Campaign Order Workflow
Request for Credit (RFC) Status Page Overview Purpose Use the Request for Credit (RFC) Status page to view RFC status or print RFC reports. A dealer can request credit if there is a problem related to a parts shipment, such as a shortage, overage, or damage. Access the Request for Credit (RFC) Status page by clicking the Request for Credit (RFC) Status link from the Parts menu. Description The content area of the Request for Credit (RFC) Status page displays the following sections: Filter By - Allows you to filter the information to display only the records that match your criteria Page Navigation - Allows you to navigate from page to page, if multiple pages exist Request for Credit Summary - Displays general information for all records on the page , such as RFC number, RFC entered date, status, parts invoice #, RFC invoice #, reference #, carrier code, and PDC code Request for Credit Detail - Displays specific information for a selected record , including requested, authorized, and accepted quantities, reason code, and reject code, if applicable Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Request for Credit (RFC) Status page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Access Reports Filter Request for Credit (RFC) Status Summary Open the View RFC Detail Page Print RFC Detail View Request for Credit (RFC) Status Summary and Detail Access Reports Filter Request for Credit (RFC) Status Summary Open the View RFC Detail Page Print RFC Detail View Request for Credit (RFC) Status Summary and Detail Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Request for Credit (RFC) Status page. View Request for Credit Status Workflow Page Preview
To add a part to an order: Type the part number or perform a part look up. Note : Click here for information on how to look up a part. Type the quantity. To override the backorder flag setting from the header for this line item, make a selection from the Back Order drop-down list. To override the cross ship flag setting from the header for this line item, make a selection from the Cross Ship drop-down list. Type the customer's name, if applicable. Note : The Free drop-down list appears for SOL - Solicited Stock Orders only. To indicate that this line item is part of a special program or promotion that includes discounts or free parts, from the Free drop-down list, select the "Yes" option. Note : For all order types, if a customer name is entered, in order to have the name print on the PDC shipping label that is affixed to the ordered part, the system will send the name in the Customer Name field for orders submitted from DBS to the host. In the Bin field, type the bin location for the part. Click the Add button to add the line to the part order. Note : Click the Clear button to clear the entries. Click the Save button. Note : If errors exist, a warning message may appear. Click Yes to save the order with errors or click No to cancel. Note : To prevent this message from appearing in the future, click the No prompt again checkbox. You can only add a part to a parts order in "New" or "Open" status.
Add a Part to a Parts Order To add a part to an order: In the Part Number field, type the part number. - OR - Perform a part lookup. Note : Click here for information on how to look up a part. In the Order Quantity field, type the quantity. To override the backorder flag setting from the header for this line item, make a selection from the Back Order drop-down list. To override the cross ship flag setting from the header for this line item, make a selection from the Cross Ship drop-down list. In the Customer Name field, type the customer's name, if applicable. Note : The Free drop-down list appears for SOL - Solicited Stock Orders only. To indicate that this line item is part of a special program or promotion that includes discounts or free parts, from the Free drop-down list, select the "Yes" option. Note : For all order types, if a customer name is entered, in order to have the name print on the PDC shipping label that is affixed to the ordered part, the system will send the name in the Customer Name field for orders submitted from DBS to the host. In the Bin field, type the bin location for the part. Click the Add button to add the line to the part order. Note : Click the Clear button to clear the entries. Click the Save button. Note : If errors exist, a warning message may appear. Click Yes to save the order with errors or click No to cancel. Note : To prevent this message from appearing in the future, click the No prompt again checkbox. To add a part to an order: In the Part Number field, type the part number. - OR - Perform a part lookup. Note : Click here for information on how to look up a part. In the Order Quantity field, type the quantity. To override the Order Backorder setting from the header for this line item, make a selection from the Back Order drop-down list. In the Tax Indicator field, select Yes or No . Click the Add button to add the line to the part order. Note : Click the Clear button to clear the entries. Click the Save button. Note : If errors exist, a warning message may appear. Click Yes to save the order with errors or click No to cancel. Note : To prevent this message from appearing in the future, click the No prompt again checkbox. You can only add a part to a parts order in "New" or "Open" status.
Create Create Order Create SVC Order Create Order Create Order Create SVC Order Create Order Create Order Create Order Create SVC Order Create Create Order Create Parts Order Workflow *** Nissan Canada Inc. (NCI) recommends dealers create parts orders in an NCI DBS certified dealer management system and then log into NCI DBS to review and submit the order to NCI. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating a parts order. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create Parts Order Workflow. Edit Parts Order Workflow Manage Parts Order Workflow Inquire on the Availability of Parts at the Parts Distribution Centers Workflow View Parts Order Workflow Edit Parts Order Workflow Manage Parts Order Workflow View Parts Order Workflow
Edit Edit Order Edit Order Edit SVC Order Edit Order Edit Order Edit SVC Order Edit Order Edit Order Edit Order Edit SVC Order Edit Order Edit Order Edit Parts Order Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for modifying an existing new or open parts order. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Edit Parts Order Workflow. Create Parts Order Workflow Manage Parts Order Workflow Inquire on the Availability of Parts at the Parts Distribution Centers Workflow View Parts Order Workflow
To open the Edit Announcement page: Select the item you wish to edit. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. Select the Edit menu option. Note : You can only edit announcements with a status of "Needs Approval." Note : The Edit Announcement page displays so you can edit the announcement.
Open the Edit Announcement Page To open the Edit Announcement page to modify an announcement: Select an announcement. Click the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Edit option. Note : The Edit Announcement page opens so you can edit the announcement You can only edit announcements with a status of "Needs Approval."
View Overview Information Alerts Page Overview Create or Edit an Alert Workflow Perform Tasks Access the Create Alerts Page Access the Edit Alerts Page Change the Status of an Alert Copy an Alert Delete an Alert Filter the Alerts Summary Perform Common DBS Tasks View Alerts Summary View or Print Alert Detail Access the Create Alerts Page Access the Edit Alerts Page Change the Status of an Alert Copy an Alert Delete an Alert Filter the Alerts Summary Perform Common DBS Tasks View Alerts Summary View or Print Alert Detail
Alerts Create Edit Modify Processes Create or Edit an Alert Workflow Note : This workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating or editing an alert. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create or Edit an Alert Workflow. Create or Edit an Announcement Workflow Create or Edit a Calendar Event Workflow Create or Edit a Notification Workflow
To filter the Service Dashboard: To filter by service technician, from the First Technician and Second Technician drop-down lists, select one or more service technicians. Note : Filter selections apply to both the Alerts and Open ROs sections. Note : You can filter by service technician, by service advisor, or both. To filter by service advisor, from the Service Advisor drop-down list, select a service advisor. To filter by any other filter criteria, from the Filter By drop-down list, select a filter option. If a text-entry field appears, type a filter value and then click the Search icon. If a drop-down list appears, select an option from the list. Note : The Service Dashboard updates based on the criteria you have selected. Note : To remove the filter(s), click the Clear icon.
Filter the Service Dashboard To filter the Service Dashboard: To filter by service technician, from the First Technician and Second Technician drop-down lists, select one or more service technicians. Note : Filter selections apply to both the Alerts and Open ROs sections. Note : You can filter by service technician, by service advisor, or both. To filter by service advisor, from the Service Advisor drop-down list, select a service advisor. To filter by any other filter criteria, from the Filter By drop-down list, select a filter option. If a text-entry field appears, type a filter value and then click the Search icon. If a drop-down list appears, select an option from the list. Note : The Service Dashboard updates based on the criteria you have selected. Note : To remove the filter(s), click the Clear icon.
Dashboard Early Detection System (EDS) EDS: Service Dashboard EDS: Service Dashboard Service Dashboard Study Technical Service Bulletin (TSB) View the Service Dashboard Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing the Service Dashboard. You may view study alerts generated regarding vehicles that meet the criteria of informational or hold studies or technical service bulletins. You may also view open repair orders or National Service History.
Copyright Page Overview Purpose Use the Copyright page to review the policies related to the copyright, trademarks, and images of the Dealer Business System (DBS) application. Description The content area of the Copyright page displays the following sections: Copyright/Trademark Information - Displays information about the use of slogans, content, or images within DBS Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Copyright page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. View Copyright and Trademark Information View Copyright and Trademark Information Page Preview
Event Monitor Page Overview Purpose Use the Event Monitor page to view details of system events by event type, status, or date. Description The content area of the Event Monitor page displays the following sections: Events - Displays the current system events or the events based on any filter criteria entered. Events are defined by the DBS administrator. Runtime Statistic Information - Displays statistical information about the count of events matching each of the defined statuses. Information displayed is a snapshot of data at the time the Event Monitor page was accessed. Users can update the runtime statistics by clicking the Refresh link. Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Event Monitor page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Filter the Event Monitor Page Detail Re-Run a System Event View System Event Detail Filter the Event Monitor Page Detail Re-Run a System Event View System Event Detail Page Preview
To view the dealer summary: Review the list of dealers. To sort the displayed information, click the arrow beside a column title. If multiple pages exist, do one of the following to navigate from page to page: Click a page number or click the forward or backward arrow. - OR - In the Go to Page field, type a page number, and then click the Go button.
About the Dealer Summary Page To view the dealer summary: Review the list of dealers. To sort the displayed information, click the arrow beside a column title. If multiple pages exist, do one of the following to navigate from page to page: Click a page number or click the forward or backward arrow. - OR - In the Go to Page field, type a page number, and then click the Go button.
Create or Edit the Standard Operation Group Page Overview (Internal user only) Purpose Use the Create or Edit Standard Operation Group page to create or modify a standard operation group. Description The content area of the Create or Edit Standard Operation Group page displays the following sections: Standard Operation Group - Allows you to provide a name and description for a standard operation group, set the duration of the group, and indicate if the translation process needs to be re-run Key Words - Allows you to add, edit, or delete key words to be associated with the standard operation group PNC - Allows you to add, edit, or delete part number codes (PNCs) to be associated with the standard operation group Standard Operation Code - Allows you to add, edit, or delete a standard operation code to the group and assign the code to a standard operation category Standard Operation Group - Allows you to provide a name and description for a standard operation group, set the duration of the group, and indicate if the translation process needs to be re-run Key Words - Allows you to add, edit, or delete key words to be associated with the standard operation group Standard Operation Code - Allows you to add, edit, or delete a standard operation code to the group and assign the code to a standard operation category Tasks You can perform the following tasks from or on the Create or Edit Standard Operation Group page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Add a Key Word Add a PNC Add a Standard Operation Code Create or Edit Standard Operation Group Delete a Key Word Delete a PNC Delete Standard Operation Code Assignment Edit a Key Word Edit a PNC Edit a Standard Operation Code Assignment Look Up a PNC from the Standard Operation Group Page Add a Key Word Add a Standard Operation Code Create or Edit Standard Operation Group Delete a Key Word Delete Standard Operation Code Assignment Edit a Key Word Edit a Standard Operation Code Assignment Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Create or Edit Standard Operation Group page. Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes Workflow Page Preview
To view NSH (National Service History) information from the Service Dashboard or the RO Work in Progress page: Select a vehicle. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the NSH option. Note : The National Service History page opens. View the NSH for the vehicle. Note : To expand a panel, click the Plus Sign (+) beside the name of the panel. To collapse a panel, click the Minus Sign (-). Note : To print the NSH, click the Print button. To close, click the Close button.
View National Service History (NSH) from the Service Dashboard or the RO Work in Progress Page To view NSH from the Service Dashboard: From the Alerts list or from the Open ROs list, select a vehicle. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the NSH option. Note : The National Service History window opens. View the NSH for the vehicle. Note : To expand a panel, click the Plus Sign (+) beside the name of the panel. To collapse a panel, click the Minus Sign (-). Note : To print the NSH, click the Print button. To close, click the Close button. If an option is not available, that option is not displayed.
Dashboard Early Detection System (EDS) EDS: Service Dashboard EDS: Service Dashboard Service Dashboard Study Technical Service Bulletin (TSB) View the Service Dashboard Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing the Service Dashboard. You may view study alerts generated regarding vehicles that meet the criteria of informational or hold studies or technical service bulletins. You may also view open repair orders or National Service History.
Inventory Search Page Overview Purpose Use the Inventory Search page to search your dealership's inventory, another dealership's inventory, or a group of dealerships that you have defined using the parameters available on the Inventory Search page. (Internal users - select a dealership using either the dealership number or name.) You first search the inventory based on model year, model, model description, and search radius and can further filter the inventory search based on color and options. DBS allows you to view, print, and email a summary document called the Window Sticker or Vehicle Pricing Sticker that shows content, options, color, vehicle details and related data for a specific vehicle. Description The content area of the Inventory Search page displays the following: Filter - Allows you to filter the information to display only the records that match your criteria Sort by - Allows you to sort the displayed information Results - Allows you to view the search result details Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Inventory Search page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Access OMS to Trade a Vehicle from Inventory Search Access OMS to View OMS Vehicle Detail from Inventory Search Manage Vehicle Notes from Inventory Search Print Vehicle Detail from Inventory Search Search Inventory Set Custom Search Group Set the Distance Search Range View, Print, or Email Window Sticker from Inventory Search View Vehicle Detail from Inventory Search Manage Vehicle Notes from Inventory Search Print Vehicle Detail from Inventory Search Search Inventory Set Custom Search Group Set the Distance Search Range View, Print, or Email Window Sticker View Vehicle Detail from Inventory Search Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Inventory Search page: Search Vehicle Inventory Workflow Page Preview
Use the Monitor Interface page to view the status of transactions that interact with interfaces outside of DBS . Note : This task is performed by internal users only. To search for and monitor transactions: In the fields provided, select or type search options to limit the summary display. Click the Search button. View the interface information that meets the selected criteria. To prevent an excessive number of search results, provide a date or time range to limit the search results.
Search for and Monitor Transactions on the Monitor Interface Page Use the Monitor Interface page to view the status of transactions that interact with interfaces outside of DBS . Note : This task is performed by internal users only. To search for and monitor transactions on the Monitor Interface page: In the fields provided, select or type search options to limit the summary display. Click the Search button. Note : Click the Reset button to clear the search criteria entered. View the transactions that meet the selected criteria. To prevent an excessive number of search results, provide a date or time range in order to limit the search results.
View Overview Information Report Writer Page Overview Change User, Copy All, Transfer All, or Delete All Report Definitions Workflow Copy, Transfer, Delete, or Make Report Definition Public Workflow Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Workflow Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow Perform Tasks About the Reports List Access the Create Report Page Access the Generate Page Access the Modify Report Page Access the Replicate Report Page Access the View Report Page Change a Report Definition to Public or Private Change User in Report Writer Copy a Report Definition Copy All of a User's Report Definitions Delete a Report Definition Delete All of a User's Report Definitions Filter Report Writer List of Reports Perform Common DBS Tasks Transfer a Report Definition Transfer All of a User's Report Definitions View the Dealer's List of Reports (Internal Users Only) View a Report Definition About the Reports List Access the Generate Page Access the Modify Report Page Access the Replicate Report Page Access the View Report Page Change a Report Definition to Public or Private Change User in Report Writer Copy a Report Definition Copy All of a User's Report Definitions Delete a Report Definition Delete All of a User's Report Definitions Filter Report Writer List of Reports Open the Create Report Page Perform Common DBS Tasks Transfer a Report Definition Transfer All of a User's Report Definitions View the Dealer's List of Reports (Internal Users Only) View a Report Definition
Processes Report Writer Report Writer Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow generate a personalized report using Report Writer. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow. Change User in Report Writer Workflow Copy All, Transfer All, or Delete All Report Definitions Workflow Copy, Transfer, Delete, or Make Report Definition Public Workflow Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Workflow View a Host Report Workflow
Create Edit Modify Processes Report Writer Report Writer Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating, modifying, or replicating a personalized report definition in Report Writer. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create, Modify, or Replicate Report Definition Workflow. Change User in Report Writer Workflow Copy All, Transfer All, or Delete All Report Definitions Workflow Copy, Transfer, Delete, or Make a Report Definition Public Workflow Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow View a Host Report Workflow
Copy, Transfer, Delete, or Make Report Definition Public Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for copying, transferring, or deleting a report definition in Report Writer. The diagram also illustrates the workflow for changing a report definition to public or private. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Copy, Transfer, Delete, or Make Report Definition Public Workflow. Change User in Report Writer Workflow Copy All, Transfer All, or Delete All Report Definitions Workflow Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Workflow Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow View a Host Report Workflow
Copy All, Transfer All, or Delete All Report Definitions Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for copying, transferring, or deleting all of a user's report definitions in Report Writer. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Copy All, Transfer All, or Delete All Report Definitions Workflow. Change User in Report Writer Workflow Copy, Transfer, Delete, or Make Report Definition Public Workflow Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Workflow Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow View a Host Report Workflow
To look up a dealer from the Monitor Vehicle Inventory page: At the end of the Dealer field, click the Lookup icon. Note : The Dealer Lookup page appears. In the fields provided, type full or partial information, and then click the Search icon. Note : You must include an asterisk (*) when typing partial information. Note : The application displays a list of matching dealers. Note : To clear your entries, click the Clear Fields icon. Select the radio button for the desired dealer. Click the Select button. Note : To cancel the lookup, click the Cancel button and close the dialog. Note : The application displays the dealer number in the field.
Look Up a Dealer on the Monitor Vehicle Inventory Page To look up a dealer from the Monitor Vehicle Inventory page: At the end of the Dealer field, click the Lookup icon. Note : The Dealer Lookup page appears. Use the Dealer Lookup Window
View Overview Information Request for Credit (RFC) Status Page Overview View Request for Credit Status Workflow Perform Tasks Access Reports Access the View RFC Detail Page Filter Request for Credit (RFC) Status Summary Perform Common DBS Tasks Print RFC Detail View Request for Credit (RFC) Status Summary and Detail Access Reports Access the View RFC Detail Page Filter Request for Credit (RFC) Status Summary Perform Common DBS Tasks Print RFC Detail View Request for Credit (RFC) Status Summary and Detail
Applications Request for Credit RFC Request for Credit Status Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing Request for Credit (RFC) status.
Note : The cancellation reason entries appear in a drop-down list that is displayed to authorized users when they request cancellation of a parts return. The instructions below provide the steps required to add a new parts return cancellation reason. To view the steps for editing or deleting a cancellation reason, click the Step by Step tab in full help. To add a parts return cancellation reason: At the bottom of the Manage Part Return Schedule page, click the Cancellation Reason Maintenance button. Note : The Cancellation Reason window appears. In the blank field at the top of the window, type the cancellation reason name. Click the Add icon.
Manage Parts Return Schedule Cancellation Reasons Note : The cancellation reason entries appear in a drop-down list that is displayed to authorized users when they request cancellation of a parts return. The instructions below provide the steps required to add a new parts return cancellation reason, edit an existing cancellation reason, and delete a cancellation reason. Add a Parts Return Cancellation Reason To add a parts return cancellation reason: At the bottom of the Manage Part Return Schedule page, click the Cancellation Reason Maintenance button. Note : The Cancellation Reason window appears. In the blank field at the top of the window, type the cancellation reason name. Click the Add icon. Edit a Parts Return Cancellation Reason To edit a parts return cancellation reason: At the bottom of the Manage Part Return Schedule page, click the Cancellation Reason Maintenance button. Note : The Cancellation Reason window appears. Select the cancellation reason you want to edit. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Edit menu option. In the Cancellation Reason field, edit the cancellation reason as desired. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Save menu option to save your changes. Note : Select the Cancel menu option to cancel your changes. Delete a Parts Return Cancellation Reason To delete a parts return cancellation reason: At the bottom of the Manage Part Return Schedule page, click the Cancellation Reason Maintenance button. Note : The Cancellation Reason window appears. Select the cancellation reason you want to delete. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Delete menu option. Click the Yes button to confirm, or click the No button to cancel the deletion.
To view the dealer operation code summary: View the list of codes. To sort the displayed information, click the arrow beside a column title.
About the Dealer Operation Code Summary To view the dealer operation code summary: View the list of codes. To sort the displayed information, click the arrow beside a column title.
Dealer Operation Code Dealer Operation Codes ReRun Dealer Operation Codes Translation Manage Dealer Operation Codes Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing dealer operation codes. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Dealer Operation Codes Workflow. Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes Workflow Manage Standard Operation Categories Workflow Manage Standard Operation Codes Workflow
Using DBS Help This Help page contains information about using Dealer Business System (DBS) Help. There are several ways to find the information that you need. Use the following features to navigate DBS Help. Icon Description ( Page Help ) On a DBS application page, opens a drop-down list offering access to context-sensitive help and to full help. Internet Explorer users can also press the F10 key to open the context-sensitive help. ( Help ) On a page within full help, displays this Help page. ( Home ) Displays the "Welcome to the Dealer Business System (DBS) " introduction page. ( Back ) ( Forward ) Returns to the previously viewed Help topic. Progresses to the next page within your viewing history. ( Print Page ) Prints a copy of a displayed Help topic. Note : You may need to adjust your printer settings for optimal display of the printed help content. ( Search ) Searches DBS full help to find topics that include the searched item. Type a word, phrase, or acronym in the Search field and click the Search icon. Topics highlight all occurrences of the searched item. ( Keywords ) Displays the Help index. Click a letter to view a list of keywords, phrases, or acronyms beginning with that letter. Click an item from the list to display a list of topics that include the indexed item. ( Explorer ) Displays the table of contents. ( Open all ) ( Close all ) Opens a list of topics displayed in the left-hand pane. Closes a list of topics displayed in the left-hand pane. DBS Help contains the following menu tabs. Click a tab to view a list of related topics in the left-hand pane. Select a topic from the list to display its content in the right-hand pane. Menu Description Home Provides general information about DBS , including overviews of the application pages accessed by all users and task instructions for customizing DBS , help and support, and navigation features. Sales Provides information about the vehicle sales application within DBS , including overviews of the application pages in Sales, workflows, task instructions, and information about viewing reports. Service Provides information about the service application within DBS , including overviews of the application pages in Service, workflows, task instructions, and information about viewing reports. Parts Provides information about the parts application within DBS , including overviews of the application pages in Parts, workflows, task instructions, and information about viewing reports. Office Provides information about the business office application within DBS , including overviews of the application pages in Office, workflows, task instructions, and descriptions information about viewing reports. Administration Provides information about the overall DBS application, including instructions for system administration and for maintaining user and dealership information, and information about viewing reports.
To look up a part from the Parts Order Management page: At the end of the Part Number field, click the Lookup icon. Note : The Part Lookup page appears. In the fields provided, type full or partial information. Note : You must include an asterisk (*) when typing partial information. Note : To remove search criteria, click the Clear icon. Click the Search icon. Note : DCS displays a list of records matching the search criteria in the Parts section. Select the part. Note : DCS displays part detail in the Part Detail section. To determine if the part is superseded, scroll down in the Part Detail section. Note : If a " Y " appears in the Supersession Flag field, the part is superseded. Note : The new part number appears in the New Part field above the Supersession Flag field. If the part is superseded, copy the value in the New Part field, paste it into the Part Number field, and repeat steps 3-6. To select the part, click the Select button. Note : To cancel the lookup, click the Cancel button.
Look Up a Part from the Parts Order Management Page To look up a part from the Parts Order Management page:
Manage Orders Manage Orders Manage Orders Manage Orders Parts Order Management Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing parts orders. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Parts Order workflow. Create Parts Order Workflow Edit Parts Order Workflow Inquire on the Availability of Parts at the Parts Distribution Centers Workflow View Parts Order Workflow Create Parts Order Workflow Edit Parts Order Workflow View Parts Order Workflow
View Overview Information Study Dashboard Page Overview Define or Modify a Study Workflow Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow View One Study Result Workflow View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow Perform Tasks Access a Study to View Results Access Hold Study Result Page Access the Create Study Page to Create a Study Access the Create Study Page to Modify a Study Delete a Study Export Study Dashboard Information Filter the Study Dashboard Perform Common DBS Tasks Print Study Criteria Print Study Results Restart a Study Suspend a Study View the Study Dashboard Access a Study to View Results Access Hold Study Result Page Access the Create Study Page to Create a Study Access the Create Study Page to Modify a Study Delete a Study Export Study Dashboard Information Filter the Study Dashboard Perform Common DBS Tasks Print Study Criteria Print Study Results Restart a Study Suspend a Study View the Study Dashboard
Dashboard Early Detection System (EDS) EDS: Study Dashboard Processes EDS: Study Dashboard Study Study Dashboard View View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow Note : The View a Dealer's Study Results workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing one dealer's study results that integrate appointment and repair order data collected by the Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the View a Dealer's Study Results workflow. Define or Modify a Study Workflow Manage Early Detection Studies Workflow View One Study Result Workflow
Dashboard Early Detection System (EDS) EDS: Study Dashboard Processes EDS: Study Dashboard Study Study Dashboard View View One Study Result Workflow Note : The View One Study Result workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing a study that integrates appointment and repair order data collected by the Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the View One Study Result workflow. Define or Modify Study Workflow Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow
Dashboard Early Detection System (EDS) Hold Status Processes Study View Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow Note: The Manage Early Detection System Studies workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing Early Detection System (EDS) studies that integrate appointment and repair order data collected by the Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow. Define or Modify a Study Workflow View One Study Result Workflow View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow
Early Detection System (EDS) EDS: Study Dashboard Processes EDS: Study Dashboard Study Study Dashboard Technical Service Bulletin (TSB) Create or Modify a Study Workflow Note : The Create or Modify a Study workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for defining or modifying a study that integrates appointment and repair order data collected by the Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Define or Modify a Study Workflow. Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow View One Study Result Workflow
View Overview Information Support Page Overview Perform Tasks Perform Common DBS Tasks View DBS System Requirements Perform Common DBS Tasks View DBS System Requirements
To open the Create Standard Operation Category page: Click the Create button. Note : The Create Standard Operation Category page opens.
Open the Create Standard Operation Category Page To open the Create Standard Operation Category page: Click the Create button. Note : The Create Standard Operation Category page opens.
ReRun Standard Operation Category Translation Manage Standard Operation Categories Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing and creating standard operation categories. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Standard Operation Categories Workflow. Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes Workflow Manage Dealer Operation Codes Workflow Manage Standard Operation Codes Workflow
Note : This task applies to internal users only. To configure DSP STAR Web services: From the DSP List drop-down list, select a vendor. Check the boxes to select the applications and the STAR web services that a DSP vendor is allowed to access. Click the Save button. Note : If you click the Save button, a confirmation widow appears. Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving.
Configure DSP STAR Web Services Note : This task applies to internal users only. To configure Dealer Service Provider (DSP) Standards for Technology in Automotive Retail (STAR) web services: From the DSP List drop-down list, select the Dealer Management System (DMS) vendor for whom you desire to configure the STAR web services. Note : Dealer Business System (DBS) displays the available services based on the DSP you selected. Note : Use the function tree to expand or collapse the nodes, as desired. Check the boxes to select the applications and the STAR web services that a DSP vendor is allowed to access. Note : When you select or clear a service at the highest level, all items under that level are selected or cleared. Click the Save button to save the selected STAR web services or click Cancel to cancel your selections. If you clicked the Save button, the following confirmation window appears. Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Note: If you click the Cancel button, a cancel confirmation window appears. Click the Yes button to confirm, or click the No button to close the window without confirming.
View Position Permissions Page Overview Note : The Position Permissions page applies to internal users only. Purpose Use the View Position Permissions page to view permissions for a selected position. Description The content area of the View Position Permissions page displays the following sections: Quick Jump menu - Appears on the left-hand side of the page. The Quick Jump menu allows you to show one section at a time, or show or hide the default view for all sections. Permission Function Tree - By default, the function tree expands two sections: Menu and User Information. The function tree also includes a Host Report section and a Report Writer section. Use the + and - icons to show or hide a section. Use the expand all | collapse all features to expand or collapse a section. Cancel button - Returns you to the Position Summary page Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the View Position Permissions page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Use the Quick Jump Menu View Position Permissions Use the Quick Jump Menu View Position Permissions Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflow are performed on the View Position Permissions page. View Position Permissions Workflow Page Preview
To export hold status summary information: At the bottom of the Early Detection System panel, click the Hold Status Summary link. Note: The Hold Study Result page opens. Click the Export button and select Excel . Note: The File Download window opens. Click the Save button and proceed as you normally would to save the file to your local drive. You can filter, sort, and print the data if you export the information to Microsoft ® Excel ® .
Export Hold Status Summary Information To export hold status summary information: At the bottom of the Early Detection System panel, click the Hold Status Summary link. Note: The Hold Study Result page opens. Click the Export button and select Excel . Note: The File Download window opens. Click the Save button and proceed as you normally would to save the file to your local drive. You can filter, sort, and print the data if you export the information to Microsoft® Excel®.
Dashboard Early Detection System (EDS) Hold Status Processes Study View Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow Note: The Manage Early Detection System Studies workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing Early Detection System (EDS) studies that integrate appointment and repair order data collected by the Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow. Define or Modify a Study Workflow View One Study Result Workflow View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow
Dashboard Early Detection System (EDS) EDS: Study Dashboard Processes EDS: Study Dashboard Study Study Dashboard View View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow Note : The View a Dealer's Study Results workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing one dealer's study results that integrate appointment and repair order data collected by the Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the View a Dealer's Study Results workflow. Define or Modify a Study Workflow Manage Early Detection Studies Workflow View One Study Result Workflow
Dashboard Early Detection System (EDS) EDS: Study Dashboard Processes EDS: Study Dashboard Study Study Dashboard View View One Study Result Workflow Note : The View One Study Result workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing a study that integrates appointment and repair order data collected by the Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the View One Study Result workflow. Define or Modify Study Workflow Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow
To add a part number code (PNC) to a standard operation group: Type or look up the PNC. Note : To learn how to look up a PNC, click here . Click the Add icon. Note : Each PNC must be unique. If a PNC already exists for a group, DBS displays a red icon to indicate the PNC is a duplicate. Note : The PNC appears in the PNC list.
Add a Part Number Code (PNC) To add a part number code (PNC): Type or look up the PNC. Note: To learn how to look up a PNC, click here . Click the Add icon. Note : Each PNC must be unique. If a PNC already exists for a group, DBS displays a red icon to indicate the PNC is a duplicate. Note : The PNC appears in the PNC list.
Standard Operation Codes Standard Operation Code Standard Operation Codes Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating or editing standard operation groups and codes. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes workflow. Manage Dealer Operation Codes Workflow Manage Standard Operation Categories Workflow Manage Standard Operation Codes Workflow
To add a part number code (PNC) to a standard operation group: Type or look up the PNC. Note : To learn how to look up a PNC, click here . Click the Add icon. Note : Each PNC must be unique. If a PNC already exists for a group, DBS displays a red icon to indicate the PNC is a duplicate. Note : The PNC appears in the PNC list.
Add a Part Number Code (PNC) To add a part number code (PNC): Type or look up the PNC. Note: To learn how to look up a PNC, click here . Click the Add icon. Note : Each PNC must be unique. If a PNC already exists for a group, DBS displays a red icon to indicate the PNC is a duplicate. Note : The PNC appears in the PNC list.
Standard Operation Codes Standard Operation Code Standard Operation Codes Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating or editing standard operation groups and codes. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes workflow. Manage Dealer Operation Codes Workflow Manage Standard Operation Categories Workflow Manage Standard Operation Codes Workflow
Create or Edit Alerts Page Overview Purpose Use the Create Alerts page to create a new alert or the Edit Alerts page to edit an existing alert. Description The content area of the Create Alerts page or Edit Alerts page displays the following sections: Settings - Allows you to determine the page where the alert will display and the display language for the alert Recipients - Allows you to select the internal and dealer users who will be able to view the alert Alert Details - Allows you to type the alert title, content, and the date and time for it to display Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Create Alerts page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Create or Edit an Alert Select Recipients Create or Edit an Alert Select Recipients Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Create Alerts page. Create or Edit an Alert Workflow Page Preview
Standard Operation Category Page Overview Purpose Use the Standard Operation Category page to view and manage standard operation categories. Description The content area of the Standard Operation Category page displays the following sections: Search by - Allows you to search for records that match your criteria Note : The New button to open the Create Standard Operation Category page is also located in this section. Summary - Displays general information for all records on the page Detail - Displays specific information for a selected record Tasks You can perform the following tasks from or on the Standard Operation Category page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks . Access the Create Standard Operation Category Page Access the Edit Standard Operation Category Page Delete a Standard Operation Category Search the Standard Operation Category Summary View the Standard Operation Category Summary and Detail Access the Create Standard Operation Category Page Access the Edit Standard Operation Category Page Delete a Standard Operation Category Search the Standard Operation Category Summary View the Standard Operation Category Summary and Detail Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Standard Operation Category page. Manage Standard Operation Categories Workflow Page Preview
View Overview Information Edit Position Permissions Page Overview Edit Position Permissions Workflow Perform Tasks Grant or Remove Access to a Host Report Grant or Remove Access to a Page, Action, Custom Field, or Website Grant or Remove Access to a Report Writer View Grant or Remove Full Access to a Menu and Its Contents Perform Common DBS Tasks Use the Quick Jump Menu View Position Permissions Grant or Remove Access to a Host Report Grant or Remove Access to a Page, Action, Custom Field, or Website Grant or Remove Access to a Report Writer View Grant or Remove Full Access to a Menu and Its Contents Perform Common DBS Tasks Use the Quick Jump Menu View Position Permissions
Edit Positions Position Position Permissions Positions Processes Edit Position Permissions Workflow Note : This workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for editing position permissions. Related Workflows The following workflow may have one or more tasks in common with the Edit Position Permissions Workflow. View Position Permissions Workflow
To export the Parts Return Summary page information: If desired, click one of the columns in the summary graph or filter the information to reduce the amount of information displayed. Click the Export to Excel button. Follow your browser-specific instructions to open, save, or print the file.
Export Information on the Parts Return Summary Page To export the Parts Return Summary page information: If desired, click one of the columns in the summary graph, or filter the information to reduce the amount of information displayed. Click the Export to Excel button. Follow your browser-specific instructions to open, save, or print the file.
To complete the Buyer section of a used vehicle RDR: From the Title drop-down list, select a title. Enter or update the customer name, address, and contact information. Note : If you select "Commercial Account" from the Title drop-down list, you must enter the company name and details instead of the customer details. Note : Type all 9s in the Daytime or Evening field if the customer does not have a phone. In the Email field, type the customer email address. Note : Type three asterisks (*) if the customer does not have an email address. Complete the Driver section of the RDR. Click here for more information.
Complete the Driver Section of a Used Vehicle RDR To complete the Buyer section of a used vehicle RDR: If the driver address is the same as the customer address, select the Driver address is the same as Customer address checkbox. Note : DBS populates the title, name, address, and email fields with the information entered in the Buyer section. If necessary, from the Title drop-down list, select a title. Enter or update the customer name, address, and contact information. Note : If you select "Commercial Account" from the Title drop-down list, you must enter the company name and details instead of the customer details. Note : Type all 9s in the Daytime or Evening field if the customer does not have a phone. In the Email field, type the customer email address. Note : Type three asterisks (*) if the customer does not have an email address. Complete the Finance section of the RDR. Click here for more information.
Edit Dealer Information Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for editing dealer information. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Edit Dealer Information Workflow. View Dealer Information or Permissions Workflow
To submit a new or open parts order from the Parts Order Management page: Select the parts order. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Submit option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to submit the parts order for approval or fulfillment, or click the No button to close the confirmation message without submitting the parts order. Note : If the parts order contains errors, a warning message appears. Note : If the parts order contains warnings, click the Yes button to submit the parts order, or click the No button to close the confirmation message without submitting the parts order. A parts order must contain header information and at least one detail line before you can submit it. To submit a parts order, the order must be in "New" or "Open" status. If errors exists on the parts order, you must resolve the errors before you can submit the order successfully. You can submit a parts order with warning messages. For VOR and TOS orders, you cannot submit an order that contains more than 40 detail lines. If duplicate orders exist, and one has already been submitted, you must change the dealer reference number for any of the unsubmitted duplicates. After submission, the status of the parts order shows "Submitted" and the order status date reflects the current date.
Submit a Parts Order To submit a new or open parts order from the Parts Order Management page: Select the parts order. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Submit Order option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to submit the parts order for approval or fulfillment, or click the No button to close the confirmation message without submitting the parts order. Note : If the parts order contains errors, a warning message appears. Note : If the parts order contains warnings, click the Yes button to submit the parts order, or click the No button to close the confirmation message without submitting the parts order. A parts order must contain header information and at least one detail line before you can submit it. To submit a parts order, the order must be in "New" or "Open" status. If errors exists on the parts order, you must resolve the errors before you can submit the order successfully. You can submit a parts order with warning messages. For VOR and TOS orders, you cannot submit an order that contains more than 40 detail lines. If duplicate orders exist, and one has already been submitted, you must change the dealer reference number for any of the unsubmitted duplicates. After submission, the status of the parts order shows "Submitted" and the order status date reflects the current date.
Manage Orders Manage Orders Manage Orders Manage Orders Parts Order Management Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing parts orders. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Parts Order workflow. Create Parts Order Workflow Edit Parts Order Workflow Inquire on the Availability of Parts at the Parts Distribution Centers Workflow View Parts Order Workflow Create Parts Order Workflow Edit Parts Order Workflow View Parts Order Workflow
To select a dealer: From the Dealer drop-down list, select a dealer. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm, or click the No button to close the window without confirming. Only those dealerships you have access rights to will display in the dealer list. If you have access to only one dealership, you will not see the Dealer drop-down list.
Select a Dealer To select a dealer : From the Dealer drop-down list, select a dealer. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Continue button to confirm, or click the Cancel button to close the window without confirming. Only those dealerships you have access rights to will display in the dealer list. If you have access to only one dealership, you will not see the Dealer drop-down list.
To access OMS to view OMS vehicle detail from the Inventory Search page: Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon for the selected vehicle. From the Action menu, select the OMS Vehicle Detail option. Note : The OMS Vehicle Detail option is only available to users who have access to the OMS application. Note : The external OMS application opens. After viewing the vehicle detail, click the Close button to close OMS and return to DBS .
Access OMS to View OMS Vehicle Detail from Inventory Search To access OMS to view OMS vehicle detail from the Inventory Search page: Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon for the selected vehicle. From the Action menu, select the OMS Vehicle Detail option. Note : The OMS Vehicle Detail option is only available to users who have access to the OMS application. Note : The external OMS application opens. After viewing the vehicle detail, click the Close button to close OMS and return to DBS .
Inventory Search Inventory Search Processes Search Inventory Search Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for searching and viewing inventory for a particular vehicle model with specified features and options. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Inventory Search workflow. Vehicle Inventory Workflow
To export the position permissions currently in the system: Click the Export button. Note : The Download dialog appears. Open or save the file using your browser-specific instructions.
Export Position Permissions Currently in the System To export the position permissions currently in the system: Click the Export button. Note : The Downloads dialog appears. Open or save the file using your browser-specific instructions.
To re-run the translation process for a dealer operation code, from the Service menu, select Manage Dealer Operation Code : Above the Dealer Operation Code Summary list, click the Re-Run button. Note : The Re-Run Confirmation window opens. In the Re-Run Confirmation window, click the Re-Run button. Note : A message indicates the translation process is running, then a second message appears stating the translation process has completed successfully Click the Close button to close the Re-Run Confirmation window. Note: The system updates the re-translated Repair Order (RO) lines in the National Service History (NSH) RO table with a standard operation code and the re-translation date. Use Report Writer to create a report of the National Service History (NSH) RO table to review the re-translation results.
Re-Run Translation Process - Dealer Operation Code To re-run the translation process for a dealer operation code: Click the Re-Run button. Note : The Re-Run Confirmation window opens. In the Re-Run Confirmation window, click the OK button. Note : The system updates the re-translated repair order (RO) lines in the National Service History (NSH) RO table with a standard operation code and the re-translation date. Use Report Writer to create a report of the National Service History (NSH) RO table to review the re-translation results.
Dealer Operation Code Dealer Operation Codes ReRun Dealer Operation Codes Translation Manage Dealer Operation Codes Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing dealer operation codes. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Dealer Operation Codes Workflow. Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes Workflow Manage Standard Operation Categories Workflow Manage Standard Operation Codes Workflow
To add a standard operation code: In the Standard Op Code field, type an operation code. In the Description field, type a description of the operation code. From the Category drop-down list, select a category. Note : Click here for instructions on how to add a category to the drop-down list. Click the Add icon to add the code or click the Clear icon to clear the code and then add a different one. Note : Each operation code must be unique. If an operation code already exists, DBS displays a red icon to indicate the operation code is a duplicate. Click Save to save the changes you made.
Add a Standard Operation Code To add a standard operation code: In the Standard Op Code field, type an operation code. In the Description field, type a description of the operation code. From the Category drop-down list, select a category. Note : Click here for instructions on how to add a category to the drop-down list. Click the Add icon to add the code or click the Clear icon to clear the code and then add a different one. Note : Each operation code must be unique. If an operation code already exists, DBS displays a red icon to indicate the operation code is a duplicate. Click Save to save the changes you made.
Standard Operation Codes Standard Operation Code Standard Operation Codes Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating or editing standard operation groups and codes. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes workflow. Manage Dealer Operation Codes Workflow Manage Standard Operation Categories Workflow Manage Standard Operation Codes Workflow
To add a standard operation code: In the Standard Op Code field, type an operation code. In the Description field, type a description of the operation code. From the Category drop-down list, select a category. Note : Click here for instructions on how to add a category to the drop-down list. Click the Add icon to add the code or click the Clear icon to clear the code and then add a different one. Note : Each operation code must be unique. If an operation code already exists, DBS displays a red icon to indicate the operation code is a duplicate. Click Save to save the changes you made.
Add a Standard Operation Code To add a standard operation code: In the Standard Op Code field, type an operation code. In the Description field, type a description of the operation code. From the Category drop-down list, select a category. Note : Click here for instructions on how to add a category to the drop-down list. Click the Add icon to add the code or click the Clear icon to clear the code and then add a different one. Note : Each operation code must be unique. If an operation code already exists, DBS displays a red icon to indicate the operation code is a duplicate. Click Save to save the changes you made.
Standard Operation Codes Standard Operation Code Standard Operation Codes Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating or editing standard operation groups and codes. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes workflow. Manage Dealer Operation Codes Workflow Manage Standard Operation Categories Workflow Manage Standard Operation Codes Workflow
To create a parts return: If desired, from the Return Period drop-down list, select the return date. Note : You can only choose between the current month and future month due dates. Select the type of return. Type a reference number. Note : If the system displays a "Duplicate Suffix" message, you must change the reference number to a unique value. Type a valid part number or perform a part lookup. Note : Click here for information on how to look up a part. Type the return quantity. Note : The return quantity must be a multiple of the unit pack. For example, if the unit pack is 15, you must specify a return quantity of 15, 30, 45, and so on. To add the part to the parts return, click the Add button. To save the parts return without submitting it, click the Save button. To save the parts return and submit it immediately, click the Submit button. To submit a parts return, the return must be in "New," "Open," or blank status. You cannot submit a parts return to the host more than five days before the return due date.
Create a Parts Return To create a parts return: If desired, from the Return Period drop-down list, select the return date. Note : You can only choose between the current month and future month due dates. From the Return Type drop-down list, select the type of return. In the Dealer Return Ref # field, type a unique reference number. Note : If the system displays a "Duplicate Suffix" message, you must change the reference number to a unique value. In the Part Number field, type a valid part number or perform a part lookup. Note : Click here for information on how to look up a part. In the Return Quantity field, type the quantity. Note : The return quantity must be a multiple of the unit pack. For example, if the unit pack is 15, you must specify a return quantity of 15, 30, 45, and so on. In the Box Number field, type the box number where the part is located. To add the part to the parts return, click the Add button. Note : If an error icon appears, move your mouse over the icon to view and correct any errors. To save the parts return without submitting it, click the Save button. Note : You can modify or delete parts from the parts return after you save it but before you submit it. Click here for more information on how to modify a detail line before submitting the parts return. Click here for more information on how to delete a part before submitting the parts return. To save the parts return and submit it immediately, click the Submit button. To create a parts return: From the Return Type drop-down list, select the type of return. In the Dealer Return Ref # field, type a reference number. Note : If the system displays a "Duplicate Suffix" message, you must change the dealer return reference number to a unique value. In the Part Number field, type a valid part number or perform a part lookup. Note : Click here for information on how to look up a part. In the Return Quantity field, type the quantity. To add the detail line to the parts return, click the Add button. To save the parts return without submitting it, click the Save button. Note : You can modify or delete parts from the parts return after you save it but before you submit it. Note : Click here for more information on how to modify a detail line before submitting the parts return. Note : Click here for more information on how to delete a detail line before submitting the parts return. To save the parts return and submit it immediately, click the Submit button. To submit a parts return, the return must be in "New" or "Open" status. You cannot submit a parts return to the host more than five days before the return due date.
Create Return Create Return Create Return Create Parts Return Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating a parts return. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create Parts Return Workflow. Manage Parts Return Workflow Modify Parts Return Workflow
Create or Modify a Study Workflow Note : The Create or Modify a Study workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for defining or modifying a study that integrates appointment and repair order data collected by the Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Define or Modify a Study Workflow. Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow View One Study Result Workflow
To complete the Dealer Data section of a study: By default, studies capture information about service appointments and repair orders. To limit the results displayed, in the Data Source field, select the radio button for the type of data to capture. Note : If you select the Service Appointment radio button, some study options will no longer be available, as they capture data pertaining to repair orders. If the data source includes repair orders, you can filter the data collected by warranty claim pay type by selecting one or more of the checkboxes in the Pay Type field. To further limit the data collected, you can use the filter criteria fields to customize the conditions under which data is collected for the study. For example: in the graphic above, a filter has been created to study only those vehicles with a mileage (odometer) reading of less than 50,000. To add additional filters, click the Plus sign. In the Data Source Criteria field, you can type custom query statements to search for specific statements found in the comments section of a repair order. Click the Save button. Open full help and click the Details tab for additional information on constructing custom data source criteria. Open full help and click the Details tab for additional information on constructing custom data source criteria.
Complete the Dealer Data Section of a Study To complete the Dealer Data section of a study: By default, studies capture information about service appointments and repair orders. To limit the results displayed, in the Data Source field, select the radio button for the type of data to capture. Note : If you select the Service Appointment radio button, some study options will no longer be available, as they capture data pertaining to repair orders. If the data source includes repair orders, you can filter the data collected by warranty claim pay type by selecting one or more of the checkboxes in the Pay Type field. To further limit the data collected, you can use the filter criteria fields to customize the conditions under which data is collected for the study. For example: in the graphic above, a filter has been created to study only those vehicles with a mileage (odometer) reading of less than 50,000. To add additional filters, click the Plus sign. In the Data Source Criteria field, you can type custom query statements to search for specific statements found in the comments section of a repair order. Example Results "brake" Use quotation marks to define a search string. Searches for all instances of the word "brake" in the RO data fields. Results would include any and all instances of the word "brake" and may result in a large volume of data returned. To limit your search results, use a multi-word search string such as "brake pad" to find only the repair orders or appointments for brake pads. "brake" AND "squeal" Use the operator AND to return search results with both terms in quotations. "BRAKE" AND "SQUEAL" would return only results where both words were found in the data fields. This would eliminate results for "brake pads", "brakes", or "breaking". "brake" OR "squeal" Use the operator OR to return search results with either of the terms in quotations. "BRAKE" OR "SQUEAL" would return all of the instances of the word "brake" and all of the instances of the word "squeal". "brake" AND ("squeal" OR "noise" OR "rattle") In this example, the parenthesis act as a container for the evaluation of multiple criteria. The results returned would include any data where the word "brake" was found together with "squeal", "noise", or "rattle." Click the Save button.
Early Detection System (EDS) EDS: Study Dashboard Processes EDS: Study Dashboard Study Study Dashboard Technical Service Bulletin (TSB) Create or Modify a Study Workflow Note : The Create or Modify a Study workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for defining or modifying a study that integrates appointment and repair order data collected by the Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Define or Modify a Study Workflow. Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow View One Study Result Workflow
To submit a parts order from the Create or Edit Parts Order page: Click the Submit button. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm the submission, or the No button to cancel the submission. You can submit a parts order with warning messages, but you must resolve all error messages before you submit the order.
Submit a Parts Order from the Create or Edit Parts Order Page To submit a parts order from the Create or Edit Parts Order page: Click the Submit button. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm the submission, or the No button to cancel the submission. You can submit a parts order with warning messages, but you must resolve all error messages before you can submit an order..
Create Create Order Create SVC Order Create Order Create Order Create SVC Order Create Order Create Order Create Order Create SVC Order Create Create Order Create Parts Order Workflow *** Nissan Canada Inc. (NCI) recommends dealers create parts orders in an NCI DBS certified dealer management system and then log into NCI DBS to review and submit the order to NCI. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating a parts order. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create Parts Order Workflow. Edit Parts Order Workflow Manage Parts Order Workflow Inquire on the Availability of Parts at the Parts Distribution Centers Workflow View Parts Order Workflow Edit Parts Order Workflow Manage Parts Order Workflow View Parts Order Workflow
Edit Edit Order Edit Order Edit SVC Order Edit Order Edit Order Edit SVC Order Edit Order Edit Order Edit Order Edit SVC Order Edit Order Edit Order Edit Parts Order Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for modifying an existing new or open parts order. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Edit Parts Order Workflow. Create Parts Order Workflow Manage Parts Order Workflow Inquire on the Availability of Parts at the Parts Distribution Centers Workflow View Parts Order Workflow
Parts Return and Accrual Information Quick Reference Guide Parts Return and Accrual Information quick reference guide provides instructions for dealers on how to access and review their parts return schedule and accrual information. Click here to view the Parts Return and Accrual Information quick reference guide.
Parts Return and Accrual Information Quick Reference Guide Parts Return and Accrual Information quick reference guide provides instructions for dealers on how to access and review their parts return schedule and accrual information. Click here to view the Parts Return and Accrual Information quick reference guide.
Parts Return and Accrual Information Quick Reference Guide Parts Return and Accrual Information quick reference guide provides instructions for dealers on how to access and review their parts return schedule and accrual information. Click here to view the Parts Return and Accrual Information quick reference guide.
To delete a report definition: Select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Delete option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm and save, or click the No button to close the window without saving.
Delete a Report Definition To delete a report definition: In the List of Reports section, select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Delete option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm and save, or click the No button to close the window without saving.
To delete a report definition: Select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Delete option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm and save, or click the No button to close the window without saving.
Delete a Report Definition To delete a report definition: In the List of Reports section, select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Delete option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm and save, or click the No button to close the window without saving.
To delete a report definition: Select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Delete option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm and save, or click the No button to close the window without saving.
Delete a Report Definition To delete a report definition: In the List of Reports section, select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Delete option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm and save, or click the No button to close the window without saving.
To delete a report definition: Select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Delete option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm and save, or click the No button to close the window without saving.
Delete a Report Definition To delete a report definition: In the List of Reports section, select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Delete option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm and save, or click the No button to close the window without saving.
To delete a report definition: Select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Delete option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm and save, or click the No button to close the window without saving.
Delete a Report Definition To delete a report definition: In the List of Reports section, select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Delete option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm and save, or click the No button to close the window without saving.
Users should always log out of the system when they are finished or have completed their daily tasks and functions. It is also necessary to ensure security of user and Nissan information. To log out of the Dealer Business System (DBS) : Click the Log Out link. Note : The DBS application closes and the Dealer Portal / NNAnet.com page appears.
Log Out of DBS To log out of DBS : Click the Log Out link. Note : The DBS application closes and the Dealer Portal / NNAnet.com page appears.
Administration Landing Page Overview Purpose Use the Administration landing page to view alerts, Quick Look information about key metrics, announcements, and other news related to the administration function. Description The content area of the Administration landing page displays the following sections: Alerts - Appear at the top of the landing page, if applicable. The Alert messages continually scroll across the top of the page, when applicable. Alerts typically provide information that is system critical. Announcements - Contains national and regional announcements that are specific to administration. The highest-priority announcements appear in the Regional or National Announcements section, if applicable. The remaining announcements display in the Other News section. Other News - Displays the announcements that are not as high priority. When an announcement is no longer one of the high-priority announcements, the announcement automatically moves to the Other News section. Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Administration landing page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. View Alerts View Announcements and Other News View Alerts View Announcements and Other News Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Administration Landing page. Configure DSP STAR Web Services Workflow Create or Edit an Alert Workflow Create or Edit an Announcement Workflow Create or Edit a Calendar Event Workflow Create or Edit a Notification Workflow Search for Transactions Workflow Set Up or Edit Dealer Permissions Workflow Set Up or Edit Position Permissions Workflow Set Up or Edit User Permissions Workflow View Dealer Information or Permissions Workflow View Position Permissions Workflow View User Permissions Workflow Page Preview
At the very least, you must select a return year and click the Search icon to filter the Manage Part Return Schedule page. You may select additional options from the Region, Area, District, and Dealer drop-down lists to limit the results displayed. To filter the Manage Part Return Schedule page: From the Return Year drop-down list, select the desired year. From the Region drop-down list, select the desired region. From the Area drop-down list, select the desired area. From the District drop-down list, select the desired district. From the Dealer drop-down list, select the desired dealer. Click the Search icon to view the list of dealers that meet the selected criteria. Note : To reset the filter criteria to the default options and clear the search criteria, click the Clear icon.
Filter the Manage Part Return Schedule Page At the very least, you must select a return year and click the Search icon to filter the Manage Part Return Schedule page. You may select additional options from the Region, Area, District, and Dealer drop-down lists to limit the results displayed. To filter the Manage Part Return Schedule page: From the Return Year drop-down list, select the desired year. Note : Information is available for the current return year, future return year, and a minimum of twenty-four previous months. The number of previous months can be increased by the System Administrator on the Maintain Purge Rules page. From the Region drop-down list, select the desired region. From the Area drop-down list, select the desired area. From the District drop-down list, select the desired district. From the Dealer drop-down list, select the desired dealer. Click the Search icon to view the list of dealers that meet the selected criteria. Note : To reset the filter criteria to the default options and clear the search criteria, click the Clear icon.
View Overview Information One Study Result Page Overview Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow View One Study Result Workflow Perform Tasks Access One Dealer's Study Results Perform Common DBS Tasks View NSH for a Vehicle in a Study View One Study Result View Repair Order Access One Dealer's Study Results Perform Common DBS Tasks View NSH for a Vehicle in a Study View One Study Result View Repair Order DBS
Dashboard Early Detection System (EDS) EDS: Study Dashboard Processes EDS: Study Dashboard Study Study Dashboard View View One Study Result Workflow Note : The View One Study Result workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing a study that integrates appointment and repair order data collected by the Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the View One Study Result workflow. Define or Modify Study Workflow Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow
Dashboard Early Detection System (EDS) Hold Status Processes Study View Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow Note: The Manage Early Detection System Studies workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing Early Detection System (EDS) studies that integrate appointment and repair order data collected by the Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow. Define or Modify a Study Workflow View One Study Result Workflow View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow
View Overview Information Create Study Page Overview Create or Modify a Study Workflow Perform Tasks Complete Sections of a Study Complete the Basic Information Section of a Study Complete the Body Type Section of a Study Complete the Climatic Zone Section of a Study Complete the Dealer Data Section of a Study Complete the Dealers Section of a Study Complete the Engine Code Section of a Study Complete the Engine Type Section of a Study Complete the Manufacture Date Section of a Study Complete the Miscellaneous Features Section of a Study Complete the Model/Series Section of a Study Complete the Model Year Section of a Study Complete the Notifications Section of a Study Complete the Options Section of a Study Complete the Production Plant Section of a Study Complete the Regions Section of a Study Complete the Report Section of a Study Complete the States/Provinces Section of a Study Complete the Study Type Section of a Study Complete the Transmission Type Section of a Study Complete the TSB Section of a Study Complete the VIN Range (Serial) Section of a Study Create or Modify a Study Perform Common DBS Tasks Complete Sections of a Study Complete the Basic Information Section of a Study Complete the Body Type Section of a Study Complete the Climatic Zone Section of a Study Complete the Dealer Data Section of a Study Complete the Dealers Section of a Study Complete the Engine Code Section of a Study Complete the Engine Type Section of a Study Complete the Manufacture Date Section of a Study Complete the Miscellaneous Features Section of a Study Complete the Model/Series Section of a Study Complete the Model Year Section of a Study Complete the Notifications Section of a Study Complete the Options Section of a Study Complete the Production Plant Section of a Study Complete the Regions Section of a Study Complete the Report Section of a Study Complete the States/Provinces Section of a Study Complete the Study Type Section of a Study Complete the Transmission Type Section of a Study Complete the TSB Section of a Study Complete the VIN Range (Serial) Section of a Study Create or Modify a Study Perform Common DBS Tasks
Early Detection System (EDS) EDS: Study Dashboard Processes EDS: Study Dashboard Study Study Dashboard Technical Service Bulletin (TSB) Create or Modify a Study Workflow Note : The Create or Modify a Study workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for defining or modifying a study that integrates appointment and repair order data collected by the Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Define or Modify a Study Workflow. Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow View One Study Result Workflow
To view a dealer's study results: From the Filter By drop-down list, select "Dealer". In the text box, type the dealer number. Click the Search icon. Note : The Result section lists the study results related to the dealer.
View a Dealer's Study Results To view a dealer's study results: From the Filter By drop-down list, select "Dealer". In the text box, type the dealer number. Click the Search icon. Note : The Result section lists the study results related to the dealer.
Dashboard Early Detection System (EDS) EDS: Study Dashboard Processes EDS: Study Dashboard Study Study Dashboard View View One Study Result Workflow Note : The View One Study Result workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing a study that integrates appointment and repair order data collected by the Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the View One Study Result workflow. Define or Modify Study Workflow Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow
Dashboard Early Detection System (EDS) Hold Status Processes Study View Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow Note: The Manage Early Detection System Studies workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing Early Detection System (EDS) studies that integrate appointment and repair order data collected by the Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow. Define or Modify a Study Workflow View One Study Result Workflow View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow
Dashboard Early Detection System (EDS) EDS: Study Dashboard Processes EDS: Study Dashboard Study Study Dashboard View View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow Note : The View a Dealer's Study Results workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing one dealer's study results that integrate appointment and repair order data collected by the Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the View a Dealer's Study Results workflow. Define or Modify a Study Workflow Manage Early Detection Studies Workflow View One Study Result Workflow
Note : By default, the RDR History page displays vehicles that have been retailed in descending order by the date on which the RDR was submitted to DBS . To view Retail Delivery Reporting (RDR) history summary and detail: Review the list of RDRs. To sort the displayed information, click the arrow beside a column title. To select an RDR, click anywhere in the row that contains the RDR or click the Action icon for the desired RDR. To see the vehicle detail, from the Action menu select the View Vehicle Detail option, or click the VIN number hyperlink. Note : The Vehicle Inventory Detail report opens in a separate window. Click the Close button to return to the RDR History page.
View RDR History Summary and Detail Note : By default, the RDR History page displays details for vehicle RDRs in descending order by the retail add date (the date on which the RDR was submitted to DBS . To view Retail Delivery Reporting (RDR) history summary and detail: Review the list of RDRs. To sort the displayed information, click the arrow beside a column title. To select an RDR, click anywhere in the row that contains the RDR or click the Action icon for the desired RDR. To see the vehicle detail, from the Action menu select the View Vehicle Detail option, or click the hyperlinked VIN number.. Note : The Vehicle Inventory Detail report opens in a separate window.
History Processes RDR History RDR History Retail Delivery Reporting (RDR) History View RDR History Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing Retail Delivery Reporting (RDR) history. Related Workflows The following workflows may have similar tasks in common with the Viewing RDR History Workflow. RDR a Vehicle Workflow
To request a full parts master: To print the request before submitting the request, click the Print button, specify your printer options, and then click the applicable button to print. Click OK to submit the request or Cancel to cancel the request. Note : The system displays the following message "Your request has been successfully submitted." You may only request one full parts master file per day.
Request a Full Parts Master To request a full parts master: To print the request before submitting the request, click the Print button, specify your printer options, and then click the applicable button to print. Click OK to submit the request or Cancel to cancel the request. Note : The system displays the following message "Your request has been successfully submitted." You may only request one full parts master file per day.
Master Parts Master Request a Full Parts Master Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for requesting a full parts master file.
To select the report fields to be totaled: Select the fields to be totaled. Note : A total appears at the end of the report and at the defined break. Click the Move button. Note : To move all fields into the Selected Fields list, click the Move All button. To indicate the order in which the columns are to be totaled, select one or more items in the Selected Fields list and use the First , Up , Down , and Last buttons. If the report requires averages to be calculated for totaled fields, select the Check here to Average your selected fields checkbox. Adjust the columns width for printing, as applicable. Click here for instructions to adjust column width. The Total/Sum criteria is optional. You can leave this section blank when creating a report. If you specify a grouping, the report will be broken into sections based on the first sort field selected. If you specify a grouping and specify a total, a total line appears at the end of each grouping section. A total line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you do not specify a grouping but specify a total, a total line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you specify a grouping and specify a count, a count line appears at the end of each grouping section. A count line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you do not specify a grouping but specify a count, a count line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents.
Compolete the Total/Sum Criteria Section of a Report To select the report fields to be totaled: In the Available Numeric Fields list, select the fields to be totaled. Note : A total appears at the end of the report and at the defined break. Click the Move button. Note : To move all fields into the Selected Fields list, click the Move All button. To indicate the order in which the columns are to be totaled, select one or more items in the Selected Fields list and use the First , Up , Down , and Last buttons. If the report requires averages to be calculated for totaled fields, select the Check here to Average your selected fields checkbox. Adjust the columns width for printing, as applicable. Click here for instructions to adjust column width. The Total/Sum criteria is optional. You can leave this section blank when creating a report. If you specify a grouping, the report will be broken into sections based on the first sort field selected. If you specify a grouping and specify a total, a total line appears at the end of each grouping section. A total line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you do not specify a grouping but specify a total, a total line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you specify a grouping and specify a count, a count line appears at the end of each grouping section. A count line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you do not specify a grouping but specify a count, a count line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents.
To select the report fields to be totaled: Select the fields to be totaled. Note : A total appears at the end of the report and at the defined break. Click the Move button. Note : To move all fields into the Selected Fields list, click the Move All button. To indicate the order in which the columns are to be totaled, select one or more items in the Selected Fields list and use the First , Up , Down , and Last buttons. If the report requires averages to be calculated for totaled fields, select the Check here to Average your selected fields checkbox. Adjust the columns width for printing, as applicable. Click here for instructions to adjust column width. The Total/Sum criteria is optional. You can leave this section blank when creating a report. If you specify a grouping, the report will be broken into sections based on the first sort field selected. If you specify a grouping and specify a total, a total line appears at the end of each grouping section. A total line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you do not specify a grouping but specify a total, a total line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you specify a grouping and specify a count, a count line appears at the end of each grouping section. A count line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you do not specify a grouping but specify a count, a count line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents.
Compolete the Total/Sum Criteria Section of a Report To select the report fields to be totaled: In the Available Numeric Fields list, select the fields to be totaled. Note : A total appears at the end of the report and at the defined break. Click the Move button. Note : To move all fields into the Selected Fields list, click the Move All button. To indicate the order in which the columns are to be totaled, select one or more items in the Selected Fields list and use the First , Up , Down , and Last buttons. If the report requires averages to be calculated for totaled fields, select the Check here to Average your selected fields checkbox. Adjust the columns width for printing, as applicable. Click here for instructions to adjust column width. The Total/Sum criteria is optional. You can leave this section blank when creating a report. If you specify a grouping, the report will be broken into sections based on the first sort field selected. If you specify a grouping and specify a total, a total line appears at the end of each grouping section. A total line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you do not specify a grouping but specify a total, a total line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you specify a grouping and specify a count, a count line appears at the end of each grouping section. A count line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you do not specify a grouping but specify a count, a count line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents.
To select the report fields to be totaled: Select the fields to be totaled. Note : A total appears at the end of the report and at the defined break. Click the Move button. Note : To move all fields into the Selected Fields list, click the Move All button. To indicate the order in which the columns are to be totaled, select one or more items in the Selected Fields list and use the First , Up , Down , and Last buttons. If the report requires averages to be calculated for totaled fields, select the Check here to Average your selected fields checkbox. Adjust the columns width for printing, as applicable. Click here for instructions to adjust column width. The Total/Sum criteria is optional. You can leave this section blank when creating a report. If you specify a grouping, the report will be broken into sections based on the first sort field selected. If you specify a grouping and specify a total, a total line appears at the end of each grouping section. A total line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you do not specify a grouping but specify a total, a total line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you specify a grouping and specify a count, a count line appears at the end of each grouping section. A count line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you do not specify a grouping but specify a count, a count line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents.
Compolete the Total/Sum Criteria Section of a Report To select the report fields to be totaled: In the Available Numeric Fields list, select the fields to be totaled. Note : A total appears at the end of the report and at the defined break. Click the Move button. Note : To move all fields into the Selected Fields list, click the Move All button. To indicate the order in which the columns are to be totaled, select one or more items in the Selected Fields list and use the First , Up , Down , and Last buttons. If the report requires averages to be calculated for totaled fields, select the Check here to Average your selected fields checkbox. Adjust the columns width for printing, as applicable. Click here for instructions to adjust column width. The Total/Sum criteria is optional. You can leave this section blank when creating a report. If you specify a grouping, the report will be broken into sections based on the first sort field selected. If you specify a grouping and specify a total, a total line appears at the end of each grouping section. A total line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you do not specify a grouping but specify a total, a total line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you specify a grouping and specify a count, a count line appears at the end of each grouping section. A count line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you do not specify a grouping but specify a count, a count line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents.
To select the report fields to be totaled: Select the fields to be totaled. Note : A total appears at the end of the report and at the defined break. Click the Move button. Note : To move all fields into the Selected Fields list, click the Move All button. To indicate the order in which the columns are to be totaled, select one or more items in the Selected Fields list and use the First , Up , Down , and Last buttons. If the report requires averages to be calculated for totaled fields, select the Check here to Average your selected fields checkbox. Adjust the columns width for printing, as applicable. Click here for instructions to adjust column width. The Total/Sum criteria is optional. You can leave this section blank when creating a report. If you specify a grouping, the report will be broken into sections based on the first sort field selected. If you specify a grouping and specify a total, a total line appears at the end of each grouping section. A total line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you do not specify a grouping but specify a total, a total line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you specify a grouping and specify a count, a count line appears at the end of each grouping section. A count line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you do not specify a grouping but specify a count, a count line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents.
Compolete the Total/Sum Criteria Section of a Report To select the report fields to be totaled: In the Available Numeric Fields list, select the fields to be totaled. Note : A total appears at the end of the report and at the defined break. Click the Move button. Note : To move all fields into the Selected Fields list, click the Move All button. To indicate the order in which the columns are to be totaled, select one or more items in the Selected Fields list and use the First , Up , Down , and Last buttons. If the report requires averages to be calculated for totaled fields, select the Check here to Average your selected fields checkbox. Adjust the columns width for printing, as applicable. Click here for instructions to adjust column width. The Total/Sum criteria is optional. You can leave this section blank when creating a report. If you specify a grouping, the report will be broken into sections based on the first sort field selected. If you specify a grouping and specify a total, a total line appears at the end of each grouping section. A total line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you do not specify a grouping but specify a total, a total line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you specify a grouping and specify a count, a count line appears at the end of each grouping section. A count line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you do not specify a grouping but specify a count, a count line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents.
To select the report fields to be totaled: Select the fields to be totaled. Note : A total appears at the end of the report and at the defined break. Click the Move button. Note : To move all fields into the Selected Fields list, click the Move All button. To indicate the order in which the columns are to be totaled, select one or more items in the Selected Fields list and use the First , Up , Down , and Last buttons. If the report requires averages to be calculated for totaled fields, select the Check here to Average your selected fields checkbox. Adjust the columns width for printing, as applicable. Click here for instructions to adjust column width. The Total/Sum criteria is optional. You can leave this section blank when creating a report. If you specify a grouping, the report will be broken into sections based on the first sort field selected. If you specify a grouping and specify a total, a total line appears at the end of each grouping section. A total line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you do not specify a grouping but specify a total, a total line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you specify a grouping and specify a count, a count line appears at the end of each grouping section. A count line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you do not specify a grouping but specify a count, a count line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents.
Compolete the Total/Sum Criteria Section of a Report To select the report fields to be totaled: In the Available Numeric Fields list, select the fields to be totaled. Note : A total appears at the end of the report and at the defined break. Click the Move button. Note : To move all fields into the Selected Fields list, click the Move All button. To indicate the order in which the columns are to be totaled, select one or more items in the Selected Fields list and use the First , Up , Down , and Last buttons. If the report requires averages to be calculated for totaled fields, select the Check here to Average your selected fields checkbox. Adjust the columns width for printing, as applicable. Click here for instructions to adjust column width. The Total/Sum criteria is optional. You can leave this section blank when creating a report. If you specify a grouping, the report will be broken into sections based on the first sort field selected. If you specify a grouping and specify a total, a total line appears at the end of each grouping section. A total line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you do not specify a grouping but specify a total, a total line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you specify a grouping and specify a count, a count line appears at the end of each grouping section. A count line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you do not specify a grouping but specify a count, a count line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents.
To view the standard operation codes summary and detail: View the list of codes. To sort the displayed information, click the arrow beside a column title. To select a code, click anywhere in the row that contains the code. To show detail, select a code and click the Show Standard Operation Code Detail link near the bottom of the window. Note : To hide detail, click the Hide Standard Operation Code Detail link.
View the Standard Operation Codes Summary and Detail To view the standard operation codes summary and detail: View the list of codes. To sort the displayed information, click the arrow beside a column title. To select a code, click anywhere in the row that contains the code. To show detail, select a code and click the Show Standard Operation Code Detail link near the bottom of the window. Note : To hide detail, click the Hide Standard Operation Code Detail link.
ReRun Standard Operation Code Translation Manage Standard Operation Codes Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing standard operation codes. Related Workflows ( Note to developer : List the related workflows and link to them.) The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Standard Operation Codes Workflow. Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes Workflow Manage Dealer Operation Codes Workflow Manage Standard Operation Categories Workflow
To access OMS to locate a vehicle: Click the OMS LOCATE button. Note : The Locate option is available only to users who have access to the OMS application. Note : The external OMS application opens. Note : Follow the procedures within the OMS application to locate the vehicle.
Access OMS to Locate a Vehicle To access OMS to locate a vehicle: Click the OMS LOCATE button. Note : The locate option is available only to users who have access to the OMS application. Note : The external OMS application opens. Follow the procedures within the OMS application to locate the vehicle.
Vehicle Inventory Management Inventory Managment Processes Inventory Managment Vehicle Inventory Management Vehicle Inventory Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing vehicle inventory data at the dealerships. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Vehicle Inventory workflow. Report the Sale of a Vehicle (RDR) Workflow Search Vehicle Inventory Workflow Search Vehicle Inventory Workflow
Use the Contact Us page (available from the footer) to perform this task. Note : The footer is a short menu that appears at the bottom of every page in the DBS application. To contact the DBS Help Desk by email: Click the email link. Note : A new message opens in your preferred email client. Type the subject and message details, then send the message. Note : Follow the instructions for your email client software to send the message.
Contact the DBS Help Desk by Email Note : Use the Contact Us page (available from the footer) to perform this task. To contact the DBS Help Desk by email: Click the email link. Note : A new message opens in your preferred email client. Type the subject and message details, then send the message. Note : Follow the instructions for your email client software to send the message.
Create Parts Order Page Overview Purpose Use the Create Parts Order page to order parts to replenish inventory stock or fulfill a specific customer need. You may create and submit multiple orders on a daily basis. To create a parts order, access the Parts Order Management link from the Parts menu. Description The content area of the Create Parts Order page displays the following sections: Create Parts Order header - Allows you to view or specify general information about a parts order including order status, order type, dealer order reference #, shipping instructions, and backorder or cross ship preferences Parts Order Detail - Allows you to add parts, delete parts, modify a line item, including line item back order and cross ship preferences, and designate free parts (solicited orders only) Buttons - Allows you to save, submit, delete or cancel a parts order Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Create Parts Order page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Add a Part to an Order Create or Edit a Parts Order Delete a Part from an Order Delete a Parts Order Look Up a Part Modify a Detail Line on an Order Submit a Parts Order View the Parts List on an Order Add a Part to an Order Create or Edit a Parts Order Delete a Part from an Order Delete a Parts Order Look Up a Part Modify a Detail Line on an Order Submit a Parts Order View the Parts List on an Order Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Create Parts Order page. Create Parts Order Workflow Page Preview
View Dealer Information Page Overview Purpose Use the View Dealer Information page to view information about a dealership. Description The content area of the View Dealer Information page displays the following sections: Quick Jump - Appears on the left-hand side of the page. The Quick Jump menu allows you to jump from section to section without scrolling. Dealer Information - Allows you to view dealer, vehicle, service, parts, finance, DBS /DMS, and other information about a dealership Cancel button - Returns you to the Dealer Summary page Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Dealer Information page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. View Dealer Information View Dealer Information Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Dealer Information page. View Dealer Information or Permissions Workflow Page Preview
To delete a notification: Select a notification. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Delete option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Delete button to delete, or click the Cancel button to close without deleting.
Delete a Notification To delete a notification: Select a notification. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Delete option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Delete button to delete, or click the Cancel button to close without deleting.
To open the RDR Vehicle page to view, edit, or report the sale of a vehicle: Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon for the selected vehicle. From the Action menu, select the RDR Vehicle option. Note : The RDR Vehicle page appears. If the vehicle is part of a Stop Sale campaign, a message appears indicating that the vehicle repairs must be completed before delivery. Click the OK button to acknowledge the message. Have the vehicle repaired, and then complete the RDR. You cannot report the sale of a vehicle if the sales status is "Retailed."
Access the Retail Delivery Reporting (RDR) Vehicle Page from Vehicle Inventory To Access the RDR Vehicle page to view, edit, or report the sale of a vehicle: Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon for the selected vehicle. From the Action menu, select the RDR Vehicle option. Note : The RDR Vehicle page appears. If the vehicle is part of a Stop Sale campaign, a message appears indicating that the vehicle repairs must be completed before delivery. Click the OK button to acknowledge the message. Have the vehicle repaired, and then complete the RDR. You cannot report the sale of a vehicle if the sales status is "Retailed."
Vehicle Inventory Management Inventory Managment Processes Inventory Managment Vehicle Inventory Management Vehicle Inventory Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing vehicle inventory data at the dealerships. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Vehicle Inventory workflow. Report the Sale of a Vehicle (RDR) Workflow Search Vehicle Inventory Workflow Search Vehicle Inventory Workflow
Processes RDR RDR RDR a Vehicle Workflow Note : This workflow is for NNA users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for retail delivery reporting (RDR) or editing the sale of a vehicle. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Report or Edit the Sale of a Vehicle workflow. Vehicle Inventory Workflow Inventory Search Workflow View RDR History Workflow
Campaign Part Management Page Overview Note : The Campaign Part Management page applies to internal users only. Access the Campaign Parts Management page by clicking the Campaign Parts Management link on the Parts menu. Purpose Use the Campaign Part Management page to add or delete campaign parts on the Campaign Parts list in the Dealer Business System (DBS) . Note : This page is for internal users only (Countermeasure Service Parts Procurement group). Description The content area of the Campaign Part Management page displays the following sections: Filter by - Allows you to filter the information to display only the records that match your criteria Page Navigation - Allows you to navigate from page to page, if multiple pages exist Campaign Part Summary - Displays general information for all records on the page Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Campaign Part Management page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Add a Campaign Part Access Reports Delete a Campaign Part Export Campaign Part Information Filter Campaign Part Management Summary Look Up a Part View Campaign Part Management Summary Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Campaign Part Management page. Manage Campaign Parts Workflow Page Preview
To approve an SVC order from the View SVC Order page: Click the Approve button. Note : A confirmation message appears. If you modified the order quantity, type a reason. Click the Yes button to confirm, or click the No button to close the window without confirming. SVC orders pending approval already contain parts that are on the Campaign Parts list, as validated by the system during order submission. You can only approve an SVC order in "New" status. You cannot approve an SVC order that contains errors. Approved SVC orders are sent to the Countermeasure Service Parts Procurement Group every day between 3-4 p.m. U.S. Central Time.
Approve an SVC Order from the View SVC Order Page To approve an SVC order from the View SVC Order page: Click the Approve button. Note : A confirmation message appears. If you modified the order quantity, type the reason. Click the Yes button to confirm, or click the No button to close the window without confirming. SVC orders pending approval already contain parts that are on the Campaign Parts list, as validated by the system during order submission. You can only approve an SVC order in "New" status. You cannot approve an SVC order with errors. Approved SVC orders are sent to the Countermeasure Service Parts Procurement Group every day between 3-4 p.m. U.S. Central Time.
Approve or Reject SVC Order Reject Approve or Reject SVC Order Approve or Reject SVC Order Manage Service Campaign Order Workflow Note : This workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing a Service Campaign (SVC) order. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Service Campaign Order Workflow. Manage Campaign Parts Workflow View Service Campaign Order Workflow
Edit Dealer Information Page Overview Purpose Use the Edit Dealer Information page to edit information about a dealership. Description The content area of the Edit Dealer Information page displays the following sections: Dealer Information - Allows you to edit the Internet Sales Manager's name, language code, and time zone code for a dealer Save and Cancel buttons - Allows you to submit or cancel requested changes . Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Edit Dealer Information page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Edit Dealer Information Edit Dealer Information Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Edit Dealer Information page. Edit Dealer Information Workflow Page Preview
To add comments to multiple SVC (service campaign) orders: Select the check box next to each campaign order to which you want to add a comment. Click the Create Comments Selected button. In the space provided, type your comments. Click the Save button to save the comments you entered. Note : To close the comments window and return to the SVC Order Management page without saving your comments, click the Cancel button.
Add Comments to Multiple SVC Orders To add comments to multiple SVC (service campaign) orders: Select the check box next to each campaign order to which you want to add a comment. Click the Create Comments Selected button. In the space provided, type your comments. Click the Save button to save the comments you entered. Note : To close the comments window and return to the SVC Order Management page without saving your comments, click the Cancel button.
Approve or Reject SVC Order Reject Approve or Reject SVC Order Approve or Reject SVC Order Manage Service Campaign Order Workflow Note : This workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing a Service Campaign (SVC) order. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Service Campaign Order Workflow. Manage Campaign Parts Workflow View Service Campaign Order Workflow
Report Writer Generate Page Overview (Internal User) Purpose Use the Report Writer Generate page to generate reports. Description The content area of the Report Writer Generate page displays the following sections: Nissan North America (NNA) Hierarchy - Allows you to select the level, region, or dealer to include in the report (Internal users only) Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Report Writer Generate page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Generate a Report (Internal Users) Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Generate Report page. Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow Page Preview
Report Writer Generate Page Overview (Internal User) Purpose Use the Report Writer Generate page to generate reports. Description The content area of the Report Writer Generate page displays the following sections: Nissan North America (NNA) Hierarchy - Allows you to select the level, region, or dealer to include in the report (Internal users only) Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Report Writer Generate page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Generate a Report (Internal Users) Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Generate Report page. Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow Page Preview
Report Writer Generate Page Overview (Internal User) Purpose Use the Report Writer Generate page to generate reports. Description The content area of the Report Writer Generate page displays the following sections: Nissan North America (NNA) Hierarchy - Allows you to select the level, region, or dealer to include in the report (Internal users only) Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Report Writer Generate page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Generate a Report (Internal Users) Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Generate Report page. Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow Page Preview
Report Writer Generate Page Overview (Internal User) Purpose Use the Report Writer Generate page to generate reports. Description The content area of the Report Writer Generate page displays the following sections: Nissan North America (NNA) Hierarchy - Allows you to select the level, region, or dealer to include in the report (Internal users only) Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Report Writer Generate page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Generate a Report (Internal Users) Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Generate Report page. Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow Page Preview
Report Writer Generate Page Overview (Internal User) Purpose Use the Report Writer Generate page to generate reports. Description The content area of the Report Writer Generate page displays the following sections: Nissan North America (NNA) Hierarchy - Allows you to select the level, region, or dealer to include in the report (Internal users only) Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Report Writer Generate page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Generate a Report (Internal Users) Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Generate Report page. Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow Page Preview
Note : Only those alerts highlighted with a red background have a hold request. To hold a vehicle or ignore a vehicle hold request on the RO Work in Process page: In the Alerts section, move your cursor over the Action icon for the row for which you want to hold the vehicle or deny a hold request. From the Action menu, select the Detail option. Note : The Alert window appears. To hold the vehicle as requested, click the Hold button. To ignore the vehicle hold request, click the Ignore button. To close the window without holding or ignoring the hold request, click the Close button.
Hold a Vehicle or Ignore Request on the RO Work in Process Page Note : Only those alerts highlighted with a red background have a hold request. To hold a vehicle or ignore a vehicle hold request on the RO Work in Process page: In the Alerts section, move your cursor over the Action icon for the row for which you want to hold the vehicle or deny a hold request. From the Action menu, select the Detail option. Note : The Alert window appears. To hold the vehicle as requested, click the Hold button. To ignore the vehicle hold request, click the Ignore button. To close the window without holding or ignoring the hold request, click the Close button.
To view, print, or email the window sticker from Vehicle Inventory: Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon for the vehicle for which you want to view the window sticker. From the Action menu, select the Window Sticker option. View the Window Sticker. Note : To print the window sticker, click the Printer icon available in the toolbar. Proceed as you normally would to print a file. To email the window sticker, click the Email button at the lower-right of the window sticker. Type the recipient's email address in the Receiver Address field. Type a subject in the Subject field. Click the Send button. You must have Adobe ® Reader ® (.pdf) installed on your computer to view the window sticker.
View, Print, or Email the Window Sticker from the Vehicle Inventory Page To view, print, or email the window sticker from the Vehicle Inventory page: Select the vehicle for which you want to view the window sticker. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon for the selected vehicle. From the Action menu, select the Window Sticker menu option. View the window sticker. To print the window sticker, click the Printer icon available in the toolbar. Proceed as you normally would to print a file. To email the window sticker, click the Email button at the lower-right of the window sticker. Note : A window opens for you to address the email. In the Receiver Address field, type the email address for the person who should receive a copy of the window sticker. Type a subject in the Subject field. Click the Send button. You must have Adobe ® Reader ® (.pdf) installed on your computer to view the window sticker. You must have Adobe ® Reader ® (.pdf) installed on your computer to view the window sticker. Nissan Canada, Inc. (NCI) refers to the window sticker as the vehicle pricing sticker. To view, print, or email the window sticker from the Vehicle Inventory page: Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon for the selected vehicle. From the Action menu, select the Window Sticker option. View the window sticker. Select the desired language from the drop-down list. If desired, click the Printer icon to print the window sticker. To email the window sticker, click the Email button in the lower-right corner. Note: A window opens for you to address the email. In the From Address field, type your email address, and in the Receiver Address field, type the email address of the person who will receive the email message. In the Subject field, type a subject for the email. Click the Send button.
Vehicle Inventory Management Inventory Managment Processes Inventory Managment Vehicle Inventory Management Vehicle Inventory Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing vehicle inventory data at the dealerships. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Vehicle Inventory workflow. Report the Sale of a Vehicle (RDR) Workflow Search Vehicle Inventory Workflow Search Vehicle Inventory Workflow
To print RDR detail from the RDR History page: Select a vehicle. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon for the selected vehicle. From the Action menu, select the Print Detail menu option. Note : The RDR Detail Report page opens in a separate window. To print the RDR Detail Report, click the Print button. To close the RDR Detail Report and return to the RDR History page, click the Close button.
Print RDR Detail from the RDR History Page To print RDR detail from the RDR History page: Select a vehicle. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon for the selected vehicle. From the Action menu, select the Print Detail menu option. Note : The RDR Detail Report page opens in a separate window. To print the RDR Detail Report, click the Print button. To close the RDR Detail Report and return to the RDR History page, click the Close button.
History Processes RDR History RDR History Retail Delivery Reporting (RDR) History View RDR History Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing Retail Delivery Reporting (RDR) history. Related Workflows The following workflows may have similar tasks in common with the Viewing RDR History Workflow. RDR a Vehicle Workflow
Note : This task is performed by internal users only. To activate tracing: Type the Logger Name . From the Logging Level drop-down list, select the appropriate option from the list below. Debug - Logs information when failure or success of significant steps occurs in processing Info - Logs application life-cycle events such as application startup, initialization and shutdown Error - Logs the cause stack when an exception occurs Fatal - Logs the event that causes an unexpected termination of the application such as failure to connect to the host Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Note: A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm and save, or click the No button to close the window without saving.
Activate Tracing To activate tracing: In the Logger Name field, type the logger name. From the Logging Level drop-down list, select the appropriate option from the list below. Debug - Logs information when failure or success of significant steps occurs in processing Info - Logs application life-cycle events such as application startup, initialization and shutdown Error - Logs the cause stack when an exception occurs Fatal - Logs the event that causes an unexpected termination of the application such as failure to connect to the host Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Note: A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm and save, or click the No button to close the window without saving.
To print a Host report: In the Favorites list or in the Reports list, click the report you wish to print. Note : The row will turn a turquoise color, and the Generation section updates to display a list of dates on which the NNA Host generated the report and sent it to DBS . In the Generation section, move your cursor over the Action icon for the desired report date. From the Action menu, select the Print option. Note : The Print dialog box displays. Select a printer, or set printer options, as desired. Click the applicable button to print the report. Add reports to the Favorites list so you can access them quickly. If your Host reports don't print, call the Help Desk for assistance.
Print a Host Report To print a Host report: In the Favorites list or in the Reports list, click the desired row to select the report you wish to print. Note : The row will turn a turquoise color, and the Generation section updates to display a list of dates on which the NNA Host generated the report and sent it to DBS . In the Generation section, move your cursor over the Action icon for the desired report date. From the Action menu, select the Print option or the Print PDF option. Note : The Print dialog box displays. Select a printer, or set printer options, as desired. Click the applicable button to print the report. If your Host reports don't print, call the Help Desk for assistance. Add reports to the Favorites list so you can access them quickly. If the Favorites list or the Reports list is not open, click the plus sign beside the list title.
Host Reports Processes Host Reports Host Reports Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing, printing, filtering, searching, and adding or removing a Host report from the Favorites list.
To print a Host report: In the Favorites list or in the Reports list, click the report you wish to print. Note : The row will turn a turquoise color, and the Generation section updates to display a list of dates on which the NNA Host generated the report and sent it to DBS . In the Generation section, move your cursor over the Action icon for the desired report date. From the Action menu, select the Print option. Note : The Print dialog box displays. Select a printer, or set printer options, as desired. Click the applicable button to print the report. Add reports to the Favorites list so you can access them quickly. If your Host reports don't print, call the Help Desk for assistance.
Print a Host Report To print a Host report: In the Favorites list or in the Reports list, click the desired row to select the report you wish to print. Note : The row will turn a turquoise color, and the Generation section updates to display a list of dates on which the NNA Host generated the report and sent it to DBS . In the Generation section, move your cursor over the Action icon for the desired report date. From the Action menu, select the Print option or the Print PDF option. Note : The Print dialog box displays. Select a printer, or set printer options, as desired. Click the applicable button to print the report. If your Host reports don't print, call the Help Desk for assistance. Add reports to the Favorites list so you can access them quickly. If the Favorites list or the Reports list is not open, click the plus sign beside the list title.
Host Reports Processes Host Reports Host Reports Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing, printing, filtering, searching, and adding or removing a Host report from the Favorites list.
To print a Host report: In the Favorites list or in the Reports list, click the report you wish to print. Note : The row will turn a turquoise color, and the Generation section updates to display a list of dates on which the NNA Host generated the report and sent it to DBS . In the Generation section, move your cursor over the Action icon for the desired report date. From the Action menu, select the Print option. Note : The Print dialog box displays. Select a printer, or set printer options, as desired. Click the applicable button to print the report. Add reports to the Favorites list so you can access them quickly. If your Host reports don't print, call the Help Desk for assistance.
Print a Host Report To print a Host report: In the Favorites list or in the Reports list, click the desired row to select the report you wish to print. Note : The row will turn a turquoise color, and the Generation section updates to display a list of dates on which the NNA Host generated the report and sent it to DBS . In the Generation section, move your cursor over the Action icon for the desired report date. From the Action menu, select the Print option or the Print PDF option. Note : The Print dialog box displays. Select a printer, or set printer options, as desired. Click the applicable button to print the report. If your Host reports don't print, call the Help Desk for assistance. Add reports to the Favorites list so you can access them quickly. If the Favorites list or the Reports list is not open, click the plus sign beside the list title.
Host Reports Processes Host Reports Host Reports Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing, printing, filtering, searching, and adding or removing a Host report from the Favorites list.
To print a Host report: In the Favorites list or in the Reports list, click the report you wish to print. Note : The row will turn a turquoise color, and the Generation section updates to display a list of dates on which the NNA Host generated the report and sent it to DBS . In the Generation section, move your cursor over the Action icon for the desired report date. From the Action menu, select the Print option. Note : The Print dialog box displays. Select a printer, or set printer options, as desired. Click the applicable button to print the report. Add reports to the Favorites list so you can access them quickly. If your Host reports don't print, call the Help Desk for assistance.
Print a Host Report To print a Host report: In the Favorites list or in the Reports list, click the desired row to select the report you wish to print. Note : The row will turn a turquoise color, and the Generation section updates to display a list of dates on which the NNA Host generated the report and sent it to DBS . In the Generation section, move your cursor over the Action icon for the desired report date. From the Action menu, select the Print option or the Print PDF option. Note : The Print dialog box displays. Select a printer, or set printer options, as desired. Click the applicable button to print the report. If your Host reports don't print, call the Help Desk for assistance. Add reports to the Favorites list so you can access them quickly. If the Favorites list or the Reports list is not open, click the plus sign beside the list title.
Host Reports Processes Host Reports Host Reports Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing, printing, filtering, searching, and adding or removing a Host report from the Favorites list.
To print a Host report: In the Favorites list or in the Reports list, click the report you wish to print. Note : The row will turn a turquoise color, and the Generation section updates to display a list of dates on which the NNA Host generated the report and sent it to DBS . In the Generation section, move your cursor over the Action icon for the desired report date. From the Action menu, select the Print option. Note : The Print dialog box displays. Select a printer, or set printer options, as desired. Click the applicable button to print the report. Add reports to the Favorites list so you can access them quickly. If your Host reports don't print, call the Help Desk for assistance.
Print a Host Report To print a Host report: In the Favorites list or in the Reports list, click the desired row to select the report you wish to print. Note : The row will turn a turquoise color, and the Generation section updates to display a list of dates on which the NNA Host generated the report and sent it to DBS . In the Generation section, move your cursor over the Action icon for the desired report date. From the Action menu, select the Print option or the Print PDF option. Note : The Print dialog box displays. Select a printer, or set printer options, as desired. Click the applicable button to print the report. If your Host reports don't print, call the Help Desk for assistance. Add reports to the Favorites list so you can access them quickly. If the Favorites list or the Reports list is not open, click the plus sign beside the list title.
Host Reports Processes Host Reports Host Reports Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing, printing, filtering, searching, and adding or removing a Host report from the Favorites list.
View Overview Information Monitor Vehicle Inventory Page Overview Perform Tasks Filter the Monitor Vehicle Inventory Page Look Up a Dealer on the Monitor Vehicle Inventory Page Perform Common DBS Tasks View Detail on the Monitor Vehicle Inventory Page Filter the Monitor Vehicle Inventory Page Look Up a Dealer on the Monitor Vehicle Inventory Page Perform Common DBS Tasks View Detail on the Monitor Vehicle Inventory Page
To view the calendar events summary and detail: Review the list of calendar events. To view additional calendar events, click a page number or click the Previous or Next buttons. To view a specific page, in the Go to Page field, type a page number, and then click the Go button. To sort the displayed information, click the arrow beside a column title.
About the Calendar Events Page To view the calendar events summary: Review the list of calendar events. To view additional calendar events, click a page number or click the Previous or Next buttons. To view a specific page, in the Go to Page field, type a page number, and then click the Go button. To sort the displayed information, click the arrow beside a column title.
Sales Landing Page Overview Purpose Use the Sales landing page to view alerts, announcements, and other news related to sales. You can also get a quick look at closed deals, booked deals, net RDRs, and rejected RDRs. Use the Sales landing page to view alerts, announcements, and other news related to sales. You can also get a quick look at closed deals, and booked deals. Description The content area of the Sales landing page displays the following sections: Alerts - Appear at the top of the landing page, if applicable. The Alert messages continually scroll across the top of the page, when applicable. Alerts typically provide information that is system critical. Announcements - The highest-priority announcements appear in the Regional or National Announcements section, if applicable. The remaining announcements display in the Other News section. Other News - Displays the announcements that are not as high priority. When an announcement is no longer one of the high-priority announcements, the announcement automatically moves to the Other News section. Quick Look - Displays a graph of current, month-to-date, and year-to-date closed deals, booked deals, and RDRs. Rejected RDRs - Displays a list of rejected RDRs. Note : If you are a dealer user, the Quick Look and Rejected RDR information is for your dealership only. If you belong to a dealer group, the information is for the dealership you selected from the Dealer drop-down. If you are an internal user, the information is for all Nissan dealers. Alerts - Appear at the top of the landing page, if applicable. The Alert messages continually scroll across the top of the page, when applicable. Alerts typically provide information that is system critical. Announcements - The highest-priority announcements appear in the Regional or National Announcements section, if applicable. The remaining announcements display in the Other News section. Other News - Displays the announcements that are not as high priority. When an announcement is no longer one of the high-priority announcements, the announcement automatically moves to the Other News section. Quick Look - Displays a graph of current, month-to-month, and year-to-date closed deals, and booked deals. Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Sales landing page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. View Alerts View Announcements and Other News View Rejected RDRs View Alerts View Announcements and Other News Page Preview
This section of a study is not required, but provides the opportunity to customize or limit a study's results. Use optional study sections to clearly define study parameters, but use caution as conflicting selections will result in no data being returned. DBS maintains options, packages, and accessories information for the current model year and five previous model years (ten previous model years for Infiniti), beginning from the 2011 model year for both divisions. If desired, you can select one or more available options to limit the study results. To complete the Options section of a study: Select each option, package, or accessory which should be included in the study, and then use the center buttons as necessary to customize the Selected Options list. When you have selected all desired options, click the Save button.
Complete the Options Section of a Study This section of a study is not required, but provides the opportunity to customize or limit a study's results. Use optional study sections to clearly define study parameters, but use caution as conflicting selections will result in no data being returned. To complete the Options section of a study: DBS maintains options, packages, and accessories information for the current model year and five previous model years (ten previous model years for Infiniti), beginning from the 2011 model year for both divisions. If desired, you can select one or more available options to limit the study results. To complete the Options section of a study: Select each option, package, or accessory which should be included in the study, and then use the center buttons as necessary to customize the Selected Options list. When you have selected all desired options, click the Save button.
Early Detection System (EDS) EDS: Study Dashboard Processes EDS: Study Dashboard Study Study Dashboard Technical Service Bulletin (TSB) Create or Modify a Study Workflow Note : The Create or Modify a Study workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for defining or modifying a study that integrates appointment and repair order data collected by the Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Define or Modify a Study Workflow. Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow View One Study Result Workflow
To print the results for a study: Select the study for which you want to print the study results. Click the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Print Study Results menu option. Select the option to save or open the document. Click the OK button.
Print Study Results To print the results for a study: Select the study for which you want to print the study results. Click the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Print Study Results menu option. Select the option to save or open the document. Click the OK button.
To filter the Campaign Part Management summary: Select a filter option. If a text-entry field appears, type a filter value (or perform a part lookup). - OR - If a drop-down list appears, select an option from the list. Note: Depending on your selection, additional filter options may display to narrow the results further. Note: Depending on your selection, the system may automatically filter the list and refresh the display. Click the Search button, as needed. View the parts that meet the selected criteria. Note : To reset the filter criteria to the default options, click the Clear icon.
Filter Campaign Part Management Summary To filter the Campaign Part Management summary: From the Filter By drop-down list, select a filter option. If a text-entry field appears, type a filter value (or perform a part lookup). - OR - If a drop-down list appears, select an option from the list. Note : Depending on your selection, additional filter options may display to narrow the results further. Note : Depending on your selection, the system may automatically filter the list and refresh the display. Click the Search icon, as needed. View the parts that meet the selected criteria.
Campaign Campaign Part Management Campaign Parts Campaign Campaign Part Management Campaign Part Management Manage Campaign Parts Workflow Note : This workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing campaign parts. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Campaign Parts Workflow. View Service Campaign Order Workflow Manage Service Campaign Order Workflow
Welcome to the Dealer Business System (DBS) Online Help Last Updated : August 30, 2018 The DBS help content is organized by application. Click one of the tabs below or in the header above to view the help content available. What's New in DBS ? Retailed Vehicle Open Campaign Report (New) Add Host Reports to DBS (Corporate Users) Search for a New VIN from the View NSH Page View Parts Master Information View Window Stickers for Used Vehicles Parts Return Summary Page (PDC Users) RDR a Used Vehicle Approve a Submitted Parts Return (Corporate Users) Host Reports Text/Value Search PDI Automated Payments: What You Need to Know Campaign Report (Updated) View Returns and Accrual Information View Parts Return Status (Corporate Users) Using the DBS Help System Navigating Full Help Use Context-Sensitive Help Search DBS Help Search DBS Help by Keyword Use Workflows in the DBS Help System Glossary Downloadable Quick Reference Guides General DBS Training Instructions Sales Campaign Visibility in Vehicle Inventory How to Access Window Stickers How to RDR and Unwind Vehicles Service Automated PDI Payments Express Entry Warranty Claim NOTOR DBS Integration Retailed Vehicle with Open Campaign Report (Takata Campaign) (New) Parts Parts Return and Accrual Information (New) SVC Parts Orders Office How to Submit a Financial Statement Administration DBS Admin Guide: Set Up User Permissions (Updated) Reports Host Reports What's New in DBS ? Search for a New VIN from the View NSH Page Add Host Reports to DBS (Corporate Users) View Window Stickers for Used Vehicles Host Reports Text/Value Search About Warranty Claims: What You Need to Know Emulate a Dealership or User (Corporate Users) DBS Admin Guide: Set Up User Permissions (Updated) Retrieve a List of New or Updated Users Using the DBS Help System Navigating Full Help Use Context-Sensitive Help Search DBS Help Search DBS Help by Keyword Use Workflows in the DBS Help System Glossary Downloadable Quick Reference Guides General DBS Training Instructions Sales Campaign Visibility in Vehicle Inventory How to Access Window Stickers Service Express Entry Warranty Claim NOTOR DBS Integration Parts Parts Return and Accrual Information (New) SVC Parts Orders Admin DBS Admin Guide: Set Up User Permissions (Updated) Reports Host Reports
View Customer Pay Reimbursement Analysis Workflow : Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for customer pay reimbursement analysis.
To open the Edit User Permissions page: Select the user. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Edit Permissions option. Note : The Edit Permissions page appears.
Open the Edit User Permissions Page To open the Edit User Permissions page: Select the user. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Edit Permissions option. Note : The Edit Permissions page appears.
View Overview Information View National Service History Page Overview View National Service History Workflow Perform Tasks Perform Common DBS Tasks Search for a New VIN from the View NSH Page Use the View NSH Quick Jump Menu View National Service History
National Service History National Service History (NSH) National Service History National Service History Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing national service history information for a vehicle.
To complete the operations information for a claim on the Edit/Create Warranty Claim page: In the Operation Code field, type the applicable operation code. Note : If you don't know the code, perform an operation code lookup. In the Req Hrs (Requested Hours) field, type the flat rate time for the operation code. Note : Flat rate time is the amount of time the dealer is allowed to perform a specific operation. In the Req Amt (Requested Amount) field, type the requested monetary labor amount. Click the Add icon. Note : DBS populates the Coverage 1 Code and Amt fields. By default, the Coverage 1 Code is the coverage code you selected in the Claim Information section, and the Coverage 1 Amt is the amount you requested in the Requested Amount field. You can edit these fields as needed. T he Sub (Sublet) field displays a default value of "N". A value of "Y" indicates this operation or labor was outsourced to a third party. If the line type in the Claim Information section is PO, select the PO checkbox for the operation code that describes the labor operation necessary to correct the primary complaint.
Complete the Operations Section of a Claim To complete the operations information for a claim: In the Operation Code field, type the six-character code that specifies the type of repair performed. Note : If you don't know the code, perform an operation code lookup. In the Req Hrs (Requested Hours) field, type the flat rate time for the operation code. Note : Flat rate time is the amount of time the dealer is allowed to perform a specific operation. In the Req Amt (Requested Amount) field, type the requested monetary labor amount. Click the Add icon. Note : DBS populates the Coverage 1 Code and Amt fields. By default, the Coverage 1 Code is the coverage code you selected in the Claim Information section, and the Coverage 1 Amt is the amount you requested in the Requested Amount field. You can edit these fields as needed. Click here for information on how to edit an operation. Click here for information on how to add or edit the DTC of an operation. Click here for information on how to add or edit the technician of an operation. Click here for information on how to delete an operation. T he Sub (Sublet) field displays a default value of "N". A value of "Y" indicates this operation or labor was outsourced to a third party. The DTC (Diagnostic Test Code) field indicates if you need to provide the DTC code. You can also click in the DTC field at any time to set a DTC code regardless of the operations code you entered. The PO (Primary Operation) checkbox indicates that the selected operation is set as the primary operation. If the line type in the Claim Information section is PO, then select the PO checkbox for the operation code. You may need to scroll right to view the checkbox. You can select only one operation as a primary operation. If you have more than one line item, you can click in the PO checkbox to change your selection of a primary operation. If you selected the line type PO in the Claim Information section, you must select at least one operation as a primary operation. Delete an Operation from a Warranty Claim To delete an operation from a warranty claim: Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Delete option. Add or Edit the Technician of an Operation in a Warranty Claim To add or edit the technician selection, in the Operations section of a warranty claim: Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon of the applicable row. From the Action menu, select the Edit Tech option. Note : The Technician window opens. Select one or more technicians. Click the Save button. Add or Edit the DTC of an Operation in a Warranty Claim To edit the diagnostic test code (DTC): Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon of the applicable row. From the Action menu, select Edit DTC . Type or select a DTC code. Click the Add icon. Note : DCS adds the code to the DTC code list. Click the Save button. Edit an Operation in a Warranty Claim To edit an operation in a warranty claim: Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Edit Line option. Modify the operation as desired. Note : To change the selection in the Sub (Sublet) field, use the drop-down arrow next to the field. To split payment for an operation using different coverage codes, complete the Code and Amt fields for Coverage 2 and Coverage 3. To save your changes, move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Save option. The Coverage Code field options depend on the coverage you selected in the Claim Information section. The Coverage Code options include CP-Customer Pay, DI-Dealer Internal, FG-Factory Goodwill, FW-Factory Warranty, SC-Service Contract, and TP-Third Party. The payment amounts that are split among the Coverage Amt fields must be equal to the requested amount in the Req Amt field.
Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Edit Warranty Claims Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Warranty Claims Edit or Create Warranty Claims Workflow *** Nissan Canada Inc. (NCI) recommends dealers create Warranty Claims in an NCI DBS certified dealer management system and then log into NCI DBS to review, validate and submit the claim to NCI. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating and editing claims. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Warranty Claims Workflow or View Warranty Claims Workflow. Manage Warranty Claims Workflow View Warranty Claims Workflow
To complete the operations information for a claim on the Edit/Create Warranty Claim page: In the Operation Code field, type the applicable operation code. Note : If you don't know the code, perform an operation code lookup. In the Req Hrs (Requested Hours) field, type the flat rate time for the operation code. Note : Flat rate time is the amount of time the dealer is allowed to perform a specific operation. In the Req Amt (Requested Amount) field, type the requested monetary labor amount. Click the Add icon. Note : DBS populates the Coverage 1 Code and Amt fields. By default, the Coverage 1 Code is the coverage code you selected in the Claim Information section, and the Coverage 1 Amt is the amount you requested in the Requested Amount field. You can edit these fields as needed. T he Sub (Sublet) field displays a default value of "N". A value of "Y" indicates this operation or labor was outsourced to a third party. If the line type in the Claim Information section is PO, select the PO checkbox for the operation code that describes the labor operation necessary to correct the primary complaint.
Complete the Operations Section of a Claim To complete the operations information for a claim: In the Operation Code field, type the six-character code that specifies the type of repair performed. Note : If you don't know the code, perform an operation code lookup. In the Req Hrs (Requested Hours) field, type the flat rate time for the operation code. Note : Flat rate time is the amount of time the dealer is allowed to perform a specific operation. In the Req Amt (Requested Amount) field, type the requested monetary labor amount. Click the Add icon. Note : DBS populates the Coverage 1 Code and Amt fields. By default, the Coverage 1 Code is the coverage code you selected in the Claim Information section, and the Coverage 1 Amt is the amount you requested in the Requested Amount field. You can edit these fields as needed. Click here for information on how to edit an operation. Click here for information on how to add or edit the DTC of an operation. Click here for information on how to add or edit the technician of an operation. Click here for information on how to delete an operation. T he Sub (Sublet) field displays a default value of "N". A value of "Y" indicates this operation or labor was outsourced to a third party. The DTC (Diagnostic Test Code) field indicates if you need to provide the DTC code. You can also click in the DTC field at any time to set a DTC code regardless of the operations code you entered. The PO (Primary Operation) checkbox indicates that the selected operation is set as the primary operation. If the line type in the Claim Information section is PO, then select the PO checkbox for the operation code. You may need to scroll right to view the checkbox. You can select only one operation as a primary operation. If you have more than one line item, you can click in the PO checkbox to change your selection of a primary operation. If you selected the line type PO in the Claim Information section, you must select at least one operation as a primary operation. Delete an Operation from a Warranty Claim To delete an operation from a warranty claim: Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Delete option. Add or Edit the Technician of an Operation in a Warranty Claim To add or edit the technician selection, in the Operations section of a warranty claim: Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon of the applicable row. From the Action menu, select the Edit Tech option. Note : The Technician window opens. Select one or more technicians. Click the Save button. Add or Edit the DTC of an Operation in a Warranty Claim To edit the diagnostic test code (DTC): Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon of the applicable row. From the Action menu, select Edit DTC . Type or select a DTC code. Click the Add icon. Note : DCS adds the code to the DTC code list. Click the Save button. Edit an Operation in a Warranty Claim To edit an operation in a warranty claim: Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Edit Line option. Modify the operation as desired. Note : To change the selection in the Sub (Sublet) field, use the drop-down arrow next to the field. To split payment for an operation using different coverage codes, complete the Code and Amt fields for Coverage 2 and Coverage 3. To save your changes, move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Save option. The Coverage Code field options depend on the coverage you selected in the Claim Information section. The Coverage Code options include CP-Customer Pay, DI-Dealer Internal, FG-Factory Goodwill, FW-Factory Warranty, SC-Service Contract, and TP-Third Party. The payment amounts that are split among the Coverage Amt fields must be equal to the requested amount in the Req Amt field.
Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Edit Warranty Claims Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Warranty Claims Edit or Create Warranty Claims Workflow *** Nissan Canada Inc. (NCI) recommends dealers create Warranty Claims in an NCI DBS certified dealer management system and then log into NCI DBS to review, validate and submit the claim to NCI. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating and editing claims. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Warranty Claims Workflow or View Warranty Claims Workflow. Manage Warranty Claims Workflow View Warranty Claims Workflow
To view study alert information from the Service Dashboard: In the Alerts section, move your mouse pointer over the Action icon on the applicable row. From the Action menu, select the Detail option. Note : The Alert window opens. Select the study alert you want to view. Note : DBS indicates if the vehicle has already been put on hold. When you are finished viewing the alert detail, click the Close button. If an option is not available, that option is not displayed. The study alerts are color-coded. Alerts concerning vehicle hold studies or vehicle hold studies combined with informational studies are highlighted in red. Alerts concerning informational-only studies or Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) with keywords that match the repair order are highlighted in yellow.
View Study Alert Detail To view study alert detail: In the Alerts section, move your mouse pointer over the Action icon on the applicable row. From the Action menu, select the Detail option. Note : The Alert window opens. Select the study alert you want to view. Note : DBS indicates if the vehicle has already been put on hold. When you are finished viewing the alert detail, click the Close button. The study alerts are color-coded. Alerts concerning vehicle hold studies or vehicle hold studies combined with informational studies are highlighted in red. Alerts concerning Informational-only studies or technical service bulletins (TSBs) with keywords that match the repair order are highlighted in yellow.
Dashboard Early Detection System (EDS) EDS: Service Dashboard EDS: Service Dashboard Service Dashboard Study Technical Service Bulletin (TSB) View the Service Dashboard Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing the Service Dashboard. You may view study alerts generated regarding vehicles that meet the criteria of informational or hold studies or technical service bulletins. You may also view open repair orders or National Service History.
To export custom VIN campaign report information: Click the Export button. Note : The campaignReport.xlsx file appears. Follow your browser-specific instructions to open or save the file.
Export Custom VIN Campaign Report Information To export custom VIN campaign report information: Click the Export button. Note : The campaignReport.xlsx file appears. Follow your browser-specific instructions to open or save the file.
Change graphic to show magnifying glass and broom icons. Standard Operation Codes Page Overview - Internal User Purpose Use the Standard Operation Codes page to view and manage standard operation codes. Description The content area of the Standard Operation Codes page displays the following sections: Search by - Allows you to search for records that match your criteria Note: The New, Export, and Run buttons are also located in this section. Summary - Displays general information for all records on the page Detail - Displays specific information for a selected record Tasks You can perform the following tasks from or on the Standard Operation Codes page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks . Access the Create Standard Operation Group Page Access the Edit Standard Operation Group Page Delete a Standard Operation Code Export the Standard Operation Codes Summary Filter the Standard Operation Codes Summary Re-Run Translation Process Restart a Standard Operation Code Suspend a Standard Operation Code View the Standard Operation Code Summary and Detail Access the Create Standard Operation Group Page Access the Edit Standard Operation Group Page Delete a Standard Operation Code Export the Standard Operation Codes Summary Filter the Standard Operation Codes Summary Re-Run Translation Process Restart a Standard Operation Code Suspend a Standard Operation Code View the Standard Operation Code Summary and Detail Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Standard Operation Codes page. Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes Workflow Manage Standard Operation Codes Workflow Page Preview
View Position Permissions Workflow Note : This workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing position permissions. Related Workflows The following workflow may have one or more tasks in common with the View Position Permissions Workflow. Edit Position Permissions Workflow
To delete a custom search group: Select the custom group to be deleted. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Delete option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm, or click the No button to close the window without confirming. Note : The custom group no longer appears in the custom group list or in the Compare Group drop-down list.
Delete a Custom Search Group To delete a custom search group: From the custom group list, select the custom group to be deleted. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Delete option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm, or click the No button to close the window without confirming. Note : The custom group no longer appears in the custom group list or in the Compare Group drop-down list.
Custom Search Group Manage Custom Search Group Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing custom search groups. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Custom Search Group (Parts Metrics) Workflow. View Parts Metrics Workflow
Office Landing Page Overview Purpose From the Office landing page, you are able to directly access alerts, announcements, and other news related to the Office application. You are also able to select a tab from the top tool bar to access the other applications in DBS to which you have been granted access. Description The content area of the Office landing page displays the following sections: Alerts - Appear at the top of the landing page, if applicable. The Alert messages continually scroll across the top of the page, when applicable. Alerts typically provide information that is system critical. Announcements -The announcements that display on the Office landing page are those specifically applicable to users of the Office application. The highest-priority announcements appear in the Regional or National Announcements section, if applicable. The remaining announcements display in the Other News section. Other News - Displays the announcements that are not as high priority. When an announcement is no longer one of the high-priority announcements, the announcement automatically moves to the Other News section. Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Office landing page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. View Alerts View Announcement and Other News Page Preview
To view the Service Dashboard: View the list of alerts or open repair orders (ROs). Note : The Service Dashboard refreshes each time a dealer opens a new RO or modifies an existing RO. To sort the displayed information, click the arrow beside a column title. The study alerts are color-coded. Alerts concerning Vehicle Hold studies or Vehicle Hold studies combined with Informational studies are highlighted in red. Alerts concerning Informational-only studies or Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) with keywords that match the repair order are highlighted in yellow.
About the Service Dashboard To view the Service Dashboard: View the list of alerts or view the list of open repair orders (ROs). Note : The Service Dashboard refreshes each time a dealer opens a new RO or modifies an existing RO. To sort the displayed information, click the arrow beside a column title. The study alerts are color-coded. Alerts concerning vehicle Hold studies or concerning vehicle Hold studies combined with Informational studies are highlighted in red. Alerts concerning Informational-only studies or concerning Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) containing keywords that match the RO are highlighted in yellow.
Dashboard Early Detection System (EDS) EDS: Service Dashboard EDS: Service Dashboard Service Dashboard Study Technical Service Bulletin (TSB) View the Service Dashboard Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing the Service Dashboard. You may view study alerts generated regarding vehicles that meet the criteria of informational or hold studies or technical service bulletins. You may also view open repair orders or National Service History.
To modify a detail line on a return: Select the detail line you want to modify. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Edit option. To change the part number, type a valid part number or perform a part lookup. Note : Click here for more information on how to look up a part. To change the return quantity, type a valid quantity. Note : If the return type is DRP or ASR, the return quantity must be a multiple of the unit pack. For example, if the unit pack is 15, you must specify a return quantity of 15, 30, 45, and so on. To change the box number, type a valid box number. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Save option. Click the Save button. To modify a detail line on a parts return, the return must be in "New" or "Open" status.
Modify a Detail Line on a Return To modify a detail line on a return: Select the detail line you want to modify. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Edit option. To change the part number, in the Part Number field, type a valid part number or perform a part lookup. To change the return quantity, in the Return Quantity field, type a valid quantity. Note : The return quantity must be a multiple of the unit pack. For example, if the unit pack is 15, you must specify a return quantity of 15, 30, 45, and so on. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Save option. Note : The system displays the updated values in the respective field(s). Click the Save button. Note : A "Parts return saved successfully" message appears. To modify a detail line on a return: Select the detail line you want to modify. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Edit option. To change the part number, in the Part Number field, type a valid part number or perform a part lookup. To change the return quantity, in the Return Quantity field, type a valid quantity. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Save option. Click the Save button. To modify a detail line on a parts return, the return must be in "New" or "Open" status.
Create Return Create Return Create Return Create Parts Return Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating a parts return. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create Parts Return Workflow. Manage Parts Return Workflow Modify Parts Return Workflow
Edit Return Edit Return Edit Return Edit Parts Return Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for modifying a parts return. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Edit Parts Return Workflow. Create Parts Return Workflow Manage Parts Return Workflow
To filter parts return detail: In the Filter By field, type the part number you wish to locate. Click the Search icon. Note : The Parts Return Detail section updates to display the part number details.
Filter Parts Return Detail To filter parts return detail: In the Filter By field, type the part number you wish to locate. Click the Search icon. Note : The Parts Return Detail section updates to display the part number details.
Create Return Create Return Create Return Create Parts Return Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating a parts return. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create Parts Return Workflow. Manage Parts Return Workflow Modify Parts Return Workflow
Edit Return Edit Return Edit Return Edit Parts Return Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for modifying a parts return. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Edit Parts Return Workflow. Create Parts Return Workflow Manage Parts Return Workflow
To delete a standard operation code: Select a code. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Delete Code option. Note: The Delete Confirmation window opens. Click the Delete button to delete, or click the Cancel button to close without deleting. Note: After deleting a code, you should re-run the translation process to update the ROs in the National Service History RO table. Click here for more information.
Delete a Standard Operation Code To delete a standard operation code: Select a code. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Delete Code option. Note : The Delete Confirmation window opens. Click the Delete button to delete, or click the Cancel button to close without deleting. Note : After deleting a code, you should re-run the translation process to update the ROs in the National Service History RO table. Click here for more information.
ReRun Standard Operation Code Translation Manage Standard Operation Codes Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing standard operation codes. Related Workflows ( Note to developer : List the related workflows and link to them.) The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Standard Operation Codes Workflow. Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes Workflow Manage Dealer Operation Codes Workflow Manage Standard Operation Categories Workflow
To access the copyright page from any DBS application page: Click the Copyright link.
Access the Copyright Page To access the copyright page from any DBS application page: Click the Copyright link.
Campaign Vehicle Quick Reference Guide The Vehicle Inventory page now allows you quickly and easily identify those vehicles in your inventory which are associated with an open campaign. Color-coded highlighting has been applied to campaign vehicles for quick identification of vehicles with open campaigns that have not been serviced, and those with campaigns where service has been completed. You can also filter your inventory display to view a list of those campaign vehicles at your dealership. EAC530BE-C20D-42AD-AB94-82D468FA018D\Campaign Visibility Vehicle Inventory Quick Reference Guide NISSAN v7 R-....pdf
View Warranty Claims Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing warranty claims. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the (Insert workflow title) Workflow. Edit or Create Warranty Claims Workflow Manage Warranty Claims Workflow
View Overview Information Campaign Report Page Overview Perform Tasks Export Campaign Report Information Filter the Campaign Report Page Perform Common DBS Tasks Search for Information by Campaign ID
Host Reports Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing, printing, filtering, searching, and adding or removing a Host report from the Favorites list.
Host Reports Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing, printing, filtering, searching, and adding or removing a Host report from the Favorites list.
Host Reports Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing, printing, filtering, searching, and adding or removing a Host report from the Favorites list.
Host Reports Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing, printing, filtering, searching, and adding or removing a Host report from the Favorites list.
Host Reports Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing, printing, filtering, searching, and adding or removing a Host report from the Favorites list.
From the Edit/Create Warranty Claim page, to add a new claim line to a repair order: At the bottom of the page, click the New Claim Line button. In the Line Number field, type the appropriate RO line number. Complete the following sections of the claim. Click the links below for instructions on how to complete/view these sections. Summary Claim Information Parts Operations Expenses Comments Customer Claim Activity (View Only) History (View Only) Summary Claim Information Parts Operations Expenses Comments Customer Claim Activity (View Only) History (View Only) Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Note : You can save a warranty claim with warnings and error messages. Note : DBS updates the claim status when you save the claim. You can add a new claim line to a repair order regardless of the status of a claim.
Add a New Claim Line from Edit/Create Warranty Claim Page From the Edit/Create Warranty Claim page, to add a new claim line to a repair order: At the bottom of the page, click the New Claim Line button. In the Line Number field, type the appropriate RO line number. Complete the following sections of the claim. Click the links below for instructions on how to complete/view these sections. Summary Claim Information Parts Operations Expenses Comments Customer Claim Activity (View Only) History (View Only) Summary Claim Information Parts Operations Expenses Comments Customer Claim Activity (View Only) History (View Only) Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the Close button to close without saving. Note : To enable the Save button, you must select a line type in the Claim Information section. Note : You can save a warranty claim with warnings and error messages. Note : DBS updates the claim status when you save the claim. You can add a new claim line to a repair order regardless of the status of a claim.
Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Edit Warranty Claims Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Warranty Claims Edit or Create Warranty Claims Workflow *** Nissan Canada Inc. (NCI) recommends dealers create Warranty Claims in an NCI DBS certified dealer management system and then log into NCI DBS to review, validate and submit the claim to NCI. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating and editing claims. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Warranty Claims Workflow or View Warranty Claims Workflow. Manage Warranty Claims Workflow View Warranty Claims Workflow
To change the due date for a single dealer parts return: In the Dealer List section, select the row for you want to change. Note : The Return Schedule List section on the right updates to display the return schedule for the selected dealer. In the Return Schedule List section, move your mouse pointer over the Action icon for parts return schedule you want to change. From the Action menu, select the Change Return Due Date option. In the Change Return Due Date field, use the calendar to select the new parts return due date. Click Save .
Change the Parts Return Due Date for a Single Dealer Parts Return To change the due date for a single dealer parts return: In the Dealer List section, select the row for you want to change. Note : The Return Schedule List section on the right updates to display the return schedule for the selected dealer. In the Return Schedule List section, move your mouse pointer over the Action icon for parts return schedule you want to change. From the Action menu, select the Change Return Due Date option. In the Change Return Due Date field, use the calendar to select the new parts return due date. Note : The parts return due date is the date by which a dealer is expected to have submitted the scheduled parts return. Click Save .
To open the Modify Study page: Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon for the study you want to modify. From the Action menu, select the Edit Study option.
Open the Modify Study Page To open the Modify Study page: Select the study you want to modify. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon for the study you want to modify. From the Action menu, select the Edit Study option.
Early Detection System (EDS) EDS: Study Dashboard Processes EDS: Study Dashboard Study Study Dashboard Technical Service Bulletin (TSB) Create or Modify a Study Workflow Note : The Create or Modify a Study workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for defining or modifying a study that integrates appointment and repair order data collected by the Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Define or Modify a Study Workflow. Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow View One Study Result Workflow
Dashboard Early Detection System (EDS) Hold Status Processes Study View Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow Note: The Manage Early Detection System Studies workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing Early Detection System (EDS) studies that integrate appointment and repair order data collected by the Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow. Define or Modify a Study Workflow View One Study Result Workflow View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow
For information on how to report the sale of a vehicle traded in OMS that is not yet in your inventory, click here . To report or edit the sale of a vehicle in inventory using the Quick Entry RDR page: From the Filter By drop-down list, select the attribute by which to search for the vehicle. In the Filter By data entry field, enter the number by which to search for the vehicle. Click the Search icon to search for the vehicle. Complete or edit each section of the RDR. Complete the Vehicle Section of the RDR. Click here for more information. Complete the Customer Section of the RDR. Click here for more information. Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Note : Any field that displays a circle indicates the information is required and needs to be completed or corrected before submitting the RDR. Note : If the RDR contains errors, an error message displays. Click the Yes button to save the RDR with errors, or click the No button to close the error message and return to the Quick Entry RDR page. To print the RDR confirmation after submission, select the Automatically print RDR confirmation after submission? checkbox. Click the Submit button to submit the RDR to the NNA Host. Note : When you submit the RDR, a message displays stating that the submission of the RDR to the NNA Host is in process. This may take a few seconds to complete. When DBS receives acknowledgement from the NNA Host, a response displays in the Summary section, and DBS changes the vehicle status to "Retailed" or "RDR Rejected". Note : After the host responds, the cursor returns to the Filter By data entry field to allow you to enter the next RDR.
Report an RDR for a Vehicle in Your Inventory Using Quick Entry RDR For information on how to report the sale of a vehicle traded in OMS that is not yet in your inventory, click here . To report or edit the sale of a vehicle in your Inventory using Quick Entry RDR: From the Filter By drop-down list, select the attribute you want to use for searching for the vehicle. Note : The selected filter remains as the selection until you change it. For example, if you select "Stock Number", it remains the search attribute until you change it to another value. In the Filter By data entry field, enter the number by which to search for the vehicle. Click the Search icon to search for the vehicle. Note : DBS processes the search request. If the vehicle is found in the dealer's inventory, DBS provides additional information about the vehicle, and you then continue with data entry. Note : If the vehicle is not found in the dealer's inventory, DBS displays an error message. If you have used OMS to do a dealer trade, see the topic titled RDR a Vehicle Not in Your Inventory Using Quick Entry RDR . To print the RDR confirmation after submission, select the Automatically print RDR confirmation after submission? checkbox. If the vehicle is found and meets the conditions to be RDR'd, DBS populates the following fields: VIN, Stock Number, Model Code, Model Description, and Model Year. From the Deal drop-down list, select the appropriate deal, if more than one deal exists for the vehicle. Note : If you select a deal, the Sale Date and Salesperson fields populate for you, as well as most of the customer information. Enter or update additional information in the Vehicle section, as needed, just as you would when starting the RDR process from the Vehicle Inventory page. Note : Click here for more information. Complete the Customer section of the RDR, filling in the fields that were not auto-populated. Note : Click here for more information. Click the Save button, and then click the Submit button. Note : If errors exist, correct the errors and click the Submit button again. Note : When you submit the RDR, the Host processes the RDR and responds by indicating whether the RDR is rejected or accepted. The cursor returns to the Filter By data entry field to allow you to enter the next RDR. Note : When an RDR transaction is successful, the vehicle is marked as "Retailed" in the Vehicle Inventory view and added to the RDR History. Note : If the status is updated to "Rejected", DBS provides a rejection message for your information. When an RDR transaction is unsuccessful, the vehicle is marked as "RDR Failed" in the Vehicle Inventory view and the RDR History is not updated.
View Overview Information Calendar Events Page Overview Create or Edit a Calendar Event Workflow Perform Tasks Change the Status of an Event Copy an Event Delete an Event Filter the Calendar Events Summary Open the Create Calendar Event Page Open the Edit Calendar Event Page Perform Common DBS Tasks View or Print Calendar Event Detail View the Calendar Events Summary Change the Status of an Event Copy an Event Delete an Event Filter the Calendar Events Summary Open the Create Calendar Event Page Open the Edit Calendar Event Page Perform Common DBS Tasks View or Print Calendar Event Detail View the Calendar Events Summary
Calendar Create Edit Events Modify Processes Create or Edit a Calendar Event Workflow Note : This workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating or modifying a calendar event. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create or Edit a Calendar Event workflow. Create or Edit an Alert Workflow Create or Edit an Announcement Workflow Create or Edit a Notification Workflow
Create or Edit Standard Operation Category Page Overview Purpose Use the Create or Edit Standard Operation Category page to create or edit a standard operation category. Description The content area of the Create or Edit Standard Operation Category page displays the following sections: Create/Edit Standard Operation Category - Allows you to provide a name and description for a standard operation category Key Words - Allows you to add or modify key words associated with a standard operation category Tasks You can perform the following tasks from or on the Create or Edit Standard Operation Category page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Access the Create Standard Operation Category Page Access the Edit Standard Operation Category Page Add a Key Word Create or Edit a Standard Operation Category Delete a Key Word Delete a Standard Operation Category Edit a Key Word Search the Standard Operation Category Summary View the Standard Operation Category Summary and Detail Access the Create Standard Operation Category Page Access the Edit Standard Operation Category Page Add a Key Word Create or Edit a Standard Operation Category Delete a Key Word Delete a Standard Operation Category Edit a Key Word Search the Standard Operation Category Summary View the Standard Operation Category Summary and Detail Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Create or Edit Standard Operation Category page. Manage Standard Operation Categories Workflow Page Preview
To view the amounts paid on an approved warranty claim: If necessary, in the the Claims Summary section, click the radio button to display the list of approved claims. Click the hyperlink in the Paid Amt column for the selected claim. When you have finished reviewing the payment details, click the Close button to return to the Manage Warranty Claim page.
View Amounts Paid on an Approved Warranty Claim To view the amounts paid on an approved warranty claim: If necessary, display the list of approved claims. Click the hyperlink in the Amount Paid column. When you have finished reviewing the payment details, click the Close button to return to the Manage Warranty Claim page. To view the amounts paid on an approved warranty claim: If necessary, in the the Claims Summary section, click the radio button to display the list of approved claims. Click the hyperlink in the Paid Amt column for the selected claim. When you have finished reviewing the payment details, click the Close button to return to the Manage Warranty Claim page.
To reject multiple SVC (service campaign) orders: Select the check box next to each campaign order you want to reject. Click the Reject Selected button. In the rejection message area, type the reason why you are rejecting these campaign orders. Click the Yes button to cancel the selected orders. Note: To close the message and return to the SVC Order Management page, click the No button.
Reject Multiple SVC Orders To reject multiple SVC (service campaign) orders: Select the check box next to each campaign order you want to reject. Click the Reject Selected button. In the rejection message area, type the reason why you are rejecting these campaign orders. Click the Yes button to cancel the selected orders. Note: To close the message and return to the SVC Order Management page, click the No button.
Approve or Reject SVC Order Reject Approve or Reject SVC Order Approve or Reject SVC Order Manage Service Campaign Order Workflow Note : This workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing a Service Campaign (SVC) order. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Service Campaign Order Workflow. Manage Campaign Parts Workflow View Service Campaign Order Workflow
To adjust the accrual amount for a parts return: In the Dealer List section, select the row for you want to change. Note : The Return Schedule List section on the right updates to display the return schedule for the selected dealer. In the Return Schedule List section, move your mouse pointer over the Action icon for parts return schedule you want to change. Note : If necessary, scroll to the right to view the Return Schedule List section, and scroll down in the Return Schedule List section if the schedule you want to modify is not displayed. From the Action menu, select the Adjust Accrual Amount option. In the Adjust Accrual Amount fields, type one or more accrual adjustment amounts. Note : Format the accrual adjustment amount as shown in the image below. DBS accepts up to five characters, followed by a period and then an additional two characters. From the Adjustment Reason drop-down lists, select an adjustment reason for each accrual amount entered. Note : Authorized users can maintain the options that appear in the Adjustment Reason drop-down list. Click here for more information. Click Save .
Adjust the Accrual Amount for a Parts Return To adjust the accrual amount for a parts return: In the Dealer List section, select the row for you want to change. Note : The Return Schedule List section on the right updates to display the return schedule for the selected dealer. In the Return Schedule List section, move your mouse pointer over the Action icon for parts return schedule you want to change. Note : If necessary, scroll to the right to view the Return Schedule List section, and scroll down in the Return Schedule List section if the schedule you want to modify is not displayed. From the Action menu, select the Adjust Accrual Amount option. In the Adjust Accrual Amount fields, type one or more accrual adjustment amounts. Note : Format the accrual adjustment amount as shown in the image below. DBS accepts up to five characters, followed by a period and then an additional two characters. From the Adjustment Reason drop-down lists, select an adjustment reason for each accrual amount entered. Note : Authorized users can maintain the options that appear in the Adjustment Reason drop-down list. Click here for more information. Click Save .
To add a Host report to the Favorites list: Select the report in the Reports list. Note : The row will turn a turquoise color. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Add to favorites option. Note : The name of the report appears on the Favorites list. Repeat steps 1-3 until all desired reports are added to the Favorites list. The greatest benefit of adding reports to your Favorites list is that you only have to search for them once, then use the Print Overnight Reports button in the Favorites section to quickly print all of your morning Host reports. Use the Filter and Search options to locate host reports quickly and easily. Internal users can have favorite reports, but they must be the same favorites for all dealerships the user may access. Internal users cannot have a separate list of favorite reports for each dealer.
Add a Host Report to the Favorites List To add a Host report to the Favorites list: Select the report in the Reports list. Note : The row will turn a turquoise color. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Add to favorites menu option. Note : The name of the report appears on the Favorites list. Repeat steps 1-3 until all desired reports are added to the Favorites list. The greatest benefit of adding reports to your Favorites list is that you only have to search for them once, then use the Print Overnight Reports button in the Favorites section to quickly print all of your morning Host reports. Use the Filter and Search options to locate host reports quickly and easily. Internal users can have favorite reports, but they must be the same favorites for all dealerships the user may access. Internal users cannot have a separate list of favorite reports for each dealer.
Host Reports Processes Host Reports Host Reports Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing, printing, filtering, searching, and adding or removing a Host report from the Favorites list.
To add a Host report to the Favorites list: Select the report in the Reports list. Note : The row will turn a turquoise color. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Add to favorites option. Note : The name of the report appears on the Favorites list. Repeat steps 1-3 until all desired reports are added to the Favorites list. The greatest benefit of adding reports to your Favorites list is that you only have to search for them once, then use the Print Overnight Reports button in the Favorites section to quickly print all of your morning Host reports. Use the Filter and Search options to locate host reports quickly and easily. Internal users can have favorite reports, but they must be the same favorites for all dealerships the user may access. Internal users cannot have a separate list of favorite reports for each dealer.
Add a Host Report to the Favorites List To add a Host report to the Favorites list: Select the report in the Reports list. Note : The row will turn a turquoise color. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Add to favorites menu option. Note : The name of the report appears on the Favorites list. Repeat steps 1-3 until all desired reports are added to the Favorites list. The greatest benefit of adding reports to your Favorites list is that you only have to search for them once, then use the Print Overnight Reports button in the Favorites section to quickly print all of your morning Host reports. Use the Filter and Search options to locate host reports quickly and easily. Internal users can have favorite reports, but they must be the same favorites for all dealerships the user may access. Internal users cannot have a separate list of favorite reports for each dealer.
Host Reports Processes Host Reports Host Reports Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing, printing, filtering, searching, and adding or removing a Host report from the Favorites list.
To add a Host report to the Favorites list: Select the report in the Reports list. Note : The row will turn a turquoise color. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Add to favorites option. Note : The name of the report appears on the Favorites list. Repeat steps 1-3 until all desired reports are added to the Favorites list. The greatest benefit of adding reports to your Favorites list is that you only have to search for them once, then use the Print Overnight Reports button in the Favorites section to quickly print all of your morning Host reports. Use the Filter and Search options to locate host reports quickly and easily. Internal users can have favorite reports, but they must be the same favorites for all dealerships the user may access. Internal users cannot have a separate list of favorite reports for each dealer.
Add a Host Report to the Favorites List To add a Host report to the Favorites list: Select the report in the Reports list. Note : The row will turn a turquoise color. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Add to favorites menu option. Note : The name of the report appears on the Favorites list. Repeat steps 1-3 until all desired reports are added to the Favorites list. The greatest benefit of adding reports to your Favorites list is that you only have to search for them once, then use the Print Overnight Reports button in the Favorites section to quickly print all of your morning Host reports. Use the Filter and Search options to locate host reports quickly and easily. Internal users can have favorite reports, but they must be the same favorites for all dealerships the user may access. Internal users cannot have a separate list of favorite reports for each dealer.
Host Reports Processes Host Reports Host Reports Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing, printing, filtering, searching, and adding or removing a Host report from the Favorites list.
To add a Host report to the Favorites list: Select the report in the Reports list. Note : The row will turn a turquoise color. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Add to favorites option. Note : The name of the report appears on the Favorites list. Repeat steps 1-3 until all desired reports are added to the Favorites list. The greatest benefit of adding reports to your Favorites list is that you only have to search for them once, then use the Print Overnight Reports button in the Favorites section to quickly print all of your morning Host reports. Use the Filter and Search options to locate host reports quickly and easily. Internal users can have favorite reports, but they must be the same favorites for all dealerships the user may access. Internal users cannot have a separate list of favorite reports for each dealer.
Add a Host Report to the Favorites List To add a Host report to the Favorites list: Select the report in the Reports list. Note : The row will turn a turquoise color. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Add to favorites menu option. Note : The name of the report appears on the Favorites list. Repeat steps 1-3 until all desired reports are added to the Favorites list. The greatest benefit of adding reports to your Favorites list is that you only have to search for them once, then use the Print Overnight Reports button in the Favorites section to quickly print all of your morning Host reports. Use the Filter and Search options to locate host reports quickly and easily. Internal users can have favorite reports, but they must be the same favorites for all dealerships the user may access. Internal users cannot have a separate list of favorite reports for each dealer.
Host Reports Processes Host Reports Host Reports Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing, printing, filtering, searching, and adding or removing a Host report from the Favorites list.
To add a Host report to the Favorites list: Select the report in the Reports list. Note : The row will turn a turquoise color. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Add to favorites option. Note : The name of the report appears on the Favorites list. Repeat steps 1-3 until all desired reports are added to the Favorites list. The greatest benefit of adding reports to your Favorites list is that you only have to search for them once, then use the Print Overnight Reports button in the Favorites section to quickly print all of your morning Host reports. Use the Filter and Search options to locate host reports quickly and easily. Internal users can have favorite reports, but they must be the same favorites for all dealerships the user may access. Internal users cannot have a separate list of favorite reports for each dealer.
Add a Host Report to the Favorites List To add a Host report to the Favorites list: Select the report in the Reports list. Note : The row will turn a turquoise color. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Add to favorites menu option. Note : The name of the report appears on the Favorites list. Repeat steps 1-3 until all desired reports are added to the Favorites list. The greatest benefit of adding reports to your Favorites list is that you only have to search for them once, then use the Print Overnight Reports button in the Favorites section to quickly print all of your morning Host reports. Use the Filter and Search options to locate host reports quickly and easily. Internal users can have favorite reports, but they must be the same favorites for all dealerships the user may access. Internal users cannot have a separate list of favorite reports for each dealer.
Host Reports Processes Host Reports Host Reports Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing, printing, filtering, searching, and adding or removing a Host report from the Favorites list.
Create, Modify, or Replicate Report Page Overview Purpose Use the Create Report, Modify Report, or Replicate Report pages to create, modify, and replicate personalized report definitions in Report Writer to meet your specific needs. Description The content area of the Create Report, Modify Report, or Replicate Report pages display the following sections: Quick Jump Menu - Appears on the left-hand side of the page. The Quick Jump menu allows you to jump from section to section without scrolling. Report Definition - Identifies the report, application area, view, and report category; and lists available fields to include in the report Selection Criteria - Allows you to select criteria operators for each field in the report Sort Criteria - Allows you to select fields to be sorted Total/Sum Criteria - Allows you to select the fields to be totaled Printing Criteria - Allows you to adjust column width Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Create Report, Modify Report, or Replicate Report pages. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Select the Fields for a Report Select the Criteria Operators Select the Report Fields to be Sorted Select the Report Fields to be Totaled Adjust the Report Column Widths View a Report Definition Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Select the Fields for a Report Select the Criteria Operators Select the Report Fields to be Sorted Select the Report Fields to be Totaled Adjust the Report Column Widths View a Report Definition Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Report Definition page. Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Workflow Page Preview
Create, Modify, or Replicate Report Page Overview Purpose Use the Create Report, Modify Report, or Replicate Report pages to create, modify, and replicate personalized report definitions in Report Writer to meet your specific needs. Description The content area of the Create Report, Modify Report, or Replicate Report pages display the following sections: Quick Jump Menu - Appears on the left-hand side of the page. The Quick Jump menu allows you to jump from section to section without scrolling. Report Definition - Identifies the report, application area, view, and report category; and lists available fields to include in the report Selection Criteria - Allows you to select criteria operators for each field in the report Sort Criteria - Allows you to select fields to be sorted Total/Sum Criteria - Allows you to select the fields to be totaled Printing Criteria - Allows you to adjust column width Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Create Report, Modify Report, or Replicate Report pages. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Select the Fields for a Report Select the Criteria Operators Select the Report Fields to be Sorted Select the Report Fields to be Totaled Adjust the Report Column Widths View a Report Definition Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Select the Fields for a Report Select the Criteria Operators Select the Report Fields to be Sorted Select the Report Fields to be Totaled Adjust the Report Column Widths View a Report Definition Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Report Definition page. Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Workflow Page Preview
Create, Modify, or Replicate Report Page Overview Purpose Use the Create Report, Modify Report, or Replicate Report pages to create, modify, and replicate personalized report definitions in Report Writer to meet your specific needs. Description The content area of the Create Report, Modify Report, or Replicate Report pages display the following sections: Quick Jump Menu - Appears on the left-hand side of the page. The Quick Jump menu allows you to jump from section to section without scrolling. Report Definition - Identifies the report, application area, view, and report category; and lists available fields to include in the report Selection Criteria - Allows you to select criteria operators for each field in the report Sort Criteria - Allows you to select fields to be sorted Total/Sum Criteria - Allows you to select the fields to be totaled Printing Criteria - Allows you to adjust column width Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Create Report, Modify Report, or Replicate Report pages. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Select the Fields for a Report Select the Criteria Operators Select the Report Fields to be Sorted Select the Report Fields to be Totaled Adjust the Report Column Widths View a Report Definition Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Select the Fields for a Report Select the Criteria Operators Select the Report Fields to be Sorted Select the Report Fields to be Totaled Adjust the Report Column Widths View a Report Definition Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Report Definition page. Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Workflow Page Preview
Create, Modify, or Replicate Report Page Overview Purpose Use the Create Report, Modify Report, or Replicate Report pages to create, modify, and replicate personalized report definitions in Report Writer to meet your specific needs. Description The content area of the Create Report, Modify Report, or Replicate Report pages display the following sections: Quick Jump Menu - Appears on the left-hand side of the page. The Quick Jump menu allows you to jump from section to section without scrolling. Report Definition - Identifies the report, application area, view, and report category; and lists available fields to include in the report Selection Criteria - Allows you to select criteria operators for each field in the report Sort Criteria - Allows you to select fields to be sorted Total/Sum Criteria - Allows you to select the fields to be totaled Printing Criteria - Allows you to adjust column width Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Create Report, Modify Report, or Replicate Report pages. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Select the Fields for a Report Select the Criteria Operators Select the Report Fields to be Sorted Select the Report Fields to be Totaled Adjust the Report Column Widths View a Report Definition Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Select the Fields for a Report Select the Criteria Operators Select the Report Fields to be Sorted Select the Report Fields to be Totaled Adjust the Report Column Widths View a Report Definition Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Report Definition page. Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Workflow Page Preview
Create, Modify, or Replicate Report Page Overview Purpose Use the Create Report, Modify Report, or Replicate Report pages to create, modify, and replicate personalized report definitions in Report Writer to meet your specific needs. Description The content area of the Create Report, Modify Report, or Replicate Report pages display the following sections: Quick Jump Menu - Appears on the left-hand side of the page. The Quick Jump menu allows you to jump from section to section without scrolling. Report Definition - Identifies the report, application area, view, and report category; and lists available fields to include in the report Selection Criteria - Allows you to select criteria operators for each field in the report Sort Criteria - Allows you to select fields to be sorted Total/Sum Criteria - Allows you to select the fields to be totaled Printing Criteria - Allows you to adjust column width Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Create Report, Modify Report, or Replicate Report pages. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Select the Fields for a Report Select the Criteria Operators Select the Report Fields to be Sorted Select the Report Fields to be Totaled Adjust the Report Column Widths View a Report Definition Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Select the Fields for a Report Select the Criteria Operators Select the Report Fields to be Sorted Select the Report Fields to be Totaled Adjust the Report Column Widths View a Report Definition Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Report Definition page. Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Workflow Page Preview
View Page Overview or Field Definitions Position Summary Page Overview Edit Position Permissions Workflow View Position Permissions Workflow Perform Tasks About the Position Summary Access the Edit Position Permissions Page Access the View Position Permissions Page Export Position Permissions Currently in the System Filter the Position Summary Import Changes to Position Permissions Perform Common DBS Tasks
Positions Position Position Permissions Positions Processes View View Position Permissions Workflow Note : This workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing position permissions. Related Workflows The following workflow may have one or more tasks in common with the View Position Permissions Workflow. Edit Position Permissions Workflow
Positions Position Position Permissions Positions Processes View View Position Permissions Workflow Note : This workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing position permissions. Related Workflows The following workflow may have one or more tasks in common with the View Position Permissions Workflow. Edit Position Permissions Workflow
Edit Positions Position Position Permissions Positions Processes Edit Position Permissions Workflow Note : This workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for editing position permissions. Related Workflows The following workflow may have one or more tasks in common with the Edit Position Permissions Workflow. View Position Permissions Workflow
Retailed Vehicle Open Campaign Report Page Overview Purpose Authorized dealer and corporate users may use the Retailed Vehicle Open Campaign Report page to view a list of vehicles sold with an open campaign. The information from this page comes from a variety of sources including vehicle repair orders or marketing and campaign mailing lists. Description The content area of the Retailed Vehicle Open Campaign Report page displays the following sections: Filter - The Filter section allows you to set criteria to reduce or expand the number of results displayed. Agreement - The Agreement section requires you to acknowledge your acceptance of the guidelines covering use of the data displayed on the Retailed Vehicle Open Campaign Report page. You must accept the agreement statements before you can search for data. Details - The Details section allows you to customize display of the details which match the filter criteria you entered, and then export the information displayed to Microsoft ® Excel ® . Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Retailed Vehicle Open Campaign Report page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. About the Retailed Vehicle Open Campaign Report Page Edit Information on the Retailed Vehicle Open Campaign Report Page Export Information from the Retailed Vehicle Open Campaign Report Page Search for Information on the Retailed Vehicle Open Campaign Report View NSH for a Vehicle on the Retailed Vehicle Open Campaign Report Page View TSB for a Vehicle on the Retailed Vehicle Open Campaign Report Page Page Preview
Use the Contact Us page (available from the footer) to perform this task. Note : The footer is a short menu that appears at the bottom of every page in the DBS application. To contact the Help Desk by telephone during normal support hours: Users in the United States should dial 1-855-699-0747. Select a language option: To hear prompts in English, press 1. To hear prompts in Spanish, press 2. To hear prompts in French, press 3. To leave a message after normal support hours, press 4. Normal telephone support hours are: Monday through Friday 6:00 AM CT - 9:00 PM CT. Saturday 7:00 AM CT - 6:00 PM CT. Sunday 7:00 AM - 6:00 PM CT, pager support only.
Contact the DBS Help Desk by Phone
This section of a study is not required, but provides the opportunity to customize or limit a study's results. Use optional study sections to clearly define study parameters, but use caution as conflicting selections will result in no data being returned. A climatic zone is a pre-defined set of zip codes which match a geographic climate. For example: cities such as Las Vegas, Phoenix, and Death Valley might be included in the "Dry" climatic zone as they each receive minimal rainfall throughout the year; while cities such as Seattle, New Orleans, and Miami might be included in the "Rain" climatic zone as they receive an above-average amount of rainfall. The repair orders included in a study with a climatic zone selection are determined by the address entered in the Customer section of the vehicle's National Service History. To complete the Climatic Zone section of a study: Select each climatic zone which should be included in the study, and then use the center buttons as necessary to customize the Selected Climatic Zones list. When you have selected all desired climatic zones, click the Save button.
Complete the Climatic Zone Section of a Study This section of a study is not required, but provides the opportunity to customize or limit a study's results. Use optional study sections to clearly define study parameters, but use caution as conflicting selections will result in no data being returned. A climatic zone is a pre-defined set of zip codes which match a geographic climate. For example: cities such as Las Vegas, Phoenix, and Death Valley might be included in the "Dry" climatic zone as they each receive minimal rainfall throughout the year; while cities such as Seattle, New Orleans, and Miami might be included in the "Rain" climatic zone as they receive an above-average amount of rainfall. The repair orders included in a study with a climatic zone selection are determined by the address entered in the Customer section of the vehicle's National Service History. To complete the Climatic Zone section of a study: Select each climatic zone which should be included in the study, and then use the center buttons as necessary to customize the Selected Climatic Zones list. When you have selected all desired climatic zones, click the Save button.
Early Detection System (EDS) EDS: Study Dashboard Processes EDS: Study Dashboard Study Study Dashboard Technical Service Bulletin (TSB) Create or Modify a Study Workflow Note : The Create or Modify a Study workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for defining or modifying a study that integrates appointment and repair order data collected by the Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Define or Modify a Study Workflow. Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow View One Study Result Workflow
To add a new claim line on from the View Warranty Claim page: Click the New Claim Line button. Note : DBS adds a new claim line to the claim and clears the information displayed in the Claim Information, Parts, Operations, and Expenses sections. Continue adding the required claim information, and then click the Save button to save the claim line. Note : To validate the information in the claim, click the Validate button. To submit a claim with no errors, click the Submit button. You can save a warranty claim with warnings and error messages, and update the claim at a later time.
Add a New Claim Line on the View Warranty Claim Page To add a new claim line on from the View Warranty Claim page: Click the New Claim Line button. Note : DBS adds a new claim line to the claim and clears the information displayed in the Claim Information, Parts, Operations, and Expenses sections. Continue adding the required claim information, and then click the Save button to save the claim line. Note : To validate the information in the claim, click the Validate button. To submit a claim with no errors, click the Submit button.
View Warranty Claim View Warranty Claims View Warranty Claims Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing warranty claims. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the (Insert workflow title) Workflow. Edit or Create Warranty Claims Workflow Manage Warranty Claims Workflow
To reject an SVC Order from the View SVC Order page: Click the Reject button. Note : A Reject Message dialog appears. Type a reason for the rejection. Note : Dealers can view the rejection reason in the Parts Order Detail section. Click the Yes button to confirm the rejection, or click the No button to cancel the rejection. Note : The system cancels the order. SVC orders pending approval contain parts that are on the Campaign Parts list, as validated by the system during order submission. You can only reject an SVC order in "New" status.
Reject an SVC Order from the View SVC Order Page To reject an SVC Order from the View SVC Order page: Click the Reject button. Note : A Rejection Message dialog appears. In the space provided, type a reason for the rejection. Note : Dealers can view the rejection reason in the Parts Order Detail section. Click the Yes button to confirm the rejection, or click the No button to cancel the rejection. Note : If you confirm the rejection, the system cancels the order. SVC orders pending approval contain parts that are on the Campaign Parts list, as validated by the system during order submission. You can only reject an SVC order in "New" status.
To view the dealer operation code summary: View the list of codes. To sort the displayed information, click the arrow beside a column title.
About the Dealer Operation Code Summary To view the dealer operation code summary: View the list of codes. To sort the displayed information, click the arrow beside a column title.
Dealer Operation Code Dealer Operation Codes ReRun Dealer Operation Codes Translation Manage Dealer Operation Codes Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing dealer operation codes. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Dealer Operation Codes Workflow. Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes Workflow Manage Standard Operation Categories Workflow Manage Standard Operation Codes Workflow
Developer Notes: Use active voice for all instructions. Brief, very quick and short... try to keep to less than 10 steps and try to keep one line of text. Focus on required steps. Do not combine more than one action into a single step. Do not change or delete the generic back button section at the bottom. To XXX: Step 1. Step 2. Step 3. Tips go here. Tips and warnings must be generic to BOTH brands. Warnings go here. Tips and warnings must be generic to BOTH brands.
Note : This task is performed by internal users only. To monitor the environment status: To view information for a different date, select or type a date in the Enter the date to view system information field. Note : By default, DBS displays the current status information for DBS and the network host in the Environment Status section. Click the Search button. The data on the page refreshes at the interval defined within the DBS configuration.
Monitor Environment Status Note : This task is performed by internal users only. To monitor the environment status: To monitor the environment status for a different date, in the Enter the date to view system information field, use the calendar provided or type a date in the format specified in your user profile. Note : By default, the Dealer Business System (DBS) displays the current status information for DBS and the network host in the Environment Status section. Click the Search button.
To access the event calendar from any DBS application page: Click the Event Calendar link.
Access the Event Calendar To access the event calendar from any application page: Click the Event Calendar link.
Event Calendar Page Overview Purpose Use the Event Calendar page to view the events designated for your region, user role, or dealership. Description The content area of the Event Calendar page displays the following sections: Calendar - Displays the calendar and calendar events for the month or week indicated. Search - Allows you to specify a start date for the calendar displayed in the content area. Display Toggle - Allows you to change between weekly view and monthly view. Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Event Calendar page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Search for a Specific Date View the Event Calendar Summary and Detail Search for a Specific Date View the Event Calendar Summary and Detail Page Preview
To delete a standard operation code assignment: Select a standard operation code. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Delete option. Note : The Delete Confirmation window opens. Click the Delete button to delete, or click the Cancel button to close without deleting.
Delete a Standard Operation Code Assignment To delete a standard operation code assignment: Select a standard operation code. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Delete option. Note: The Delete Confirmation window opens. Click the Delete button to delete, or click the Cancel button to close without deleting.
Standard Operation Codes Standard Operation Code Standard Operation Codes Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating or editing standard operation groups and codes. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes workflow. Manage Dealer Operation Codes Workflow Manage Standard Operation Categories Workflow Manage Standard Operation Codes Workflow
To grant or remove access to a Host Report: Show the Host Report section, if collapsed. Note : To show the Host Report section, click the + icon in the section header. Expand the section(s). Note : To expand all items in the section, click the expand all link in the section header. Select or clear the item(s). Note : When you select or clear a checkbox at a higher hierarchy level, all items under that level are selected or cleared. Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm, or click the No button to close the window without confirming. The function tree displays permission options in hierarchical order, starting with the menu items at the top and ending with the specific functional items at the bottom.
Grant or Remove Access to a Host Report To grant or remove access to a Host Report: Show the Host Report section, if collapsed. Note : To show the Host Report section, click the + icon in the section header. Expand the section(s). Note : To expand all items in the section, click the expand all link in the section header. Select or clear the item(s). Note : When you select or clear a checkbox at a higher hierarchy level, all items under that level are selected or cleared. Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm, or click the No button to close the window without confirming. The function tree displays permission options in hierarchical order, starting with the menu items at the top and ending with the specific functional items at the bottom.
To grant or remove access to a Host Report: Show the Host Report section, if collapsed. Note : To show the Host Report section, click the + icon in the section header. Expand the section(s). Note : To expand all items in the section, click the expand all link in the section header. Select or clear the item(s). Note : When you select or clear a checkbox at a higher hierarchy level, all items under that level are selected or cleared. Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm, or click the No button to close the window without confirming. The function tree displays permission options in hierarchical order, starting with the menu items at the top and ending with the specific functional items at the bottom.
Grant or Remove Access to a Host Report To grant or remove access to a Host Report: Show the Host Report section, if collapsed. Note : To show the Host Report section, click the + icon in the section header. Expand the section(s). Note : To expand all items in the section, click the expand all link in the section header. Select or clear the item(s). Note : When you select or clear a checkbox at a higher hierarchy level, all items under that level are selected or cleared. Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm, or click the No button to close the window without confirming. The function tree displays permission options in hierarchical order, starting with the menu items at the top and ending with the specific functional items at the bottom.
To view the notification summary: Review the list of notifications. To sort the displayed information, click the arrow beside a column title. Note : Only those with an arrow next to the column title can be sorted. Note : If multiple pages display, click a page number or click the forward or backward arrow to navigate from page to page.
About the Notifications Summary Page To view the notification summary: Review the list of notifications. To sort the displayed information, click the arrow beside a column title. Note : If multiple pages display, click a page number or click the forward or backward arrow to navigate from page to page.
View Overview Information View Parts Return Status Page Overview Perform Tasks Export Information from the View Parts Return Status Page Filter the View Parts Return Status Page Perform Common DBS Tasks
To view or print the announcement detail: Select the announcement for which you want to view or print detail. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. Select the View/Print option. Note : The View Details window appears. To print, click the Print button. To close, click the Close button. Use the View/Print option to view the contents and recipients of an announcement.
View or Print Announcement Detail To view or print the announcement detail: Select the announcement for which you want to view or print detail. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. Select the View/Print option. Note : The View Details window appears. To print, click the Print button. To close, click the Close button. Use the View/Print option to view the contents and recipients of a announcement you have created.
To edit a parts return: Review any warnings or error messages in the Parts Return Header section. Note : To view messages, move your mouse over the warning or error icon. Review any warnings and error messages in the Parts Return Detail section. Modify parts return information, as needed. Note : Click here for more information on adding a part to a return. Note : Click here for more information on adding multiple parts to a return. Note : Click here for more information on deleting a part from a return. Note : Click here for more information on filtering the parts return detail. Note : Click here for more information on modifying a detail line item on a return. Note : If error messages exist, you must correct the errors before submitting the return. To edit a parts return, the return must be in "New" or "Open" status.
Edit a Parts Return To edit a parts return: Review the Parts Return Header section and review any warnings or error messages. Note : To view messages, move your mouse pointer over the warning or error icon. Review the Parts Return Detail section and review any errors. Modify the parts return, as needed. Note : Click here for more information on adding a part to a return. Note : Click here for more information on adding multiple parts to a return. Note : Click here for more information on deleting a part from the return. Note : Click here for more information on filtering the parts return detail. Note : Click here for more information on modifying a detail line item. Note : If error messages exists, you must correct the errors before submitting the return. To edit a parts return: Review the Parts Return Header section and review any warnings or error messages. Note : To view messages, move your mouse pointer over the warning or error icon. Review the Parts Return Detail section and review any errors. Modify the parts return, as needed. Note : Click here for more information on adding a part to a return. Note : Click here for more information on adding multiple parts to a return. Note : Click here for more information on deleting a part from the return. Note : Click here for more information on filtering the parts return detail. Note : Click here for more information on modifying a detail line item. Note : If error messages exists, you must correct the errors before submitting the return. To edit a parts return, the return must be in "New" or "Open" status.
Edit Return Edit Return Edit Return Edit Parts Return Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for modifying a parts return. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Edit Parts Return Workflow. Create Parts Return Workflow Manage Parts Return Workflow
To view the user summary: Review the list of users. To sort the displayed information, click the arrow beside a column title. Note : The default sort order is last name in ascending order. To show active and inactive users, click the Show Active / Inactive Users button. Note : The default view shows active users only. If multiple pages exist, do one of the following to navigate from page to page: Click a page number or click the forward or backward arrow. - OR - In the Go to Page field, type a page number, and then click the Go button.
About the User Summary Page To view the user summary: Review the list of users. To sort the displayed information, click the arrow beside a column title. Note : The default sort order is last name in ascending order. To show active and inactive users, click the Show Active / Inactive Users button. Note : The default view shows active users only. If multiple pages exist, do one of the following to navigate from page to page: Click a page number or click the forward or backward arrow. - OR - In the Go to Page field, type a page number, and then click the Go button.
User Processes User Permissions Users View View User Permissions Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing user permissions. Related Workflows The following workflow may have one or more tasks in common with the View User Permissions Workflow. User Summary Workflow
Edit User Processes User Permissions Users User Summary Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for editing user permissions. Related Workflows The following workflow may have one or more tasks in common with the User Summary workflow . View User Permissions Workflow
In cases where it may be unclear who the legal owner of the vehicle is, complete the optional Legal Owner section of the RDR. The legal owner is usually the person (or company) to whom the title is registered. For example: Purchasing Agent Katie Dowd leases a Rogue for XYZ Company employee Michael Tokich. In this case, XYZ company is the buyer and legal owner, while Michael Tokich is the driver. To complete the optional Legal Owner section of an RDR: In the Name field, type the first (given) and last (family) name of the owner, or type the name of the company if the legal owner is a corporation. In the Address fields, type the address where the legal owner can be contacted. In the Phone field, type the phone number where the legal owner can be contacted. Note : Type all 9s in the Phone field if the legal owner does not have a phone. Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. A will display for any missing or incorrect data. Correct all errors before submitting the RDR. Note : If you are ready to submit the RDR, click here for more information.
Complete the Legal Owner Section of an RDR To complete the optional Legal Owner section of an RDR: In the Name field, type the first (given) and last (family) name of the owner, or type the name of the company if the legal owner is a corporation. In the Address fields, type the address where the legal owner can be contacted. In the Phone field, type the phone number where the legal owner can be contacted. Note : Type all 9s in the Phone field if the legal owner does not have a phone. Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. A will display for any missing or incorrect data. Correct all errors before submitting the RDR. Note : If you are ready to submit the RDR, click here for more information.
Processes RDR RDR RDR a Vehicle Workflow Note : This workflow is for NNA users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for retail delivery reporting (RDR) or editing the sale of a vehicle. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Report or Edit the Sale of a Vehicle workflow. Vehicle Inventory Workflow Inventory Search Workflow View RDR History Workflow
To search the National Service History for a new VIN from the View NSH page: In the Full VIN or Last 8 of VIN field, enter either a full VIN number or the last eight characters of a VIN. Click the Search icon. Note : The details section updates to display the information for the new VIN, if found. If no NSH information exists for the VIN, a warning message displays below the VIN entry field. If you need to search information found on another DBS page for the VIN you want to enter, use the menu tabs for the application area, then select the Open in New Window icon for the page you want to view. Click here for more information about opening a page in a new window.
Search for a New VIN from the View NSH Page To search the National Service History for a new VIN from the View NSH page: In the Full VIN or Last 8 of VIN field, enter either a full VIN number or the last eight characters of a VIN. Click the Search icon. Note : The details section updates to display the information for the new VIN, if found. If no NSH information exists for the VIN, a warning message displays below the VIN entry field. If you need to search information found on another DBS page for the VIN you want to enter, use the menu tabs for the application area, then select the Open in New Window icon for the page you want to view. For more information about opening a page in a new window, click here .
National Service History National Service History (NSH) National Service History National Service History Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing national service history information for a vehicle.
View Overview Information Create Parts Order Page Overview Create Parts Order Workflow Perform Tasks Add a Part to an Order Create or Edit a Parts Order Delete a Part from an Order Delete a Parts Order Look Up a Part Modify a Detail Line on an Order Perform Common DBS Tasks Submit a Parts Order View the Parts List Add a Part to an Order Create a Edit a Parts Order Delete a Part from an Order Delete a Parts Order Look Up a Part Modify a Detail Line on an Order Perform Common DBS Tasks Submit a Parts Order View the Parts List
Create Create Order Create SVC Order Create Order Create Order Create SVC Order Create Order Create Order Create Order Create SVC Order Create Create Order Create Parts Order Workflow *** Nissan Canada Inc. (NCI) recommends dealers create parts orders in an NCI DBS certified dealer management system and then log into NCI DBS to review and submit the order to NCI. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating a parts order. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create Parts Order Workflow. Edit Parts Order Workflow Manage Parts Order Workflow Inquire on the Availability of Parts at the Parts Distribution Centers Workflow View Parts Order Workflow Edit Parts Order Workflow Manage Parts Order Workflow View Parts Order Workflow
To generate a report: If desired, from the Search by drop-down list, select a filter option. Type a secondary filter value, and then press the Enter key. Select a dealer. Click the Schedule button. From the Email Notification of Report Completion options, select "Yes" if you would like to receive an email notification when the report is generated, or "No" if you do not want to receive an email notification. If you selected "Yes", either select the checkbox next to your email address, or type additional addresses in the blank field and select the checkbox next to the field. Select a file type. Select when you want the report to run. Click Schedule .
Generate a Report (Dealer Users) To generate a report: If desired, from the Search by drop-down list, select a filter option. Type a secondary filter value, and then press the Enter key. Select a dealer. Click the Schedule button. Note : Click the Cancel button to cancel without generating the report. From the Email Notification of Report Completion options, select "Yes" if you would like to receive an email notification when the report is generated, or "No" if you do not want to receive an email notification. If you selected "Yes", either check the checkbox next to your email address, or type additional addresses in the blank field and check the checkbox next to the field. Note : You can add multiple addresses by separating them with a semi-colon. Note : An email will not be sent unless the checkbox next to the email field is selected. In the File Type section, select one or more output file types. In the Schedule Report to section, select when you want the report to run. Note : If you select "Run At", you must select a start date and time for the report to generate. Note : If you select "Recurrence", you must select the date, time, and recurrence for the report to generate. Click the Schedule button.
To generate a report: If desired, from the Search by drop-down list, select a filter option. Type a secondary filter value, and then press the Enter key. Select a dealer. Click the Schedule button. From the Email Notification of Report Completion options, select "Yes" if you would like to receive an email notification when the report is generated, or "No" if you do not want to receive an email notification. If you selected "Yes", either select the checkbox next to your email address, or type additional addresses in the blank field and select the checkbox next to the field. Select a file type. Select when you want the report to run. Click Schedule .
Generate a Report (Dealer Users) To generate a report: If desired, from the Search by drop-down list, select a filter option. Type a secondary filter value, and then press the Enter key. Select a dealer. Click the Schedule button. Note : Click the Cancel button to cancel without generating the report. From the Email Notification of Report Completion options, select "Yes" if you would like to receive an email notification when the report is generated, or "No" if you do not want to receive an email notification. If you selected "Yes", either check the checkbox next to your email address, or type additional addresses in the blank field and check the checkbox next to the field. Note : You can add multiple addresses by separating them with a semi-colon. Note : An email will not be sent unless the checkbox next to the email field is selected. In the File Type section, select one or more output file types. In the Schedule Report to section, select when you want the report to run. Note : If you select "Run At", you must select a start date and time for the report to generate. Note : If you select "Recurrence", you must select the date, time, and recurrence for the report to generate. Click the Schedule button.
To generate a report: If desired, from the Search by drop-down list, select a filter option. Type a secondary filter value, and then press the Enter key. Select a dealer. Click the Schedule button. From the Email Notification of Report Completion options, select "Yes" if you would like to receive an email notification when the report is generated, or "No" if you do not want to receive an email notification. If you selected "Yes", either select the checkbox next to your email address, or type additional addresses in the blank field and select the checkbox next to the field. Select a file type. Select when you want the report to run. Click Schedule .
Generate a Report (Dealer Users) To generate a report: If desired, from the Search by drop-down list, select a filter option. Type a secondary filter value, and then press the Enter key. Select a dealer. Click the Schedule button. Note : Click the Cancel button to cancel without generating the report. From the Email Notification of Report Completion options, select "Yes" if you would like to receive an email notification when the report is generated, or "No" if you do not want to receive an email notification. If you selected "Yes", either check the checkbox next to your email address, or type additional addresses in the blank field and check the checkbox next to the field. Note : You can add multiple addresses by separating them with a semi-colon. Note : An email will not be sent unless the checkbox next to the email field is selected. In the File Type section, select one or more output file types. In the Schedule Report to section, select when you want the report to run. Note : If you select "Run At", you must select a start date and time for the report to generate. Note : If you select "Recurrence", you must select the date, time, and recurrence for the report to generate. Click the Schedule button.
To generate a report: If desired, from the Search by drop-down list, select a filter option. Type a secondary filter value, and then press the Enter key. Select a dealer. Click the Schedule button. From the Email Notification of Report Completion options, select "Yes" if you would like to receive an email notification when the report is generated, or "No" if you do not want to receive an email notification. If you selected "Yes", either select the checkbox next to your email address, or type additional addresses in the blank field and select the checkbox next to the field. Select a file type. Select when you want the report to run. Click Schedule .
Generate a Report (Dealer Users) To generate a report: If desired, from the Search by drop-down list, select a filter option. Type a secondary filter value, and then press the Enter key. Select a dealer. Click the Schedule button. Note : Click the Cancel button to cancel without generating the report. From the Email Notification of Report Completion options, select "Yes" if you would like to receive an email notification when the report is generated, or "No" if you do not want to receive an email notification. If you selected "Yes", either check the checkbox next to your email address, or type additional addresses in the blank field and check the checkbox next to the field. Note : You can add multiple addresses by separating them with a semi-colon. Note : An email will not be sent unless the checkbox next to the email field is selected. In the File Type section, select one or more output file types. In the Schedule Report to section, select when you want the report to run. Note : If you select "Run At", you must select a start date and time for the report to generate. Note : If you select "Recurrence", you must select the date, time, and recurrence for the report to generate. Click the Schedule button.
To generate a report: If desired, from the Search by drop-down list, select a filter option. Type a secondary filter value, and then press the Enter key. Select a dealer. Click the Schedule button. From the Email Notification of Report Completion options, select "Yes" if you would like to receive an email notification when the report is generated, or "No" if you do not want to receive an email notification. If you selected "Yes", either select the checkbox next to your email address, or type additional addresses in the blank field and select the checkbox next to the field. Select a file type. Select when you want the report to run. Click Schedule .
Generate a Report (Dealer Users) To generate a report: If desired, from the Search by drop-down list, select a filter option. Type a secondary filter value, and then press the Enter key. Select a dealer. Click the Schedule button. Note : Click the Cancel button to cancel without generating the report. From the Email Notification of Report Completion options, select "Yes" if you would like to receive an email notification when the report is generated, or "No" if you do not want to receive an email notification. If you selected "Yes", either check the checkbox next to your email address, or type additional addresses in the blank field and check the checkbox next to the field. Note : You can add multiple addresses by separating them with a semi-colon. Note : An email will not be sent unless the checkbox next to the email field is selected. In the File Type section, select one or more output file types. In the Schedule Report to section, select when you want the report to run. Note : If you select "Run At", you must select a start date and time for the report to generate. Note : If you select "Recurrence", you must select the date, time, and recurrence for the report to generate. Click the Schedule button.
To look up a part: At the end of the Part Number field, click the Lookup icon. Note : The Part Lookup page opens. In the fields provided, type full or partial information. Note : To clear your entries, click the Clear icon. Click the Search icon. Note : DBS displays a list of records matching the search criteria in the Parts section. Select the desired part and then click the Select button. Note : DBS displays the selected part details in the Part Detail section.
Look Up a Part To look up a part: At the end of the Part Number/Part Category field, click the Lookup icon. Note : The Part Lookup page opens. In the fields provided, type full or partial information. Note : You must include an asterisk (*) when typing partial information. Note : To clear your entries, click the Clear icon. Click the Search icon. Note : DBS displays a list of records matching the search criteria in the Parts section. Select the desired part, and then click the Select button.
Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Edit Warranty Claims Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Warranty Claims Edit or Create Warranty Claims Workflow *** Nissan Canada Inc. (NCI) recommends dealers create Warranty Claims in an NCI DBS certified dealer management system and then log into NCI DBS to review, validate and submit the claim to NCI. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating and editing claims. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Warranty Claims Workflow or View Warranty Claims Workflow. Manage Warranty Claims Workflow View Warranty Claims Workflow
To look up a part: At the end of the Part Number field, click the Lookup icon. Note : The Part Lookup page opens. In the fields provided, type full or partial information. Note : To clear your entries, click the Clear icon. Click the Search icon. Note : DBS displays a list of records matching the search criteria in the Parts section. Select the desired part and then click the Select button. Note : DBS displays the selected part details in the Part Detail section.
Look Up a Part To look up a part: At the end of the Part Number/Part Category field, click the Lookup icon. Note : The Part Lookup page opens. In the fields provided, type full or partial information. Note : You must include an asterisk (*) when typing partial information. Note : To clear your entries, click the Clear icon. Click the Search icon. Note : DBS displays a list of records matching the search criteria in the Parts section. Select the desired part, and then click the Select button.
Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Edit Warranty Claims Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Warranty Claims Edit or Create Warranty Claims Workflow *** Nissan Canada Inc. (NCI) recommends dealers create Warranty Claims in an NCI DBS certified dealer management system and then log into NCI DBS to review, validate and submit the claim to NCI. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating and editing claims. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Warranty Claims Workflow or View Warranty Claims Workflow. Manage Warranty Claims Workflow View Warranty Claims Workflow
Perform Tasks Select Dealer Users by Dealer Number Select Dealer Users by Geography Select Dealer Users by Hierarchy Select Dealer Trade Users Select Internal Users by Geography Select Internal Users by Hierarchy
View Overview Information Edit Dealer Permissions Page Overview Edit Dealer Permissions Workflow Perform Tasks Grant or Remove Access to a Host Report Grant or Remove Access to a Page, Action, Custom Field, or Website Grant or Remove Access to a Report Writer View Grant or Remove Access to a Star Web Service Grant or Remove Full Access to a Menu and Its Contents Perform Common DBS Tasks Use the Quick Jump Menu View Dealer Permissions Grant or Remove Access to a Host Report Grant or Remove Access to a Page, Action, Custom Field, or Website Grant or Remove Access to a Report Writer View Grant or Remove Access to a Star Web Service Grant or Remove Full Access to a Menu and Its Contents Perform Common DBS Tasks Use the Quick Jump Menu View Dealer Permissions
Edit Edit Dealer Permissions Workflow Note : This workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for editing dealer permissions. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Edit Dealer Permissions Workflow. Dealer Summary Workflow
To grant or remove access to a Report Writer view: Show the Host Report section, if collapsed. Note : To show the Report Writer section, click the + icon in the section header. Expand the section(s). Note : To expand all items in the section, click the expand all link in the section header. Select or clear the item(s). Note : When you select or clear a checkbox at a higher hierarchy level, all items under that level are selected or cleared. Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm, or click the No button to close the window without confirming. The function tree displays permission options in hierarchical order, starting with the menu items at the top and ending with the specific functional items at the bottom.
Grant or Remove Access to a Report Writer View To grant or remove access to a Report Writer view: Show the Report Writer section, if collapsed. Note : To show the Report Writer section, click the + icon in the section header. Expand the section(s). Note : To expand all items in the section, click the expand all link in the section header. Select or clear the item(s). Note : When you select or clear a checkbox at a higher hierarchy level, all items under that level are selected or cleared. Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm, or click the No button to close the window without confirming. The function tree displays permission options in hierarchical order, starting with the menu items at the top and ending with the specific functional items at the bottom.
To grant or remove access to a Report Writer view: Show the Host Report section, if collapsed. Note : To show the Report Writer section, click the + icon in the section header. Expand the section(s). Note : To expand all items in the section, click the expand all link in the section header. Select or clear the item(s). Note : When you select or clear a checkbox at a higher hierarchy level, all items under that level are selected or cleared. Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm, or click the No button to close the window without confirming. The function tree displays permission options in hierarchical order, starting with the menu items at the top and ending with the specific functional items at the bottom.
Grant or Remove Access to a Report Writer View To grant or remove access to a Report Writer view: Show the Report Writer section, if collapsed. Note : To show the Report Writer section, click the + icon in the section header. Expand the section(s). Note : To expand all items in the section, click the expand all link in the section header. Select or clear the item(s). Note : When you select or clear a checkbox at a higher hierarchy level, all items under that level are selected or cleared. Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm, or click the No button to close the window without confirming. The function tree displays permission options in hierarchical order, starting with the menu items at the top and ending with the specific functional items at the bottom.
To access the Contact Us page from any DBS application page: Click the Contact Us link.
Access the Contact Us Page To access the Contact Us page from any DBS application page: Click the Contact Us link.
To view or print the alert detail: Select the alert for which you want to view or print detail. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. Select the View/Print option. Note : The View Details window appears. To print, click the Print button. To close, click the Close button. To export, click the Export button. Note: The Export button is available at the bottom of the window. Use the View/Print option to view the contents and recipients of an alert you have created.
View or Print Alert Detail To view or print the alert detail: Select the alert for which you want to view or print detail. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. Select the View/Print option. Note: The View Details window appears. To print, click the Print button. To close, click the Close button. Use the View/Print option to view the contents and recipients of an alert you have created.
Emulate a Dealer by Hierarchy or Number Page Overview Purpose The emulate a dealer function allows internal users to view the dealer-level information available to a dealership or individual user as that user would see it if they were logged into DBS . Authorized internal users will experience a view-only experience of what the user sees in order to assist in troubleshooting issues with permissions or DBS functions. The Emulate a Dealer by Hierarchy or Number page allows the authorized corporate user to select the dealer or individual they wish to emulate. Description The content area of the Emulate a Dealer by Hierarchy or Number page displays the following section: Choose one of the three available options below - Allows you to search for a dealer based on the hierarchy (affiliate, division, region, area, district, and dealer), dealer number, or dealer user. Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Search a Dealer by Hierarchy or Number page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Emulate a Dealership or User Emulate a Dealership or User Page Preview
Note : By default, the Dealer List section displays all parts return status information for the current calendar year sorted first by dealer name and then by return due date. Only those dealerships for which you have PDC permissions display in the list. There are three common ways to manipulate the data displayed on the View Parts Return Status page: by dealer number, by PDC, or by hierarchy. Each method produces significantly different results, so instructions for each method are provided on the Step by Step tab. Since the View Parts Return Status page is primarily used by PDC team members, the instructions for filtering the data by PDC appear below. To filter the View Parts Return Status page by PDC: If desired, from the Return Year drop-down list, select a new return year. From the Available PDC List drop-down, select the PDC for which you want to view parts return status information. Click the Search icon to execute the search. If the Dealer List has more results than can be displayed on a single page, use the page navigation icons or the Go to Page field to navigate to additional data pages.
Filter the View Parts Return Status Page Note : By default, the Dealer List section displays all parts return status information for the current calendar year sorted first by dealer name and then by return due date. Only those dealerships for which you have PDC permissions display in the list. There are three common ways to manipulate the data displayed on the View Parts Return Status page: by dealer number, by PDC, or by hierarchy. Each method produces significantly different results, so instructions for each method are provided below. Filter/Search by Dealer Number The easiest way to limit the information in the Dealer List section is to search for a specific dealer number. To filter/search by dealer number: In the Dealer Number field, type the dealer number for the dealership (digits only). Press your keyboard Enter key or click the Search icon to execute the search. Note : Search results only display if the dealership falls within your PDC permissions. Filter Data by PDC PDC users may find filtering by PDC to be the most efficient way to find the desired data. Keep in mind that the Dealer List displays all those dealerships within the PDC(s) you have permissions for, so you may only want to filter by PDC if you have permissions for more than one PDC. To filter the data displayed by PDC: From the Available PDC List drop-down, select the PDC for which you want to view parts return status information. Click the Search icon to execute the search. If the Dealer List has more results than can be displayed on a single page, use the page navigation icons or the Go to Page field to navigate to additional data pages. Filter Data by Hierarchy Non-PDC corporate users may find it most helpful to search for information by business hierarchy. This filter method produces the widest results, as it may contain data for more than one PDC. Keep in mind that if you have permissions for one or more PDCs in your profile, only dealers associated with those PDCs will display when searching by hierarchy. To filter the data displayed by hierarchy: From the Region drop-down list, select a region. To view results for a different calendar year, from the Return Year drop-down list, select the desired year. From the Area drop-down list, select an area. If desired, from the District drop-down list, select a district. Click the Search icon to execute the search, or click the Clear icon to reset the search criteria. If the Dealer List has more results than can be displayed on a single page, use the page navigation icons or the Go to Page field to navigate to additional data pages.
57ADD3A1-E897-48E7-9494-F21829D9DE39\Host Reports Quick Reference Guide NISSAN v3.pdf
To remove a repair order (RO) job line from a study from the One Study Result page, One Dealer Study Result page, or Hold Study Result page: Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon for the RO job line you want to remove. From the Action menu, select the Remove RO Job Line option. Click the Remove button to confirm.
Remove a Repair Order Job Line from a Study To remove a repair order (RO) job line from a study from the One Study Result page, One Dealer Study Result page, or Hold Study Result page: Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon for the RO job line you want to remove. From the Action menu, select the Remove RO Job Line option. Click the Remove button to confirm.
Early Detection System (EDS) EDS: Study Dashboard Processes EDS: Study Dashboard Study Study Dashboard Technical Service Bulletin (TSB) Create or Modify a Study Workflow Note : The Create or Modify a Study workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for defining or modifying a study that integrates appointment and repair order data collected by the Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Define or Modify a Study Workflow. Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow View One Study Result Workflow
Dashboard Early Detection System (EDS) EDS: Study Dashboard Processes EDS: Study Dashboard Study Study Dashboard View View One Study Result Workflow Note : The View One Study Result workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing a study that integrates appointment and repair order data collected by the Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the View One Study Result workflow. Define or Modify Study Workflow Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow
Dashboard Early Detection System (EDS) Hold Status Processes Study View Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow Note: The Manage Early Detection System Studies workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing Early Detection System (EDS) studies that integrate appointment and repair order data collected by the Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow. Define or Modify a Study Workflow View One Study Result Workflow View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow
Dashboard Early Detection System (EDS) EDS: Study Dashboard Processes EDS: Study Dashboard Study Study Dashboard View View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow Note : The View a Dealer's Study Results workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing one dealer's study results that integrate appointment and repair order data collected by the Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the View a Dealer's Study Results workflow. Define or Modify a Study Workflow Manage Early Detection Studies Workflow View One Study Result Workflow
View Overview Information View Position Permissions Page Overview View Positions Permissions Workflow Perform Tasks Perform Common DBS Tasks Use the Quick Jump Menu View Position Permissions Perform Common DBS Tasks Use the Quick Jump Menu View Position Permissions
Positions Position Position Permissions Positions Processes View View Position Permissions Workflow Note : This workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing position permissions. Related Workflows The following workflow may have one or more tasks in common with the View Position Permissions Workflow. Edit Position Permissions Workflow
You may need to scroll to the right to view the Action column. You can also drag and drop columns to move the Action, Comment, and Remove Flag columns to a location where they can more easily be maintained. To edit information the Retailed Vehicle Open Campaign Report page: Click the Edit icon for the row you wish to edit. Note : The fields you are allowed to update are activated. If desired, from the Remove Flag drop-down list, select whether or not the flag for this vehicle should be removed. Note : When to remove the flag for the vehicle varies by dealership. You may want to remove the flag when the vehicle has been repaired, or when the customer has scheduled a service appointment. It is recommended that if you change the value of this drop-down list, you should also apply a comment indicating the reason for the change. In the Comment field, supply a brief comment about this record. To save the changes made, click the Save icon. To discard the changes, click the Cancel icon. Note : There is no confirmation message for this action. If you want to change the edited information, simply re-edit the record.
Edit Information on the Retailed Vehicle Open Campaign Report Page You may need to scroll to the right to view the Action column. You can also drag and drop columns to move the Action, Comment, and Remove Flag columns to a location where they can more easily be maintained. To edit information the Retailed Vehicle Open Campaign Report page: Click the Edit icon for the row you wish to edit. Note : The fields you are allowed to update are activated. If desired, from the Remove Flag drop-down list, select whether or not the flag for this vehicle should be removed. Note : When to remove the flag for the vehicle varies by dealership. You may want to remove the flag when the vehicle has been repaired, or when the customer has scheduled a service appointment. It is recommended that if you change the value of this drop-down list, you should also apply a comment indicating the reason for the change. In the Comment field, supply a brief comment about this record. To save the changes made, click the Save icon. To discard the changes, click the Cancel icon. Note : There is no confirmation message for this action. If you want to change the edited information, simply re-edit the record.
17F4ABBC-9100-4AC5-B69B-B622ED011D70\Retailed with Open Campaign Report Reference Guide v2n.pdf
To complete the Operations section of an express entry warranty claim: Note : If you search for a repair order and line number, the information in the Operations section is populated with the repair order information. Add additional information as necessary. From the Sub drop-down list, select "Y" if the operation or labor was outsourced to a third party. If the labor was not outsourced or sublet to a third party, in the Tech field, type the technician name. In the Op Code field, type the applicable operation code. In the Req Hrs field, type the amount of time the dealer is allowed to perform the specific operation for the operation code. In the Req Amt field, type the requested monetary labor amount. If necessary, in the Coverage 1 Code field, update the coverage code. Note : The coverage code is automatically populated based on information entered in the Claim Information section. In the Coverage 1 Amt field, enter the amount covered for the operation. If the coverage amount is split between or among coverage types, complete the Coverage 2 and Coverage 3 fields as appropriate. In the DTC column, click the N link to add a diagnostic test code. If the selected operation should be set as the primary operation, select the PO checkbox. As appropriate, click the Plus icon to add additional operations. Note : To save a claim with errors or warnings, click the Save button. To validate the information in the claim, click the Validate button. To submit a claim with no errors, click the Submit button. T he Sub (Sublet) field displays a default value of "N". A value of "Y" indicates this operation or labor was outsourced to a third party. If the line type in the Claim Information section is PO, select the PO checkbox for the operation code that describes the labor operation necessary to correct the primary complaint.
Complete the Operations Section of an Express Entry Warranty Claim To complete the Operations section of an express warranty claim: Note : If you search for a repair order and line number, the information in the Operations section is populated with the repair order information. Add additional information as necessary. From the Sub drop-down list, select "Y" if the labor was outsourced or sublet to a third party. If the labor was not outsourced or sublet to a third party, in the Tech field, type the technician name. In the Op Code field, type the six-character operation code that specifies the type of repair performed. In the Req Hrs field, type the amount of time the dealer is allowed to perform the specific operation for the operation code. In the Req Amt field, type the requested monetary labor amount. If necessary, in the Coverage 1 Code field, update the coverage code. Note : The coverage code is automatically populated based on information entered in the Claim Information section. In the Coverage 1 Amt field, enter the amount covered for the operation. If the coverage amount is split between or among coverage types, complete the Coverage 2 and Coverage 3 fields as appropriate. If the operation code is for labor to perform a diagnostic test, in the DTC column, click the N link to add a diagnostic test code. If the selected operation should be set as the primary operation, select the PO checkbox. As appropriate, click the Plus icon to add additional operations.
Edit Parts Order Page Overview Purpose Use the Edit Parts Order page to modify an existing new or open parts order. You can edit a parts order from the Parts Order Management page. You must first search for and locate the desired parts order that you want to edit. Use the Action menu to open the Edit Parts Order page. Description The content area of the Edit Parts Order page displays the following sections: Edit Parts Order header - Allows you to view and specify general information about a parts order including, but not limited to, order type, dealer order reference #, shipping instructions, and backorder or cross ship preferences Parts Order Detail - Allows you to add a part, delete a part, edit a line item, including line item back order and cross ship preferences, or designate free parts (solicited orders only) Buttons - Allows you to save, submit, delete or cancel a parts order Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Edit Parts Order page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Add a Part to an Order Create or Edit a Parts Order Delete a Part from an Order Delete a Parts Order Look Up a Part Modify a Detail Line on an Order Submit a Parts Order View the Parts List on an Order Add a Part to an Order Create or Edit a Parts Order Delete a Part from an Order Delete a Parts Order Look Up a Part Modify a Detail Line on an Order Submit a Parts Order View the Parts List on an Order Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Edit Parts Order page. Edit Parts Order Workflow Page Preview
By default, the RDR History page displays RDRs by RDR submit date for new retail vehicles and the current month. To display any other information, you must filter the RDR History page. Note : Click here for information on how to filter the RDR History page when viewing the information by sales type. To filter the RDR History page: If desired, from the Vehicle Type drop-down list, select to display either new or used vehicles. If desired, from the Sale Type drop-down list, select a filter option. By default, the sales type filter for new vehicles is "Retail". For used vehicles, the sales type filter is for both CPO (certified pre-owned) and non-CPO vehicles. From the Filter By drop-down list, select a filter option. If a text-entry field appears, type a secondary filter value, and then press the Enter key. Note : For name fields, use a comma to separate names or letters. - OR - If date range fields appear, click in the field, and then use the calendar to select the desired date(s). The information in the RDR History section of the page automatically updates to display RDR records which meet the filter criteria. To reset the filter criteria to the default, click the Clear icon.
Filter RDR History By default, the RDR History page displays RDRs by RDR submit date for new retail vehicles and the current month. To display any other information, you must filter the RDR History page. Note : Click here for information on how to filter the RDR History page when viewing the information by sales type. To filter the RDR History page: If desired, from the Vehicle Type drop-down list, select to display either new or used vehicles. If desired, from the Sale Type drop-down list, select a filter option. By default, the sales type filter for new vehicles is "Retail". For used vehicles, the sales type filter is for both CPO (certified pre-owned) and non-CPO vehicles. From the Filter By drop-down list, select a filter option. If a text-entry field appears, type a secondary filter value, and then press the Enter key. Note : For name fields, use a comma to separate names or letters. - OR - If date range fields appear, click in the field, and then use the calendar to select the desired date(s). The information in the RDR History section of the page automatically updates to display RDR records which meet the filter criteria. To reset the filter criteria to the default, click the Clear icon. To filter the Retail Delivery Reporting (RDR) History listing: From the Filter By drop-down list, select a filter option. If a text-entry field appears, type a secondary filter value, and then press the Enter key. Note : For name fields, use a comma to separate names or letters. -OR- If date range fields appear, click in the field, type or use the calendar to select the desired date(s), and then click the Search icon. View the RDRs that meet the selected criteria. Note : To reset the filter criteria to the default, click the Clear icon. To see all sales, filter on "Sales Month" and choose "All".
History Processes RDR History RDR History Retail Delivery Reporting (RDR) History View RDR History Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing Retail Delivery Reporting (RDR) history. Related Workflows The following workflows may have similar tasks in common with the Viewing RDR History Workflow. RDR a Vehicle Workflow
View Parts Master Information Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for displaying parts master information. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the View Parts Master Information Workflow. Request Full Parts Master Workflow
CR: Does not work To view frequently asked questions: Click the link for the question you wish to review. Note : The answer to the question appears. Click the link to collapse the view of a displayed question. When you have finished reviewing the frequently asked questions, select a menu option or click a navigation link to access another DBS application page.
CR: Does not work View Frequently Asked Questions To view frequently asked questions: View the DBS system requirements.
To open the Edit Warranty Claim page: Select the repair order you want to open. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Edit Claim option.
Open the Edit Warranty Claim Page To open the Edit Warranty Claim page: Select the repair order you want to open. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Edit Claim option.
Manage Warranty Claims Processes Manage Warranty Claims Manage Warranty Claims Manage Warranty Claims Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing warranty claims. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create or Edit Warranty Claims Workflow or View Warranty Claims Workflow. Edit or Create Warranty Claims Workflow View Warranty Claims Workflow
To create and use an advanced inventory filter: Click the Advanced Filter icon. From the first drop-down list, select a filter criteria. From the second drop-down list, select a filter option. If a field appears, type a filter value. Click the Plus sign to add the criteria to the filter list. Note : Add additional search criteria as desired. Click the Search button to apply the filter. Note : Click the Details tab for additional information about editing and deleting an advanced inventory filter.
Filter Vehicle Inventory Using an Advanced Filter Use and advanced inventory filter to customize the display of the data shown in the summary area of the page. To create and use an advanced inventory filter: Click the Advanced Filter icon. From the first drop-down list, select a filter criteria. From the second drop-down list, select a filter option. If a field appears, type a filter value. Click the Plus sign to add the criteria to the filter list. Note : Add additional search criteria as desired. Click the Search button to apply the filter. Edit an Advanced Filter To edit an advanced filter: Move your cursor over the Action icon for the filter criteria you want to update, and then select the Edit option. If desired, select new search criteria or update the existing criteria for the line item. Move your cursor over the line you edited, and then select the Save option. Click the Search button to filter the vehicle inventory using the filters entered, or click the Cancel button to close the Inventory Advanced Filter window without applying an advanced filter. Delete a Filter Criteria To delete a criteria line from an advanced filter: Move your cursor over Action icon for the line you want to delete, and then select the Delete option. Note : There is no confirmation message for this action. Click the Search button to filter the vehicle inventory using the filters entered, or click the Cancel button to close the Inventory Advanced Filter window without applying an advanced filter.
To view the parts list on an order: Review the list of parts in the order. To sort the displayed information, click the arrow beside a column title. If multiple pages exist: To view additional records, click a page number or click the forward or backward arrow to navigate from page to page. To view a specific page, in the Go to Page field, type a page number, then click the Go button.
View the Parts List on an Order To view the parts list on an order: Review the list of parts in the order. To sort the displayed information, click the arrow beside a column title. If multiple pages exist: To view additional records, click a page number or click the forward or backward arrow to navigate from page to page. To view a specific page, in the Go to Page field, type a page number, then click the Go button.
Create Create Order Create SVC Order Create Order Create Order Create SVC Order Create Order Create Order Create Order Create SVC Order Create Create Order Create Parts Order Workflow *** Nissan Canada Inc. (NCI) recommends dealers create parts orders in an NCI DBS certified dealer management system and then log into NCI DBS to review and submit the order to NCI. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating a parts order. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create Parts Order Workflow. Edit Parts Order Workflow Manage Parts Order Workflow Inquire on the Availability of Parts at the Parts Distribution Centers Workflow View Parts Order Workflow Edit Parts Order Workflow Manage Parts Order Workflow View Parts Order Workflow
Edit Edit Order Edit Order Edit SVC Order Edit Order Edit Order Edit SVC Order Edit Order Edit Order Edit Order Edit SVC Order Edit Order Edit Order Edit Parts Order Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for modifying an existing new or open parts order. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Edit Parts Order Workflow. Create Parts Order Workflow Manage Parts Order Workflow Inquire on the Availability of Parts at the Parts Distribution Centers Workflow View Parts Order Workflow
View the Service Dashboard Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing the Service Dashboard. You may view study alerts generated regarding vehicles that meet the criteria of informational or hold studies or technical service bulletins. You may also view open repair orders or National Service History.
View Overview Information Quick Entry Used Vehicle Sale Page Overview Perform Tasks Delete an RDR Report or Edit the Sale of a Used Vehicle Complete the Vehicle Section of an RDR Complete the Buyer Section of an RDR Complete the Driver Section of an RDR Complete the Finance Section of an RDR Save or Submit a Used Vehicle RDR Perform Common DBS Tasks
View Overview Information View Part Master Information Page Overview View Parts Master Information Workflow Perform Tasks Access Reports Look Up a Part Perform Common DBS Tasks View Part Master Information Access Reports Look Up a Part Perform Common DBS Tasks View Part Master Information
Master Part Master Master View Parts Master Information Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for displaying parts master information. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the View Parts Master Information Workflow. Request Full Parts Master Workflow
To export information from the View Parts Return Status page: If desired, filter or sort the information displayed on the page to reduce the amount of data to export. At the bottom of the page, click the Export button. Click the Excel export option. Follow your browser-specific instructions to print or save the Excel file.
Export Information from the View Parts Return Status Page To export information from the View Parts Return Status page: If desired, filter or sort the information displayed on the page to reduce the amount of data to export. At the bottom of the page, click the Export button. Click the Excel export option. Follow your browser-specific instructions to print or save the Excel file.
View Overview Information Create or Edit an Alert Page Overview Create or Edit an Alert Workflow Perform Tasks Create or Edit an Alert Perform Common DBS Tasks Select Dealer Users by Geography Select Dealer Users by Hierarchy Select Dealer Users by Input a Dealer Select Internal Users by Geography Select Internal Users by Hierarchy Create or Edit an Alert Perform Common DBS Tasks Select Dealer Users by Geography Select Dealer Users by Hierarchy Select Dealer Users by Input a Dealer Select Internal Users by Geography Select Internal Users by Hierarchy
Alerts Create Edit Modify Processes Create or Edit an Alert Workflow Note : This workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating or editing an alert. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create or Edit an Alert Workflow. Create or Edit an Announcement Workflow Create or Edit a Calendar Event Workflow Create or Edit a Notification Workflow
QC 10700 To open one dealer's study results: In the Dealer column, click the appropriate dealer number link. Note : The One Dealer Study Result page opens for the selected dealer.
Open One Dealer's Study Results To open one dealer's study results: In the Dealer column, click the appropriate dealer number link. Note : The One Dealer Study Result page opens for the selected dealer.
Dashboard Early Detection System (EDS) Hold Status Processes Study View Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow Note: The Manage Early Detection System Studies workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing Early Detection System (EDS) studies that integrate appointment and repair order data collected by the Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow. Define or Modify a Study Workflow View One Study Result Workflow View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow
Dashboard Early Detection System (EDS) EDS: Study Dashboard Processes EDS: Study Dashboard Study Study Dashboard View View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow Note : The View a Dealer's Study Results workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing one dealer's study results that integrate appointment and repair order data collected by the Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the View a Dealer's Study Results workflow. Define or Modify a Study Workflow Manage Early Detection Studies Workflow View One Study Result Workflow
Dashboard Early Detection System (EDS) EDS: Study Dashboard Processes EDS: Study Dashboard Study Study Dashboard View View One Study Result Workflow Note : The View One Study Result workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing a study that integrates appointment and repair order data collected by the Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the View One Study Result workflow. Define or Modify Study Workflow Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow
To designate dealer administrator and contacts: Select the desired user. Note : It is required that you assign at least two dealer administrators per dealer number. Note : You may designate multiple dealer administrators per dealer number. Select the Sys. Admin checkbox for the desired user. Note : You must scroll to the right to see the checkbox. Select the Prim. Contact or Sec. Contact checkboxes for the desired user. Note : You must designate, at a minimum, a primary contact for a dealer, but designating a secondary contact is optional. Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm, or click the No button to close the window without confirming. Internal users must search by dealer before opening the User Summary.
Designate Dealer Administrator and Contacts To designate dealer administrator and contacts: Select the desired user. Note : It is required that you assign at least two dealer administrator per dealer number. Note : You may designate multiple dealer administrators per dealer number. Select the Sys. Admin checkbox for the desired user. Note : You must scroll to the right to view the checkbox. Select the Prim. Contact or Sec. Contact checkboxes for the desired user. Note : You must designate, at a minimum, a primary contact for a dealer, but designating a secondary contact is optional. Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm, or click the No button to close the window without confirming. Internal users must search by dealer before opening the User Summary.
DSP Provider Documentation The documentation contained in this help topic is provided by various DSPs. These documents teach internal and dealer users how to access and use the DBS . The documents are listed by DSP provider. To access and use a DSP provider's help documentation click on the link under the DSP provider to open the file. ADP Nissan DBS Release 1 Notes Nissan DBS Users Guide
If a dealer only has parts returns in New, Open, or Canceled status for the current month, authorized users may forfeit the parts return period and the earned accrual amount; forcing the dealer to begin work on the next parts return period. You cannot reverse the forfeit of a return period. Proceed with caution! To forfeit a dealer's parts return period: From the Dealer List on the left side of the page, select the dealer to display their parts return schedule. In the Return Schedule List on the right side of the page, move your cursor over the Action icon for the parts return which will be forfeited. From the Action menu, select the Forfeit Return Period menu item. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the OK button to forfeit the return period and the earned accrual amount, or click the Cancel button to close the confirmation message and cancel the forfeit.
Forfeit a Parts Return Period If a dealer only has parts returns in New, Open, or Canceled status for the current month, authorized users may forfeit the parts return period and the earned accrual amount, forcing the dealer to begin work on the next parts return period. You cannot reverse the forfeit of a return period. Proceed with caution! To forfeit a dealer's parts return period: From the Dealer List on the left side of the page, select the dealer to display their parts return schedule. In the Return Schedule List on the right side of the page, move your cursor over the Action icon for the parts return which will be forfeited. From the Action menu, select the Forfeit Return Period menu item. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the OK button to forfeit the return period and the earned accrual amount, or click the Cancel button to close the confirmation message and cancel the forfeit.
To create or edit an announcement: Select the page where the announcement will display. Select the display language for the announcement. If the item does not require approval, clear the Require Approval? checkbox. In the Title field, type a title for the announcement or notification. Select a start date for the announcement. Type a start time for the announcement. Select an expiration date for the announcement. Select the announcement priority. Type the text of the message in the space provided and format as desired. To upload an image for the announcement, click the Choose Image button. To upload a PDF file to display with the announcement, click the Choose PDF button. Select recipients for the announcement. Note : Click here for more information on selecting recipients. Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Click the Yes button to confirm, or click the No button to close the window without confirming. Click the Preview link at any time to see the announcement as it will appear to users. Click the Close button to close the preview window and return to the Create Announcements page. Time in Fred is written in the 24-hour notation, where HH (00 to 23) is the number of full hours that have passed since midnight. The recommended image size is 375 pixels wide by 200 pixels tall. All images must be of the .gif, .jpg, or .png file format.
Create or Edit an Announcement To create or edit an announcement: Select the page where the announcement will display. Select the display language for the announcement. Note : Announcements will display in English by default. If the item does not require approval, clear the Require Approval? checkbox. In the Title field, type a title for the announcement or notification. Note : The announcement title is limited to 50 characters. Note : If the announcement is for a particular region, include the region name in the title or announcement text. Click in the Scheduled Date field, and then use the calendar to select the desired date. If the announcement or notification must display at or after a specific time, in the Scheduled Time field, type the scheduled start time in HH:MM format. Click in the Expiration Date field, and then use the calendar to select the desired date. Select the announcement priority. Note : Items with the highest priority display in the primary viewing area of the home or landing page specified in the settings. Additional items display in the Other News section of the home or landing page specified. Type the text of the message in the space provided. Note : To insert a hyperlink within your announcement text, use the following format: [LINK URL|LINK DISPLAY NAME], for example: Please visit the [http://www.nissanusa.com|Nissan USA] Web site. Click the Choose Image button to upload an image for the announcement, if desired. Note : To remove the uploaded image file, click the Clear Uploaded Image button. Click the Preview link at any time to see the announcement as it will appear to users, and then click the Close button to close the preview window and return to the Create Announcements page. Note : To view the full announcement text, click the More link. Click the Choose Image button to upload an image for the announcement, if desired. See the Upload Images section below for additional information. Note : To remove the uploaded image file, click the Clear Uploaded Image button. Select recipients for the announcement. Select dealers users by dealer number Select dealer users by geography Select dealer users by hierarchy Select internal users by geography Select internal users by hierarchy Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm, or click the No button to close the window without confirming. All images must be of the .gif, .jpg, or .png file format.
View Overview Information Manage Dealer Operation Code Page Overview Manage Dealer Operation Codes Workflow Perform Tasks Edit a Dealer Operation Code Export the Dealer Operation Code Summary Filter the Dealer Operation Code Summary Perform Common DBS Tasks Re-Run the Dealer Operation Code Translation Process View the Dealer Operation Code Summary Change a Dealer Operation Code Export the Dealer Operation Code Summary Filter the Dealer Operation Code Summary Perform Common DBS Tasks Re-Run Translation Process - Dealer Operation Code View the Dealer Operation Code Summary
Dealer Operation Code Dealer Operation Codes ReRun Dealer Operation Codes Translation Manage Dealer Operation Codes Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing dealer operation codes. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Dealer Operation Codes Workflow. Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes Workflow Manage Standard Operation Categories Workflow Manage Standard Operation Codes Workflow
This section of a study is not required, but provides the opportunity to customize or limit a study's results. Use optional study sections to clearly define study parameters, but use caution as conflicting selections will result in no data being returned. Note : The TSB section of a study is only available when the study type is "Informational". To complete the TSB (Technical Service Bulletin) section of a study: To search for a specific TSB, in the field provided, type the TSB ID, and then click the Search icon. Note : Type only the TSB ID (such as "AT13016"). Do not type any additional information or description. Select each TSB you want to add to or remove from the TSBs list and then click the center buttons as necessary to add or remove the bulletins. When you have selected all desired dealers, click the Save button.
Complete the TSB Section of a Study This section of a study is not required, but provides the opportunity to customize or limit a study's results. Use optional study sections to clearly define study parameters, but use caution as conflicting selections will result in no data being returned. Note : The TSB section of a study is only available when the study type is "Informational". To complete the TSB (Technical Service Bulletin) section of a study: To search for a specific TSB, in the field provided, type the TSB ID, and then click the Search icon. Note : Type only the TSB ID (such as "AT13016"). Do not type any additional information or description. Select each TSB you want to add to or remove from the TSBs list and then click the center buttons as necessary to add or remove the bulletins. When you have selected all desired dealers, click the Save button.
Early Detection System (EDS) EDS: Study Dashboard Processes EDS: Study Dashboard Study Study Dashboard Technical Service Bulletin (TSB) Create or Modify a Study Workflow Note : The Create or Modify a Study workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for defining or modifying a study that integrates appointment and repair order data collected by the Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Define or Modify a Study Workflow. Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow View One Study Result Workflow
The steps for editing a key word are the same for standard operation categories and standard operation codes. To edit a key word: Select the key word. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Edit option. Note : The selected key word becomes editable. Type the correction. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Save option.
Edit a Key Word The steps for editing a key word are the same for Standard Operation Categories and Standard Operation Codes. To edit a key word: Select the key word. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Edit option. Note : The selected key word becomes editable. Type the correction. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Save option.
Standard Operation Codes Standard Operation Code Standard Operation Codes Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating or editing standard operation groups and codes. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes workflow. Manage Dealer Operation Codes Workflow Manage Standard Operation Categories Workflow Manage Standard Operation Codes Workflow
ReRun Standard Operation Category Translation Manage Standard Operation Categories Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing and creating standard operation categories. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Standard Operation Categories Workflow. Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes Workflow Manage Dealer Operation Codes Workflow Manage Standard Operation Codes Workflow
The steps for editing a key word are the same for standard operation categories and standard operation codes. To edit a key word: Select the key word. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Edit option. Note : The selected key word becomes editable. Type the correction. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Save option.
Edit a Key Word The steps for editing a key word are the same for Standard Operation Categories and Standard Operation Codes. To edit a key word: Select the key word. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Edit option. Note : The selected key word becomes editable. Type the correction. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Save option.
Standard Operation Codes Standard Operation Code Standard Operation Codes Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating or editing standard operation groups and codes. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes workflow. Manage Dealer Operation Codes Workflow Manage Standard Operation Categories Workflow Manage Standard Operation Codes Workflow
ReRun Standard Operation Category Translation Manage Standard Operation Categories Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing and creating standard operation categories. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Standard Operation Categories Workflow. Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes Workflow Manage Dealer Operation Codes Workflow Manage Standard Operation Codes Workflow
To view announcements and other news: Open the Home page or the landing page for the functional area for which you want to view announcements and other news. Note : The highest-priority announcements appear in the Regional Announcements or National Announcements section. Note : To view each of the highest-priority announcements in a primary viewing area, click one of the small navigation boxes in the upper right corner of the section, if available. The navigation box that corresponds to the displayed announcement is shaded red. To view another announcement, click a white navigation box. To view the complete text for an announcement, click the More link. To view the complete text for other news, click the title which is a blue link. Note : The complete text of the announcement or other news item opens in a new window. To print the text, click the Print button. To close, click Close .
View Announcements and Other News To view announcements and other news: Open the Home page or the landing page for the functional area for which you want to view announcements and other news. Note: The highest-priority announcements appear in the Regional Announcements or National Announcements section. Note : To view each of the highest-priority announcements in a primary viewing area, click one of the small navigation boxes in the upper right corner of the section, if available. The navigation box that corresponds to the displayed announcement is shaded red. To view another announcement, click a white navigation box. To view the complete text for an announcement, click the More link. To view the complete text for other news, click the title which is a blue link. Note : The complete text of the announcement or other news item opens in a new window. To print the complete text, click the Print button. To close, click the Close button.
To open the User Summary to search for a user: Select the dealer. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Search User option. Note : The User Summary page appears.
Open the User Summary to Search for a User To open the User Summary to search for a user: Select the dealer. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Search User option. Note : The User Summary page appears.
To manage vehicle notes from the Vehicle Inventory page: Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon for the vehicle for which you want to edit notes. From the Action menu, select the Add Notes option or the Edit Notes option. Note : The Notes window opens. View the existing notes, type a new note, or edit an existing note created at your dealership. Note : Anyone can view system-generated notes; however, you cannot edit these notes. Note : Notes created by users at your dealership are only visible to other users at your dealership. You cannot view notes created at other dealerships. Note : To delete a note, highlight the text and press the Delete key on your keyboard. Click the OK button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to save your edits, or click the No button to close the window without saving. If a vehicle is pre-sold, or if an investment proposal, F&I deal, or RDR is available for the vehicle, the identification of the item, date, and customer address and phone number are automatically added to the note. You cannot edit system generated information. If a vehicle has a note, a red "*" appears beside the stock number. On the Vehicle Inventory page, to take a quick look at an existing note for a vehicle, move your mouse over the note indicator (the red *). The note displays in a pop-up window.
Manage Vehicle Notes from Vehicle Inventory To manage vehicle notes: Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon for the vehicle for which you want to edit notes. From the Action menu, select the Add Notes option or the Edit Notes option. Note : The Notes window appears. View the existing notes, type a new note, or edit an existing note created at your dealership. Note : Anyone can view system-generated notes; however, you cannot edit these notes. Note : Notes created by users at your dealership are only visible to other users at your dealership. You cannot view notes created at other dealerships. Note : To delete a note, highlight the text and press the Delete key on your keyboard. Click the OK button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to save your edits, or click the No button to close the window without saving. If a vehicle is pre-sold, or if an investment proposal, Finance and Insurance (F&I) deal, or Retail Delivery Reporting (RDR) is available for the vehicle, the identification of the item, date, and customer address and phone number are automatically added to the note. You cannot edit system generated information. If a vehicle has a note, a red asterisk "*" appears beside the stock number. On the Vehicle Inventory page, to take a quick look at an existing note for a vehicle, hover your mouse over the note indicator (the red *). The note displays in a pop-up window
Vehicle Inventory Management Inventory Managment Processes Inventory Managment Vehicle Inventory Management Vehicle Inventory Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing vehicle inventory data at the dealerships. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Vehicle Inventory workflow. Report the Sale of a Vehicle (RDR) Workflow Search Vehicle Inventory Workflow Search Vehicle Inventory Workflow
To complete the Study Type section of a study: By default, all studies are of the "General" study type. If desired, select an alternate study type. Note : "Hold" studies are those studies in which Product Engineering wants the dealer to cease all repair activities and hold the vehicle until an engineer can contact the dealer to discuss the issue. Matches to "Hold" studies alert the dealer and engineers via the Service Dashboard. Note : "Informational" studies are used by Product Engineering to relay repair information to the dealer. This can include specific TSBs that may address a repair incident and/or specific instructions that Product Engineering wants to relay to the technician. Matches to "Informational" studies alert the dealer via the Service Dashboard. In the Dealer Message field, type a message that will be displayed to a dealer when a vehicle matches the study criteria. Note : The Dealer Message field is required for "Hold" and "Informational" studies and is optional for "General" studies. Click the Save button.
Complete the Study Type Section of a Study To complete the Study Type section of a study: By default, all studies are of the "General" study type. If desired, select an alternate study type. Note : "Hold" studies are those studies in which Product Engineering wants the dealer to cease all repair activities and hold the vehicle until an engineer can contact the dealer to discuss the issue. Matches to "Hold" studies alert the dealer and engineers via the Service Dashboard. Note : "Informational" studies are used by Product Engineering to relay repair information to the dealer. This can include specific TSBs that may address a repair incident and/or specific instructions that Product Engineering wants to relay to the technician. Matches to "Informational" studies alert the dealer via the Service Dashboard. In the Dealer Message field, type a message that will be displayed to a dealer when a vehicle matches the study criteria. Note : The Dealer Message field is required for "Hold" and "Informational" studies and is optional for "General" studies. Click the Save button.
Early Detection System (EDS) EDS: Study Dashboard Processes EDS: Study Dashboard Study Study Dashboard Technical Service Bulletin (TSB) Create or Modify a Study Workflow Note : The Create or Modify a Study workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for defining or modifying a study that integrates appointment and repair order data collected by the Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Define or Modify a Study Workflow. Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow View One Study Result Workflow
NOTOR DBS Integration Quick Reference Guide The NOTOR (Nissan One to One Rewards) DBS Integration Quick Reference Guide provides information on how to view the NOTOR point balance and account information for NOTOR program participants. Click here to access the NOTOR DBS Integration Quick Reference Guide.
To create or edit an event: Select the display language for the event. Note : The default language for events is English. If the item does not require approval, clear the Require Approval? checkbox. Type a title for the event. Note : The event title will display in the event calendar as a hyperlink that users can click to view the event description. In the Location field, type room number, building, or address where the event will take place. Select a start date for the event. Type the scheduled start time for the event. Select an end date for the event. Type the scheduled end time for the event. Type a description of the event in the space provided. Select recipients for the event. Click here for instructions on how to select recipients. Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm, or click the No button to close the window without confirming. Note : The event is created in "Needs Approval" status. Time in Fred is written in the 24-hour notation, where HH (00 to 23) is the number of full hours that have passed since midnight.
Create or Edit an Event To create or edit an event: To select the display language for the event, click the Language drop-down list. Note : By default, events display in English. If the item does not require approval, clear the Require Approval? checkbox. In the Title field, type a title for the event. This title will display in the event calendar as a hyperlink that users can click to view the event description. In the Location field, type the room number, building, or address where the event will take place. Click in the Start Date field, and then use the calendar to select the desired date. In the Start Time field, type the start time for the event in HH:MM format. Note : Time in Fred is written in the 24-hour notation, where HH (00 to 23) is the number of full hours that have passed since midnight. Click in the End Date field, and then use the calendar to select the desired date. In th End Time field, type the end time for the event in HH:MM format. Type a description for the event in the space provided. To select dealer users, click the Dealer User button. To select internal users, click the Internal User button. Note : Click here for additional information on selecting recipients. Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm, or click the No button to close the window without confirming. Note : The event is created in "Needs Approval" status unless you cleared the Require Approval? checkbox.
Note : If you selected a vehicle that has a status of "Deal Booked" or "Deal Open", the RDR Vehicle screen displays with the data fields pre-populated with the information from your DMS. Note : Any field that displays a circle indicates the information is required and needs to be completed or corrected before submitting the RDR. Note : By selecting the Automatically print an RDR confirmation after submission? check box (located on the upper right of the Summary section), the system will automatically send an RDR Confirmation Detail Report to your printer. To report or edit the sale of a vehicle: Complete or edit each section of the RDR. Complete the Vehicle section of the RDR. Click here for more information. Complete the Buyer section of the RDR. Click here for more information. If applicable, complete the Co-Buyer section of the RDR. Click here for more information. Complete the Driver section of the RDR. Click here for more information. If desired, complete the optional Legal Owner section of the RDR. Click here for more information. If the sale is a vehicle lease, complete the Finance section of the RDR. Click here for more information. Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Note : If the RDR contains errors, an error message displays. Click the Yes button to save the RDR with errors, or click the No button to close the error message and return to the RDR page. To print the RDR confirmation after submission, select the Automatically print RDR confirmation after submission? checkbox. Submit the RDR. Click here for more information. To delete the RDR, click the Delete button.
Report or Edit the Sale of a Vehicle (RDR) To report or edit the sale of a vehicle (RDR): Complete or edit each section of the RDR. Click the applicable links below for more information. Complete the Vehicle section of the RDR. Click here for more information. Complete the Customer section of the RDR. Click here for more information. If the sale type is a lease, complete the Finance section of the RDR. Click here for more information. Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Note : If the RDR contains errors, an error message displays. Click the Yes button to save the RDR with errors, or click the No button to close the error message and return to the RDR page. To print the RDR confirmation after submission, select the Automatically print RDR confirmation after submission? checkbox. Submit the RDR. Click here for more information. Any field that displays a circle indicates the information is required and will need to be completed or corrected before submitting an RDR. To delete the RDR, click the Delete button.
Processes RDR RDR RDR a Vehicle Workflow Note : This workflow is for NNA users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for retail delivery reporting (RDR) or editing the sale of a vehicle. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Report or Edit the Sale of a Vehicle workflow. Vehicle Inventory Workflow Inventory Search Workflow View RDR History Workflow
BB378FE5-6CD6-4E53-935A-12CD21F41560\SVC Parts Orders Quick Reference Guide NISSAN v4.pdf
Edit/Create Warranty Claim Page Overview Purpose Use the Edit/Create Warranty Claim page to modify or create vehicle and repair order (RO) information in a warranty claim. From this page, you can also cancel, validate, or submit a warranty claim. Description The content area of the Edit/Create Warranty Claim page displays the following sections: Quick Jump menu - Appears on the left-hand side of the page. The quick jump menu allows you to jump from section to section without scrolling. The number next to the section name is the number of warnings or errors in that section. Summary - Displays warranty claim data and claims summary data, such as the RO number, VIN, odometer, and requested claim amount. Also displays the determined and adjusted amounts if the warranty claim has been processed. Claims detail data - Displays sections of detailed data on the warranty claim, parts, operations, expenses, comments, customer, claim activity, and history. Alerts - Displays error or warning messages at the bottom of the claim detail data sections. Action buttons - Buttons such as RO, NSH, New Claim Line, Close, Save, Validate, and Submit appear on the bottom of the page. Tasks You can perform the following tasks from or on the Edit/Create Warranty Claims page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. About Warranty Claims: What You Need to Know Add New Claim Line from Edit/Create Warranty Claim Page Delete a Warranty Claim Edit or Create a Warranty Claim Complete the Claim Information Section Complete the Comments Section of a Claim Complete the Customer Section of a Claim Complete the Expenses Section of a Claim Complete the Operations Section of a Claim Complete the Parts Section of a Claim Complete the Summary Section of a Claim Complete the Claim Information Section Complete the Comments Section of a Claim Complete the Customer Section of a Claim Complete the Expenses Section of a Claim Complete the Operations Section of a Claim Complete the Parts Section of a Claim Complete the Summary Section of a Claim View the Claim Activity Section of a Claim View the History Section of a Claim Look Up Part Look Up Op Code Print Warranty Claim Submit Warranty Claim Use the Quick Jump Menu Validate Warranty Claim View Dealer Claim Administration Limits View NSH View Repair Order Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Edit/Create Warranty Claims page. Edit or Create a Warranty Claim Workflow Page Preview
To open the View Parts Order page to view detail: Select the parts order you want to view. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the View Order option. Note : The View Parts Order page appears. The View option is available for all orders except those with a status of "New" or "Open." For orders with a status of "New" or "Open," select the Edit option to see the parts order detail. -OR- Click the Dealer Order Reference # hyperlink for the parts order you want to view.
Open the View Part Orders Page to View Detail To open the View Parts Order page to view detail: Select the parts order you want to view. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the View Order option. Note : The View Parts Order page appears. The View option is available for all orders except those with a status of "New" or "Open." For orders with a status of "New" or "Open," select the Edit option to see the parts order detail. -OR- Click the Order Number hyperlink for the parts order you want to view.
Manage Orders Manage Orders Manage Orders Manage Orders Parts Order Management Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing parts orders. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Parts Order workflow. Create Parts Order Workflow Edit Parts Order Workflow Inquire on the Availability of Parts at the Parts Distribution Centers Workflow View Parts Order Workflow Create Parts Order Workflow Edit Parts Order Workflow View Parts Order Workflow
To open the View Parts Order page to view detail: Select the parts order you want to view. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the View Order option. Note : The View Parts Order page appears. The View option is available for all orders except those with a status of "New" or "Open." For orders with a status of "New" or "Open," select the Edit option to see the parts order detail. -OR- Click the Dealer Order Reference # hyperlink for the parts order you want to view.
Open the View Part Orders Page to View Detail To open the View Parts Order page to view detail: Select the parts order you want to view. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the View Order option. Note : The View Parts Order page appears. The View option is available for all orders except those with a status of "New" or "Open." For orders with a status of "New" or "Open," select the Edit option to see the parts order detail. -OR- Click the Order Number hyperlink for the parts order you want to view.
Manage Orders Manage Orders Manage Orders Manage Orders Parts Order Management Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing parts orders. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Parts Order workflow. Create Parts Order Workflow Edit Parts Order Workflow Inquire on the Availability of Parts at the Parts Distribution Centers Workflow View Parts Order Workflow Create Parts Order Workflow Edit Parts Order Workflow View Parts Order Workflow
To select recipients by internal user for geography option: Click the Internal Users button. Select the Choose recipients by Geography option. Click the Next button to continue. Select an affiliate. Select a division. Note : The default setting for affiliate and division is "ALL." Select the states/provinces. Note : To select multiple items, press and hold the CTRL key while selecting items. Click the Copy button to move the selected options to the Selected box, or click the Copy All button to move all options. Note : To remove a selection, select the options in the Selected box and click the Remove button. Click the Next button to continue, or click the Back button to return to the previous window. Select the user type. Click the Next button to continue, or click the Back button to return to the previous window. Select the positions. Click the Copy button to move the selected options to the Selected box, or click the Copy All button to move all options. Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the Back button to return to the previous window. To view your recipient selections after you select them, use the View/Print option in the Action menu.
Select Recipients by Internal User for Geography Option To select recipients by internal user for geography option: Click the Internal Users button. Select the Choose recipients by Geography option. Click the Next button to continue. From the Affiliate down list, select the affiliate. Note : The default setting for affiliate is "ALL." From the Division drop-down list, select the division. Note : The default setting for division is "ALL." From the Available Fields box, select the state / province. Note : To select multiple items, press and hold the CTRL key while selecting items. Click the Copy button to move the selected options to the Selected box, or click the Copy All button to move all options. Note : To remove a selection, select the options in the Selected box and click the Remove button. Click the Next button to continue, or click the Back button to return to the previous window. From the Select recipients by User Type drop-down list, select a user type option. Click the Next button to continue, or click the Back button to return to the previous window. From the Available Fields box, select the positions. Click the Copy button to move the selected options to the Selected box, or click the Copy All button to move all options. Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the Back button to return to the previous window. To view your recipient selections after you select them, use the View/Print option in the Action menu.
To search for a dealer by number when you know the dealer number: Select the Choose dealer by Number option. In the Please enter dealer number field, type the dealer number. Click the Search icon. To search for a dealer when you do not know the dealer number: Select the Choose dealer by Number option. Beside the Please enter dealer number field, click the Lookup icon. In the Dealer Name field, type full or partial information, and then click the Search icon. Select the option button for the desired dealer. Click the Select button. Click the Search icon at the lower-right of the page.
Search for a Dealer by Number To search for a dealer by number when you know the dealer number: Select the Choose dealer by Number option. In the Please enter dealer number field, type the dealer number. Click the Search icon at the lower-right of the page. Note : DBS displays the dealer information. Use Dealer Lookup To search for a dealer when you do not know the dealer number: Select the Choose dealer by Number option. Beside the Please enter dealer number field, click the Lookup icon. Note : The Dealer Lookup window opens. In the Dealer Name field, type full or partial information. Click the Search icon,. Note : DBS displays a list of matching dealers. Select the option button for the desired dealer. Click the Select button. Note : DBS displays the dealer number in the Please enter dealer number field. Click the Search icon at the lower-right of the page. Note : DBS displays the dealer information.
Quick Entry Used Vehicle Sale Page Overview Purpose Use the Quick Entry Used Vehicle Sale page to create, edit, submit, or delete an RDR (sale) record for a used vehicle. The Quick Entry Used Vehicle Sale page differs from the standard RDR quick entry page in that it allows you to quickly select a used vehicle from your inventory by stock number or serial number, complete the sale information, and then submit the RDR. Once the RDR is submitted, you remain on the Quick Entry Used Vehicle Sale page so you can RDR another used vehicle, if desired. Description The content area of the Quick Entry Used Vehicle Sale page displays the following sections: Summary - Display the status of the RDR Vehicle - Displays information about the vehicle Buyer - Displays information about the customer Driver - Displays information about the primary driver Finance - Displays information about the financing arrangements for the purchase You can perform the following tasks on the Quick Entry Used Vehicle Sale page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Delete an RDR Report or Edit the Sale of a Used Vehicle Complete the Vehicle Section of an RDR Complete the Buyer Section of an RDR Complete the Driver Section of an RDR Complete the Finance Section of an RDR Save or Submit a Used Vehicle RDR Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Quick Entry Used Vehicle Sale page. Report the Sale of a Vehicle Workflow Page Preview
To manage vehicle notes from the Inventory Search page: Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon for the vehicle for which you want to edit notes. From the Action menu, select the Add Notes option or the Edit Notes option, as applicable. View the existing notes. Note : Anyone can view system-generated notes; however, you cannot edit these notes. Note : Notes created by users at your dealership are only visible to other users at your dealership. You cannot view notes created at other dealerships. Type a new note, or edit an existing note created at your dealership. Note : To delete a note, highlight the text and press the Delete key on your keyboard. Click the OK button to save your changes. Click the Yes button to save your edits. To view an existing note for a vehicle, hover your mouse over the note indicator (the red *). The note displays in a pop-up window.
Manage Vehicle Notes from Inventory Search To manage vehicle notes from the Inventory Search page: Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon for the selected vehicle. From the Action menu, select the Add Notes or Edit Notes option. Note : You will see the Edit Notes option if a note already exists and the Add Notes option if a note has not yet been created. Note : Anyone can view system-generated notes. Notes created by users at your dealership are only visible to other users at your dealership. Type a new note, or edit an existing note created at your dealership. Note : To delete a note, highlight the text and press the Delete key on your keyboard. Click the OK button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to save your edits, or click the No button to close the window without saving. Note : On the Inventory Search page, to take a quick look at an existing note for a vehicle, hover your mouse over the note indicator (the red *). The note displays in a pop-up window.
Inventory Search Inventory Search Processes Search Inventory Search Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for searching and viewing inventory for a particular vehicle model with specified features and options. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Inventory Search workflow. Vehicle Inventory Workflow
To transfer a report definition: In the report summary section, select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Transfer option. Note : The Transfer Report page appears. From the list of users, select a user. Click the Submit button, or click the Cancel button to close without selecting a user. Note : If the target user has a report with the same name, the Rename window appears. Type a new report name. Click the OK button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. If you transfer a report definition, control of the definition is given to the target user. You can transfer report definitions to other users within your dealership. Dealer administrators and authorized internal users can transfer reports to other authorized users.
Transfer a Report Definition If you transfer a report definition, control of the definition is given to the target user. You can transfer report definitions to other users within your dealership. Dealer administrators and authorized internal users can transfer reports to other authorized users. To transfer a report definition: In the report summary section, select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Transfer option. Note : The Transfer Report page appears. From the list of users, select a user. Click the Submit button, or click the Cancel button to close without selecting a user. Note : If the target user has a report with the same name, the Rename window appears. Type a new report name. Click the OK button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Note : Report Writer adds the report to the target user's list.
To transfer a report definition: In the report summary section, select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Transfer option. Note : The Transfer Report page appears. From the list of users, select a user. Click the Submit button, or click the Cancel button to close without selecting a user. Note : If the target user has a report with the same name, the Rename window appears. Type a new report name. Click the OK button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. If you transfer a report definition, control of the definition is given to the target user. You can transfer report definitions to other users within your dealership. Dealer administrators and authorized internal users can transfer reports to other authorized users.
Transfer a Report Definition If you transfer a report definition, control of the definition is given to the target user. You can transfer report definitions to other users within your dealership. Dealer administrators and authorized internal users can transfer reports to other authorized users. To transfer a report definition: In the report summary section, select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Transfer option. Note : The Transfer Report page appears. From the list of users, select a user. Click the Submit button, or click the Cancel button to close without selecting a user. Note : If the target user has a report with the same name, the Rename window appears. Type a new report name. Click the OK button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Note : Report Writer adds the report to the target user's list.
To transfer a report definition: In the report summary section, select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Transfer option. Note : The Transfer Report page appears. From the list of users, select a user. Click the Submit button, or click the Cancel button to close without selecting a user. Note : If the target user has a report with the same name, the Rename window appears. Type a new report name. Click the OK button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. If you transfer a report definition, control of the definition is given to the target user. You can transfer report definitions to other users within your dealership. Dealer administrators and authorized internal users can transfer reports to other authorized users.
Transfer a Report Definition If you transfer a report definition, control of the definition is given to the target user. You can transfer report definitions to other users within your dealership. Dealer administrators and authorized internal users can transfer reports to other authorized users. To transfer a report definition: In the report summary section, select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Transfer option. Note : The Transfer Report page appears. From the list of users, select a user. Click the Submit button, or click the Cancel button to close without selecting a user. Note : If the target user has a report with the same name, the Rename window appears. Type a new report name. Click the OK button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Note : Report Writer adds the report to the target user's list.
To transfer a report definition: In the report summary section, select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Transfer option. Note : The Transfer Report page appears. From the list of users, select a user. Click the Submit button, or click the Cancel button to close without selecting a user. Note : If the target user has a report with the same name, the Rename window appears. Type a new report name. Click the OK button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. If you transfer a report definition, control of the definition is given to the target user. You can transfer report definitions to other users within your dealership. Dealer administrators and authorized internal users can transfer reports to other authorized users.
Transfer a Report Definition If you transfer a report definition, control of the definition is given to the target user. You can transfer report definitions to other users within your dealership. Dealer administrators and authorized internal users can transfer reports to other authorized users. To transfer a report definition: In the report summary section, select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Transfer option. Note : The Transfer Report page appears. From the list of users, select a user. Click the Submit button, or click the Cancel button to close without selecting a user. Note : If the target user has a report with the same name, the Rename window appears. Type a new report name. Click the OK button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Note : Report Writer adds the report to the target user's list.
To transfer a report definition: In the report summary section, select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Transfer option. Note : The Transfer Report page appears. From the list of users, select a user. Click the Submit button, or click the Cancel button to close without selecting a user. Note : If the target user has a report with the same name, the Rename window appears. Type a new report name. Click the OK button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. If you transfer a report definition, control of the definition is given to the target user. You can transfer report definitions to other users within your dealership. Dealer administrators and authorized internal users can transfer reports to other authorized users.
Transfer a Report Definition If you transfer a report definition, control of the definition is given to the target user. You can transfer report definitions to other users within your dealership. Dealer administrators and authorized internal users can transfer reports to other authorized users. To transfer a report definition: In the report summary section, select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Transfer option. Note : The Transfer Report page appears. From the list of users, select a user. Click the Submit button, or click the Cancel button to close without selecting a user. Note : If the target user has a report with the same name, the Rename window appears. Type a new report name. Click the OK button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Note : Report Writer adds the report to the target user's list.
To filter the Event Monitor page detail: Select or enter criteria to filter the events displayed. Click the Search button, or click the Clear button to remove the filters. Review the information in the Events section that matches the criteria you entered. To sort the events data by a specific field, click the column header. If multiple pages exist, click a page number or click the forward or backward arrow to navigate from page to page. To view a specific page, in the Go to Page field, type a page number, and then click the Go button. If desired, click the Refresh link in the Runtime Statistic Information section to update the system event count.
Filter the Event Monitor Page Detail To filter the Event Monitor page detail: Select or enter criteria to filter the events displayed. Click the Search icon, or click the Clear icon to remove the filters. Review the information in the Events section that matches the criteria you entered. To sort the events data by a specific field, click the column header. If multiple pages exist, click a page number or click the forward or backward arrow to navigate from page to page. To view a specific page, in the Go to Page field, type a page number, and then click the Go button. If desired, click the Refresh link in the Runtime Statistic Information section to update the system event count.
Transaction Status Page Overview Purpose Use the Transaction Status page to view the status of transactions. You can use the search criteria on the Transaction Status page to filter the desired transaction related information. You can also access and change the transaction related information by accessing the appropriate application for that transaction. Description The content area of the Transaction Status page displays the following sections: Selection Criteria - Allows you to enter the criteria for searching the transaction logs that will display in the transaction summary area at the bottom of your screen. Transaction Status - Allows you to view the transaction status information for each transaction by application type, transaction type and dealer number based on your input. Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Transaction Status page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Search for Transactions on the Transaction Status Page View Transaction Status Search for Transactions on the Transaction Status Page View Transaction Status Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Transaction Status page. Search for Transactions Workflow Page Preview
Note : This task is performed by internal users only. To view the DBS application status information: Click the View Application Information button. To view the transaction status for an application, select the application for which you want to view status information. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. Select the Drill Down menu option. Note : The transaction status information for the application you selected appears.
View Application or Transaction Status Information Note : This task is performed by internal users only. To view the DBS application status information: Click the View Application Information button. To view the transaction status for an application, select the application for which you want to view status information. Move your cursor over the Action icon. Select the Drill Down menu option. Note : The transaction status information for the application you selected appears.
Edit Parts Order Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for modifying an existing new or open parts order. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Edit Parts Order Workflow. Create Parts Order Workflow Manage Parts Order Workflow Inquire on the Availability of Parts at the Parts Distribution Centers Workflow View Parts Order Workflow
To delete a standard operation category: Select a category. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Delete Category option. Note : The Delete Confirmation window opens. Click the Delete button.
Delete a Standard Operation Category To delete a standard operation category: Select a category. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Delete Category option. Note : The Delete Confirmation window opens. Click the Delete button.
ReRun Standard Operation Category Translation Manage Standard Operation Categories Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing and creating standard operation categories. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Standard Operation Categories Workflow. Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes Workflow Manage Dealer Operation Codes Workflow Manage Standard Operation Codes Workflow
To filter the Parts Return Summary page: If desired, from the Return Period drop-down list, select a return period. Note : By default, the current period is selected as the return period. To limit the summary display by PDC, from the Available PDC List drop-down, select a PDC. Note : Only those PDCs for which you have permissions display in the list. If you need access to another PDC, contact your system administrator. From the Filter By drop-down list, select the primary filter criteria. From the secondary filter criteria list, select the secondary filter criteria. Click the Search icon. Note : The summary list updates to display only those parts returns which match the filter criteria you entered. Where available, use a quick filter in the header of the summary (see the Status column for example) section to easily and quickly view specific content.
Filter the Parts Return Summary Page Where available, use a quick filter in the header of the summary (see the Status column for example) section to easily and quickly view specific content. To filter the Parts Return Summary page: If desired, from the Return Period drop-down list, select a return period. Note : By default, the current period is selected as the return period. To limit the summary display by PDC, from the Available PDC List drop-down, select a PDC. Note : Only those PDCs for which you have permissions display in the list. If you need access to another PDC, contact your system administrator. From the Filter By drop-down list, select the primary filter criteria. From the secondary filter criteria list, select the secondary filter criteria. Click the Search icon. Note : The summary list updates to display only those parts returns which match the filter criteria you entered.
To edit a standard operation code assignment: Select the standard operation code. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Edit option. Note : The selected standard operation code becomes editable. In the Standard Op Code field, type the correct code. From the Category drop-down list, select the correct category. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Save option.
Edit a Standard Operation Code Assignment To edit a standard operation code assignment: Select the standard operation code. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Edit option. Note : The selected standard operation code becomes editable. In the Standard Op Code field, type the correct code. From the Category drop-down list, select the correct category. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Save option.
Standard Operation Codes Standard Operation Code Standard Operation Codes Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating or editing standard operation groups and codes. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes workflow. Manage Dealer Operation Codes Workflow Manage Standard Operation Categories Workflow Manage Standard Operation Codes Workflow
Express Entry Warranty Claim Page Overview Purpose Use the Express Entry Warranty Claim page to quickly create a warranty claim. It is important for users to note that the Express Entry Warranty Claim page does not have the full level of validation supplied by the Edit/Create Warranty Claim page. Only experienced users should use the Express Entry Warranty Claim page. Description The content area of the Express Entry Warranty Claim page displays the following sections: Quick Jump menu - Appears on the left-hand side of the page. The quick jump menu allows you to jump from section to section without scrolling. The number next to the section name is the number of warnings or errors in that section. Summary - Displays warranty claim data and claims summary data, such as the RO number, VIN, odometer, and requested claim amount. Also displays the determined and adjusted amounts if the warranty claim has been processed. Claims detail data - Displays sections of detailed data on the warranty claim, parts, operations, expenses, comments, customer, claim activity, and service history. Alerts - Displays error or warning messages at the bottom of the claim detail data sections. Action buttons - Buttons such as RO, NSH, New Claim Line, Close, Save, Validate, and Submit appear at the bottom of the page. Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Express Entry Warranty Claim page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Add a New Claim Line from the Express Entry Warranty Claim Page Create an Express Entry Warranty Claim Complete the Summary Section of an Express Entry Warranty Claim Complete the Claim Information Section of an Express Entry Warranty Claim Complete the Parts Section of an Express Entry Warranty Claim Complete the Operations Section of an Express Entry Warranty Claim Complete the Expenses Section of an Express Entry Warranty Claim Complete the Comments Section of an Express Entry Warranty Claim Complete the Customer Section of an Express Entry Warranty Claim Delete a Warranty Claim Use the Quick Jump Menu View a Repair Order from the Express Entry Warranty Claim Page View National Service History from the Express Entry Warranty Claim Page View the Claim Activity Section of a Claim View the Claim History Section of a Claim Add a New Claim Line from the Express Entry Warranty Claim Page Create an Express Entry Warranty Claim Complete the Summary Section of an Express Entry Warranty Claim Complete the Claim Information Section of an Express Entry Warranty Claim Complete the Parts Section of an Express Entry Warranty Claim Complete the Operations Section of an Express Entry Warranty Claim Complete the Expenses Section of an Express Entry Warranty Claim Complete the Comments Section of an Express Entry Warranty Claim Complete the Customer Section of an Express Entry Warranty Claim Delete a Warranty Claim Use the Quick Jump Menu View a Repair Order from the Express Entry Warranty Claim Page View National Service History from the Express Entry Warranty Claim Page View the Claim Activity Section of a Claim View the Claim History Section of a Claim Page Preview
To modify the SVC order quantity: Select the part you want to modify. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Edit option. Type a valid quantity. Note : Quantity must be a multiple of the unit pack. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Save option. To modify an SVC order, the order must be in "New" or "Open" status.
Modify SVC Order Quantity To modify SVC order quantity: In the SVC Order Detail section, select the part you want to modify. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Edit option. In the Order Quantity field, type a valid quantity. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Save option. To modify an SVC order, the order must be in "New" or "Open" status.
Manage Orders Manage Orders Manage Orders Manage Orders Parts Order Management Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing parts orders. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Parts Order workflow. Create Parts Order Workflow Edit Parts Order Workflow Inquire on the Availability of Parts at the Parts Distribution Centers Workflow View Parts Order Workflow Create Parts Order Workflow Edit Parts Order Workflow View Parts Order Workflow
To view the Study Summary: View the list of studies. Note : The default view for the Study Dashboard shows a list of all studies. Note : Active studies are highlighted in green. Hold studies are highlighted in yellow. Suspended studies are highlighted in red. To sort the displayed information, click the arrow beside a column title. If multiple pages exist, click a page number or click the forward or backward arrow to navigate from page to page. To view a specific page, in the Go to Page field, type a page number, and then click the Go button.
View the Study Dashboard To view the Study Dashboard: View the list of studies. Note : The default view for the Study Dashboard shows a list of all studies. Note : Active studies are highlighted in green. Hold studies are highlighted in yellow. Suspended studies are highlighted in red. To sort the displayed information, click the arrow beside a column title. If multiple pages exist, click a page number or click the forward or backward arrow to navigate from page to page. To view a specific page, in the Go to Page field, type a page number, and then click the Go button.
Early Detection System (EDS) EDS: Study Dashboard Processes EDS: Study Dashboard Study Study Dashboard Technical Service Bulletin (TSB) Create or Modify a Study Workflow Note : The Create or Modify a Study workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for defining or modifying a study that integrates appointment and repair order data collected by the Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Define or Modify a Study Workflow. Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow View One Study Result Workflow
Dashboard Early Detection System (EDS) EDS: Study Dashboard Processes EDS: Study Dashboard Study Study Dashboard View View One Study Result Workflow Note : The View One Study Result workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing a study that integrates appointment and repair order data collected by the Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the View One Study Result workflow. Define or Modify Study Workflow Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow
Dashboard Early Detection System (EDS) Hold Status Processes Study View Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow Note: The Manage Early Detection System Studies workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing Early Detection System (EDS) studies that integrate appointment and repair order data collected by the Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow. Define or Modify a Study Workflow View One Study Result Workflow View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow
Dashboard Early Detection System (EDS) EDS: Study Dashboard Processes EDS: Study Dashboard Study Study Dashboard View View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow Note : The View a Dealer's Study Results workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing one dealer's study results that integrate appointment and repair order data collected by the Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the View a Dealer's Study Results workflow. Define or Modify a Study Workflow Manage Early Detection Studies Workflow View One Study Result Workflow
Note :Warning messages are displayed with an icon. Error message are displayed with an icon. These symbols for warning and error messages display on many pages in DBS . To view error or warning messages: Move your cursor over the Warning or Alert/Error icon. Note : Warranty claims with errors cannot be submitted until the errors are corrected. Claims with warnings may still be submitted. Review the information that appears in the alert message window. Note : For warranty claims, if more than 5 errors exist on the claim, "more" displays at the end of the error list.
Display Warning or Error Messages Note : Warning messages are displayed with an icon. Error message are displayed with an icon. These symbols for warning and error messages display on many pages in DBS . To view error or warning messages: Move your cursor over the Warning or Alert/Error icon. Note : Warranty claims with errors cannot be submitted until the errors are corrected. Claims with warnings may still be submitted. Review the information that appears in the alert message window. Note : For warranty claims, if more than 5 errors exist on the claim, "more" displays at the end of the error list.
View Overview Information Create or Edit a Calendar Event Page Overview Create or Edit a Calendar Event Workflow Perform Tasks Create or Edit a Calendar Event Perform Common DBS Tasks Create or Edit a Calendar Event Perform Common DBS Tasks
Calendar Create Edit Events Modify Processes Create or Edit a Calendar Event Workflow Note : This workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating or modifying a calendar event. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create or Edit a Calendar Event workflow. Create or Edit an Alert Workflow Create or Edit an Announcement Workflow Create or Edit a Notification Workflow
To view the Campaign Part Management summary: Review the list of parts. To sort the displayed information, click the arrow beside a column title. If multiple pages exist: To view additional records, click a page number or click the forward or backward arrow to navigate from page to page. To view a specific page, in the Go to Page field, type a page number, then click the Go button.
View Campaign Part Management Summary To view the Campaign Part Management summary: Review the list of parts. To sort the displayed information, click the arrow beside a column title. If multiple pages exist: To view additional records, click a page number or click the forward or backward arrow to navigate from page to page. To view a specific page, in the Go to Page field, type a page number, then click the Go button.
Campaign Campaign Part Management Campaign Parts Campaign Campaign Part Management Campaign Part Management Manage Campaign Parts Workflow Note : This workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing campaign parts. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Campaign Parts Workflow. View Service Campaign Order Workflow Manage Service Campaign Order Workflow
To select recipients by internal user for hierarchy option: Click the Internal Users button. Select the Choose recipients by Hierarchy option. Click the Next button to continue. Select a hierarchy by clicking on the box before the hierarchy. Note : To expand the hierarchy to select specific options, click the plus sign. Note: To de-select a hierarchy, click the box to remove the check mark. Click the Next button to continue, or click the Back button to return to the previous window. Select a User Type. Click the Next button to continue, or click the Back button to return to the previous window. Select the Positions. Note : To select multiple items, press and hold the CTRL key while selecting items. Click the Copy button to move the selected options to the Selected box, or click the Copy All button to move all options. Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the Back button to return to the previous window. To view your recipient selections after you select them, use the View/Print option in the Action menu.
Select Recipients by Internal User for Hierarchy Option To select recipients by internal user for hierarchy option: Click the Internal Users button. Select the Choose recipients by Hierarchy option. Click the Next button to continue. Select a hierarchy by clicking on the box before the hierarchy. Note : To expand the hierarchy to select specific options, click the plus sign. Note : To de-select a hierarchy, click the box to remove the check mark. Click the Next button to continue, or click the Back button to return to the previous window. From the Select recipients by User Type drop-down list, select a user type option. Click the Next button to continue, or click the Back button to return to the previous window. From the Available Fields box, select the positions. Note : To select multiple items, press and hold the CTRL key while selecting items. Click the Copy button to move the selected options to the Selected box, or click the Copy All button to move all options. Note : To remove a selection, select the options in the Selected box and click the Remove button. Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the Back button to return to the previous window. To view your recipient selections after you select them, use the View/Print option in the action menu.
To select filter criteria and view the customer pay reimbursement analysis results: To include parts markup data in the analysis, select the Parts Markup checkbox. To include labor rate data in the analysis, select the Labor Rate checkbox. Note: You must select either this checkbox or the Parts Markup checkbox or both in order to run the analysis In the Maximum RO's Analyze field, type the number of Repair Orders (ROs) you want to include in the analysis. Note: The default number is 100, and this is also the maximum number allowed. In the Date Period section, complete both date fields by clicking in the fields one at a time and using the Calendar window to choose the from and to dates that you want to use for the analysis. Note: You cannot type directly in the date fields; instead, you must use the Calendar window that appears after you click in each field. In the Select Dealer field, type the dealer number for which you want to conduct the analysis. Note: If you do not know the dealer number, proceed directly to Step 6. Click the Lookup icon. Note: The Dealer Lookup window opens. Note: If you entered the dealer number in Step 5, the Dealer Lookup window defaults to that dealer. Otherwise, you must perform a search for the dealer. Click here for instructions on how to use the fields in the Dealer Lookup window to find a dealer. Select the option button for the dealer. Click the Select button. Note: The Dealer Lookup window closes and the name of the dealer appears in the Dealer Name field. Click the Analyze button. Note : DBS displays Repair Orders (ROs) that meet the criteria you selected. View the Parts Markup and Labor Rate analysis results. Note : The Parts Markup section lists data related to the parts markup analysis. Note : The Labor Rate section lists data related to the labor markup analysis.
Filter and View Customer Pay Reimbursement Results To select filter criteria and view the customer pay reimbursement analysis results: To include parts markup data in the analysis, select the Parts Markup checkbox. To include labor rate data in the analysis, select the Labor Rate checkbox. Note: You must select either this checkbox or the Parts Markup checkbox or both in order to run the analysis In the Maximum RO's Analyze field, type the number of Repair Orders (ROs) you want to include in the analysis. Note: The default number is 100, and this is also the maximum number allowed. In the Date Period section, complete both date fields by clicking in the fields one at a time and using the Calendar window to choose the from and to dates that you want to use for the analysis. Note: You cannot type directly in the date fields; instead, you must use the Calendar window that appears after you click in each field. In the Select Dealer field, type the dealer number for which you want to conduct the analysis. Note: If you do not know the dealer number, proceed directly to Step 6. Click the Lookup icon. Note: The Dealer Lookup window opens. Note: If you entered the dealer number in Step 5, the Dealer Lookup window defaults to that dealer. Otherwise, you must perform a search for the dealer. Click here for instructions on how to use the fields in the Dealer Lookup window to find a dealer. Select the option button for the dealer. Click the Select button. Note: The Dealer Lookup window closes and the name of the dealer appears in the Dealer Name field. Click the Analyze button. Note : DBS displays Repair Orders (ROs) that meet the criteria you selected. View the Parts Markup and Labor Rate analysis results. Note : The Parts Markup section lists data related to the parts markup analysis. Note : The Labor Rate section lists data related to the labor markup analysis.
Customer Customer Pay Reimbursement Reimbursement Customer Pay Reimbursement Customer Pay Reimbursement View Customer Pay Reimbursement Analysis Workflow : Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for customer pay reimbursement analysis.
The Submit All function can be used to submit validated claims without errors that are in "Open", "New", or "Warning" status. You can also use this function to re-submit claims that failed submission to Host. To submit all claims from the Manage Warranty Claim page: Filter the Warranty Claims list as desired. Select the Sub. (Submit) checkbox for each claim you want to submit, or to submit all claims in the list, select the checkbox beside the column header. Click the Submit All button. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm, or click the No button to close the window without confirming. Note : DBS sends the claims to the batch-submit queue and submits the claims in the background. As desired, you can continue to perform additional tasks on the Manage Warranty Claim page. The Submit All function can be used to submit validated claims without errors that are in "Open", "New", or "Warning" status. You can also use this function to re-submit claims that failed submission to Host.
Submit All Claims from the Manage Warranty Claim Page The Submit All function can be used to submit validated claims without errors that are in "Open", "New", or "Warning" status. You can also use this function to re-submit claims that failed submission to Host. To submit all selected claims for processing: Filter the Warranty Claims list as desired. Select the Sub. (Submit) checkbox for each claim you want to submit, or to submit all claims in the list, select the checkbox beside the column header. Click the Submit All button. Note : The Submit Confirmation window opens. Click the Yes button to confirm, or click the No button to close the window without confirming. Note : DBS sends the claims to the batch-submit queue and submits the claims in the background. As desired, you can continue to perform additional tasks on the Manage Warranty Claim page.
To access OMS to trade a vehicle: Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon for the selected vehicle. From the Action menu, select the OMS Dealer Trade option. Note : The OMS Dealer Trade option is only available to users who have access to the external OMS application. Complete the dealer trade in OMS.
Access OMS to a Trade Vehicle To access the Order Management System (OMS) to trade a vehicle: Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon for the selected vehicle. From the Action menu, select the OMS Dealer Trade option. Note : The OMS Dealer Trade option is only available to users who have access to the external OMS application. Note : Follow the procedures within the OMS application to complete the dealer trade.
View Overview Information Manage Warranty Claim Page Overview Manage Warranty Claim Workflow Perform Tasks About Warranty Claims: What You Need to Know Access the Create Warranty Claim Access the Edit Warranty Claim Page Delete Warranty Claim Display the Warranty Claims Graph Display Warning or Error Messages Edit a Warranty Claim on the Express Entry Page Edit a Warranty Claim on the Quick Entry Page Export Warranty Claims List Filter Warranty Claims List Manage Warranty Claims Page Basics Perform Common DBS Tasks Resubmit Warranty Claim Submit a Warranty Claim View Amounts Paid on an Approved Warranty Claim View DCAL View Repair Order View a Warranty Claim
Manage Warranty Claims Processes Manage Warranty Claims Manage Warranty Claims Manage Warranty Claims Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing warranty claims. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create or Edit Warranty Claims Workflow or View Warranty Claims Workflow. Edit or Create Warranty Claims Workflow View Warranty Claims Workflow
Authorized PDC users have the ability to approve submitted parts returns for dealerships within their PDC permissions. To approve a parts return, the return must be in "Submitted" status. Approving the parts return cannot be undone. To approve a submitted parts return: Select the parts return you want to approve. Note : The parts return must be in "Submitted" status. Move your cursor over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Approve Return menu option. Note : The Approve Part Return dialog box appears. In the PDC Return Due Date field, use the calendar to select the date by which parts must be returned to the PDC. Note : The return due date must be a weekday at least one day past the current date. Note : Holidays are excluded from the return due date calendar. Click the Yes button to confirm the approval, or click the No button to close the dialog box without approving the return.
Approve a Submitted Parts Return Authorized PDC users have the ability to approve submitted parts returns for dealerships within their PDC permissions. To approve a parts return, the return must be in "Submitted" status. Approving the parts return cannot be undone. To approve a submitted parts return: Select the parts return you want to approve. Note : The parts return must be in "Submitted" status. Move your cursor over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Approve Return menu option. Note : The Approve Part Return dialog box appears. In the PDC Return Due Date field, use the calendar to select the date by which parts must be returned to the PDC. Note : The return due date must be a weekday at least one day past the current date. Note : Holidays are excluded from the return due date calendar. Click the Yes button to confirm the approval, or click the No button to close the dialog box without approving the return.
To set the distance search range: Click the Customize icon to open the Configure Inventory Search page. In the Distance Search Range section, click a radio button to select a distance. Optionally, to include your dealership's inventory with the distance radius, click to select the Include My Inventory checkbox. Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Click Save . Note : Your saved distance search range setting displays in the drop-down list in the Search Radius field. The option to change the search radius is available only after you have performed an inventory search .
Set the Distance Search Range To set the distance search range: Click the Customize icon to open the Configure Inventory Search page. Note : The Configure Inventory Search page opens. In the Distance Search Range section, click a radio button to select a distance. Optionally, to include your dealership's inventory with the distance radius, select the Include My Inventory checkbox.. Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Click Save . Note : Your saved distance search range setting displays in the drop-down list in the Search Radius field.
Inventory Search Inventory Search Processes Search Inventory Search Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for searching and viewing inventory for a particular vehicle model with specified features and options. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Inventory Search workflow. Vehicle Inventory Workflow
Serviced with Open Campaign Report Page Overview Purpose Just like it sounds, the Serviced with Open Campaign Report page allows corporate users to view the details and status of vehicles which were serviced with an open campaign. Description The content area of the Serviced with Open Campaign Report page displays the following sections: Filter/Search - Allows you to filter the information to display only the records that match your criteria . Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Serviced with Open Campaign Report page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Export the Serviced with Open Campaign Report Page Filter the Serviced with Open Campaign Report Page Page Preview
To save submit a used vehicle RDR: Complete or edit the Vehicle , Buyer , Driver , and Finance sections of the RDR. Click the Save button to save and validate the RDR. Note : If errors exist, a icon will display. Correct the errors and click the Save button again. Click the Submit button to submit the RDR. When you submit an RDR, the VIN is added to the RDR History page. A retailed vehicle will be removed from inventory with the next inventory update. These updates occur every 30 minutes, so you may have to wait a maximum of 30 minutes for your inventory to refresh and display accurate counts.
Save and Submit a Used Vehicle RDR To save submit a used vehicle RDR: Complete or edit the Vehicle , Buyer , Driver , and Finance sections of the RDR. Click the Save button to save and validate the RDR. Note : If errors exist, a icon will display. Correct the errors and click the Save button again. Click the Submit button to send the RDR. When you submit an RDR, the VIN is added to the RDR History page. A retailed vehicle will be removed from inventory with the next inventory update. These updates occur every 30 minutes, so you may have to wait a maximum of 30 minutes for your inventory to refresh and display accurate counts.
If no warranty information exists for the vehicle, a warning message displays in the upper right corner of the page. Call the Warranty Call Center for additional details. To review National Service History details: Click the Plus Sign ( + ) beside a section title to expand the section. Note : The customer address only displays when viewed by the selling or servicing dealer. Click the Minus Sign ( - ) beside a section title to collapse the section. If there are active links in the top National Service History section, click the links to jump to the corresponding NSH section on the page. Click the Exit button to close the National Service History details and return to the list of NSH search results. If a vehicle does not have any warranty coverage, DBS displays a message stating "No Nissan Warranty exists for this vehicle. Call the Warranty Call Center" When there is an active campaign, TSB, warranty contract, or service contract, an active link is part of the top National Service History section.
Review National Service History To review National Service History details: Click the Plus Sign (+) beside a section title to expand the section. Note : The customer address only displays when viewed by the selling or servicing dealer. Click the Minus Sign ( - ) beside a section title to collapse the section. If there are active links in the top National Service History section, click the links to jump to the corresponding NSH section on the page. Click the Exit button to close the National Service History details and return to the list of NSH search results. If a vehicle does not have any warranty coverage, DBS displays a message stating "No Nissan Warranty exists for this vehicle. Call the Warranty Call Center" When there is an active campaign, TSB, warranty contract, or service contract, an active link is part of the top National Service History section. Each link appears in color, indicates the number of items, and provides a shortcut to the corresponding NSH section. From the corresponding NSH section, you can open bulletins as applicable.
National Service History National Service History (NSH) National Service History National Service History Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing national service history information for a vehicle.
View Overview Information Host Reports Page Overview View a Host Report Workflow Host Reports: What You Need to Know Perform Tasks Add a Host Report to the Favorites List Filter and Search for a Host Report Perform Common DBS Tasks Print a Host Report Print Overnight Reports Remove a Host Report from the Favorites List View a Host Report Add a Host Report to the Favorites List Filter and Search for a Host Report Perform Common DBS Tasks Print a Host Report Print Overnight Reports Remove a Host Report from the Favorites List View a Host Report
Host Reports Processes Host Reports Host Reports Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing, printing, filtering, searching, and adding or removing a Host report from the Favorites list.
How to Submit a Financial Statement Quick Reference Guide The How to Submit a Financial Statement Quick Reference Guide provides instructions for office users on how to submit financial statements and review financial statement submission status. Click here to access the How to Submit a Financial Statement Quick Reference Guide.
How to Submit a Financial Statement Quick Reference Guide The How to Submit a Financial Statement Quick Reference Guide provides instructions for office users on how to submit financial statements and review financial statement submission status. Click here to access the How to Submit a Financial Statement Quick Reference Guide.
To filter the warranty claims list: Select the desired radio button to list "All" warranty claims or those with a particular status only. Note : The default status is "Not Submitted." From the Date Range drop-down list, select the warranty status date for the claims you want to display. Note : The period you select will be the default period for which claims are displayed, until you change your selection. If you selected the "Custom" option in the previous step, a second set of Date Range fields appear. In the Date Range fields, enter the date range or use the calendar to select the date range for which you want to view the warranty claims. If your filter criteria is complete, click the Search icon. To further narrow your search, from the Filter By drop-down list, select a second filter option and select or type filter criteria. Click the Search icon to apply all filter criteria. To reset the filter criteria to the default options and clear the search criteria, click the Clear icon. To sort the warranty claims data by a specific field, click the column header. If you want to view the warranty claims for a date range, select the "Custom" option.
Filter Warranty Claims List To filter the warranty claims list: Select the desired radio button to list "All" warranty claims or those with a particular status only. Note : The default status is "Not Submitted." From the Date Range drop-down list, select the warranty status date for which to display the claims. Note : The period you select will be the default period for which claims are displayed, until you change your selection. If you selected the "Custom" option in the step above, a second set of Date Range fields appear. In the Date Range fields, enter the date range or use the calendar to select the date range for which you want to view the warranty claims. If your filter criteria is complete, click the Search icon. To further narrow your search, from the Filter By drop-down list, select a filter option. As applicable, select or type secondary filter options. Click the Search icon to apply the filter criteria entered, or click the Clear icon to reset the filter criteria to the default options and clear the search criteria. To sort the warranty claims by a specific field, click the column header. View the claims information that meets the selected criteria.
Manage Warranty Claims Processes Manage Warranty Claims Manage Warranty Claims Manage Warranty Claims Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing warranty claims. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create or Edit Warranty Claims Workflow or View Warranty Claims Workflow. Edit or Create Warranty Claims Workflow View Warranty Claims Workflow
View Overview Information RO Work in Process Page Overview Perform Tasks Filter the RO Work in Process Page Hold Vehicle or Ignore Request Perform Common DBS Tasks View NSH View Repair Order Information View Technical Service Bulletin (TSB)
Glossary of Terms A - B - C - D - E - F - G - H - I - J - K - L - M - N - O - P - Q - R - S - T - U - V - W - X - Y - Z
View Overview Information Announcements Page Overview Create or Edit an Announcement Workflow Perform Tasks Access the Create Announcement Page Access the Edit Announcement Page Change the Status of an Announcement Copy an Announcement Delete an Announcement Filter the Announcements Summary Perform Common DBS Tasks View Announcements Summary View or Print Announcement Detail Access the Create Announcement Page Access the Edit Announcement Page Change the Status of an Announcement Copy an Announcement Delete an Announcement Filter the Announcements Summary Perform Common DBS Tasks View Announcements Summary View or Print Announcement Detail
Announcements Create Edit Modify Processes Create or Edit an Announcement Workflow Note : This workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating, modifying, and approving an announcement. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create or Edit an Announcement Workflow. Create or Edit an Alert Workflow Create or Edit a Calendar Event Workflow Create or Edit a Notification Workflow
To suspend a standard operation code: Select a standard operation code. Note : You cannot suspend a standard operation code in "New" status. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Suspend option. Click the Suspend button to confirm, or click the No button to close the window without confirming. Note : The suspended standard operation code displays in red on the Standard Operation Code Summary to indicate the code is no longer active. The Suspend option in the Action menu changes to Restart. Note : The system stops processing new repair orders (ROs) for the suspended code.
Suspend a Standard Operation Code To suspend a standard operation code: Select a code. Note : You cannot suspend a standard operation code in "New" status. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Suspend option. Click the Suspend button to confirm, or click the Cancel button to close the window without suspending the code. Note : The suspended standard operation code displays in red on the Standard Operation Code Summary to indicate the code is no longer active. The Suspend option in the Action menu changes to Restart. Note : The system stops processing new repair orders (ROs) for the suspended code.
ReRun Standard Operation Code Translation Manage Standard Operation Codes Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing standard operation codes. Related Workflows ( Note to developer : List the related workflows and link to them.) The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Standard Operation Codes Workflow. Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes Workflow Manage Dealer Operation Codes Workflow Manage Standard Operation Categories Workflow
MRW: Think is is obsolete now -- since this Since User page was replaced. To look up a dealer from the User Summary page: At the end of the Dealer Code field, click the Lookup icon. Note : The Dealer Lookup page appears. In the fields provided, type full or partial information, then press the Enter key. Note : You must include an asterisk (*) when typing partial information. Note : The application displays a list of matching dealers. Note : To clear your entries, click the Clear icon. Select the radio button for the desired dealer. Click the Select button. Note : To cancel the lookup, click the Cancel button and close the dialog. Note : The application displays the dealer number in the field.
Look Up a Dealer from the User Summary Page To look up a dealer from the User Summary page:
View Overview Information Service Dashboard Page Overview View the Service Dashboard Workflow Perform Tasks Filter the Service Dashboard Hold Vehicle or Ignore Request Perform Common DBS Tasks View NSH from the Service Dashboard View Repair Order Information View Study Alert Detail View Technical Service Bulletin (TSB) View the Service Dashboard Filter the Service Dashboard Hold Vehicle or Ignore Request Perform Common DBS Tasks View NSH from the Service Dashboard View Repair Order Information View Study Alert Detail View Technical Service Bulletin (TSB) View the Service Dashboard
Dashboard Early Detection System (EDS) EDS: Service Dashboard EDS: Service Dashboard Service Dashboard Study Technical Service Bulletin (TSB) View the Service Dashboard Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing the Service Dashboard. You may view study alerts generated regarding vehicles that meet the criteria of informational or hold studies or technical service bulletins. You may also view open repair orders or National Service History.
View Overview Information Edit Parts Order Page Overview Modify Parts Order Workflow Perform Tasks Add a Part to an Order Create or Edit a Parts Order Delete a Part from an Order Delete a Parts Order Look Up a Part Modify a Detail Line on an Order Perform Common DBS Tasks Submit a Parts Order View the Parts List on an Order Add a Part to an Order Create or Edit a Parts Order Delete a Part from an Order Delete a Parts Order Look Up a Part Modify a Detail Line on an Order Perform Common DBS Tasks Submit a Parts Order View the Parts List on an Order
Edit Edit Order Edit Order Edit SVC Order Edit Order Edit Order Edit SVC Order Edit Order Edit Order Edit Order Edit SVC Order Edit Order Edit Order Edit Parts Order Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for modifying an existing new or open parts order. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Edit Parts Order Workflow. Create Parts Order Workflow Manage Parts Order Workflow Inquire on the Availability of Parts at the Parts Distribution Centers Workflow View Parts Order Workflow
To add a new claim line to a repair order (RO) on the Quick Entry Warranty Claim page: In the Repair Order field, type the RO number for which you want to add a new claim line. In the Line Number field, type the appropriate RO line number. Click the Search icon. At the bottom of the page, click the New Claim Line button. You can add a new claim line to an RO regardless of the status of a claim.
Add New Claim Line from Quick Entry Warranty Claim Page To add a new claim line to a repair order: In the Repair Order field, type the RO number for which you want to add a new claim line. In the Line Number field, type the appropriate RO line number. Click the Search icon. At the bottom of the page, click the New Claim Line button. You can add a new claim line to an RO regardless of the status of a claim.
Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Edit Warranty Claims Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Warranty Claims Edit or Create Warranty Claims Workflow *** Nissan Canada Inc. (NCI) recommends dealers create Warranty Claims in an NCI DBS certified dealer management system and then log into NCI DBS to review, validate and submit the claim to NCI. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating and editing claims. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Warranty Claims Workflow or View Warranty Claims Workflow. Manage Warranty Claims Workflow View Warranty Claims Workflow
View Overview Information View SVC Order Page Overview View Service Campaign Order Workflow Perform Tasks Approve an SVC Order Modify SVC Order Quantity Perform Common DBS Tasks Reject an SVC Order
View SVC Order View SVC Order View SVC Order View Service Campaign Order Workflow Note : This workflow applies to NNA internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing, approving, or rejecting a Service Campaign (SVC) order. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the View Service Campaign Order Workflow. Manage Service Campaign Order Workflow Manage Campaign Parts Workflow
To view user permissions: Show the section, of collapsed. Note : To show a section, click the + icon in the section header. Use the function tree to expand or collapse the nodes, as desired. Note : To expand all items in the section, click the expand all link in the section header Note : The active permissions contain a check. To return to the User Summary page, click the Cancel button.
View User Permissions To view user permissions: Show the section, if collapsed. Note : To show a section, click the + icon in the section header. Use the function tree to expand or collapse the nodes, as desired. Note : To expand all items in the section, click the expand all link in the section header. Note : The active permissions contain a check. To return to the User Summary page, click the Cancel button.
User Processes User Permissions Users View View User Permissions Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing user permissions. Related Workflows The following workflow may have one or more tasks in common with the View User Permissions Workflow. User Summary Workflow
To filter the Request For Credit (RFC) Status summary: Select a filter option. If a text-entry field appears, type a filter value. - OR - If a drop-down list appears, select an option from the list. - OR - If a calendar tool appears, click in the field, and then use the calendar to select the desired date. Note : Depending on your selection, additional filter options may display to narrow the results further. Note : Depending on your selection, the system may automatically filter the list and refresh the display. Click the Search button, as needed. View the RFC claims that meet the selected criteria. Note : To reset the filter criteria to the default options, click the Clear icon.
Filter Request for Credit (RFC) Status Summary To filter the Request For Credit (RFC) Status summary: From the Filter By drop-down list, select a filter option. If a text-entry field appears, type a filter value. - OR - If a drop-down list appears, select an option from the list. -OR - If a calendar tool appears, click in the field, and then use the calendar to select the desired date. Note : Depending on your selection, additional filter options may display to narrow the results further. Note : Depending on your selection, the system may automatically filter the list and refresh the display. Click the Search button, as needed. View the RFC claims that meet the selected criteria. Note : To reset the filter criteria to the default options, click the Clear icon.
Applications Request for Credit RFC Request for Credit Status Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing Request for Credit (RFC) status.
To add multiple parts to a return: Click the Add Multi button. In the Part Number field, type a part number. If necessary, in the Return Quantity field, update the quantity of the part entered which will be returned. Note : By default, the return quantity is one part (or one unit of parts, if applicable). Select the Pack checkbox for each part which has already been packed for return. Click the Add All button. Note : DBS adds the parts to the parts return and displays error or warning messages as necessary.
Add Multiple Parts to a Return To add multiple parts to a parts return: Click the Add Multi button. In the Part Number field, type a part number. If necessary, in the Return Quantity field, update the quantity of the part entered which will be returned. Note : By default, the return quantity is one part (or one unit of parts, if applicable). Select the Pack checkbox for each part which has already been packed for return. Click the Add All button. Note : DBS adds the parts to the parts return and displays error or warning messages as necessary.
Create Return Create Return Create Return Create Parts Return Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating a parts return. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create Parts Return Workflow. Manage Parts Return Workflow Modify Parts Return Workflow
Edit Return Edit Return Edit Return Edit Parts Return Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for modifying a parts return. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Edit Parts Return Workflow. Create Parts Return Workflow Manage Parts Return Workflow
Edit or Create Warranty Claims Workflow *** Nissan Canada Inc. (NCI) recommends dealers create Warranty Claims in an NCI DBS certified dealer management system and then log into NCI DBS to review, validate and submit the claim to NCI. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating and editing claims. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Warranty Claims Workflow or View Warranty Claims Workflow. Manage Warranty Claims Workflow View Warranty Claims Workflow
Calendar Events Page Overview Purpose Use the Calendar Events page to maintain events. From the Calendar Events page you can copy, delete, or change the status of an event, or open the Create Event page to create or modify an event. Description DBS The content area of the Calendar Events page displays the following sections: Filter By - Allows you to filter the information to display only the records that match your criteria Summary - Displays general information for all records on the page Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Calendar Events page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. About the Calendar Events Summary Page Access the Create Calendar Event Page Access the Edit Calendar Event Page Change the Status of an Event Copy an Event Delete an Event Filter the Calendar Events Summary View or Print Calendar Event Detail About the Calendar Events Summary Page Access the Create Calendar Event Page Access the Edit Calendar Event Page Change the Status of an Event Copy an Event Delete an Event Filter the Calendar Events Summary View or Print Calendar Event Detail Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Calendar Events page. Create or Edit a Calendar Event Workflow Page Preview
To view a Host report: In the Favorites list or in the Reports list, select the report you wish to view. Note : The row will turn a turquoise color. In the Generation section, move your cursor over the Action icon for the report you want to view. From the Action menu, select the View option. Note : If desired, click the Print button at the bottom of the page to print the report, or click the Close button to return to the Host Reports page. Add reports to the Favorites list so you can access them quickly.
View a Host Report To view a Host report: In the Favorites list or in the Reports list, select the report you wish to view. Note : The row will turn a turquoise color. In the Generation section, move your cursor over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the View option. To print the report, click the Print button at the bottom of the page to print the report, or click the Close button to return to the Host Reports page. Add reports to the Favorites list so you can access them quickly.
Host Reports Processes Host Reports Host Reports Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing, printing, filtering, searching, and adding or removing a Host report from the Favorites list.
To view a Host report: In the Favorites list or in the Reports list, select the report you wish to view. Note : The row will turn a turquoise color. In the Generation section, move your cursor over the Action icon for the report you want to view. From the Action menu, select the View option. Note : If desired, click the Print button at the bottom of the page to print the report, or click the Close button to return to the Host Reports page. Add reports to the Favorites list so you can access them quickly.
View a Host Report To view a Host report: In the Favorites list or in the Reports list, select the report you wish to view. Note : The row will turn a turquoise color. In the Generation section, move your cursor over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the View option. To print the report, click the Print button at the bottom of the page to print the report, or click the Close button to return to the Host Reports page. Add reports to the Favorites list so you can access them quickly.
Host Reports Processes Host Reports Host Reports Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing, printing, filtering, searching, and adding or removing a Host report from the Favorites list.
To view a Host report: In the Favorites list or in the Reports list, select the report you wish to view. Note : The row will turn a turquoise color. In the Generation section, move your cursor over the Action icon for the report you want to view. From the Action menu, select the View option. Note : If desired, click the Print button at the bottom of the page to print the report, or click the Close button to return to the Host Reports page. Add reports to the Favorites list so you can access them quickly.
View a Host Report To view a Host report: In the Favorites list or in the Reports list, select the report you wish to view. Note : The row will turn a turquoise color. In the Generation section, move your cursor over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the View option. To print the report, click the Print button at the bottom of the page to print the report, or click the Close button to return to the Host Reports page. Add reports to the Favorites list so you can access them quickly.
Host Reports Processes Host Reports Host Reports Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing, printing, filtering, searching, and adding or removing a Host report from the Favorites list.
To view a Host report: In the Favorites list or in the Reports list, select the report you wish to view. Note : The row will turn a turquoise color. In the Generation section, move your cursor over the Action icon for the report you want to view. From the Action menu, select the View option. Note : If desired, click the Print button at the bottom of the page to print the report, or click the Close button to return to the Host Reports page. Add reports to the Favorites list so you can access them quickly.
View a Host Report To view a Host report: In the Favorites list or in the Reports list, select the report you wish to view. Note : The row will turn a turquoise color. In the Generation section, move your cursor over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the View option. To print the report, click the Print button at the bottom of the page to print the report, or click the Close button to return to the Host Reports page. Add reports to the Favorites list so you can access them quickly.
Host Reports Processes Host Reports Host Reports Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing, printing, filtering, searching, and adding or removing a Host report from the Favorites list.
To view a Host report: In the Favorites list or in the Reports list, select the report you wish to view. Note : The row will turn a turquoise color. In the Generation section, move your cursor over the Action icon for the report you want to view. From the Action menu, select the View option. Note : If desired, click the Print button at the bottom of the page to print the report, or click the Close button to return to the Host Reports page. Add reports to the Favorites list so you can access them quickly.
View a Host Report To view a Host report: In the Favorites list or in the Reports list, select the report you wish to view. Note : The row will turn a turquoise color. In the Generation section, move your cursor over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the View option. To print the report, click the Print button at the bottom of the page to print the report, or click the Close button to return to the Host Reports page. Add reports to the Favorites list so you can access them quickly.
Host Reports Processes Host Reports Host Reports Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing, printing, filtering, searching, and adding or removing a Host report from the Favorites list.
Add a New DBS User In the workflow diagram above, the tasks in red represent tasks performed in NNAnet. No link is provided for these tasks. Click a DBS task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for adding a new user in DBS and granting that user DBS permissions.
To create or modify a study: Complete or edit the Basic Information section for the study. Complete or edit the Study Type section. Complete or edit the Dealer Data section. As applicable, complete or edit additional sections for the study. Click the Save button. Click the Close button. Use the links in the Early Detection System pane on the left side of the page to jump to specific sections. You can save the study after completing any section.
Create or Modify a Study To create or modify a study: Complete or edit the Basic Information section for the study. Complete or edit the Study Type section. Complete or edit the Dealer Data section. As applicable, complete or edit additional sections for the study. Click the Save button. Click the Close button. Use the links in the Early Detection System pane on the left side of the page to jump to specific sections. You can save the study after completing any section.
Early Detection System (EDS) EDS: Study Dashboard Processes EDS: Study Dashboard Study Study Dashboard Technical Service Bulletin (TSB) Create or Modify a Study Workflow Note : The Create or Modify a Study workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for defining or modifying a study that integrates appointment and repair order data collected by the Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Define or Modify a Study Workflow. Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow View One Study Result Workflow
To create or edit a standard operation category: In the Standard Op Category field, type or edit the name of the category. In the Standard Op Category Description field, type or edit the description of the category. In the Key Words field, type a key word. Click the Add icon, or click the Clear Fields icon to clear the field without adding the key word to the category. Edit or delete any existing key words, as needed. When all changes are made to the category, click the Save button.
Create or Edit a Standard Operation Category To create or edit a standard operation category: In the Standard Op Category field, type or edit the name of the category. In the Standard Op Category Description field, type or edit the description of the category. In the Key Words field, type a key word. Click the Add icon, or click the Clear Fields icon to clear the field without adding the key word to the category. Note : Each key word must be unique. If a key word already exists, a red warning icon appears to indicate the key word is a duplicate. Note : Add additional key words, as needed. Edit or delete any existing key words, as needed. Note: Click here for more information about editing keywords. Note: Click here for more information about deleting keywords. When all changes are made to the category, click the Save button. Note : The category appears on the Standard Operation Category page.
ReRun Standard Operation Category Translation Manage Standard Operation Categories Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing and creating standard operation categories. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Standard Operation Categories Workflow. Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes Workflow Manage Dealer Operation Codes Workflow Manage Standard Operation Codes Workflow
To access OMS to view OMS vehicle detail: Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon for the selected vehicle. From the Action menu, select the OMS Vehicle Detail option. Note : The external OMS application opens. When you are finished viewing the OMS vehicle detail, click the Close button.
Access OMS to View OMS Vehicle Detail To access OMS to view OMS vehicle detail: Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon for the selected vehicle. From the Action menu, select the OMS Vehicle Detail option. Note : The external OMS application opens. When you are finished viewing the OMS vehicle detail, click the Close button.
Vehicle Inventory Management Inventory Managment Processes Inventory Managment Vehicle Inventory Management Vehicle Inventory Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing vehicle inventory data at the dealerships. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Vehicle Inventory workflow. Report the Sale of a Vehicle (RDR) Workflow Search Vehicle Inventory Workflow Search Vehicle Inventory Workflow
When a dealer uses both PartsEye and DBS to create and submit parts orders or parts returns or a dealer uses DBS to create a parts return, there may be occasions when more than one parts return is open at the same time. Since dealers may only submit one parts return per parts period, DBS gives dealers the opportunity to merge duplicate parts returns. Returns created in PartsEye will be passed to DBS for evaluation. Incoming parts returns are marked with "New" status, while those created in DBS carry a status of "Open". When a parts return has the same return schedule as an existing parts order, the Merge Parts Return action menu item is enabled. To merge duplicate parts returns: Select the detail line for the parts return you want to merge. Move your cursor over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Merge Parts Return menu option. From the Merge To drop-down list, select the parts return to be merged with the parts return listed in the Merge From field. Click the OK button. Note : Information about the parts number of duplicate lines displays at the bottom of the window. Click the OK button to confirm the merge.
Merge Duplicate Parts Returns When a dealer uses both PartsEye and DBS to create and submit parts orders or parts returns or a dealer uses DBS to create a parts return, there may be occasions when more than one parts return is open at the same time. Since dealers may only submit one parts return per parts period, DBS gives dealers the opportunity to merge duplicate parts returns. Returns created in PartsEye will be passed to DBS for evaluation. Incoming parts returns are marked with "New" status, while those created in DBS carry a status of "Open". When a parts return has the same return schedule as an existing parts order, the Merge Parts Return action menu item is enabled. To merge duplicate parts returns: Select the detail line for the parts return you want to merge. Move your cursor over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Merge Parts Return menu option. From the Merge To drop-down list, select the parts return to be merged with the parts return listed in the Merge From field. Click the OK button. Note : Information about the parts number of duplicate lines displays at the bottom of the window. Click the OK button to confirm the merge.
View Service Campaign Order Workflow Note : This workflow applies to NNA internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing, approving, or rejecting a Service Campaign (SVC) order. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the View Service Campaign Order Workflow. Manage Service Campaign Order Workflow Manage Campaign Parts Workflow
To print RDR detail: Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon for the selected vehicle. Note : RDR Detail is only available for vehicles with a status of "Retailed". From the Action menu, select the Print RDR Detail option. Note : The RDR Detail Report opens in a separate window. View the report. Click the Print button to print the report. Proceed as you normally would to print a file.
Print RDR Detail To print RDR detail: Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon for the selected vehicle. Note : RDR Detail is only available for vehicles with a status of "Retailed". Note : Inventory Updates occur every 30 minutes. Vehicles with a status of "Retailed" will then be moved to the RDR History page. From the Action menu, select the Print RDR Detail option. Note : The RDR Detail Report opens in a separate window. View the report. Click the Print button to print the report. Proceed as you normally would to print a file.
Vehicle Inventory Management Inventory Managment Processes Inventory Managment Vehicle Inventory Management Vehicle Inventory Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing vehicle inventory data at the dealerships. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Vehicle Inventory workflow. Report the Sale of a Vehicle (RDR) Workflow Search Vehicle Inventory Workflow Search Vehicle Inventory Workflow
Processes RDR RDR RDR a Vehicle Workflow Note : This workflow is for NNA users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for retail delivery reporting (RDR) or editing the sale of a vehicle. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Report or Edit the Sale of a Vehicle workflow. Vehicle Inventory Workflow Inventory Search Workflow View RDR History Workflow
To print RDR detail: Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon for the selected vehicle. Note : RDR Detail is only available for vehicles with a status of "Retailed". From the Action menu, select the Print RDR Detail option. Note : The RDR Detail Report opens in a separate window. View the report. Click the Print button to print the report. Proceed as you normally would to print a file.
Print RDR Detail To print RDR detail: Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon for the selected vehicle. Note : RDR Detail is only available for vehicles with a status of "Retailed". Note : Inventory Updates occur every 30 minutes. Vehicles with a status of "Retailed" will then be moved to the RDR History page. From the Action menu, select the Print RDR Detail option. Note : The RDR Detail Report opens in a separate window. View the report. Click the Print button to print the report. Proceed as you normally would to print a file.
Vehicle Inventory Management Inventory Managment Processes Inventory Managment Vehicle Inventory Management Vehicle Inventory Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing vehicle inventory data at the dealerships. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Vehicle Inventory workflow. Report the Sale of a Vehicle (RDR) Workflow Search Vehicle Inventory Workflow Search Vehicle Inventory Workflow
Processes RDR RDR RDR a Vehicle Workflow Note : This workflow is for NNA users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for retail delivery reporting (RDR) or editing the sale of a vehicle. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Report or Edit the Sale of a Vehicle workflow. Vehicle Inventory Workflow Inventory Search Workflow View RDR History Workflow
View Overview Information Monitor Transaction Page Overview Perform Tasks Perform Common DBS Tasks Search for and Monitor Transactions on the Monitor Transaction Page Perform Common DBS Tasks Search for and Monitor Transactions on the Monitor Transaction Page
To view detail from the View RFC Detail page: Review the list of parts for the selected RFC claim. To sort the displayed information, click the arrow beside a column title. To view a description of the reason code or reject code, move your mouse pointer over the code. To return to the Request For Credit (RFC) Status page, click the Close button.
View Detail from View RFC Detail Page To view detail from the View RFC Detail page: Review the list of parts for the selected RFC claim. To sort the displayed information, click the arrow beside a column title. To view a description of the reason code or reject code, move your mouse pointer over the code. To return to the Request For Credit (RFC) Status page, click the Close button. To view detail from the View RFC Detail page: Review the list of parts for the selected RFC claim. To return to the Request For Credit (RFC) Status page, click the Close button.
RDR Vehicle Page Overview Purpose Use the RDR Vehicle page to create, edit, submit, or delete the sale of a vehicle. Description The content area of the RDR Vehicle page displays the following sections: Summary - Displays the status of the RDR Vehicle - Displays information about the vehicle Customer - Displays information about the customer You can perform the following tasks on the RDR page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks About RDR: What You Need to Know Access OMS to View Vehicle Detail Delete RDR Report or Edit the Sale of a Vehicle Complete the Vehicle Section of an RDR Complete the Buyer Section of an RDR Complete the Co-Buyer Section of an RDR Complete the Driver Section of an RDR Complete the Legal Owner Section of an RDR Complete the Finance Section of an RDR (For lease sales only) Submit an RDR Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Retail Delivery Reporting page. Report the Sale of a Vehicle Workflow
To edit a dealer operation code: Click the Edit icon for the row you want to change. From the Dealer Op Code Type drop-down list, select the desired option. From the Standard Op Code/Description drop-down list, select the desired option. Click the Save icon. Note : DBS displays a status message that the code was edited. Note : DBS places a "Y" in the Re-Run Flag column indicating you can re-run the translation process to update DBS with the information you changed.
Edit a Dealer Operation Code To edit a dealer operation code: Click the Edit icon for the row you want to change. Note : The row changes to a light yellow color and fields you can edit are enabled. From the Dealer Op Code Type drop-down list, select the desired option. From the Standard Op Code/Description drop-down list, select the desired option. Click the Save icon. Note : DBS displays a status message in the upper right corner that the code was edited. Note : DBS places a "Y" in the Re-Run Flag column indicating you can re-run the translation process to update DBS with the information you changed.
Dealer Operation Code Dealer Operation Codes ReRun Dealer Operation Codes Translation Manage Dealer Operation Codes Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing dealer operation codes. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Dealer Operation Codes Workflow. Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes Workflow Manage Standard Operation Categories Workflow Manage Standard Operation Codes Workflow
To access the Inventory Search page: Select a vehicle. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Vehicle Search option. Note : The Inventory Search page appears. You can also open the Inventory Search page from the Sales menu.
Access the Inventory Search Page from Vehicle Inventory To access the Inventory Search page: Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon for the selected vehicle. From the Action menu, select the Vehicle Search option. Note : The Inventory Search page appears.
Vehicle Inventory Management Inventory Managment Processes Inventory Managment Vehicle Inventory Management Vehicle Inventory Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing vehicle inventory data at the dealerships. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Vehicle Inventory workflow. Report the Sale of a Vehicle (RDR) Workflow Search Vehicle Inventory Workflow Search Vehicle Inventory Workflow
Inventory Search Inventory Search Processes Search Inventory Search Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for searching and viewing inventory for a particular vehicle model with specified features and options. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Inventory Search workflow. Vehicle Inventory Workflow
To look up a part from the Create or Edit Parts Return page: At the end of the Part Number field, click the Lookup icon. In the fields provided, type full or partial information. Click the Search icon. Select the desired part. If a "Y" appears in the Supersession Flag field, the part is superseded and you must select a new part. Note : The new part number appears in the New Part field above the Supersession Flag field. If the part is superseded, copy the value in the New Part field, paste it into the Part Number field, and repeat steps 3-6. To select the part, click the Select button. You must include an asterisk (*) when typing partial information.
Look Up a Part from the Create or Edit Parts Return Page To look up a part from the Create or Edit Parts Return page:
Create Return Create Return Create Return Create Parts Return Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating a parts return. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create Parts Return Workflow. Manage Parts Return Workflow Modify Parts Return Workflow
Edit Return Edit Return Edit Return Edit Parts Return Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for modifying a parts return. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Edit Parts Return Workflow. Create Parts Return Workflow Manage Parts Return Workflow
RDR History: What You Need to Know The RDR History screen defaults to display RDRs in descending order by the retail add date (the date on which the RDR was submitted). Therefore, the vehicles with the most recent RDRs appear at the top of the list. The status bar displays a count of your RDR activity for the current month. View historical RDR activity by using the Filter By options. Scroll the RDR History screen to the right to view who submitted the RDR in the RDR Submitted by field The RDR History page includes all RDR records for a period of 13 months. These 13 months includes the current sales month plus the 12 prior months. The RDR History page does not include historical RDRs submitted prior to the implementation of DBS . General Guidelines: When a vehicle is reported as sold (retailed), unwound for any reason, and then reported as sold again, the RDR history shows multiple lines for that vehicle. Dealer fleet sales are included in RDR History since they are sold by the dealer from dealer inventory. National fleet sales are excluded since they are not in the dealer's inventory, reported by the dealer, or credited to the dealer. Unwind RDR Guidelines: All RDR unwinds are processed through an overnight batch. Unwound vehicles are added back into your inventory on the next day. The following unwind results can be expected the next day: If the host accepted the unwind, the RDR History status shows as "Unwound", the vehicle is returned to your vehicle inventory and the vehicle's location status shows as "Dealer Inventory". If the host rejected the unwind, the RDR History status shows as "Unwind Rejected", the Unwind Reason / Date field shows the rejection message, and there is no change to vehicle inventory. Vehicles may only be unwound once within a 24 hour period. The Unwind RDR action will not be available if an unwind request has been submitted from DBS within the last 24 hours. A dealer user can unwind an RDR up to 90 days after the sale date. After 90 days, only the Region or National can unwind an RDR. You cannot unwind an RDR'ed vehicle on month end close. You cannot RDR and unwind on the same day. If you unwind an RDR after 10 PM, the unwind request will not be processed by the NNA mainframe. Unwinds that are not processed will receive an "Unwind Failed" status. You may re-submit a vehicle in "Unwind Failed" status immediately. Scroll the RDR History screen to the right to view the Unwind Reason and Date field.
Edit Parts Return Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for modifying a parts return. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Edit Parts Return Workflow. Create Parts Return Workflow Manage Parts Return Workflow
Report Writer Copy or Transfer Report Page Overview Purpose Use the Copy Report, Copy All Report(s), Transfer Report, and Transfer All Report(s) pages to select users to receive report definitions when you copy or transfer a report definition in Report Writer. Description The content area of the Copy Report, Copy All Report(s), Transfer Report, and Transfer All Report(s) pages displays the following sections: List of Target Users - Displays the names of users Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Copy Report, Copy All Report(s), Transfer Report, and Transfer All Report(s) pages. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Select a User to Receive Report Definitions Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the List of Users page. Copy All, Transfer All, or Delete All Report Definitions Workflow Copy, Transfer, Delete, or Make Report Definition Public Workflow Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Workflow Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow Page Preview
Report Writer Copy or Transfer Report Page Overview Purpose Use the Copy Report, Copy All Report(s), Transfer Report, and Transfer All Report(s) pages to select users to receive report definitions when you copy or transfer a report definition in Report Writer. Description The content area of the Copy Report, Copy All Report(s), Transfer Report, and Transfer All Report(s) pages displays the following sections: List of Target Users - Displays the names of users Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Copy Report, Copy All Report(s), Transfer Report, and Transfer All Report(s) pages. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Select a User to Receive Report Definitions Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the List of Users page. Copy All, Transfer All, or Delete All Report Definitions Workflow Copy, Transfer, Delete, or Make Report Definition Public Workflow Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Workflow Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow Page Preview
Report Writer Copy or Transfer Report Page Overview Purpose Use the Copy Report, Copy All Report(s), Transfer Report, and Transfer All Report(s) pages to select users to receive report definitions when you copy or transfer a report definition in Report Writer. Description The content area of the Copy Report, Copy All Report(s), Transfer Report, and Transfer All Report(s) pages displays the following sections: List of Target Users - Displays the names of users Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Copy Report, Copy All Report(s), Transfer Report, and Transfer All Report(s) pages. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Select a User to Receive Report Definitions Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the List of Users page. Copy All, Transfer All, or Delete All Report Definitions Workflow Copy, Transfer, Delete, or Make Report Definition Public Workflow Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Workflow Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow Page Preview
Report Writer Copy or Transfer Report Page Overview Purpose Use the Copy Report, Copy All Report(s), Transfer Report, and Transfer All Report(s) pages to select users to receive report definitions when you copy or transfer a report definition in Report Writer. Description The content area of the Copy Report, Copy All Report(s), Transfer Report, and Transfer All Report(s) pages displays the following sections: List of Target Users - Displays the names of users Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Copy Report, Copy All Report(s), Transfer Report, and Transfer All Report(s) pages. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Select a User to Receive Report Definitions Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the List of Users page. Copy All, Transfer All, or Delete All Report Definitions Workflow Copy, Transfer, Delete, or Make Report Definition Public Workflow Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Workflow Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow Page Preview
Report Writer Copy or Transfer Report Page Overview Purpose Use the Copy Report, Copy All Report(s), Transfer Report, and Transfer All Report(s) pages to select users to receive report definitions when you copy or transfer a report definition in Report Writer. Description The content area of the Copy Report, Copy All Report(s), Transfer Report, and Transfer All Report(s) pages displays the following sections: List of Target Users - Displays the names of users Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Copy Report, Copy All Report(s), Transfer Report, and Transfer All Report(s) pages. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Select a User to Receive Report Definitions Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the List of Users page. Copy All, Transfer All, or Delete All Report Definitions Workflow Copy, Transfer, Delete, or Make Report Definition Public Workflow Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Workflow Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow Page Preview
Authorized help desk and administrative users will have the ability to emulate a user or dealership to assist in resolving issues in DBS . Emulation provides a read-only view of a dealer's or user's permissions and data. To emulate a user or dealership: Click the Start Emulation button on the Home page. Select one of the three options to select a dealership or user to emulate. Note : See the Step by Step tab in full help for additional details. Complete the steps necessary to select a user or dealership. Click the Emulate button. Note : The system displays a processing message while permissions and data are emulated. When processing is complete, the DBS header shows the dealership or user you are emulating and the Stop Emulation button is activated. Use the menu tabs and system pages to resolve the issue. When you have completed your emulation session, click the Stop Emulation button to reset the system to your own permissions and data. Emulating a specific dealership user will provide the best results for troubleshooting. If you emulate at the dealer level, you will see the dealer level permissions. If you emulate at the user level, you will see the user's specific permissions.
Emulate a Dealership or User Authorized help desk and administrative users will have the ability to emulate a user or dealership to assist in resolving issues in DBS . Emulation provides a read-only view of a dealer's or user's permissions and data. To emulate a user or dealership: Click the Start Emulation button on the Home page. Select the Emulate dealer by dealer user radio button. In the Please enter dealer number field, type the dealer number where the user you want to emulate is employed, or click the Search icon to search for the dealer. Note : Click here for instructions on how to search for a dealer. In the Please enter user id field, type the NNAnet ID of the user you want to emulate, or click the Search icon to search for a user. If you clicked the Search icon to search for a user, the Dealer User Lookup window displays. Select the name of the user you want to emulate. Click the Select button to close the Dealer User Lookup window. Click the Emulate button. Note : The system displays a processing message while permissions and data are emulated. When processing is complete, the DBS header shows the dealership or user you are emulating and the Stop Emulation button is activated. Use the menu tabs and system pages to resolve the issue. When you have completed your emulation session, click the Stop Emulation button to reset the system to your own permissions and data. Emulate a Dealership by Hierarchy To emulate a user or dealership: Click the Start Emulation button on the Home page. Select the Emulate dealer by business hierarchy radio button. From the Affiliate drop-down list, select the affiliate. Note : Only the affiliates you have been granted permissions for appear in the drop-down list. From the Region drop-down list, select the region for the dealership you want to emulate. From the Area drop-down list, select the area for the dealership you want to emulate. From the District drop-down list, select the district for the dealership you want to emulate. From the Dealer drop-down list, select the dealer you want to emulate. Click the Emulate button. Note : The system displays a processing message while permissions and data are emulated. When processing is complete, the DBS header shows the dealership or user you are emulating and the Stop Emulation button is activated. When you have completed your emulation session, click the Stop Emulation button to reset the system to your own permissions and data. Emulate a Dealership by Dealer Number To emulate a user or dealership: Click the Start Emulation button on the Home page. Select the Emulate dealer by dealer number radio button. In the Please enter dealer number field, type the dealer number you want to emulate, or click the Search icon to search for the dealer. Note : Click here for instructions on how to search for a dealer. Click the Emulate button. Note : The system displays a processing message while permissions and data are emulated. When processing is complete, the DBS header shows the dealership or user you are emulating and the Stop Emulation button is activated. When you have completed your emulation session, click the Stop Emulation button to reset the system to your own permissions and data. Unauthorized Activity Error Message During emulation, you can view data only, you cannot perform any user functions such as a vehicle RDR or creating a warranty claim. If you attempt to perform any unauthorized activity, DBS displays the following error message: At the end of the Please enter dealer number field or Dealer Code field, click the Lookup icon. Note : The Dealer Lookup page appears. In the Dealer field, type the full or partial dealer number, or in the Dealer Name field, type the full or partial dealer name. Note : You must include an asterisk (*) when typing partial information. Note : To clear your entries, click the Clear icon. Click the Search icon. Select the radio button for the desired dealer. Click the Select button. Note : To cancel the lookup, click the Cancel button and close the dialog. Note : The application displays the dealer number in the field. At the end of the Please enter dealer number field or Dealer Code field, click the Lookup icon. Note : The Dealer Lookup page appears. In the Dealer field, type the full or partial dealer number, or in the Dealer Name field, type the full or partial dealer name. Note : You must include an asterisk (*) when typing partial information. Note : To clear your entries, click the Clear icon. Click the Search icon. Select the radio button for the desired dealer. Click the Select button. Note : To cancel the lookup, click the Cancel button and close the dialog. Note : The application displays the dealer number in the field.
To display the warranty claims graph: Review the warranty claims graph. To minimize the warranty claims graph, click the Minus Sign ( - ) at the top-left of the graph. To expand the display, click the Plus Sign ( +) . The radio button under each bar in the graph identifies the category by claim status and displays the number of claims in that category. Click the desired radio button to filter the summary display to show only those claims with the selected status. To view additional details about a claim status, move your mouse pointer over the bar for that claim status. Note : The additional details include the number of claims, total dollar amount of claims, and average dollar amount per claim for the selected status type. Data for the Approved bar includes claims data for both Approved and Approved-Adjusted status. Data for the Suspended bar includes data for Suspended-Dealer, Suspended-Region, and Suspended-National status.
Display the Warranty Claims Graph To display the warranty claims graph: Review the warranty claims graph. To minimize the warranty claims graph, click the Minus Sign ( - ) at the top-left of the graph. To expand the display, click the Plus Sign ( +) . The radio button under each bar in the graph identifies the category by claim status and displays the number of claims in that category. Click the desired radio button to filter the summary display to show only those claims with the selected status. To view additional details about a claim status, move your mouse pointer over the bar for that claim status. Note : The additional details include the number of claims, total dollar amount of claims, and average dollar amount per claim for the selected status type. Data for the Approved bar includes claims data for both Approved and Approved-Adjusted status. Data for the Suspended bar includes data for Suspended-Dealer, Suspended-Region, and Suspended-National status.
Manage Warranty Claims Processes Manage Warranty Claims Manage Warranty Claims Manage Warranty Claims Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing warranty claims. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create or Edit Warranty Claims Workflow or View Warranty Claims Workflow. Edit or Create Warranty Claims Workflow View Warranty Claims Workflow
To edit a detail line on an order: Select the detail line you want to edit. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Edit option. To change the part number, type a valid part number or perform a part look up. Note : Click here for more information on how to look up a part. To change the order quantity, type a valid quantity. To override the back order header setting for this part, select the "Yes" option. To override the cross ship header setting this part, select the "Yes" option. Enter the customer name, as needed. To change the BIN location for this part, type the location. Select the detail line again. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Save option. Click the Save button. To modify a parts order, the order must be in "New" or "Open" status.
Edit a Detail Line on an Order To edit a detail line on an order: Select the detail line you want to edit. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Edit option. To change the part number, in the Part Number field, type a valid part number or perform a part lookup. Note : Click here for more information on how to look up a part. To change the order quantity, in the Order Quantity field, type a valid quantity. Note : Order quantity must be greater than zero. Note : If the order type is VOR or TOS, the order quantity cannot exceed 25. To override the back order header setting for this part, from the Back Order Flag drop-down list, select the "Yes" option. To override the cross ship header setting this part, from the Cross Ship Flag drop-down list, select the "Yes" option. In the Customer Name field, enter the customer's name, as needed. To change the bin location for this part, in the Bin field, type the location. Select the detail line again. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Save option. Note : The system displays the updated values in the respective field(s). Note : If you receive the " Order quantity must be a multiple of unit pack " message, type a value in the Order Quantity field that is a multiple of the unit pack. Click the Save button. Note : A "Parts order is saved successfully" message appears. To edit a detail line on an order: Select the detail line you want to edit. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Edit option. Note : The Part Number, Order Quantity, Backorder Flag, and Tax Indicator fields are now editable. To change the part number, in the Part Number field, type a valid part number or perform a part lookup. Note : Click here for more information on how to look up a part. To change the order quantity, in the Order Quantity field, type a valid quantity. Note : Order quantity must be greater than zero. To override the back order header setting for this part, from the Back Order Flag drop-down list, select the Yes option. To change the Tax Indicator for this part, in the Tax Indicator field, select an option. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Save option. Note : The system displays the updated values in the respective field(s). Note : If you receive the " Order quantity must be a multiple of unit pack " message, type a value in the Order Quantity field that is a multiple of the unit pack. Click the Save button. To modify a parts order, the order must be in "New" or "Open" status.
Create Create Order Create SVC Order Create Order Create Order Create SVC Order Create Order Create Order Create Order Create SVC Order Create Create Order Create Parts Order Workflow *** Nissan Canada Inc. (NCI) recommends dealers create parts orders in an NCI DBS certified dealer management system and then log into NCI DBS to review and submit the order to NCI. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating a parts order. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create Parts Order Workflow. Edit Parts Order Workflow Manage Parts Order Workflow Inquire on the Availability of Parts at the Parts Distribution Centers Workflow View Parts Order Workflow Edit Parts Order Workflow Manage Parts Order Workflow View Parts Order Workflow
Edit Edit Order Edit Order Edit SVC Order Edit Order Edit Order Edit SVC Order Edit Order Edit Order Edit Order Edit SVC Order Edit Order Edit Order Edit Parts Order Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for modifying an existing new or open parts order. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Edit Parts Order Workflow. Create Parts Order Workflow Manage Parts Order Workflow Inquire on the Availability of Parts at the Parts Distribution Centers Workflow View Parts Order Workflow
Host Reports Page Overview Purpose Use the Host Reports page to search for and review reports generated within the NNA Host environment. Description The content area of the Host Reports page displays the following sections: Favorites - Contains a list of reports you have identified as favorites for quick access Filters - Enables you to define the criteria to filter and search for reports Generation - Enables you to view and print host reports. The Favorites and Reports areas each have their own generation area. The Generation section displays a list of dates on which the Host generated the report and sent it to DBS . Reports - Contains a list of all reports that meet the search criteria. The reports which by display when you first access the Host Reports page vary based on the menu tab or summary page where you clicked the Host Reports link or button. Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Host Reports page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. About Host Reports: What You Need to Know Add a Host Report to the Favorites List Filter and Search for a Host Report Print a Host Report Print Overnight Host Reports Remove a Host Report from the Favorites List View a Host Report About Host Reports: What You Need to Know Add a Host Report to the Favorites List Filter and Search for a Host Report Print a Host Report Print Overnight Host Reports Remove a Host Report from the Favorites List View a Host Report Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Host Reports page. View Host Reports Workflow Page Preview
Host Reports Page Overview Purpose Use the Host Reports page to search for and review reports generated within the NNA Host environment. Description The content area of the Host Reports page displays the following sections: Favorites - Contains a list of reports you have identified as favorites for quick access Filters - Enables you to define the criteria to filter and search for reports Generation - Enables you to view and print host reports. The Favorites and Reports areas each have their own generation area. The Generation section displays a list of dates on which the Host generated the report and sent it to DBS . Reports - Contains a list of all reports that meet the search criteria. The reports which by display when you first access the Host Reports page vary based on the menu tab or summary page where you clicked the Host Reports link or button. Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Host Reports page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. About Host Reports: What You Need to Know Add a Host Report to the Favorites List Filter and Search for a Host Report Print a Host Report Print Overnight Host Reports Remove a Host Report from the Favorites List View a Host Report About Host Reports: What You Need to Know Add a Host Report to the Favorites List Filter and Search for a Host Report Print a Host Report Print Overnight Host Reports Remove a Host Report from the Favorites List View a Host Report Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Host Reports page. View Host Reports Workflow Page Preview
Host Reports Page Overview Purpose Use the Host Reports page to search for and review reports generated within the NNA Host environment. Description The content area of the Host Reports page displays the following sections: Favorites - Contains a list of reports you have identified as favorites for quick access Filters - Enables you to define the criteria to filter and search for reports Generation - Enables you to view and print host reports. The Favorites and Reports areas each have their own generation area. The Generation section displays a list of dates on which the Host generated the report and sent it to DBS . Reports - Contains a list of all reports that meet the search criteria. The reports which by display when you first access the Host Reports page vary based on the menu tab or summary page where you clicked the Host Reports link or button. Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Host Reports page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. About Host Reports: What You Need to Know Add a Host Report to the Favorites List Filter and Search for a Host Report Print a Host Report Print Overnight Host Reports Remove a Host Report from the Favorites List View a Host Report About Host Reports: What You Need to Know Add a Host Report to the Favorites List Filter and Search for a Host Report Print a Host Report Print Overnight Host Reports Remove a Host Report from the Favorites List View a Host Report Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Host Reports page. View Host Reports Workflow Page Preview
Host Reports Page Overview Purpose Use the Host Reports page to search for and review reports generated within the NNA Host environment. Description The content area of the Host Reports page displays the following sections: Favorites - Contains a list of reports you have identified as favorites for quick access Filters - Enables you to define the criteria to filter and search for reports Generation - Enables you to view and print host reports. The Favorites and Reports areas each have their own generation area. The Generation section displays a list of dates on which the Host generated the report and sent it to DBS . Reports - Contains a list of all reports that meet the search criteria. The reports which by display when you first access the Host Reports page vary based on the menu tab or summary page where you clicked the Host Reports link or button. Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Host Reports page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. About Host Reports: What You Need to Know Add a Host Report to the Favorites List Filter and Search for a Host Report Print a Host Report Print Overnight Host Reports Remove a Host Report from the Favorites List View a Host Report About Host Reports: What You Need to Know Add a Host Report to the Favorites List Filter and Search for a Host Report Print a Host Report Print Overnight Host Reports Remove a Host Report from the Favorites List View a Host Report Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Host Reports page. View Host Reports Workflow Page Preview
Host Reports Page Overview Purpose Use the Host Reports page to search for and review reports generated within the NNA Host environment. Description The content area of the Host Reports page displays the following sections: Favorites - Contains a list of reports you have identified as favorites for quick access Filters - Enables you to define the criteria to filter and search for reports Generation - Enables you to view and print host reports. The Favorites and Reports areas each have their own generation area. The Generation section displays a list of dates on which the Host generated the report and sent it to DBS . Reports - Contains a list of all reports that meet the search criteria. The reports which by display when you first access the Host Reports page vary based on the menu tab or summary page where you clicked the Host Reports link or button. Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Host Reports page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. About Host Reports: What You Need to Know Add a Host Report to the Favorites List Filter and Search for a Host Report Print a Host Report Print Overnight Host Reports Remove a Host Report from the Favorites List View a Host Report About Host Reports: What You Need to Know Add a Host Report to the Favorites List Filter and Search for a Host Report Print a Host Report Print Overnight Host Reports Remove a Host Report from the Favorites List View a Host Report Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Host Reports page. View Host Reports Workflow Page Preview
To print parts return detail: Select the parts return. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Print Detail option. Note : The File Download dialog appears. Click the Open button. Note : A PDF file opens. From the toolbar, click the Printer icon to print the report.
Print Parts Return Detail To print parts return detail: Select the parts return. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Print Detail option. Note : The File Download dialog appears. Click the Open button. Note: A PDF file opens. From the toolbar, click the Printer icon to print the report.
Manage Returns Manage Returns Manage Returns Manage Parts Return Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing parts returns. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Parts Return Workflow. Create Parts Return Workflow Modify Parts Return Workflow
To export Parts Orders information: Click the Export button. Select the output format. Microsoft ® Excel ® Note : The File Download dialog appears. Click the Save button and save the file to your local drive. If you filter the page before exporting, only those records that meet the filter criteria export. You can filter, sort, and print the data if you export the information to Microsoft ® Excel ® .
Export Parts Order Information To export Parts Order information: Click the Export button. Select the output format. Microsoft ® Excel ® Note : The File Download dialog appears. Click the Save button and save the file to your local drive. If you filter the page before exporting, only those records that meet the filter criteria export. You can filter, sort, and print the data if you export the information to Microsoft® Excel®.
Manage Orders Manage Orders Manage Orders Manage Orders Parts Order Management Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing parts orders. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Parts Order workflow. Create Parts Order Workflow Edit Parts Order Workflow Inquire on the Availability of Parts at the Parts Distribution Centers Workflow View Parts Order Workflow Create Parts Order Workflow Edit Parts Order Workflow View Parts Order Workflow
Parts Return Management Page Overview Purpose Use the Parts Return Management page to view and manage parts returns in DBS . Access the Parts Return Management page by clicking the Parts Return Management link from the Parts menu. Description The content area of the Parts Return Management page displays the following sections: Filter by - Allows you to filter the information to display only the records that match your criteria Parts Return header - Displays the parts return schedule due date, annual return allowance amount, and remaining accessory amount Page Navigation - Allows you to navigate from page to page, if multiple pages exist Summary list - Displays general information for all returns on the page, and any error or warning flags, if applicable Parts Return Detail - Displays specific information for a selected record Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Parts Return Management page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Access a Submitted Parts Return Access the Create Parts Return Page Access the Edit Parts Return Page Access the Returns and Accrual Information Page Approve a Submitted Parts Return Delete a Parts Return Export Parts Return Management Information Filter Parts Return Management Summary Merge Duplicate Parts Returns Print Parts Return Detail Reject a Submitted Parts Return Submit a Parts Return View Parts Return Management Summary and Detail Access a Submitted Parts Return Access the Create Parts Return Page Access the Edit Parts Return Page Access Reports Delete a Parts Return Export Parts Return Management Information Filter Parts Return Management Summary Print Parts Return Detail Submit a Parts Return View Parts Return Management Summary and Detail Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Parts Return Management page. Manage Parts Return Workflow Page Preview
One Dealer Study Result Page Overview Purpose Use the One Dealer Study Result page to view all repair orders (ROs) and vehicle information related to a selected dealer's studies. Note : The One Dealer Study Result page is available to internal users only. Description The content area of the One Dealer Study Result page displays the following sections: Component Navigation - Allows you to select the type of study by component group to display Filter By - Allows you to filter the information to display only the records that match your criteria. This section also includes the dealer's address and phone number. Hold Status - Allows you to narrow your results by either "Confirmed" or "Requested" vehicle hold status. Results - Allows you to view the results of the selected criteria Tasks You can perform the following tasks from or on the One Dealer Study Result page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Export Dealer Study Results Information Filter Dealer Study Results Release a Vehicle from Dealer Hold Remove a Repair Order Job Line from a Study View Dealer Study Results View NSH for a Vehicle in a Study View Repair Order for Vehicle in a Study Export Dealer Study Results Information Filter Dealer Study Results Release a Vehicle from Dealer Hold Remove a Repair Order Job Line from a Study View Dealer Study Results View NSH for a Vehicle in a Study View Repair Order for Vehicle in a Study Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the One Dealer Study Result page. Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow Page Preview
Notifications Page Overview Purpose Use the Notifications page to review the list of notifications you have the authority to act upon based on your user profile and security settings. The list of notifications you see includes those you created and any notifications created by those for which you have surrogate authority. Notifications are email or text messages. Description The content area of the Notifications page displays the following sections: Filter By - Allows you to filter the information to display only the records that match your criteria Summary - Displays general information for all records on the page Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Notifications page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. About the Notifications Summary Page Access the Create Notification Page Access the Edit Notification Page Change the Status of a Notification Copy a Notification Delete a Notification Filter the Notification Summary Resend a Notification View or Print Notification Detail About the Notifications Summary Page Access the Create Notification Page Access the Edit Notification Page Change the Status of a Notification Copy a Notification Delete a Notification Filter the Notification Summary Resend a Notification View or Print Notification Detail Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Notifications page. Create or Edit a Notification Workflow Page Preview
To access the privacy policy from any DBS application page: Click the Privacy Policy link.
Access the Privacy Policy Page To open the privacy policy page from any application page: Click the Privacy Policy link.
As of February 1, 2018 - dealers will no longer need to submit warranty claims for PDI fuel and labor charges. All PDI charges will automatically be paid to the dealer when the vehicle is invoiced to the retailer. Dealers should review the Automated PDI Payments Quick Reference Guide and/or contact the PDI help desk at 615-725-0588 with any questions or concerns. Note : Any warranty claims submitted for PDI charges after February 1 st will be automatically suspended. To access the Create Warranty Claim page: Click the New button. Note : The Edit/Create Warranty Claim page opens. Complete each section of the warranty claim. Click the links below for instructions on how to complete/view these sections: Summary Claim Information Parts Operations Expenses Comments Customer Claim Activity (View Only) History (View Only) Click the Save button to save your changes. Note : You can save a warranty claim with warnings and error messages, and update the claim at a later time.
Access the Create Warranty Claim Page As of February 1, 2018 - dealers will no longer need to submit warranty claims for PDI fuel and labor charges. All PDI charges will automatically be paid to the dealer when the vehicle is invoiced to the retailer. Dealers should review the Automated PDI Payments Quick Reference Guide and/or contact the PDI help desk at 615-725-0588 with any questions or concerns. Note : Any warranty claims submitted for PDI charges after February 1 st will be automatically suspended. To access the Create Warranty claim page: Click the New button. Note : The Edit/Create Warranty Claim page opens. To continue creating the claim, complete each section of the warranty claim. Click the links below for instructions on how to complete/view these sections. Summary Claim Information Parts Operations Expenses Comments Customer Claim Activity (View Only) History (View Only) Summary Claim Information Parts Operations Expenses Comments Customer Claim Activity (View Only) History (View Only)
Manage Warranty Claims Processes Manage Warranty Claims Manage Warranty Claims Manage Warranty Claims Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing warranty claims. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create or Edit Warranty Claims Workflow or View Warranty Claims Workflow. Edit or Create Warranty Claims Workflow View Warranty Claims Workflow
About Host Reports: What You Need to Know You have the option to print overnight reports from the Favorites section (only those reports that are listed in this section will be printed) or the Reports section (only those reports matching the existing search selections will be printed). Only those reports generated by the Host during the applicable time period will be printed: By default, clicking the Print Overnight Reports button compiles a listing of all Host Reports generated by the Host from 10:00 PM EST on the previous date to 6:00 AM EST on the current date. On Mondays, this option includes all reports generated from Friday at 10:00 PM EST through Monday at 6:00 AM EST. During holidays or vacations, this option allows you to select a date range to include all reports for a specific time period (up to the previous 15 days) If you select more than one report to print, all of your reports will be joined into one PDF file with the information for each report printed on a separate page. Hints & Tips: The default search criteria is to display all reports in all statuses for the current month based on the menu tab or application page from which you accessed the Host Reports page. For the best results when searching for a host report, broaden your search criteria: From the All Applications drop-down list, select the "Select" option. From the Report Status drop-down list, select the "All Statuses" option, if not already selected. From the Time Period drop-down list, select the "Date Range" option, then use the calendars provided to choose the start and end dates for your search. If known, in the Enter Report ID or Name field, type all or a portion of the report ID or name. Click the Search icon. Add the reports you use most to the Favorites section provides a quick and easy way to print all of your Host reports each morning by using the Print Overnight Reports button. If you need to re-print a report, click on the report name until the row turns a dark turquoise. In the Generation pane, click the Action icon for the desired date, and then click Print. Host reports are presented in the PDF file format, and are designed to be printed using the landscape format.
About Host Reports: What You Need to Know You have the option to print overnight reports from the Favorites section (only those reports that are listed in this section will be printed) or the Reports section (only those reports matching the existing search selections will be printed). Only those reports generated by the Host during the applicable time period will be printed: By default, clicking the Print Overnight Reports button compiles a listing of all Host Reports generated by the Host from 10:00 PM EST on the previous date to 6:00 AM EST on the current date. On Mondays, this option includes all reports generated from Friday at 10:00 PM EST through Monday at 6:00 AM EST. During holidays or vacations, this option allows you to select a date range to include all reports for a specific time period (up to the previous 15 days) If you select more than one report to print, all of your reports will be joined into one PDF file with the information for each report printed on a separate page. Hints & Tips: The default search criteria is to display all reports in all statuses for the current month based on the menu tab or application page from which you accessed the Host Reports page. For the best results when searching for a host report, broaden your search criteria: From the All Applications drop-down list, select the "Select" option. From the Report Status drop-down list, select the "All Statuses" option, if not already selected. From the Time Period drop-down list, select the "Date Range" option, then use the calendars provided to choose the start and end dates for your search. If known, in the Enter Report ID or Name field, type all or a portion of the report ID or name. Click the Search icon. Add the reports you use most to the Favorites section provides a quick and easy way to print all of your Host reports each morning by using the Print Overnight Reports button. If you need to re-print a report, click on the report name until the row turns a dark turquoise. In the Generation pane, click the Action icon for the desired date, and then click Print. Host reports are presented in the PDF file format, and are designed to be printed using the landscape format.
About Host Reports: What You Need to Know You have the option to print overnight reports from the Favorites section (only those reports that are listed in this section will be printed) or the Reports section (only those reports matching the existing search selections will be printed). Only those reports generated by the Host during the applicable time period will be printed: By default, clicking the Print Overnight Reports button compiles a listing of all Host Reports generated by the Host from 10:00 PM EST on the previous date to 6:00 AM EST on the current date. On Mondays, this option includes all reports generated from Friday at 10:00 PM EST through Monday at 6:00 AM EST. During holidays or vacations, this option allows you to select a date range to include all reports for a specific time period (up to the previous 15 days) If you select more than one report to print, all of your reports will be joined into one PDF file with the information for each report printed on a separate page. Hints & Tips: The default search criteria is to display all reports in all statuses for the current month based on the menu tab or application page from which you accessed the Host Reports page. For the best results when searching for a host report, broaden your search criteria: From the All Applications drop-down list, select the "Select" option. From the Report Status drop-down list, select the "All Statuses" option, if not already selected. From the Time Period drop-down list, select the "Date Range" option, then use the calendars provided to choose the start and end dates for your search. If known, in the Enter Report ID or Name field, type all or a portion of the report ID or name. Click the Search icon. Add the reports you use most to the Favorites section provides a quick and easy way to print all of your Host reports each morning by using the Print Overnight Reports button. If you need to re-print a report, click on the report name until the row turns a dark turquoise. In the Generation pane, click the Action icon for the desired date, and then click Print. Host reports are presented in the PDF file format, and are designed to be printed using the landscape format.
About Host Reports: What You Need to Know You have the option to print overnight reports from the Favorites section (only those reports that are listed in this section will be printed) or the Reports section (only those reports matching the existing search selections will be printed). Only those reports generated by the Host during the applicable time period will be printed: By default, clicking the Print Overnight Reports button compiles a listing of all Host Reports generated by the Host from 10:00 PM EST on the previous date to 6:00 AM EST on the current date. On Mondays, this option includes all reports generated from Friday at 10:00 PM EST through Monday at 6:00 AM EST. During holidays or vacations, this option allows you to select a date range to include all reports for a specific time period (up to the previous 15 days) If you select more than one report to print, all of your reports will be joined into one PDF file with the information for each report printed on a separate page. Hints & Tips: The default search criteria is to display all reports in all statuses for the current month based on the menu tab or application page from which you accessed the Host Reports page. For the best results when searching for a host report, broaden your search criteria: From the All Applications drop-down list, select the "Select" option. From the Report Status drop-down list, select the "All Statuses" option, if not already selected. From the Time Period drop-down list, select the "Date Range" option, then use the calendars provided to choose the start and end dates for your search. If known, in the Enter Report ID or Name field, type all or a portion of the report ID or name. Click the Search icon. Add the reports you use most to the Favorites section provides a quick and easy way to print all of your Host reports each morning by using the Print Overnight Reports button. If you need to re-print a report, click on the report name until the row turns a dark turquoise. In the Generation pane, click the Action icon for the desired date, and then click Print. Host reports are presented in the PDF file format, and are designed to be printed using the landscape format.
About Host Reports: What You Need to Know You have the option to print overnight reports from the Favorites section (only those reports that are listed in this section will be printed) or the Reports section (only those reports matching the existing search selections will be printed). Only those reports generated by the Host during the applicable time period will be printed: By default, clicking the Print Overnight Reports button compiles a listing of all Host Reports generated by the Host from 10:00 PM EST on the previous date to 6:00 AM EST on the current date. On Mondays, this option includes all reports generated from Friday at 10:00 PM EST through Monday at 6:00 AM EST. During holidays or vacations, this option allows you to select a date range to include all reports for a specific time period (up to the previous 15 days) If you select more than one report to print, all of your reports will be joined into one PDF file with the information for each report printed on a separate page. Hints & Tips: The default search criteria is to display all reports in all statuses for the current month based on the menu tab or application page from which you accessed the Host Reports page. For the best results when searching for a host report, broaden your search criteria: From the All Applications drop-down list, select the "Select" option. From the Report Status drop-down list, select the "All Statuses" option, if not already selected. From the Time Period drop-down list, select the "Date Range" option, then use the calendars provided to choose the start and end dates for your search. If known, in the Enter Report ID or Name field, type all or a portion of the report ID or name. Click the Search icon. Add the reports you use most to the Favorites section provides a quick and easy way to print all of your Host reports each morning by using the Print Overnight Reports button. If you need to re-print a report, click on the report name until the row turns a dark turquoise. In the Generation pane, click the Action icon for the desired date, and then click Print. Host reports are presented in the PDF file format, and are designed to be printed using the landscape format.
To edit a summary page display configuration: Select the page definition you want to edit. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Rename option. Note : The definition is now editable. If desired, from the Available Fields list, select one or more field titles, and then click the Move button. If desired, in the Selected Fields list, select a field title and then use the sort buttons to adjust the position of the column. If desired, in the Sortable Fields list, select one or more field titles, and then click the Move button. If desired, in the Selected Fields list, select a field title and then use the sort buttons to adjust the position of the column. If necessary, select a sorting rule for each field. Click the Save button. Click Close .
Edit a Summary Page Display Definition To edit a summary page display configuration: Select the page definition you want to edit. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Rename option. Note : The display configuration name is now editable. If desired, from the Available Fields list, select one or more field titles, and then click the Move button. Note : To move all fields into the Selected Fields list, click the Move All button. If desired, in the Selected Fields list, select a field title and then use the sort buttons to adjust the position of the column. If desired, in the Sortable Fields list, select one or more field titles, and then click the Move button. Note : To move all fields into the Selected Fields list, click the Move All button. If desired, in the Selected Fields list, select a field title and then use the sort buttons to adjust the position of the column. If necessary, select a sorting rule for each field. Click the Save button. Note : A confirmation message displays. Note : To clear all selections, click the Reset button. Note : To close the window without saving, click the Cancel button. Click Close .
View Overview Information Activate/Deactivate Page Overview Perform Tasks Activate Tracing Deactivate Tracing Change the Logging Level Perform Common DBS Tasks Activate Tracing Deactivate Tracing Change the Logging Level Perform Common DBS Tasks
To complete the Notifications section of a study: Select the name of each individual who should receive the notifications from the Available Personnel list, and then click the center buttons as necessary to customize the Selected Personnel list. Note : The Available Personnel list displays all users who have permissions to create studies. Contact your System Administrator for assistance in modifying a user's permissions. When you have selected all desired recipients, click the Save button. Click the Details tab in full help to view additional information on configuring notification recipients.
Complete the Notifications Section of a Study This section of a study is not required, but provides the opportunity to customize or limit a study's results. Use optional study sections to clearly define study parameters, but use caution as conflicting selections will result in no data being returned. To complete the Notifications section of a study: Select the name of each individual who should receive the notifications from the Available Personnel list, and then click the center buttons as necessary to customize the Selected Personnel list. Note : The Available Personnel list displays all users who have permissions to create studies. Contact your System Administrator for assistance in modifying a user's permissions. When you have selected all desired recipients, click the Save button. To Configure a Notification Recipient Click the Configuring Personnel button. Select the name of the user you would like to configure. Select the communication method(s) by which this person will be contacted. Note : By default, the user receives all notifications at the email address associated with their user profile. If desired, from the Manager drop-down list, select a manager to receive exception notifications. Note : An exception occurs if a vehicle placed on dealer hold is not released within 24 hours (excluding weekends). Click the Save button.
View Parts Return Page Overview Purpose Use the View Parts Return page to view a submitted parts return, that is, a part that is not in "Open" or "New" status. You can view a parts return from the Parts Return Management page. You must first search for and locate the desired parts return that you want to view. Use the Action menu to open the View Parts Return page. Description The content area of the View Parts Return page displays the following sections: View Parts Return header - Contains general information about the parts return, including the type of return and the dealer return reference number Parts Return Detail - Contains specific information about the parts in the return, such as part number, returned quantity, part description Close Button - Allows you to close the page Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the View Parts Return page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. View a Submitted Parts Return View a Submitted Parts Return Page Preview
To add a campaign part: In the Campaign ID field, type the campaign ID to which you want to add a part. In the Part Number field, enter the part number. Note : If you do not know the part number, click the Lookup icon. Click here for more information on how to look up a part. Click the Add button. Note : A confirmation message appears. In the Maximal Order Quantity field, type the maximum number of the selected part which a dealer may add to a part order. Click the Yes button to confirm.
Add a Campaign Part To add a campaign part: In the Campaign ID field, type the campaign ID to which you want to add a part. In the Part Number field, enter the part number. Note : If you do not know the part number, click the Lookup icon. Click here for more information on how to look up a part. Click the Add button. Note : A confirmation message appears. In the Maximal Order Quantity field, type the maximum number of the selected part which a dealer may add to a part order. Click the Yes button to confirm.
Campaign Campaign Part Management Campaign Parts Campaign Campaign Part Management Campaign Part Management Manage Campaign Parts Workflow Note : This workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing campaign parts. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Campaign Parts Workflow. View Service Campaign Order Workflow Manage Service Campaign Order Workflow
To complete the Basic Information section of a study: From the Component Group drop-down list, select the appropriate component for the study. To create a new study based on criteria established in a previous study, in the Study List section, select the name of the study you want to replicate. Note : The Study List section is only available when creating a new study. In the Study Name field, enter a name for the study. In the Description field, type a detailed description of the study. In the Start Date field, use the calendar to select a start date for the study. In the End Date field, use the calendar to select the end date for the study. Note : Studies have a maximum length of 6 months. Click the Save button.
Complete the Basic Information Section of a Study To complete the Basic Information section of a study: From the Component Group drop-down list, select the appropriate component for the study. Note : The options in the Component Group drop-down list are determined by the Flat Rate Manual. Note : Once you select the component group, the Study ID field populates with an ID that uniquely identifies this study within the component group. To create a new study based on criteria established in a previous study, in the Study List section, select the name of the study you want to replicate. Note : The Study List section is only available when creating a new study. In the Study Name field, enter a name for the study. Note : The study name should be concise and descriptive. This name appears in the title of reports and notifications about the study results. In the Description field, type a detailed description of the study. In the Start Date field, use the calendar to select a start date for the study. Note : By default, the study start date is the current date, but you may select a past or future start date if desired. In the End Date field, use the calendar to select the end date for the study. Note : Studies have a maximum length of 6 months. Click the Save button.
View Overview Information Submit Financial Statements Page Overview View Financial Statements Status Workflow Perform Tasks Perform Common DBS Tasks Submit Financial Statement for Processing View Financial Statements Submission Status View Processing Results View Submission Status on the Business Management Website
Financial Statement Financial Statements Financial Statements Processes Statement Status View Submit Financial Statements Workflow Note : This workflow is for NNA users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for submitting the financial statement.
Financial Statement Financial Statements Financial Statements Processes Statement Status View Submit Financial Statements Workflow Note : This workflow is for NNA users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for submitting the financial statement.
To search for a customer or vehicle: In the Customer Search panel, type or select the desired search criteria. Note : Use one of the following combinations for the search criteria: Last 8 characters of the VIN (Vehicle Identification Number) or the full VIN Phone number (home, work, or cellular) Note : All cars associated with the phone number appear in the search results. Email address Last name of the owner or company name (at least the first three characters of the name), plus the five-digit zip code Last name of the owner (at least the first three letters), city name (at least the first three letters), and the state To execute the search, press the Enter key on your keyboard or click the Search icon. Click the desired VIN link to see details about the vehicle. Note : The customer address only displays when viewed by the selling or servicing dealer.
Search for a Customer or Vehicle To search for a customer or vehicle: In the Customer Search panel, type or select the desired search criteria. Note : Use one of the following combinations for the search criteria: Last 8 characters of the VIN (Vehicle Identification Number) or full VIN Phone number (home, work, or cellular) Note : All vehicles associated with the phone number appear in the search results. Email address If you want to include untitled vehicles in the dealership's inventory, select the Dealer Inventory checkbox. To execute the search, press the Enter key on your keyboard or click the Search icon. Click the desired VIN link to see details about the vehicle. Note : The customer address only displays when viewed by the selling or servicing dealer. To remove the search criteria from the Customer Search panel, click the Clear icon.
National Service History National Service History (NSH) National Service History National Service History Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing national service history information for a vehicle.
To create or edit a notification: Select a notification method. Note : After you select a notification method, the appropriate fields appear on the page. If the item does not require approval, clear the Require Approval? checkbox. Enter header information for your email or SMS notification in the Title , Scheduled Date , and Scheduled Time fields. For email notifications, type a subject. In the text area, type the content for either your email or SMS notification. To attach a document to an email notification, click the Choose Attachments button. Note : To remove attached documents from an email, click the Clear Uploaded Attachments button. Select recipients for the announcement. Note : Click here for more information on selecting recipients. Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm, or click the No button to close the window without confirming. You can attach a maximum of 3 documents to an email message. The file format of an attachment must be one of the following: Microsoft ® Word ® (.doc), Microsoft ® Excel ® (.xls), or Adobe ® Reader ® (.pdf). For SMS notifications, a counter displays that indicates the number of remaining characters that you can enter in the text field. There is no character limit for text in email messages. SMS notifications are commonly called text messages that are sent and received from mobile devices. Notifications cannot contain videos, images, or audio.
Create or Edit a Notification Note : Depending on the notification method selected, you will see different fields on the screen. In this example, you see all fields because e-mail and SMS is selected for the notification method. To create or edit a notification: From the Notification Method drop-down list, select a notification method. Note : After you select a notification method, the appropriate fields appear on the page. If the item does not require approval, clear the Require Approval? checkbox. In the Title field, type a title for the email and SMS notification. In the Scheduled Date field, use the calendar to select a start date. Note : To view a different month, click the forward or backward arrow next to the month. If the announcement or notification must display at or after a specific time, in the Scheduled Time field, type the scheduled start time in HH:MM format. For email notifications, in the Subject field, type a subject. In the text area for your email message, type the text. To attach a document to an email notification, click the Choose Attachments button. Note : To remove an attached document from an email, click the Clear Uploaded Attachments button. In the text area for SMS notification message, type the text. Select recipients for the SMS notification. To select dealer users, click the Dealer User button. To select internal users, click the Internal User button. Note : To learn about selecting recipients, click the applicable link. Select internal users by hierarchy Select internal users by geography Select dealer users by hierarchy Select dealer users by geography Select dealers users by dealer number Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm, or click the No button to close the window without confirming. You can attach a maximum of 3 documents to an email message. The file format of an attachment must be one of the following: Microsoft ® Word ® (.doc or .docx), Microsoft ® Excel ® (.xls or .xlsx), or Adobe ® Reader ® (.pdf). For SMS notifications, a counter displays that indicates the number of remaining characters that you can enter in the text area. There is no character limit for text in email messages. SMS notifications are commonly known as text messages that are sent and received from mobile devices. Notifications cannot contain video, images, or audio.
To access OMS to view OMS vehicle detail: Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon for the selected vehicle. From the Action menu, select the OMS Vehicle Detail option. Note : The external OMS application opens. When you are finished viewing the OMS vehicle detail, click the Close button.
View OMS Vehicle Detail from RDR History To access OMS to view OMS vehicle detail: Select the vehicle for which you want to view the OMS vehicle detail. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon for the selected vehicle. From the Action menu, select the OMS Vehicle Detail option. Note : The external OMS application opens. When you are finished viewing the OMS vehicle detail, click the Close button.
Edit Position Permissions Workflow Note : This workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for editing position permissions. Related Workflows The following workflow may have one or more tasks in common with the Edit Position Permissions Workflow. View Position Permissions Workflow
View Overview Information Home Page Overview Perform Tasks Emulate a Dealership or User Perform Common DBS Tasks View Alerts View Announcements and Other News Emulate a Dealership or User Perform Common DBS Tasks View Alerts View Announcements and Other News
Copy, Transfer, Delete, or Make Report Definition Public Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for copying, transferring, or deleting a report definition in Report Writer. The diagram also illustrates the workflow for changing a report definition to public or private. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Copy, Transfer, Delete, or Make Report Definition Public Workflow. Change User in Report Writer Workflow Copy All, Transfer All, or Delete All Report Definitions Workflow Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Workflow Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow View a Host Report Workflow
Copy, Transfer, Delete, or Make Report Definition Public Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for copying, transferring, or deleting a report definition in Report Writer. The diagram also illustrates the workflow for changing a report definition to public or private. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Copy, Transfer, Delete, or Make Report Definition Public Workflow. Change User in Report Writer Workflow Copy All, Transfer All, or Delete All Report Definitions Workflow Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Workflow Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow View a Host Report Workflow
Copy, Transfer, Delete, or Make Report Definition Public Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for copying, transferring, or deleting a report definition in Report Writer. The diagram also illustrates the workflow for changing a report definition to public or private. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Copy, Transfer, Delete, or Make Report Definition Public Workflow. Change User in Report Writer Workflow Copy All, Transfer All, or Delete All Report Definitions Workflow Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Workflow Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow View a Host Report Workflow
Copy, Transfer, Delete, or Make Report Definition Public Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for copying, transferring, or deleting a report definition in Report Writer. The diagram also illustrates the workflow for changing a report definition to public or private. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Copy, Transfer, Delete, or Make Report Definition Public Workflow. Change User in Report Writer Workflow Copy All, Transfer All, or Delete All Report Definitions Workflow Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Workflow Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow View a Host Report Workflow
Copy, Transfer, Delete, or Make Report Definition Public Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for copying, transferring, or deleting a report definition in Report Writer. The diagram also illustrates the workflow for changing a report definition to public or private. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Copy, Transfer, Delete, or Make Report Definition Public Workflow. Change User in Report Writer Workflow Copy All, Transfer All, or Delete All Report Definitions Workflow Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Workflow Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow View a Host Report Workflow
Maintain Purge Rules Page Overview Purpose Use the Maintain Purge Rules page to change the number of days or months to keep data before removing it from the Dealer Business System (DBS) . Description The content area of the Maintain Purge Rules page displays the following sections: Description - Provides an explanation of the page and allows you to save changes Data to Purge - Displays each data type and allows you to enter the number of days, or in some cases months, to keep each data type before removing it from DBS Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Configure Purge Rules page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Maintain Purge Rules Page Preview
To view the context-sensitive help available for an application page: Move your cursor over the Help link. Click the Context Help link. From the "What do you want to do?" list, click the link for the task you want to perform. Context-sensitive help is designed to provide the shortest steps possible to perform a task (usually ten steps or less). To view additional information, supporting graphics, and process information for a task, click the Full Help button. Press the F10 key on your keyboard to quickly access context-sensitive help. Press the F10 key on your keyboard to quickly access context-sensitive help. You can also get help for DBS by clicking the Live Chat button.
Access Context-Sensitive Help To access the context-sensitive help available for an application page: Move your cursor over the Help link. Click the Context Help link. From the "What do you want to do?" list, click the link for the task you want to perform. Context-sensitive help is designed to provide the shortest steps possible to perform a task (usually ten steps or less). To view additional information, supporting graphics, and process information for a task, click the Full Help button. Press the F10 key to access context-sensitive help for any application page. The full help system allows you to search for help information, view all help topics for the Dealer Business System (DBS) , and view field, button, and link definitions. You can also get immediate help for DBS by clicking the Live Chat button, or click the Contact Us link to submit an email question to the Help Desk.
To contact the DBS help desk by live chat: Click the DBS Live Chat button. If you are inquiring about a previous case, type the ticket number in the space provided. Type your question in the text box. Click the Send button to send your message, or click the Reset button to close the DBS Live Chat window without sending your message. Note : A customer service representative will respond to your inquiry as soon as possible. Do not close the chat window until your conversation is complete. Click the Close button when your conversation is complete.
Contact the DBS Help Desk by Live Chat To contact the DBS help desk by live chat: Click the DBS Live Chat button. If you are inquiring about a previous case, type the ticket number in the space provided. Type your question in the text box. Click the Send button to send your message, or click the Reset button to close the DBS Live Chat window without sending your message. A customer service representative will respond to your inquiry as soon as possible. If necessary, type additional information in the space provided and click the Send button (or press the Enter key) to communicate with the support person. Note : Do not close the chat window until your conversation is complete. When your conversion is complete, click the Close button.
Submit Financial Statements Page Overview Purpose Use the Submit Financial Statements page to view the submission status of the your financial statements and submit financial statements to the corporate financial management system. You can also directly link to the Business Management website from the Submit Financial Statements page to view the processing results of the most recently submitted financial statement. Description The content area of the Financial Statements page displays the following section: Page Navigation Bar - Allows you to navigate from page to page, if multiple pages exist Financial Statements Status - Allows you to view the submission status of the dealer's financial statements Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Submit Financial Statements page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Submit Financial Statement for Processing View Financial Statements Submission Status View Processing Results View Submission Status on the Business Management Website Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Financial Statements page. View Financial Statement Status Workflow Page Preview
To export information from the Retailed Vehicle Open Campaign Report page: If desired, select filter criteria to limit the results displayed. Click the checkbox to accept the usage agreement, then click the Search button to display those results which match the filter criteria you selected. Search for specific information, sort or filter the results, apply row edits, or re-arrange the order of the columns as desired. Click the Excel icon to export the displayed information in Microsoft ® Excel ® format. Follow your browser-specific instructions to open, save, or print the Excel file.
Export Information from the Retailed Vehicle Open Campaign Report Page To export information from the Retailed Vehicle Open Campaign Report page: If desired, select filter criteria to limit the results displayed. Click the checkbox to accept the usage agreement, then click the Search button to display those results which match the filter criteria you selected. Search for specific information, sort or filter the results, apply row edits, or re-arrange the order of the columns as desired. Click the Excel icon to export the displayed information in Microsoft ® Excel ® format. Follow your browser-specific instructions to open, save, or print the Excel file.
Quick Entry RDR Page Overview Purpose Use the Quick Entry RDR page to create, edit, submit, or delete an RDR (sale) record for a vehicle. The Quick Entry RDR page differs from the standard RDR entry page in that it allows you to quickly select a vehicle from your inventory by stock number or serial number, complete the sale information, and then submit the RDR. Once the RDR is submitted, you remain on the Quick Entry RDR page so you can RDR another vehicle, if desired. You can also RDR a vehicle that is not yet in your inventory due to a dealer trade performed in OMS (as inventory updates only occur every 30 minutes). Description The content area of the Quick Entry RDR page displays the following sections: Summary - Display the status of the RDR Vehicle - Displays information about the vehicle Customer - Displays information about the customer You can perform the following tasks on the Quick Entry RDR page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Access OMS to View Vehicle Detail Delete an RDR Report or Edit the Sale of a Vehicle Complete the Vehicle Section of an RDR Complete the Buyer Section of an RDR Complete the Co-Buyer Section of an RDR Complete the Driver Section of an RDR Complete the Legal Owner Section of an RDR Complete the Finance Section of an RDR (For lease sales only) Submit an RDR RDR a Vehicle Using Quick Entry RDR RDR a Vehicle Not in Your Inventory Using Quick Entry RDR Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Quick Entry RDR page. Report the Sale of a Vehicle Workflow
View Overview Information Event Monitor Page Overview Perform Tasks Filter the Event Monitor Page Detail Perform Common DBS Tasks Re-Run a System Event View System Event Detail Perform Common DBS Tasks Re-Run a System Event View System Event Detail
To change the status of an alert: Select an alert. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Change Status option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Save button to confirm, or click the Cancel button to close the window without confirming. If the alert status is "Approved", changing the status updates the alert status to "Needs Approval." If the alert status is "Needs Approval", changing the status updates the alert status to "Approved." An alert will not display until it is in an approved status AND the scheduled time has passed. You cannot change the status of a published communication item. You must delete the item if you want to remove it from display.
Change the Status of an Alert To change the status of an alert: Select the alert for which you want to change the status. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Change Status option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm, or click the No button to close the window without confirming. If the alert status is "Approved", changing the status updates the alert status to "Needs Approval." If the alert status is "Needs Approval", changing the status updates the alert status to "Approved." An alert will not display on the selected page until it is in an approved status and the scheduled time has passed. You cannot change the status of a published communication item. You must delete the item if you want to remove it from display.
View Overview Information Create or Edit Standard Operation Category Page Overview Manage Standard Operation Categories Workflow Perform Tasks Access the Create Standard Operation Category Page Access the Edit Standard Operation Category Page Add a Key Word Create or Edit a Standard Operation Category Delete a Key Word Delete a Standard Operation Category Edit a Key Word Perform Common DBS Tasks Search the Standard Operation Category Summary View the Standard Operation Category Summary and Detail Access the Create Standard Operation Category Page Access the Edit Standard Operation Category Page Add a Key Word Create or Edit a Standard Operation Category Delete a Key Word Delete a Standard Operation Category Edit a Key Word Perform Common DBS Tasks Search the Standard Operation Category Summary View the Standard Operation Category Summary and Detail
ReRun Standard Operation Category Translation Manage Standard Operation Categories Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing and creating standard operation categories. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Standard Operation Categories Workflow. Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes Workflow Manage Dealer Operation Codes Workflow Manage Standard Operation Codes Workflow
To change the text display size: Click one of the AAA buttons. For the smallest text size, click the small A button. For the medium (default) text size, click the middle A button. For the largest text size, click the large A button. Text is only resized in the area below the AAA buttons. The DBS banner across the top and the menus are not resized. Increasing the font size may cause the text to display outside the viewing area. If that happens, horizontal and vertical scroll bars display so you can scroll to view the text.
Change the Text Display Size To change the text display size: Click one of the AAA buttons. For the smallest text size, click the small A button. For the medium (default) text size, click the middle A button. For the largest text size, click the large A button. Text is only resized in the area below the AAA buttons. The DBS banner across the top and the menus are not resized. Increasing the font size may cause the text to display outside the viewing area. If that happens horizontal and vertical scroll bars display so you can scroll to view the text.
To view the NCI host availability: Click the View NCI Host Availability button. The host availability information displays in a new window. Click Close to return to the Monitor System page.
View NCI Host Availability To view the NCI host availability: Click the View NCI Host Availability button. The host availability information displays in a new window. Click Close to return to the Monitor System page.
To complete the Summary section of a claim on either the Edit/Create Warranty Claim page or Quick Entry Warranty Claim page: Either enter information in the following fields or verify the data populated by DBS : Repair Order , Line Number , and VIN . If you are entering the information, you must complete the VIN field first. For the Line Number field, make sure you enter either a one-digit or two-digit line number. Note : These fields are automatically filled in by DBS after you use the Search section to look up the repair order (RO) and line number for the claim. The Odometer field may be automatically populated or might require manual entry, depending on the data in the system. In the Odometer field, type the odometer reading if the number was not automatically filled in from the RO. Note : This can be in miles or kilometers, based on the country in which the vehicle is licensed. Note : If you enter an odometer reading that is less than the previous odometer reading, DBS displays an Odometer Confirmation window. You can either keep the number you entered or type a new number. The claim total is initially populated with data from the RO. As you add data to the page, you can manually refresh this total at any time by clicking the Refresh Claim Total link. To save the information, click the Save button at the bottom-right of the page. If you are creating a new warranty claim, all fields except the VIN field are dimmed and unavailable. There is a one-to many relationship between a repair order and warranty claims. That is, one RO can have multiple warranty claims.
Complete the Summary Section a Claim To complete the Summary section of a claim: Either enter information in the following fields or verify the data populated by DBS : Repair Order , Line Number , and VIN . If you are entering the information, you must complete the VIN field first. For the Line Number field, make sure you enter either a one-digit or two-digit line number. Note : These fields are automatically filled in by DBS after you use the Search section to look up the repair order (RO) and line number for the claim. The Odometer field may be automatically populated or might require manual entry, depending on the data in the system. In the Odometer field, type the odometer reading if the number was not automatically filled in from the RO. Note : This can be in miles or kilometers, based on the country in which the vehicle is licensed. Note : If you enter an odometer reading that is less than the previous odometer reading, DBS displays an Odometer Confirmation window. You can either keep the number you entered or type a new number. The claim total is initially populated with data from the RO. As you add data to the page, you can manually refresh this total at any time by clicking the Refresh Claim Total link. To save the information, click the Save button at the bottom-right of the page. There is a one-to-many relationship between a repair order and the warranty claims. That is, one RO can have multiple warranty claims associated with line numbers.
Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Edit Warranty Claims Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Warranty Claims Edit or Create Warranty Claims Workflow *** Nissan Canada Inc. (NCI) recommends dealers create Warranty Claims in an NCI DBS certified dealer management system and then log into NCI DBS to review, validate and submit the claim to NCI. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating and editing claims. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Warranty Claims Workflow or View Warranty Claims Workflow. Manage Warranty Claims Workflow View Warranty Claims Workflow
To complete the Summary section of a claim on either the Edit/Create Warranty Claim page or Quick Entry Warranty Claim page: Either enter information in the following fields or verify the data populated by DBS : Repair Order , Line Number , and VIN . If you are entering the information, you must complete the VIN field first. For the Line Number field, make sure you enter either a one-digit or two-digit line number. Note : These fields are automatically filled in by DBS after you use the Search section to look up the repair order (RO) and line number for the claim. The Odometer field may be automatically populated or might require manual entry, depending on the data in the system. In the Odometer field, type the odometer reading if the number was not automatically filled in from the RO. Note : This can be in miles or kilometers, based on the country in which the vehicle is licensed. Note : If you enter an odometer reading that is less than the previous odometer reading, DBS displays an Odometer Confirmation window. You can either keep the number you entered or type a new number. The claim total is initially populated with data from the RO. As you add data to the page, you can manually refresh this total at any time by clicking the Refresh Claim Total link. To save the information, click the Save button at the bottom-right of the page. If you are creating a new warranty claim, all fields except the VIN field are dimmed and unavailable. There is a one-to many relationship between a repair order and warranty claims. That is, one RO can have multiple warranty claims.
Complete the Summary Section a Claim To complete the Summary section of a claim: Either enter information in the following fields or verify the data populated by DBS : Repair Order , Line Number , and VIN . If you are entering the information, you must complete the VIN field first. For the Line Number field, make sure you enter either a one-digit or two-digit line number. Note : These fields are automatically filled in by DBS after you use the Search section to look up the repair order (RO) and line number for the claim. The Odometer field may be automatically populated or might require manual entry, depending on the data in the system. In the Odometer field, type the odometer reading if the number was not automatically filled in from the RO. Note : This can be in miles or kilometers, based on the country in which the vehicle is licensed. Note : If you enter an odometer reading that is less than the previous odometer reading, DBS displays an Odometer Confirmation window. You can either keep the number you entered or type a new number. The claim total is initially populated with data from the RO. As you add data to the page, you can manually refresh this total at any time by clicking the Refresh Claim Total link. To save the information, click the Save button at the bottom-right of the page. There is a one-to-many relationship between a repair order and the warranty claims. That is, one RO can have multiple warranty claims associated with line numbers.
Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Edit Warranty Claims Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Warranty Claims Edit or Create Warranty Claims Workflow *** Nissan Canada Inc. (NCI) recommends dealers create Warranty Claims in an NCI DBS certified dealer management system and then log into NCI DBS to review, validate and submit the claim to NCI. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating and editing claims. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Warranty Claims Workflow or View Warranty Claims Workflow. Manage Warranty Claims Workflow View Warranty Claims Workflow
View Overview Information Parts Return Summary Page Overview Perform Tasks Approve a Parts Return on the Parts Return Summary Page Approve All Returns on the Parts Return Summary Page Export Information on the Parts Return Summary Page Filter the Parts Return Summary Page Perform Common DBS Tasks Reject a Parts Return on the Parts Return Summary Page Reject all Returns on the Parts Return Summary Page Search for Information on the Parts Return Summary Page View Parts Return Details from the Parts Return Summary Page View the Parts Return Summary Graph
To view the National Service History (NSH) for a vehicle on the Retailed Vehicle Open Campaign Report page: In the VIN column, click the VIN number hyperlink. Note : NSH details are not available for all vehicles. The NSH details display in a new window. Close the window when you have finished reviewing the content.
View NSH for a Vehicle Listed on the Retailed Vehicle Open Campaign Report Page To view the National Service History (NSH) for a vehicle on the Retailed Vehicle Open Campaign Report page: In the VIN column, click the VIN number hyperlink. Note : NSH details are not available for all vehicles. The NSH details display in a new window. Close the window when you have finished reviewing the content.
View Overview Information Site Map Search Results Page Overview Perform Tasks Access an Application Page Perform Common DBS Tasks Access an Application Page Perform Common DBS Tasks
View Overview Information Edit User Permissions Page Overview User Summary Workflow Perform Tasks Grant or Remove Access to a Host Report Grant or Remove Access to a Page, Action, Custom Field, or Website Grant or Remove Access to a Report Writer View Grant or Remove Full Access to a Menu and Its Contents Grant Publisher Authorization (internal user only) Perform Common DBS Tasks Remove Publisher Authorization View User Permissions Grant or Remove Access to a Host Report Grant or Remove Access to a Page, Action, Custom Field, or Website Grant or Remove Access to a Report Writer View Grant or Remove Full Access to a Menu and Its Contents Grant Publisher Authorization (internal user only) Perform Common DBS Tasks Remove Publisher Authorization View User Permissions
Edit User Processes User Permissions Users User Summary Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for editing user permissions. Related Workflows The following workflow may have one or more tasks in common with the User Summary workflow . View User Permissions Workflow
To open the View SVC Order page: Select an SVC order. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the View SVC Order option. Note : The View SVC Order page appears.
Open the View SVC Order Page To open the View SVC Order page: Select an SVC order. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the View SVC Order option. Note : The View SVC Order page appears.
Approve or Reject SVC Order Reject Approve or Reject SVC Order Approve or Reject SVC Order Manage Service Campaign Order Workflow Note : This workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing a Service Campaign (SVC) order. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Service Campaign Order Workflow. Manage Campaign Parts Workflow View Service Campaign Order Workflow
To filter information on the One Study Result page: From the Filer By drop-down list, select a filter of your choice. Note : A second field appears beside the Filter By field. In the second field, type or select an additional filter criterion. From the Hold Type drop-down list, select the desired option. As desired, select the Detail option button to view additional details for each row. Click the Search icon. Note : The list of studies updates to match the filter criteria.
Filter One Study Results To filter information on the One Study Result page: From the Filer By drop-down list, select a filter of your choice. Note : A second field appears beside the Filter By field. In the second field, type or select an additional filter criterion. From the Hold Type drop-down list, select the desired option. As desired, select the Detail option button to view additional details for each row. Click the Search icon. Note : The list of studies updates to match the filter criteria.
Dashboard Early Detection System (EDS) Hold Status Processes Study View Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow Note: The Manage Early Detection System Studies workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing Early Detection System (EDS) studies that integrate appointment and repair order data collected by the Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow. Define or Modify a Study Workflow View One Study Result Workflow View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow
Dashboard Early Detection System (EDS) EDS: Study Dashboard Processes EDS: Study Dashboard Study Study Dashboard View View One Study Result Workflow Note : The View One Study Result workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing a study that integrates appointment and repair order data collected by the Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the View One Study Result workflow. Define or Modify Study Workflow Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow
Dashboard Early Detection System (EDS) EDS: Study Dashboard Processes EDS: Study Dashboard Study Study Dashboard View View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow Note : The View a Dealer's Study Results workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing one dealer's study results that integrate appointment and repair order data collected by the Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the View a Dealer's Study Results workflow. Define or Modify a Study Workflow Manage Early Detection Studies Workflow View One Study Result Workflow
To access reports: Move your mouse pointer over any functional area tab to open the menu. - Or - Click the Reports button on any summary page. Note : Only users with specific permissions can view Report Writer or Host reports. If you need access to reports, contact your system administrator for assistance. To determine your system administrator(s), view the Business Hierarchy section of your DBS profile. Click here for more information. To open Report Writer to view custom-defined reports, click the Report Writer link. Note : The Report Writer page appears. Click here for more information. To open the Host Reports page, click the Host Reports link. Note : The Host Reports page appears. Click here for more information. The reports which by display when you first access the Host Reports page vary based on the menu tab or summary page where you clicked the Host Reports link or button.
Access Reports Reports Menu Option To access reports from the menu: Move your mouse pointer over any functional area tab to open the menu. Note : Only users with specific permissions can view Report Writer or Host reports. If you need access to reports, please contact your system administrator for assistance. To open Report Writer to view custom defined reports, click the Report Writer link. Note : The Report Writer page appears. Click here for more information. To open the Host Reports page, click the Host Reports link. Note : The Host Reports page appears. Click here for more information. Note : The reports that display when you first access the Host Reports page vary based on the menu tab or summary page where you clicked the Host Reports link or button. Reports Button To access reports from pages with a Reports button: Click the Reports button. Note : Only users with specific permissions can view Report Writer or Host reports. If you need access to reports, please contact your system administrator for assistance. To open the Host Reports page, select the Host Reports menu option. Note : The Host Reports page appears. Click here for more information. To open Report Writer to view custom defined reports, select the Report Writer menu option. Note : The Report Writer page appears. Click here for more information.
Host Reports Processes Host Reports Host Reports Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing, printing, filtering, searching, and adding or removing a Host report from the Favorites list.
Processes Report Writer Report Writer Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow generate a personalized report using Report Writer. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow. Change User in Report Writer Workflow Copy All, Transfer All, or Delete All Report Definitions Workflow Copy, Transfer, Delete, or Make Report Definition Public Workflow Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Workflow View a Host Report Workflow
To access reports: Move your mouse pointer over any functional area tab to open the menu. - Or - Click the Reports button on any summary page. Note : Only users with specific permissions can view Report Writer or Host reports. If you need access to reports, contact your system administrator for assistance. To determine your system administrator(s), view the Business Hierarchy section of your DBS profile. Click here for more information. To open Report Writer to view custom-defined reports, click the Report Writer link. Note : The Report Writer page appears. Click here for more information. To open the Host Reports page, click the Host Reports link. Note : The Host Reports page appears. Click here for more information. The reports which by display when you first access the Host Reports page vary based on the menu tab or summary page where you clicked the Host Reports link or button.
Access Reports Reports Menu Option To access reports from the menu: Move your mouse pointer over any functional area tab to open the menu. Note : Only users with specific permissions can view Report Writer or Host reports. If you need access to reports, please contact your system administrator for assistance. To open Report Writer to view custom defined reports, click the Report Writer link. Note : The Report Writer page appears. Click here for more information. To open the Host Reports page, click the Host Reports link. Note : The Host Reports page appears. Click here for more information. Note : The reports that display when you first access the Host Reports page vary based on the menu tab or summary page where you clicked the Host Reports link or button. Reports Button To access reports from pages with a Reports button: Click the Reports button. Note : Only users with specific permissions can view Report Writer or Host reports. If you need access to reports, please contact your system administrator for assistance. To open the Host Reports page, select the Host Reports menu option. Note : The Host Reports page appears. Click here for more information. To open Report Writer to view custom defined reports, select the Report Writer menu option. Note : The Report Writer page appears. Click here for more information.
Host Reports Processes Host Reports Host Reports Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing, printing, filtering, searching, and adding or removing a Host report from the Favorites list.
Processes Report Writer Report Writer Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow generate a personalized report using Report Writer. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow. Change User in Report Writer Workflow Copy All, Transfer All, or Delete All Report Definitions Workflow Copy, Transfer, Delete, or Make Report Definition Public Workflow Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Workflow View a Host Report Workflow
To access reports: Move your mouse pointer over any functional area tab to open the menu. - Or - Click the Reports button on any summary page. Note : Only users with specific permissions can view Report Writer or Host reports. If you need access to reports, contact your system administrator for assistance. To determine your system administrator(s), view the Business Hierarchy section of your DBS profile. Click here for more information. To open Report Writer to view custom-defined reports, click the Report Writer link. Note : The Report Writer page appears. Click here for more information. To open the Host Reports page, click the Host Reports link. Note : The Host Reports page appears. Click here for more information. The reports which by display when you first access the Host Reports page vary based on the menu tab or summary page where you clicked the Host Reports link or button.
Access Reports Reports Menu Option To access reports from the menu: Move your mouse pointer over any functional area tab to open the menu. Note : Only users with specific permissions can view Report Writer or Host reports. If you need access to reports, please contact your system administrator for assistance. To open Report Writer to view custom defined reports, click the Report Writer link. Note : The Report Writer page appears. Click here for more information. To open the Host Reports page, click the Host Reports link. Note : The Host Reports page appears. Click here for more information. Note : The reports that display when you first access the Host Reports page vary based on the menu tab or summary page where you clicked the Host Reports link or button. Reports Button To access reports from pages with a Reports button: Click the Reports button. Note : Only users with specific permissions can view Report Writer or Host reports. If you need access to reports, please contact your system administrator for assistance. To open the Host Reports page, select the Host Reports menu option. Note : The Host Reports page appears. Click here for more information. To open Report Writer to view custom defined reports, select the Report Writer menu option. Note : The Report Writer page appears. Click here for more information.
Host Reports Processes Host Reports Host Reports Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing, printing, filtering, searching, and adding or removing a Host report from the Favorites list.
Processes Report Writer Report Writer Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow generate a personalized report using Report Writer. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow. Change User in Report Writer Workflow Copy All, Transfer All, or Delete All Report Definitions Workflow Copy, Transfer, Delete, or Make Report Definition Public Workflow Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Workflow View a Host Report Workflow
To access reports: Move your mouse pointer over any functional area tab to open the menu. - Or - Click the Reports button on any summary page. Note : Only users with specific permissions can view Report Writer or Host reports. If you need access to reports, contact your system administrator for assistance. To determine your system administrator(s), view the Business Hierarchy section of your DBS profile. Click here for more information. To open Report Writer to view custom-defined reports, click the Report Writer link. Note : The Report Writer page appears. Click here for more information. To open the Host Reports page, click the Host Reports link. Note : The Host Reports page appears. Click here for more information. The reports which by display when you first access the Host Reports page vary based on the menu tab or summary page where you clicked the Host Reports link or button.
Access Reports Reports Menu Option To access reports from the menu: Move your mouse pointer over any functional area tab to open the menu. Note : Only users with specific permissions can view Report Writer or Host reports. If you need access to reports, please contact your system administrator for assistance. To open Report Writer to view custom defined reports, click the Report Writer link. Note : The Report Writer page appears. Click here for more information. To open the Host Reports page, click the Host Reports link. Note : The Host Reports page appears. Click here for more information. Note : The reports that display when you first access the Host Reports page vary based on the menu tab or summary page where you clicked the Host Reports link or button. Reports Button To access reports from pages with a Reports button: Click the Reports button. Note : Only users with specific permissions can view Report Writer or Host reports. If you need access to reports, please contact your system administrator for assistance. To open the Host Reports page, select the Host Reports menu option. Note : The Host Reports page appears. Click here for more information. To open Report Writer to view custom defined reports, select the Report Writer menu option. Note : The Report Writer page appears. Click here for more information.
Host Reports Processes Host Reports Host Reports Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing, printing, filtering, searching, and adding or removing a Host report from the Favorites list.
Processes Report Writer Report Writer Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow generate a personalized report using Report Writer. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow. Change User in Report Writer Workflow Copy All, Transfer All, or Delete All Report Definitions Workflow Copy, Transfer, Delete, or Make Report Definition Public Workflow Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Workflow View a Host Report Workflow
To access reports: Move your mouse pointer over any functional area tab to open the menu. - Or - Click the Reports button on any summary page. Note : Only users with specific permissions can view Report Writer or Host reports. If you need access to reports, contact your system administrator for assistance. To determine your system administrator(s), view the Business Hierarchy section of your DBS profile. Click here for more information. To open Report Writer to view custom-defined reports, click the Report Writer link. Note : The Report Writer page appears. Click here for more information. To open the Host Reports page, click the Host Reports link. Note : The Host Reports page appears. Click here for more information. The reports which by display when you first access the Host Reports page vary based on the menu tab or summary page where you clicked the Host Reports link or button.
Access Reports Reports Menu Option To access reports from the menu: Move your mouse pointer over any functional area tab to open the menu. Note : Only users with specific permissions can view Report Writer or Host reports. If you need access to reports, please contact your system administrator for assistance. To open Report Writer to view custom defined reports, click the Report Writer link. Note : The Report Writer page appears. Click here for more information. To open the Host Reports page, click the Host Reports link. Note : The Host Reports page appears. Click here for more information. Note : The reports that display when you first access the Host Reports page vary based on the menu tab or summary page where you clicked the Host Reports link or button. Reports Button To access reports from pages with a Reports button: Click the Reports button. Note : Only users with specific permissions can view Report Writer or Host reports. If you need access to reports, please contact your system administrator for assistance. To open the Host Reports page, select the Host Reports menu option. Note : The Host Reports page appears. Click here for more information. To open Report Writer to view custom defined reports, select the Report Writer menu option. Note : The Report Writer page appears. Click here for more information.
Host Reports Processes Host Reports Host Reports Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing, printing, filtering, searching, and adding or removing a Host report from the Favorites list.
Processes Report Writer Report Writer Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow generate a personalized report using Report Writer. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow. Change User in Report Writer Workflow Copy All, Transfer All, or Delete All Report Definitions Workflow Copy, Transfer, Delete, or Make Report Definition Public Workflow Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Workflow View a Host Report Workflow
To access reports: Move your mouse pointer over any functional area tab to open the menu. - Or - Click the Reports button on any summary page. Note : Only users with specific permissions can view Report Writer or Host reports. If you need access to reports, contact your system administrator for assistance. To determine your system administrator(s), view the Business Hierarchy section of your DBS profile. Click here for more information. To open Report Writer to view custom-defined reports, click the Report Writer link. Note : The Report Writer page appears. Click here for more information. To open the Host Reports page, click the Host Reports link. Note : The Host Reports page appears. Click here for more information. The reports which by display when you first access the Host Reports page vary based on the menu tab or summary page where you clicked the Host Reports link or button.
Access Reports Reports Menu Option To access reports from the menu: Move your mouse pointer over any functional area tab to open the menu. Note : Only users with specific permissions can view Report Writer or Host reports. If you need access to reports, please contact your system administrator for assistance. To open Report Writer to view custom defined reports, click the Report Writer link. Note : The Report Writer page appears. Click here for more information. To open the Host Reports page, click the Host Reports link. Note : The Host Reports page appears. Click here for more information. Note : The reports that display when you first access the Host Reports page vary based on the menu tab or summary page where you clicked the Host Reports link or button. Reports Button To access reports from pages with a Reports button: Click the Reports button. Note : Only users with specific permissions can view Report Writer or Host reports. If you need access to reports, please contact your system administrator for assistance. To open the Host Reports page, select the Host Reports menu option. Note : The Host Reports page appears. Click here for more information. To open Report Writer to view custom defined reports, select the Report Writer menu option. Note : The Report Writer page appears. Click here for more information.
Host Reports Processes Host Reports Host Reports Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing, printing, filtering, searching, and adding or removing a Host report from the Favorites list.
Processes Report Writer Report Writer Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow generate a personalized report using Report Writer. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow. Change User in Report Writer Workflow Copy All, Transfer All, or Delete All Report Definitions Workflow Copy, Transfer, Delete, or Make Report Definition Public Workflow Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Workflow View a Host Report Workflow
Report Writer Page Overview Purpose Use the Report Writer page to view a list of your existing custom report definitions, which you can create for your specific needs. The list also includes public report definitions. Using one of the report definitions in your list, you can generate a report.You can also copy, transfer, or modify the definitions in your list or create a new report definition. Description The content area of the Report Writer page displays the following sections: Filter by - Allows you to filter the information to display only the records that match your criteria List of Reports - Displays general information for all records on the page Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Report Writer page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. About the Reports List Access the Create Report Page Access the Generate Page Access the Modify Report Page Access the Replicate Report Page Access the View Report Page Change a Report Definition to Public or Private Change User in Report Writer Copy a Report Definition Copy All of a User's Report Definitions Delete a Report Definition Delete All of a User's Report Definitions Filter Report Writer List of Reports Transfer a Report Definition Transfer All of a User's Report Definitions View the Dealer's List of Reports (Internal Users Only) View a Report Definition About the Reports List Access the Create Report Page Access the Generate Page Access the Modify Report Page Access the Replicate Report Page Access the View Report Page Change a Report Definition to Public or Private Change User in Report Writer Copy a Report Definition Copy All of a User's Report Definitions Delete a Report Definition Delete All of a User's Report Definitions Filter Report Writer List of Reports Transfer a Report Definition Transfer All of a User's Report Definitions View the Dealer's List of Reports (Internal Users Only) View a Report Definition Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Report Writer page. Change User in Report Writer Workflow Copy All, Transfer All, or Delete All Report Definitions Workflow Copy, Transfer, Delete, or Make Report Definition Public Workflow Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Workflow Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow Page Preview
Report Writer Page Overview Purpose Use the Report Writer page to view a list of your existing custom report definitions, which you can create for your specific needs. The list also includes public report definitions. Using one of the report definitions in your list, you can generate a report.You can also copy, transfer, or modify the definitions in your list or create a new report definition. Description The content area of the Report Writer page displays the following sections: Filter by - Allows you to filter the information to display only the records that match your criteria List of Reports - Displays general information for all records on the page Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Report Writer page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. About the Reports List Access the Create Report Page Access the Generate Page Access the Modify Report Page Access the Replicate Report Page Access the View Report Page Change a Report Definition to Public or Private Change User in Report Writer Copy a Report Definition Copy All of a User's Report Definitions Delete a Report Definition Delete All of a User's Report Definitions Filter Report Writer List of Reports Transfer a Report Definition Transfer All of a User's Report Definitions View the Dealer's List of Reports (Internal Users Only) View a Report Definition About the Reports List Access the Create Report Page Access the Generate Page Access the Modify Report Page Access the Replicate Report Page Access the View Report Page Change a Report Definition to Public or Private Change User in Report Writer Copy a Report Definition Copy All of a User's Report Definitions Delete a Report Definition Delete All of a User's Report Definitions Filter Report Writer List of Reports Transfer a Report Definition Transfer All of a User's Report Definitions View the Dealer's List of Reports (Internal Users Only) View a Report Definition Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Report Writer page. Change User in Report Writer Workflow Copy All, Transfer All, or Delete All Report Definitions Workflow Copy, Transfer, Delete, or Make Report Definition Public Workflow Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Workflow Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow Page Preview
Report Writer Page Overview Purpose Use the Report Writer page to view a list of your existing custom report definitions, which you can create for your specific needs. The list also includes public report definitions. Using one of the report definitions in your list, you can generate a report.You can also copy, transfer, or modify the definitions in your list or create a new report definition. Description The content area of the Report Writer page displays the following sections: Filter by - Allows you to filter the information to display only the records that match your criteria List of Reports - Displays general information for all records on the page Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Report Writer page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. About the Reports List Access the Create Report Page Access the Generate Page Access the Modify Report Page Access the Replicate Report Page Access the View Report Page Change a Report Definition to Public or Private Change User in Report Writer Copy a Report Definition Copy All of a User's Report Definitions Delete a Report Definition Delete All of a User's Report Definitions Filter Report Writer List of Reports Transfer a Report Definition Transfer All of a User's Report Definitions View the Dealer's List of Reports (Internal Users Only) View a Report Definition About the Reports List Access the Create Report Page Access the Generate Page Access the Modify Report Page Access the Replicate Report Page Access the View Report Page Change a Report Definition to Public or Private Change User in Report Writer Copy a Report Definition Copy All of a User's Report Definitions Delete a Report Definition Delete All of a User's Report Definitions Filter Report Writer List of Reports Transfer a Report Definition Transfer All of a User's Report Definitions View the Dealer's List of Reports (Internal Users Only) View a Report Definition Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Report Writer page. Change User in Report Writer Workflow Copy All, Transfer All, or Delete All Report Definitions Workflow Copy, Transfer, Delete, or Make Report Definition Public Workflow Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Workflow Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow Page Preview
Report Writer Page Overview Purpose Use the Report Writer page to view a list of your existing custom report definitions, which you can create for your specific needs. The list also includes public report definitions. Using one of the report definitions in your list, you can generate a report.You can also copy, transfer, or modify the definitions in your list or create a new report definition. Description The content area of the Report Writer page displays the following sections: Filter by - Allows you to filter the information to display only the records that match your criteria List of Reports - Displays general information for all records on the page Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Report Writer page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. About the Reports List Access the Create Report Page Access the Generate Page Access the Modify Report Page Access the Replicate Report Page Access the View Report Page Change a Report Definition to Public or Private Change User in Report Writer Copy a Report Definition Copy All of a User's Report Definitions Delete a Report Definition Delete All of a User's Report Definitions Filter Report Writer List of Reports Transfer a Report Definition Transfer All of a User's Report Definitions View the Dealer's List of Reports (Internal Users Only) View a Report Definition About the Reports List Access the Create Report Page Access the Generate Page Access the Modify Report Page Access the Replicate Report Page Access the View Report Page Change a Report Definition to Public or Private Change User in Report Writer Copy a Report Definition Copy All of a User's Report Definitions Delete a Report Definition Delete All of a User's Report Definitions Filter Report Writer List of Reports Transfer a Report Definition Transfer All of a User's Report Definitions View the Dealer's List of Reports (Internal Users Only) View a Report Definition Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Report Writer page. Change User in Report Writer Workflow Copy All, Transfer All, or Delete All Report Definitions Workflow Copy, Transfer, Delete, or Make Report Definition Public Workflow Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Workflow Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow Page Preview
Report Writer Page Overview Purpose Use the Report Writer page to view a list of your existing custom report definitions, which you can create for your specific needs. The list also includes public report definitions. Using one of the report definitions in your list, you can generate a report.You can also copy, transfer, or modify the definitions in your list or create a new report definition. Description The content area of the Report Writer page displays the following sections: Filter by - Allows you to filter the information to display only the records that match your criteria List of Reports - Displays general information for all records on the page Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Report Writer page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. About the Reports List Access the Create Report Page Access the Generate Page Access the Modify Report Page Access the Replicate Report Page Access the View Report Page Change a Report Definition to Public or Private Change User in Report Writer Copy a Report Definition Copy All of a User's Report Definitions Delete a Report Definition Delete All of a User's Report Definitions Filter Report Writer List of Reports Transfer a Report Definition Transfer All of a User's Report Definitions View the Dealer's List of Reports (Internal Users Only) View a Report Definition About the Reports List Access the Create Report Page Access the Generate Page Access the Modify Report Page Access the Replicate Report Page Access the View Report Page Change a Report Definition to Public or Private Change User in Report Writer Copy a Report Definition Copy All of a User's Report Definitions Delete a Report Definition Delete All of a User's Report Definitions Filter Report Writer List of Reports Transfer a Report Definition Transfer All of a User's Report Definitions View the Dealer's List of Reports (Internal Users Only) View a Report Definition Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Report Writer page. Change User in Report Writer Workflow Copy All, Transfer All, or Delete All Report Definitions Workflow Copy, Transfer, Delete, or Make Report Definition Public Workflow Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Workflow Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow Page Preview
To open the Create Parts Order page: Click the Create New Order button. Note : The Create Parts Order page appears.
Open the Create Parts Order Page To open the Create Parts Order page: Click the Create New Order button. Note : The Create Parts Order page appears.
Manage Orders Manage Orders Manage Orders Manage Orders Parts Order Management Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing parts orders. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Parts Order workflow. Create Parts Order Workflow Edit Parts Order Workflow Inquire on the Availability of Parts at the Parts Distribution Centers Workflow View Parts Order Workflow Create Parts Order Workflow Edit Parts Order Workflow View Parts Order Workflow
Create Create Order Create SVC Order Create Order Create Order Create SVC Order Create Order Create Order Create Order Create SVC Order Create Create Order Create Parts Order Workflow *** Nissan Canada Inc. (NCI) recommends dealers create parts orders in an NCI DBS certified dealer management system and then log into NCI DBS to review and submit the order to NCI. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating a parts order. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create Parts Order Workflow. Edit Parts Order Workflow Manage Parts Order Workflow Inquire on the Availability of Parts at the Parts Distribution Centers Workflow View Parts Order Workflow Edit Parts Order Workflow Manage Parts Order Workflow View Parts Order Workflow
To open the Create Parts Order page: Click the Create New Order button. Note : The Create Parts Order page appears.
Open the Create Parts Order Page To open the Create Parts Order page: Click the Create New Order button. Note : The Create Parts Order page appears.
Manage Orders Manage Orders Manage Orders Manage Orders Parts Order Management Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing parts orders. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Parts Order workflow. Create Parts Order Workflow Edit Parts Order Workflow Inquire on the Availability of Parts at the Parts Distribution Centers Workflow View Parts Order Workflow Create Parts Order Workflow Edit Parts Order Workflow View Parts Order Workflow
Create Create Order Create SVC Order Create Order Create Order Create SVC Order Create Order Create Order Create Order Create SVC Order Create Create Order Create Parts Order Workflow *** Nissan Canada Inc. (NCI) recommends dealers create parts orders in an NCI DBS certified dealer management system and then log into NCI DBS to review and submit the order to NCI. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating a parts order. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create Parts Order Workflow. Edit Parts Order Workflow Manage Parts Order Workflow Inquire on the Availability of Parts at the Parts Distribution Centers Workflow View Parts Order Workflow Edit Parts Order Workflow Manage Parts Order Workflow View Parts Order Workflow
63FEFBCB-D0C2-41B4-9E6A-9BBF80309A5D\Parts Return and Accrual Information Quick Reference Guide v1.pdf
To copy a report definition: Select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Copy option. Note : The Copy Report page appears where you can select a user to receive the report definition. Click here for more information.
Copy a Report Definition To copy a report definition: In the List of Reports section, select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Copy option. Note : The Copy Report page appears where you can select a user to receive the report definition. Click here for more information.
To copy a report definition: Select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Copy option. Note : The Copy Report page appears where you can select a user to receive the report definition. Click here for more information.
Copy a Report Definition To copy a report definition: In the List of Reports section, select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Copy option. Note : The Copy Report page appears where you can select a user to receive the report definition. Click here for more information.
To copy a report definition: Select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Copy option. Note : The Copy Report page appears where you can select a user to receive the report definition. Click here for more information.
Copy a Report Definition To copy a report definition: In the List of Reports section, select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Copy option. Note : The Copy Report page appears where you can select a user to receive the report definition. Click here for more information.
To copy a report definition: Select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Copy option. Note : The Copy Report page appears where you can select a user to receive the report definition. Click here for more information.
Copy a Report Definition To copy a report definition: In the List of Reports section, select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Copy option. Note : The Copy Report page appears where you can select a user to receive the report definition. Click here for more information.
To copy a report definition: Select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Copy option. Note : The Copy Report page appears where you can select a user to receive the report definition. Click here for more information.
Copy a Report Definition To copy a report definition: In the List of Reports section, select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Copy option. Note : The Copy Report page appears where you can select a user to receive the report definition. Click here for more information.
To delete an alert: Select an alert. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Delete option. Note : A confirmation message displays. Click the Yes button to confirm the deletion or click the No button to close the message window without deleting the alert.
Delete an Alert To delete an alert: Select the alert you want to delete. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Delete option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm the deletion or click the No button to close the message window without deleting the alert.
To complete the Summary section of a claim: Option 1: Search for a repair order and line number: In the Repair Order field, type the number of the repair order. In the Line Number field, type the line number of the repair order for which you wish to create a claim. Click the Search icon. In the Odometer field, type the odometer reading if the number was not automatically filled in from the RO. Option 2: Complete the Summary section of an express warranty claim: In the VIN field, type the VIN of the vehicle. In the Repair Order field, type the number of the repair order. In the Line Number field, type the line number of the repair order for which you wish to create a claim. In the Odometer field, type the odometer reading. If you search for the repair order, the Claim Total is initially populated with data. As you add data to the page, you can manually refresh this total at any time by clicking the Refresh Claim Total link.
Complete the Summary Section of an Express Entry Warranty Claim To complete the Summary section of an express entry warranty claim: Option 1: Search for a repair order and line number: In the Repair Order field, type the number of the repair order. In the Line Number field, type the line number of the repair order for which you wish to create a claim. Click the Search icon. In the Odometer field, type the odometer reading if the number was not automatically filled in from the RO. Option 2: Complete the Summary section of an express warranty claim: In the VIN field, type the VIN of the vehicle. In the Repair Order field, type the number of the repair order. In the Line Number field, type the line number of the repair order for which you wish to create a claim. In the Odometer field, type the odometer reading.
This section of a study is not required, but provides the opportunity to customize or limit a study's results. Use optional study sections to clearly define study parameters, but use caution as conflicting selections will result in no data being returned. To complete the regions section of a study: Select each region which should be included in the study, and then use the center buttons as necessary to customize the Selected Regions list. Note : The repair orders included in a study with a region selection are determined by the dealer location where the vehicle is serviced. When you have selected all desired regions, click the Save button.
Complete the Regions Section of a Study This section of a study is not required, but provides the opportunity to customize or limit a study's results. Use optional study sections to clearly define study parameters, but use caution as conflicting selections will result in no data being returned. To complete the Regions section of a study: Select each region which should be included in the study, and then use the center buttons as necessary to customize the Selected Regions list. Note : The repair orders included in a study with a region selection are determined by the dealer location where the vehicle is serviced. When you have selected all desired regions, click the Save button.
Request a Full Parts Master Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for requesting a full parts master file.
To view the Quick Look chart: Move your cursor over each bar of the chart. Note : The total for closed deals, booked deals, or open RDRs appears for the current day, month to date (MTD), or year to date (YTD).
View the Sales Quick Look Chart To view the Sales Quick Look chart: Move your cursor over each bar of the chart. Note : The total for closed deals, booked deals, or open RDRs appears for the current day, month to date (MTD), or year to date (YTD). Move your cursor over each bar of the chart. Note : The total for closed deals and booked deals.
To re-run the translation process for a dealer operation code: Above the Dealer Operation Code Summary list, click the Re-Run button. Note : The Re-Run Confirmation window opens. In the Re-Run Confirmation window, click the Re-Run button. Note : A message indicates the translation process is running, then a second message appears stating the translation process has completed successfully Click the Close button to close the Re-Run Confirmation window. Note : The system updates the re-translated repair order (RO) lines in the National Service History (NSH) RO table with a standard operation code and the re-translation date. Use Report Writer to create a report of the National Service History (NSH) RO table to review the re-translation results.
Re-Run Translation Process - Dealer Operation Code To re-run the translation process for a dealer operation code: Click the Re-Run button. Note : The Re-Run Confirmation window opens. In the Re-Run Confirmation window, click the OK button. Note : The system updates the re-translated repair order (RO) lines in the National Service History (NSH) RO table with a standard operation code and the re-translation date. Use Report Writer to create a report of the National Service History (NSH) RO table to review the re-translation results.
Dealer Operation Code Dealer Operation Codes ReRun Dealer Operation Codes Translation Manage Dealer Operation Codes Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing dealer operation codes. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Dealer Operation Codes Workflow. Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes Workflow Manage Standard Operation Categories Workflow Manage Standard Operation Codes Workflow
To submit a parts return from the Create or Edit Parts Return page: Click the Submit button. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click Yes to submit the parts return or No to cancel. Note : If the parts return contains warnings, DBS displays a warning message. Note : If a warning message appears, click OK to proceed or No to cancel. Note : If you cancel the submission, edit the parts return to resolve any errors and resubmit. To submit a parts return, the return must be in "New," "Open," or blank status. You cannot submit a parts return to the host more than five days prior to the return due date.
Submit a Parts Return from the Create or Edit Parts Return Page To submit a parts return from the Create or Edit Parts Return page: Click the Submit button. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click Yes to submit the parts return or No to cancel. Note : If the parts return contains warnings, DBS displays a warning message. Note : If a warning message appears, click OK to proceed or No to cancel. Note : If you cancel the submission, edit the parts return to resolve any errors and resubmit. To submit a parts return, the return must be in "New" or "Open" status. You cannot submit a parts return to the host more than five days prior to the return due date.
Create Return Create Return Create Return Create Parts Return Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating a parts return. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create Parts Return Workflow. Manage Parts Return Workflow Modify Parts Return Workflow
Edit Return Edit Return Edit Return Edit Parts Return Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for modifying a parts return. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Edit Parts Return Workflow. Create Parts Return Workflow Manage Parts Return Workflow
To access the Home page: Click the Home tab. Note : You can also click the Nissan logo in the upper-left corner to access the Home page. For more information about the sections available on the Home page, click the links below: Home Page Overview Perform Common DBS Tasks View Alerts View Announcements and Other News
Access the Home Page To access the Home page: Click the Home tab. Note : You can also click the Nissan logo in the upper-left corner to access the Home page. For more information about the sections available on the Home page, click the links below: Home Page Overview Perform Common DBS Tasks View Alerts View Announcements and Other News Home Page Overview Perform Common DBS Tasks View Alerts View Announcements and Other News
To delete a part from the PDC Inquiry list: Select the part you want to delete. Move your cursor over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Delete option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm the deletion, or the No button to cancel the deletion. Note : The system removes the part from the PDC Inquiry list. PDC Inquiry, also referred to as VOR Inquiry, allows you to inquire on part availability at parts distribution centers -- giving you the ability to create cost effective orders. After you perform the inquiry, select the parts to be added to your order.
Delete a Part from the PDC Inquiry List To delete a part from the PDC Inquiry list: Select the part you want to delete. Move your cursor over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Delete option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm the deletion, or the No button to cancel the deletion. PDC Inquiry, also referred to as VOR Inquiry, allows you to inquire on part availability at parts distribution centers -- giving you the ability to create cost effective orders. After you perform the inquiry, select the parts to be added to your order.
PDC Inquiry VOR Inquiry PDC Inquiry Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for performing a Parts Distribution Center (PDC) inquiry. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Inquire on Parts Distribution Center Workflow. Manage Parts Order Workflow
To delete an event: Select an event. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Delete option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Delete button to confirm, or click the Cancel button to close without confirming.
Delete an Event To delete an event: Select an event. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Delete option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Delete button to confirm, or click the Cancel button to close without confirming.
Edit Dealer Permissions Workflow Note : This workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for editing dealer permissions. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Edit Dealer Permissions Workflow. Dealer Summary Workflow
Manage Host Report Page Overview Purpose Use the Manage Host Report page to add Host reports to DBS that have already been created in the Host system. Reports added through this page become available to DBS users on the Host Reports page. Description The content area of the Manage Host Report page displays the following sections: Report Creation - Use the Report Creation section to add new reports to the Host reports list. Reports List - The Host Reports List section is where you edit existing Host reports.You can also filter, sort, or customize the reports list as needed. Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the xx page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. About the Manage Host Report Page Add a New Host Report on the Manage Host Report Page Edit a Host Report on the Manage Host Report Page Filter the Manage Host Report Page Page Preview
To select the criteria operators: Select a field you want to filter. From the Operator drop-down list, select the operator for the filter. In the Value field, type the value for the filter operator. Select the report fields to be sorted. Click here for instructions to select the report fields to be sorted. Selecting criteria operators is not required. You can leave this section blank when creating reports.
Complete the Selection Criteria Section of a Report To select the criteria operators: Select a field you want to filter. From the Operator drop-down list, select the operator for the filter. In the Value field, type the value for the filter operator. Select the report fields to be sorted. Click here for instructions to select the report fields to be sorted. Selecting criteria operators is not required. You can leave this section blank when creating reports.
To select the criteria operators: Select a field you want to filter. From the Operator drop-down list, select the operator for the filter. In the Value field, type the value for the filter operator. Select the report fields to be sorted. Click here for instructions to select the report fields to be sorted. Selecting criteria operators is not required. You can leave this section blank when creating reports.
Complete the Selection Criteria Section of a Report To select the criteria operators: Select a field you want to filter. From the Operator drop-down list, select the operator for the filter. In the Value field, type the value for the filter operator. Select the report fields to be sorted. Click here for instructions to select the report fields to be sorted. Selecting criteria operators is not required. You can leave this section blank when creating reports.
To select the criteria operators: Select a field you want to filter. From the Operator drop-down list, select the operator for the filter. In the Value field, type the value for the filter operator. Select the report fields to be sorted. Click here for instructions to select the report fields to be sorted. Selecting criteria operators is not required. You can leave this section blank when creating reports.
Complete the Selection Criteria Section of a Report To select the criteria operators: Select a field you want to filter. From the Operator drop-down list, select the operator for the filter. In the Value field, type the value for the filter operator. Select the report fields to be sorted. Click here for instructions to select the report fields to be sorted. Selecting criteria operators is not required. You can leave this section blank when creating reports.
To select the criteria operators: Select a field you want to filter. From the Operator drop-down list, select the operator for the filter. In the Value field, type the value for the filter operator. Select the report fields to be sorted. Click here for instructions to select the report fields to be sorted. Selecting criteria operators is not required. You can leave this section blank when creating reports.
Complete the Selection Criteria Section of a Report To select the criteria operators: Select a field you want to filter. From the Operator drop-down list, select the operator for the filter. In the Value field, type the value for the filter operator. Select the report fields to be sorted. Click here for instructions to select the report fields to be sorted. Selecting criteria operators is not required. You can leave this section blank when creating reports.
To select the criteria operators: Select a field you want to filter. From the Operator drop-down list, select the operator for the filter. In the Value field, type the value for the filter operator. Select the report fields to be sorted. Click here for instructions to select the report fields to be sorted. Selecting criteria operators is not required. You can leave this section blank when creating reports.
Complete the Selection Criteria Section of a Report To select the criteria operators: Select a field you want to filter. From the Operator drop-down list, select the operator for the filter. In the Value field, type the value for the filter operator. Select the report fields to be sorted. Click here for instructions to select the report fields to be sorted. Selecting criteria operators is not required. You can leave this section blank when creating reports.
To view Dealer Claim Administration Limits (DCAL) from the Manage Warranty Claim page, Edit/Create Warranty Claim page, or the View Warranty Claim page: Click the DCAL button. Note : An external application opens. Follow the procedures within that application to complete this task. You can also perform this task on the View Warranty Claim page and Edit/Create Warranty Claim page.
View DCAL To view Dealer Claim Administration Limits (DCAL): Click the DCAL button. Note : An external application opens. Follow the procedures within that application to complete this task. You can also perform this task on the View Warranty Claim page and Edit/Create Warranty Claim page.
Manage Warranty Claims Processes Manage Warranty Claims Manage Warranty Claims Manage Warranty Claims Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing warranty claims. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create or Edit Warranty Claims Workflow or View Warranty Claims Workflow. Edit or Create Warranty Claims Workflow View Warranty Claims Workflow
Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Edit Warranty Claims Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Warranty Claims Edit or Create Warranty Claims Workflow *** Nissan Canada Inc. (NCI) recommends dealers create Warranty Claims in an NCI DBS certified dealer management system and then log into NCI DBS to review, validate and submit the claim to NCI. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating and editing claims. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Warranty Claims Workflow or View Warranty Claims Workflow. Manage Warranty Claims Workflow View Warranty Claims Workflow
To view Dealer Claim Administration Limits (DCAL) from the Manage Warranty Claim page, Edit/Create Warranty Claim page, or the View Warranty Claim page: Click the DCAL button. Note : An external application opens. Follow the procedures within that application to complete this task. You can also perform this task on the View Warranty Claim page and Edit/Create Warranty Claim page.
View DCAL To view Dealer Claim Administration Limits (DCAL): Click the DCAL button. Note : An external application opens. Follow the procedures within that application to complete this task. You can also perform this task on the View Warranty Claim page and Edit/Create Warranty Claim page.
Manage Warranty Claims Processes Manage Warranty Claims Manage Warranty Claims Manage Warranty Claims Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing warranty claims. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create or Edit Warranty Claims Workflow or View Warranty Claims Workflow. Edit or Create Warranty Claims Workflow View Warranty Claims Workflow
Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Edit Warranty Claims Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Warranty Claims Edit or Create Warranty Claims Workflow *** Nissan Canada Inc. (NCI) recommends dealers create Warranty Claims in an NCI DBS certified dealer management system and then log into NCI DBS to review, validate and submit the claim to NCI. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating and editing claims. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Warranty Claims Workflow or View Warranty Claims Workflow. Manage Warranty Claims Workflow View Warranty Claims Workflow
20E1C34F-112A-4B20-BDB8-D3FC50C02DEC\back.htm
To open the Edit Notification page: Select a notification. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. Select the Edit menu option. You cannot edit a notification that has been approved or sent.
Open the Edit Notification Page To open the Edit Notification page: Select a notification. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Edit option. You cannot edit a notification that has been approved or sent.
To filter the standard operation codes summary list: From the Filter By drop-down list, select a filter option. Type or select a secondary filter value. View the codes that meet the selected criteria. Note: To reset the filter criteria to the default options, click the Clear icon.
Filter the Standard Operation Codes Summary To filter the standard operation codes summary list: From the Filter By drop-down list, select a filter option. Type or select a secondary filter value. View the codes that meet the selected criteria. Note: To reset the filter criteria to the default options, click the Clear icon.
ReRun Standard Operation Code Translation Manage Standard Operation Codes Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing standard operation codes. Related Workflows ( Note to developer : List the related workflows and link to them.) The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Standard Operation Codes Workflow. Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes Workflow Manage Dealer Operation Codes Workflow Manage Standard Operation Categories Workflow
To delete a study: Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon for the study you want to delete. From the Action menu, select the Delete Study option. Note : The Delete Study confirmation window opens. Click the Delete button to confirm. You cannot delete studies that have a status of "Ended."
Delete a Study To delete a study: Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon for the study you want to delete. From the Action menu, select the Delete Study option. Note : The Delete Study confirmation window opens. Click the Delete button to confirm. You cannot delete studies that have a status of "Ended."
Early Detection System (EDS) EDS: Study Dashboard Processes EDS: Study Dashboard Study Study Dashboard Technical Service Bulletin (TSB) Create or Modify a Study Workflow Note : The Create or Modify a Study workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for defining or modifying a study that integrates appointment and repair order data collected by the Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Define or Modify a Study Workflow. Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow View One Study Result Workflow
To view vehicle detail: Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon for the selected vehicle. From the Action menu, select the View Vehicle Detail option. Note : The Vehicle Inventory Detail window appears. View the inventory detail. Note : To print the contents of the Vehicle Inventory Detail window, click the Print button and follow the prompts. Note : To email the vehicle detail, click the Email button and follow the prompts. When you are done viewing, click Close to close the window and return to DBS .
View Vehicle Detail from Vehicle Inventory To view vehicle detail: Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon for the selected vehicle. From the Action menu, select the View Vehicle Detail option. Note : The Vehicle Inventory Detail window appears. View the information in the Vehicle Inventory Detail window. To print the inventory detail, click the Print button. Note : The contents of the Inventory Detail window display in a printable PDF file. Click the Print icon to print the file. To email the inventory detail, click the Email button. In the Receiver and CC (Carbon Copy) fields, type the email address of the person(s) who should receive the vehicle invoice/detail information. Click the Send button. Click the Close button to close the vehicle detail and return to the Vehicle Inventory page. To view vehicle detail: Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon for the selected vehicle. From the Action menu, select the View Vehicle Detail option. Note : The Vehicle Inventory Detail window appears. View the information in the Vehicle Inventory Detail window. When you are done viewing, click the Close button to close the window and return to DBS .
Vehicle Inventory Management Inventory Managment Processes Inventory Managment Vehicle Inventory Management Vehicle Inventory Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing vehicle inventory data at the dealerships. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Vehicle Inventory workflow. Report the Sale of a Vehicle (RDR) Workflow Search Vehicle Inventory Workflow Search Vehicle Inventory Workflow
To submit an RDR: Complete or edit each section of the RDR. Click here for more information. To print the RDR confirmation after submission, select the Automatically print RDR confirmation after submission? checkbox. Click the Submit button to send the RDR to the NNA Host. Note : If errors exist, a icon will display. Correct the errors and click the Submit button again. Note : When you submit the RDR, a message displays stating that the submission of the RDR to the NNA Host is in process. This may take a few seconds to complete. When DBS receives acknowledgement from the NNA Host, a response displays in the Summary section, and DBS changes the vehicle status to "Retailed" or "RDR Rejected". When you submit an RDR, the VIN is added to the RDR History page. A retailed vehicle will be removed from inventory with the next inventory update. These updates occur every 30 minutes, so you may have to wait a maximum of 30 minutes for your inventory to refresh and display accurate counts.
Submit an RDR To submit an RDR: Complete or edit each section of the RDR. Click here for more information. To print the RDR confirmation after submission, select the Automatically print RDR confirmation after submission? checkbox. Click the Submit button to send the RDR to the NNA Host. Note : If errors exist, a icon will display. Correct the errors and click the Submit button again. Note : When you submit the RDR, a message displays stating that the submission of the RDR to the NNA Host is in process. This may take a few seconds to complete. When DBS receives acknowledgement from the NNA Host, a response displays in the Summary section, and DBS changes the vehicle status to "Retailed" or "RDR Rejected". Vehicles with the status of "Retailed" display on the RDR History page, and those with the status of "RDR Rejected" remain in inventory.
Processes RDR RDR RDR a Vehicle Workflow Note : This workflow is for NNA users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for retail delivery reporting (RDR) or editing the sale of a vehicle. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Report or Edit the Sale of a Vehicle workflow. Vehicle Inventory Workflow Inventory Search Workflow View RDR History Workflow
To open the PDC Inquiry page to view part availability: Click the PDC Inquiry button. Note : The PDC Inquiry page appears. PDC Inquiry, also referred to as VOR Inquiry, allows you to inquire on part availability at parts distribution centers -- giving you the ability to create cost effective orders. After you perform the inquiry, select the parts to be added to your order.
Open the PDC Inquiry Page to View Part Availability To open the PDC Inquiry page to view part availability: Click the PDC Inquiry button. Note : The PDC Inquiry page appears. PDC Inquiry, also referred to as VOR Inquiry, allows you to inquire on part availability at parts distribution centers -- giving you the ability to create cost effective orders. After you perform the inquiry, select the parts to be added to your order.
PDC Inquiry VOR Inquiry PDC Inquiry Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for performing a Parts Distribution Center (PDC) inquiry. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Inquire on Parts Distribution Center Workflow. Manage Parts Order Workflow
Manage Orders Manage Orders Manage Orders Manage Orders Parts Order Management Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing parts orders. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Parts Order workflow. Create Parts Order Workflow Edit Parts Order Workflow Inquire on the Availability of Parts at the Parts Distribution Centers Workflow View Parts Order Workflow Create Parts Order Workflow Edit Parts Order Workflow View Parts Order Workflow
To open the PDC Inquiry page to view part availability: Click the PDC Inquiry button. Note : The PDC Inquiry page appears. PDC Inquiry, also referred to as VOR Inquiry, allows you to inquire on part availability at parts distribution centers -- giving you the ability to create cost effective orders. After you perform the inquiry, select the parts to be added to your order.
Open the PDC Inquiry Page to View Part Availability To open the PDC Inquiry page to view part availability: Click the PDC Inquiry button. Note : The PDC Inquiry page appears. PDC Inquiry, also referred to as VOR Inquiry, allows you to inquire on part availability at parts distribution centers -- giving you the ability to create cost effective orders. After you perform the inquiry, select the parts to be added to your order.
PDC Inquiry VOR Inquiry PDC Inquiry Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for performing a Parts Distribution Center (PDC) inquiry. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Inquire on Parts Distribution Center Workflow. Manage Parts Order Workflow
Manage Orders Manage Orders Manage Orders Manage Orders Parts Order Management Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing parts orders. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Parts Order workflow. Create Parts Order Workflow Edit Parts Order Workflow Inquire on the Availability of Parts at the Parts Distribution Centers Workflow View Parts Order Workflow Create Parts Order Workflow Edit Parts Order Workflow View Parts Order Workflow
View Overview Information Standard Operation Codes Page Overview Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes Workflow Manage Standard Operation Codes Workflow Perform Tasks Access the Create Standard Operation Group Page Access the Edit Standard Operation Group Page Delete a Standard Operation Code Export the Standard Operation Codes Summary Filter the Standard Operation Codes Summary Perform Common DBS Tasks Re-Run Translation Process Restart a Standard Operation Code Suspend a Standard Operation Code View the Standard Operation Code Summary and Detail Delete a Standard Operation Code Export the Standard Operation Codes Summary Filter the Standard Operation Codes Summary Perform Common DBS Tasks Re-Run Translation Process Restart a Standard Operation Code Suspend a Standard Operation Code View the Standard Operation Code Summary and Detail
ReRun Standard Operation Code Translation Manage Standard Operation Codes Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing standard operation codes. Related Workflows ( Note to developer : List the related workflows and link to them.) The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Standard Operation Codes Workflow. Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes Workflow Manage Dealer Operation Codes Workflow Manage Standard Operation Categories Workflow
Standard Operation Codes Standard Operation Code Standard Operation Codes Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating or editing standard operation groups and codes. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes workflow. Manage Dealer Operation Codes Workflow Manage Standard Operation Categories Workflow Manage Standard Operation Codes Workflow
Position Summary Page Overview Note : The Position Summary page applies to internal users only. Purpose Use the Position Summary page to view the list of positions for which you can set permissions. You can also open the pages that allow you to view, set up or edit permissions for a selected position. Description The content area of the Position Summary page displays the following sections: Filter By - Allows you to filter the information to display only the records that match your criteria Export button - Allows you to export the position permissions in an Microsoft ® Excel ® spreadsheet that are currently in the system Import button - Allows you to import an Microsoft ® Excel ® spreadsheet on your computer that contains changes to position permissions Position Summary List - Displays general information for all records on the page Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Position Summary page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. About the Position Summary Access the Edit Position Permissions Page Access the View Position Permissions Page Export Position Permissions Currently in the System Filter the Position Summary Import Changes to Position Permissions Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Position Summary page. Edit Position Permissions Workflow (Internal Users Only) View Position Permissions Workflow (Internal Users Only) Page Preview
NNAnet Pages The DBS Sales, Parts, and Administration menu tabs contain external links to NissanNet application pages that look and function in a very similar manner to DBS pages. You can recognize these pages by the logo in the upper left corner and the return to DCS ( DBS ) link in the upper right corner. Although they may be incorporated into DBS at a later date, these pages are currently developed and maintained by NissanNet, and there is no DBS help provided for these pages. If you need assistance in using any of the NissanNet external pages, please contact the NNA help desk at 1-800-514-8061. Area Pages Sales Dealer Payment Summary Inquiry Retail Customer Inquiry MAPS Vehicle Locator MAPS Dealer Ordering NDSN Dealer Information Service Backorder Cancellation Parts Catalog Parts Locator RFC Billing Errors and Freight Claims RFC Parts Claim VOR Backorder Status / CSC Upgrade VOR / CSC / STK Backorder Status Administration Communication Status Inquiry Online Dealer Listing Report Profile
To export the dealer operation code summary: Click the Export button. Select the output format. Note : The File Download window opens. Save the file to your local drive. If you filter the page before exporting, only those records that meet the filter criteria export. You can filter, sort, and print the data if you export the information to Microsoft ® Excel ® .
Export the Dealer Operation Code Summary To export the dealer operation code summary: Click the Export button. Select the output format. Note: The File Download window opens. Save the file to your local drive. If you filter the page before exporting, only those records that meet the filter criteria will export. You can filter, sort, and print the data if you export the information to Microsoft® Excel®.
Dealer Operation Code Dealer Operation Codes ReRun Dealer Operation Codes Translation Manage Dealer Operation Codes Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing dealer operation codes. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Dealer Operation Codes Workflow. Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes Workflow Manage Standard Operation Categories Workflow Manage Standard Operation Codes Workflow
National Service History Page Overview Purpose The National Service History (NSH) page allows you to conduct vehicle searches, view NSH data, and print NSH reports. Description The content area of the National Service History page displays the following sections: Customer Search - Allows you to type a variety of criteria to search for a customer or vehicle. Summary - Displays a list of search results based on the criteria you entered. Note : From here, you can click the desired VIN link to access further details in a series of NSH sections, replacing the prior list of search results. Tasks You can perform the following tasks from or on the National Service History page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks . Search for a Customer or Vehicle Search for a Customer or Vehicle Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the National Service History page . View National Service History Workflow Page Preview
To copy a notification: Select a notification. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Copy option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Copy button to copy your selection, or click the Cancel button to close without copying. The default status of a copied notification is "Needs Approval".
Copy a Notification To copy a notification: Select a notification. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Copy option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Copy button to copy your selection, or click the Cancel button to close without copying. The default status of a copied notification is "Needs Approval".
View Overview Information View Warranty Claim Page Overview Perform Tasks Add a New Claim Line Perform Common DBS Tasks Print Warranty Claim View Dealer Claim Administration Limits View National Service History View Repair Order Add a New Claim Line Perform Common DBS Tasks Print Warranty Claim View National Service History View Repair Order
View National Service History Page Overview Purpose Use the National Service History page to view and print National Service History (NSH) information for a vehicle. Description The content area of the National Service History page displays the following sections: Quick Jump menu - Appears on the left-hand side of the page. The Quick Jump menu allows you to jump from section to section without scrolling. VIN Quick Search - Appears below the quick jump menu and allows users to immediately search the National Service History information for a new vehicle VIN. National Service History - Indicates if the selected vehicle has open campaigns, Technical Service Bulletins, service contracts, is under warranty, or has a branded title. This section provides links to other sections as applicable. Vehicle Detail - Provides important information about the selected vehicle, including the VIN (Vehicle Identification Number). Note : In NSH, the VIN ties everything together. Customer - Provides customer information, including the customer's name and location. Vehicle Options - Provides a list of options included with the vehicle, such as floor mats or splash guards. Open Campaign Information - Provides a list of open campaigns that apply to the selected vehicle. Technical Service Bulletin Information - Provides a list of Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) that apply to the vehicle. Warranty Coverage Information - Indicates the status of warranty coverage for the vehicle. Warranty Extensions/Customer Service Initiative - Indicates any warranty extensions for the vehicle including the warranty type, expiration date and expiration odometer mileage. Warranty Exclusion Information - Indicates any warranty exclusions that have been applied to specific part number codes on the vehicle. Applied Remarks - Displays additional remarks about TSBs referenced. Service Contracts - Displays service contracts applied to the vehicle and their status. Repair Order Information - Displays Repair Order (RO) information for the vehicle. Warranty Information - Displays applicable warranty claim information for the vehicle. Tasks You can perform the following tasks from or on the View National Service History page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks . Search for a New VIN from the View NSH Page Use the View NSH Quick Jump Menu View National Service History Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the National Service History page . View National Service History Workflow Page Preview
To view the detailed line items and information for any parts return on the Parts Return Summary page: In the Dealer Ref # column or the Return Number column, clicked the hyperlinked dealer reference number or return number for the parts return you wish to review. Note : The parts return detail displays in a new window.
View Parts Return Details from the Parts Return Summary Page To view the detailed line items and information for any parts return on the Parts Return Summary page: In the Dealer Ref # column or the Return Number column, clicked the hyperlinked dealer reference number or return number for the parts return you wish to review. Note : The parts return detail displays in a new window.
To view the Parts Order Management summary and detail: Review the list of parts orders. To sort the displayed information, click the arrow beside a column title. Note : If multiple pages exist, click a page number or click the forward or backward arrow to navigate from page to page. To view a specific page, in the Go to Page field, type a page number, and then click the Go button. Select the line for which you want to view detail. If necessary, scroll down to the Parts Order Detail section and click Show Detail . Review the detail for the selected parts order.
About the Parts Order Management Page To view the Parts Order Management summary and detail: Review the list of part orders. To sort the displayed information, click the arrow beside a column title. Note : If multiple pages exist, click a page number or click the forward or backward arrow to navigate from page to page. To view a specific page, in the Go to Page field, type a page number, and then click the Go button. Select the line for which you want to view detail. If necessary, scroll down to the Parts Order Detail section and click Show Detail . Review the detail for the selected parts order. To view the Parts Order Management summary and detail: Review the list of parts orders. To sort the displayed information, click the arrow beside a column title. Note : If multiple pages exist, click a page number or click the forward or backward arrow to navigate from page to page. To view a specific page, in the Go to Page field, type a page number, and then click the Go button. Select the line for which you want to view detail. If necessary, scroll down to the Parts Order Detail section and click the Show Detail link. Review the detail for the selected parts order.
Manage Orders Manage Orders Manage Orders Manage Orders Parts Order Management Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing parts orders. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Parts Order workflow. Create Parts Order Workflow Edit Parts Order Workflow Inquire on the Availability of Parts at the Parts Distribution Centers Workflow View Parts Order Workflow Create Parts Order Workflow Edit Parts Order Workflow View Parts Order Workflow
To delete a link from your My Links list: Move your cursor over the My Links link. Click the Delete icon for the link you want to remove. Click the Yes button to remove the link, or click the No button to close the message without removing the link.
Delete a Link from My Links To delete a bookmark from your My Links list: Move your cursor over the My Links link. Click the Delete icon for the link you want to remove. Click the Yes button to remove the link, or click the No button to close the message without deleting the link.
For information on how to report the sale of a new vehicle using the Quick Entry RDR page, click here . To report or edit the sale of a used vehicle in inventory using the Quick Entry Used Vehicle Sale page: From the Filter By drop-down list, select the attribute by which to search for the vehicle. In the Filter By data entry field, enter the number by which to search for the vehicle. Click the Search icon to search for the vehicle. Complete or edit each section of the RDR. Complete the Vehicle section of the RDR. Click here for more information. Complete the Buyer section of the RDR. Click here for more information Complete the Driver section of the RDR. Click here for more information Complete the Finance section of the RDR. Click here for more information. Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Note : Any field that displays a circle indicates the information is required and needs to be completed or corrected before submitting the RDR. Note : If the RDR contains errors, an error message displays. Click the Yes button to save the RDR with errors, or click the No button to close the error message and return to the Quick Entry Used Vehicle Sale page. Click the Submit button to submit the RDR.
RDR a Used Vehicle Using Quick Entry RDR For information on how to report the sale of a vehicle traded in OMS that is not yet in your inventory, click here . To report or edit the sale of a used vehicle using the Quick Entry Used Vehicle Sale page: From the Filter By drop-down list, select the attribute you want to use for searching for the vehicle. Note : The selected filter remains as the selection until you change it. For example, if you select "Stock Number", it remains the search attribute until you change it to another value. In the Filter By data entry field, enter the number by which to search for the vehicle. Click the Search icon to search for the vehicle. Note : DBS processes the search request. If the vehicle is found in the dealer's inventory, DBS provides additional information about the vehicle, and you then continue with data entry. If the vehicle is found and meets the conditions to be RDR'd, DBS populates the following fields: VIN, Stock Number, Model Code, Model Description, and Model Year. Enter or update additional information in the Vehicle section, as needed. Note : Click here for more information. Complete the Buyer and Driver sections of the RDR, filling in the fields that were not auto-populated. Note : Click here for more information on completing the Buyer section or here for more information on the Driver section. If necessary, enter loan or lease details in the Finance section. Note : Click here for more information. Click the Save button, and then click the Submit button. Note : If errors exist, correct the errors and click the Submit button again. Note : When you submit the RDR, the Host processes the RDR and responds by indicating whether the RDR is rejected or accepted. The cursor returns to the Filter By data entry field to allow you to enter the next RDR. Note : When an RDR transaction is successful, the vehicle is marked as "Retailed" in the Vehicle Inventory view and added to the RDR History.
0A55E0D8-6410-42E2-A471-D9347017D028\NOTOR DCS Integration - Dealer Reference Guide v2.pdf
How to RDR and Unwind Vehicles Quick Reference Guide The How to RDR and Unwind Vehicles Quick Reference Guide provides information for dealer users on three different methods for submitting a vehicle RDR, instructions for unwinding an RDR and the business rules that govern unwind requests. Click here to download the How to RDR and Unwind Vehicles Quick Reference Guide. .
How to RDR and Unwind Vehicles Quick Reference Guide The How to RDR and Unwind Vehicles Quick Reference Guide provides information for dealer users on three different methods for submitting a vehicle RDR, instructions for unwinding an RDR and the business rules that govern unwind requests. Click here to download the How to RDR and Unwind Vehicles Quick Reference Guide. .
How to RDR and Unwind Vehicles Quick Reference Guide The How to RDR and Unwind Vehicles Quick Reference Guide provides information for dealer users on three different methods for submitting a vehicle RDR, instructions for unwinding an RDR and the business rules that govern unwind requests. Click here to download the How to RDR and Unwind Vehicles Quick Reference Guide. .
To view system event detail: Select the event for which you want to view detail. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon for the selected event. From the Action menu, select the Show option. The Event Error Log displays in a new window. To view the full error detail, scroll to the right, and then click the Show link. The error details displays. Review the detailed error information, and then click the Close link to return to the Event Monitor page.
View System Event Detail To view system event detail: Select the event for which you want to view detail. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon for the selected event. From the Action menu, select the Show option. The Event Error Log displays in a new window. To view the full error detail, scroll to the right, and then click the Show link. The error details displays. Review the detailed error information, and then click the Close link to return to the Event Monitor page.
To view the Parts Return Management summary and detail: Review the list of parts returns. To sort the displayed information, click the arrow beside a column title. Note : If multiple pages exist, click a page number or click the forward or backward arrow to navigate from page to page. To view a specific page, in the Go to Page field, type a page number, then click the Go button. Select the line for which you want to view detail. If necessary, scroll down to the Parts Return Detail section and click the Show Detail link. Review the detail for the selected parts return. Total Non-Accessory Amount: Total extended cost of all part detail lines - accessory parts Remaining Accrual Amount: Total unused accrual amount available for the remaining returns when this return is created or modified. Calculated as follows: Current Accrual - Total Extended Cost
About the Parts Return Management Page To view the Parts Return Management summary and detail: Review the list of parts returns. To sort the displayed information, click the arrow beside a column title. Note : If multiple pages exist, click a page number or click the forward or backward arrow to navigate from page to page. To view a specific page, in the Go to Page field, type a page number, then click the Go button. Select the line for which you want to view detail. If necessary, scroll down to the Parts Return Detail section and click the Show Detail link. Note : Click the Hide Detail link to hide the detail section. Review the detail for the selected parts return. To view the Parts Return Management summary and detail: Review the list of parts returns. To sort the displayed information, click the arrow beside a column title. Note : If multiple pages exist, click a page number or click the forward or backward arrow to navigate from page to page. To view a specific page, in the Go to Page field, type a page number, then click the Go button. Select the line for which you want to view detail. If necessary, scroll down to the Parts Return Detail section and click the Show Detail link. Review the detail for the selected parts return.
Manage Returns Manage Returns Manage Returns Manage Parts Return Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing parts returns. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Parts Return Workflow. Create Parts Return Workflow Modify Parts Return Workflow
View Overview Information Report Writer Generate Page Overview Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow Perform Tasks Generate a Report (Dealer Users) Perform Common DBS Tasks Generate a Report (Dealer Users) Perform Common DBS Tasks
Processes Report Writer Report Writer Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow generate a personalized report using Report Writer. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow. Change User in Report Writer Workflow Copy All, Transfer All, or Delete All Report Definitions Workflow Copy, Transfer, Delete, or Make Report Definition Public Workflow Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Workflow View a Host Report Workflow
To delete a warranty claim: Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon for the claim you want to delete. From the Action menu, select the Delete Claim option. Note : DBS displays a confirmation window. Note : Claims with a status of "Submitted", "Suspended to National" (Suspended-NAT), "Denied", or "Approved" cannot be deleted. Click the Yes button to confirm deletion. Only claims in "New", "Open", "Error", "Warning", "Suspended-Dealer", and "Rejected" status can be deleted.
Delete Warranty Claim from Manage Warranty Claims To delete a warranty claim from the Manage Warranty Claim page: Select the desired claim. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Delete Claim option. Note : You can only delete the claims that are in "New", "Open", "Error", "Warning", "Suspended-Dealer", and "Rejected" status. Note : DBS displays a confirmation window. Click the Yes button to confirm.
Manage Warranty Claims Processes Manage Warranty Claims Manage Warranty Claims Manage Warranty Claims Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing warranty claims. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create or Edit Warranty Claims Workflow or View Warranty Claims Workflow. Edit or Create Warranty Claims Workflow View Warranty Claims Workflow
To look up a PNC (Part Number Code) from the Create Standard Operation Group page: At the end of the PNC field, click the Lookup icon. Note : The Part Name Code Lookup window opens. In the fields provided, type full or partial information. Note : To remove the search criteria, click the Clear icon. Click the Search icon. Note : DCS displays a list of records matching the search criteria. Select the desired PNC. Click the Select button. Note : To cancel the lookup, click the Cancel button.
Look Up a PNC from the Create Standard Operation Group Page To look up a PNC (Part Number Code) from the Create Standard Operation Group page: At the end of the PNC field, click the Lookup icon. Note : The Part Name Code Lookup window opens. In the fields provided, type full or partial information. Note : To remove the search criteria, click the Clear icon. Click the Search icon. Note : DCS displays a list of records matching the search criteria. Select the desired PNC. Click the Select button. Note : To cancel the lookup, click the Cancel button.
Standard Operation Codes Standard Operation Code Standard Operation Codes Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating or editing standard operation groups and codes. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes workflow. Manage Dealer Operation Codes Workflow Manage Standard Operation Categories Workflow Manage Standard Operation Codes Workflow
To look up a PNC (Part Number Code) from the Create Standard Operation Group page: At the end of the PNC field, click the Lookup icon. Note : The Part Name Code Lookup window opens. In the fields provided, type full or partial information. Note : To remove the search criteria, click the Clear icon. Click the Search icon. Note : DCS displays a list of records matching the search criteria. Select the desired PNC. Click the Select button. Note : To cancel the lookup, click the Cancel button.
Look Up a PNC from the Create Standard Operation Group Page To look up a PNC (Part Number Code) from the Create Standard Operation Group page: At the end of the PNC field, click the Lookup icon. Note : The Part Name Code Lookup window opens. In the fields provided, type full or partial information. Note : To remove the search criteria, click the Clear icon. Click the Search icon. Note : DCS displays a list of records matching the search criteria. Select the desired PNC. Click the Select button. Note : To cancel the lookup, click the Cancel button.
Standard Operation Codes Standard Operation Code Standard Operation Codes Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating or editing standard operation groups and codes. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes workflow. Manage Dealer Operation Codes Workflow Manage Standard Operation Categories Workflow Manage Standard Operation Codes Workflow
This section of a study is not required, but provides the opportunity to customize or limit a study's results. Use optional study sections to clearly define study parameters, but use caution as conflicting selections will result in no data being returned. To complete the Manufacture Date section of a study: In the Start Date field, use the calendar to select the manufacture start date. In the End Date field, use the calendar to select the manufacture end date. Click the Save button.
Complete the Manufacture Date Section of a Study This section of a study is not required, but provides the opportunity to customize or limit a study's results. Use optional study sections to clearly define study parameters, but use caution as conflicting selections will result in no data being returned. To complete the Manufacture Date section of a study: In the Start Date field, use the calendar to select the manufacture start date. In the End Date field, use the calendar to select the manufacture end date. Click the Save button.
Early Detection System (EDS) EDS: Study Dashboard Processes EDS: Study Dashboard Study Study Dashboard Technical Service Bulletin (TSB) Create or Modify a Study Workflow Note : The Create or Modify a Study workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for defining or modifying a study that integrates appointment and repair order data collected by the Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Define or Modify a Study Workflow. Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow View One Study Result Workflow
Change User in Report Writer Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for changing a user in Report Writer. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Change User in Report Writer Workflow. Copy All, Transfer All, or Delete All Report Definitions Workflow Copy, Transfer, Delete, or Make Report Definition Public Workflow Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Workflow Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow View a Host Report Workflow
Change User in Report Writer Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for changing a user in Report Writer. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Change User in Report Writer Workflow. Copy All, Transfer All, or Delete All Report Definitions Workflow Copy, Transfer, Delete, or Make Report Definition Public Workflow Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Workflow Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow View a Host Report Workflow
Change User in Report Writer Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for changing a user in Report Writer. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Change User in Report Writer Workflow. Copy All, Transfer All, or Delete All Report Definitions Workflow Copy, Transfer, Delete, or Make Report Definition Public Workflow Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Workflow Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow View a Host Report Workflow
Change User in Report Writer Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for changing a user in Report Writer. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Change User in Report Writer Workflow. Copy All, Transfer All, or Delete All Report Definitions Workflow Copy, Transfer, Delete, or Make Report Definition Public Workflow Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Workflow Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow View a Host Report Workflow
Change User in Report Writer Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for changing a user in Report Writer. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Change User in Report Writer Workflow. Copy All, Transfer All, or Delete All Report Definitions Workflow Copy, Transfer, Delete, or Make Report Definition Public Workflow Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Workflow Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow View a Host Report Workflow
National Service History Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing national service history information for a vehicle.
Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating or editing standard operation groups and codes. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes workflow. Manage Dealer Operation Codes Workflow Manage Standard Operation Categories Workflow Manage Standard Operation Codes Workflow
This section of a study is not required, but provides the opportunity to customize or limit a study's results. Use optional study sections to clearly define study parameters, but use caution as conflicting selections will result in no data being returned. To complete the Engine Code section of a study: In the Engine Prefix field, type the engine prefix. For example, if the engine code is QR25, the engine prefix is QR, and the engine series is 25. In the Engine Series field, type the engine series. In the Start Series field, type the ten character VIN number that begins the series range, if desired. Note : If you enter a VIN number series start, you must also enter a series end. In the End Series field, type the ten character VIN number that ends the series range. Click the Save button.
Complete the Engine Code Section of a Study This section of a study is not required, but provides the opportunity to customize or limit a study's results. Use optional study sections to clearly define study parameters, but use caution as conflicting selections will result in no data being returned. To complete the Engine Code section of a study: In the Engine Prefix field, type the engine prefix. For example, if the engine code is QR25, the engine prefix is QR, and the engine series is 25. In the Engine Series field, type the engine series. In the Start Series field, type the ten character VIN number that begins the series range, if desired. Note : If you enter a VIN number series start, you must also enter a series end. In the End Series field, type the ten character VIN number that ends the series range. Click the Save button.
Early Detection System (EDS) EDS: Study Dashboard Processes EDS: Study Dashboard Study Study Dashboard Technical Service Bulletin (TSB) Create or Modify a Study Workflow Note : The Create or Modify a Study workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for defining or modifying a study that integrates appointment and repair order data collected by the Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Define or Modify a Study Workflow. Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow View One Study Result Workflow
To export one dealer's study result information: From the Filter By drop-down list, select "Dealer". In the text box, type the applicable dealer number. Click the Search icon. Click the Export button. Select the Excel export option. Follow your browser-specific instructions to open, print, or save the file. If you filter the page before exporting, only those records that meet the filter criteria export. You can filter, sort, and print the data if you export the information to Microsoft ® Excel ® .
Export Dealer Study Results Information To export a dealer's study result information: From the Filter By drop-down list, select "Dealer", enter a dealer number, and then click the Search icon. Note : The study results for the selected dealer display. Note : You can also click one of the dealer number hyperlinks in the Dealer column to view that dealer's information on the One Dealer Study Result page. Click the Export button. Select the Excel export option. Follow your browser-specific instructions to open, save, or print the file. You can filter, sort, and print the data if you export the information to Microsoft ® Excel ® .
Dashboard Early Detection System (EDS) Hold Status Processes Study View Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow Note: The Manage Early Detection System Studies workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing Early Detection System (EDS) studies that integrate appointment and repair order data collected by the Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow. Define or Modify a Study Workflow View One Study Result Workflow View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow
Dashboard Early Detection System (EDS) EDS: Study Dashboard Processes EDS: Study Dashboard Study Study Dashboard View View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow Note : The View a Dealer's Study Results workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing one dealer's study results that integrate appointment and repair order data collected by the Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the View a Dealer's Study Results workflow. Define or Modify a Study Workflow Manage Early Detection Studies Workflow View One Study Result Workflow
View Overview Information Report Writer Generate Page Overview Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow Perform Tasks Generate a Report (Internal Users) Perform Common DBS Tasks Generate a Report (Internal Users) Perform Common DBS Tasks
Processes Report Writer Report Writer Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow generate a personalized report using Report Writer. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow. Change User in Report Writer Workflow Copy All, Transfer All, or Delete All Report Definitions Workflow Copy, Transfer, Delete, or Make Report Definition Public Workflow Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Workflow View a Host Report Workflow
To approve a single parts return on the Parts Return Summary page: Move your cursor over the Action icon for the parts return you want to approve. From the Action menu, select the Approve Return menu option. Note : The Approve Parts Return dialog box appears. In the PDC Return Due Date field, use the calendar to select the date by which parts must be returned to the PDC. Note : The PDC return due date must be at least one weekday past the current date. Holidays are excluded from the due date calendar. Click the Yes button to confirm the approval, or click the No button to close the dialog box without approving the parts returns.
Approve a Parts Return on the Parts Return Summary Page To approve a single parts return on the Parts Return Summary page: Move your cursor over the Action icon for the parts return you want to approve. From the Action menu, select the Approve Return menu option. Note : The Approve Parts Return dialog box appears. In the PDC Return Due Date field, use the calendar to select the date by which parts must be returned to the PDC. Note : The PDC return due date must be at least one weekday past the current date. Holidays are excluded from the due date calendar. Click the Yes button to confirm the approval, or click the No button to close the dialog box without approving the parts returns.
By default, the RDR History page displays RDRs by RDR submit date for new retail vehicles and the current month. To display any other information, you must filter the RDR History page. To filter the RDR History page by sales type: If desired, use the Sale Type , Vehicle Type , and Filter By drop-down lists to customize the display. At the top of the page, select the By Sales Type radio button. Note : The information in the RDR History area updates to display RDR history information by sales type for the vehicle type, sale type, and month displayed in the drop-down lists. In the Sale Type selection pane on the left, click a sale type to further limit the RDR History display. The information in the RDR History section of the page automatically updates to display RDR records which meet the filter criteria. To reset the filter criteria and page view to the default display, click the Clear icon. Clicking the Clear icon resets the page display to the default display and filter criteria selections. The page updates to display new vehicles for the current sales month listed by the RDR submission date.
Filter the RDR History Page by Sales Type By default, the RDR History page displays RDRs by RDR submit date for new retail vehicles and the current month. To display any other information, you must filter the RDR History page. To filter the RDR History page by sales type: If desired, use the Sale Type , Vehicle Type , and Filter By drop-down lists to customize the display. At the top of the page, select the By Sales Type radio button. Note : The information in the RDR History area updates to display RDR history information by sales type for the vehicle type, sale type, and month displayed in the drop-down lists. In the Sale Type selection pane on the left, click a sale type to further limit the RDR History display. The information in the RDR History section of the page automatically updates to display RDR records which meet the filter criteria. To reset the filter criteria and page view to the default display, click the Clear icon. Clicking the Clear icon resets the page display to the default display and filter criteria selections. The page updates to display new vehicles for the current sales month listed by the RDR submission date.
Manage Warranty Claims Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing warranty claims. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create or Edit Warranty Claims Workflow or View Warranty Claims Workflow. Edit or Create Warranty Claims Workflow View Warranty Claims Workflow
This section of a study is not required, but provides the opportunity to customize or limit a study's results. Use optional study sections to clearly define study parameters, but use caution as conflicting selections will result in no data being returned. To complete the Miscellaneous Features section of a study: DBS maintains miscellaneous features information for the current model year and five previous model years (ten previous model years for Infiniti), beginning from the 2011 model year for both divisions. If desired, you can select one or more features to limit the study results. Select each feature which should be included in the study, and then use the center buttons as necessary to customize the Selected Miscellaneous Features list. When you have selected all desired engine types, click the Save button.
Complete the Miscellaneous Features Section of a Study This section of a study is not required, but provides the opportunity to customize or limit a study's results. Use optional study sections to clearly define study parameters, but use caution as conflicting selections will result in no data being returned. To complete the Miscellaneous Features section of a study: DBS maintains miscellaneous features information for the current model year and five previous model years (ten previous model years for Infiniti), beginning from the 2011 model year for both divisions. If desired, you can select one or more features to limit the study results. Select each feature which should be included in the study, and then use the center buttons as necessary to customize the Selected Miscellaneous Features list. When you have selected all desired engine types, click the Save button.
Early Detection System (EDS) EDS: Study Dashboard Processes EDS: Study Dashboard Study Study Dashboard Technical Service Bulletin (TSB) Create or Modify a Study Workflow Note : The Create or Modify a Study workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for defining or modifying a study that integrates appointment and repair order data collected by the Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Define or Modify a Study Workflow. Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow View One Study Result Workflow
To show the stack trace: Click the Show Stack Trace button. Note : The stack trace information displays at the bottom of the page. If desired, click the Return to the home page link to continue working in DBS , or click the Log Out link at the top of the page to end your DBS session.
Show the Stack Trace To show the stack trace: Click the Show Stack Trace button. Note : The stack trace information displays at the bottom of the page. If desired, click the Return to the home page link to continue working in DBS , or click the Log Out link at the top of the page to end your DBS session.
A4AABC0C-8740-4948-A8A9-595338E40EDC\How to RDR & Unwind Quick Reference Guide v3.pdf
To filter the study summary list: From the Filter By drop-down list, select the desired option. Note : The second Filter By field becomes available. In the second Filter By field, select or type the desired option. Click the Search icon to filter the list, or click the Clear icon to reset the filters. Note : The list of studies updates to reflect the filters selected.
Filter the Study Dashboard To filter the study summary list: From the Filter By drop-down list, select the desired option. Note : The second Filter By field becomes available. In the second Filter By field, select or type the desired option. Click the Search icon to filter the list, or click the Clear icon to reset the filters. Note : The list of studies updates to reflect the filters selected.
Dashboard Early Detection System (EDS) Hold Status Processes Study View Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow Note: The Manage Early Detection System Studies workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing Early Detection System (EDS) studies that integrate appointment and repair order data collected by the Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow. Define or Modify a Study Workflow View One Study Result Workflow View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow
Dashboard Early Detection System (EDS) EDS: Study Dashboard Processes EDS: Study Dashboard Study Study Dashboard View View One Study Result Workflow Note : The View One Study Result workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing a study that integrates appointment and repair order data collected by the Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the View One Study Result workflow. Define or Modify Study Workflow Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow
Custom VIN Campaign Report Page Overview Purpose Dealers use the Custom VIN Campaign Report page to view the open campaigns applicable to vehicles in their inventory. The Custom VIN Campaign Report page allows dealers to key in VIN numbers they wish to review or input an Excel spreadsheet with up to 5000 VINs. Description The content area of the Custom VIN Campaign Report page displays the following sections: Filter - The filter section allows you to filter your Campaign Report results by repair status and/or claim status. Campaign Report - The Campaign Report section displays information for those vehicles with an associated campaign. Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Custom VIN Campaign Report page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Create a Custom VIN Campaign Report by File Import Export Custom VIN Campaign Report Information Filter the Custom VIN Campaign Report Page Key in VINs to Create a Custom VIN Campaign Report Page Preview
RO Work in Process Page Overview Purpose The RO Work in Process page allows you to view service alerts and open repair orders (ROs) in one, user-friendly interface. DBS automatically updates the RO Work in Process page each time a vehicle alert or RO is created or modified. All entries in the Alerts section match keywords from an EDS study. Note : An EDS study is created by DBS Internal users to track information related to vehicle performance or construction. The main study categories are general, hold, and informational. Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) are part of informational studies. It is very important to look at the Alerts section regularly so you can respond appropriately to service alerts, especially to vehicle holds. Each dealership may have different procedures for responding to vehicle holds. For example, a dealership might respond by telling customers about the issue and then communicating with the Engineering department for items to be addressed. At times, vehicles may also need to be recalled. Description The content area of the RO Work in Process page displays the following sections: Filter - Allows you to filter the information to display only the records that match your criteria Alerts - Displays job lines from ROs that have alerts associated with them. Open ROs - Displays all open repair orders without alerts Color-Coding in Alerts Section Color-coding in the Alerts section is designed to help you quickly identify the type of alert being issued by NNA/NCI, as described in the following table. Matched Study Type Color Highlight Vehicle Hold Only Red Vehicle Hold and Informational Red Informational Only Yellow Linked TSB with matching keywords Yellow Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the RO Work in Process page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Filter the RO Work in Process Page Hold Vehicle or Ignore Request View NSH View Repair Order Information View Technical Service Bulletin (TSB) Page Preview
To approve all selected parts returns: Select the checkbox for each parts return you want to approve. To select all parts returns in "Submitted" status, select the checkbox in the header. Note : You must have PDC permission for the dealership in order to approve or reject the parts return. Click the Approve All button. In the PDC Return Due Date field, use the calendar to select the date by which parts must be returned to the PDC. Note : The PDC return due date must be at least one weekday past the current date. Holidays are excluded from the due date calendar. Click the Yes button to confirm the approval, or click the No button to close the dialog box without approving the parts returns.
Approve All Returns on the Parts Return Summary Page To approve all selected parts returns: Select the checkbox for each parts return you want to approve. To select all parts returns in "Submitted" status, select the checkbox in the header. Note : You must have PDC permission for the dealership in order to approve or reject the parts return. Click the Approve All button. In the PDC Return Due Date field, use the calendar to select the date by which parts must be returned to the PDC. Note : The PDC return due date must be at least one weekday past the current date. Holidays are excluded from the due date calendar. Click the Yes button to confirm the approval, or click the No button to close the dialog box without approving the parts returns.
DBS Training Instructions Quick Reference Guide The DBS Training Instructions Quick Reference Guide provides instructions for new DBS users on how to use the DBS help system in lieu of training to become more familiar with the capabilities and functions of DBS . Click here to view the DBS Training Instructions Quick Reference Guide.
To complete the Customer section of an express entry warranty claim: Note : If you search for a repair order and line number, the information in the Customer section is populated with the repair order information. Add additional information as necessary. From the Owner Type drop-down list, select an owner type. Note : The information required to complete the Customer section varies by owner type. In the Name fields, type the owner or principal driver's first, middle initial, and last name. If applicable, in the Company field, type the name of the customer's company. In the Address fields, type the customer's postal mail and electronic mail addresses. In the Phone fields, type the customer's daytime, evening, and mobile phone numbers and extensions. Note : If you populate one of the phone number types, no additional phone numbers are required.
Complete the Customer Section of an Express Entry Warranty Claim To complete the Customer section of an express entry warranty claim: Note : If you search for a repair order and line number, the information in the Customer section is populated with the repair order information. Add additional information as necessary. From the Owner Type drop-down list, select an owner type. Note : The information required to complete the Customer section varies by owner type. In the Name fields, type the owner or principal driver's first, middle initial, and last name. If applicable, in the Company field, type the name of the customer's company. In the Address fields, type the customer's postal mail and electronic mail addresses. In the Phone fields, type the customer's daytime, evening, and mobile phone numbers and extensions. Note : If you populate one of the phone number types, no additional phone numbers are required. To complete the Customer section of an express entry warranty claim: Note : If you search for a repair order and line number, the information in the Customer section is populated with the repair order information. Add additional information as necessary. From the Owner Type drop-down list, select an owner type. Note : The information required to complete the Customer section varies by owner type. If necessary, select the Privacy Blocking Flags checkbox. In the Name fields, type the owner or principal driver's first, middle initial, and last name. If applicable, in the Company field, type the name of the customer's company. In the Address fields, type the customer's postal mail and electronic mail addresses. In the License Plate Number field, type the customer's license plate number. In the Service Contract Number filed, type the service contract number. In the Phone fields, type the customer's daytime, evening, and mobile phone numbers and extensions. Note : If you populate one of the phone number types, no additional phone numbers are required.
To view submission status on the Business Management website: Click the Financial Statement Submission Status button. Note : This link opens an external application. Follow the procedures within that application to complete this task. Note : If your financial statement status is "Preprocessing Error", please call the help desk for assistance. Click here for information on contacting the help desk.
View Submission Status on the Business Management Website To view submission status on the Business Management website: Click the Financial Statement Submission Status button. Note : This link opens an external application. Follow the procedures within that application to complete this task.
Financial Statement Financial Statements Financial Statements Processes Statement Status View Submit Financial Statements Workflow Note : This workflow is for NNA users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for submitting the financial statement.
View Overview Information User Summary Page Overview User Summary Workflow View User Permissions Workflow Perform Tasks About the User Summary Page Access the Copy User Permissions Page Access the Edit User Permissions Page Access the View User Permissions Page Deactivate or Reactivate a User Grant or Remove access to DBS Retrieve a List of New or Updated Users Search for a Dealer User Perform Common DBS Tasks About the User Summary Page Access the Copy User Permissions Page Access the Edit User Permissions Page Access the View User Permissions Page Deactivate or Reactivate a User Grant or Remove access to DBS Retrieve a List of New or Updated Users Search for a Dealer User Perform Common DBS Tasks
User Processes User Permissions Users View View User Permissions Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing user permissions. Related Workflows The following workflow may have one or more tasks in common with the View User Permissions Workflow. User Summary Workflow
Edit User Processes User Permissions Users User Summary Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for editing user permissions. Related Workflows The following workflow may have one or more tasks in common with the User Summary workflow . View User Permissions Workflow
To open the View Position Permissions page: Select the position. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the View Permissions option. Note : The View Permissions page appears.
Open the View Position Permissions Page To open the View Position Permissions page: Select the position. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the View Permissions option. Note : The View Permissions page appears.
To filter the dealer summary: From the Filter By drop-down list, select a filter option. If a text-entry field appears, type a filter value. - OR - If a drop-down list appears, select an option from the list. Click the Search icon. Note : The page refreshes to display only those records that match your selection. Note : To reset the filter criteria to the default options and clear the search criteria, click the Clear icon. View the dealers that meet the selected criteria. To display active and inactive dealers, click the Show Active Dealer and Inactive Dealer button. Note : To display active dealers only, click the Show Active Dealer button.
Filter Dealer Summary By default, the dealer summary displays a list of dealerships based on your user permissions and location. Nissan NCI users will by default view a list of all Nissan NCI dealerships. To view dealerships for a different affiliate or division, or to limit the number or records displayed, you must filter the dealer summary. To limit the number of records displayed, it is recommended that you filter the dealer summary by affiliate, division, and region. To filter the dealer summary: From the Affiliate drop-down list, select the desired affiliate. From the Division drop-down list, select the desired division. From the Region drop-down list, select the desired region. If desired, use the remaining drop-down lists to select additional filter criteria. Click the Search button to view the list of dealers that meet the select criteria. Note : To reset the filter criteria to the default options and clear the search criteria, click the Clear icon. If desired, click the arrows in the column headers to sort the summary display.
Dealer Dealer Permissions Dealer Processes View Dealer Summary Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing dealer information or permissions. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the View Dealer Information or Permissions Workflow. Edit Dealer Information Workflow Edit Dealer Permissions Workflow (NNA Only)
Dealer Dealer Permissions Edit Dealer Processes Edit Dealer Information Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for editing dealer information. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Edit Dealer Information Workflow. View Dealer Information or Permissions Workflow
View Overview Information Edit Parts Return Page Edit Parts Return Management Workflow Perform Tasks Add a Part to a Return Add Multiple Parts to a Return Delete a Part from a Return Delete a Parts Return Edit a Parts Return Export a Parts Return Filter Parts Return Detail Look Up a Part Modify a Detail Line on a Return Perform Common DBS Tasks Submit a Parts Return Add a Part to a Return Add Multiple Parts to a Return Delete a Part from a Return Delete a Parts Return Edit a Parts Return Filter Parts Return Detail Export a Parts Return Look Up a Part Modify a Detail Line on a Return Perform Common DBS Tasks Submit a Parts Return
Edit Return Edit Return Edit Return Edit Parts Return Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for modifying a parts return. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Edit Parts Return Workflow. Create Parts Return Workflow Manage Parts Return Workflow
To create an hourly extract of repair order data for a study: In the File Type field, select the checkbox for each output format desired. Note : For best results when exporting large volumes of data, select the "CSV" checkbox. In the Date Range field, select the "Hourly" radio button. From the Start Time drop-down list, select the hour at which the first hourly report will be sent for the selected days. DBS will send data from the previous hour at the selected time on the selected days. From the End Time drop-down list, select the hour at which the last hourly report will be sent for the selected days. DBS will send data from the previous hour at the selected time on the selected days, but will send no further reports until the next report cycle start time. In the Report Days section, select the checkbox for each day where reporting is desired. Use the Available Options list and arrows provided to determine the fields that will appear on the report. Click the Schedule button. To view instructions for completing other report types, open full help, and then click the Details button.
Complete the Report Section of a Study Schedule an Hourly Report To create an hourly extract of repair order data for a study: In the File Type field, select the checkbox for each output format desired. Note : For best results when exporting large volumes of data, select the "CSV" checkbox. In the Date Range field, select the "Hourly" radio button. From the Start Time drop-down list, select the hour at which the first hourly report will be sent for the selected days. DBS will send data from the previous hour at the selected time on the selected days. From the End Time drop-down list, select the hour at which the last hourly report will be sent for the selected days. DBS will send data from the previous hour at the selected time on the selected days, but will send no further reports until the next report cycle start time. In the Report Days section, select the checkbox for each day where reporting is desired. Use the Available Options list and arrows provided to determine the fields that will appear on the report. Click the Schedule button. Schedule a Daily Study Report To create a daily extract of repair order data for a study: In the File Type field, select the checkbox for each output format desired. Note : For best results when exporting large volumes of data, select the "CSV" checkbox. In the Date Range field, select the "Daily" radio button. From the Report Time drop-down list, select the time when the report will be generated. DBS will send data from the previous 24 hours at the selected time. Use the Available Options list and arrows provided to determine the fields that will appear on the report. Click the Schedule button. Schedule a Weekly Report To create an weekly extract of repair order data for a study: In the File Type field, select the checkbox for each output format desired. Note : For best results when exporting large volumes of data, select the "CSV" checkbox. In the Date Range field, select the "Weekly" radio button. From the Report Date drop-down list, select the day of the week when the report will be generated. From the Report Time drop-down list, select the time when the report will be generated. DBS will send data from the previous 7 days at the selected day and time. Use the Available Options list and arrows provided to determine the fields that will appear on the report. Click the Schedule button. Schedule a Monthly Report To create an monthly extract of repair order data for a study: In the File Type field, select the checkbox for each output format desired. Note : For best results when exporting large volumes of data, select the "CSV" checkbox. In the Date Range field, select the "Monthly" radio button. From the Report Date drop-down list, select the date on which the report will be generated. From the Report Time drop-down list, select the time when the report will be generated. DBS will send all data since the previous report at the selected date and time. Use the Available Options list and arrows provided to determine the fields that will appear on the report. Click the Schedule button.
Early Detection System (EDS) EDS: Study Dashboard Processes EDS: Study Dashboard Study Study Dashboard Technical Service Bulletin (TSB) Create or Modify a Study Workflow Note : The Create or Modify a Study workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for defining or modifying a study that integrates appointment and repair order data collected by the Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Define or Modify a Study Workflow. Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow View One Study Result Workflow
To display the screens and help for the Dealer Business System (DBS) in another language for the current session: Click the display language drop-down list. Select the desired language. Note : Click here for the instructions to permanently change the language associated with your user account. Changing the display language impacts the display for the current session only. You must update your user profile to permanently change the display language. If you change the language display, you can also access context-sensitive and full help in the chosen language.
Change the Display Language To display the screens and help for the Dealer Business System (DBS) in another language for the current session: Click the display language drop-down list. Select the desired language. Note : View the Manage My profile task for instructions to permanently change the language associated with your user account.
View Overview Information Monitor Interface Page Overview Perform Tasks Perform Common DBS Tasks Search for and Monitor Transactions on the Monitor Interface Page Perform Common DBS Tasks Search for and Monitor Transactions on the Monitor Interface Page
To reject a parts return from the Parts Return Summary page: Click the Action icon for the parts return you wish to reject. From the Action menu, select the Reject Return menu option. Note : The Reject Part Return dialog box appears. To reject the parts return and reset the part return status to "Open", click the Yes button. To close the dialog box without rejecting the return, click the No button.
Reject a Parts Return on the Parts Return Summary Page To reject a parts return from the Parts Return Summary page: Click the Action icon for the parts return you wish to reject. From the Action menu, select the Reject Return menu option. Note : The Reject Part Return dialog box appears. To reject the parts return and reset the part return status to "Open", click the Yes button. To close the dialog box without rejecting the return, click the No button.
A user can only access DBS if they have an active NNAnet profile, been granted access to the DBS link in NNAnet, and they have been granted access to DBS on the User Summary page in DBS . Note : Only a system administrator for the dealership or an authorized internal user can perform this task. To grant or remove access to DBS : Select the checkbox in the DBS Access column to grant a user access to DBS , or clear the checkbox to remove a user's DBS access. Note : Removing a user's access only impacts their DBS access and does not in any way impact their NNAnet access. Click the Save button. Click the Yes button to confirm, or click the No button to close the window without confirming.
Grant or Remove Access to DBS A user can only access DBS if they have an active NNAnet profile, been granted access to the DBS link in NNAnet, and have been granted access to DBS on the User Summary page in DBS . Note : Only a system administrator for the dealership or an authorized internal user can perform this task. To grant or remove access to DBS : Select the checkbox in the DBS Access column to grant a user access to DBS , or clear the checkbox to remove a user's DBS access. Note : Removing a user's access only impacts their DBS and does not in any way impact their NNAnet access. Click the Save button. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm, or click the No button to close the window without confirming.
DBS User New User NNAnet Permissions Users Add a New DBS User In the workflow diagram above, the tasks in red represent tasks performed in NNAnet. No link is provided for these tasks. Click a DBS task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for adding a new user in DBS and granting that user DBS permissions.
Note : You can view technical service bulletins (TSBs) from the Alerts section of the RO Work in Process page and the Open ROs section. To view a TSB from the RO Work in Process page: In the Alerts section or Open ROs section, move your cursor over the Action icon for the repair order or alert you wish to view. From the Action menu, select the TSB option. Note : The TSB Detail window appears. TSBs that specifically match a job line in the RO display in the Job Line Match section. Other TSBs that may be applicable to the vehicle or RO display in the May Be Applicable section. To view the details of the TSB, click the hyperlinked TSB number. Note : The TSB detail PDF file displays in a new window. Review the TSB detail, then click the Close button to return to the TSB Detail window. Click the Close button on the TSB Detail window to return to the RO Work in Process page.
View a TSB from the RO Work in Process Page Note : You can view technical service bulletins (TSBs) from the Alerts section of the RO Work in Process page and the Open ROs section. To view a TSB from the RO Work in Process page: In the Alerts section or Open ROs section, move your cursor over the Action icon for the repair order or alert you wish to view. From the Action menu, select the TSB option. Note : The TSB Detail window appears. TSBs that specifically match a job line in the RO display in the Job Line Match section. Other TSBs that may be applicable to the vehicle or RO display in the May Be Applicable section. To view the details of the TSB, click the hyperlinked TSB number. Note : The TSB detail PDF file displays in a new window. Review the TSB detail, then click the Close button to return to the TSB Detail window. Click the Close button on the TSB Detail window to return to the RO Work in Process page.
To view the Request For Credit (RFC) Status summary: Review the list of RFC claims. Note : The claims appear in RFC number sequence in descending order, most recent to oldest. To sort the displayed information, click the arrow beside a column title. To view additional pages, click a page number or click the < or > icons. To view the name of the carrier or PDC, move your mouse pointer over the carrier code or PDC code.
View Request for Credit (RFC) Status Summary To view Request For Credit (RFC) Status summary: Review the list of RFC claims. Note : The claims appear in RFC number sequence in descending order, most recent to oldest. To sort the displayed information, click the arrow beside a column title. To view additional pages, click a page number or click the < or > icons. To view the name of the carrier or PDC, move your mouse pointer over the carrier code or PDC code. To view Request For Credit (RFC) Status summary: Review the list of RFC claims. Note : The claims appear in RFC number sequence in descending order, most recent to oldest. To sort the displayed information, click the arrow beside a column title. To view additional pages, click a page number or click the < or > icons.
Applications Request for Credit RFC Request for Credit Status Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing Request for Credit (RFC) status.
To open the Modify Report page: Select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Edit option. Note : The Modify Report page appears.
Access the Modify Report Page To access the Modify Report page: From the List of Report section, select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Edit option. Note : The Modify Report page appears.
To open the Modify Report page: Select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Edit option. Note : The Modify Report page appears.
Access the Modify Report Page To access the Modify Report page: From the List of Report section, select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Edit option. Note : The Modify Report page appears.
To open the Modify Report page: Select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Edit option. Note : The Modify Report page appears.
Access the Modify Report Page To access the Modify Report page: From the List of Report section, select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Edit option. Note : The Modify Report page appears.
To open the Modify Report page: Select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Edit option. Note : The Modify Report page appears.
Access the Modify Report Page To access the Modify Report page: From the List of Report section, select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Edit option. Note : The Modify Report page appears.
To open the Modify Report page: Select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Edit option. Note : The Modify Report page appears.
Access the Modify Report Page To access the Modify Report page: From the List of Report section, select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Edit option. Note : The Modify Report page appears.
Clean Cache Page Overview Purpose Use the Clean Cache page to clean or refresh the cache manually. Administrators have the ability to clean the cache using this page. The Dealer Business System (DBS) can be set up to automatically clean the cache. Description The content area of the Clean Cache page displays the following sections: Input Cache Path - Enter the path of the cache that you want to clean. Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Clean Cache page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Clean the Cache Page Preview
To change the status of a notification: Select a notification. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Change Status option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm, or click the No button to close the window without confirming. If the notification status is "Approved", changing the status updates the notification status to "Needs Approval." If the notification status is "Needs Approval", changing the status updates the notification status to "Approved." A notification is not sent until it is in an approved status AND the scheduled time has passed. You cannot change the status of a published communication item. You must delete the item if you want to remove it from display.
Change the Status of a Notification To change the status of a notification: Select the notification for which you want to change the status. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Change Status option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm, or click the No button to close the window without confirming. If the notification status is "Approved", changing the status updates the notification status to "Needs Approval." If the notification status is "Needs Approval", changing the status updates the notification status to "Approved." A notification is not sent until it is in an approved status AND the scheduled time has passed. You cannot change the status of a published communication item. You must delete the item if you want to remove it from display.
View Overview Information Custom VIN Campaign Report Page Overview Perform Tasks Create a Custom VIN Campaign Report by File Import Export Custom VIN Campaign Report Information Filter the Custom VIN Campaign Report Page Key in VINs to Create a Custom VIN Campaign Report Perform Common DBS Tasks
To filter the Custom VIN Campaign Report page: To view only those vehicles which have been repaired, from the Repair Status drop-down list, select the "Repaired" option. To view only those repaired vehicles for which a claim status has been entered, from the Claim Status drop-down list, select the desired option. To view only those vehicles which should not be sold until campaign repairs have been completed, select "Yes" from the Stop Sale drop-down list. To view only those vehicles for which the campaign parts are restricted, select "Yes" from the Parts Restriction drop-down list. Click Search icon to update the results. If desired, click one of the column headers to customize the report display.
Filter the Custom VIN Campaign Report Page To filter the Custom VIN Campaign Report page: To view only those vehicles which have been repaired, from the Repair Status drop-down list, select the "Repaired" option. To view only those repaired vehicles for which a claim status has been entered, from the Claim Status drop-down list, select the desired option. To view only those vehicles which should not be sold until campaign repairs have been completed, select "Yes" from the Stop Sale drop-down list. To view only those vehicles for which the campaign parts are restricted, select "Yes" from the Parts Restriction drop-down list. Click Search icon to update the results. If desired, click one of the column headers to customize the report display.
To delete a key word from a standard operation category or standard operation code: Select the key word. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Delete option. Note : The Delete Confirmation window opens. Click the Delete button.
Delete a Key Word To delete a key word from a standard operation category or standard operation code: Select the key word. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Delete option. Note : The Delete Confirmation window opens. Click the Delete button.
ReRun Standard Operation Category Translation Manage Standard Operation Categories Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing and creating standard operation categories. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Standard Operation Categories Workflow. Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes Workflow Manage Dealer Operation Codes Workflow Manage Standard Operation Codes Workflow
Standard Operation Codes Standard Operation Code Standard Operation Codes Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating or editing standard operation groups and codes. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes workflow. Manage Dealer Operation Codes Workflow Manage Standard Operation Categories Workflow Manage Standard Operation Codes Workflow
To delete a key word from a standard operation category or standard operation code: Select the key word. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Delete option. Note : The Delete Confirmation window opens. Click the Delete button.
Delete a Key Word To delete a key word from a standard operation category or standard operation code: Select the key word. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Delete option. Note : The Delete Confirmation window opens. Click the Delete button.
ReRun Standard Operation Category Translation Manage Standard Operation Categories Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing and creating standard operation categories. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Standard Operation Categories Workflow. Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes Workflow Manage Dealer Operation Codes Workflow Manage Standard Operation Codes Workflow
Standard Operation Codes Standard Operation Code Standard Operation Codes Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating or editing standard operation groups and codes. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes workflow. Manage Dealer Operation Codes Workflow Manage Standard Operation Categories Workflow Manage Standard Operation Codes Workflow
To delete a key word from a standard operation category or standard operation code: Select the key word. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Delete option. Note : The Delete Confirmation window opens. Click the Delete button.
Delete a Key Word To delete a key word from a standard operation category or standard operation code: Select the key word. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Delete option. Note : The Delete Confirmation window opens. Click the Delete button.
ReRun Standard Operation Category Translation Manage Standard Operation Categories Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing and creating standard operation categories. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Standard Operation Categories Workflow. Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes Workflow Manage Dealer Operation Codes Workflow Manage Standard Operation Codes Workflow
Standard Operation Codes Standard Operation Code Standard Operation Codes Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating or editing standard operation groups and codes. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes workflow. Manage Dealer Operation Codes Workflow Manage Standard Operation Categories Workflow Manage Standard Operation Codes Workflow
View Overview Information Dealer Summary Page Overview Dealer Summary Workflow Edit Dealer Information Workflow Edit Dealer Permissions Workflow Perform Tasks Access the Edit Dealer Information Page Access the Edit Dealer Permissions Page Access the User Summary to Search for a User Access the View Dealer Information Page Access the View Dealer Permissions Page Filter Dealer Summary Perform Common DBS Tasks View Dealer Summary Access the Edit Dealer Information Page Access the Edit Dealer Permissions Page Access the User Summary to Search for a User Access the View Dealer Information Page Access the View Dealer Permissions Page Filter Dealer Summary Perform Common DBS Tasks View Dealer Summary
Edit Edit Dealer Permissions Workflow Note : This workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for editing dealer permissions. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Edit Dealer Permissions Workflow. Dealer Summary Workflow
Dealer Dealer Permissions Edit Dealer Processes Edit Dealer Information Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for editing dealer information. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Edit Dealer Information Workflow. View Dealer Information or Permissions Workflow
Dealer Dealer Permissions Dealer Processes View Dealer Summary Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing dealer information or permissions. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the View Dealer Information or Permissions Workflow. Edit Dealer Information Workflow Edit Dealer Permissions Workflow (NNA Only)
Dealer Dealer Permissions Edit Dealer Processes Edit Dealer Information Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for editing dealer information. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Edit Dealer Information Workflow. View Dealer Information or Permissions Workflow
Note : You can view a repair order from the Alerts section or from the Open ROs section. To view a repair order (RO) from the RO Work in Process page: In the Repair Order column, click the hyperlink for the RO you wish to view. Note : The Repair Order Information window appears. To print the RO detail, click the Print button. To close the RO detail and return to the RO Work in Process page, click the Close button.
View Repair Order from the RO Work in Process Page Note : You can view a repair order from the Alerts section or from the Open ROs section. To view a repair order (RO) from the RO Work in Process page: In the Repair Order column, click the hyperlink for the RO you wish to view. Note : The Repair Order Information window appears. To print the RO detail, click the Print button. To close the RO detail and return to the RO Work in Process page, click the Close button.
MRW: 1/7/13:
New Screen Shot needed (pending)
- Search and Clear buttons will most likely be replaced with new icons (reported on issue log). View Part Master Information Page Overview Purpose Use the View Part Master Information page to view or print specific part master information. Access the View Part Master Information page by clicking the View Part Master Information link on the Parts menu. Description The content area of the View Part Master Information page displays the following sections or features: Part Number field - Allows you to type a specific part number, if known Parts Look Up icon - Allows you to look up a part number by specifying full or partial information Parts - Allows you to view part master information for a specific part, including general part information, supersession information, service file information, pricing information, and part dimensions New Part link - Allows you to open and view a new part, if one exists Code descriptions - Display when you move your mouse over specific field labels Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the View Part Master Information page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Look Up a Part View Part Master Information Look Up a Part View Part Master Information Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflow is performed on the View Part Master Information page. View Part Master Information Workflow Page Preview
Customer Pay Reimbursement Page Overview - Internal Users Purpose Use the Customer Pay Reimbursement page to analyze the parts markup and labor rates for a selected dealer. You can use this information to determine what parts markup and labor rates a dealer is charging the customer for repair work. Description The content area of the Customer Pay Reimbursement page displays the following sections: Filter Criteria - Allows you to filter the information to display only the records that match your criteria and define what analysis to perform Parts Markup Results - Allows you to view the results of the Parts Markup analysis Labor Rate Results - Allows you to view the results of the Labor Rate analysis Tasks You can perform the following tasks from or on the Customer Pay Reimbursement page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Exclude a Job Line Export Customer Pay Results Filter and View Customer Pay Reimbursement Results Print Customer Pay Reimbursement Results View Repair Orders Exclude a Job Line Export Customer Pay Results Filter and View Customer Pay Reimbursement Results Print Customer Pay Reimbursement Results View Repair Orders Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Customer Pay Reimbursement page. View Customer Pay Reimbursement Workflow Page Preview
To copy an event: Select an event. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Copy option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Copy button to confirm, or click the Cancel button to close the window without copying the event. The status for the copied event is "Requires Approval".
Copy an Event To copy an event: Select an event. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Copy option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Copy button to confirm, or click the Cancel button to close the window without copying the event.
Application Auditing Page Overview Purpose Use the Application Auditing page to view transactions performed in DBS . A transaction is defined as a task performed in DBS that changes data. If a user views data but does not change anything, that is not considered a transaction, and does not display on the Application Auditing page. Except for viewing host reports which is a transaction that does display on this page. Description The content area of the Application Auditing page displays the following sections: Filter - Allows you to type or select criteria to limit the results displayed in the summary section Summary - Displays general information for all records on the page Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Application Auditing page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Filter Application Audit Information Interpret Application Auditing Information Filter Application Audit Information Interpret Application Audit Information Page Preview Note : The Application Auditing page displays information for NNA and NCI locations by default. If desired, use the filter fields to reduce the number of records displayed.
View Overview Information Copyright Page Overview Perform Tasks Perform Common DBS Tasks View Copyright and Trademark Information Perform Common DBS Tasks View Copyright and Trademark Information
View Overview Information Serviced with Open Campaign Page Overview Perform Tasks Export Data from the Serviced with Open Campaign Report Page Filter the Serviced with Open Campaign Report Page Perform Common DBS Tasks
Note : This task applies to NNA dealer users only. To cancel a backorder: Select the detail line for the part you want to cancel the backorder. Note : You must select a line item that is on backorder. Click the B/O Cancel button. Note : The NissanNet Backorder Cancellation Screen appears. Note : Proceed with the cancellation in NissanNet and then exit NissanNet. You can cancel backorders for the following types of orders: STK, SOL, TOS (Infiniti only) and VOR.
Cancel a Backorder Note : This task applies to NNA dealer users only. To cancel a backorder: Select the detail line for the part you want to cancel the backorder. Note : You must select a line item that is on backorder. Click the B/O Cancel button. Note : The NissanNet Backorder Cancellation Screen appears. Click the checkbox for the line item you want to adjust. In the Quantity Required field, type the quantity you want to remain on backorder. The difference between the backorder quantity and the quantity required will be removed from your parts order and only the amount in the Quantity Required field will be backordered. Click the Cancel B/O button to adjust the backorder quantifies for each selected row. You can cancel backorders for the following types of orders: STK, SOL, TOS (Infiniti only) and VOR.
Vehicle Inventory Page Overview Purpose Use the Vehicle Inventory page to view and manage dealer inventory from a single, searchable, and sortable view, regardless of vehicle status. Description The content area of the Vehicle Inventory page displays the following sections: Filter - Allows you to filter the information to display only the records that match your criteria Note : Buttons to locate a vehicle, export information, or access reports are also located in this section. Page Navigation Bar - Allows you to navigate from page to page, if multiple pages exist Summary - Displays general information for all records on the page Detail - Displays specific information for a selected record Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Vehicle Inventory page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. About Vehicle Inventory: What you Need to Know About Vehicle Inventory Access OMS to Locate a Vehicle Access OMS to Trade a Vehicle Access OMS to View OMS Vehicle Detail Access the Inventory Search Page from Vehicle Inventory Open the RDR Vehicle Page Edit Vehicle Stock Number Export Vehicle Inventory Information Filter Vehicle Inventory Filter Vehicle Inventory an Advanced Filter Manage Vehicle Notes Print RDR Detail View Campaign Information for a Vehicle in Inventory View the Campaign Report View Vehicle Invoice View, Print, or Email Window Sticker About Vehicle Inventory Access the Inventory Search Page from Vehicle Inventory Edit Vehicle Stock Number Export Vehicle Inventory Information Filter Vehicle Inventory Filter Vehicle Inventory Using an Advanced Filter Manage Vehicle Notes View Vehicle Invoice View, Print, or Email Window Sticker Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Vehicle Inventory page. Vehicle Inventory Workflow Report or Edit the Sale of a Vehicle (RDR) Workflow Vehicle Inventory Workflow Page Preview
To approve multiple SVC (service campaign) orders: Select the check box next to each campaign order you want to approve. Click the Approve Selected button. Click the Yes button to approve the selected orders. Note : To close the message and return to the SVC Order Management page without approving the orders, click the No button.
Approve Multiple SVC Orders To approve multiple SVC (service campaign) orders: Select the check box next to each campaign order you want to approve. Click the Approve Selected button. Click the Yes button to approve the selected orders. Note : To close the message and return to the SVC Order Management page without approving the orders, click the No button.
Approve or Reject SVC Order Reject Approve or Reject SVC Order Approve or Reject SVC Order Manage Service Campaign Order Workflow Note : This workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing a Service Campaign (SVC) order. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Service Campaign Order Workflow. Manage Campaign Parts Workflow View Service Campaign Order Workflow
To view copyright information from any DBS application page: Click the Copyright link. Note : Additional Nissan copyright information can be found here .
View Copyright and Trademark Information To view copyright information from any DBS application page: Click the Copyright link. Note: Additional Nissan copyright information can be found here .
View Overview Information SVC Order Management Page Overview Manage Service Campaign Order Workflow Perform Tasks Access Reports Access the View SVC Order Page Add Comments to an SVC Order Add Comments to Multiple SVC Orders Approve an SVC Order Approve Multiple SVC Orders Export SVC Order Management Information Filter the SVC Order Management Summary Perform Common DBS Tasks Reject an SVC Order Reject Multiple SVC Orders View SVC Order Management Summary and Detail View SVC Order View Warning or Error Messages Access Reports Access the View SVC Order Page Add Comments to an SVC Order Add Comments to Multiple SVC Orders Approve an SVC Order Approve Multiple SVC Orders Export SVC Order Management Information Filter the SVC Order Management Summary Perform Common DBS Tasks Reject an SVC Order Reject Multiple SVC Orders View SVC Order Management Summary and Detail View SVC Order View Warning or Error Messages
Approve or Reject SVC Order Reject Approve or Reject SVC Order Approve or Reject SVC Order Manage Service Campaign Order Workflow Note : This workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing a Service Campaign (SVC) order. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Service Campaign Order Workflow. Manage Campaign Parts Workflow View Service Campaign Order Workflow
To complete the Expenses section of an express entry warranty claim: Note : If you search for a repair order and line number, the information in the Expenses section is populated with the repair order information. Add additional information as necessary. In the Expense code field, type an expense code. In the Req Amt field, type the requested expense amount. If necessary, in the Coverage 1 Code field, update the coverage code. Note : The coverage code is automatically populated based on information entered in the Claim Information section. In the Coverage 1 Amt field, enter the amount covered for the expense. If the coverage amount is split between or among coverage types, complete the Coverage 2 and Coverage 3 fields as appropriate. Click the link in the VOR column to enter VOR expense details. Click the link in the Rental column to enter rental expense details. As appropriate, click the Plus icon to add additional expenses. Note : To save a claim with errors or warnings, click the Save button. To validate the information in the claim, click the Validate button. To submit a claim with no errors, click the Submit button.
Complete the Expenses Section of an Express Entry Warranty Claim To complete the Expenses section of an express entry warranty claim: Note : If you search for a repair order and line number, the information in the Expenses section is populated with the repair order information. Add additional information as necessary. In the Expense code field, type an expense code. In the Req Amt field, type the requested expense amount. If necessary, in the Coverage 1 Code field, update the coverage code. Note : The coverage code is automatically populated based on information entered in the Claim Information section. In the Coverage 1 Amt field, enter the amount covered for the expense. If the coverage amount is split between or among coverage types, complete the Coverage 2 and Coverage 3 fields as appropriate. Click the link in the VOR column to enter VOR expense details. Click the link in the Rental column to enter rental expense details. As appropriate, click the Plus icon to add additional expenses.
To edit the vehicle stock number: Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon of the vehicle with the stock number you want to edit. From the Action menu, select the Edit Stock Number option. In the Edit Stock Number field, edit the vehicle stock number. Click the OK button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close the window without making an edit. Click Yes to confirm your changes, or click No to cancel without confirming. DBS interfaces with most dealer management systems (DMS) and automatically updates stock numbers. If your DMS is not certified and does not interface with DBS , you can update the stock number manually in DBS .
Edit Vehicle Stock Number DBS interfaces with most dealer management systems (DMS) and automatically updates stock numbers. If your DMS is not certified and does not interface with DBS , you can update the stock number manually in DBS . To edit the vehicle stock number: Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon of the vehicle with the stock number you want to edit From the Action menu, select the Edit Stock Number option. Note : The Edit Stock Number window appears. In the Edit Stock Number field, edit the vehicle stock number. . Click the OK button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Note : The Save Confirmation window appears. Click the Yes button to save changes to the vehicle stock number, or click the No button to close the window without saving.
Vehicle Inventory Management Inventory Managment Processes Inventory Managment Vehicle Inventory Management Vehicle Inventory Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing vehicle inventory data at the dealerships. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Vehicle Inventory workflow. Report the Sale of a Vehicle (RDR) Workflow Search Vehicle Inventory Workflow Search Vehicle Inventory Workflow
Sales Introduction Description The Sales application in DBS provides a consolidated view of a dealer's vehicle inventory, including the ability to search for and sell (RDR) vehicles from inventory, review vehicles that have been sold, and quickly determine the campaign status for vehicles in inventory so that service can be provided before the vehicle is made available to a customer. Note : The items you see in the menu tabs and menu links vary based on your permissions. If you need to request changes to your permissions, please contact your dealership's System Administrator. You can find the System Administrator(s) for you dealership by viewing your profile. For more information, click here . The Sales menu in DBS help shows content listed by application page. For ease of use, content is organized by application page following the DBS menu when possible. When you first begin using DBS and the DBS help system, we recommend that you review the help system menu and then view the page overview, workflow, and task information for the tasks you will be performing in DBS .
To adjust the report column widths: Type the column width for each field name. Note : The column widths are automatically populated. You do not need to change anything in the Printing Criteria section.
Adjust the Report Column Widths To adjust the report column widths: Type the column width for each field name. Note : The column widths are automatically populated. You do not need to change anything in the Printing Criteria section.
To adjust the report column widths: Type the column width for each field name. Note : The column widths are automatically populated. You do not need to change anything in the Printing Criteria section.
Adjust the Report Column Widths To adjust the report column widths: Type the column width for each field name. Note : The column widths are automatically populated. You do not need to change anything in the Printing Criteria section.
To adjust the report column widths: Type the column width for each field name. Note : The column widths are automatically populated. You do not need to change anything in the Printing Criteria section.
Adjust the Report Column Widths To adjust the report column widths: Type the column width for each field name. Note : The column widths are automatically populated. You do not need to change anything in the Printing Criteria section.
To adjust the report column widths: Type the column width for each field name. Note : The column widths are automatically populated. You do not need to change anything in the Printing Criteria section.
Adjust the Report Column Widths To adjust the report column widths: Type the column width for each field name. Note : The column widths are automatically populated. You do not need to change anything in the Printing Criteria section.
To adjust the report column widths: Type the column width for each field name. Note : The column widths are automatically populated. You do not need to change anything in the Printing Criteria section.
Adjust the Report Column Widths To adjust the report column widths: Type the column width for each field name. Note : The column widths are automatically populated. You do not need to change anything in the Printing Criteria section.
View Overview Information Maintain Purge Rules Page Overview Perform Tasks Maintain Purge Rules Perform Common DBS Tasks Maintain Purge Rules Perform Common DBS Tasks
To view the entire help system available for the Dealer Business System (DBS) : Move your cursor over the Help link. Click the Full Help link. Once full help is open, use the navigation tabs at the top to access the content for each DBS application. Once the full help for a DBS application is open, use the table of contents to navigate to a topic of interest. Use the search function to find the help topic you want to view. Internet Explorer users can access context-sensitive help by pressing the F10 key on their keyboard. The full help system allows you to search for help information, view all help topics for the Dealer Business System (DBS) , and view field, button, and link definitions. You can also get help for DBS by clicking the Live Chat button.
Access Full Help To view the entire help system for the Dealer Business System (DBS) : Move your cursor over the Help link. Click the Full Help link. Use the navigation tabs, table of contents, index, or search to find the help you want to view.
Completion of the Driver section of the RDR is optional, but assists Nissan in providing services and information to vehicle owners. To complete the Driver section of an RDR: If the driver address is the same as the customer address, select the Driver address is the same as Customer address checkbox to automatically populate information in the Driver section with the details entered in the Customer section. Note : Although the data is copied from the Customer section, you may make changes as desired. Use this feature to quickly enter the address information, then change the name, phone, and email information to match the driver's data. From the Title drop-down list, select a title. Enter or update the co-buyer name, address, and contact information. Note : Type all 9s in the Daytime or Evening field if the buyer does not have a phone. In the Email field, type the co-buyer email address. Note : Type three asterisks (*) if the co-buyer does not have an email address. Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. A will display for any missing or incorrect data. Correct all errors before submitting the RDR. Note : If you are ready to submit the RDR, click here for more information.
Complete the Driver Section of an RDR To complete the Driver section of an RDR: If the driver address is the same as the customer address, select the Driver address is the same as Customer address checkbox to automatically populate information in the Driver section with the details entered in the Customer section. Note : Although the data is copied from the Customer section, you may make changes as desired. Use this feature to quickly enter the address information, then change the name, phone, and email information to match the driver's data. From the Title drop-down list, select a title. Enter or update the co-buyer name, address, and contact information. Note : Type all 9s in the Daytime or Evening field if the buyer does not have a phone. In the Email field, type the co-buyer email address. Note : Type three asterisks (*) if the co-buyer does not have an email address. Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. A will display for any missing or incorrect data. Correct all errors before submitting the RDR. Note : If you are ready to submit the RDR, click here for more information.
Processes RDR RDR RDR a Vehicle Workflow Note : This workflow is for NNA users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for retail delivery reporting (RDR) or editing the sale of a vehicle. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Report or Edit the Sale of a Vehicle workflow. Vehicle Inventory Workflow Inventory Search Workflow View RDR History Workflow
Home Introduction Description The Home section within the Dealer Business System (DBS) Online Help provides information general to the entire DBS system, including how to get help and support, information about your DBS profile, the DBS Glossary, privacy policy and copyright, and general features that are designed to improve your experience while using DBS . This section also displays a quick look at regional and national announcements and system alerts, important key metrics. Note : The items you see in the menu tabs and menu links vary based on your permissions. If you need to request changes to your permissions, please contact your dealership's System Administrator. You can find the System Administrator(s) for you dealership by viewing your profile. For more information, click here . The Home menu in DBS help shows content listed by application page. For ease of use, content is organized by application
Note : This task applies to internal users only. There are several ways to search for a dealer user: by dealer code, name, user ID, or by hierarchy; but the most direct method with the fewest potential results will be to search by user ID. See the Step by Step tab in full help to view instructions for all of the methods to search for a dealer user. To search for a dealer user by user ID: Click the Dealer User radio button. In the User ID field, type the a full or partial user ID. Click the Search icon. Note : To remove search criteria, click the Clear icon.
Search for a Dealer User Note : This task applies to internal users only. There are several ways to search for a dealer user: by dealer code, name, user ID, or by hierarchy; but the most direct method with the fewest potential results will be to search by user ID. The instructions for each method are provided below. Search for a Dealer User by User ID To search for a dealer user by user ID: Click the Dealer User radio button. In the User ID field, type the a full or partial user ID. Click the Search icon. Note : To remove search criteria, click the Clear icon. Search for a Dealer User by User Name To search for a dealer user by user name: Click the Dealer User radio button. In the First Name field, type all or a portion of the user's first (given) name. In the Last Name field, type all or a portion of the user's last (family) name. Click the Search icon. Note : To remove search criteria, click the Clear icon. Search for a Dealer User by Dealer Code To search for a dealer user by dealer number: Click the Dealer User radio button. In the Dealer Code field, type the dealer number. - OR - Perform a dealer lookup. Note : Click here for more information on how to perform a dealer look up. Click the Search icon. Note : To remove search criteria, click the Clear icon. Search for a Dealer User by Hierarchy Although you can search for dealer users at any level of hierarchy, you will get the smallest number of results by entering as much information as possible before searching. To search for a dealer user by hierarchy: Click the Dealer User radio button. From the Affiliate drop-down list, select an affiliate. From the Division drop-down list, select a division, if desired. From the Region drop-down list, select a region, if desired. From the Area drop-down list, select an area, if desired. From the District drop-down list, select a district, if desired. From the Dealer drop-down list, select a dealer, if desired. Click the Search icon. Note : To remove search criteria, click the Clear icon.
To print customer pay reimbursement results from a PDF file, from the Service menu, select Customer Pay Reimbursement : Click the Print button. Note: The File Download window opens. In the File Download window, click the Save button and proceed as you normally would to download a PDF file to your computer. From your computer, follow the standard procedure to print the PDF.
Print a Customer Pay Reimbursement Results To print customer pay reimbursement results from a PDF file: Click the Print button. Note: The File Download window opens. In the File Download window, click the Save button and proceed as you normally would to download a PDF file to your computer. From your computer, follow the standard procedure to print the PDF.
Customer Customer Pay Reimbursement Reimbursement Customer Pay Reimbursement Customer Pay Reimbursement View Customer Pay Reimbursement Analysis Workflow : Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for customer pay reimbursement analysis.
Validate claims to determine if they have errors prior to submission to the Host. DBS has incorporated the Host validation rules to insure a high first-time submission rate for dealers. The Batch Validation function is most commonly used when multiple claims are created and saved using the Express Entry Warranty Claim page. To batch validate claims from the Manage Warranty Claim page: Filter the Warranty Claims list as desired. Select the Val. (Validate) checkbox for each claim you want to validate, or to validate all claims in the list, select the checkbox beside the column header. Note : The Val. checkbox is only selectable for those claims without errors that have not been previously validated. Click the Validate All button. Click the Yes button. Note : DBS sends the claims to the batch-validate queue and validates the claims in the background. As desired, you can continue to perform additional tasks on the Manage Warranty Claim page. After validation, you may choose to submit those warranty claims with warning messages and/or those claims without errors.
Batch Validate Claims from the Manage Warranty Claim Page Validate claims to determine if they have errors prior to submission to the Host. DBS has incorporated the Host validation rules to insure a high first-time submission rate for dealers. The Batch Validation function is most commonly used when multiple claims are created and saved using the Express Entry Warranty Claim page. To batch validate claims from the Manage Warranty Claims page: Filter the Warranty Claims list as desired. Select the Val. (Validate) checkbox for each claim you want to validate, or to validate all claims in the list, select the checkbox beside the column header. Note : The Val. checkbox is only selectable for those claims without errors that have not been previously validated. Click the Validate All button. Note : The Validate Confirmation window opens. C lick the Yes button. Note : DBS sends the claims to the validation queue and validates the claims in the background. As desired, you can continue to perform additional tasks on the Manage Warranty Claim page. After validation, you may choose to submit those warranty claims with warning messages and/or those claims without errors.
To export Campaign Part Management information: Click the Export button. Select the output format. Save the file to your local drive. If you filter the page before exporting, only those records that meet the filter criteria export. You can filter or sort the data if you export the file in the Microsoft ® Excel ® format.
Export Campaign Part Information To export Campaign Part Management information: Click the Export button. Select the output format. Save the file to your local drive. If you filter the page before exporting, only those records that meet the filter criteria export. You can filter or sort the data if you export the file in the Microsoft ® Excel ® format.
Campaign Campaign Part Management Campaign Parts Campaign Campaign Part Management Campaign Part Management Manage Campaign Parts Workflow Note : This workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing campaign parts. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Campaign Parts Workflow. View Service Campaign Order Workflow Manage Service Campaign Order Workflow
MRW: NNA internal users only Note : This task applies to internal users only. To reject an SVC order from the SVC Order Management page: Select the SVC order. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Reject SVC Order option. Note : A Rejection Message dialog appears. Type a reason for the rejection. Note : Dealers can view the rejection reason in the Parts Order Detail section. Click the Yes button to confirm the rejection, or click the No button to cancel the rejection. Note : The system cancels the order. SVC orders pending approval contain parts that are on the Campaign Parts list, as validated by the system during order submission. You can only reject an SVC order in "New" status.
Reject an SVC Order from the SVC Order Management Page To reject an SVC order from the SVC Order Management page: Select the SVC order. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Reject SVC Order option. Note : A Rejection Message dialog appears. In the space provided, type a reason for the rejection. Note : Dealers can view the rejection reason in the Parts Order Detail section. Click the Yes button to confirm the rejection, or click the No button to cancel the rejection. Note : If you reject the confirmation, the system cancels the order. SVC orders pending approval contain parts that are on the Campaign Parts list, as validated by the system during order submission. You can only reject an SVC order in "New" status.
Approve or Reject SVC Order Reject Approve or Reject SVC Order Approve or Reject SVC Order Manage Service Campaign Order Workflow Note : This workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing a Service Campaign (SVC) order. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Service Campaign Order Workflow. Manage Campaign Parts Workflow View Service Campaign Order Workflow
To export SVC Order Management information: Click the Export button. Select the output format. Microsoft ® Excel ® PDF Save the file to your local drive. If you filter the page before exporting, only those records that meet the filter criteria export. You can filter, sort, and print the data if you export the information to Microsoft ® Excel ® .
Export SVC Order Management Information To export SVC Order Management information: Click the Export button. Select the output format. Save the file to your local drive. If you filter the page before exporting, only those records that meet the filter criteria export. You can filter, sort, and print the data if you export the information to Microsoft ® Excel ® .
Approve or Reject SVC Order Reject Approve or Reject SVC Order Approve or Reject SVC Order Manage Service Campaign Order Workflow Note : This workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing a Service Campaign (SVC) order. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Service Campaign Order Workflow. Manage Campaign Parts Workflow View Service Campaign Order Workflow
Reports saved on the Manage Host Report page cannot be deleted. To add a new Host report on the Manage Host Report page: From the Application drop-down list, select the application for the report. Note : The Application selection you make determines whether or not the report will show up for that application on the Host Reports page. Note : If the report you are adding should appear in the list of available reports for more than one application on the Host Reports page, you should add the new report for each application. In the Name in English field, type the report name in English. In the Report # field, type the Host report number for the report. From the Division drop-down list, select whether the report is applicable to Nissan, Infiniti, or both. Note : If you select "Both", two entries will appear in the reports list; one for Nissan, and the other for Infiniti. In the Name in Fren ch field, type the report name in French. Note : The French report name appears to those users who select "French" as the display language in the DBS header area. From the Orientation drop-down list to select whether the report should appear in portrait or landscape orientation. Note : For a description of portrait and landscape orientation, please see the Glossary (keyword Orientation). From the Frequency drop-down list, select the frequency at which the report will be generated. In the Name in Spanish field, type report name in Spanish. Note : The Spanish report name appears to those users who select "Spanish" as the display language in the DBS header area. Click the Add button to add the new report(s) to the reports list. Note : Adding the report(s) to the reports list does not save the created reports, it only adds them to the list. Click the Save button to save the new reports and process any other changes that you have made on the Manage Host Report page since the last Save action, or click the Cancel button to cancel all changes you have made since the last Save action. Note : A confirmation window appears. Click the Yes button to save all of your changes, or click the No button to close the confirmation window and return to the Manage Host Report page where you can make additional changes.
Add a New Host Report on the Manage Host Report Page Reports saved on the Manage Host Report page cannot be deleted. To add a new Host report on the Manage Host Report page: From the Application drop-down list, select the application for the report. Note : The Application selection you make determines whether or not the report will show up for that application on the Host Reports page. Note : If the report you are adding should appear in the list of available reports for more than one application on the Host Reports page, you should add the new report for each application. In the Name in English field, type the report name in English. In the Report # field, type the Host report number for the report. From the Division drop-down list, select whether the report is applicable to Nissan, Infiniti, or both. Note : If you select "Both", two entries will appear in the reports list; one for Nissan, and the other for Infiniti. In the Name in Fren ch field, type the report name in French. Note : The French report name appears to those users who select "French" as the display language in the DBS header area. From the Orientation drop-down list to select whether the report should appear in portrait or landscape orientation. Note : For a description of portrait and landscape orientation, please see the Glossary (keyword Orientation). From the Frequency drop-down list, select the frequency at which the report will be generated. In the Name in Spanish field, type report name in Spanish. Note : The Spanish report name appears to those users who select "Spanish" as the display language in the DBS header area. Click the Add button to add the new report(s) to the reports list. Note : Adding the report(s) to the reports list does not save the created reports, it only adds them to the list. Click the Save button to save the new reports and process any other changes that you have made on the Manage Host Report page since the last Save action, or click the Cancel button to cancel all changes you have made since the last Save action. Note : A confirmation window appears. Click the Yes button to save all of your changes, or click the No button to close the confirmation window and return to the Manage Host Report page where you can make additional changes.
To filter the Parts Return Management summary: Select a filter option. If a text-entry field appears, type a filter value. - OR - If a drop-down list appears, select an option from the list. -OR - If a calendar tool appears, click in the field, and then use the calendar to select the desired date(s). Note : Depending on your selection, additional filter options may display to narrow the results further. Note : Depending upon your selection, the system may automatically filter the list and refresh the display. Click the Search button, as needed. View the returns that meet the selected criteria. Note : To reset the filter criteria to the default options, click the Clear icon. Return number is also known as the control number or MFR reference number.
Filter Parts Return Management Summary To filter the Parts Return Management summary: From the Filter By drop-down list, select a filter option. If a text-entry field appears, type a filter value. - OR - If a drop-down list appears, select an option from the list. -OR - If a calendar tool appears, click in the field, and then use the calendar to select the desired date(s). Note : Depending on your selection, additional filter options may display to narrow the results further. Note : Depending on your selection, the system may automatically filter the list and refresh the display. Click the Search icon, as needed. View the returns that meet the selected criteria. Note : To reset the filter criteria to the default options, click the Clear icon. The parts return number is also known as the control number or MFR reference number.
Manage Returns Manage Returns Manage Returns Manage Parts Return Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing parts returns. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Parts Return Workflow. Create Parts Return Workflow Modify Parts Return Workflow
Set Up User Permissions Quick Reference Guide The Set Up User Permissions Quick Reference Guide provide instructions for DBS dealer administrators on setting up user permissions for your dealership. Click here to access the Set Up User Permissions Quick Reference Guide.
Set Up User Permissions Quick Reference Guide The Set Up User Permissions Quick Reference Guide provide instructions for DBS dealer administrators on setting up user permissions for your dealership. Click here to access the Set Up User Permissions Quick Reference Guide.
Parts Landing Page Overview Purpose Use the Parts landing page to view alerts, announcements, and other news related to service. Description The content area of the Parts Landing page displays the following sections: Alerts - Appear at the top of the landing page, if applicable. The Alert messages continually scroll across the top of the page, when applicable. Alerts typically provide information that is system critical. Announcements - Contains national and regional announcements that are specific to service Other News - Displays the announcements that are not as high priority. When an announcement is no longer one of the high-priority announcements, the announcement automatically moves to the Other News section. Parts Order - Displays a list of parts orders for your dealership Parts RFC - Displays a list of request for credit applications for your dealership Parts Return - Displays a list of parts returns for your dealership Parts SVC Order - Displays a list of service campaign orders for your dealership Note: If you are a dealer user, the parts information on this page is for your dealership only. If you belong to a dealer group, the information is for the dealership you selected from the Dealer drop-down list. If you are an internal user, the information is for all Nissan dealers. Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Parts Landing page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. View Alerts View Announcements and Other News Perform Common DBS Tasks View Alerts View Announcements and Other News Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Parts Landing page. Page Preview
Monitor User Status Page Overview Purpose Use the Monitor User Status page to view system usage details for each user at a dealership. Description The content area of the Monitor User Status page displays the following sections: Filter by - Allows you to filter the information to display only the records that match your criteria Summary - Displays general information for all records on the page Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Monitor User Status page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Monitor User Status Page Preview
Monitor Vehicle Inventory Page Overview Purpose Use the Monitor Vehicle Inventory page to review inventory records that failed proper transmission between DBS and the NNA or NCI Host. Each transaction is expected to contain a code of add, change or delete a vehicle inventory record. DBS processes the transmission and updates the vehicle inventory data maintained in DBS . Any transaction received that fails during the record update process is displayed on the Manage Vehicle Inventory page. Description The content area of the Monitor Vehicle Inventory page displays the following sections: Search / Filter - Allows you to define search criteria to reduce the number of records displayed in the Summary section. Summary - Displays records which match the search criteria entered, and provides a link to view additional detail for an error message. Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Monitor Vehicle Inventory page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Filter the Monitor Vehicle Inventory Page Look Up a Dealer on the Monitor Vehicle Inventory Page View Detail on the Monitor Vehicle Inventory Page Page Preview
Note : The menu tabs and menu options available to you are determined by your user profile. If you need access to other tabs or menu options, contact the DBS System Administrator. Click here for instructions on how to determine the System Administrator for your dealership. Note : The menu tabs and menu options available to you are determined by your user profile. If you need access to other tabs or menu options, contact your DBS System Administrator. Click here for instructions on how to determine the System Administrator for your dealership. To use the menu tabs: Move your cursor over the applicable tab to display the menu options available to you. Note : There is no menu for the Home tab. Move your cursor over the menu option you want to access. Note : When you move your cursor over a menu option, three icons appear for that option. The single window icon opens the content in a new tab in the current browser. The double window icon opens the selected content in a new browser window. The star icon adds the link to your My Links list. Click the menu option or applicable icon to open the desired page or application. The menu tabs and menu options you see are determined by your user profile.
Use the Menu Tabs Note : The menu tabs and menu options available to you are determined by your user profile. If you need access to other tabs or menu options, contact the DBS System Administrator. Click here for instructions on how to determine the System Administrator for your dealership. Note : The menu tabs and menu options available to you are determined by your user profile. If you need access to other tabs or menu options, contact your DBS System Administrator. Click here for instructions on how to determine the System Administrator for your dealership. To use the menu tabs: Move your cursor over the applicable tab to display the menu options available to you. Note : There is no menu for the Home tab. Move your cursor over the menu option you want to access. Note : When you move your cursor over a menu option, three icons appear for that option. The single window icon opens the content in a new tab in the current browser. The double window icon opens the selected content in a new browser window. The star icon adds the link to your My Links list. Click the menu option or applicable icon to open the desired page or application.
To filter the Monitor Vehicle Inventory page: If desired, type filter criteria in the fields provided. Click the Search icon. In the Monitor Vehicle Inventory section, view the records which match the search criteria you entered. To sort the inventory data by a specific field, click the column header. If multiple pages exist, do one of the following to navigate from page to page: Click a page number or click the forward or backward arrow. - OR - In the Go to Page field, type a page number, and then click the Go button.
Filter the Monitor Vehicle Inventory Page To filter the Monitor Vehicle Inventory page: If desired, type filter criteria in the fields provided. Click the Search icon. In the Monitor Vehicle Inventory section, view the records which match the search criteria you entered. To sort the inventory data by a specific field, click the column header. If multiple pages exist, do one of the following to navigate from page to page: Click a page number or click the forward or backward arrow. - OR - In the Go to Page field, type a page number, and then click the Go button.
To filter the calendar events summary: From the Filter By drop-down list, select a filter option. If a text-entry field appears, type a filter value and then click the Search icon. If a drop-down list appears, select an option from the list. To include past events, click the Include Past button. Note : To hide past events, click the Hide Past button. Note : To reset the filter criteria to the default options and clear the search criteria, click the Clear icon.
Filter the Calendar Events Summary To filter the Calendar Events summary list: From the Filter By drop-down list, select a filter option. If a text-entry field appears, type a filter value and then click the Search icon. If a drop-down list appears, select an option from the list. To include past events, click the Include Past button. Note : To hide past events, click the Hide Past button. Note : To reset the filter criteria to the default options and clear the search criteria, click the Clear icon.
To navigate using a link in My Links: Move your cursor over the My Links link. Click the link for the application page you want to navigate to.
Navigate Using a Link in My Links To navigate using a link in My Links: Move your cursor over the My Links link. Click the link for the application page you want to navigate to.
To create or edit an alert: Select the page where the alert will display. Select the display language for the alert. If the item does not require approval, clear the Require Approval? checkbox. Type a title for the alert. Note : The alert title is limited to 50 characters. Select a scheduled date for the alert. Type a scheduled time for the alert. Select an expiration date for the alert. Type the content of the alert message in the space provided. Select recipients for the alert. Note : To learn about selecting recipients, click the applicable link. Select internal users by hierarchy Select internal users by geography Select dealer users by hierarchy Select dealer users by geography Select dealers users by dealer number Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm, or click the No button to close the window without confirming.
Create or Edit an Alert To create or edit an alert: From the Page drop-down list, select the page where the alert will display. From the Language drop-down list, select the display language for the alert. Note : Alerts will display in English by default. If the item does not require approval, clear the Require Approval? checkbox. In the Title field, type a title for the alert. Note : The alert title is limited to 50 characters. In the Scheduled Date field, use the calendar to select a start date. Note : To view a different month, click the forward or backward arrow next to the month. If the alert must display at or after a specific time, in the Scheduled Time field, type the scheduled start time in HH:MM format. In the Expiration Date field, use the calendar to select the expiration or end date. In the Content field, type the text of the alert. Note : There are no text formatting options for alerts. Note: A counter displays that indicates the number of remaining characters you can enter in the text field. The alert content is limited to 1000 characters. Select recipients for the alert. To select dealer users, click the Dealer User button. To select internal users, click the Internal User button. Note : To learn about selecting recipients, click the applicable link. Select internal users by hierarchy Select internal users by geography Select dealer users by hierarchy Select dealer users by geography Select dealers users by dealer number Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm, or click the No button to close the window without confirming.
To open the Create Calendar Event page: Click the Create button.
Open the Create Calendar Event Page To open the Create Calendar Event page: Click the Create button.
View Overview Information View User Permissions Page Overview View User Permissions Workflow Perform Tasks Perform Common DBS Tasks Use the Quick Jump Menu View User Permissions Perform Common DBS Tasks Use the Quick Jump Menu View User Permissions
User Processes User Permissions Users View View User Permissions Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing user permissions. Related Workflows The following workflow may have one or more tasks in common with the View User Permissions Workflow. User Summary Workflow
To view the reports list: View the list of reports. Note : A red "N" appears beside the name of reports owned by you. In order to sort the displayed information, click the arrow beside a column title. You can generate, replicate, or view any report in your list. You must be the owner of a report, indicated by a red "N," in order to delete, transfer, copy, modify, or make public.
About the Reports List To view the reports list: View the list of reports. Note : A red "N" appears beside the name of reports owned by you. In order to sort the displayed information, click the arrow beside a column title. You can generate, replicate, or view any report in your list. You must be the owner of a report, indicated by a red "N," in order to delete, transfer, copy, modify, or make public.
To view the reports list: View the list of reports. Note : A red "N" appears beside the name of reports owned by you. In order to sort the displayed information, click the arrow beside a column title. You can generate, replicate, or view any report in your list. You must be the owner of a report, indicated by a red "N," in order to delete, transfer, copy, modify, or make public.
About the Reports List To view the reports list: View the list of reports. Note : A red "N" appears beside the name of reports owned by you. In order to sort the displayed information, click the arrow beside a column title. You can generate, replicate, or view any report in your list. You must be the owner of a report, indicated by a red "N," in order to delete, transfer, copy, modify, or make public.
To view the reports list: View the list of reports. Note : A red "N" appears beside the name of reports owned by you. In order to sort the displayed information, click the arrow beside a column title. You can generate, replicate, or view any report in your list. You must be the owner of a report, indicated by a red "N," in order to delete, transfer, copy, modify, or make public.
About the Reports List To view the reports list: View the list of reports. Note : A red "N" appears beside the name of reports owned by you. In order to sort the displayed information, click the arrow beside a column title. You can generate, replicate, or view any report in your list. You must be the owner of a report, indicated by a red "N," in order to delete, transfer, copy, modify, or make public.
To view the reports list: View the list of reports. Note : A red "N" appears beside the name of reports owned by you. In order to sort the displayed information, click the arrow beside a column title. You can generate, replicate, or view any report in your list. You must be the owner of a report, indicated by a red "N," in order to delete, transfer, copy, modify, or make public.
About the Reports List To view the reports list: View the list of reports. Note : A red "N" appears beside the name of reports owned by you. In order to sort the displayed information, click the arrow beside a column title. You can generate, replicate, or view any report in your list. You must be the owner of a report, indicated by a red "N," in order to delete, transfer, copy, modify, or make public.
To view the reports list: View the list of reports. Note : A red "N" appears beside the name of reports owned by you. In order to sort the displayed information, click the arrow beside a column title. You can generate, replicate, or view any report in your list. You must be the owner of a report, indicated by a red "N," in order to delete, transfer, copy, modify, or make public.
About the Reports List To view the reports list: View the list of reports. Note : A red "N" appears beside the name of reports owned by you. In order to sort the displayed information, click the arrow beside a column title. You can generate, replicate, or view any report in your list. You must be the owner of a report, indicated by a red "N," in order to delete, transfer, copy, modify, or make public.
View Parts Return Status Page Overview Purpose Corporate and authorized PDC users may use the View Parts Return Status page to view the parts return status for those dealerships for which they have permissions. Dealerships displayed on the View Parts Return Status depend on your PDC authorization permissions. Description The content area of the View Parts Return Status page displays the following sections: Filter - The Filter section allows you to search for and customize the list of dealerships displayed in the Dealer List section. Although you can enter any search or filter criteria desired, only those dealerships that fall within your PDC permissions will appear in the Dealer List section. Dealer List - The Dealer List section displays the parts return status information for those dealerships within your PDC permissions. By default, this section displays all parts return status information for the current calendar year sorted first by dealer name and then by return due date. Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the View Parts Return Status page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Export Information from the View Parts Return Status Page Filter the View Parts Return Status Page Page Preview
To search for an internal user by hierarchy: If necessary, select the Internal User radio button. From the Affiliate drop-down list, select the affiliate. From the Division drop-down list, select the division. From the Region drop-down list, select the region. Note : If desired, enter additional criteria to limit the results returned. Click the Search icon. Note : The results which match the search criteria you entered display in the User Summary List. When searching for users by hierarchy, limit the search results found by searching for at least the appropriate affiliate, division, and region.
Search for an Internal User by Hierarchy When searching for users by hierarchy, limit the search results found by searching for at least the appropriate affiliate, division, and region. To search for an internal user by hierarchy: If necessary, select the Internal User radio button. From the Affiliate drop-down list, select the affiliate. From the Division drop-down list, select the division. From the Region drop-down list, select the region. Note : If desired, enter additional criteria to limit the results returned. Click the Search icon. Note : The results which match the search criteria you entered display in the User Summary List.
3C2ED869-4F31-4EC8-90A5-F047B3C74223\DBS Training Instructions Reference Guide NISSAN.PDF
Manage Standard Operation Categories Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing and creating standard operation categories. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Standard Operation Categories Workflow. Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes Workflow Manage Dealer Operation Codes Workflow Manage Standard Operation Codes Workflow
Workflows provide an overview of a process related to tasks performed in DBS . Each workflow provides users with a quick way to see how tasks are related to each other, and to easily navigate to each task in the process. To use the DBS Help workflows: There are two ways to access a workflow in DBS Help: Click the link for the workflow in the Table of Contents panel on the right side of the help window, or click the Process tab when it appears within a help topic to access the associated workflow(s). Each box on the workflow graphic show a required or optional task that may be performed to complete the process. Each box is linked tot he corresponding help topic where you can find additional information and how to steps. Click the link for the task you want to perform. To return to the workflow, click the Back button in your browser, or click the Back button in the help system.
Use Workflows in DBS Help Workflows provide an overview of a process related to tasks performed in DBS . Each workflow provides users with a quick way to see how tasks are related to each other, and to easily navigate to each task in the process. To use the DBS workflows: There are two ways to access a workflow in DBS Help: Click the link for the workflow in the Table of Contents panel on the right side of the help window, or click the Process tab when it appears within a help topic to access the associated workflow(s). Each box on the workflow graphic show a required or optional task that may be performed to complete the process. Each box is linked tot he corresponding help topic where you can find additional information and how to steps. Click the link for the task you want to perform. To return to the workflow, click the Back button in your browser, or click the Back button in the help system.
View Overview Information Inventory Search Page Overview Search Vehicle Inventory Workflow Perform Tasks Access OMS to Trade a Vehicle from Inventory Search Access OMS to View OMS Vehicle Detail from Inventory Search Manage Vehicle Notes from Inventory Search Perform Common DBS Tasks Print Vehicle Detail from Inventory Search Search Inventory Set Custom Search Group Set the Distance Search Range View, Print, or Email Window Sticker from Inventory Search View Vehicle Detail from Inventory Search Manage Vehicle Notes from Inventory Search Perform Common DBS Tasks Print Vehicle Detail from Inventory Search Search Inventory Set Custom Search Group Set the Distance Search Range View, Print, or Email Window Sticker from Inventory Search View Vehicle Detail from Inventory Search
Inventory Search Inventory Search Processes Search Inventory Search Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for searching and viewing inventory for a particular vehicle model with specified features and options. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Inventory Search workflow. Vehicle Inventory Workflow
To select a user to receive report definitions: From the list of users, select a user. Click the Submit button. Note : If the target user has a report with the same name, the Report Name window appears. Type a new report name. Click the OK button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Note : Report Writer adds the report(s) to the target user's list. If your are transferring reports, Report Writer removes the reports from the user's list and adds the reports to the target user's list. If your are copying reports, Report Writer retains the reports on your list and adds the reports to the target user's list.
Select a User to Receive Report Definitions If you are transferring reports, Report Writer removes the reports from the user's list and adds the reports to the target user's list. If you are copying reports, Report Writer retains the reports on your list and adds the reports to the target user's list. To select a user to receive report definitions: From the list of users, select a user. Click the Submit button, or click the Cancel button to close without selecting a user. Note : If the target user has a report with the same name, the Rename window appears. Type a new report name. Click the OK button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Note : Report Writer adds the report to the target user's list.
To select a user to receive report definitions: From the list of users, select a user. Click the Submit button. Note : If the target user has a report with the same name, the Report Name window appears. Type a new report name. Click the OK button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Note : Report Writer adds the report(s) to the target user's list. If your are transferring reports, Report Writer removes the reports from the user's list and adds the reports to the target user's list. If your are copying reports, Report Writer retains the reports on your list and adds the reports to the target user's list.
Select a User to Receive Report Definitions If you are transferring reports, Report Writer removes the reports from the user's list and adds the reports to the target user's list. If you are copying reports, Report Writer retains the reports on your list and adds the reports to the target user's list. To select a user to receive report definitions: From the list of users, select a user. Click the Submit button, or click the Cancel button to close without selecting a user. Note : If the target user has a report with the same name, the Rename window appears. Type a new report name. Click the OK button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Note : Report Writer adds the report to the target user's list.
To select a user to receive report definitions: From the list of users, select a user. Click the Submit button. Note : If the target user has a report with the same name, the Report Name window appears. Type a new report name. Click the OK button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Note : Report Writer adds the report(s) to the target user's list. If your are transferring reports, Report Writer removes the reports from the user's list and adds the reports to the target user's list. If your are copying reports, Report Writer retains the reports on your list and adds the reports to the target user's list.
Select a User to Receive Report Definitions If you are transferring reports, Report Writer removes the reports from the user's list and adds the reports to the target user's list. If you are copying reports, Report Writer retains the reports on your list and adds the reports to the target user's list. To select a user to receive report definitions: From the list of users, select a user. Click the Submit button, or click the Cancel button to close without selecting a user. Note : If the target user has a report with the same name, the Rename window appears. Type a new report name. Click the OK button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Note : Report Writer adds the report to the target user's list.
To select a user to receive report definitions: From the list of users, select a user. Click the Submit button. Note : If the target user has a report with the same name, the Report Name window appears. Type a new report name. Click the OK button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Note : Report Writer adds the report(s) to the target user's list. If your are transferring reports, Report Writer removes the reports from the user's list and adds the reports to the target user's list. If your are copying reports, Report Writer retains the reports on your list and adds the reports to the target user's list.
Select a User to Receive Report Definitions If you are transferring reports, Report Writer removes the reports from the user's list and adds the reports to the target user's list. If you are copying reports, Report Writer retains the reports on your list and adds the reports to the target user's list. To select a user to receive report definitions: From the list of users, select a user. Click the Submit button, or click the Cancel button to close without selecting a user. Note : If the target user has a report with the same name, the Rename window appears. Type a new report name. Click the OK button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Note : Report Writer adds the report to the target user's list.
To select a user to receive report definitions: From the list of users, select a user. Click the Submit button. Note : If the target user has a report with the same name, the Report Name window appears. Type a new report name. Click the OK button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Note : Report Writer adds the report(s) to the target user's list. If your are transferring reports, Report Writer removes the reports from the user's list and adds the reports to the target user's list. If your are copying reports, Report Writer retains the reports on your list and adds the reports to the target user's list.
Select a User to Receive Report Definitions If you are transferring reports, Report Writer removes the reports from the user's list and adds the reports to the target user's list. If you are copying reports, Report Writer retains the reports on your list and adds the reports to the target user's list. To select a user to receive report definitions: From the list of users, select a user. Click the Submit button, or click the Cancel button to close without selecting a user. Note : If the target user has a report with the same name, the Rename window appears. Type a new report name. Click the OK button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Note : Report Writer adds the report to the target user's list.
To edit dealer information: In the Internet Sales Manager Name field, type the first name and last name of the Internet Sales Manager. From the Language Code drop-down list, select the desired language. From the Time Zone Code drop-down list, select the desired time zone. Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Note : The Save Confirmation screen appears. Click the Yes button to confirm, or click the No button to close the window without confirming. Each employee's time zone setting on their My Profile page defaults to the time zone setting on the Dealer Information page.
Edit Dealer Information To edit dealer information: In the Internet Sales Manager Name field, type the first and last name of the Internet Sales Manager. From the Language Code drop-down list, select the desired language. From the Time Zone Code drop-down list, select the desired time zone. Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Note: The Save Confirmation page appears. Click the Yes button to confirm, or click the No button to close the window without confirming. Each employee's time zone setting on their My Profile page defaults to the time zone setting on the Dealer Information page.
Dealer Dealer Permissions Edit Dealer Processes Edit Dealer Information Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for editing dealer information. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Edit Dealer Information Workflow. View Dealer Information or Permissions Workflow
To access OMS to trade a vehicle: Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon for the selected vehicle. From the Action menu, select the OMS Dealer Trade option. Note : The OMS Dealer Trade option is only available to users who have access to the OMS application. Note : The external OMS application opens. Follow the procedures within the OMS application to complete the dealer trade task. Any fields that are dimmed are unavailable.
Access OMS to a Trade Vehicle from Inventory Search To access Order Management System (OMS) to trade a vehicle: Select the vehicle you want to trade. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon for the selected vehicle. From the Action menu, select the OMS Dealer Trade option. Note : The OMS Dealer Trade option is only available to users who have access to the OMS application. Note : The external OMS application opens.
Inventory Search Inventory Search Processes Search Inventory Search Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for searching and viewing inventory for a particular vehicle model with specified features and options. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Inventory Search workflow. Vehicle Inventory Workflow
To create or edit a parts order: From the Order Type drop-down list, select the order type. In the Dealer Order Reference # field, type a unique reference number to identify the parts order. Note : If the reference number is a duplicate number, DBS automatically generates a suffix and highlights the suffix in the Parts Order Detail section. After you type a unique order reference number, DBS clears the suffix. To ship the order to your alternate shipping point (ASP), in the ASP Number field, type your ASP number or click the Lookup icon to select the ASP. Note : The ASP number may also be referred to as the wholesale code or ship to code. If you selected "SOL - Solicited Order" or "SVC - Service Campaign Order" from the Order Type drop-down list, complete the additional required fields: SOL - Solicited Order In the Promo Program Code field, type the program code or click the Search icon to search for and select the program code. SVC - Service Campaign Order In the VIN # field, type the vehicle identification number. In the Campaign ID field, type the campaign ID associated with this part. Note : The format for campaign ID is ANNNN, where A is an alphabetic character and NNNN is a numeric value. From the Ship Priority , Cross Ship Priority , Backorder Flag , and Cross Ship Flag drop-down lists, modify the default selections, if desired. Note : The information in these lists is automatically populated based on the order type. Note : The information in these lists determines the default selections for parts within the order. Changes made in the Parts Order Detail section may override this setting. In the Shipping Instructions field, type any additional the shipping instructions for the parts order. Complete the Parts Order Detail section: Click here for instructions on how to add a part. Click here for instructions on how to delete a part. Click here for instructions on how to look up a part. Click here for instructions on how to modify a detail line. Use the appropriate button to save, submit, delete, or cancel the parts order. Save - Click the Save button to save the parts order. Submit - Click the Submit button to validate the parts order and submit the order for fulfillment or approval. Note : If errors are found during the validation process, a warning message appears. Click Yes to submit the order with warnings, or click No to cancel the submission and return to the parts order. Delete - Click the Delete button to delete a new or saved parts order. Cancel - Click the Cancel button to clear any changes made since the previously saved version of the parts order. Click Yes to confirm the cancellation and discard all changes, or click No to return to the parts order. The Backorder Flag and Back Order drop-down lists on the Create and Modify Parts Orders pages allows you to indicate at the header level or at the individual part level; whether or not you want any parts that are not available to be placed on backorder. If you do not want a part to be backordered, select the "No" option from the Back Order or Backorder Flag drop-down list.
Create or Edit a Parts Order To create or edit a parts order: From the Order Type drop-down list, select the order type. In the Dealer Order Reference # field, type a unique reference number to identify the parts order. Note : If the reference number is a duplicate number, DBS automatically generates a suffix and highlights the suffix in the Parts Order Detail section. After you type a unique order reference number, DBS clears the suffix. To ship the order to your alternate shipping point (ASP), in the ASP Number field, type your ASP number or click the Lookup icon to select the ASP. Note : The ASP number may also be referred to as the wholesale code or ship to code. If you selected "SOL - Solicited Order" or "SVC - Service Campaign Order" from the Order Type drop-down list, complete the additional required fields: From the Ship Priority , Cross Ship Priority , Backorder Flag , and Cross Ship Flag drop-down lists, modify the default selections, if desired. Note : The information in these lists is automatically populated based on the order type. Note : The information in these lists determines the default selections for parts within the order. Changes made in the Parts Order Detail section may override this setting. In the Shipping Instructions field, type any additional the shipping instructions for the parts order. Complete the Parts Order Detail section: Click here for instructions on how to add a part. Click here for instructions on how to delete a part. Click here for instructions on how to look up a part. Click here for instructions on how to modify a detail line. Use the appropriate button to save, submit, delete, or cancel the parts order. Save - Click the Save button to save the parts order. Submit - Click the Submit button to validate the parts order and submit the order for fulfillment or approval. Note : If errors are found during the validation process, a warning message appears. Click Yes to submit the order with warnings, or click No to cancel the submission and return to the parts order. Delete - Click the Delete button to delete a new or saved parts order. Cancel - Click the Cancel button to clear any changes made since the previously saved version of the parts order. Click Yes to confirm the cancellation and discard all changes, or click No to return to the parts order. To create or edit a parts order: From the Order Type drop-down list, select the order type. In the Order # field, type a unique reference number to identify the parts order. Note : If the reference number is a duplicate number, DBS automatically generates a suffix and highlights the suffix in the Parts Order Detail section. After you type a unique order reference number, DBS clears the suffix. In the Dealer Comments field, type any comments. In the Ship Via field, type instructions for how the order should be shipped. Complete the Parts Order Detail section: Click here for instructions on how to add a part. Click here for instructions on how to delete a part. Click here for instructions on how to look up a part. Click here for instructions on how to modify a detail line. Use the appropriate button to save, submit, delete, or cancel the parts order. Save - Click the Save button to save the parts order. Submit - Click the Submit button to validate the parts order and submit the order for fulfillment or approval. Note : If errors are found during the validation process, a warning message appears. Click Yes to submit the order with warnings, or click No to cancel the submission and return to the parts order. Delete - Click the Delete button to delete a new or saved parts order. Cancel - Click the Cancel button to clear any changes made since the previously saved version of the parts order. Click Yes to confirm the cancellation and discard all changes, or click No to return to the parts order. For VOR parts orders, you cannot have more than 40 part detail lines in a single order. For STK parts orders, you cannot have more than 999 part detail lines in a single order. For fastest processing, correct all errors before submitting a part order. The Backorder Flag and Back Order drop-down lists on the Create and Modify Parts Orders pages allows you to indicate at the header level or at the individual part level; whether or not you want any parts that are not available to be placed on backorder. If you do not want a part to be backordered, select the "No" option from the Back Order or Backorder Flag drop-down list.
To resubmit a warranty claim: Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon for the desired claim. From the Action menu, select the Resubmit Claim menu option. Note : The Submit Confirmation window opens. Click the Yes button to resubmit the claim. Note : DBS validates, saves and, if error-free, submits the warranty claim for processing.
Resubmit Warranty Claim To resubmit a warranty claim: Select the warranty claim you want to resubmit. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon for the desired claim. From the Action menu, select the Resubmit Claim menu option. Note : The Submit Confirmation window opens. Click the Yes button to resubmit the claim.
To export One Study Result page information: Click the Export button and select Excel . Note : The File Download window opens. Click the Save button and proceed as you normally would to save the file to your local drive. You can filter, sort, and print the data if you export the information to Microsoft ® Excel ® .
Export One Study Result Page Information To export One Study Result page information: Click the Export button. Select the select Excel export format. Note : The File Download window opens. Follow your browser-specific instructions to open, save, or print the document. You can filter, sort, and print the data if you export the information to Microsoft ® Excel ® .
Dashboard Early Detection System (EDS) Hold Status Processes Study View Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow Note: The Manage Early Detection System Studies workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing Early Detection System (EDS) studies that integrate appointment and repair order data collected by the Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow. Define or Modify a Study Workflow View One Study Result Workflow View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow
Dashboard Early Detection System (EDS) EDS: Study Dashboard Processes EDS: Study Dashboard Study Study Dashboard View View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow Note : The View a Dealer's Study Results workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing one dealer's study results that integrate appointment and repair order data collected by the Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the View a Dealer's Study Results workflow. Define or Modify a Study Workflow Manage Early Detection Studies Workflow View One Study Result Workflow
Dashboard Early Detection System (EDS) EDS: Study Dashboard Processes EDS: Study Dashboard Study Study Dashboard View View One Study Result Workflow Note : The View One Study Result workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing a study that integrates appointment and repair order data collected by the Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the View One Study Result workflow. Define or Modify Study Workflow Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow
To delete an announcement: Select the announcement you want to delete. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Delete option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Delete button to confirm the deletion, or click the Cancel button to close the message window without deleting the announcement.
Delete an Announcement To delete an announcement: Select the announcement you want to delete. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Delete option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Delete button to confirm the deletion, or click the Cancel button to close the message window without deleting the announcement.
SVC Parts Orders Quick Reference Guide Nissan is pleased to announce the availability of a new enhancement to the Parts > Parts Order Management screen. Parts personnel with access to this screen will now be able to order restricted campaign parts using the Service Campaign Order (SVC) Type. This option will only work with campaign parts and cannot be used to order other sales restricted parts. Click here to download the SVC Parts Orders Quick Reference Guide.
SVC Parts Orders Quick Reference Guide Nissan is pleased to announce the availability of a new enhancement to the Parts > Parts Order Management screen. Parts personnel with access to this screen will now be able to order restricted campaign parts using the Service Campaign Order (SVC) Type. This option will only work with campaign parts and cannot be used to order other sales restricted parts. Click here to download the SVC Parts Orders Quick Reference Guide.
View Overview Information Transaction Status Page Overview Search for Transactions Workflow Perform Tasks Perform Common DBS Tasks Search for Transactions on the Transaction Status Page View Transaction Status Perform Common DBS Tasks Search for Transactions on the Transaction Status Page View Transaction Status
Environment Processes Search System Transaction Search for Transactions Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for searching and viewing transactions.
Environment Processes Search System Transaction Search for Transactions Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for searching and viewing transactions.
To restart a suspended standard operation code, from the Service tab, select Standard Operation Codes : Select the code. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Restart option. Note : A message appears that asks when the applicable Repair Order (RO) lines are to be translated. Select a date option on which translation is to begin. Click the Restart button to confirm, or click the Cancel button to close the window without restarting. Note : The system resumes processing ROs for the restarted code.
Restart a Standard Operation Code To restart a standard operation code: Select the code. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Restart option. Note : A message appears that asks when the applicable Repair Order (RO) lines are to be translated. Select a date option on which translation is to begin. Click the Restart Study button to restart the translation on the specified date, or click the Cancel button to close the window without restarting. Note : The system resumes processing ROs for the restarted code.
ReRun Standard Operation Code Translation Manage Standard Operation Codes Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing standard operation codes. Related Workflows ( Note to developer : List the related workflows and link to them.) The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Standard Operation Codes Workflow. Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes Workflow Manage Dealer Operation Codes Workflow Manage Standard Operation Categories Workflow
View Overview Information Hold Status Summary Page Overview Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow View One Study Result Workflow Perform Tasks Access a Study to View Results Access One Dealer Study Results Export Hold Status Summary Information Filter Hold Status Summary Perform Common DBS Tasks Release a Vehicle from Dealer Hold View Dealer Study Results View NSH for a Vehicle in a Study View One Study Result View Repair Order for Vehicle in a Study Access a Study to View Results Access One Dealer Study Results Export Hold Status Summary Information Filter Hold Status Summary Perform Common DBS Tasks Release a Vehicle from Dealer Hold View Dealer Study Results View NSH for a Vehicle in a Study View One Study Result View Repair Order for Vehicle in a Study
Dashboard Early Detection System (EDS) EDS: Study Dashboard Processes EDS: Study Dashboard Study Study Dashboard View View One Study Result Workflow Note : The View One Study Result workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing a study that integrates appointment and repair order data collected by the Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the View One Study Result workflow. Define or Modify Study Workflow Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow
Dashboard Early Detection System (EDS) EDS: Study Dashboard Processes EDS: Study Dashboard Study Study Dashboard View View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow Note : The View a Dealer's Study Results workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing one dealer's study results that integrate appointment and repair order data collected by the Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the View a Dealer's Study Results workflow. Define or Modify a Study Workflow Manage Early Detection Studies Workflow View One Study Result Workflow
Dashboard Early Detection System (EDS) Hold Status Processes Study View Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow Note: The Manage Early Detection System Studies workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing Early Detection System (EDS) studies that integrate appointment and repair order data collected by the Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow. Define or Modify a Study Workflow View One Study Result Workflow View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow
View Overview Information Parts Order Management Page Overview Manage Parts Orders Workflows Perform Tasks Access the Create Parts Order Page Access the Edit Parts Order Page Access the PDC Inquiry Page to View Part Availability Access the View Parts Order Page to View Detail Access Reports Delete a Parts Order Export Parts Order Management Information Filter Parts Order Management Summary Look Up a Part Perform Common DBS Tasks Print Parts Order Detail Submit a Parts Order View Parts Order Management Summary and Detail Access the Create Parts Order Page Access the Edit Parts Order Page Access the View Parts Order Page to View Detail Access the VOR Inquiry Page to View Part Availability Access Reports Delete a Parts Order Export Parts Order Management Information Filter Parts Order Management Summary Look Up a Part Perform Common DBS Tasks Print Parts Order Detail Submit a Parts Order View Parts Order Management Summary and Detail DBS
Manage Orders Manage Orders Manage Orders Manage Orders Parts Order Management Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing parts orders. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Parts Order workflow. Create Parts Order Workflow Edit Parts Order Workflow Inquire on the Availability of Parts at the Parts Distribution Centers Workflow View Parts Order Workflow Create Parts Order Workflow Edit Parts Order Workflow View Parts Order Workflow
View Overview Information Retailed Vehicle Open Campaign Report Page Overview Perform Tasks About the Retailed Vehicle Open Campaign Report Page Edit Information on the Retailed Vehicle Open Campaign Report Page Export Information from the Retailed Vehicle Open Campaign Report Page Perform Common DBS Tasks Search for Information on the Retailed Vehicle Open Campaign Report View NSH for a Vehicle on the Retailed Vehicle Open Campaign Report Page View TSB for a Vehicle on the Retailed Vehicle Open Campaign Report Page
Service Introduction Description The Service application in DBS provides dealers and corporate users the ability to submit claims for reimbursable warranty work, track open and completed repair orders, view vehicles with open campaigns, and review the status of customer pay reimbursements. The Service application also allows users to view the complete repair history for a vehicle and view technical service information for vehicles being serviced. Note : The items you see in the menu tabs and menu links vary based on your permissions. If you need to request changes to your permissions, please contact your dealership's System Administrator. You can find the System Administrator(s) for you dealership by viewing your profile. For more information, click here . The Service menu in DBS help shows content listed by application page. For ease of use, content is organized by application page following the DBS menu when possible. When you first begin using DBS and the DBS help system, we recommend that you review the help system menu and then view the page overview, workflow, and task information for the tasks you will be performing in DBS .
To view a repair order (RO) for a warranty claim: In the RO column, click the hyperlink for the desired claim. Note : The RO from which the warranty claim is derived opens in a new window. If no repair order information is available, DBS displays a message indicating that no repair order information is available. Click the Print button to print the RO, or click the Close button to return to the Manage Warranty Claim page.
View Repair Order from Manage Warranty Claim Page To view a repair order (RO) for a warranty claim: In the RO column, click the hyperlink for the desired claim. Note : The RO from which the warranty claim is derived opens in a new window. If no repair order information is available, DBS displays a message indicating that no repair order information is available. Click the Print button to print the RO or click the Close button to return to the Manage Warranty Claim page. The Line column displays the line number on the RO from which the warranty claim was created.
Manage Warranty Claims Processes Manage Warranty Claims Manage Warranty Claims Manage Warranty Claims Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing warranty claims. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create or Edit Warranty Claims Workflow or View Warranty Claims Workflow. Edit or Create Warranty Claims Workflow View Warranty Claims Workflow
To open the Edit Parts Return page: Select the parts return you want to edit. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Edit Return option. Note : The Edit Parts Return page appears. To modify a parts return, the return must be in "New" or "Open" status.
Open the Edit Parts Return Page To open the Edit Parts Return page: Select the parts return you want to edit. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Edit Return option. Note : The Edit Parts Return page appears. To modify a parts return, the return must be in "New" or "Open" status.
Edit Return Edit Return Edit Return Edit Parts Return Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for modifying a parts return. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Edit Parts Return Workflow. Create Parts Return Workflow Manage Parts Return Workflow
Manage Returns Manage Returns Manage Returns Manage Parts Return Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing parts returns. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Parts Return Workflow. Create Parts Return Workflow Modify Parts Return Workflow
To open the Edit Parts Return page: Select the parts return you want to edit. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Edit Return option. Note : The Edit Parts Return page appears. To modify a parts return, the return must be in "New" or "Open" status.
Open the Edit Parts Return Page To open the Edit Parts Return page: Select the parts return you want to edit. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Edit Return option. Note : The Edit Parts Return page appears. To modify a parts return, the return must be in "New" or "Open" status.
Edit Return Edit Return Edit Return Edit Parts Return Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for modifying a parts return. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Edit Parts Return Workflow. Create Parts Return Workflow Manage Parts Return Workflow
Manage Returns Manage Returns Manage Returns Manage Parts Return Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing parts returns. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Parts Return Workflow. Create Parts Return Workflow Modify Parts Return Workflow
To select recipients by dealer user for geography option: Click the Dealer Users button. Select the Choose recipients by Geography option. Click the Next button to continue. Select an affiliate. Select a division. Note : The affiliate and division default setting is "All." Select the available state / province. Note : To select multiple items, press and hold the CTRL key while selecting items. Click the Copy button to move the selected options to the Selected box, or click the Copy All button to move all options. Note : To remove a selection, select the options in the Selected box and click the Remove button. Click the Next button to continue, or click the Back button to return to the previous window. Select the available eligibility options. Click the Next button to continue, or click the Back button to return to the previous window. Select the available position options. Click the Copy button to move the selected options to the Selected box, or click the Copy All button to move all options. Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the Back button to return to the previous window. To view your recipient selections after you select them, use the View/Print option in the Action menu.
Select Recipients by Dealer User for Geography Option To select recipients by dealer user for geography option: Click the Dealer Users button. Select the Choose recipients by Geography option. Click the Next button to continue. From the Affiliate drop-down list, select an affiliate. Note : The default setting for affiliate is "All." From the Division drop-down list, select a division. Note: The default setting for division is "All." From the Available Fields box, select the state / province. Note : To select multiple items, press and hold the CTRL key while selecting items. Click the Copy button to move the selected options to the Selected box, or click the Copy All button to move all options. Note : To remove a selection, select the options in the Selected box and click the Remove button. Click the Next button to continue, or click the Back button to return to the previous window. From the Available Fields box, select the eligibility options. Click the Copy button to move the selected options to the Selected box, or click the Copy All button to move all options. Click the Next button to continue, or click the Back button to return to the previous window. From the Available Fields box, select the positions. Click the Copy button to move the selected options to the Selected box, or click the Copy All button to move all options. Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the Back button to return to the previous window. To view your recipient selections after you select them, use the View/Print option in the Action menu.
View Overview Information Service Landing Page Overview Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes Workflow Define or Modify a Study Workflow Edit or Create Warranty Claim Workflow Manage Dealer Operation Codes Workflow Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow Manage Standard Operation Categories Workflow Manage Standard Operation Codes Workflow Manage Warranty Claims Workflow View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow View Customer Pay Reimbursement Analysis Workflow View One Study Result Workflow View the Service Dashboard Workflow Perform Tasks Perform Common DBS Tasks View Alerts View Announcements and Other News Perform Common DBS Tasks View Alerts View Announcements and Other News
Dashboard Early Detection System (EDS) EDS: Service Dashboard EDS: Service Dashboard Service Dashboard Study Technical Service Bulletin (TSB) View the Service Dashboard Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing the Service Dashboard. You may view study alerts generated regarding vehicles that meet the criteria of informational or hold studies or technical service bulletins. You may also view open repair orders or National Service History.
Dashboard Early Detection System (EDS) EDS: Study Dashboard Processes EDS: Study Dashboard Study Study Dashboard View View One Study Result Workflow Note : The View One Study Result workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing a study that integrates appointment and repair order data collected by the Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the View One Study Result workflow. Define or Modify Study Workflow Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow
Customer Customer Pay Reimbursement Reimbursement Customer Pay Reimbursement Customer Pay Reimbursement View Customer Pay Reimbursement Analysis Workflow : Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for customer pay reimbursement analysis.
Dashboard Early Detection System (EDS) EDS: Study Dashboard Processes EDS: Study Dashboard Study Study Dashboard View View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow Note : The View a Dealer's Study Results workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing one dealer's study results that integrate appointment and repair order data collected by the Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the View a Dealer's Study Results workflow. Define or Modify a Study Workflow Manage Early Detection Studies Workflow View One Study Result Workflow
Manage Warranty Claims Processes Manage Warranty Claims Manage Warranty Claims Manage Warranty Claims Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing warranty claims. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create or Edit Warranty Claims Workflow or View Warranty Claims Workflow. Edit or Create Warranty Claims Workflow View Warranty Claims Workflow
ReRun Standard Operation Code Translation Manage Standard Operation Codes Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing standard operation codes. Related Workflows ( Note to developer : List the related workflows and link to them.) The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Standard Operation Codes Workflow. Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes Workflow Manage Dealer Operation Codes Workflow Manage Standard Operation Categories Workflow
ReRun Standard Operation Category Translation Manage Standard Operation Categories Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing and creating standard operation categories. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Standard Operation Categories Workflow. Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes Workflow Manage Dealer Operation Codes Workflow Manage Standard Operation Codes Workflow
Dashboard Early Detection System (EDS) Hold Status Processes Study View Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow Note: The Manage Early Detection System Studies workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing Early Detection System (EDS) studies that integrate appointment and repair order data collected by the Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow. Define or Modify a Study Workflow View One Study Result Workflow View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow
Dealer Operation Code Dealer Operation Codes ReRun Dealer Operation Codes Translation Manage Dealer Operation Codes Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing dealer operation codes. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Dealer Operation Codes Workflow. Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes Workflow Manage Standard Operation Categories Workflow Manage Standard Operation Codes Workflow
Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Edit Warranty Claims Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Warranty Claims Edit or Create Warranty Claims Workflow *** Nissan Canada Inc. (NCI) recommends dealers create Warranty Claims in an NCI DBS certified dealer management system and then log into NCI DBS to review, validate and submit the claim to NCI. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating and editing claims. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Warranty Claims Workflow or View Warranty Claims Workflow. Manage Warranty Claims Workflow View Warranty Claims Workflow
Early Detection System (EDS) EDS: Study Dashboard Processes EDS: Study Dashboard Study Study Dashboard Technical Service Bulletin (TSB) Create or Modify a Study Workflow Note : The Create or Modify a Study workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for defining or modifying a study that integrates appointment and repair order data collected by the Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Define or Modify a Study Workflow. Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow View One Study Result Workflow
Standard Operation Codes Standard Operation Code Standard Operation Codes Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating or editing standard operation groups and codes. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes workflow. Manage Dealer Operation Codes Workflow Manage Standard Operation Categories Workflow Manage Standard Operation Codes Workflow
You can manually report the sale of a vehicle sale of a vehicle for which a dealer trade has been performed in OMS that has not yet been listed in your DBS inventory by using the Quick Entry RDR page. To report the sale of a vehicle not in your inventory using Quick Entry RDR: From the Filter By drop-down list, select "VIN". In the Filter By data entry field, enter the full VIN number. Click the Search icon to search for the vehicle. A message appears that states that the vehicle is not in your inventory. Click the Yes button to continue the RDR for this VIN. Manually enter the data in each section of the RDR. Complete the Vehicle section of the RDR. Click here for more information. Complete the Customer section of the RDR. Click here for more information. To print the RDR confirmation after submission, select the Automatically print RDR confirmation after submission? checkbox in the top right corner. Click the Save button. Note : When you click Save, DBS validates that the information in the RDR record is complete. If necessary, correct any errors and then click the Save button again,. Click the Submit button to submit the RDR. Note : The Submit button is only active for saved RDR records without errors. Note : The system will check the NNA Host to validate that the vehicle is in your OMS inventory. If the vehicle was successfully traded via OMS you will receive a message that the RDR was successful.
RDR a Vehicle Not in Your DBS Inventory Using Quick Entry RDR You can manually report the sale of a vehicle sale of a vehicle for which a dealer trade has been performed in OMS that has not yet been listed in your DBS inventory by using the Quick Entry RDR page. To report the sale of a vehicle not in your inventory using Quick Entry RDR: From the Filter By drop-down list, select "VIN". In the Filter By data entry field, enter the full VIN number. Click the Search icon to search for the vehicle. A messages appears that states that the vehicle is not in your inventory. Click the Yes button to continue with the RDR for this VIN. Complete each section of the RDR. Complete the Vehicle section of the RDR. Click here for more information. Complete the Customer section of the RDR. Click here for more information. To print the RDR confirmation after submission, select the Automatically print RDR confirmation after submission? checkbox. Click the Save button. Note : When you click Save, DBS validates that the information in the RDR record is complete. If necessary, correct any errors and then click the Save button again. Click the Submit button to submit an RDR without errors. Note : The Submit button is only active for saved RDR records without errors. Note : The system will check the NNA Host to validate that the vehicle is in your OMS inventory. If the vehicle was successfully traded via OMS you will receive a message that the RDR was successful.
The notifications function is currently disabled in DBS by Nissan request. View Overview Information Create or Edit a Notification Page Overview Create or Edit a Notification Workflow Perform Tasks Create or Edit a Notification Perform Common DBS Tasks Select Dealer Users by Geography Select Dealer Users by Hierarchy Select Dealer Users by Input a Dealer Select Internal Users by Geography Select Internal Users by Hierarchy Create or Edit a Notification Perform Common DBS Tasks Select Dealer Users by Geography Select Dealer Users by Hierarchy Select Dealer Users by Input a Dealer Select Internal Users by Geography Select Internal Users by Hierarchy
Create Edit Modify Notifications Processes Text Message Create or Edit a Notification Workflow Note : This workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating and editing a notification. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create or Edit a Notification Workflow. Create or Edit an Alert Workflow Create or Edit an Announcement Workflow Create or Edit a Calendar Event Workflow
To access My Profile: Click the My Profile link. Your profile contains default settings for language, time zone, date format, and cell phone information. It is important you maintain your cell phone information to ensure you receive SMS (text message) notifications.
Access My Profile To access My Profile: Click the My Profile link. Your profile contains default settings for language, time zone, date format, and cell phone information. It is important you maintain your cell phone information to ensure you receive SMS (text message) notifications.
Create Study Page Overview - Internal User Purpose Use the Create Study page to define or modify a study that integrates appointment and repair order (RO) data collected by the Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Description The content area of the Create Study page displays the following sections: Navigation - Enables you to select study criteria information categories Information - Displays the following related detailed information categories according to the option selected in the Navigation section Study Basic Information Study Type Dealer Data Vehicle Serial Range Model/Year Model/Series Options/Packages/Accessories Miscellaneous Features Engine Type Engine Code Production Plant Body Type Transmission Type Manufacture Date Geography Climatic Zone States Regions Dealers Other TSB Notifications Report Tasks You can perform the following tasks from or on the Create Study page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Create or Modify a Study Create or Modify a Study Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Create Study page. Create or Modify a Study Workflow Page Preview
View Overview Information Change User Report Page Overview Change User in Report Writer Workflow Perform Tasks Perform Common DBS Tasks Select a User to Receive Report Definitions Perform Common DBS Tasks Select a User to Receive Report Definitions
Change User in Report Writer Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for changing a user in Report Writer. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Change User in Report Writer Workflow. Copy All, Transfer All, or Delete All Report Definitions Workflow Copy, Transfer, Delete, or Make Report Definition Public Workflow Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Workflow Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow View a Host Report Workflow
To export the standard operation codes summary: Click the Export button. Select the output format. Click the Save button to save the file to your local drive. If you filter the page before exporting, only those records that meet the filter criteria export. You can filter, sort, and print the data if you export the information to Microsoft® Excel®.
Export the Standard Operation Codes Summary To export the standard operation codes summary: Click the Export button. Select the output format. Click the Save button to save the file to your local drive. If you filter the page before exporting, only those records that meet the filter criteria will export. You can filter, sort, and print the data if you export the information to Microsoft® Excel®.
ReRun Standard Operation Code Translation Manage Standard Operation Codes Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing standard operation codes. Related Workflows ( Note to developer : List the related workflows and link to them.) The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Standard Operation Codes Workflow. Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes Workflow Manage Dealer Operation Codes Workflow Manage Standard Operation Categories Workflow
Automated PDI Payments Quick Reference Guide As of February 1, 2018 - dealers will no longer need to submit warranty claims for PDI fuel and labor charges. All PDI charges will automatically be paid to the dealer when the vehicle is invoiced to the retailer. Dealers should review the attached quick reference guide and/or contact the PDI help desk at 615-725-0588 with any questions or concerns. Note : Any warranty claims submitted for PDI charges after February 1 st will be automatically suspended. Click here to download the Automated PDI Payments Reference Guide.
View Overview Information Standard Operation Category Page Overview Manage Standard Operation Categories Workflow Perform Tasks Access the Create Standard Operation Category Page Access the Edit Standard Operation Category Page Delete a Standard Operation Category Perform Common DBS Tasks Search the Standard Operation Category Summary View the Standard Operation Category Summary and Detail Access the Create Standard Operation Category Page Access the Edit Standard Operation Category Page Delete a Standard Operation Category Perform Common DBS Tasks Search the Standard Operation Category Summary View the Standard Operation Category Summary and Detail
ReRun Standard Operation Category Translation Manage Standard Operation Categories Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing and creating standard operation categories. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Standard Operation Categories Workflow. Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes Workflow Manage Dealer Operation Codes Workflow Manage Standard Operation Codes Workflow
Submit Financial Statements Workflow Note : This workflow is for NNA users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for submitting the financial statement.
To filter the dealer operation code summary: From the Filter by drop down list, select the desired option. As applicable, type or select a secondary filter value. Click the Search icon to view the results or click the Clear icon to clear the fields and enter new criteria. View the updated list that matches your filter criteria.
Filter the Dealer Operation Code Summary To filter the dealer operation code summary: From the Filter by drop down list, select the desired option. As applicable, type or select a secondary filter value. Click the Search icon to view the results or click the Clear icon to clear the fields and enter new criteria. View the updated list that matches your filter criteria.
Dealer Operation Code Dealer Operation Codes ReRun Dealer Operation Codes Translation Manage Dealer Operation Codes Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing dealer operation codes. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Dealer Operation Codes Workflow. Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes Workflow Manage Standard Operation Categories Workflow Manage Standard Operation Codes Workflow
To maintain purge rules: Type the number of days or months to store each data type before removing it from the Dealer Business System (DBS) . Note : Most data types are entered in days. If a data type requires an entry in months, the Type of Data to Purge column will include a note that indicates the unit of time to be entered. Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm, or click the No button to close the window without confirming.
Maintain Purge Rules To maintain purge rules: Type the number of days or months to store each data type before removing it. Note : Most data types are entered in days. If a data type requires an entry in months, the Type of Data to Purge column will include a note that indicates you enter the time in months. Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm, or click the No button to close the window without confirming.
How to Access Window Stickers Quick Reference Guide The How to Access Window Stickers Quick Reference Guide provides information on how to access the vehicle window sticker from the Vehicle Inventory, Inventory Search, and National Service History pages in DBS . Click here to download the How to Access Window Stickers Quick Reference Guide.
How to Access Window Stickers Quick Reference Guide The How to Access Window Stickers Quick Reference Guide provides information on how to access the vehicle window sticker from the Vehicle Inventory, Inventory Search, and National Service History pages in DBS . Click here to download the How to Access Window Stickers Quick Reference Guide.
How to Access Window Stickers Quick Reference Guide The How to Access Window Stickers Quick Reference Guide provides information on how to access the vehicle window sticker from the Vehicle Inventory, Inventory Search, and National Service History pages in DBS . Click here to download the How to Access Window Stickers Quick Reference Guide.
To complete the Parts section of an express warranty claim: In the Part No./Part Cat. field, type the part number or three-digit part category code, or click the Lookup icon to search for the part. In the Req Qty field, type the quantity requested for the repair part. In the Req Amt field, type the monetary amount requested for the part. If necessary, in the Coverage 1 Code field, update the coverage code. Note : The coverage code is automatically populated based on information entered in the Claim Information section. In the Coverage 1 Amt field, enter the amount covered for the part. If the coverage amount is split between or among coverage types, complete the Coverage 2 and Coverage 3 fields as appropriate. Select the PFP checkbox if you entered line type "PP" in the Claim Information section to automatically populate the PFP (Primary Failed Part) field. If the primary failed part is a battery, alternator, or starter replacement parts, in the TestCode field, type the test code or GR8 code. As appropriate, click the Plus Sign to add additional parts. Note : To save a claim with errors or warnings, click the Save button. To validate the information in the claim, click the Validate button. To submit a claim with no errors, click the Submit button.
Complete the Parts Section of an Express Entry Warranty Claim To complete the Parts section of an express warranty claim: Note : If you search for a repair order and line number, the information in the Parts section is populated with the repair order information. Add additional information as necessary. In the Part No./Part Cat. field, type the part number or three-digit part category code, or click the Lookup icon to search for the part. In the Req Qty field, type the quantity requested for the repair part. In the Req Amt field, type the monetary amount requested for the part. If necessary, in the Coverage 1 Code field, update the coverage code. Note : The coverage code is automatically populated based on information entered in the Claim Information section. In the Coverage 1 Amt field, enter the amount covered for the part. If the coverage amount is split between or among coverage types, complete the Coverage 2 and Coverage 3 fields as appropriate. Select the PFP checkbox if you entered line type "PP" in the Claim Information section to automatically populate the PFP (Primary Failed Part) field. If the primary failed part is a battery, alternator, or starter replacement parts, in the TestCode field, type the test code or GR8 code. As appropriate, click the Plus Sign to add additional parts.
FDA416F4-633F-41C9-8B17-4AF41BE82DFD\Access Window Stickers in DCS R1-2 v 1.0 2015.pdf
View Overview Information Edit or Create Warranty Claim Page Overview Create or Edit a Warranty Claim Workflow Perform Tasks Add New Claim Line from Edit/Create Warranty Claim Page Delete a Warranty Claim Edit or Create a Warranty Claim Complete the Summary Section of a Claim Complete the Claim Information Section Complete the Parts Section of a Claim Complete the Operations Section of a Claim Complete the Expenses Section of a Claim Complete the Comments Section of a Claim Complete the Customer Section of a Claim ~ View the Claim Activity Section of a Claim View the History Section of a Claim Look Up Part Look Up Op Code Perform Common DBS Tasks Print Warranty Claim Submit Warranty Claim Use the Quick Jump Menu Validate Warranty Claim View Dealer Claim Administration Limits View NSH View Repair Order Add New Claim Line from Edit/Create Warranty Claim Page Delete a Warranty Claim Edit or Create a Warranty Claim Complete the Summary Section of a Claim Complete the Claim Information Section Complete the Parts Section of a Claim Complete the Operations Section of a Claim Complete the Expenses Section of a Claim Complete the Comments Section of a Claim Complete the Customer Section of a Claim View the Claim Activity Section of a Claim View the History Section of a Claim Look Up Part Look Up Op Code Perform Common DBS Tasks Print Warranty Claim Submit Warranty Claim Use the Quick Jump Menu Validate Warranty Claim View NSH View Repair Order
Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Edit Warranty Claims Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Warranty Claims Edit or Create Warranty Claims Workflow *** Nissan Canada Inc. (NCI) recommends dealers create Warranty Claims in an NCI DBS certified dealer management system and then log into NCI DBS to review, validate and submit the claim to NCI. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating and editing claims. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Warranty Claims Workflow or View Warranty Claims Workflow. Manage Warranty Claims Workflow View Warranty Claims Workflow
RDR History Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing Retail Delivery Reporting (RDR) history. Related Workflows The following workflows may have similar tasks in common with the Viewing RDR History Workflow. RDR a Vehicle Workflow
Note : This task applies to internal users only. To grant or remove access to a Star Web Service: Show the Star Web Service section, if collapsed. Note : To show the Star Web Service section, click the + icon in the section header. Expand the section(s). Note : To expand all items in the section, click the expand all link in the section header. Select or clear the item(s). Note : When you select or clear a checkbox at a higher hierarchy level, all items under that level are selected or cleared. Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm, or click the No button to close the window without confirming. The function tree displays permission options in hierarchical order, starting with the menu items at the top and ending with the specific functional items at the bottom.
MRW: Internal User Only Grant or Remove Access to a Star Web Service Note : This task applies to internal users only. To grant or remove access to a Star Web Service: Show the Star Web Service section, if collapsed. Note : To show the Star Web Service section, click the + icon in the section header. Expand the section(s). Note : To expand all items in the section, click the expand all link in the section header. Select or clear the item(s). Note : When you select or clear a checkbox at a higher hierarchy level, all items under that level are selected or cleared. Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm, or click the No button to close the window without confirming. The function tree displays permission options in hierarchical order, starting with the menu items at the top and ending with the specific functional items at the bottom.
Note : This task applies to internal users only. To grant or remove access to a Star Web Service: Show the Star Web Service section, if collapsed. Note : To show the Star Web Service section, click the + icon in the section header. Expand the section(s). Note : To expand all items in the section, click the expand all link in the section header. Select or clear the item(s). Note : When you select or clear a checkbox at a higher hierarchy level, all items under that level are selected or cleared. Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm, or click the No button to close the window without confirming. The function tree displays permission options in hierarchical order, starting with the menu items at the top and ending with the specific functional items at the bottom.
MRW: Internal User Only Grant or Remove Access to a Star Web Service Note : This task applies to internal users only. To grant or remove access to a Star Web Service: Show the Star Web Service section, if collapsed. Note : To show the Star Web Service section, click the + icon in the section header. Expand the section(s). Note : To expand all items in the section, click the expand all link in the section header. Select or clear the item(s). Note : When you select or clear a checkbox at a higher hierarchy level, all items under that level are selected or cleared. Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm, or click the No button to close the window without confirming. The function tree displays permission options in hierarchical order, starting with the menu items at the top and ending with the specific functional items at the bottom.
Dealer Summary Page Overview Purpose Use the Dealer Summary page to select a dealer for which to set permissions and then open the appropriate page to allow you to view, set up or edit the permissions for the selected dealer. You may also use the Dealer Summary page to open the appropriate page to allow you to view or edit dealer information. Description The content area of the Dealer Summary page displays the following sections: Filter By - Allows you to filter the information to display only the records that match your criteria (internal users only) Show Active Dealer and Inactive Dealer button - Allows you to toggle between active dealers only or active and inactive dealers (internal users only) Page Navigation - Allows you to navigate from page to page, if multiple pages exist Dealer Summary List - Displays general information for all records on the page Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Dealer Summary page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. About the Dealer Summary Page Filter Dealer Summary Open the Edit Dealer Information Page Open the Edit Dealer Permissions Page Open the User Summary to Search for a User Open the View Dealer Information Page Open the View Dealer Permissions Page Filter Dealer Summary Open the Edit Dealer Information Page Open the Edit Dealer Permissions Page Open the User Summary to Search for a User Open the View Dealer Information Page Open the View Dealer Permissions Page About the Dealer Summary Page Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Dealer Summary page. Edit Dealer Information Workflow Edit Dealer Permissions Workflow View Dealer Information or Permissions Workflow Page Preview
Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow generate a personalized report using Report Writer. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow. Change User in Report Writer Workflow Copy All, Transfer All, or Delete All Report Definitions Workflow Copy, Transfer, Delete, or Make Report Definition Public Workflow Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Workflow View a Host Report Workflow
Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow generate a personalized report using Report Writer. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow. Change User in Report Writer Workflow Copy All, Transfer All, or Delete All Report Definitions Workflow Copy, Transfer, Delete, or Make Report Definition Public Workflow Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Workflow View a Host Report Workflow
Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow generate a personalized report using Report Writer. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow. Change User in Report Writer Workflow Copy All, Transfer All, or Delete All Report Definitions Workflow Copy, Transfer, Delete, or Make Report Definition Public Workflow Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Workflow View a Host Report Workflow
Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow generate a personalized report using Report Writer. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow. Change User in Report Writer Workflow Copy All, Transfer All, or Delete All Report Definitions Workflow Copy, Transfer, Delete, or Make Report Definition Public Workflow Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Workflow View a Host Report Workflow
Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow generate a personalized report using Report Writer. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow. Change User in Report Writer Workflow Copy All, Transfer All, or Delete All Report Definitions Workflow Copy, Transfer, Delete, or Make Report Definition Public Workflow Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Workflow View a Host Report Workflow
To search the standard operation category summary: From the Search by drop-down list, select a filter option. Type or select a secondary filter value, and then click the Search icon. View the categories that meet the selected criteria. Note : To reset the filter criteria to the default options, click the Clear icon.
Search the Standard Operation Category Summary To search the standard operation category summary: From the Search by drop-down list, select a filter option. Type or select a secondary filter value, and then click the Search icon. View the categories that meet the selected criteria. Note: To reset the filter criteria to the default options, click the Clear icon.
ReRun Standard Operation Category Translation Manage Standard Operation Categories Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing and creating standard operation categories. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Standard Operation Categories Workflow. Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes Workflow Manage Dealer Operation Codes Workflow Manage Standard Operation Codes Workflow
To view, print, or email the window sticker from the Inventory Search page: Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon for the selected vehicle. From the Action menu, select the Window Sticker option. Note : The window sticker opens. View the window sticker. Note : To print the window sticker, click the Printer icon available in the toolbar. Proceed as you normally would to print a file. To email the window sticker, click the Email button. Note : A dialog box opens for you to address the email. Type the recipient's email address in the Receiver Address field. Type a subject in the Subject field. Click the Send button. You must have Adobe® Reader® (.pdf) installed on your computer to view the window sticker. Use the standard functionality available in Adobe ® Reader ® (.pdf) to print or email the window sticker.
View, Print, or Email the Window Sticker from the Inventory Search Page You must have Adobe ® Reader ® (.pdf) installed on your computer to view the window sticker. To view, print, or email the window sticker from the Inventory Search page: Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon for the selected vehicle. From the Action menu, select the Window Sticker option. View the window sticker. Note : To print the window sticker, follow your browser-specific instructions for printing a file. To email the window sticker, click the Email button in the lower-right corner of the window. Note : A window opens for you to address the email. In the Receiver Address field, type the recipient's email address. In the Subject field, type the subject of the email. Click the Send button. Nissan Canada, Inc.(NCI) refers to the window sticker as the vehicle pricing sticker. To view, print, or email the window sticker from the Inventory Search page: Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon for the selected vehicle. From the Action menu, select the Window Sticker option. View the window sticker. Select the desired language from the drop-down list. If desired, click the Printer icon to print the window sticker. To email the window sticker, click the Email button in the lower-right corner of the window. Note : A window opens for you to address the email. In the From Address field, type your email address, and in the Receiver Address field, type the email address of the person who will receive the email message. In the Subject field, type a subject for the email. Click the Send button.
Inventory Search Inventory Search Processes Search Inventory Search Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for searching and viewing inventory for a particular vehicle model with specified features and options. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Inventory Search workflow. Vehicle Inventory Workflow
Create or Edit Calendar Event Page Overview Purpose Use the Create or Edit Calendar Event page to create or edit event calendar items. Description The content area of the Create or Edit Calendar Event page displays the following sections: Event Details - Allows you to type and format the event text and determine the event date and time Settings - Allows you to determine the display language for the event Recipient - Allows you to select the internal and dealer users who will be able to view the event Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Create or Edit Calendar Event page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Create or Edit an Event Select Recipients Create or Edit an Event Select Recipients Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Create or Edit Calendar Event page. Create or Edit a Calendar Event Workflow Page Preview
To generate a report: Click the plus sign beside each level to display the next lower level until you reach the level needed. Click the checkbox beside each region, city, or dealer you wish to include in the report. Click the Schedule button. Note : Click the Cancel button to cancel without saving. From the Email Notification of Report Completion options, select "Yes" if you would like to receive an email notification when the report is generated, or "No" if you do not want to receive an email notification. Note : If you selected "Yes", either select the checkbox next to your email address, or type additional addresses in the blank field and select the checkbox next to the field. From the File Type options, select one or more file types. From the Schedule Report to options, select when you want the report to run. Note : If you select "Run At", you must select a start date and time for the report to generate. Note : If you select "Recurrence", you must select the date, time, and recurrence for the report to generate. Click Schedule .
Generate a Report (Internal Users) To generate a report: Click the plus sign beside each level to display the next lower level until you reach the level needed. Click the checkbox beside each region, city, or dealer you wish to include in the report. Click the Schedule button. Note : Click the Cancel button to cancel without saving. From the Email Notification of Report Completion options, select "Yes" if you would like to receive an email notification when the report is generated, or "No" if you do not want to receive an email notification. Note : If you selected "Yes", either check the checkbox next to your email address, or type additional addresses in the blank field and check the checkbox next to the field. Note : You can add multiple addresses by separating them with a semi-colon. Note : An email will not be sent unless the checkbox next to the email field is selected. From the File Type options, select one or more file types. From the Schedule Report to options, select when you want the report to run. Note : If you select "Run At", you must select a start date and time for the report to generate. Note : If you select "Recurrence", you must select the date, time, and recurrence for the report to generate. Click Schedule .
To generate a report: Click the plus sign beside each level to display the next lower level until you reach the level needed. Click the checkbox beside each region, city, or dealer you wish to include in the report. Click the Schedule button. Note : Click the Cancel button to cancel without saving. From the Email Notification of Report Completion options, select "Yes" if you would like to receive an email notification when the report is generated, or "No" if you do not want to receive an email notification. Note : If you selected "Yes", either select the checkbox next to your email address, or type additional addresses in the blank field and select the checkbox next to the field. From the File Type options, select one or more file types. From the Schedule Report to options, select when you want the report to run. Note : If you select "Run At", you must select a start date and time for the report to generate. Note : If you select "Recurrence", you must select the date, time, and recurrence for the report to generate. Click Schedule .
Generate a Report (Internal Users) To generate a report: Click the plus sign beside each level to display the next lower level until you reach the level needed. Click the checkbox beside each region, city, or dealer you wish to include in the report. Click the Schedule button. Note : Click the Cancel button to cancel without saving. From the Email Notification of Report Completion options, select "Yes" if you would like to receive an email notification when the report is generated, or "No" if you do not want to receive an email notification. Note : If you selected "Yes", either check the checkbox next to your email address, or type additional addresses in the blank field and check the checkbox next to the field. Note : You can add multiple addresses by separating them with a semi-colon. Note : An email will not be sent unless the checkbox next to the email field is selected. From the File Type options, select one or more file types. From the Schedule Report to options, select when you want the report to run. Note : If you select "Run At", you must select a start date and time for the report to generate. Note : If you select "Recurrence", you must select the date, time, and recurrence for the report to generate. Click Schedule .
To generate a report: Click the plus sign beside each level to display the next lower level until you reach the level needed. Click the checkbox beside each region, city, or dealer you wish to include in the report. Click the Schedule button. Note : Click the Cancel button to cancel without saving. From the Email Notification of Report Completion options, select "Yes" if you would like to receive an email notification when the report is generated, or "No" if you do not want to receive an email notification. Note : If you selected "Yes", either select the checkbox next to your email address, or type additional addresses in the blank field and select the checkbox next to the field. From the File Type options, select one or more file types. From the Schedule Report to options, select when you want the report to run. Note : If you select "Run At", you must select a start date and time for the report to generate. Note : If you select "Recurrence", you must select the date, time, and recurrence for the report to generate. Click Schedule .
Generate a Report (Internal Users) To generate a report: Click the plus sign beside each level to display the next lower level until you reach the level needed. Click the checkbox beside each region, city, or dealer you wish to include in the report. Click the Schedule button. Note : Click the Cancel button to cancel without saving. From the Email Notification of Report Completion options, select "Yes" if you would like to receive an email notification when the report is generated, or "No" if you do not want to receive an email notification. Note : If you selected "Yes", either check the checkbox next to your email address, or type additional addresses in the blank field and check the checkbox next to the field. Note : You can add multiple addresses by separating them with a semi-colon. Note : An email will not be sent unless the checkbox next to the email field is selected. From the File Type options, select one or more file types. From the Schedule Report to options, select when you want the report to run. Note : If you select "Run At", you must select a start date and time for the report to generate. Note : If you select "Recurrence", you must select the date, time, and recurrence for the report to generate. Click Schedule .
To generate a report: Click the plus sign beside each level to display the next lower level until you reach the level needed. Click the checkbox beside each region, city, or dealer you wish to include in the report. Click the Schedule button. Note : Click the Cancel button to cancel without saving. From the Email Notification of Report Completion options, select "Yes" if you would like to receive an email notification when the report is generated, or "No" if you do not want to receive an email notification. Note : If you selected "Yes", either select the checkbox next to your email address, or type additional addresses in the blank field and select the checkbox next to the field. From the File Type options, select one or more file types. From the Schedule Report to options, select when you want the report to run. Note : If you select "Run At", you must select a start date and time for the report to generate. Note : If you select "Recurrence", you must select the date, time, and recurrence for the report to generate. Click Schedule .
Generate a Report (Internal Users) To generate a report: Click the plus sign beside each level to display the next lower level until you reach the level needed. Click the checkbox beside each region, city, or dealer you wish to include in the report. Click the Schedule button. Note : Click the Cancel button to cancel without saving. From the Email Notification of Report Completion options, select "Yes" if you would like to receive an email notification when the report is generated, or "No" if you do not want to receive an email notification. Note : If you selected "Yes", either check the checkbox next to your email address, or type additional addresses in the blank field and check the checkbox next to the field. Note : You can add multiple addresses by separating them with a semi-colon. Note : An email will not be sent unless the checkbox next to the email field is selected. From the File Type options, select one or more file types. From the Schedule Report to options, select when you want the report to run. Note : If you select "Run At", you must select a start date and time for the report to generate. Note : If you select "Recurrence", you must select the date, time, and recurrence for the report to generate. Click Schedule .
To generate a report: Click the plus sign beside each level to display the next lower level until you reach the level needed. Click the checkbox beside each region, city, or dealer you wish to include in the report. Click the Schedule button. Note : Click the Cancel button to cancel without saving. From the Email Notification of Report Completion options, select "Yes" if you would like to receive an email notification when the report is generated, or "No" if you do not want to receive an email notification. Note : If you selected "Yes", either select the checkbox next to your email address, or type additional addresses in the blank field and select the checkbox next to the field. From the File Type options, select one or more file types. From the Schedule Report to options, select when you want the report to run. Note : If you select "Run At", you must select a start date and time for the report to generate. Note : If you select "Recurrence", you must select the date, time, and recurrence for the report to generate. Click Schedule .
Generate a Report (Internal Users) To generate a report: Click the plus sign beside each level to display the next lower level until you reach the level needed. Click the checkbox beside each region, city, or dealer you wish to include in the report. Click the Schedule button. Note : Click the Cancel button to cancel without saving. From the Email Notification of Report Completion options, select "Yes" if you would like to receive an email notification when the report is generated, or "No" if you do not want to receive an email notification. Note : If you selected "Yes", either check the checkbox next to your email address, or type additional addresses in the blank field and check the checkbox next to the field. Note : You can add multiple addresses by separating them with a semi-colon. Note : An email will not be sent unless the checkbox next to the email field is selected. From the File Type options, select one or more file types. From the Schedule Report to options, select when you want the report to run. Note : If you select "Run At", you must select a start date and time for the report to generate. Note : If you select "Recurrence", you must select the date, time, and recurrence for the report to generate. Click Schedule .
To view the National Service History (NSH) for a vehicle in a study: In the VIN column, click the VIN link for the desired vehicle. View the NSH for the vehicle. Note : To expand a section, click the plus sign beside the name of the section. To collapse a section, click the minus sign. Note : To print the NSH, click the Print button. To close, click the Close button.
View National Service History (NSH) for a Vehicle in a Study To view the National Service History (NSH) information for a vehicle in a study: In the VIN column, click the VIN link for the desired vehicle. Note : You may need to scroll to the right to view the VIN column. View the NSH for the vehicle. Note : To expand a section, click the plus sign beside the name of the section. To collapse a section, click the minus sign. Note : To print the NSH, click the Print button. To close, click the Close button.
Dashboard Early Detection System (EDS) Hold Status Processes Study View Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow Note: The Manage Early Detection System Studies workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing Early Detection System (EDS) studies that integrate appointment and repair order data collected by the Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow. Define or Modify a Study Workflow View One Study Result Workflow View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow
Dashboard Early Detection System (EDS) EDS: Study Dashboard Processes EDS: Study Dashboard Study Study Dashboard View View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow Note : The View a Dealer's Study Results workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing one dealer's study results that integrate appointment and repair order data collected by the Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the View a Dealer's Study Results workflow. Define or Modify a Study Workflow Manage Early Detection Studies Workflow View One Study Result Workflow
Dashboard Early Detection System (EDS) EDS: Study Dashboard Processes EDS: Study Dashboard Study Study Dashboard View View One Study Result Workflow Note : The View One Study Result workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing a study that integrates appointment and repair order data collected by the Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the View One Study Result workflow. Define or Modify Study Workflow Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow
To look up an operation (Op) code on a repair order: At the end of the Operation Code field, click the Lookup icon. Note : A Nissan Search page opens. The model information from the warranty claim is carried over from the Edit/Create Warranty Claim page. Select the Operation Code radio button. Click the Search button.
Look Up an Operation Code To look up an operation (Op) code: At the end of the Operation Code field, click the Lookup icon. Note : A Nissan Search page opens. The model information from the warranty claim is carried over from the Edit/Create Warranty Claim page. Select the Operation Code radio button. Click the Search button. To look up an operation (Op) code: At the end of the Operation Code field, click the Lookup icon. Note : An external page opens prompting you to log on. In the User Name field, type your user name. In the Password field, type your password. Click the Log In button. Follow the steps from your dealership to select the appropriate operation code and return to DBS .
Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Edit Warranty Claims Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Warranty Claims Edit or Create Warranty Claims Workflow *** Nissan Canada Inc. (NCI) recommends dealers create Warranty Claims in an NCI DBS certified dealer management system and then log into NCI DBS to review, validate and submit the claim to NCI. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating and editing claims. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Warranty Claims Workflow or View Warranty Claims Workflow. Manage Warranty Claims Workflow View Warranty Claims Workflow
To look up an operation (Op) code on a repair order: At the end of the Operation Code field, click the Lookup icon. Note : A Nissan Search page opens. The model information from the warranty claim is carried over from the Edit/Create Warranty Claim page. Select the Operation Code radio button. Click the Search button.
Look Up an Operation Code To look up an operation (Op) code: At the end of the Operation Code field, click the Lookup icon. Note : A Nissan Search page opens. The model information from the warranty claim is carried over from the Edit/Create Warranty Claim page. Select the Operation Code radio button. Click the Search button. To look up an operation (Op) code: At the end of the Operation Code field, click the Lookup icon. Note : An external page opens prompting you to log on. In the User Name field, type your user name. In the Password field, type your password. Click the Log In button. Follow the steps from your dealership to select the appropriate operation code and return to DBS .
Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Edit Warranty Claims Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Warranty Claims Edit or Create Warranty Claims Workflow *** Nissan Canada Inc. (NCI) recommends dealers create Warranty Claims in an NCI DBS certified dealer management system and then log into NCI DBS to review, validate and submit the claim to NCI. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating and editing claims. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Warranty Claims Workflow or View Warranty Claims Workflow. Manage Warranty Claims Workflow View Warranty Claims Workflow
To complete the Vehicle section of an RDR: Select a deal. Note : If you selected a vehicle that has a status of "Deal Booked" or "Deal Open", the RDR Vehicle page displays with the data fields pre-populated with the information from your DMS. Correct or provide information, as needed. Select the type of sale. In the Sale Date field, use the calendar to select the desired date. Select the salesperson. Select the F&I manager. Indicate the language. Select the state or province of the dealer. Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. A will display for any missing or incorrect data. Correct all errors before submitting the RDR. Complete the Buyer section of the RDR. Click here for more information. Complete the Finance section of the RDR, if necessary. Click here for more information. It is incredibly important that you verify and correct all RDR data before submission. You cannot modify a submitted RDR.
Complete the Vehicle Section of an RDR To complete the Vehicle section of an RDR: From the Deal drop-down list, select a deal type. Note : If you select a deal, the sale date, salesperson, and most customer information is provided for you. From the Type of Sale drop-down list, select the type of sale. Click in the Sale Date field, and then use the calendar to select the desired date. From the Salesperson drop-down list, select the salesperson. From the F&I Manager drop-down list, select the F&I manager. From the Spanish Language drop-down list, indicate if this is a Spanish language sale. From the State/Province drop-down list, select the state or province of the dealer. To indicate to the Host that the vehicle should be excluded from future allocations, select the Exclude from Allocation check box. Scroll to the bottom of the page and click the Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. A will display for any missing or incorrect data. Complete the Buyer section of the RDR. Click here for more information.
Processes RDR RDR RDR a Vehicle Workflow Note : This workflow is for NNA users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for retail delivery reporting (RDR) or editing the sale of a vehicle. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Report or Edit the Sale of a Vehicle workflow. Vehicle Inventory Workflow Inventory Search Workflow View RDR History Workflow
To add a part to the PDC Inquiry list: In the Part Number field, type the part number. - OR - Perform a part lookup. Note : Click here for information on how to look up a part. Enter the quantity. Note : Part quantity must not exceed 25. Click the Add button. Note : The system adds the part to the PDC Inquiry list. Note : Click the Clear icon to reset the search criteria. Note : Parts with a icon indicate that part ordering is restricted for this part. You must place an SVC order to request this part. PDC Inquiry, also referred to as VOR Inquiry, allows you to inquire on part availability at parts distribution centers -- giving you the ability to create cost effective orders. After you perform the inquiry, select the parts to be added to your order. The system displays error messages for the following: invalid part numbers, j code part numbers, superseded part numbers, and duplicate part numbers.
Add a Part to the PDC Inquiry List To add a part to the PDC Inquiry list: In the Part Number field, type the part number. - OR - Perform a part lookup. Note : Click here for information on how to look up a part. In the Part Quantity field, type the quantity. Note : Part quantity must not exceed 25. Click the Add button. Note : The system adds the part to the PDC Inquiry list. Note : Click the Clear icon to reset the search criteria. Note : Parts with a icon indicate that part ordering is restricted for this part. You must place an SVC order to request this part. Click the Inquiry button to view the part availability for each part added. PDC Inquiry, also referred to as VOR Inquiry, allows you to inquire on part availability at parts distribution centers -- giving you the ability to create cost effective orders. After you perform the inquiry, select the parts to be added to your order.
PDC Inquiry VOR Inquiry PDC Inquiry Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for performing a Parts Distribution Center (PDC) inquiry. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Inquire on Parts Distribution Center Workflow. Manage Parts Order Workflow
To remove a Host report from the Favorites list: Select the report you wish to remove in the Favorites list. Note : The row will turn a turquoise color. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Remove from favorites option. Note : The report name disappears from the Favorites list. Internal users can have favorite reports, but they must be the same favorites for all dealerships the user may access. Internal users cannot have a separate list of favorite reports for each dealer.
Remove a Host Report from the Favorites List To remove a Host report from the Favorites list: Select the report you wish to remove in the Favorites list. Note : The row will turn a turquoise color. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Remove from favorites option. Note : The report name disappears from the Favorites list.
Host Reports Processes Host Reports Host Reports Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing, printing, filtering, searching, and adding or removing a Host report from the Favorites list.
To remove a Host report from the Favorites list: Select the report you wish to remove in the Favorites list. Note : The row will turn a turquoise color. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Remove from favorites option. Note : The report name disappears from the Favorites list. Internal users can have favorite reports, but they must be the same favorites for all dealerships the user may access. Internal users cannot have a separate list of favorite reports for each dealer.
Remove a Host Report from the Favorites List To remove a Host report from the Favorites list: Select the report you wish to remove in the Favorites list. Note : The row will turn a turquoise color. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Remove from favorites option. Note : The report name disappears from the Favorites list.
Host Reports Processes Host Reports Host Reports Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing, printing, filtering, searching, and adding or removing a Host report from the Favorites list.
To remove a Host report from the Favorites list: Select the report you wish to remove in the Favorites list. Note : The row will turn a turquoise color. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Remove from favorites option. Note : The report name disappears from the Favorites list. Internal users can have favorite reports, but they must be the same favorites for all dealerships the user may access. Internal users cannot have a separate list of favorite reports for each dealer.
Remove a Host Report from the Favorites List To remove a Host report from the Favorites list: Select the report you wish to remove in the Favorites list. Note : The row will turn a turquoise color. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Remove from favorites option. Note : The report name disappears from the Favorites list.
Host Reports Processes Host Reports Host Reports Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing, printing, filtering, searching, and adding or removing a Host report from the Favorites list.
To remove a Host report from the Favorites list: Select the report you wish to remove in the Favorites list. Note : The row will turn a turquoise color. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Remove from favorites option. Note : The report name disappears from the Favorites list. Internal users can have favorite reports, but they must be the same favorites for all dealerships the user may access. Internal users cannot have a separate list of favorite reports for each dealer.
Remove a Host Report from the Favorites List To remove a Host report from the Favorites list: Select the report you wish to remove in the Favorites list. Note : The row will turn a turquoise color. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Remove from favorites option. Note : The report name disappears from the Favorites list.
Host Reports Processes Host Reports Host Reports Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing, printing, filtering, searching, and adding or removing a Host report from the Favorites list.
To remove a Host report from the Favorites list: Select the report you wish to remove in the Favorites list. Note : The row will turn a turquoise color. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Remove from favorites option. Note : The report name disappears from the Favorites list. Internal users can have favorite reports, but they must be the same favorites for all dealerships the user may access. Internal users cannot have a separate list of favorite reports for each dealer.
Remove a Host Report from the Favorites List To remove a Host report from the Favorites list: Select the report you wish to remove in the Favorites list. Note : The row will turn a turquoise color. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Remove from favorites option. Note : The report name disappears from the Favorites list.
Host Reports Processes Host Reports Host Reports Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing, printing, filtering, searching, and adding or removing a Host report from the Favorites list.
To view campaign information for a vehicle: If desired, to view only those vehicles with a campaign, from the Filter By drop-down list, select the "Open Campaign" option. Vehicles with open campaigns that have not yet been repaired appear as bold red text. Move your cursor over the serial number hyperlink to view the study name associated with the campaign. Vehicles with open campaign information that have been repaired appear as bold black text.
View Campaign Information for a Vehicle To view campaign information for a vehicle: If desired, to view only those vehicles with a campaign, from the Filter By drop-down list, select the "Open Campaign" option. Vehicles with open campaigns that have not yet been repaired appear as bold red text. Move your cursor over the serial number hyperlink to view the study name associated with the campaign. Vehicles with open campaign information that have been repaired appear as bold black text.
View Overview Information Contact Us Page Overview Perform Tasks Contact the DBS Help Desk by Email Contact the DBS Help Desk by Phone Perform Common DBS Tasks Contact the DBS Help Desk by Email Contact the DBS Help Desk by Phone Perform Common DBS Tasks
To open the Edit Alerts page: Select an alert. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Edit option.
Open the Edit Alerts Page To open the Edit Alerts page: Select an alert. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Edit option.
The updated user experience allows users to more quickly accomplish tasks in DBS . Pages will migrate to the new user experience over several months, and announcements will be made as new pages are made available. To use the new features of DBS : The new item entry area represents a shift in the way DBS functions. You will no longer have to migrate from the summary page to a secondary page to edit or create new items. Instead, you will be able to add or update one or more items in the summary list and then save all of your changes at once. A new drop-down list of pages allows you to quickly navigate directly to the page you need when more than one page is available. Filter content using drop-downs and text entry fields. Note : Click here for more information on how to filter the Manage Host Report page. Click and drag a column header to a new location, then drop it in place to customize the summary area display. Click and drag the line between columns to change the column width.
About the Manage Host Report Page The updated user experience allows users to more quickly accomplish tasks in DBS . Pages will migrate to the new user experience over several months, and announcements will be made as new pages are made available. To use the new features of DBS : The new item entry area represents a shift in the way DBS functions. You will no longer have to migrate from the summary page to a secondary page to edit or create new items. Instead, you will be able to add or update one or more items in the summary list and then save all of your changes at once. A new drop-down list of pages allows you to quickly navigate directly to the page you need when more than one page is available. Filter content using drop-downs and text entry fields. Note : Click here for more information on how to filter the Manage Host Report page. Click and drag a column header to a new location, then drop it in place to customize the summary area display. Click and drag the line between columns to change the column width.
Alerts Page Overview Purpose Use the Alerts page to review the list of alerts you have the authority to act upon based on your user profile and security settings. The alerts you created and any alerts created by those you have surrogate authority for display in the summary view. Description The content area of the Alerts page displays the following sections: Filter by - Allows you to filter the information to display only the records that match your criteria Summary - Displays general information for all records on the page Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Alerts page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Access the Create Alerts Page Access the Edit Alerts Page Change the Status of an Alert Copy an Alert Delete an Alert Filter the Alerts Summary View Alerts Summary View or Print Alerts Detail Access the Create Alerts Page Access the Edit Alerts Page Change the Status of an Alert Copy an Alert Delete an Alert Filter the Alerts Summary View Alerts Summary View or Print Alerts Detail Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Alerts page. Create or Edit an Alert Workflow Page Preview
To export RDR History information: Click the Export button. Select the Microsoft ® Excel ® output format. Save the file to your local drive. If you filter the page before exporting, only those records that meet the filter criteria export. You can filter, sort, and print the data if you export the RDR history information to Microsoft ® Excel ®
Export RDR History Information To export RDR history information: Click the Export button. Select the Microsoft ® Excel ® output format. Save the file to your local drive. If you filter the page before exporting, only those records that meet the filter criteria will export. You can filter, sort, and print the data if you export the RDR history information to Microsoft ® Excel ®
History Processes RDR History RDR History Retail Delivery Reporting (RDR) History View RDR History Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing Retail Delivery Reporting (RDR) history. Related Workflows The following workflows may have similar tasks in common with the Viewing RDR History Workflow. RDR a Vehicle Workflow
To inquire on parts availability for the parts in the PDC Inquiry list: Add parts to the PDC Inquiry list by part number or dealer reference number. Click the Inquiry button. Note : For each part on the PDC Inquiry list, the system displays the shipped part, available quantity, backorder quantity, and the associated PDC.
Inquire on Parts Availability To inquire on parts availability for parts on the PDC Inquiry list: Add parts to the PDC Inquiry list by part number or dealer reference number. Click the Inquiry button. Note : For each part on the PDC Inquiry list, the system displays the shipped part, available quantity, backorder quantity, and the associated PDC.
PDC Inquiry VOR Inquiry PDC Inquiry Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for performing a Parts Distribution Center (PDC) inquiry. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Inquire on Parts Distribution Center Workflow. Manage Parts Order Workflow
To view a report definition: View each section on the View Report page. Note : You cannot change any information on the View Report page. When you are finished viewing the definition, click the Cancel button. If you specify a grouping, the report will be broken into sections based on the first sort field selected. If you specify a grouping and specify a total, a total line appears at the end of each grouping section. A total line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you do not specify a grouping but specify a total, a total line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you specify a grouping and specify a count, a count line appears at the end of each grouping section. A count line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you do not specify a grouping but specify a count, a count line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents.
View a Report Definition To view a report definition: View each section on the View Report page. Note : You cannot change any information on the View Report page. Note : You can expand or collapse the different sections to view additional report definition information. When you are finished viewing the definition, click the Cancel button. If you specify a grouping, the report will be broken into sections based on the first sort field selected. If you specify a grouping and specify a total, a total line appears at the end of each grouping section. A total line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you do not specify a grouping but specify a total, a total line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you specify a grouping and specify a count, a count line appears at the end of each grouping section. A count line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you do not specify a grouping but specify a count, a count line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents.
To view a report definition: View each section on the View Report page. Note : You cannot change any information on the View Report page. When you are finished viewing the definition, click the Cancel button. If you specify a grouping, the report will be broken into sections based on the first sort field selected. If you specify a grouping and specify a total, a total line appears at the end of each grouping section. A total line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you do not specify a grouping but specify a total, a total line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you specify a grouping and specify a count, a count line appears at the end of each grouping section. A count line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you do not specify a grouping but specify a count, a count line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents.
View a Report Definition To view a report definition: View each section on the View Report page. Note : You cannot change any information on the View Report page. Note : You can expand or collapse the different sections to view additional report definition information. When you are finished viewing the definition, click the Cancel button. If you specify a grouping, the report will be broken into sections based on the first sort field selected. If you specify a grouping and specify a total, a total line appears at the end of each grouping section. A total line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you do not specify a grouping but specify a total, a total line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you specify a grouping and specify a count, a count line appears at the end of each grouping section. A count line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you do not specify a grouping but specify a count, a count line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents.
To view a report definition: View each section on the View Report page. Note : You cannot change any information on the View Report page. When you are finished viewing the definition, click the Cancel button. If you specify a grouping, the report will be broken into sections based on the first sort field selected. If you specify a grouping and specify a total, a total line appears at the end of each grouping section. A total line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you do not specify a grouping but specify a total, a total line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you specify a grouping and specify a count, a count line appears at the end of each grouping section. A count line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you do not specify a grouping but specify a count, a count line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents.
View a Report Definition To view a report definition: View each section on the View Report page. Note : You cannot change any information on the View Report page. Note : You can expand or collapse the different sections to view additional report definition information. When you are finished viewing the definition, click the Cancel button. If you specify a grouping, the report will be broken into sections based on the first sort field selected. If you specify a grouping and specify a total, a total line appears at the end of each grouping section. A total line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you do not specify a grouping but specify a total, a total line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you specify a grouping and specify a count, a count line appears at the end of each grouping section. A count line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you do not specify a grouping but specify a count, a count line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents.
To view a report definition: View each section on the View Report page. Note : You cannot change any information on the View Report page. When you are finished viewing the definition, click the Cancel button. If you specify a grouping, the report will be broken into sections based on the first sort field selected. If you specify a grouping and specify a total, a total line appears at the end of each grouping section. A total line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you do not specify a grouping but specify a total, a total line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you specify a grouping and specify a count, a count line appears at the end of each grouping section. A count line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you do not specify a grouping but specify a count, a count line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents.
View a Report Definition To view a report definition: View each section on the View Report page. Note : You cannot change any information on the View Report page. Note : You can expand or collapse the different sections to view additional report definition information. When you are finished viewing the definition, click the Cancel button. If you specify a grouping, the report will be broken into sections based on the first sort field selected. If you specify a grouping and specify a total, a total line appears at the end of each grouping section. A total line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you do not specify a grouping but specify a total, a total line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you specify a grouping and specify a count, a count line appears at the end of each grouping section. A count line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you do not specify a grouping but specify a count, a count line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents.
To view a report definition: View each section on the View Report page. Note : You cannot change any information on the View Report page. When you are finished viewing the definition, click the Cancel button. If you specify a grouping, the report will be broken into sections based on the first sort field selected. If you specify a grouping and specify a total, a total line appears at the end of each grouping section. A total line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you do not specify a grouping but specify a total, a total line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you specify a grouping and specify a count, a count line appears at the end of each grouping section. A count line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you do not specify a grouping but specify a count, a count line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents.
View a Report Definition To view a report definition: View each section on the View Report page. Note : You cannot change any information on the View Report page. Note : You can expand or collapse the different sections to view additional report definition information. When you are finished viewing the definition, click the Cancel button. If you specify a grouping, the report will be broken into sections based on the first sort field selected. If you specify a grouping and specify a total, a total line appears at the end of each grouping section. A total line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you do not specify a grouping but specify a total, a total line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you specify a grouping and specify a count, a count line appears at the end of each grouping section. A count line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you do not specify a grouping but specify a count, a count line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents.
View Dealer Permissions Page Overview Purpose Use the View Dealer Permissions page to view permissions for a specific dealer. Description The content area of the View Dealer Permissions page displays the following sections: Quick Jump menu - Appears on the left-hand side of the page. The Quick Jump menu allows you to jump from section to section without scrolling. Permission Function Tree - Appears on the right-hand side of the page. By default, the function tree displays the Menu section. The Quick Jump menu allows you to show or hide more sections, including Host Reports, Report Writer and Star Web Services. Cancel button - Returns you to the Dealer Summary page Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the View Dealer Permissions page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Use the Quick Jump Menu View Dealer Permissions Use the Quick Jump Menu Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflow are performed on the View Dealer Permissions page. View Dealer Permissions Workflow Page Preview
Note : This task applies to internal users only. To open the Edit Permissions page: Select the position. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Edit Permissions option. Note : The Edit Permissions page appears.
Open the Edit Position Permissions Page Note : This task applies to internal users only. To open the Edit Position Permissions page: Select the position. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Edit Permissions option. Note : The Edit Permissions page appears.
Note : The Validate Warranty Claim function is available from the Edit/Create Warranty Claim, Quick Entry Warranty Claim, and Express Entry Warranty claim pages. To validate a warranty claim: In the lower-right corner of the page, click the Validate button. Note : DBS validates if the claim information includes the required fields: VIN, Repair Order, Line Number, Odometer, Open Date, Close Date, and Claim Type. DBS displays warnings or error messages if it detects any warnings or errors in the warranty claim. Note : The Validate action does not save your warranty claim. Correct any errors as needed and validate the claim again. The Submit button is activated after DBS validates a claim without errors. After DBS validates a claim without error, the Submit button is activated.
Validate Warranty Claim To validate a warranty claim: Click the Validate button. Note : The validate action does not save your warranty claim. Note : The validate action must be performed before the Submit action can be performed. Note : DBS displays warnings or error messages if it detects any warnings or errors in the warranty claim. Correct any errors as needed and validate the claim again. The Submit button is activated after DBS validates a claim without errors. After DBS validates a claim without errors, the Submit button is activated.
Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Edit Warranty Claims Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Warranty Claims Edit or Create Warranty Claims Workflow *** Nissan Canada Inc. (NCI) recommends dealers create Warranty Claims in an NCI DBS certified dealer management system and then log into NCI DBS to review, validate and submit the claim to NCI. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating and editing claims. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Warranty Claims Workflow or View Warranty Claims Workflow. Manage Warranty Claims Workflow View Warranty Claims Workflow
Note : The Validate Warranty Claim function is available from the Edit/Create Warranty Claim, Quick Entry Warranty Claim, and Express Entry Warranty claim pages. To validate a warranty claim: In the lower-right corner of the page, click the Validate button. Note : DBS validates if the claim information includes the required fields: VIN, Repair Order, Line Number, Odometer, Open Date, Close Date, and Claim Type. DBS displays warnings or error messages if it detects any warnings or errors in the warranty claim. Note : The Validate action does not save your warranty claim. Correct any errors as needed and validate the claim again. The Submit button is activated after DBS validates a claim without errors. After DBS validates a claim without error, the Submit button is activated.
Validate Warranty Claim To validate a warranty claim: Click the Validate button. Note : The validate action does not save your warranty claim. Note : The validate action must be performed before the Submit action can be performed. Note : DBS displays warnings or error messages if it detects any warnings or errors in the warranty claim. Correct any errors as needed and validate the claim again. The Submit button is activated after DBS validates a claim without errors. After DBS validates a claim without errors, the Submit button is activated.
Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Edit Warranty Claims Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Warranty Claims Edit or Create Warranty Claims Workflow *** Nissan Canada Inc. (NCI) recommends dealers create Warranty Claims in an NCI DBS certified dealer management system and then log into NCI DBS to review, validate and submit the claim to NCI. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating and editing claims. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Warranty Claims Workflow or View Warranty Claims Workflow. Manage Warranty Claims Workflow View Warranty Claims Workflow
Note : The Validate Warranty Claim function is available from the Edit/Create Warranty Claim, Quick Entry Warranty Claim, and Express Entry Warranty claim pages. To validate a warranty claim: In the lower-right corner of the page, click the Validate button. Note : DBS validates if the claim information includes the required fields: VIN, Repair Order, Line Number, Odometer, Open Date, Close Date, and Claim Type. DBS displays warnings or error messages if it detects any warnings or errors in the warranty claim. Note : The Validate action does not save your warranty claim. Correct any errors as needed and validate the claim again. The Submit button is activated after DBS validates a claim without errors. After DBS validates a claim without error, the Submit button is activated.
Validate Warranty Claim To validate a warranty claim: Click the Validate button. Note : The validate action does not save your warranty claim. Note : The validate action must be performed before the Submit action can be performed. Note : DBS displays warnings or error messages if it detects any warnings or errors in the warranty claim. Correct any errors as needed and validate the claim again. The Submit button is activated after DBS validates a claim without errors. After DBS validates a claim without errors, the Submit button is activated.
Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Edit Warranty Claims Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Warranty Claims Edit or Create Warranty Claims Workflow *** Nissan Canada Inc. (NCI) recommends dealers create Warranty Claims in an NCI DBS certified dealer management system and then log into NCI DBS to review, validate and submit the claim to NCI. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating and editing claims. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Warranty Claims Workflow or View Warranty Claims Workflow. Manage Warranty Claims Workflow View Warranty Claims Workflow
The Notifications features is currently disabled in DBS. To open the Create Notification page: Click the Create button.
Open the Create Notification page {00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000} To open the Create Notification page: Click the Create button.
Apply any overall search criteria first. You must accept the usage agreement any time you want to click the Search button, so if you search first and then apply search or filter criteria, you are duplicating effort. For the best results, select only one filter in the header area. To search for information on the Retailed Vehicle Open Campaign Report page: If desired, from the Campaign Type drop-down list, select a campaign type. If desired, from the Campaign Group drop-down list, select a campaign group. If desired, from the Active Safety Recalls drop-down list, select a specific safety recall. In the Agreement section, select the Click this box to accept the Agreement checkbox. Click the Search button. To further limit the results displayed, begin typing in one of the search boxes in the Summary section. Note : The summary results update automatically as you type to display only those results which contained the characters entered.
Search for Information on the Retailed Vehicle Open Campaign Report Page Apply any overall search criteria first. You must accept the usage agreement any time you want to click the Search button, so if you search first and then apply search or filter criteria, you are duplicating effort. For the best results, select only one filter in the header area. To search for information on the Retailed Vehicle Open Campaign Report page: If desired, from the Campaign Type drop-down list, select a campaign type. If desired, from the Campaign Group drop-down list, select a campaign group. If desired, from the Active Safety Recalls drop-down list, select a specific safety recall. In the Agreement section, select the Click this box to accept the Agreement checkbox. Click the Search button. To further limit the results displayed, begin typing in one of the search boxes in the Summary section. Note : The summary results update automatically as you type to display only those results which contained the characters entered.
View Overview Information Privacy Page Overview Perform Tasks Perform Common DBS Tasks View Privacy Information Perform Common DBS Tasks View Privacy Information
PDC Inquiry Page Overview Purpose PDC Inquiry, also referred to as VOR Inquiry, allows you to inquire on part availability at parts distribution centers - giving you the ability to create cost effective orders. After you perform the inquiry, select the parts to be added to your order. During the inquiry, you can select part(s) from the inquiry list and transfer the selected parts to create an order. Access the PDC Inquiry page by clicking the PDC Inquiry button located on the Parts Order Management page. Access the Parts Order Management page by clicking the Parts Order Management link from the Parts menu. Description The content area of the PDC Inquiry page displays the following sections: PDC Inquiry - Allows you to specify or search for part numbers to consider before performing a PDC inquiry PDC Inquiry List - Lists the part numbers that meet your search criteria Buttons - Allow you to perform functions, such as inquire on part availability or select parts to place on order Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the PDC Inquiry page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Add a Part to the PDC Inquiry List Add Parts to the PDC Inquiry List by Dealer Reference Number Delete a Part from the PDC Inquiry List Inquire on Parts Availability Select Parts to Place on Order Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the PDC Inquiry page. Inquire on Part Distribution Center Workflow Page Preview
To select parts to place on order: Select the checkbox next to each part you want to place on an order. Click the Order button. Note : The system opens the Create Parts Order page and the selected parts appear in the Parts Order Detail section. PDC Inquiry, also referred to as VOR Inquiry, allows you to inquire on part availability at parts distribution centers -- giving you the ability to create cost effective orders. After you perform the inquiry, select the parts to be added to your order.
Select Parts to Place on Order To select parts to place on order: Select the checkbox next to each part you want to place on an order. Click the Order button. Note : The system opens the Create Parts Order page and the selected parts appear in the Parts Order Detail section. PDC Inquiry, also referred to as VOR Inquiry, allows you to inquire on part availability at parts distribution centers -- giving you the ability to create cost effective orders. After you perform the inquiry, select the parts to be added to your order.
PDC Inquiry VOR Inquiry PDC Inquiry Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for performing a Parts Distribution Center (PDC) inquiry. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Inquire on Parts Distribution Center Workflow. Manage Parts Order Workflow
To view a submitted parts return: Review the part returns information. To sort the displayed information, click the arrow beside a column title. Click the Close button to close the window.
View Submitted Parts Return To view a submitted parts return: Review the parts header and detail information. To sort the displayed information, click the arrow beside a column title. Click the Close button to close the page.
Manage Returns Manage Returns Manage Returns Manage Parts Return Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing parts returns. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Parts Return Workflow. Create Parts Return Workflow Modify Parts Return Workflow
Note : You can view National Service History (NSH) from the Alerts section of the RO Work in Process page and the Open ROs section. To view NSH from the RO Work in Process page: In the Alerts section or Open ROs section, move your cursor over the Action icon for the repair order or alert you wish to view. From the Action menu, select the NSH option. Note : The National Service History window appears. Expand or collapse each section to view the service history details. If available, click the View Detail hyperlink in the Vehicle Detail selection to view the window sticker. To print the window contents, click the Print button. Note : A PDF file of the National Service History appears. Click the Printer icon to print the detail. To close the National Service History and return to the RO Work in Process page, click the Close button.
View NSH from the RO Work in Process Page Note : You can view National Service History (NSH) from the Alerts section of the RO Work in Process page and the Open ROs section. To view NSH from the RO Work in Process page: In the Alerts section or Open ROs section, move your cursor over the Action icon for the repair order or alert you wish to view. From the Action menu, select the NSH option. Note : The National Service History window appears. Expand or collapse each section to view the service history details. If available, click the View Detail hyperlink in the Vehicle Detail selection to view the window sticker. To print the window contents, click the Print button. Note : A PDF file of the National Service History appears. Click the Printer icon to print the detail. To close the National Service History and return to the RO Work in Process page, click the Close button.
Notifications are currently disabled in DBS . To view or print the notification detail: Select the notification for which you want to view or print detail. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. Select the View/Print option. Note : The View Details window appears. To print, click the Print button. To close, click the Close button. To export, click the Export button. Note: The Export button is available at the bottom of the window. Use the View/Print option to view the contents and recipients of a notification you have created.
View or Print Notification Detail {00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000} To view the notification detail: Select the notification for which you want to view or print detail. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. Select the View/Print option. Note: The View Details window appears. To print, click the Print button. To close, click the Close button. Use the View/Print option to view the contents and recipients of a notification you have created.
Note : This task applies to dealer users only. To search for a dealer user by user ID or last name: In the User ID field, type a full or partial user ID, if desired. In the Last Name field, type a full or partial last name, if desired. Click the Search icon. Note : To cancel the search, click the Cancel button.
Search for a Dealer User Note : This task applies to dealer users only. To search for a dealer user by user ID or last name: In the User ID field, type a full or partial user ID, if desired. In the First Name field, type a full or partial first (given) name, if desired. In the Last Name field, type a full or partial last (family) name, if desired. Click the Search icon. Note : To cancel the search, click the Cancel button.
Note : You can only delete warranty claims in New, Open, Error, Warning, Suspended-dealer, or Rejected status. Proceed with caution - you cannot recover a deleted warranty claim. To delete a warranty claim from the Express Entry Warranty Claim page: Click the Delete button. Click the Yes button to confirm the deletion. Note : DBS deletes the warranty claim from the system and displays the Manage Warranty Claim page.
Delete a Warranty Claim Note : You can only delete warranty claims in New, Open, Error, Warning, Suspended-dealer, or Rejected status. Proceed with caution - you cannot recover a deleted warranty claim. To delete a warranty claim from the Edit/Create Warranty Claim page: Click the Delete button. Click the Yes button to confirm the deletion. Note : DBS deletes the warranty claim from the system and displays the Manage Warranty Claim page.
Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Edit Warranty Claims Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Warranty Claims Edit or Create Warranty Claims Workflow *** Nissan Canada Inc. (NCI) recommends dealers create Warranty Claims in an NCI DBS certified dealer management system and then log into NCI DBS to review, validate and submit the claim to NCI. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating and editing claims. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Warranty Claims Workflow or View Warranty Claims Workflow. Manage Warranty Claims Workflow View Warranty Claims Workflow
To view a rejected RDR from the Sales landing page: Note : To access the Sales landing page, click the Sales menu tab. In the Rejected RDRs section, select a rejected RDR. Scroll to the bottom of the Rejected RDRs section and use the horizontal scroll bar to view the rejection reason. If desired, click the VIN for the selected RDR to open the RDR Vehicle page. Rejected RDRs can also be reviewed from the Vehicle Inventory page. Select the rejected RDR, then click the Action icon. Select the RDR Vehicle menu option to display the RDR Vehicle page. A rejection message displays at the top of the page.
View Rejected RDRs To view a rejected RDR from the Sales landing page: Select a rejected RDR. Click the VIN for the selected RDR. Note : The RDR Vehicle page appears.
Vehicle Inventory Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing vehicle inventory data at the dealerships. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Vehicle Inventory workflow. Report the Sale of a Vehicle (RDR) Workflow Search Vehicle Inventory Workflow Search Vehicle Inventory Workflow
View Overview Information Monitor User Status Page Overview Perform Tasks Monitor User Status Perform Common DBS Tasks Monitor User Status Perform Common DBS Tasks
Manage Dealer Operation Code Page Overview Purpose Use the Manage Dealer Operations Code page to update dealer operation codes and re-run the translation process. Description The content area of the Manage Dealer Operation Code page displays the following sections: Page Header - Allows you to filter records that match your criteria, export, and re-run the translation process Summary - Displays general information for all records on the page Tasks You can perform the following tasks from or on the Manage Dealer Operation Code page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Edit a Dealer Operation Code Export Information Filter, Sort, and Navigate DBS Summary Pages Re-Run The Dealer Operation Code Translation Process Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Manage Dealer Operation Code page. Manage Dealer Operation Codes Workflow Page Preview
View Overview Information Administration Landing Page Overview Configure DSP STAR Web Services Workflow Create or Edit an Alert Workflow Create or Edit an Announcement Workflow Create or Edit a Calendar Event Workflow Create or Edit a Notification Workflow Edit Dealer Information Workflow Search for Transactions Workflow Set Up or Edit Position Permissions Workflow User Summary Workflow View Dealer Information or Permissions Workflow View Position Permissions Workflow View User Permissions Workflow Perform Tasks Perform Common DBS Tasks View Alerts View Announcements and Other News Perform Common DBS Tasks View Alerts View Announcements and Other News
User Processes User Permissions Users View View User Permissions Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing user permissions. Related Workflows The following workflow may have one or more tasks in common with the View User Permissions Workflow. User Summary Workflow
Positions Position Position Permissions Positions Processes View View Position Permissions Workflow Note : This workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing position permissions. Related Workflows The following workflow may have one or more tasks in common with the View Position Permissions Workflow. Edit Position Permissions Workflow
Dealer Dealer Permissions Dealer Processes View Dealer Summary Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing dealer information or permissions. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the View Dealer Information or Permissions Workflow. Edit Dealer Information Workflow Edit Dealer Permissions Workflow (NNA Only)
Edit User Processes User Permissions Users User Summary Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for editing user permissions. Related Workflows The following workflow may have one or more tasks in common with the User Summary workflow . View User Permissions Workflow
Edit Positions Position Position Permissions Positions Processes Edit Position Permissions Workflow Note : This workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for editing position permissions. Related Workflows The following workflow may have one or more tasks in common with the Edit Position Permissions Workflow. View Position Permissions Workflow
Environment Processes Search System Transaction Search for Transactions Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for searching and viewing transactions.
Dealer Dealer Permissions Edit Dealer Processes Edit Dealer Information Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for editing dealer information. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Edit Dealer Information Workflow. View Dealer Information or Permissions Workflow
Create Edit Modify Notifications Processes Text Message Create or Edit a Notification Workflow Note : This workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating and editing a notification. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create or Edit a Notification Workflow. Create or Edit an Alert Workflow Create or Edit an Announcement Workflow Create or Edit a Calendar Event Workflow
Calendar Create Edit Events Modify Processes Create or Edit a Calendar Event Workflow Note : This workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating or modifying a calendar event. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create or Edit a Calendar Event workflow. Create or Edit an Alert Workflow Create or Edit an Announcement Workflow Create or Edit a Notification Workflow
Announcements Create Edit Modify Processes Create or Edit an Announcement Workflow Note : This workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating, modifying, and approving an announcement. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create or Edit an Announcement Workflow. Create or Edit an Alert Workflow Create or Edit a Calendar Event Workflow Create or Edit a Notification Workflow
Alerts Create Edit Modify Processes Create or Edit an Alert Workflow Note : This workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating or editing an alert. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create or Edit an Alert Workflow. Create or Edit an Announcement Workflow Create or Edit a Calendar Event Workflow Create or Edit a Notification Workflow
Dealer Service Provider (DSP) DSP STAR Web Services Processes STAR Web Services Configure DSP STAR Web Services Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for configuring DSP STAR Web Services.
View Overview Information Create, Modify, or Replicate Report Page Overview Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Workflow Perform Tasks Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Select the Fields for a Report Select the Criteria Operators Select the Report Fields to be Sorted Select the Report Fields to be Totaled Adjust the Report Column Widths Perform Common DBS Tasks View a Report Definition Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Select the Fields for a Report Select the Criteria Operators Select the Report Fields to be Sorted Select the Report Fields to be Totaled Adjust the Report Column Widths Perform Common DBS Tasks View a Report Definition
Create Edit Modify Processes Report Writer Report Writer Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating, modifying, or replicating a personalized report definition in Report Writer. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create, Modify, or Replicate Report Definition Workflow. Change User in Report Writer Workflow Copy All, Transfer All, or Delete All Report Definitions Workflow Copy, Transfer, Delete, or Make a Report Definition Public Workflow Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow View a Host Report Workflow
To delete a part from an order: Select the part you want to delete. Move your cursor over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Delete option. If a confirmation message appears, click the Yes button to confirm the deletion, or click the No button to cancel the deletion. Note : To prevent the confirmation from appearing in the future, click the Do not ask me again checkbox. To delete a part from a parts order, the order must be in "New" or "Open" status.
Delete a Part from the Create or Edit Parts Order Page To delete a part from an order: Select the part you want to delete. Move your cursor over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Delete option. If a confirmation message appears, click the Yes button to confirm the deletion, or click the No button to cancel the deletion. Note : To prevent the confirmation from appearing in the future, click the Do not ask me again checkbox. To delete a part from a parts order, the order must be in "New" or "Open" status.
Create Create Order Create SVC Order Create Order Create Order Create SVC Order Create Order Create Order Create Order Create SVC Order Create Create Order Create Parts Order Workflow *** Nissan Canada Inc. (NCI) recommends dealers create parts orders in an NCI DBS certified dealer management system and then log into NCI DBS to review and submit the order to NCI. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating a parts order. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create Parts Order Workflow. Edit Parts Order Workflow Manage Parts Order Workflow Inquire on the Availability of Parts at the Parts Distribution Centers Workflow View Parts Order Workflow Edit Parts Order Workflow Manage Parts Order Workflow View Parts Order Workflow
Edit Edit Order Edit Order Edit SVC Order Edit Order Edit Order Edit SVC Order Edit Order Edit Order Edit Order Edit SVC Order Edit Order Edit Order Edit Parts Order Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for modifying an existing new or open parts order. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Edit Parts Order Workflow. Create Parts Order Workflow Manage Parts Order Workflow Inquire on the Availability of Parts at the Parts Distribution Centers Workflow View Parts Order Workflow
To use the breadcrumbs: Click on the portion of the breadcrumb to which you want to return. Every page includes a path of breadcrumbs that begins with a landing page and builds on each subsequent application you access or click on within that functional area. When you select another functional tab, the breadcrumb resets. Internal users who have selected a dealer will have different results using the breadcrumb. When an internal user goes through the dealer selection steps before opening an application page, the breadcrumb takes you back to the dealer selection page. To return to the content page, you may have to click the Cancel button.
Use the Breadcrumbs To use the breadcrumbs: Click on the portion of the breadcrumb to which you want to return. Every page includes a path of breadcrumbs that begins with a landing page and builds on each subsequent application you access or click on within that functional area. When you select another functional tab, the breadcrumb resets. Internal users who have selected a dealer will have different results using the breadcrumb. When an internal user goes through the dealer selection steps before opening an application page, the breadcrumb takes you back to the dealer selection page. To return to the content page, you may have to click the Cancel button.
Express Entry Warranty Claim Quick Reference Guide The Express Entry Warranty Claim Quick Reference Guide provides information on how to use the Express Entry Warranty Claim page; including the quick keys you can use to access each section, instructions for completing each claim section, and instructions for validating and submitting completed claims. Click here to download the Express Entry Warranty Claim Quick Reference Guide.
Express Entry Warranty Claim Quick Reference Guide The Express Entry Warranty Claim Quick Reference Guide provides information on how to use the Express Entry Warranty Claim page; including the quick keys you can use to access each section, instructions for completing each claim section, and instructions for validating and submitting completed claims. Click here to download the Express Entry Warranty Claim Quick Reference Guide.
Note : Information is only available for existing part orders with less than 40 part lines that have no warning messages and no duplicate parts. To add parts to the PDC Inquiry list by dealer reference number: In the Dealer Reference Number field, type the dealer reference number for an existing part order. Click the Add By Order button. Note : Click the Clear icon to reset the search criteria. Click the OK button to continue. Note : The system adds the part to the PDC Inquiry list. Note : Parts with a icon indicate that part ordering is restricted for this part. You must place an SVC order to request this part. Click the Inquiry button to view part availability in the Parts Order Management page. Information is only available for existing part orders with less than 40 part lines that have no warning messages and no duplicate parts.
Add Parts to the PDC Inquiry List by Dealer Reference Number To add parts to the PDC Inquiry list by dealer reference number: In the Dealer Reference Number field, type the dealer reference number for an existing part order. Click the Add By Order button. Note : Click the Clear icon to reset the search criteria. Click the OK button to continue. Note : The system adds the parts on the order to the PDC Inquiry list. Note : Parts with a icon indicate that part ordering is restricted for this part. You must place an SVC order to request this part. Click the Inquiry button to view part availability. PDC Inquiry, also referred to as VOR Inquiry, allows you to inquire on part availability at parts distribution centers -- giving you the ability to create cost-effective orders. After you perform the inquiry, select the parts to be added to your order.
PDC Inquiry VOR Inquiry PDC Inquiry Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for performing a Parts Distribution Center (PDC) inquiry. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Inquire on Parts Distribution Center Workflow. Manage Parts Order Workflow
This section of a study is not required, but provides the opportunity to customize or limit a study's results. Use optional study sections to clearly define study parameters, but use caution as conflicting selections will result in no data being returned. To complete the VIN Range section of a study: In the Start field, type the last six digits of the VIN for the first vehicle in the VIN range. In the End field, type the last six digits of the VIN for the last vehicle in the VIN range. Click the Save button.
Complete the VIN Range (Serial) Section of a Study This section of a study is not required, but provides the opportunity to customize or limit a study's results. Use optional study sections to clearly define study parameters, but use caution as conflicting selections will result in no data being returned. To complete the VIN Range section of a study: In the Start field, type the last six digits of the VIN for the first vehicle in the VIN range. In the End field, type the last six digits of the VIN for the last vehicle in the VIN range. Click the Save button.
Early Detection System (EDS) EDS: Study Dashboard Processes EDS: Study Dashboard Study Study Dashboard Technical Service Bulletin (TSB) Create or Modify a Study Workflow Note : The Create or Modify a Study workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for defining or modifying a study that integrates appointment and repair order data collected by the Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Define or Modify a Study Workflow. Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow View One Study Result Workflow
To change the status of an announcement: Select an announcement. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Change Status option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm, or click the No button to close the window without confirming. If the announcement status is "Approved", changing the status updates the announcement status to "Needs Approval." If the announcement status is "Needs Approval", changing the status updates the announcement status to "Approved." An announcement will not display until it is in an approved status AND the scheduled time has passed. You cannot change the status of a published communication item. You must delete the item if you want to remove it from display.
Change the Status of an Announcement To change the status of an announcement: Select an announcement. Click the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Change Status option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm, or click the No button to close the window without confirming. If the announcement status is "Approved", changing the status updates the announcement status to "Needs Approval." If the announcement status is "Needs Approval", changing the status updates the announcement status to "Approved." An announcement will not display until it is in an approved status AND the scheduled time has passed. You cannot change the status of a published communication item. You must delete the item if you want to remove it from display.
To filter the position summary: From the Filter By drop-down list, select a filter option. View the positions that meet the selected criteria. Note : To remove the filter, click the Clear button and make another selection.
7/9: There is now a Search button on the summary, however, there is NEVER a requirement to type a text value, so this button is irrelevent. There are NO steps to accomodate the Search button. Filter Position Summary To filter the position summary: From the Filter By drop-down list, select a filter option. View the positions that meet the selected criteria. Note : To remove the filter, click the Clear button and make another selection.
To search the site: Select the Search Site field. Note : To go directly to the Search page, click the Search icon in the Search Site field. Type the text for which you want to search. Click the Search icon. Note : The Search Results page appears and lists the results for the criteria you entered. You can view results on this page or go to the Advanced Search function to enter additional criteria. For more information about the Advanced Search function, click here . The search function only searches the following items: approved announcements, approved alerts, approved calendar events, and menu items (names of applications, functions, and links that appear on the DBS Site Map). The criteria you enter searches both the title and content areas of approved alerts, announcements and calendar events. Search results display in the following order: menu links, alerts, announcements, calendar events.
Search the Site To search the site: In the header, select the Search Site field, and then type the text for which you want to search. Note: To go directly to the Search page, click the Search icon. Press the Enter key. Note : The Search Results page appears and lists the results for the criteria you entered. You can view results on this page or go to the Advanced Search feature to enter additional criteria. For more information about the Advanced Search feature, click here . The search function only searches the following items: menu items and approved announcements, alerts, and calendar events. The criteria you enter searches both the title and content areas of approved alerts, announcements and calendar events. Search results display in the following order: menu links, alerts, announcements, and calendar events.
To complete the Claim Information section of a claim on either the Edit/Create Warranty Claim page or the Quick Entry Warranty Claim page: Note : If you are editing an existing claim, you may have already populated some of the fields. In the Open Date field, use the calendar to select the date the repair order was opened at the dealership. In the Close Date field, use the calendar to select the date the repair order was completed at the dealership. From the Line Type drop-down list, select a claim type. From the Coverage drop-down list, select a coverage code. From the Symptom drop-down list, select a symptom code. From the Diagnosis drop-down list, select a diagnosis code. From the Advisor drop-down list, select a service consultant name. If applicable, in the Campaign Claim area, in the ID field, type the campaign claim identification number. In the Sales Tax area, in the Requested Amount field, type the requested sales tax amount. If the part is under warranty, select the Part Warranty checkbox. In the Document (Invoice) Number field, type the invoice number as proof of purchase of the replacement part. In the Odometer field, type the odometer reading when the replacement part was purchased. In the Date field, type the original date the replacement part was purchased. If the vehicle was purchased in one country but is being serviced in another country, in the Purchase Country field, type the country name where the vehicle was purchased, then complete the next four steps; otherwise, continue with Step 19. In the Model Year field, type the model year of the vehicle. From the Transmission drop-down list, select a transmission type. In the Trim Level field, type the trim level. In the In Service Date Year and Month fields, type the year and month. In the Deductible area, from the Requested Code drop-down list, select either "CP" (Customer Pay) or "DI" (Dealer Internal) pay. In the Requested Amount field, type the requested deductible amount. Click the Plus icon and add deductible amounts as applicable. DBS displays errors and warning messages in the Alerts area at the bottom of the Claim Information section.
Complete the Claim Information Section of a Claim To complete the Claim Information section of a warranty claim: Note : If you are editing an existing claim, you may have already populated some of the fields. In the Open Date field, use the calendar to select the date the repair order was opened at the dealership. In the Close Date field, use the calendar to select the date the repair order was completed at the dealership. From the Line Type drop-down list, select a claim type. From the Coverage drop-down list, select a coverage code. From the Symptom drop-down list, select the symptom code which identifies what the customer said was wrong with the vehicle. Note : The symptom code is used only for the "PP" and "PO" claim types. From the Diagnosis drop-down list, select the diagnosis code which identifies what the technician found wrong with the vehicle. From the Advisor drop-down list, select a service consultant name. If the repair is being made as part of a campaign claim (claim type "CM"), in the ID field, type the campaign claim identification number. Note : A campaign claim is submitted at the completion of a service repair or a recall-campaign-related repair. In the Sales Tax area, in the Requested Amount field, type the requested sales tax amount. If the part is under warranty, select the Part Warranty checkbox. In the Document (Invoice) Number field, type the invoice number as proof of purchase of the replacement part. In the Odometer field, type the odometer reading when the replacement part was purchased. Note : The odometer reading must be within 12,000 miles or 20,000 kilometers of the current odometer reading that you entered in the Summary section of the claim. In the Date field, type the original date the replacement part was purchased. Note : The date must be within 12 months of the RO open date. Note : In the Summary section, DBS displays the deductible amount as a negative sum. If the vehicle was purchased in one country but is being serviced in another country, in the Purchase Country field, type the country name where the vehicle was purchased, then complete the next four steps; otherwise, continue with step 19. In the Model Year field, type the model year of the vehicle. From the Transmission drop-down list, select a transmission type. In the Trim Level field, type the trim level. In the In Service Date Year and Month fields, type the year and month. In the Deductible area, from the Requested Code drop-down list, select either "CP" (Customer Pay) or "DI" (Dealer Internal) pay. Note : The deductible is only used on one line per visit of a repair order. In the Requested Amount field, type the requested deductible amount. Click the Plus icon and add deductible amounts as applicable. DBS displays errors and warning messages in the Alerts area at the bottom of the Claim Information section.
Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Edit Warranty Claims Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Warranty Claims Edit or Create Warranty Claims Workflow *** Nissan Canada Inc. (NCI) recommends dealers create Warranty Claims in an NCI DBS certified dealer management system and then log into NCI DBS to review, validate and submit the claim to NCI. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating and editing claims. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Warranty Claims Workflow or View Warranty Claims Workflow. Manage Warranty Claims Workflow View Warranty Claims Workflow
To complete the Claim Information section of a claim on either the Edit/Create Warranty Claim page or the Quick Entry Warranty Claim page: Note : If you are editing an existing claim, you may have already populated some of the fields. In the Open Date field, use the calendar to select the date the repair order was opened at the dealership. In the Close Date field, use the calendar to select the date the repair order was completed at the dealership. From the Line Type drop-down list, select a claim type. From the Coverage drop-down list, select a coverage code. From the Symptom drop-down list, select a symptom code. From the Diagnosis drop-down list, select a diagnosis code. From the Advisor drop-down list, select a service consultant name. If applicable, in the Campaign Claim area, in the ID field, type the campaign claim identification number. In the Sales Tax area, in the Requested Amount field, type the requested sales tax amount. If the part is under warranty, select the Part Warranty checkbox. In the Document (Invoice) Number field, type the invoice number as proof of purchase of the replacement part. In the Odometer field, type the odometer reading when the replacement part was purchased. In the Date field, type the original date the replacement part was purchased. If the vehicle was purchased in one country but is being serviced in another country, in the Purchase Country field, type the country name where the vehicle was purchased, then complete the next four steps; otherwise, continue with Step 19. In the Model Year field, type the model year of the vehicle. From the Transmission drop-down list, select a transmission type. In the Trim Level field, type the trim level. In the In Service Date Year and Month fields, type the year and month. In the Deductible area, from the Requested Code drop-down list, select either "CP" (Customer Pay) or "DI" (Dealer Internal) pay. In the Requested Amount field, type the requested deductible amount. Click the Plus icon and add deductible amounts as applicable. DBS displays errors and warning messages in the Alerts area at the bottom of the Claim Information section.
Complete the Claim Information Section of a Claim To complete the Claim Information section of a warranty claim: Note : If you are editing an existing claim, you may have already populated some of the fields. In the Open Date field, use the calendar to select the date the repair order was opened at the dealership. In the Close Date field, use the calendar to select the date the repair order was completed at the dealership. From the Line Type drop-down list, select a claim type. From the Coverage drop-down list, select a coverage code. From the Symptom drop-down list, select the symptom code which identifies what the customer said was wrong with the vehicle. Note : The symptom code is used only for the "PP" and "PO" claim types. From the Diagnosis drop-down list, select the diagnosis code which identifies what the technician found wrong with the vehicle. From the Advisor drop-down list, select a service consultant name. If the repair is being made as part of a campaign claim (claim type "CM"), in the ID field, type the campaign claim identification number. Note : A campaign claim is submitted at the completion of a service repair or a recall-campaign-related repair. In the Sales Tax area, in the Requested Amount field, type the requested sales tax amount. If the part is under warranty, select the Part Warranty checkbox. In the Document (Invoice) Number field, type the invoice number as proof of purchase of the replacement part. In the Odometer field, type the odometer reading when the replacement part was purchased. Note : The odometer reading must be within 12,000 miles or 20,000 kilometers of the current odometer reading that you entered in the Summary section of the claim. In the Date field, type the original date the replacement part was purchased. Note : The date must be within 12 months of the RO open date. Note : In the Summary section, DBS displays the deductible amount as a negative sum. If the vehicle was purchased in one country but is being serviced in another country, in the Purchase Country field, type the country name where the vehicle was purchased, then complete the next four steps; otherwise, continue with step 19. In the Model Year field, type the model year of the vehicle. From the Transmission drop-down list, select a transmission type. In the Trim Level field, type the trim level. In the In Service Date Year and Month fields, type the year and month. In the Deductible area, from the Requested Code drop-down list, select either "CP" (Customer Pay) or "DI" (Dealer Internal) pay. Note : The deductible is only used on one line per visit of a repair order. In the Requested Amount field, type the requested deductible amount. Click the Plus icon and add deductible amounts as applicable. DBS displays errors and warning messages in the Alerts area at the bottom of the Claim Information section.
Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Edit Warranty Claims Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Warranty Claims Edit or Create Warranty Claims Workflow *** Nissan Canada Inc. (NCI) recommends dealers create Warranty Claims in an NCI DBS certified dealer management system and then log into NCI DBS to review, validate and submit the claim to NCI. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating and editing claims. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Warranty Claims Workflow or View Warranty Claims Workflow. Manage Warranty Claims Workflow View Warranty Claims Workflow
When the System Error page displays, DBS has encountered an unrecoverable error, and your transaction has not been processed. You may need to contact the help desk for support, or refresh your browser and try your transaction again. To help the application developers and system administrators to swiftly restore normal service, please follow these steps to report the system error: Click the Show Stack Trace button to display the trace information for the transaction, associated interface calls, and service messages. This information is used to help the Support team determine what went wrong, and how to correct it. In the Steps to reproduce the issue field, type information to help the Support team reproduce the issue and determine exactly what is causing the error. Click the Submit button to report the error to the Support team. If desired, click the Return to the home page link to return to DBS , or log out of DBS . Most users will also need to contact the help desk for assistance in resolving issues related to this transaction. Contact the DBS help desk by telephone , email , or live chat . Contact the DBS help desk by telephone , email , or live chat .
Report System Errors When the System Error page displays, DBS has encountered an unrecoverable error, and your transaction has not been processed. You may need to contact the help desk for support, or refresh your browser and try your transaction again. To help the application developers and system administrators to swiftly restore normal service, please follow these steps to report the system error: Click the Show Stack Trace button to display the trace information for the transaction, associated interface calls, and service messages. This information is used to help the Support team determine what went wrong, and how to correct it. In the Steps to reproduce the issue field, type information to help the Support team reproduce the issue and determine exactly what is causing the error. Click the Submit button to report the error to the Support team. If desired, click the Return to the home page link to return to DBS , or log out of DBS . Most users will also need to contact the help desk for assistance in resolving issues related to this transaction. Contact the DBS help desk by telephone , email , or live chat . Contact the DBS help desk by telephone , email , or live chat .
To transfer all of a user's report definitions: Click the General Action button, and then select the Transfer All Report(s) option. Note : The Transfer All Report(s) page appears. Select a user. Click the Submit button. Note : If the target user has a report with the same name, the Rename window appears. Type a new report name. Click the OK button to save your changes. If you transfer a report definition, control of the definition is given to the target user. Dealer users may transfer all of their own report definitions to another authorized user at their dealership. Dealer administrators and internal users can transfer all of a user's report definitions to another authorized user.
Transfer All of a User's Report Definitions If you transfer a report definition, control of the definition is given to the target user. Dealer users may transfer all of their own report definitions to another authorized user at their dealership. Dealer administrators and internal users can transfer all of a user's report definitions to another authorized user. To transfer all of a user's report definitions: Click the General Action button. From the General Action menu, select the Transfer All Report(s) option. Note : The Transfer All Report(s) page appears. From the list of users, select a user. Click the Submit button. Note : Click the Cancel button to close without selecting a user. Note : If the target user has a report with the same name, the Rename window appears. Type a new report name. Click the OK button to save your changes. Note : Click the Cancel button to close without saving. Note : Report Writer adds the reports to the target user's list.
To transfer all of a user's report definitions: Click the General Action button, and then select the Transfer All Report(s) option. Note : The Transfer All Report(s) page appears. Select a user. Click the Submit button. Note : If the target user has a report with the same name, the Rename window appears. Type a new report name. Click the OK button to save your changes. If you transfer a report definition, control of the definition is given to the target user. Dealer users may transfer all of their own report definitions to another authorized user at their dealership. Dealer administrators and internal users can transfer all of a user's report definitions to another authorized user.
Transfer All of a User's Report Definitions If you transfer a report definition, control of the definition is given to the target user. Dealer users may transfer all of their own report definitions to another authorized user at their dealership. Dealer administrators and internal users can transfer all of a user's report definitions to another authorized user. To transfer all of a user's report definitions: Click the General Action button. From the General Action menu, select the Transfer All Report(s) option. Note : The Transfer All Report(s) page appears. From the list of users, select a user. Click the Submit button. Note : Click the Cancel button to close without selecting a user. Note : If the target user has a report with the same name, the Rename window appears. Type a new report name. Click the OK button to save your changes. Note : Click the Cancel button to close without saving. Note : Report Writer adds the reports to the target user's list.
To transfer all of a user's report definitions: Click the General Action button, and then select the Transfer All Report(s) option. Note : The Transfer All Report(s) page appears. Select a user. Click the Submit button. Note : If the target user has a report with the same name, the Rename window appears. Type a new report name. Click the OK button to save your changes. If you transfer a report definition, control of the definition is given to the target user. Dealer users may transfer all of their own report definitions to another authorized user at their dealership. Dealer administrators and internal users can transfer all of a user's report definitions to another authorized user.
Transfer All of a User's Report Definitions If you transfer a report definition, control of the definition is given to the target user. Dealer users may transfer all of their own report definitions to another authorized user at their dealership. Dealer administrators and internal users can transfer all of a user's report definitions to another authorized user. To transfer all of a user's report definitions: Click the General Action button. From the General Action menu, select the Transfer All Report(s) option. Note : The Transfer All Report(s) page appears. From the list of users, select a user. Click the Submit button. Note : Click the Cancel button to close without selecting a user. Note : If the target user has a report with the same name, the Rename window appears. Type a new report name. Click the OK button to save your changes. Note : Click the Cancel button to close without saving. Note : Report Writer adds the reports to the target user's list.
To transfer all of a user's report definitions: Click the General Action button, and then select the Transfer All Report(s) option. Note : The Transfer All Report(s) page appears. Select a user. Click the Submit button. Note : If the target user has a report with the same name, the Rename window appears. Type a new report name. Click the OK button to save your changes. If you transfer a report definition, control of the definition is given to the target user. Dealer users may transfer all of their own report definitions to another authorized user at their dealership. Dealer administrators and internal users can transfer all of a user's report definitions to another authorized user.
Transfer All of a User's Report Definitions If you transfer a report definition, control of the definition is given to the target user. Dealer users may transfer all of their own report definitions to another authorized user at their dealership. Dealer administrators and internal users can transfer all of a user's report definitions to another authorized user. To transfer all of a user's report definitions: Click the General Action button. From the General Action menu, select the Transfer All Report(s) option. Note : The Transfer All Report(s) page appears. From the list of users, select a user. Click the Submit button. Note : Click the Cancel button to close without selecting a user. Note : If the target user has a report with the same name, the Rename window appears. Type a new report name. Click the OK button to save your changes. Note : Click the Cancel button to close without saving. Note : Report Writer adds the reports to the target user's list.
To transfer all of a user's report definitions: Click the General Action button, and then select the Transfer All Report(s) option. Note : The Transfer All Report(s) page appears. Select a user. Click the Submit button. Note : If the target user has a report with the same name, the Rename window appears. Type a new report name. Click the OK button to save your changes. If you transfer a report definition, control of the definition is given to the target user. Dealer users may transfer all of their own report definitions to another authorized user at their dealership. Dealer administrators and internal users can transfer all of a user's report definitions to another authorized user.
Transfer All of a User's Report Definitions If you transfer a report definition, control of the definition is given to the target user. Dealer users may transfer all of their own report definitions to another authorized user at their dealership. Dealer administrators and internal users can transfer all of a user's report definitions to another authorized user. To transfer all of a user's report definitions: Click the General Action button. From the General Action menu, select the Transfer All Report(s) option. Note : The Transfer All Report(s) page appears. From the list of users, select a user. Click the Submit button. Note : Click the Cancel button to close without selecting a user. Note : If the target user has a report with the same name, the Rename window appears. Type a new report name. Click the OK button to save your changes. Note : Click the Cancel button to close without saving. Note : Report Writer adds the reports to the target user's list.
Note : This task applies to internal users only. There are three ways to search for internal users - by name, by user ID, and by hierarchy. To view the instructions for searching by user ID and hierarchy, view the Step by Step tab in full help. To search for an internal user by name: Click the Internal User radio button. In the First Name field, type a full or partial first (given) name. In the Last Name field, type a full or partial last (family) name. Click the Search icon. Note : To remove search criteria, click the Clear icon.
Search for an Internal User Note : This task applies to internal users only. There are three ways to search for internal users - by name, by user ID, and by hierarchy. Search for an Internal User by Name To search for an internal user by name: Click the Internal User radio button. In the First Name field, type a full or partial first (given) name. In the Last Name field, type a full or partial last (family) name. Click the Search icon. Note : To remove search criteria, click the Clear icon. Search for an Internal User by User ID To search for an internal user by ID: Click the Internal User radio button. In the User ID field, type the full or partial user ID. Click the Search icon. Note : To remove search criteria, click the Clear icon. Search for an Internal User by Hierarchy Although you can search for users by any level of hierarchy, you should enter as much data as possible to limit your search results. To search for an internal user by hierarchy: Click the Internal User radio button. From the Affiliate drop-down list, select an affiliate, if desired. From the Division drop-down list, select a division, if desired. From the Region drop-down list, select a region, if desired. To limit the search results by user position, select the position from the Position drop-down list. Click the Search icon. Note : To remove search criteria, click the Clear icon.
To view the accrual adjustment history for a dealer: In the Dealer List section, select the row for the dealer you want to view. Click the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the View Accrual Adjustment History option. Note : The accrual adjustment history information displays in a new window. Click the Close button to return to the Manage Part Return Schedule page.
View the Accrual Adjustment History for a Dealer To view the accrual adjustment history for a dealer: In the Dealer List section, select the row for the dealer you want to view. Click the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the View Accrual Adjustment History option. Note : The accrual adjustment history information displays in a new window. Click the Close button to return to the Manage Part Return Schedule page.
To open the Summary Page Display Configuration window: Click the Configure icon.
Open the Summary Page Display Configuration Window To open the Summary Page Display Configuration window: Click the Configure icon.
To open the Summary Page Display Configuration window: Click the Configure icon.
Open the Summary Page Display Configuration Window To open the Summary Page Display Configuration window: Click the Configure icon.
To open the Summary Page Display Configuration window: Click the Configure icon.
Open the Summary Page Display Configuration Window To open the Summary Page Display Configuration window: Click the Configure icon.
To open the Summary Page Display Configuration window: Click the Configure icon.
Open the Summary Page Display Configuration Window To open the Summary Page Display Configuration window: Click the Configure icon.
To open the Summary Page Display Configuration window: Click the Configure icon.
Open the Summary Page Display Configuration Window To open the Summary Page Display Configuration window: Click the Configure icon.
To open the Summary Page Display Configuration window: Click the Configure icon.
Open the Summary Page Display Configuration Window To open the Summary Page Display Configuration window: Click the Configure icon.
To open the Summary Page Display Configuration window: Click the Configure icon.
Open the Summary Page Display Configuration Window To open the Summary Page Display Configuration window: Click the Configure icon.
To filter the Sold with Open Campaign Report page: From the Affiliate drop-down list, select whether you wish to view data from Nissan North America or Nissan Canada. Note : The Division drop-down list updates automatically based on the affiliate selected. From the Region drop-down list, select the region you wish to review. From the Area drop-down list, select the area you wish to review. From the District drop-down list, select the district you wish to review. If desired, enter information to further narrow the details displayed by dealer, VIN, model code, model line, or model year. In the Campaign ID field, type the unique campaign identification number you wish to review. To view a list of current campaigns, review the Campaign Master Table page. If desired, in the Sale Date from and to fields, use the calendars to select a date range to limit the results displayed by the date on which the vehicle was sold. If desired, in the RDR Date from and to fields, use the calendars to select a date range to limit the results displayed by the date on which the vehicle RDR was submitted. When you have finished entering your search and filter criteria, click the Search icon. Note : The Vehicle Campaign List section updates to display only those records found which match the criteria you entered.
Filter the Sold with Open Campaign Report Page To filter the Sold with Open Campaign Report page: From the Affiliate drop-down list, select whether you wish to view data from Nissan North America or Nissan Canada. Note : The Division drop-down list updates automatically based on the affiliate selected. From the Region drop-down list, select the region you wish to review. From the Area drop-down list, select the area you wish to review. From the District drop-down list, select the district you wish to review. If desired, enter information to further narrow the details displayed by dealer, VIN, model code, model line, or model year. In the Campaign ID field, type the unique campaign identification number you wish to review. To view a list of current campaigns, review the Campaign Master Table page. If desired, in the Sale Date from and to fields, use the calendars to select a date range to limit the results displayed by the date on which the vehicle was sold. If desired, in the RDR Date from and to fields, use the calendars to select a date range to limit the results displayed by the date on which the vehicle RDR was submitted. When you have finished entering your search and filter criteria, click the Search icon. Note : The Vehicle Campaign List section updates to display only those records found which match the criteria you entered.
View Overview Information View Dealer Permissions Page Overview Dealer Summary Workflow Perform Tasks Perform Common DBS Tasks Use the Quick Jump Menu View Dealer Permissions Perform Common DBS Tasks Use the Quick Jump Menu View Dealer Permissions
Dealer Dealer Permissions Dealer Processes View Dealer Summary Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing dealer information or permissions. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the View Dealer Information or Permissions Workflow. Edit Dealer Information Workflow Edit Dealer Permissions Workflow (NNA Only)
Note : This task applies to internal users only. To search for transactions on the Transaction Status page: In the fields provided, select or type search options to limit the summary display. Click the Search button. To clear the search fields, click the Reset button. In the Transaction Status area, view the transactions that meet the selected criteria. Click here for information on viewing the transactions status. If you do not enter search values, DCS displays the transactions for the current date.
Search for Transactions on the Transaction Status Page Note : This task applies to internal users only. To search for transactions on the Transaction Status page: In the fields provided, select or type search options to limit the summary display. Click the Search button. To clear the search fields, click the Reset button. In the Transaction Status area, view the transactions that meet the selected criteria. If you do not enter search criteria, DBS displays transactions for the current date.
Environment Processes Search System Transaction Search for Transactions Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for searching and viewing transactions.
To interpret the application auditing information View the User ID column to determine who performed a transaction. View the Application, Module, and Function columns to determine the page the transaction occurred on. View the Date, Time column to determine when a transaction occurred. View the Reference Number column for additional information about what occurred. Note : The Reference ID information changes based on which application, module, and function the transaction occurred in. To help you interpret the Application Auditing page, remember that this page tells you "who did what when". A transaction is defined as a task that is performed in DBS that changes data. If a user views data but does not change anything, that is not considered a transaction, and does not display on the Application Auditing page. Except for viewing host reports which does display as a transaction on this page.
Interpret Application Audit Information To interpret application audit information: View the User ID column to determine who performed a transaction. Note : If you don't recognize the user ID, you can go to the User Summary page and search by user ID. View the Application, Module, and Function columns to determine the application page the transaction was performed on. View the Date, Time column to determine when a transaction occurred. View the Reference Number column fro additional information about "what" occurred. A transaction is defined as a task that is performed in DBS that changes data. If a user views data but does not change anything, that is not considered a transaction, and does not display on the Application Auditing page. Except for viewing host reports which does display as a transaction on this page.
To view an invoice from the Vehicle Inventory page: Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon for the selected vehicle. From the Action menu, select the View Invoice option. Note : The Vehicle Invoice Detail windows appears. After viewing the vehicle invoice detail, click the Close button. Note : Before closing the detail, you may choose to email the invoice.
View Vehicle Invoice from Vehicle Inventory To view an invoice from the Vehicle Inventory page: Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon for the selected vehicle. From the Action menu, select the View Invoice option. Note : The Vehicle Invoice Detail windows appears. If desired, click the Email button to email the invoice detail. Note : The Email Invoice Information window appears In the Receiver and CC (Carbon Copy) fields, type the email address for each person who should receive a copy of the invoice detail. Click the Send button. After viewing the vehicle invoice detail, click the Close button.
Vehicle Inventory Management Inventory Managment Processes Inventory Managment Vehicle Inventory Management Vehicle Inventory Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing vehicle inventory data at the dealerships. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Vehicle Inventory workflow. Report the Sale of a Vehicle (RDR) Workflow Search Vehicle Inventory Workflow Search Vehicle Inventory Workflow
View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow Note : The View a Dealer's Study Results workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing one dealer's study results that integrate appointment and repair order data collected by the Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the View a Dealer's Study Results workflow. Define or Modify a Study Workflow Manage Early Detection Studies Workflow View One Study Result Workflow
To display the parts return summary claims graph: To minimize the parts return summary graph, click the Minus Sign (-) at the top-left of the graph. To expand the display, click the Plus Sign (+) . Each bar in the graph identifies the return status and displays the number of claims in that category. Click the desired bar to filter the summary display to show only those returns with the selected status.
View the Parts Return Summary Graph To display the parts return summary claims graph: To minimize the parts return summary claims graph, click the Minus Sign ( - ) at the top-left of the graph. To expand the display, click the Plus Sign ( +) . Each bar in the graph identifies the return status and displays the number of claims in that category. Click the desired bar to filter the summary display to show only those returns with the selected status.
To create a custom VIN campaign report by file import: Click the Import button. Click the Upload File button. Note : Carefully follow the guidelines provided to format your Microsoft ® Excel ® spreadsheet before import. Failure to follow these guidelines will result in poor results or system error. Note : To clear the current spreadsheet, click the Clear Uploaded File button. Following your browser-specific instructions, navigate to and attach your Microsoft ® Excel ® spreadsheet. When the file has uploaded, click the OK button. Click the Check Open Campaign button. Note : When you check for open campaigns, ONLY those vehicles with an open campaign are displayed in the VIN List section. Export the Campaign Report to sort or filter the data in Microsoft ® Excel ®
Create a Custom VIN Campaign Report by File Import To create a custom VIN campaign report by file import: Click the Import button. Click the Upload File button. Note : Carefully follow the guidelines provided to format your Microsoft ® Excel ® spreadsheet before import. Failure to follow these guidelines will result in poor results or system error. Note : To clear the current spreadsheet, click the Clear Uploaded File button. Following your browser-specific instructions, navigate to and attach your Microsoft ® Excel ® spreadsheet. When the file has uploaded, click the OK button. Click the Check Open Campaign button. Note : When you check for open campaigns, ONLY those vehicles with an open campaign are displayed in the Campaign Report list. Export the Campaign Report to sort or filter the data in Microsoft ® Excel ®
Order Management page allows you to select up to three filters to narrow the results displayed in the summary section. To filter the SVC Order Management summary: From the Filter by drop-down list, select a filter option. If a text-entry field appears, type a filter value. - OR - If a drop-down list appears, select an option from the list. Click the Search icon to search the data, or click the Refresh button if you changed the values in the secondary text entry fields. View the orders that meet the selected criteria. Note : To reset the filter criteria to the default options, click the Clear icon.
Filter SVC Order Management Summary The SVC Order Management page allows you to select up to three filters to narrow the results displayed in the summary section. To filter the SVC Order Management summary: From the Filter by drop-down list, select a filter option. If a text-entry field appears, type a filter value. - OR - If a drop-down list appears, select an option from the list. Click the Search icon to search the data, or click the Refresh button if you changed the values in the secondary text entry fields. View the orders that meet the selected criteria. Note : To reset the filter criteria to the default options, click the Clear icon.
Approve or Reject SVC Order Reject Approve or Reject SVC Order Approve or Reject SVC Order Manage Service Campaign Order Workflow Note : This workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing a Service Campaign (SVC) order. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Service Campaign Order Workflow. Manage Campaign Parts Workflow View Service Campaign Order Workflow
View Overview Information Create Parts Return Page Overview Create Parts Return Workflow Perform Tasks Add a Part to a Return Add Multiple Parts to a Return Create a Parts Return Delete a Part from a Return Delete a Parts Return Export a Parts Return Filter Parts Return Detail Look Up a Part Modify a Detail Line on a Return Perform Common DBS Tasks Submit a Parts Return Add a Part to a Return Add Multiple Parts to a Return Create a Parts Return Delete a Part from a Return Delete a Parts Return Export a Parts Return Filter Parts Return Detail Look Up a Part Modify a Detail Line on a Return Perform Common DBS Tasks Submit a Parts Return
Create Return Create Return Create Return Create Parts Return Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating a parts return. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create Parts Return Workflow. Manage Parts Return Workflow Modify Parts Return Workflow
To create a custom VIN campaign report by keying in VINs: Click the Key In VIN# button. In the VIN fields provided, enter up to 30 unique VIN numbers. Click the Add All button. Click the Check Open Campaign button. Note : When you check for open campaigns, ONLY those vehicles with an open campaign are displayed in the Campaign Report list. Export the Campaign Report to sort or filter the data in Microsoft ® Excel ®
Key in VINs to Create a Custom VIN Campaign Report To create a custom VIN campaign report by keying in VINs: Click the Key In VIN# button. In the VIN fields provided, enter up to 30 unique VIN numbers. Click the Add All button. Click the Check Open Campaign button. Note : When you check for open campaigns, ONLY those vehicles with an open campaign are displayed in the Campaign Report list. Export the Campaign Report to sort or filter the data in Microsoft ® Excel ®
To complete the Finance section of a used vehicle RDR: From the Finance Type drop-down list, select how the buyer will be paying for the vehicle. If you selected "Loan" or "Lease" from the Finance Type drop-down list, in the Term (months) field, type the lease term in months. If applicable, in the Payment Amount field, type the dollar amount of the monthly payment. Note : You may only enter numbers and a decimal point. Do not enter any other characters such as a dollar sign in this field. If applicable, in the Financing Source field, type the name of the bank or lending institution that is providing the financing for this purchase. Save and submit the RDR. Click here for more information.
Complete the Finance Section of a Used Vehicle RDR The details required in the Finance section are based on the option you selected from the Sale Type drop-down list and the Finance Type drop-down list. The table below outlines the finance types available for each sale type. Instructions for completing each finance type appear below. Sales Type Financing Options Wholesale (W) None Used Non-NMAC Lease (L) Lease Used NMAC Lease (M) Lease CPO - Retail (N) Cash Loan CPO - Non-NMAC Lease (P) Lease CPO - NMAC Lease (Q) Lease Used Retail (K) Cash Loan Cash To complete the Finance section of a used vehicle RDR: From the Finance Type drop-down list, select "Cash". Save and submit the RDR. Click here for more information. Lease To complete the Finance section of a used vehicle RDR: From the Finance Type drop-down list, select "Lease". In the Term (months) field, type the lease term in months. In the Payment Amount field, type the dollar amount of the monthly payment. Note : You may only enter numbers and a decimal point. Do not enter any other characters such as a dollar sign in this field. In the Financing Source field, type the name of the bank or lending institution that is providing the financing for this purchase. Save and submit the RDR. Click here for more information. Loan To complete the Finance section of a used vehicle RDR: From the Finance Type drop-down list, select "Loan". In the Term (months) field, type the lease term in months. In the Payment Amount field, type the dollar amount of the monthly payment. Note : You may only enter numbers and a decimal point. Do not enter any other characters such as a dollar sign in this field. In the Financing Source field, type the name of the bank or lending institution that is providing the financing for this purchase. Save and submit the RDR. Click here for more information.
View Overview Information Update Office Location Page Overview Perform Tasks Perform Common DBS Tasks Perform Common DBS Tasks
PDC Inquiry Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for performing a Parts Distribution Center (PDC) inquiry. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Inquire on Parts Distribution Center Workflow. Manage Parts Order Workflow
View Overview Information Parts Return Management Page Overview Manage Parts Return Workflow Perform Tasks Access a Submitted Parts Return Access the Create Parts Return Page Access the Edit Parts Return Page Access the Returns and Accrual Information Page Approve a Submitted Parts Return Delete a Parts Return Export Parts Return Management Information Filter Parts Return Management Summary Merge Duplicate Parts Returns Perform Common DBS Tasks Print Parts Return Detail Reject a Submitted Parts Return Submit a Parts Return View Parts Return Management Summary and Detail Access a Submitted Parts Return Access the Create Parts Return Page Access the Edit Parts Return Page Access Reports Delete a Parts Return Export Parts Return Management Information Filter Parts Return Management Summary Perform Common DBS Tasks Print Parts Return Detail Submit a Parts Return View Parts Return Management Summary and Detail
Manage Returns Manage Returns Manage Returns Manage Parts Return Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing parts returns. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Parts Return Workflow. Create Parts Return Workflow Modify Parts Return Workflow
To print information from any DBS page: Click the Print button. Note : If you sort or filter the display before you click the Print button, only those results which match the criteria you entered will be printed. A PDF file of the summary display opens in a new window. Follow your browser-specific instructions to print or save the PDF file.
Print Information from any DBS Page To print information from any DBS page: Click the Print button. Note : If you sort or filter the summary display before you click the Print button, only those results which match the criteria you entered will be printed. A PDF file of the summary display opens in a new window. Follow your browser-specific instructions to print or save the PDF file.
To search the site map: Type all or part of the page name in the Enter Search Criteria field. Click the Search icon. Note: The search results display on a new page. The Site Map is a central location where users can access multiple screens from a single location in the DCS application. Use it as an alternate way to access the pages and application links.
Search the Site Map To search the site map: Type all or part of the page name in the Enter Search Criteria field. Click the Search icon. Note : The search results display on a new page.
Home Page Overview Purpose The Home page within the Dealer Business System (DBS) enables you to review alerts, regional or national announcements, and key metrics via the Quick Look feature. Description The content area of the Home page displays the following items: Alerts - Appear at the top of the landing page, if applicable. The Alert messages continually scroll across the top of the page, when applicable. Alerts typically provide information that is system critical. Quick Look - Displays key metrics for the selected dealership. Announcements - Contains national and regional announcements that apply to all areas. The highest-priority announcements appear in the Regional or National Announcements section, if applicable. The remaining announcements display in the Other News section. Other News - Displays the announcements that are not as high priority. When an announcement is no longer one of the high-priority announcements, the announcement automatically moves to the Other News section. Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Home page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Emulate a Dealership or User Perform Common DBS Tasks View Alerts View Announcements and Other News Emulate a Dealership or User Perform Common DBS Tasks View Alerts View Announcements and Other News Page Preview
To search for a specific date: Click in the Search Specific Date field, and then use the calendar to select the desired date. Click the Search icon. Note : The event calendar updates to display the week or month that contains the date you entered.
Search for a Specific Date To search for a specific date: Click in the Search Specific Date field, and then use the calendar to select the desired date. Click the Search icon. Note : The event calendar updates to display the week or month that contains the date you entered.
View Overview Information Parts Locator Page Overview Perform Tasks Locate a Part Look Up a Part from the Parts Locator Page Perform Common DBS Tasks
To view the standard operation category summary and detail: View the list of categories. To sort the displayed information, click the arrow beside a column title. To select a category, click anywhere in the row that contains the category. To show detail, select a category and click the Show Standard Operation Category Detail link near the bottom of the window. Note : To hide detail, click the Hide Standard Operation Category Detail link.
View the Standard Operation Category Summary and Detail To view the standard operation category summary and detail: View the list of categories. To sort the displayed information, click the arrow beside a column title. To select a category, click anywhere in the row that contains the category. To show detail, select a category and click the Show Standard Operation Category Detail link near the bottom of the window. Note : To hide detail, click the Hide Standard Operation Category Detail link.
ReRun Standard Operation Category Translation Manage Standard Operation Categories Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing and creating standard operation categories. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Standard Operation Categories Workflow. Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes Workflow Manage Dealer Operation Codes Workflow Manage Standard Operation Codes Workflow
To rename a summary page display definition: Select the page definition name you want to rename. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Rename option. Note : The Page Definition Name field is now editable. In the Page Definition Name field, type a new name or edit the existing name. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Save option. Note : The Page Definition Name field is no longer editable.
Rename a Summary Page Display Definition To rename a summary page display definition: Select the page definition name you want to rename. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Rename option. Note : The Page Definition Name field is now editable. In the Page Definition Name field, type a new name or edit the existing name. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Save option. Note : The Page Definition Name field is no longer editable.
To rename a summary page display definition: Select the page definition name you want to rename. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Rename option. Note : The Page Definition Name field is now editable. In the Page Definition Name field, type a new name or edit the existing name. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Save option. Note : The Page Definition Name field is no longer editable.
Rename a Summary Page Display Definition To rename a summary page display definition: Select the page definition name you want to rename. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Rename option. Note : The Page Definition Name field is now editable. In the Page Definition Name field, type a new name or edit the existing name. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Save option. Note : The Page Definition Name field is no longer editable.
To rename a summary page display definition: Select the page definition name you want to rename. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Rename option. Note : The Page Definition Name field is now editable. In the Page Definition Name field, type a new name or edit the existing name. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Save option. Note : The Page Definition Name field is no longer editable.
Rename a Summary Page Display Definition To rename a summary page display definition: Select the page definition name you want to rename. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Rename option. Note : The Page Definition Name field is now editable. In the Page Definition Name field, type a new name or edit the existing name. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Save option. Note : The Page Definition Name field is no longer editable.
To rename a summary page display definition: Select the page definition name you want to rename. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Rename option. Note : The Page Definition Name field is now editable. In the Page Definition Name field, type a new name or edit the existing name. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Save option. Note : The Page Definition Name field is no longer editable.
Rename a Summary Page Display Definition To rename a summary page display definition: Select the page definition name you want to rename. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Rename option. Note : The Page Definition Name field is now editable. In the Page Definition Name field, type a new name or edit the existing name. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Save option. Note : The Page Definition Name field is no longer editable.
To rename a summary page display definition: Select the page definition name you want to rename. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Rename option. Note : The Page Definition Name field is now editable. In the Page Definition Name field, type a new name or edit the existing name. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Save option. Note : The Page Definition Name field is no longer editable.
Rename a Summary Page Display Definition To rename a summary page display definition: Select the page definition name you want to rename. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Rename option. Note : The Page Definition Name field is now editable. In the Page Definition Name field, type a new name or edit the existing name. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Save option. Note : The Page Definition Name field is no longer editable.
To rename a summary page display definition: Select the page definition name you want to rename. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Rename option. Note : The Page Definition Name field is now editable. In the Page Definition Name field, type a new name or edit the existing name. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Save option. Note : The Page Definition Name field is no longer editable.
Rename a Summary Page Display Definition To rename a summary page display definition: Select the page definition name you want to rename. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Rename option. Note : The Page Definition Name field is now editable. In the Page Definition Name field, type a new name or edit the existing name. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Save option. Note : The Page Definition Name field is no longer editable.
To rename a summary page display definition: Select the page definition name you want to rename. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Rename option. Note : The Page Definition Name field is now editable. In the Page Definition Name field, type a new name or edit the existing name. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Save option. Note : The Page Definition Name field is no longer editable.
Rename a Summary Page Display Definition To rename a summary page display definition: Select the page definition name you want to rename. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Rename option. Note : The Page Definition Name field is now editable. In the Page Definition Name field, type a new name or edit the existing name. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Save option. Note : The Page Definition Name field is no longer editable.
To grant or remove access to a specific page, action, custom field, or website: Show the Menu section, if collapsed. Note : To show the Menu section, click the + link icon in the section header. Expand the menu, page, and associated action group, if applicable. Note : To expand all items in the section, click the expand all link in the section header. Select or clear the item(s). Note : When you select or clear a checkbox at a higher hierarchy level, all items under that level are selected or cleared. Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm, or click the No button to close the window without confirming. The function tree displays permission options in hierarchical order, starting with the menu items at the top and ending with the specific functional items at the bottom.
Grant or Remove Access to a Page, Action, Custom Field, or Website To grant or remove access to a specific page, action, custom field, or website: Show the Menu section, if collapsed. Note : To show the Menu section, click the + icon in the section header. Expand the menu, page, and associated action group, if applicable. Note : To expand all items in the section, click the expand all link in the section header. Select or clear the item(s). Note : When you select or clear a checkbox at a higher hierarchy level, all items under that level are selected or cleared. Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm, or click the No button to close the window without confirming. The function tree displays permission options in hierarchical order, starting with the menu items at the top and ending with the specific functional items at the bottom.
To grant or remove access to a specific page, action, custom field, or website: Show the Menu section, if collapsed. Note : To show the Menu section, click the + link icon in the section header. Expand the menu, page, and associated action group, if applicable. Note : To expand all items in the section, click the expand all link in the section header. Select or clear the item(s). Note : When you select or clear a checkbox at a higher hierarchy level, all items under that level are selected or cleared. Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm, or click the No button to close the window without confirming. The function tree displays permission options in hierarchical order, starting with the menu items at the top and ending with the specific functional items at the bottom.
Grant or Remove Access to a Page, Action, Custom Field, or Website To grant or remove access to a specific page, action, custom field, or website: Show the Menu section, if collapsed. Note : To show the Menu section, click the + icon in the section header. Expand the menu, page, and associated action group, if applicable. Note : To expand all items in the section, click the expand all link in the section header. Select or clear the item(s). Note : When you select or clear a checkbox at a higher hierarchy level, all items under that level are selected or cleared. Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm, or click the No button to close the window without confirming. The function tree displays permission options in hierarchical order, starting with the menu items at the top and ending with the specific functional items at the bottom.
View User Permissions Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing user permissions. Related Workflows The following workflow may have one or more tasks in common with the View User Permissions Workflow. User Summary Workflow
To filter the the Report Writer list of reports: From the Filter By drop-down list, select a filter option. Select a secondary filter value. Click the Search icon. Note : To reset the filter criteria to the default options, click the Clear icon. View the reports that meet the selected criteria.
Filter Report Writer List of Reports To filter the the Report Writer list of reports: From the Filter By drop-down list, select a filter option. Select a secondary filter value. Click the Search icon. Note : To reset the filter criteria to the default options, click the Clear icon. View the reports that meet the selected criteria.
To filter the the Report Writer list of reports: From the Filter By drop-down list, select a filter option. Select a secondary filter value. Click the Search icon. Note : To reset the filter criteria to the default options, click the Clear icon. View the reports that meet the selected criteria.
Filter Report Writer List of Reports To filter the the Report Writer list of reports: From the Filter By drop-down list, select a filter option. Select a secondary filter value. Click the Search icon. Note : To reset the filter criteria to the default options, click the Clear icon. View the reports that meet the selected criteria.
To filter the the Report Writer list of reports: From the Filter By drop-down list, select a filter option. Select a secondary filter value. Click the Search icon. Note : To reset the filter criteria to the default options, click the Clear icon. View the reports that meet the selected criteria.
Filter Report Writer List of Reports To filter the the Report Writer list of reports: From the Filter By drop-down list, select a filter option. Select a secondary filter value. Click the Search icon. Note : To reset the filter criteria to the default options, click the Clear icon. View the reports that meet the selected criteria.
To filter the the Report Writer list of reports: From the Filter By drop-down list, select a filter option. Select a secondary filter value. Click the Search icon. Note : To reset the filter criteria to the default options, click the Clear icon. View the reports that meet the selected criteria.
Filter Report Writer List of Reports To filter the the Report Writer list of reports: From the Filter By drop-down list, select a filter option. Select a secondary filter value. Click the Search icon. Note : To reset the filter criteria to the default options, click the Clear icon. View the reports that meet the selected criteria.
To filter the the Report Writer list of reports: From the Filter By drop-down list, select a filter option. Select a secondary filter value. Click the Search icon. Note : To reset the filter criteria to the default options, click the Clear icon. View the reports that meet the selected criteria.
Filter Report Writer List of Reports To filter the the Report Writer list of reports: From the Filter By drop-down list, select a filter option. Select a secondary filter value. Click the Search icon. Note : To reset the filter criteria to the default options, click the Clear icon. View the reports that meet the selected criteria.
Note : The Submit Warranty Claim function is available from the Edit/Create Warranty Claim, Quick Entry Warranty Claim, and Express Entry Warranty Claim pages for validated warranty claims. Note : Validate a warranty claim prior to using the Submit function to ensure the claims is free of any errors that may need to be corrected. To submit a validated warranty claim for processing: Click the Submit button. Click the Yes button to submit the claim. The Submit button is available for validated warranty claims that are in New, or Open status. The Submit button is also available for warranty claims that are in Error, Rejected, or Suspended-Dealer status after they have been modified.
Submit a Warranty Claim Note : The Submit Warranty Claim function is available from the Edit/Create Warranty Claim, Quick Entry Warranty Claim, and Express Entry Warranty Claim pages for validated warranty claims. Note : You must validate the warranty claim before you can submit it. To submit a validated warranty claim: Click the Submit button. Note : DBS displays the Submit Confirmation window. Note : If a warranty claim has major errors, DBS sets the status to Error, and does not submit the warranty claim for processing. If the claim has minor errors that will not prevent you from submitting the claim, DBS displays the Submit Confirmation window with a warning message. Click the Yes button to submit the claim. The Submit button is available for warranty claims that are in New, Open, or Warning status that have been validated. The Submit button is only available for warranty claims that are in Error, Rejected, or Suspended-Dealer status after they have been modified and validated.
Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Edit Warranty Claims Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Warranty Claims Edit or Create Warranty Claims Workflow *** Nissan Canada Inc. (NCI) recommends dealers create Warranty Claims in an NCI DBS certified dealer management system and then log into NCI DBS to review, validate and submit the claim to NCI. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating and editing claims. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Warranty Claims Workflow or View Warranty Claims Workflow. Manage Warranty Claims Workflow View Warranty Claims Workflow
Note : The Submit Warranty Claim function is available from the Edit/Create Warranty Claim, Quick Entry Warranty Claim, and Express Entry Warranty Claim pages for validated warranty claims. Note : Validate a warranty claim prior to using the Submit function to ensure the claims is free of any errors that may need to be corrected. To submit a validated warranty claim for processing: Click the Submit button. Click the Yes button to submit the claim. The Submit button is available for validated warranty claims that are in New, or Open status. The Submit button is also available for warranty claims that are in Error, Rejected, or Suspended-Dealer status after they have been modified.
Submit a Warranty Claim Note : The Submit Warranty Claim function is available from the Edit/Create Warranty Claim, Quick Entry Warranty Claim, and Express Entry Warranty Claim pages for validated warranty claims. Note : You must validate the warranty claim before you can submit it. To submit a validated warranty claim: Click the Submit button. Note : DBS displays the Submit Confirmation window. Note : If a warranty claim has major errors, DBS sets the status to Error, and does not submit the warranty claim for processing. If the claim has minor errors that will not prevent you from submitting the claim, DBS displays the Submit Confirmation window with a warning message. Click the Yes button to submit the claim. The Submit button is available for warranty claims that are in New, Open, or Warning status that have been validated. The Submit button is only available for warranty claims that are in Error, Rejected, or Suspended-Dealer status after they have been modified and validated.
Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Edit Warranty Claims Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Warranty Claims Edit or Create Warranty Claims Workflow *** Nissan Canada Inc. (NCI) recommends dealers create Warranty Claims in an NCI DBS certified dealer management system and then log into NCI DBS to review, validate and submit the claim to NCI. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating and editing claims. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Warranty Claims Workflow or View Warranty Claims Workflow. Manage Warranty Claims Workflow View Warranty Claims Workflow
Note : The Submit Warranty Claim function is available from the Edit/Create Warranty Claim, Quick Entry Warranty Claim, and Express Entry Warranty Claim pages for validated warranty claims. Note : Validate a warranty claim prior to using the Submit function to ensure the claims is free of any errors that may need to be corrected. To submit a validated warranty claim for processing: Click the Submit button. Click the Yes button to submit the claim. The Submit button is available for validated warranty claims that are in New, or Open status. The Submit button is also available for warranty claims that are in Error, Rejected, or Suspended-Dealer status after they have been modified.
Submit a Warranty Claim Note : The Submit Warranty Claim function is available from the Edit/Create Warranty Claim, Quick Entry Warranty Claim, and Express Entry Warranty Claim pages for validated warranty claims. Note : You must validate the warranty claim before you can submit it. To submit a validated warranty claim: Click the Submit button. Note : DBS displays the Submit Confirmation window. Note : If a warranty claim has major errors, DBS sets the status to Error, and does not submit the warranty claim for processing. If the claim has minor errors that will not prevent you from submitting the claim, DBS displays the Submit Confirmation window with a warning message. Click the Yes button to submit the claim. The Submit button is available for warranty claims that are in New, Open, or Warning status that have been validated. The Submit button is only available for warranty claims that are in Error, Rejected, or Suspended-Dealer status after they have been modified and validated.
Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Edit Warranty Claims Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Warranty Claims Edit or Create Warranty Claims Workflow *** Nissan Canada Inc. (NCI) recommends dealers create Warranty Claims in an NCI DBS certified dealer management system and then log into NCI DBS to review, validate and submit the claim to NCI. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating and editing claims. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Warranty Claims Workflow or View Warranty Claims Workflow. Manage Warranty Claims Workflow View Warranty Claims Workflow
Note : The Quick Jump menu is available on many DBS pages, and is used to quickly access content in long forms. The Quick Jump menu is available on the Edit/Create Warranty Claim, Express Entry Warranty Claim, Quick Entry Warranty Claim, and View Warranty Claim pages. To use the Quick Jump menu: To jump to the top or bottom of the page, click the top or bottom link. To move to a specific section of the page, click a section title in the menu. To show or hide all sections, click the expand all or collapse all link. To return to the top of the page from any section, click the Top button. To collapse the Quick Jump menu, click the collapse ( << ) icon. To expand the Quick Jump menu, click the expand ( >> ) icon.
Use the Quick Jump Menu Note : The Quick Jump menu is available on many DBS pages, and is used to quickly access content in long forms. The Quick Jump menu is available on the Edit/Create Warranty Claim, Express Entry Warranty Claim, Quick Entry Warranty Claim, and View Warranty Claim pages. To use the Quick Jump menu: To jump to the top or bottom of the page, click the top or bottom link. To move to a specific section of the page, click a section title in the menu. To show or hide all sections, click the expand all or collapse all link. To return to the top of the page from any section, click the Top button. To expand or collapse the Quick Jump menu, click the collapse (<<) icon. To take action on a claim, click one of the available claim action buttons.
Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Edit Warranty Claims Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Warranty Claims Edit or Create Warranty Claims Workflow *** Nissan Canada Inc. (NCI) recommends dealers create Warranty Claims in an NCI DBS certified dealer management system and then log into NCI DBS to review, validate and submit the claim to NCI. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating and editing claims. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Warranty Claims Workflow or View Warranty Claims Workflow. Manage Warranty Claims Workflow View Warranty Claims Workflow
Note : The Quick Jump menu is available on many DBS pages, and is used to quickly access content in long forms. The Quick Jump menu is available on the Edit/Create Warranty Claim, Express Entry Warranty Claim, Quick Entry Warranty Claim, and View Warranty Claim pages. To use the Quick Jump menu: To jump to the top or bottom of the page, click the top or bottom link. To move to a specific section of the page, click a section title in the menu. To show or hide all sections, click the expand all or collapse all link. To return to the top of the page from any section, click the Top button. To collapse the Quick Jump menu, click the collapse ( << ) icon. To expand the Quick Jump menu, click the expand ( >> ) icon.
Use the Quick Jump Menu Note : The Quick Jump menu is available on many DBS pages, and is used to quickly access content in long forms. The Quick Jump menu is available on the Edit/Create Warranty Claim, Express Entry Warranty Claim, Quick Entry Warranty Claim, and View Warranty Claim pages. To use the Quick Jump menu: To jump to the top or bottom of the page, click the top or bottom link. To move to a specific section of the page, click a section title in the menu. To show or hide all sections, click the expand all or collapse all link. To return to the top of the page from any section, click the Top button. To expand or collapse the Quick Jump menu, click the collapse (<<) icon. To take action on a claim, click one of the available claim action buttons.
Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Edit Warranty Claims Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Warranty Claims Edit or Create Warranty Claims Workflow *** Nissan Canada Inc. (NCI) recommends dealers create Warranty Claims in an NCI DBS certified dealer management system and then log into NCI DBS to review, validate and submit the claim to NCI. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating and editing claims. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Warranty Claims Workflow or View Warranty Claims Workflow. Manage Warranty Claims Workflow View Warranty Claims Workflow
Note : The Quick Jump menu is available on many DBS pages, and is used to quickly access content in long forms. The Quick Jump menu is available on the Edit/Create Warranty Claim, Express Entry Warranty Claim, Quick Entry Warranty Claim, and View Warranty Claim pages. To use the Quick Jump menu: To jump to the top or bottom of the page, click the top or bottom link. To move to a specific section of the page, click a section title in the menu. To show or hide all sections, click the expand all or collapse all link. To return to the top of the page from any section, click the Top button. To collapse the Quick Jump menu, click the collapse ( << ) icon. To expand the Quick Jump menu, click the expand ( >> ) icon.
Use the Quick Jump Menu Note : The Quick Jump menu is available on many DBS pages, and is used to quickly access content in long forms. The Quick Jump menu is available on the Edit/Create Warranty Claim, Express Entry Warranty Claim, Quick Entry Warranty Claim, and View Warranty Claim pages. To use the Quick Jump menu: To jump to the top or bottom of the page, click the top or bottom link. To move to a specific section of the page, click a section title in the menu. To show or hide all sections, click the expand all or collapse all link. To return to the top of the page from any section, click the Top button. To expand or collapse the Quick Jump menu, click the collapse (<<) icon. To take action on a claim, click one of the available claim action buttons.
Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Edit Warranty Claims Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Warranty Claims Edit or Create Warranty Claims Workflow *** Nissan Canada Inc. (NCI) recommends dealers create Warranty Claims in an NCI DBS certified dealer management system and then log into NCI DBS to review, validate and submit the claim to NCI. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating and editing claims. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Warranty Claims Workflow or View Warranty Claims Workflow. Manage Warranty Claims Workflow View Warranty Claims Workflow
Note : The Quick Jump menu is available on many DBS pages, and is used to quickly access content in long forms. The Quick Jump menu is available on the Edit/Create Warranty Claim, Express Entry Warranty Claim, Quick Entry Warranty Claim, and View Warranty Claim pages. To use the Quick Jump menu: To jump to the top or bottom of the page, click the top or bottom link. To move to a specific section of the page, click a section title in the menu. To show or hide all sections, click the expand all or collapse all link. To return to the top of the page from any section, click the Top button. To collapse the Quick Jump menu, click the collapse ( << ) icon. To expand the Quick Jump menu, click the expand ( >> ) icon.
Use the Quick Jump Menu Note : The Quick Jump menu is available on many DBS pages, and is used to quickly access content in long forms. The Quick Jump menu is available on the Edit/Create Warranty Claim, Express Entry Warranty Claim, Quick Entry Warranty Claim, and View Warranty Claim pages. To use the Quick Jump menu: To jump to the top or bottom of the page, click the top or bottom link. To move to a specific section of the page, click a section title in the menu. To show or hide all sections, click the expand all or collapse all link. To return to the top of the page from any section, click the Top button. To expand or collapse the Quick Jump menu, click the collapse (<<) icon. To take action on a claim, click one of the available claim action buttons.
Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Edit Warranty Claims Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Warranty Claims Edit or Create Warranty Claims Workflow *** Nissan Canada Inc. (NCI) recommends dealers create Warranty Claims in an NCI DBS certified dealer management system and then log into NCI DBS to review, validate and submit the claim to NCI. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating and editing claims. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Warranty Claims Workflow or View Warranty Claims Workflow. Manage Warranty Claims Workflow View Warranty Claims Workflow
To restart a study: Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon for the suspended study you want to restart. From the Action menu, select the Restart Study option. Select the desired restart date option. Click the Restart button. Suspended Studies are highlighted in red. The Restart Study option is available only for studies with a status of "Suspended".
Restart a Study Note : The Restart Study option is available only for studies with a status of "Suspended". To restart a study: Select the suspended study you want to restart. Click the Action icon for the selected study. From the Action menu, select the Restart Study option. Note : The Restart Study window opens. Select the desired restart date option. Click the Restart button. Note : The study restarts according to the date option you selected. Suspended studies are highlighted in red.
Early Detection System (EDS) EDS: Study Dashboard Processes EDS: Study Dashboard Study Study Dashboard Technical Service Bulletin (TSB) Create or Modify a Study Workflow Note : The Create or Modify a Study workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for defining or modifying a study that integrates appointment and repair order data collected by the Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Define or Modify a Study Workflow. Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow View One Study Result Workflow
Dashboard Early Detection System (EDS) EDS: Study Dashboard Processes EDS: Study Dashboard Study Study Dashboard View View One Study Result Workflow Note : The View One Study Result workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing a study that integrates appointment and repair order data collected by the Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the View One Study Result workflow. Define or Modify Study Workflow Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow
Dashboard Early Detection System (EDS) Hold Status Processes Study View Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow Note: The Manage Early Detection System Studies workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing Early Detection System (EDS) studies that integrate appointment and repair order data collected by the Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow. Define or Modify a Study Workflow View One Study Result Workflow View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow
Dashboard Early Detection System (EDS) EDS: Study Dashboard Processes EDS: Study Dashboard Study Study Dashboard View View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow Note : The View a Dealer's Study Results workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing one dealer's study results that integrate appointment and repair order data collected by the Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the View a Dealer's Study Results workflow. Define or Modify a Study Workflow Manage Early Detection Studies Workflow View One Study Result Workflow
Support Page Overview Purpose Use the Support page to view system requirement and the minimum hardware and software configuration required to run DBS . Description The content area of the Support page displays the following sections: System Requirements - Displays the minimum hardware and software configuration required to run DBS Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Support page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. View DBS System Requirements View DBS System Requirements Page Preview
Edit Parts Return Page Overview Purpose Use the Edit Parts Return page to modify an existing parts return that is in "New" or "Open" status. You can edit a parts return from the Parts Return Management page. You must first search for and locate the desired parts return that you want to edit. Use the Action menu to open the Edit Parts Return page. Description The content area of the Edit Parts Return page displays the following sections: Edit Parts Return header - Allows you to view or add general information about a parts return, including the type of return and the dealer return reference number, as well as any warning or error messages, if they exist Parts Return Detail - Allows you to add, modify, or delete parts included in the parts return, specify or modify the return quantity, and view any warning or error messages, if they exist Buttons - Allow you to save, submit, delete, or cancel a parts return Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Edit Parts Return page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Add a Part to a Return Add Multiple Parts to a Return Delete a Part from a Return Delete a Parts Return Edit a Parts Return Export a Parts Return Filter Parts Return Detail Look Up a Part Modify a Detail Line on a Return Submit a Parts Return Add a Part to a Return Add Multiple Parts to a Return Delete a Part from a Return Delete a Parts Return Edit a Parts Return Export a Parts Return Filter Parts Return Detail Look Up a Part Modify a Detail Line on a Return Submit a Parts Return Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Edit Parts Return page. Edit Parts Return Workflow Preview
To export campaign report information: Note : If you filter the page to display a sub-set of the available data, only those records in the Vehicle Campaign List are exported. Click the Export button. Follow your browser-specific instructions to open, print, or save the campaignReport.xlsx file.
Export Campaign Report Information To export campaign report information: Note : If you filter the page to display a sub-set of the available data, only those records in the Vehicle Campaign List are exported. Click the Export button. Follow your browser-specific instructions to open or save the campaignReport.xlsx file.
This section of a study is not required, but provides the opportunity to customize or limit a study's results. Use optional study sections to clearly define study parameters, but use caution as conflicting selections will result in no data being returned. To complete the Dealers section of a study: If desired, in the Location section, select a radio button to filter the Available Dealers list by dealer location. To include active franchise dealers in the Available Dealers list, click the Show All Active Dealers toggle button. The list updates to include commercial and fleet dealers. To limit the display to franchise dealerships only, click the Show Active Franchise Dealers toggle button. To search for a specific dealers to include, type the dealer number in the field provided, and then click the Search icon. Select each dealer you want to add to or remove from the Selected Dealers list and then click the center buttons as necessary to add or remove the dealer. To view dealerships by dealer name, click one of the Available Dealer Name Index links to update the Available Dealers list. When you have selected all desired dealers, click the Save button.
Complete the Dealers Section of a Study This section of a study is not required, but provides the opportunity to customize or limit a study's results. Use optional study sections to clearly define study parameters, but use caution as conflicting selections will result in no data being returned. To complete the Dealers section of a study: If desired, in the Location section, select a radio button to filter the Available Dealers list by dealer location. To include active franchise dealers in the Available Dealers list, click the Show All Active Dealers toggle button. The list updates to include commercial and fleet dealers. To limit the display to franchise dealerships only, click the Show Active Franchise Dealers toggle button. To search for a specific dealers to include, type the dealer number in the field provided, and then click the Search icon. Select each dealer you want to add to or remove from the Selected Dealers list and then click the center buttons as necessary to add or remove the dealer. To view dealerships by dealer name, click one of the Available Dealer Name Index links to update the Available Dealers list. When you have selected all desired dealers, click the Save button.
Early Detection System (EDS) EDS: Study Dashboard Processes EDS: Study Dashboard Study Study Dashboard Technical Service Bulletin (TSB) Create or Modify a Study Workflow Note : The Create or Modify a Study workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for defining or modifying a study that integrates appointment and repair order data collected by the Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Define or Modify a Study Workflow. Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow View One Study Result Workflow
Manage Warranty Claim Page Overview Purpose The Manage Warranty Claim page provides a graphical representation of warranty claims summary data, with a variety of filter criteria from which to choose. From this page, you can view, create, edit, and delete warranty claims. Warranty claims on the Manage Warranty Claim page originate either through manual entry or by the automatic transfer of a repair order (RO) from your dealer management system (DMS). The page includes claims that have been sent or need to be sent for payment. Description The content area of the Manage Warranty Claim page displays the following sections: Claims Summary - Allows you to view a visual representation of warranty claims summary data. Page Navigation Bar - Allows you to navigate from page to page, if multiple pages exist Warranty Claims - Displays a list of warranty claims that correspond with your selections in the View and Filter by menus Tasks You can perform the following tasks from or on the Manage Warranty Claim page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. About Warranty Claims: What You Need to Know Access the Edit Warranty Claim Page Access the Create Warranty Claim Delete Warranty Claim Display the Warranty Claims Graph Display Warning or Error Messages Edit a Warranty Claim on the Express Entry Page Edit a Warranty Claim on the Quick Entry Page Export Warranty Claims List Filter Warranty Claims List Manage Warranty Claims Page Basics Resubmit Warranty Claim Submit a Warranty Claim View Amounts Paid on an Approved Warranty Claim View DCAL View Repair Order View a Warranty Claim About Warranty Claims: What You Need to Know Access the Create Warranty Claim Access the Edit Warranty Claim Page Delete Warranty Claim Display the Warranty Claims Graph Display Warning or Error Messages Edit a Warranty Claim on the Express Entry Page Edit a Warranty Claim on the Quick Entry Page Export Warranty Claims List Filter Warranty Claims List Manage Warranty Claims Page Basics Resubmit Warranty Claim Submit a Warranty Claim View Amounts Paid on an Approved Warranty Claim View Repair Order View a Warranty Claim Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Manage Warranty Claim page. Manage Warranty Claim Workflow Page Preview
View Overview Information One Dealer Study Result Page Overview View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow Perform Tasks Export Dealer Study Results Information Filter Dealer Study Results Perform Common DBS Tasks Release a Vehicle from Dealer Hold Remove a Repair Order Job Line from a Study View Dealer Study Results View NSH for a Vehicle in a Study View Repair Order for Vehicle in a Study Export Dealer Study Results Information Filter Dealer Study Results Perform Common DBS Tasks Release a Vehicle from Dealer Hold Remove a Repair Order Job Line from a Study View Dealer Study Results View NSH for a Vehicle in a Study View Repair Order for Vehicle in a Study
Dashboard Early Detection System (EDS) EDS: Study Dashboard Processes EDS: Study Dashboard Study Study Dashboard View View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow Note : The View a Dealer's Study Results workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing one dealer's study results that integrate appointment and repair order data collected by the Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the View a Dealer's Study Results workflow. Define or Modify a Study Workflow Manage Early Detection Studies Workflow View One Study Result Workflow
To access the Returns and Accrual Information page: Click the Return & Accrual Info. button. Note : The Returns and Accrual Information page appears.
Access the Returns and Accrual Information Page To access the Returns and Accrual Information page: Click the Return & Accrual Info. button. Note : The Returns and Accrual Information page appears.
To view pre-Retail Delivery Reporting (RDR) data: By default, the Pre-RDR Reporting pages displays information by organization for the current month. If desired, from the View drop-down list, select the "Model" option to view data by model. If desired, from the NNA Sales Month drop-down list, select the appropriate period. Click the Search icon. Note : To reset the filter criteria to the default options, click the Clear icon. Expand or collapse sections, as desired. Note : To expand a section, click the plus sign ( + ) to the left of the desired title. To collapse a section, click the minus sign ( - ).
View Pre-RDR Reporting Data To view pre-Retail Delivery Reporting (RDR) data: By default, the Pre-RDR Reporting pages displays information by organization for the current month. If desired, from the View drop-down list, select the "Model" option to view data by model. If desired, from the NNA Sales Month drop-down list, select the appropriate period. Click the Search icon. Note : To reset the filter criteria to the default options, click the Clear icon. Expand or collapse sections, as desired. Note : To expand a section, click the plus sign ( + ) to the left of the desired title. To collapse a section, click the minus sign ( - ). To view pre-Retail Delivery Reporting (RDR) data: By default, the Pre-RDR Reporting pages displays information by organization for the current month. If desired, from the View drop-down list, select the "Model" option to view data by model. If desired, from the NCI Sales Month drop-down list, select the appropriate period. Click the Search icon. Note : To reset the filter criteria to the default options, click the Clear icon. Expand or collapse sections, as desired. Note : To expand a section, click the plus sign ( + ) to the left of the desired title. To collapse a section, click the minus sign ( - ).
Pre-RDR Pre-Retail Delivery Reporting (Pre-RDR) Processes Pre-RDR View View Pre-RDR Reporting Workflow Note : The Pre-RDR Reporting workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing pre-RDR reporting information. Related Workflows The following workflows may have similar tasks in common with the Viewing Pre-RDR Reporting workflow. Report Sale of a Vehicle (RDR) Workflow View RDR History Workflow View RDR History Workflow
Create Parts Order Workflow *** Nissan Canada Inc. (NCI) recommends dealers create parts orders in an NCI DBS certified dealer management system and then log into NCI DBS to review and submit the order to NCI. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating a parts order. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create Parts Order Workflow. Edit Parts Order Workflow Manage Parts Order Workflow Inquire on the Availability of Parts at the Parts Distribution Centers Workflow View Parts Order Workflow Edit Parts Order Workflow Manage Parts Order Workflow View Parts Order Workflow
Manage Dealer Operation Codes Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing dealer operation codes. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Dealer Operation Codes Workflow. Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes Workflow Manage Standard Operation Categories Workflow Manage Standard Operation Codes Workflow
Returns and Accrual Information Page Overview Purpose Use the Returns and Accrual Information page to review and print parts return and parts return accrual information. Access the Returns and Accrual Information page by clicking the Parts Return Management link from the Parts menu, and then clicking the Return and Accrual Info button. Description The content area of the Returns and Accrual Information page displays the following sections: Accrual Earnings - Displays your current quarter accrual information and the projected accrual for the next financial quarter Warning and Information Key - Displays information about any warning or informational icons that may be displayed in the Accrual Earnings or Returns and Accruals Details sections. Returns and Accruals Details - Displays information about the parts returns and accruals by month for the current calendar year. Information displayed includes the return period and due date, accrual earned as of the due date, monthly allowance, amount of accrual used/unused, amount forfeited, roll over amount, adjustments, and return status. Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Parts Return Management page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Print the Returns and Accrual Information Page View Returns and Accrual Information Page Preview
To filter the Parts Order Management summary: Select a filter option. Note : If you select the Part Number filter option, the Part Number lookup icon appears. Click here for instructions on using the lookup feature. If a text-entry field appears, type a filter value. - OR - If a drop-down list appears, select an option from the list. -OR - If a calendar tool appears, click in the field, and then use the calendar to select the desired date(s). Note : Depending on your selection, additional filter options may display to narrow the results further. Note : Depending on your selection, the system may automatically filter the list and refresh the display. Click the Search button, as needed. View the orders that meet the selected criteria. Note : To reset the filter criteria to the default options, click the Clear icon.
Filter Parts Order Management Summary To filter the Parts Order Management summary: From the Filter By drop-down list, select a filter option. Note : If you select the Part Number filter option, the Part Number lookup icon appears. Click here for instructions on using the lookup feature. If a text-entry field appears, type a filter value. - OR - If a drop-down list appears, select an option from the list. -OR - If a calendar tool appears, click in the field, and then use the calendar to select the desired date. Note : Depending on your selection, additional filter options may display to narrow the results further. Note : Depending on your selection, the system may automatically filter the list and refresh the display. Click the Search button, as needed. View the orders that meet the selected criteria. Note : To reset the filter criteria to the default options, click the Clear icon.
Manage Orders Manage Orders Manage Orders Manage Orders Parts Order Management Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing parts orders. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Parts Order workflow. Create Parts Order Workflow Edit Parts Order Workflow Inquire on the Availability of Parts at the Parts Distribution Centers Workflow View Parts Order Workflow Create Parts Order Workflow Edit Parts Order Workflow View Parts Order Workflow
To view repair order (RO) information from the Service Dashboard: In the RO column of the applicable row, click the repair order number link. Note : The Repair Order Information window opens. View the RO details. Note : To print the RO, click the Print button. To close, click the Close button. In DBS , you can view repair order (RO) information in multiple ways.
View Repair Order Information To view Repair Order (RO) information: In the RO column of the applicable row, click the Repair Order number link. Note : The Repair Order Information window opens. View the RO details. Note : To print the RO, click the Print button. To close, click the Close button.
Dashboard Early Detection System (EDS) EDS: Study Dashboard Processes EDS: Study Dashboard Study Study Dashboard View View One Study Result Workflow Note : The View One Study Result workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing a study that integrates appointment and repair order data collected by the Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the View One Study Result workflow. Define or Modify Study Workflow Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow
Dashboard Early Detection System (EDS) EDS: Service Dashboard EDS: Service Dashboard Service Dashboard Study Technical Service Bulletin (TSB) View the Service Dashboard Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing the Service Dashboard. You may view study alerts generated regarding vehicles that meet the criteria of informational or hold studies or technical service bulletins. You may also view open repair orders or National Service History.
Dashboard Early Detection System (EDS) Hold Status Processes Study View Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow Note: The Manage Early Detection System Studies workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing Early Detection System (EDS) studies that integrate appointment and repair order data collected by the Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow. Define or Modify a Study Workflow View One Study Result Workflow View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow
Dashboard Early Detection System (EDS) EDS: Study Dashboard Processes EDS: Study Dashboard Study Study Dashboard View View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow Note : The View a Dealer's Study Results workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing one dealer's study results that integrate appointment and repair order data collected by the Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the View a Dealer's Study Results workflow. Define or Modify a Study Workflow Manage Early Detection Studies Workflow View One Study Result Workflow
Campaign Visibility in Vehicle Inventory Quick Reference Guide The Campaign Visibility in Vehicle Inventory Quick Reference Guide provides instructions for how to filter your vehicle inventory to display vehicles with campaign information and display the campaign details for a selected vehicle. Click here to download the Campaign Visibility in Vehicle Inventory Quick Reference Guide.
Campaign Visibility in Vehicle Inventory Quick Reference Guide The Campaign Visibility in Vehicle Inventory Quick Reference Guide provides instructions for how to filter your vehicle inventory to display vehicles with campaign information and display the campaign details for a selected vehicle. Click here to download the Campaign Visibility in Vehicle Inventory Quick Reference Guide.
Campaign Visibility in Vehicle Inventory Quick Reference Guide The Campaign Visibility in Vehicle Inventory Quick Reference Guide provides instructions for how to filter your vehicle inventory to display vehicles with campaign information and display the campaign details for a selected vehicle. Click here to download the Campaign Visibility in Vehicle Inventory Quick Reference Guide.
C740A0F6-DD50-48DF-B027-869C3A2F5A82\NPSB17-183 PDI Dealer Letter NIS Autopay.pdf
To view a repair order (RO) from the Customer Pay Reimbursement page: Select the detail line in the Parts Markup or Labor Rate section for which you want to view repair order information. Click the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Detail option. Note : The Repair Order Information window opens. If desired, click the Print button to print the RO detail. When you have finished reviewing the RO information, click the Close button to close the Repair Order Information window.
View a Repair Order from the Customer Pay Reimbursement Page To view a repair order (RO) from the Customer Pay Reimbursement page: Select the detail line for the repair order you wish to view. Click the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Detail option. Note : The Repair Order Information window opens. If desired, click the Print button to print the RO information. When you have finished reviewing the information, click the Close button to close the Repair Order Information window.
Customer Customer Pay Reimbursement Reimbursement Customer Pay Reimbursement Customer Pay Reimbursement View Customer Pay Reimbursement Analysis Workflow : Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for customer pay reimbursement analysis.
To suspend a study: Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon for the study you want to suspend. From the Action menu, select the Suspend Study option. Click the Suspend button. Note : When a study is suspended, DBS stops collecting information on new appointments and ROs for the study. Active Studies are highlighted in green. Suspended Studies are highlighted in red. The Suspend Study option is available for all active studies.
Suspend a Study Note : The Suspend Study option is available for all active studies. To suspend a study: Select the study you want to suspend. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon for the study you want to suspend. From the Action menu, select the Suspend Study option. Click the Suspend button. Note : When a study is suspended, DBS stops collecting information on new appointments and ROs for the study. Active studies are highlighted in green. Suspended studies are highlighted in red.
Early Detection System (EDS) EDS: Study Dashboard Processes EDS: Study Dashboard Study Study Dashboard Technical Service Bulletin (TSB) Create or Modify a Study Workflow Note : The Create or Modify a Study workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for defining or modifying a study that integrates appointment and repair order data collected by the Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Define or Modify a Study Workflow. Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow View One Study Result Workflow
Parts Introduction Description The Parts application within the Dealer Business System (DBS) provides applications and integration points to allow dealers to conduct parts-related business with NNA and other dealers. This includes the tools needed to create, edit, and manage parts orders and returns. The Parts application also provides the capability to create service campaign orders, which are submitted to the Countermeasure Service Parts Procurement Group for review and approval. The Parts application also includes the Request for Credit (RFC) application. Note : The items you see in the menu tabs and menu links vary based on your permissions. If you need to request changes to your permissions, please contact your dealership's System Administrator. You can find the System Administrator(s) for you dealership by viewing your profile. For more information, click here . The Parts menu in DBS help shows content listed by application page. For ease of use, content is organized by application page following the DBS menu when possible. When you first begin using DBS and the DBS help system, we recommend that you review the help system menu and then view the page overview, workflow, and task information for the tasks you will be performing in DBS .
Parts Order Management Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing parts orders. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Parts Order workflow. Create Parts Order Workflow Edit Parts Order Workflow Inquire on the Availability of Parts at the Parts Distribution Centers Workflow View Parts Order Workflow Create Parts Order Workflow Edit Parts Order Workflow View Parts Order Workflow
Edit User Permissions Page Overview Purpose Use the Edit User Permissions page to set up or edit user permissions. Description The content area of the Edit User Permissions page displays the following sections: Quick Jump menu - Appears on the left-hand side of the page. The Quick Jump menu allows you to show one section at a time, or you can show or hide the default view for all sections. Permission Function Tree - By default, the function tree expands two sections: Menu and User Information. The function tree also includes a Host Report section and a Report Writer section. For internal users, the function tree also includes a Publishing section. Use the + and - icons to show or hide a section. Use the expand all | collapse all features to expand or collapse a section. Save and Cancel buttons - Allows you to submit or cancel requested changes . Cancel returns you to the Position Summary page. Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Edit User Permissions page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Grant or Remove Access to a Host Report Grant or Remove Access to a Page, Action, Custom Field, or Website Grant or Remove Access to a Report Writer View Grant or Remove Full Access to a Menu and Its Contents Grant Publisher Authorization (internal user only) Remove Publisher Authorization Use the Quick Jump Menu Grant or Remove Access to a Host Report Grant or Remove Access to a Page, Action, Custom Field, or Website Grant or Remove Access to a Report Writer View Grant or Remove Full Access to a Menu and Its Contents Grant Publisher Authorization (internal user only) Remove Publisher Authorization Use the Quick Jump Menu Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Edit User Permissions page. User Summary Workflow Page Preview
View Overview Information Configure DSP STAR Web Service Page Overview Configure DSP STAR Web Service Workflow Perform Tasks Configure DSP STAR Web Service Perform Common DBS Tasks Configure DSP STAR Web Service Perform Common DBS Tasks
Dealer Service Provider (DSP) DSP STAR Web Services Processes STAR Web Services Configure DSP STAR Web Services Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for configuring DSP STAR Web Services.
To clean the cache: Type the input cache path. Click the Submit button.
Clean the Cache To clean the cache: In the Input Cache Path field, type the input cache path. Click the Submit button.
Manage Part Return Schedule Page Overview Purpose Use the Manage Part Return Schedule page to view and update the date by which parts on a return must be returned. NNA internal users may update the parts return by date for one or more dealers, view the accrual adjustment history for a dealer, change a parts return rollover rate Description The content area of the Manage Part Return Schedule page displays the following sections: Filter - Allows you to filter the information to display only the records that match your criteria Dealer List - Lists the dealers and their current parts return by date. Return Schedule - Lists the prior and currently scheduled returns for the selected dealer and return year. Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Manage Part Return Schedule page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Adjust the Accrual Amount for a Dealer's Parts Returns Change the Due Date for a Single Dealer Parts Return Change the Parts Return Schedule for Multiple Dealers Change the Rollover Rate Filter the Manage Part Return Schedule Page Forfeit a Parts Return Period Manage Part Return Schedule Adjustment Reasons Manage Part Return Schedule Cancellation Reasons View the Accrual Adjustment History for a Dealer Page Preview
To export Study Dashboard information: Click the Export button. Select Excel as the output format. Save the file to your local drive. If you filter the page before exporting, only those records that meet the filter criteria will export. You can filter, sort, and print the data if you export the information to Microsoft ® Excel ® .
Export Study Dashboard Information To export Study Dashboard information: Click the Export button. Select Excel as the output format. Save the file to your local drive. If you filter the page before exporting, only those records that meet the filter criteria will export. You can filter, sort, and print the data if you export the information to Microsoft ® Excel ® .
Dashboard Early Detection System (EDS) Hold Status Processes Study View Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow Note: The Manage Early Detection System Studies workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing Early Detection System (EDS) studies that integrate appointment and repair order data collected by the Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow. Define or Modify a Study Workflow View One Study Result Workflow View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow
Early Detection System (EDS) EDS: Study Dashboard Processes EDS: Study Dashboard Study Study Dashboard Technical Service Bulletin (TSB) Create or Modify a Study Workflow Note : The Create or Modify a Study workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for defining or modifying a study that integrates appointment and repair order data collected by the Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Define or Modify a Study Workflow. Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow View One Study Result Workflow
Dashboard Early Detection System (EDS) EDS: Study Dashboard Processes EDS: Study Dashboard Study Study Dashboard View View One Study Result Workflow Note : The View One Study Result workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing a study that integrates appointment and repair order data collected by the Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the View One Study Result workflow. Define or Modify Study Workflow Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow
Dashboard Early Detection System (EDS) EDS: Study Dashboard Processes EDS: Study Dashboard Study Study Dashboard View View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow Note : The View a Dealer's Study Results workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing one dealer's study results that integrate appointment and repair order data collected by the Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the View a Dealer's Study Results workflow. Define or Modify a Study Workflow Manage Early Detection Studies Workflow View One Study Result Workflow
About RDR: What You Need to Know If a salesperson or F&I Manager does not display in the RDR drop-down lists, your system administrator needs to confirm that the user's Dealer Employee Number in your DMS EXACTLY matches the Dealer Employee Number in NNAnet.com and the Dealer Employee Number in Virtual Academy. If these numbers are not the same; surveys, incentives, system data, and other information will be affected. Note : Updates to NNAnet.com are processed in a nightly batch. Updates to Virtual Academy and their sync to NNAnet.com can take up to 72 hours; therefore, changes made in NNAnet will show in DBS no earlier than the following business day. Vehicle trades are done using OMS and the results are immediately reflected in OMS, but inventory updates into DBS only occur every 30 minutes. If you have completed a vehicle trade in OMS, this vehicle may not display in your vehicle inventory for up to 30 minutes; however, you can still RDR a vehicle that has been recently traded even if your DBS inventory does not yet show the vehicle. Please see the topic " RDR a Vehicle Not in Your Inventory Using Quick Entry RDR ". RDR's cannot be submitted to the Nissan Host after 10 PM Central time (except on Sales Close which extends the time to midnight Central time). RDRs submitted after 10 PM Central time will not be processed and you will need to resubmit them the following day. The Nissan Host will be back on line at 5 AM Central time for RDR submissions.
To open the Edit Calendar Event page: Select an event. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Edit option. Note : The Edit Calendar Event page appears.
Open the Edit Calendar Event Page To open the Edit Calendar Event page: Select an event. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Edit option. Note : The Edit Calendar Event page appears.
Site Map Page Overview Purpose Use the Site Map page to view a list of the pages within the Dealer Business System (DBS) applications. Expand the menus and click a hyperlinked page name to navigate to that page. Description The content area of the Site Map page displays the following sections: Search - Allows you to search for pages that match your criteria System Hierarchy - Allows you to browse the DBS applications and then select a page to view. Click the hyperlink for the page you want to view. Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Site Map page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Access an Application Page from the Site Map Browse the Site Map Search the Site Map Access an Application Page from the Site Map Browse the Site Map Search the Site Map Page Preview
To copy all of a user's report definitions: Click the General Action button. From the General Action menu, select the Copy All Report(s) option. Note : The Copy All Report(s) page appears where you can select a user to receive the report definition. Click here for more information. Dealer users may copy all of their own report definitions to another authorized user at their dealership. Dealer administrators and internal users can copy all of a user's report definitions to another authorized user.
Copy All of a User's Report Definitions To copy all of a user's report definitions: Click the General Action button. From the General Action menu, select the Copy All Report(s) option. Note : The Copy All Report(s) page appears where you can select a user to receive the report definition. Click here for more information. Dealer users may copy all of their own report definitions to another authorized user at their dealership. Dealer administrators and internal users can copy all of a user's report definitions to another authorized user.
To copy all of a user's report definitions: Click the General Action button. From the General Action menu, select the Copy All Report(s) option. Note : The Copy All Report(s) page appears where you can select a user to receive the report definition. Click here for more information. Dealer users may copy all of their own report definitions to another authorized user at their dealership. Dealer administrators and internal users can copy all of a user's report definitions to another authorized user.
Copy All of a User's Report Definitions To copy all of a user's report definitions: Click the General Action button. From the General Action menu, select the Copy All Report(s) option. Note : The Copy All Report(s) page appears where you can select a user to receive the report definition. Click here for more information. Dealer users may copy all of their own report definitions to another authorized user at their dealership. Dealer administrators and internal users can copy all of a user's report definitions to another authorized user.
To copy all of a user's report definitions: Click the General Action button. From the General Action menu, select the Copy All Report(s) option. Note : The Copy All Report(s) page appears where you can select a user to receive the report definition. Click here for more information. Dealer users may copy all of their own report definitions to another authorized user at their dealership. Dealer administrators and internal users can copy all of a user's report definitions to another authorized user.
Copy All of a User's Report Definitions To copy all of a user's report definitions: Click the General Action button. From the General Action menu, select the Copy All Report(s) option. Note : The Copy All Report(s) page appears where you can select a user to receive the report definition. Click here for more information. Dealer users may copy all of their own report definitions to another authorized user at their dealership. Dealer administrators and internal users can copy all of a user's report definitions to another authorized user.
To copy all of a user's report definitions: Click the General Action button. From the General Action menu, select the Copy All Report(s) option. Note : The Copy All Report(s) page appears where you can select a user to receive the report definition. Click here for more information. Dealer users may copy all of their own report definitions to another authorized user at their dealership. Dealer administrators and internal users can copy all of a user's report definitions to another authorized user.
Copy All of a User's Report Definitions To copy all of a user's report definitions: Click the General Action button. From the General Action menu, select the Copy All Report(s) option. Note : The Copy All Report(s) page appears where you can select a user to receive the report definition. Click here for more information. Dealer users may copy all of their own report definitions to another authorized user at their dealership. Dealer administrators and internal users can copy all of a user's report definitions to another authorized user.
To copy all of a user's report definitions: Click the General Action button. From the General Action menu, select the Copy All Report(s) option. Note : The Copy All Report(s) page appears where you can select a user to receive the report definition. Click here for more information. Dealer users may copy all of their own report definitions to another authorized user at their dealership. Dealer administrators and internal users can copy all of a user's report definitions to another authorized user.
Copy All of a User's Report Definitions To copy all of a user's report definitions: Click the General Action button. From the General Action menu, select the Copy All Report(s) option. Note : The Copy All Report(s) page appears where you can select a user to receive the report definition. Click here for more information. Dealer users may copy all of their own report definitions to another authorized user at their dealership. Dealer administrators and internal users can copy all of a user's report definitions to another authorized user.
To approve an SVC order from the SVC Order Management page: Select an SVC order. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Approve SVC Order option. Note: A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm, or click the No button to close the window without confirming. SVC orders pending approval already contain parts that are on the Campaign Parts list, as validated by the system during order submission. You can only approve an SVC order in "New" status. You cannot approve an SVC order with errors. Approved SVC orders are sent to the Countermeasure Service Parts Procurement Group every day between 3 and 4 p.m. U.S. Central Time.
Approve an SVC Order from the SVC Order Management Page To approve an SVC order from the SVC Order Management page: Select an SVC order. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Approve SVC Order option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm, or click the No button to close the window without confirming. SVC orders pending approval already contain parts that are on the Campaign Parts list, as validated by the system during order submission. You can only approve an SVC order in "New" status. You cannot approve an SVC order with errors.
Approve or Reject SVC Order Reject Approve or Reject SVC Order Approve or Reject SVC Order Manage Service Campaign Order Workflow Note : This workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing a Service Campaign (SVC) order. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Service Campaign Order Workflow. Manage Campaign Parts Workflow View Service Campaign Order Workflow
View Overview Information Create or Edit an Announcement Page Overview Create or Edit an Announcement Workflow Perform Tasks Create or Edit an Announcement Perform Common DBS Tasks Select Recipients Create or Edit an Announcement Perform Common DBS Tasks Select Recipients
Announcements Create Edit Modify Processes Create or Edit an Announcement Workflow Note : This workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating, modifying, and approving an announcement. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create or Edit an Announcement Workflow. Create or Edit an Alert Workflow Create or Edit a Calendar Event Workflow Create or Edit a Notification Workflow
To open the View Dealer Information page: Select the dealer. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the View Dealer Information option. Note : The View Dealer Information page appears.
Open the View Dealer Information Page To open the View Dealer Information page: Select the desired dealer. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the View Dealer Information option. Note : The View Dealer Information page appears. .
To open the View Dealer Information page: Select the dealer. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the View Dealer Information option. Note : The View Dealer Information page appears.
Open the View Dealer Information Page To open the View Dealer Information page: Select the desired dealer. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the View Dealer Information option. Note : The View Dealer Information page appears. .
Filtering the page filters the data in the Alerts section and the Open ROs section. To filter the RO (repair order) Work in Process page: To filter by the technicians assigned to complete the work, from the First Technician and Second Technician drop-down lists, select the technician(s) assigned. Note : You can only second a second technician if you select a first technician. To filter by the service advisor for the repair order, from the Service Advisor drop-down list, select a service advisor. To filter by other criteria, from the Filter By drop-down list, select one of the options provided. When you select an option from the Filter By drop-down list, a second field, list, or selection box displays. Enter text, select dates, or select an option from the drop-down lists as appropriate. Click the Search icon to display the alerts and open ROs which match the filter criteria you entered. Note : Click the Clear icon to reset the filters.
Filter the RO Work in Process Page Filtering the page filters the data in the Alerts section and the Open ROs section. To filter the RO (repair order) Work in Progress page: To filter by the technicians assigned to complete the work, from the First Technician and Second Technician drop-down lists, select the technician(s) assigned. Note : You can only second a second technician if you select a first technician. To filter by the service advisor for the repair order, from the Service Advisor drop-down list, select a service advisor. To filter by other criteria, from the Filter By drop-down list, select one of the options provided. When you select an option from the Filter By drop-down list, a second field, list, or selection box displays. Enter text, select dates, or select an option from the drop-down lists as appropriate. Click the Search icon to display the alerts and open ROs which match the filter criteria you entered. Note : Click the Clear icon to reset the filters.
Administration Introduction Description The Administration application within the Dealer Business System (DBS) provides authorized dealer and corporate users with a wide variety of tools to manage DBS user and dealership profiles, view system and transaction information, and create alerts, announcements, events, and notifications to communicate important DBS information. Note : The items you see in the menu tabs and menu links vary based on your permissions. If you need to request changes to your permissions, please contact your dealership's System Administrator. You can find the System Administrator(s) for your dealership by viewing your profile. For more information, click here . The Administration menu in DBS help shows content listed by user type, and then by application page. For ease of use, content is organized by application page following the DBS menu when possible. When you first begin using DBS and the DBS help system, we recommend that you review the help system menu and then view the page overview, workflow, and task information for the tasks you will be performing in DBS .
To complete the Claim Information section of an express entry warranty claim: Note : If you search for a repair order and line number, the information in the Claim Information section is populated with the repair order information. Add additional information as necessary. In the Open Date field, use the calendar to select the date the repair order was opened. In the Close Date field, use the calendar to select the date the repair order was completed. In the Line Type field, type a claim type code. Note : Based on the claim type you select, some fields are dimmed and unavailable. In the Coverage field, type a coverage code. In the Symptom field, type the symptom code that describes what the customer says is wrong with the vehicle. Note : The symptom code is used only for the "PP" and "PO" claim types. In the Diagnosis field, type the diagnosis code that identifies what the technician found wrong with the vehicle during diagnosis. Note : The diagnosis code is used only for the "PP" and "PO" claim types. From the Advisor drop-down list, select a service consultant name. If the warranty claim is related to a service campaign, in the ID field, type the campaign claim identification number. Note : the campaign claim ID is only used for the "CM" line type. Note : A campaign claim is submitted at the completion of a service or recall campaign-related repair. If the campaign ID is invalid, DBS displays an error message. In the Sales Tax area, in the Requested Amount field, type the requested sales tax amount. If the part is under warranty, select the Part Warranty checkbox. If you selected the Part Warranty checkbox, complete the Document (Invoice) Number , Odometer , and Date fields. If the vehicle was purchased in one country but is being serviced in another country, complete the fields in the Foreign Vehicle section. In the Deductible area, in the Requested Amount column, type the requested deductible amount in the CP (Customer Pay) and/or DI (Dealer Internal) pay fields. Note : This area is only available if you selected the "SC" coverage code for the "PP" claim type. Note : To save a claim with errors or warnings, click the Save button. To validate the information in the claim, click the Validate button. To submit a claim with no errors, click the Submit button.
Complete the Claim Information Section of an Express Entry Warranty Claim To complete the Claim Information section of an express entry warranty claim: Note : If you search for a repair order and line number, the information in the Claim Information section is populated with the repair order information. Add additional information as necessary. In the Open Date field, use the calendar to select the date the repair order was opened. In the Close Date field, use the calendar to select the date the repair order was completed. In the Line Type field, type a claim type code. Note : Based on the claim type you select, some fields are dimmed and unavailable. In the Coverage field, type a coverage code. In the Symptom field, type the symptom code that describes what the customer says is wrong with the vehicle. Note : The symptom code is used only for the "PP" and "PO" claim types. In the Diagnosis field, type the diagnosis code that identifies what the technician found wrong with the vehicle during diagnosis. Note : The diagnosis code is used only for the "PP" and "PO" claim types. From the Advisor drop-down list, select a service consultant name. If the warranty claim is related to a service campaign, in the ID field, type the campaign claim identification number. Note : the campaign claim ID is only used for the "CM" line type. Note : A campaign claim is submitted at the completion of a service or recall campaign-related repair. If the campaign ID is invalid, DBS displays an error message. In the Sales Tax area, in the Requested Amount field, type the requested sales tax amount. If the part is under warranty, select the Part Warranty checkbox. If you selected the Part Warranty checkbox, complete the Document (Invoice) Number , Odometer , and Date fields. If the vehicle was purchased in one country but is being serviced in another country, complete the fields in the Foreign Vehicle section. In the Deductible area, in the Requested Amount column, type the requested deductible amount in the CP (Customer Pay) and/or DI (Dealer Internal) pay fields. Note : This area is only available if you selected the "SC" coverage code for the "PP" claim type. Note : To save a claim with errors or warnings, click the Save button. To validate the information in the claim, click the Validate button. To submit a claim with no errors, click the Submit button.
View Overview Information Search Page Overview Perform Tasks Perform Common DBS Tasks View the Search Results Perform Common DBS Tasks View the Search Results
As of February 1, 2018 - dealers will no longer need to submit warranty claims for PDI fuel and labor charges. All PDI charges will automatically be paid to the dealer when the vehicle is invoiced to the retailer. Dealers should review the Automated PDI Payments Quick Reference Guide and/or contact the PDI help desk at 615-725-0588 with any questions or concerns. Note : Any warranty claims submitted for PDI charges after February 1 st will be automatically suspended. To edit a warranty claim: Use the Quick Jump menu to jump from section to section without scrolling. Click here for instructions to use the Quick Jump menu. Note : The number beside the section name is the number of warnings or errors in that section. Complete the following sections of the claim. Click the links below for instructions on how to complete/view these sections. Summary Claim Information Parts Operations Expenses Comments Customer Claim Activity (View Only) History (View Only) Summary Claim Information Parts Operations Expenses Comments Customer Claim Activity (View Only) History (View Only) Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Note : You can save a warranty claim with warnings and error messages. Note : DBS updates the claim status when you save the claim. You can only edit claims that have a New, Open, Warning, Error, Rejected, or Suspended-Dealer status. For additional assistance with warranty information, contact the Warranty Claims Help Desk: Nissan 1-800-258-7008 opt 7, Infiniti 1-800-933-3712 opt 7, NCI 1-866-297-1734
Edit a Warranty Claim As of February 1, 2018 - dealers will no longer need to submit warranty claims for PDI fuel and labor charges. All PDI charges will automatically be paid to the dealer when the vehicle is invoiced to the retailer. Dealers should review the Automated PDI Payments Quick Reference Guide and/or contact the PDI help desk at 615-725-0588 with any questions or concerns. Note : Any warranty claims submitted for PDI charges after February 1 st will be automatically suspended. To edit a warranty claim: The Edit/Create Warranty Claim page displays a Quick Jump menu on the left-hand side of the page. Use the Quick Jump menu to jump from section to section without scrolling. Note : The number beside the section name refers to the number of warnings or errors in that section. Complete the following sections of the claim. Click the links below for instructions on how to complete/view these sections. Summary Claim Information Parts Operations Expenses Comments Customer Claim Activity (View Only) History (View Only) Summary Claim Information Parts Operations Expenses Comments Customer Claim Activity (View Only) History (View Only) Click the Save button. Note : You can save a warranty claim with warnings and error messages, and update the claim at a later time. Note : DBS updates the claim status when you save the claim. Navigate Using Quick Keys Use the quick keys below to navigate the sections of a warranty claim. CTRL+2 = Claim Info CTRL+3 = Parts CTRL+4 = Operations CTRL+5 = Expenses CTRL+6 = Comments CTRL+7 = Customer You can only edit claims that have a New, Open, Warning, Error, Rejected, or Suspended-Dealer status.
Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Edit Warranty Claims Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Warranty Claims Edit or Create Warranty Claims Workflow *** Nissan Canada Inc. (NCI) recommends dealers create Warranty Claims in an NCI DBS certified dealer management system and then log into NCI DBS to review, validate and submit the claim to NCI. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating and editing claims. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Warranty Claims Workflow or View Warranty Claims Workflow. Manage Warranty Claims Workflow View Warranty Claims Workflow
To view a dealer's list of reports: Click the View Dealers button. Note : The Search for a Dealer by Hierarchy or Number page appears. Select a dealer by hierarchy or by number. Click here for more information. Note : The selected dealer's list of reports appears. The list contains reports that have a report category of DBS Public or Dealership Public. View the reports on the list. To return to your list of reports, click the Cancel View Dealers button.
View a Dealer's List of Reports Note : This task applies to internal users only. To view a dealer's list of reports: Click the View Dealers button. Note : The Search for a Dealer by Hierarchy or Number page appears. Select a dealer by hierarchy or by number. Click here for more information. Note : The selected dealer's list of reports appears. The list contains reports that have a report category of DBS Public or Dealership Public. View the reports on the list. To return to your list of reports, click the Cancel View Dealers button.
To view a dealer's list of reports: Click the View Dealers button. Note : The Search for a Dealer by Hierarchy or Number page appears. Select a dealer by hierarchy or by number. Click here for more information. Note : The selected dealer's list of reports appears. The list contains reports that have a report category of DBS Public or Dealership Public. View the reports on the list. To return to your list of reports, click the Cancel View Dealers button.
View a Dealer's List of Reports Note : This task applies to internal users only. To view a dealer's list of reports: Click the View Dealers button. Note : The Search for a Dealer by Hierarchy or Number page appears. Select a dealer by hierarchy or by number. Click here for more information. Note : The selected dealer's list of reports appears. The list contains reports that have a report category of DBS Public or Dealership Public. View the reports on the list. To return to your list of reports, click the Cancel View Dealers button.
To view a dealer's list of reports: Click the View Dealers button. Note : The Search for a Dealer by Hierarchy or Number page appears. Select a dealer by hierarchy or by number. Click here for more information. Note : The selected dealer's list of reports appears. The list contains reports that have a report category of DBS Public or Dealership Public. View the reports on the list. To return to your list of reports, click the Cancel View Dealers button.
View a Dealer's List of Reports Note : This task applies to internal users only. To view a dealer's list of reports: Click the View Dealers button. Note : The Search for a Dealer by Hierarchy or Number page appears. Select a dealer by hierarchy or by number. Click here for more information. Note : The selected dealer's list of reports appears. The list contains reports that have a report category of DBS Public or Dealership Public. View the reports on the list. To return to your list of reports, click the Cancel View Dealers button.
To view a dealer's list of reports: Click the View Dealers button. Note : The Search for a Dealer by Hierarchy or Number page appears. Select a dealer by hierarchy or by number. Click here for more information. Note : The selected dealer's list of reports appears. The list contains reports that have a report category of DBS Public or Dealership Public. View the reports on the list. To return to your list of reports, click the Cancel View Dealers button.
View a Dealer's List of Reports Note : This task applies to internal users only. To view a dealer's list of reports: Click the View Dealers button. Note : The Search for a Dealer by Hierarchy or Number page appears. Select a dealer by hierarchy or by number. Click here for more information. Note : The selected dealer's list of reports appears. The list contains reports that have a report category of DBS Public or Dealership Public. View the reports on the list. To return to your list of reports, click the Cancel View Dealers button.
To view a dealer's list of reports: Click the View Dealers button. Note : The Search for a Dealer by Hierarchy or Number page appears. Select a dealer by hierarchy or by number. Click here for more information. Note : The selected dealer's list of reports appears. The list contains reports that have a report category of DBS Public or Dealership Public. View the reports on the list. To return to your list of reports, click the Cancel View Dealers button.
View a Dealer's List of Reports Note : This task applies to internal users only. To view a dealer's list of reports: Click the View Dealers button. Note : The Search for a Dealer by Hierarchy or Number page appears. Select a dealer by hierarchy or by number. Click here for more information. Note : The selected dealer's list of reports appears. The list contains reports that have a report category of DBS Public or Dealership Public. View the reports on the list. To return to your list of reports, click the Cancel View Dealers button.
View Overview Information Parts Landing Page Overview Create Parts Order Workflow Create Parts Return Workflow Edit Parts Order Workflow Edit Parts Return Workflow Inquire on the Availability of Parts at the Parts Distribution Centers Workflow Manage Campaign Parts Workflow Manage Custom Search Group Workflow Manage Parts Order Workflow Manage Parts Return Workflow Manage Service Campaign Order Workflow View Parts Master Information Workflow View Parts Order Workflow View Request for Credit Status Workflow View Service Campaign Order Workflow Perform Tasks Perform Common DBS Tasks View Alerts View Announcements and Other News View Overview Information Parts Landing Page Overview Create Parts Order Workflow Create Parts Return Workflow Edit Parts Order Workflow Edit Parts Return Workflow Manage Custom Search Group Workflow Manage Parts Order Workflow Manage Parts Return Workflow View Parts Master Information Workflow View Parts Order Workflow View Request for Credit Status Workflow Perform Tasks Perform Common DBS Tasks View Alerts View Announcements and Other News
Applications Request for Credit RFC Request for Credit Status Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing Request for Credit (RFC) status.
View View Orders View Order View Order View Order View View Order View Orders View Order View Parts Order Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing a submitted parts order. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the View Parts Order Workflow. Create Parts Order Workflow Edit Parts Order Workflow Manage Parts Order Workflow Inquire on the Availability of Parts at the Parts Distribution Centers Workflow
Master Part Master Master View Parts Master Information Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for displaying parts master information. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the View Parts Master Information Workflow. Request Full Parts Master Workflow
Manage Returns Manage Returns Manage Returns Manage Parts Return Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing parts returns. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Parts Return Workflow. Create Parts Return Workflow Modify Parts Return Workflow
Manage Orders Manage Orders Manage Orders Manage Orders Parts Order Management Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing parts orders. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Parts Order workflow. Create Parts Order Workflow Edit Parts Order Workflow Inquire on the Availability of Parts at the Parts Distribution Centers Workflow View Parts Order Workflow Create Parts Order Workflow Edit Parts Order Workflow View Parts Order Workflow
Custom Search Group Manage Custom Search Group Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing custom search groups. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Custom Search Group (Parts Metrics) Workflow. View Parts Metrics Workflow
Edit Return Edit Return Edit Return Edit Parts Return Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for modifying a parts return. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Edit Parts Return Workflow. Create Parts Return Workflow Manage Parts Return Workflow
Edit Edit Order Edit Order Edit SVC Order Edit Order Edit Order Edit SVC Order Edit Order Edit Order Edit Order Edit SVC Order Edit Order Edit Order Edit Parts Order Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for modifying an existing new or open parts order. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Edit Parts Order Workflow. Create Parts Order Workflow Manage Parts Order Workflow Inquire on the Availability of Parts at the Parts Distribution Centers Workflow View Parts Order Workflow
Create Return Create Return Create Return Create Parts Return Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating a parts return. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create Parts Return Workflow. Manage Parts Return Workflow Modify Parts Return Workflow
Create Create Order Create SVC Order Create Order Create Order Create SVC Order Create Order Create Order Create Order Create SVC Order Create Create Order Create Parts Order Workflow *** Nissan Canada Inc. (NCI) recommends dealers create parts orders in an NCI DBS certified dealer management system and then log into NCI DBS to review and submit the order to NCI. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating a parts order. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create Parts Order Workflow. Edit Parts Order Workflow Manage Parts Order Workflow Inquire on the Availability of Parts at the Parts Distribution Centers Workflow View Parts Order Workflow Edit Parts Order Workflow Manage Parts Order Workflow View Parts Order Workflow
View SVC Order View SVC Order View SVC Order View Service Campaign Order Workflow Note : This workflow applies to NNA internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing, approving, or rejecting a Service Campaign (SVC) order. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the View Service Campaign Order Workflow. Manage Service Campaign Order Workflow Manage Campaign Parts Workflow
Applications Request for Credit RFC Request for Credit Status Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing Request for Credit (RFC) status.
View View Orders View Order View Order View Order View View Order View Orders View Order View Parts Order Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing a submitted parts order. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the View Parts Order Workflow. Create Parts Order Workflow Edit Parts Order Workflow Manage Parts Order Workflow Inquire on the Availability of Parts at the Parts Distribution Centers Workflow
Master Part Master Master View Parts Master Information Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for displaying parts master information. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the View Parts Master Information Workflow. Request Full Parts Master Workflow
Approve or Reject SVC Order Reject Approve or Reject SVC Order Approve or Reject SVC Order Manage Service Campaign Order Workflow Note : This workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing a Service Campaign (SVC) order. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Service Campaign Order Workflow. Manage Campaign Parts Workflow View Service Campaign Order Workflow
Manage Returns Manage Returns Manage Returns Manage Parts Return Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing parts returns. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Parts Return Workflow. Create Parts Return Workflow Modify Parts Return Workflow
Manage Orders Manage Orders Manage Orders Manage Orders Parts Order Management Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing parts orders. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Parts Order workflow. Create Parts Order Workflow Edit Parts Order Workflow Inquire on the Availability of Parts at the Parts Distribution Centers Workflow View Parts Order Workflow Create Parts Order Workflow Edit Parts Order Workflow View Parts Order Workflow
Custom Search Group Manage Custom Search Group Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing custom search groups. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Custom Search Group (Parts Metrics) Workflow. View Parts Metrics Workflow
Campaign Campaign Part Management Campaign Parts Campaign Campaign Part Management Campaign Part Management Manage Campaign Parts Workflow Note : This workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing campaign parts. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Campaign Parts Workflow. View Service Campaign Order Workflow Manage Service Campaign Order Workflow
PDC Inquiry VOR Inquiry PDC Inquiry Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for performing a Parts Distribution Center (PDC) inquiry. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Inquire on Parts Distribution Center Workflow. Manage Parts Order Workflow
Edit Return Edit Return Edit Return Edit Parts Return Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for modifying a parts return. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Edit Parts Return Workflow. Create Parts Return Workflow Manage Parts Return Workflow
Edit Edit Order Edit Order Edit SVC Order Edit Order Edit Order Edit SVC Order Edit Order Edit Order Edit Order Edit SVC Order Edit Order Edit Order Edit Parts Order Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for modifying an existing new or open parts order. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Edit Parts Order Workflow. Create Parts Order Workflow Manage Parts Order Workflow Inquire on the Availability of Parts at the Parts Distribution Centers Workflow View Parts Order Workflow
Create Return Create Return Create Return Create Parts Return Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating a parts return. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create Parts Return Workflow. Manage Parts Return Workflow Modify Parts Return Workflow
Create Create Order Create SVC Order Create Order Create Order Create SVC Order Create Order Create Order Create Order Create SVC Order Create Create Order Create Parts Order Workflow *** Nissan Canada Inc. (NCI) recommends dealers create parts orders in an NCI DBS certified dealer management system and then log into NCI DBS to review and submit the order to NCI. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating a parts order. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create Parts Order Workflow. Edit Parts Order Workflow Manage Parts Order Workflow Inquire on the Availability of Parts at the Parts Distribution Centers Workflow View Parts Order Workflow Edit Parts Order Workflow Manage Parts Order Workflow View Parts Order Workflow
To export Parts Return Management information: Click the Export button. Select the output format. Note : The File Download dialog appears. Click the Save button and save the file to your local drive. You can filter or sort the data if you export the file in the Microsoft ® Excel ® format.
Export Parts Return Information To export Parts Return Management information: Click the Export button. Select the output format. Note : The File Download dialog appears. Click the Save button and save the file to your local drive. You can filter or sort the data if you export the file in the Microsoft ® Excel ® format.
Manage Returns Manage Returns Manage Returns Manage Parts Return Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing parts returns. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Parts Return Workflow. Create Parts Return Workflow Modify Parts Return Workflow
View Overview Information System Error Page Overview Perform Tasks Perform Common DBS Tasks Report System Errors Show the Stack Trace
Change User Report Page Overview Purpose Use the Change User Report page to select a user when you select the Change User option in Report Writer. Description The content area of the Change User Report page displays the following sections: List of Target Users - Displays the names of users who own report definitions Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Change User Report page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Select a User to Receive Report Definitions Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Change User Report page. Change User in Report Writer Workflow Page Preview
Change User Report Page Overview Purpose Use the Change User Report page to select a user when you select the Change User option in Report Writer. Description The content area of the Change User Report page displays the following sections: List of Target Users - Displays the names of users who own report definitions Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Change User Report page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Select a User to Receive Report Definitions Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Change User Report page. Change User in Report Writer Workflow Page Preview
Change User Report Page Overview Purpose Use the Change User Report page to select a user when you select the Change User option in Report Writer. Description The content area of the Change User Report page displays the following sections: List of Target Users - Displays the names of users who own report definitions Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Change User Report page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Select a User to Receive Report Definitions Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Change User Report page. Change User in Report Writer Workflow Page Preview
Change User Report Page Overview Purpose Use the Change User Report page to select a user when you select the Change User option in Report Writer. Description The content area of the Change User Report page displays the following sections: List of Target Users - Displays the names of users who own report definitions Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Change User Report page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Select a User to Receive Report Definitions Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Change User Report page. Change User in Report Writer Workflow Page Preview
Change User Report Page Overview Purpose Use the Change User Report page to select a user when you select the Change User option in Report Writer. Description The content area of the Change User Report page displays the following sections: List of Target Users - Displays the names of users who own report definitions Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Change User Report page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Select a User to Receive Report Definitions Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Change User Report page. Change User in Report Writer Workflow Page Preview
To change the user in Report Writer: Click the General Action button. From the General Action menu, select the Change User option. Note : The Search for a Dealer by Hierarchy or Number page appears. Click here for more information about searching by hierarchy or by number. Note : The Change User Report page appears. From the list of users, select a user. Click the Submit button, or click the Cancel button to close without selecting a user. To cancel the change of user, click the Cancel Change User button. Note : This task applies to internal users only.
Change User in Report Note : This task applies to internal users only. To change the user in Report Writer: Click the General Action button. From the General Action menu, select the Change User option. Note : The Search for a Dealer by Hierarchy or Number page appears. Click here for more information about searching by hierarchy or by number. Note : The Change User Report page appears. From the list of users, select a user. Click the Submit button, or click the Cancel button to close without selecting a user. Note : The selected user's list of reports appears. Note : After you change users, you can view, copy, transfer, replicate, or generate the reports on the list. To cancel the change of user, click the Cancel Change User button. To change the user in Report Writer: Click the General Action button. From the General Action menu, select the Change User option. Note : The Search for a Dealer by Hierarchy or Number page appears. Click here for more information about searching by hierarchy or by number. Note : The Change User Report page appears. From the list of users, select a user. Click the Submit button, or click the Cancel button to close without selecting a user. Note : The selected user's list of reports appears. Note : After you change users, you can view, copy, transfer, replicate, or generate the reports on the list. To cancel the change of user, click the Cancel Change User button.
To change the user in Report Writer: Click the General Action button. From the General Action menu, select the Change User option. Note : The Search for a Dealer by Hierarchy or Number page appears. Click here for more information about searching by hierarchy or by number. Note : The Change User Report page appears. From the list of users, select a user. Click the Submit button, or click the Cancel button to close without selecting a user. To cancel the change of user, click the Cancel Change User button. Note : This task applies to internal users only.
Change User in Report Note : This task applies to internal users only. To change the user in Report Writer: Click the General Action button. From the General Action menu, select the Change User option. Note : The Search for a Dealer by Hierarchy or Number page appears. Click here for more information about searching by hierarchy or by number. Note : The Change User Report page appears. From the list of users, select a user. Click the Submit button, or click the Cancel button to close without selecting a user. Note : The selected user's list of reports appears. Note : After you change users, you can view, copy, transfer, replicate, or generate the reports on the list. To cancel the change of user, click the Cancel Change User button. To change the user in Report Writer: Click the General Action button. From the General Action menu, select the Change User option. Note : The Search for a Dealer by Hierarchy or Number page appears. Click here for more information about searching by hierarchy or by number. Note : The Change User Report page appears. From the list of users, select a user. Click the Submit button, or click the Cancel button to close without selecting a user. Note : The selected user's list of reports appears. Note : After you change users, you can view, copy, transfer, replicate, or generate the reports on the list. To cancel the change of user, click the Cancel Change User button.
To change the user in Report Writer: Click the General Action button. From the General Action menu, select the Change User option. Note : The Search for a Dealer by Hierarchy or Number page appears. Click here for more information about searching by hierarchy or by number. Note : The Change User Report page appears. From the list of users, select a user. Click the Submit button, or click the Cancel button to close without selecting a user. To cancel the change of user, click the Cancel Change User button. Note : This task applies to internal users only.
Change User in Report Note : This task applies to internal users only. To change the user in Report Writer: Click the General Action button. From the General Action menu, select the Change User option. Note : The Search for a Dealer by Hierarchy or Number page appears. Click here for more information about searching by hierarchy or by number. Note : The Change User Report page appears. From the list of users, select a user. Click the Submit button, or click the Cancel button to close without selecting a user. Note : The selected user's list of reports appears. Note : After you change users, you can view, copy, transfer, replicate, or generate the reports on the list. To cancel the change of user, click the Cancel Change User button. To change the user in Report Writer: Click the General Action button. From the General Action menu, select the Change User option. Note : The Search for a Dealer by Hierarchy or Number page appears. Click here for more information about searching by hierarchy or by number. Note : The Change User Report page appears. From the list of users, select a user. Click the Submit button, or click the Cancel button to close without selecting a user. Note : The selected user's list of reports appears. Note : After you change users, you can view, copy, transfer, replicate, or generate the reports on the list. To cancel the change of user, click the Cancel Change User button.
To change the user in Report Writer: Click the General Action button. From the General Action menu, select the Change User option. Note : The Search for a Dealer by Hierarchy or Number page appears. Click here for more information about searching by hierarchy or by number. Note : The Change User Report page appears. From the list of users, select a user. Click the Submit button, or click the Cancel button to close without selecting a user. To cancel the change of user, click the Cancel Change User button. Note : This task applies to internal users only.
Change User in Report Note : This task applies to internal users only. To change the user in Report Writer: Click the General Action button. From the General Action menu, select the Change User option. Note : The Search for a Dealer by Hierarchy or Number page appears. Click here for more information about searching by hierarchy or by number. Note : The Change User Report page appears. From the list of users, select a user. Click the Submit button, or click the Cancel button to close without selecting a user. Note : The selected user's list of reports appears. Note : After you change users, you can view, copy, transfer, replicate, or generate the reports on the list. To cancel the change of user, click the Cancel Change User button. To change the user in Report Writer: Click the General Action button. From the General Action menu, select the Change User option. Note : The Search for a Dealer by Hierarchy or Number page appears. Click here for more information about searching by hierarchy or by number. Note : The Change User Report page appears. From the list of users, select a user. Click the Submit button, or click the Cancel button to close without selecting a user. Note : The selected user's list of reports appears. Note : After you change users, you can view, copy, transfer, replicate, or generate the reports on the list. To cancel the change of user, click the Cancel Change User button.
To change the user in Report Writer: Click the General Action button. From the General Action menu, select the Change User option. Note : The Search for a Dealer by Hierarchy or Number page appears. Click here for more information about searching by hierarchy or by number. Note : The Change User Report page appears. From the list of users, select a user. Click the Submit button, or click the Cancel button to close without selecting a user. To cancel the change of user, click the Cancel Change User button. Note : This task applies to internal users only.
Change User in Report Note : This task applies to internal users only. To change the user in Report Writer: Click the General Action button. From the General Action menu, select the Change User option. Note : The Search for a Dealer by Hierarchy or Number page appears. Click here for more information about searching by hierarchy or by number. Note : The Change User Report page appears. From the list of users, select a user. Click the Submit button, or click the Cancel button to close without selecting a user. Note : The selected user's list of reports appears. Note : After you change users, you can view, copy, transfer, replicate, or generate the reports on the list. To cancel the change of user, click the Cancel Change User button. To change the user in Report Writer: Click the General Action button. From the General Action menu, select the Change User option. Note : The Search for a Dealer by Hierarchy or Number page appears. Click here for more information about searching by hierarchy or by number. Note : The Change User Report page appears. From the list of users, select a user. Click the Submit button, or click the Cancel button to close without selecting a user. Note : The selected user's list of reports appears. Note : After you change users, you can view, copy, transfer, replicate, or generate the reports on the list. To cancel the change of user, click the Cancel Change User button.
Note : This task is performed by internal users only. Note : There is no way to completely deactivate tracing. You can change the logging level to modify the level of tracing that is performed. For information about changing the logging level, click here .
Deactivate Tracing Note : You cannot completely deactivate tracing. You can change the logging level to modify the level of tracing that is performed. For information about changing the logging level, click here .
To access OMS from the RDR Vehicle page to view vehicle detail: Click the Vehicle Detail button at the bottom of the RDR Vehicle page. Note : The OMS Vehicle Detail option is available only to users who have access to the OMS application. Note : The Vehicle Detail opens in a separate window. After viewing the Vehicle Detail, click the Close button to close the Vehicle Detail window and return to DBS .
View Vehicle Details in OMS To view vehicle details in OMS from the RDR Vehicle page: Click the Vehicle Detail button at the bottom of the RDR Vehicle page. Note : The OMS Vehicle Detail option will only be available to users who have access to the OMS application. Note : The Vehicle Detail opens in a separate window. After viewing the Vehicle Detail, click the Close button to close the Vehicle Detail window and return to DBS .
Processes RDR RDR RDR a Vehicle Workflow Note : This workflow is for NNA users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for retail delivery reporting (RDR) or editing the sale of a vehicle. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Report or Edit the Sale of a Vehicle workflow. Vehicle Inventory Workflow Inventory Search Workflow View RDR History Workflow
MRW: Internal user only. Done from the parts metrics page. To edit a custom search group: Select the desired group. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the View / Edit option. To add dealers, from the Available Dealers list, select one or more dealers. Note : To select multiple individual items, press and hold the CTRL key. To select multiple items, press and hold the SHIFT key while selecting items. Note : If the group you are editing was created using the district or region search range, use the drop-down lists to edit your selection. Click the >> icon. Note : A custom group can contain no more than 20 dealers. To remove dealers, from the Selected Dealers list, select one or more dealers. Click the << icon. Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. You can view the list of dealers by name only or by name and number. To display by dealer name only, click the Dealer Name link. To display by dealer number and dealer name, click the Dealer Code link. You can also view the list of dealers by letter. To display all dealers that start with a specific letter, click the link for the desired letter.
MRW: Internal user only. Done from the parts metrics page. Edit a Custom Search Group To edit a custom search group: From the custom group list, select the desired group. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the View / Edit option. To add dealers, from the Available Dealers list, select one or more dealers. Note : To select multiple individual items, press and hold the CTRL key. To select multiple items, press and hold the SHIFT key while selecting items. Note : If the group you are editing was created using the district or region search range, use the drop-down lists to edit your selection. Click the >> icon. Note : A custom group can contain no more than 20 dealers. To remove dealers, from the Selected Dealers list, select one or more dealers. Click the << icon. Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. You can view the Available Dealers list by name only or by name and number. To display by dealer name only, click the Dealer Name link. To display by dealer number and dealer name, click the Dealer Code link. You can also view the Available Dealers list by letter. To display all dealers that start with a specific letter, click the link for the desired letter.
Custom Search Group Manage Custom Search Group Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing custom search groups. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Custom Search Group (Parts Metrics) Workflow. View Parts Metrics Workflow
Definitions for Fields on the Parts Order Management Page The table below lists the fields, buttons, and links that appear on the Parts Order Management Page The information which appears in the Parts Order Detail section at the bottom of the page varies by order status. Click the order status you wish to review for more information. Field, Button, or Link Description Filter By The Filter by section of the page allows you to input filter criteria to reduce the amount of information displayed in the summary area of the page. Note : If you select a primary filter, you may be required to select a secondary filter. For example: if you filter by status, you will be required to select the status you wish to view. Available filters on the Parts Order Management page include: ASP number Dealer reference number Error flag Order date Order number Order type Part number Status Status date Warning flag Print The Print button allows you to print the summary page as it is displayed. If you have applied filter criteria, only those records displayed will be printed. Note : DBS generates a PDF version of the displayed information. Follow your browser-specific instructions to print or save the PDF file. PDC Inquiry button (Nissan Only) Click the PDC Inquiry button to open the PDC Inquiry page, which allows you to search for parts and view quantities available by PDC. Create New Order button Click the Create New Order button to begin a new solicited, stock, vehicle off road, service campaign, or supplemental parts order. Note : See the Order Type field description for additional information about parts order types. Export button Click the Export button to export a Microsoft ® Excel ® file of the summary data. If you have applied filter criteria, only those records displayed will be exported. Reports button Click the Reports button to access the Parts application Host reports or Report Writer, which allows you to create custom reports. Action Icon The Action icon allows you to perform authorized actions on a selected item. Note : Options which are not available to you appear in gray. Order Date The Order Date is the date on which the order was created. Dealer Ref # The Dealer Ref # (dealer reference number) is a dealer-created reference number the uniquely identifies a parts order. Note : The dealer reference number may contain up to six alpha-numeric characters. Order # The Order # (order number) is a DBS -created unique reference number that uniquely identifies a parts order. The order number is assigned when a parts order is submitted for processing. Order Type The Order Type field displays the three-character code which identifies the order type. The parts order type codes are: ASR - Automatic Stock Replenishment CSC - Customer Special Care EMP - Employee LTR - LTR MAN - Manual NCS - No Cost Sale SOL - Solicited Order SPC - Special STK - Stock Order SUP - Supplemental Order SVC - Service Campaign Order TRN - Transfer VOR - Vehicle Off Road Need description of each order type. Status The Status field displays the most recent status of the parts order. The parts order status types are: Allocated Allocated-Part.BO Approved Backorder Canceled Completed Completed-Part.BO Dealer to Dealer Processing In-Picking In-Picking-Part.BO Large Order Hold New Open Partial Allocated Partial Backorder Partial Shipped Pre Allocated Shipped Submitted Suspended Need description of each status type. Status Date The Status Date field displays on which the most recent status was recorded.
Create Parts Return Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating a parts return. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create Parts Return Workflow. Manage Parts Return Workflow Modify Parts Return Workflow
View Overview Information View Parts Return Page Manage Parts Return Workflow Perform Tasks Perform Common DBS Tasks View a Submitted Parts Return Perform Common DBS Tasks View a Submitted Parts Return
Manage Returns Manage Returns Manage Returns Manage Parts Return Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing parts returns. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Parts Return Workflow. Create Parts Return Workflow Modify Parts Return Workflow
View Pre-RDR Reporting Workflow Note : The Pre-RDR Reporting workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing pre-RDR reporting information. Related Workflows The following workflows may have similar tasks in common with the Viewing Pre-RDR Reporting workflow. Report Sale of a Vehicle (RDR) Workflow View RDR History Workflow View RDR History Workflow
To open the One Study Result page: As desired, use the Filter By section to filter the list of studies to make it easier to locate the study you want to view. Click here for more information. In the ID column, click the desired study ID link. Note: The One Study Result page opens that contains information about the study.
Open the One Study Result Page To open the One Study Result page: As desired, use the Filter By section to filter the list of studies to make it easier to locate the study you want to view. Note : Click here for more information. In the ID column, click the desired study ID link. Note : The One Study Result page opens that contains information about the study.
Early Detection System (EDS) EDS: Study Dashboard Processes EDS: Study Dashboard Study Study Dashboard Technical Service Bulletin (TSB) Create or Modify a Study Workflow Note : The Create or Modify a Study workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for defining or modifying a study that integrates appointment and repair order data collected by the Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Define or Modify a Study Workflow. Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow View One Study Result Workflow
Dashboard Early Detection System (EDS) EDS: Study Dashboard Processes EDS: Study Dashboard Study Study Dashboard View View One Study Result Workflow Note : The View One Study Result workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing a study that integrates appointment and repair order data collected by the Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the View One Study Result workflow. Define or Modify Study Workflow Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow
Dashboard Early Detection System (EDS) Hold Status Processes Study View Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow Note: The Manage Early Detection System Studies workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing Early Detection System (EDS) studies that integrate appointment and repair order data collected by the Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow. Define or Modify a Study Workflow View One Study Result Workflow View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow
To hold a vehicle or ignore a request to hold a vehicle: In the applicable row, move your mouse point over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Detail option. Note : If the alert is for an informational or hold study, the alert message appears. Select the study alert you want to view. Note : DBS indicates if the vehicle has already been put on hold. View the alert detail. To place the vehicle on hold, click the Hold button, or click the Ignore button to ignore the request to hold the vehicle. Note : If the alert is for an informational study, the Hold and Ignore buttons are dimmed and unavailable. Click Close to close the message without indicating to hold or ignore the request. If an option is not available, that option is not displayed. The study alerts are color-coded. Alerts concerning vehicle hold studies or vehicle hold studies combined with informational studies are highlighted in red. Alerts concerning informational-only studies or technical service bulletins (TSBs) with keywords that match the repair order are highlighted in yellow.
Hold a Vehicle or Ignore a Hold Request To hold a vehicle or ignore a request to hold a vehicle: In the applicable row, move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Detail option. Note : If the alert is for an informational or hold study, the alert message appears. See below for more information. The study alerts are color-coded. Alerts concerning vehicle hold studies or vehicle hold studies combined with informational studies are highlighted in red. Alerts concerning informational only studies or Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) with keywords that match the repair order (RO) are highlighted in yellow. Service Alert Detail Select the study alert you want to view. Note : DBS indicates if the vehicle has already been put on hold. View the alert detail. To place the vehicle on hold, click the Hold button, or click the Ignore button to ignore the request to hold the vehicle. Note : If the alert is for an informational study, the Hold and Ignore buttons are dimmed and unavailable. To close the message without indicating to hold or ignore the request, click the Close button.
Dashboard Early Detection System (EDS) EDS: Service Dashboard EDS: Service Dashboard Service Dashboard Study Technical Service Bulletin (TSB) View the Service Dashboard Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing the Service Dashboard. You may view study alerts generated regarding vehicles that meet the criteria of informational or hold studies or technical service bulletins. You may also view open repair orders or National Service History.
To search for information on the Parts Return Summary page: In one of the search fields, type one or more characters contained within the information you want to find. Note : DBS automatically updates the summary display as you type to show only those items which contain the characters you entered. When available, use a quick filter to filter a column based on the available options. To sort the data, click the sort icons to sort the information in ascending order. Click the sort icons a second time to sort the data in descending order.
Search for Information on the Parts Return Summary Page To search for information on the Parts Return Summary page: In one of the search fields, type one or more characters contained within the information you want to find. Note : DBS automatically updates the summary display as you type to show only those items which contain the characters you entered. When available, use a quick filter to filter a column based on the available options. To sort the data, click the sort icons to sort the information in ascending order. Click the sort icons a second time to sort the data in descending order.
To open the View User Permissions page: Select the user. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the View Permissions option. Note : The View Permissions page appears.
Open the View User Permissions Page To open the View User Permissions page: Select the user. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the View Permissions option. Note : The View Permissions page appears.
SVC Order Management Page Overview Note : The SVC Order Management page applies to internal users only. Access the SVC Order Management page by clicking the SVC Order Management link on the Parts menu. Purpose Use the SVC (Service Campaign) Order Management page to view, approve, and reject parts orders related to service campaigns. SVC orders pending approval contain parts that are on the Campaign Parts list, as validated by the system during order submission. Note : This page is for internal users only (Countermeasure Service Parts Procurement group). Description The content area of the SVC Order Management page displays the following sections: Filter by - Allows you to filter the information to display only the records that match your criteria Page Navigation - Indicates the total number orders in your list and provides navigation to other pages, if multiple pages exist (more than 200 records) Service Campaign Order Summary - Displays general information for all records on the page Service Campaign Order Detail - Displays specific information for a selected record Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the SVC Order Management page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Access Reports Add Comments to an SVC Order Add Comments to Multiple SVC Orders Approve an SVC Order Approve Multiple SVC Orders Export SVC Order Management Information Filter the SVC Order Management Summary Open the View SVC Order Page Reject an SVC Order Reject Multiple SVC Orders View SVC Order Management Summary and Detail View Warning or Error Messages Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflow are performed on the SVC Order Management page. Manage Service Campaign Order Workflow Page Preview
Monitor Transaction Page Overview Purpose Use the Monitor Transaction page to view information about the processing of transactions within the Dealer Business System (DBS) . DBS provides the ability to search for and review transactions including information about the transaction creator, any error codes, and system response time. Description The content area of the Monitor Transaction page displays the following sections: Search Criteria - Allows you to specify search criteria to limit the results displayed in the summary area Summary - Displays general information for all records on the page Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Monitor Transaction page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Search for and Monitor Transactions Page Preview
To complete the Expenses section of a claim on either the Edit/Create Warranty Claim page or the Quick Entry Warranty Claim page: From the Exp Code-Exp Description drop-down list, select an expense code. Note : Depending on the expense code, DBS displays a window for additional information. Enter the expense details and then click the Add icon to add the expense. When you have finished adding expense details, click the Save button. In the Req Amount field, type the requested monetary expense amount. Click the Add icon to add the expense to the list of expenses. Note : DBS populates the Coverage 1 Code and Amt fields. By default, the Coverage 1 Code is the coverage code you selected in the Claim Information section and Coverage 1 Amt is the amount you requested in the Requested Amount field. You can edit these fields as needed.
Complete the Expenses Section of a Claim To complete the Expenses section of a claim: From the Exp Code-Exp Description drop-down list, select an expense code. Note : Depending on the expense code, DBS displays a window for additional information. Enter the expense details and click the Add icon to add the expense. When you have finished adding expense details, click the Save button. In the Req Amount field, type the requested monetary expense amount. Click the Add icon to add the expense to the list of expenses. Note : DBS populates the Coverage 1 Code and Amt fields. By default, the Coverage 1 Code is the coverage code you selected in the Claim Information section and Coverage 1 Amt is the amount you requested in the Requested Amount field. You can edit these fields as needed. Edit Information for Expenses To edit information for expenses: Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon for the line you want to edit. From the Action menu, select the Edit Line option and make any necessary changes to the selected line. Note : Depending on the expense code, DBS additionally provides the "Edit Rental" or "Edit VOR" options in the Action menu. Select either of these options to make changes to the rental or VOR expense information. To split payment for an expense using different expense codes, update the Code and Amt fields for Coverage 1, Coverage 2, and Coverage 3 as applicable. Note : The payment amounts split among the Coverage Amt fields must be equal to the requested amount in the Requested Amount field. To save your changes to the expense line, move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Save option. Note : In the Summary section of the claim, you may need to click the Refresh Claim Total link to see the updated expense amounts.
Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Edit Warranty Claims Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Warranty Claims Edit or Create Warranty Claims Workflow *** Nissan Canada Inc. (NCI) recommends dealers create Warranty Claims in an NCI DBS certified dealer management system and then log into NCI DBS to review, validate and submit the claim to NCI. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating and editing claims. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Warranty Claims Workflow or View Warranty Claims Workflow. Manage Warranty Claims Workflow View Warranty Claims Workflow
To complete the Expenses section of a claim on either the Edit/Create Warranty Claim page or the Quick Entry Warranty Claim page: From the Exp Code-Exp Description drop-down list, select an expense code. Note : Depending on the expense code, DBS displays a window for additional information. Enter the expense details and then click the Add icon to add the expense. When you have finished adding expense details, click the Save button. In the Req Amount field, type the requested monetary expense amount. Click the Add icon to add the expense to the list of expenses. Note : DBS populates the Coverage 1 Code and Amt fields. By default, the Coverage 1 Code is the coverage code you selected in the Claim Information section and Coverage 1 Amt is the amount you requested in the Requested Amount field. You can edit these fields as needed.
Complete the Expenses Section of a Claim To complete the Expenses section of a claim: From the Exp Code-Exp Description drop-down list, select an expense code. Note : Depending on the expense code, DBS displays a window for additional information. Enter the expense details and click the Add icon to add the expense. When you have finished adding expense details, click the Save button. In the Req Amount field, type the requested monetary expense amount. Click the Add icon to add the expense to the list of expenses. Note : DBS populates the Coverage 1 Code and Amt fields. By default, the Coverage 1 Code is the coverage code you selected in the Claim Information section and Coverage 1 Amt is the amount you requested in the Requested Amount field. You can edit these fields as needed. Edit Information for Expenses To edit information for expenses: Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon for the line you want to edit. From the Action menu, select the Edit Line option and make any necessary changes to the selected line. Note : Depending on the expense code, DBS additionally provides the "Edit Rental" or "Edit VOR" options in the Action menu. Select either of these options to make changes to the rental or VOR expense information. To split payment for an expense using different expense codes, update the Code and Amt fields for Coverage 1, Coverage 2, and Coverage 3 as applicable. Note : The payment amounts split among the Coverage Amt fields must be equal to the requested amount in the Requested Amount field. To save your changes to the expense line, move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Save option. Note : In the Summary section of the claim, you may need to click the Refresh Claim Total link to see the updated expense amounts.
Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Edit Warranty Claims Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Warranty Claims Edit or Create Warranty Claims Workflow *** Nissan Canada Inc. (NCI) recommends dealers create Warranty Claims in an NCI DBS certified dealer management system and then log into NCI DBS to review, validate and submit the claim to NCI. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating and editing claims. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Warranty Claims Workflow or View Warranty Claims Workflow. Manage Warranty Claims Workflow View Warranty Claims Workflow
To view NSH (National Service History) from the Express Entry Warranty Claim page: At the bottom of the page, click the NSH button. Note : The National Service History window opens. Click Print to print the NSH report, or click Close to return to the previous screen. You can view NSH information regardless of the status of a claim.
View National Service History from the Express Entry Warranty Claim Page To view NSH (National Service History) for a vehicle from the Express Entry Warranty Claim page: At the bottom of the page, click the NSH button. Note : The National Service History window opens. Click Print to print the NSH report, or click Close to return to the previous screen. You can view NSH information regardless of the status of a claim.
Perform Tasks Access My Profile Access NNAnet (Dealer Portal) Access the Contact Us Page Access the Copyright Access the Custom Search Group Page Access the Event Calendar Access the NNAnet / Dealer Portal to View My Documents Access the Privacy Policy Page Access the Site Map Access the Summary Page Display Configuration Window Add a Link to My Links Browse the Site Map Change the Brand Change the Display Language Change the Text Display Size Contact the DBS Help Desk by Email Contact the DBS Help Desk by Live Chat Contact the DCS Help Desk by Phone Create a Summary Page Display Definition Delete a Link from My Links Delete a Summary Page Display Definition Edit a Link in My Links Edit a Summary Page Display Definition Log Out of DBS Navigate Using a Link in My Links Print Information Rename a Summary Page Display Definition Search the Site Search the Site Map Select a Dealer Sort Links in My Links Use a Summary Page Display Definition Use the Breadcrumbs Use the Menu Tabs View Alerts View Announcements and Other News View Context-Sensitive Help View Copyright and Trademark Information View Full Help View Privacy Information View Warning or Error Messages Access My Profile Access NNAnet (Dealer Portal) Access the Contact Us Page Access the Copyright Access the Custom Search Group Page Access the Event Calendar Access the NNAnet / Dealer Portal to View My Documents Access the Privacy Policy Page Access the Site Map Add a Link to My Links Browse the Site Map Change the Brand Change the Display Language Change the Text Display Size Contact the DBS Help Desk by Email Contact the DBS Help Desk by Live Chat Contact the DBS Help Desk by Phone Create a Summary Page Display Definition Delete a Link from My Links Delete a Summary Page Display Definition Edit a Link in My Links Edit a Summary Page Display Definition Log Out of DBS Navigate Using a Link in My Links Open the Summary Page Display Configuration Window Print Information Rename a Summary Page Display Definition Search the Site Search the Site Map Select a Dealer Sort Links in My Links Use a Summary Page Display Definition Use the Breadcrumbs Use the Menu Tabs View Alerts View Announcements and Other News View Context-Sensitive Help View Copyright and Trademark Information View Full Help View Privacy Information View Warning or Error Messages
To copy user permissions: Click the Select radio button for the user or users to whom you want to copy permissions. Note : If the user you want to copy permissions to is an inactive user, you must reactivate the user before copying permissions. Note : If you are an internal user, you can click a page number or click the forward or backward arrow to navigate from page to page. Click the Copy button. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm, or click the No button to close the window without confirming. Note : The application copies all permissions to the selected target user(s), regardless of position.
Copy User Permissions To copy user permissions: Click the Select check box(es) for the user or users to whom you want to copy permissions. Note : If the user you want to copy permissions to is an inactive user, you must reactivate the user before copying permissions. Click the Copy button. Note : A confirmation window appears. Click the Yes button to confirm, or click the No button to close the window without confirming. Note : The application copies all permissions to the selected target user(s), regardless of position.
To open the Create Announcement page: Click the Create button.
Open the Create Announcement Page To open the Create Announcement page: Click the Create button.
View Overview Information Search a Dealer by Hierarchy or Number Page Overview Perform Tasks Perform Common DBS Tasks Search for a Dealer by Hierarchy Search for a Dealer by Number Perform Common DBS Tasks Search for a Dealer by Hierarchy Search for a Dealer by Number
An advanced search is a way to access information more directly by entering in specific keywords and phrases. There are times when users may need to perform a more detailed search to locate specific information that cannot be easily accessed from a basic search or via the Site Map. To perform an advanced search: In the Text field, type the text for which you want to search. If desired, in the Author's Name field, type the author for which you want to search. If desired, in the Date Range field, select the date from which you want to begin your search. If desired, in the To field, select the date from which you want to end your search. Note : Menu links do not have authors or a date range associated with them. If desired, select either the Menu Link , Alerts , Announcements , or Calendar Events categories checkbox. Note : If you do not select a category, search results will display all categories that match your criteria. Click the Search icon. Note : To clear all criteria, you click the Clear icon. To return to the basic search page, click the Basic Search button. The search function searches for the following items: approved announcements, approved alerts, approved calendar events, and menu items (names of applications, functions, and links that appear on the DBS site map).
Perform an Advanced Search To perform an advanced search: In the Text field, type the text for which you want to search. If desired, in the Author's Name field, type the author for which you want to search. If desired, in the Date Range field, select the date from which you want to begin your search. If desired, in the To field, select the date from which you want to end your search. Note : Menu links do not have authors or a date range associated with them. If desired, select either the Menu Link, Alerts, Announcements, or Calendar Events categories checkbox. Note : If you do not select a category, search results will display all categories that match your criteria. Click the Search icon. Note : To clear all criteria, you click the Clear icon. To return to the basic search page, click the Basic Search button. The search function searches for the following items: approved announcements, approved alerts, approved calendar events, and menu items (names of applications, functions, and links that appear on the DBS site map).
{00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000} To resend a notification: Select a notification. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. Select the Resend menu option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. The resend menu option is only available for notifications that have a "Sent" status.
Resend a Notification {00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000} To resend a notification: Select a notification. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Resend option. Note: A confirmation message appears. Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. The resend menu option is only available for notifications that have a "Sent" status.
To create or edit a standard operation group: In the Standard Operation Group field, type the name of the group. In the Start Date field, type or use the calendar to select a beginning date for the group. In the End Date field, type or use the calendar to select an ending date for the group. Select the Re-Run Flag checkbox, as needed. Note : Do not set the re-run flag if you are making other changes to the code. The system automatically sets the re-run flag whenever you create or edit a standard operation code. Add key words. Click here for more information. Add PNCs, as needed. Click here for more information. Add operation codes, as needed. Click here for more information. Click the Save button, or click the Cancel button to close the window without saving. Note : The new or edited code appears on the Standard Operation Code Summary page.
Create or Edit a Standard Operation Group To create or edit a standard operation group: In the Standard Operation Group field, type the name of the group. In the Start Date field, type or use the calendar to select a beginning date for the group. In the End Date field, type or use the calendar to select an ending date for the group. Select the Re-Run Flag checkbox, as needed. Note : Do not set the re-run flag if you are making other changes to the code. The system automatically sets the re-run flag whenever you create or edit a standard operation code. Add key words. Click here for more information. Add PNCs, as needed. Click here for more information. Add operation codes, as needed. Click here for more information. Click the Save button, or click the Cancel button to close the window without saving. Note : The new or edited code appears on the Standard Operation Code Summary page. In the Standard Operation Group field, type the name of the group. In the Start Date field, type or use the calendar to select a beginning date for the group. In the End Date field, type or use the calendar to select an ending date for the group. Select the Re-Run Flag checkbox, as needed. Note : Do not set the re-run flag if you are making other changes to the code. The system automatically sets the re-run flag whenever you create or edit a standard operation code. Add key words. Click here for more information. Add operation codes, as needed. Click here for more information. Click the Save button, or click the Cancel button to close the window without saving. Note : The new or edited code appears on the Standard Operation Code Summary page.
Standard Operation Codes Standard Operation Code Standard Operation Codes Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating or editing standard operation groups and codes. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes workflow. Manage Dealer Operation Codes Workflow Manage Standard Operation Categories Workflow Manage Standard Operation Codes Workflow
To create or edit a standard operation group: In the Standard Operation Group field, type the name of the group. In the Start Date field, type or use the calendar to select a beginning date for the group. In the End Date field, type or use the calendar to select an ending date for the group. Select the Re-Run Flag checkbox, as needed. Note : Do not set the re-run flag if you are making other changes to the code. The system automatically sets the re-run flag whenever you create or edit a standard operation code. Add key words. Click here for more information. Add PNCs, as needed. Click here for more information. Add operation codes, as needed. Click here for more information. Click the Save button, or click the Cancel button to close the window without saving. Note : The new or edited code appears on the Standard Operation Code Summary page.
Create or Edit a Standard Operation Group To create or edit a standard operation group: In the Standard Operation Group field, type the name of the group. In the Start Date field, type or use the calendar to select a beginning date for the group. In the End Date field, type or use the calendar to select an ending date for the group. Select the Re-Run Flag checkbox, as needed. Note : Do not set the re-run flag if you are making other changes to the code. The system automatically sets the re-run flag whenever you create or edit a standard operation code. Add key words. Click here for more information. Add PNCs, as needed. Click here for more information. Add operation codes, as needed. Click here for more information. Click the Save button, or click the Cancel button to close the window without saving. Note : The new or edited code appears on the Standard Operation Code Summary page. In the Standard Operation Group field, type the name of the group. In the Start Date field, type or use the calendar to select a beginning date for the group. In the End Date field, type or use the calendar to select an ending date for the group. Select the Re-Run Flag checkbox, as needed. Note : Do not set the re-run flag if you are making other changes to the code. The system automatically sets the re-run flag whenever you create or edit a standard operation code. Add key words. Click here for more information. Add operation codes, as needed. Click here for more information. Click the Save button, or click the Cancel button to close the window without saving. Note : The new or edited code appears on the Standard Operation Code Summary page.
Standard Operation Codes Standard Operation Code Standard Operation Codes Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating or editing standard operation groups and codes. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes workflow. Manage Dealer Operation Codes Workflow Manage Standard Operation Categories Workflow Manage Standard Operation Codes Workflow
Campaign Report Page Overview Purpose Use the Campaign Report page to view a list of all vehicles impacted by open service campaigns. Description The content area of the Campaign Report page displays the following sections: Filter by - Allows you to filter the information to display only the records that match your criteria Page navigation bar - Allows you to navigate from page to page, if multiple pages exist Vehicle Campaign List - Displays general information for all records on the page Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Campaign Report page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Export Campaign Report Information Filter the Campaign Report Page Search for Information by Campaign ID Page Preview
Search Results Page Overview Purpose Use the Search Results page to search for specific text in approved announcements, alerts, calendar events, and menu items. Enter criteria in the Search Site field, then click the Search icon next to the Search Site field to access the Search Results page. From this page you can review search results or conduct an advance search query. The Advanced Search function takes you to a screen where you can enter additional criteria to search for the author who created announcements, alerts and calendar events as well as dates when they were approved. Menu links do not have an author or date range associated with them. Description The content area of the Search Results page displays the following sections: Criteria - Allows you to enter the text for which you want to search Results - Displays the results for the criteria you entered Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Search Results page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Perform an Advanced Search View Search Results Perform an Advanced Search View Search Results Page Preview
Search for a Dealer by Hierarchy or Number Page Overview Purpose Internal users must specify a dealer to work with on pages that display summary data for a dealership such as the Parts Order Management page or the Vehicle Inventory page. The Search for a Dealer by Hierarchy or Number page allows internal users to select the dealership they want to work with. Description The content area of the Search a Dealer by Hierarchy or Number page displays the following section: Choose one of the two available options below - Allows you to search for a dealer based on the hierarchy (affiliate, division, region, area, district, and dealer) or dealer number Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Search a Dealer by Hierarchy or Number page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Search for a Dealer by Hierarchy Search for a Dealer by Number Search for a Dealer by Hierarchy Search for a Dealer by Number Page Preview
To create a summary page display definition: In the Please input new custom page definition name for creation field, type a name. Click the Add button. From the Available Fields list, select one or more field titles. Click the Move button. If desired, in the Selected Fields list, select a field title and then use the sort buttons to adjust the position of the column. If desired, in the Sortable Fields list, select one or more field titles. Click the Move button. Note : To move all fields into the Selected Fields list, click the Move All button. If desired, in the Selected Fields list, select a field title and then use the sort buttons to adjust the position of the column. If necessary, select a sorting rule for each field. Click the Save button. Note : A confirmation message displays. Note : To clear all selections, click the Reset button. Note : To close the window without saving, click the Cancel button. Click Close .
Create a Summary Page Display Definition To create a summary page display definition: In the Please input new custom page definition name for creation field, type a name. Click the Add button. From the Available Fields list, select one or more field titles. Click the Move button. If desired, in the Selected Fields list, select a field title and then use the sort buttons to adjust the position of the column. If desired, in the Sortable Fields list, select one or more field titles. Click the Move button. Note : To move all fields into the Selected Fields list, click the Move All button. If desired, in the Selected Fields list, select a field title and then use the sort buttons to adjust the position of the column. If necessary, select a sorting rule for each field. Click the Save button. Note : A confirmation message displays. Note : To clear all selections, click the Reset button. Note : To close the window without saving, click the Cancel button. Click Close .
To create a summary page display definition: In the Please input new custom page definition name for creation field, type a name. Click the Add button. From the Available Fields list, select one or more field titles. Click the Move button. If desired, in the Selected Fields list, select a field title and then use the sort buttons to adjust the position of the column. If desired, in the Sortable Fields list, select one or more field titles. Click the Move button. Note : To move all fields into the Selected Fields list, click the Move All button. If desired, in the Selected Fields list, select a field title and then use the sort buttons to adjust the position of the column. If necessary, select a sorting rule for each field. Click the Save button. Note : A confirmation message displays. Note : To clear all selections, click the Reset button. Note : To close the window without saving, click the Cancel button. Click Close .
Create a Summary Page Display Definition To create a summary page display definition: In the Please input new custom page definition name for creation field, type a name. Click the Add button. From the Available Fields list, select one or more field titles. Click the Move button. If desired, in the Selected Fields list, select a field title and then use the sort buttons to adjust the position of the column. If desired, in the Sortable Fields list, select one or more field titles. Click the Move button. Note : To move all fields into the Selected Fields list, click the Move All button. If desired, in the Selected Fields list, select a field title and then use the sort buttons to adjust the position of the column. If necessary, select a sorting rule for each field. Click the Save button. Note : A confirmation message displays. Note : To clear all selections, click the Reset button. Note : To close the window without saving, click the Cancel button. Click Close .
To create a summary page display definition: In the Please input new custom page definition name for creation field, type a name. Click the Add button. From the Available Fields list, select one or more field titles. Click the Move button. If desired, in the Selected Fields list, select a field title and then use the sort buttons to adjust the position of the column. If desired, in the Sortable Fields list, select one or more field titles. Click the Move button. Note : To move all fields into the Selected Fields list, click the Move All button. If desired, in the Selected Fields list, select a field title and then use the sort buttons to adjust the position of the column. If necessary, select a sorting rule for each field. Click the Save button. Note : A confirmation message displays. Note : To clear all selections, click the Reset button. Note : To close the window without saving, click the Cancel button. Click Close .
Create a Summary Page Display Definition To create a summary page display definition: In the Please input new custom page definition name for creation field, type a name. Click the Add button. From the Available Fields list, select one or more field titles. Click the Move button. If desired, in the Selected Fields list, select a field title and then use the sort buttons to adjust the position of the column. If desired, in the Sortable Fields list, select one or more field titles. Click the Move button. Note : To move all fields into the Selected Fields list, click the Move All button. If desired, in the Selected Fields list, select a field title and then use the sort buttons to adjust the position of the column. If necessary, select a sorting rule for each field. Click the Save button. Note : A confirmation message displays. Note : To clear all selections, click the Reset button. Note : To close the window without saving, click the Cancel button. Click Close .
To create a summary page display definition: In the Please input new custom page definition name for creation field, type a name. Click the Add button. From the Available Fields list, select one or more field titles. Click the Move button. If desired, in the Selected Fields list, select a field title and then use the sort buttons to adjust the position of the column. If desired, in the Sortable Fields list, select one or more field titles. Click the Move button. Note : To move all fields into the Selected Fields list, click the Move All button. If desired, in the Selected Fields list, select a field title and then use the sort buttons to adjust the position of the column. If necessary, select a sorting rule for each field. Click the Save button. Note : A confirmation message displays. Note : To clear all selections, click the Reset button. Note : To close the window without saving, click the Cancel button. Click Close .
Create a Summary Page Display Definition To create a summary page display definition: In the Please input new custom page definition name for creation field, type a name. Click the Add button. From the Available Fields list, select one or more field titles. Click the Move button. If desired, in the Selected Fields list, select a field title and then use the sort buttons to adjust the position of the column. If desired, in the Sortable Fields list, select one or more field titles. Click the Move button. Note : To move all fields into the Selected Fields list, click the Move All button. If desired, in the Selected Fields list, select a field title and then use the sort buttons to adjust the position of the column. If necessary, select a sorting rule for each field. Click the Save button. Note : A confirmation message displays. Note : To clear all selections, click the Reset button. Note : To close the window without saving, click the Cancel button. Click Close .
To create a summary page display definition: In the Please input new custom page definition name for creation field, type a name. Click the Add button. From the Available Fields list, select one or more field titles. Click the Move button. If desired, in the Selected Fields list, select a field title and then use the sort buttons to adjust the position of the column. If desired, in the Sortable Fields list, select one or more field titles. Click the Move button. Note : To move all fields into the Selected Fields list, click the Move All button. If desired, in the Selected Fields list, select a field title and then use the sort buttons to adjust the position of the column. If necessary, select a sorting rule for each field. Click the Save button. Note : A confirmation message displays. Note : To clear all selections, click the Reset button. Note : To close the window without saving, click the Cancel button. Click Close .
Create a Summary Page Display Definition To create a summary page display definition: In the Please input new custom page definition name for creation field, type a name. Click the Add button. From the Available Fields list, select one or more field titles. Click the Move button. If desired, in the Selected Fields list, select a field title and then use the sort buttons to adjust the position of the column. If desired, in the Sortable Fields list, select one or more field titles. Click the Move button. Note : To move all fields into the Selected Fields list, click the Move All button. If desired, in the Selected Fields list, select a field title and then use the sort buttons to adjust the position of the column. If necessary, select a sorting rule for each field. Click the Save button. Note : A confirmation message displays. Note : To clear all selections, click the Reset button. Note : To close the window without saving, click the Cancel button. Click Close .
To create a summary page display definition: In the Please input new custom page definition name for creation field, type a name. Click the Add button. From the Available Fields list, select one or more field titles. Click the Move button. If desired, in the Selected Fields list, select a field title and then use the sort buttons to adjust the position of the column. If desired, in the Sortable Fields list, select one or more field titles. Click the Move button. Note : To move all fields into the Selected Fields list, click the Move All button. If desired, in the Selected Fields list, select a field title and then use the sort buttons to adjust the position of the column. If necessary, select a sorting rule for each field. Click the Save button. Note : A confirmation message displays. Note : To clear all selections, click the Reset button. Note : To close the window without saving, click the Cancel button. Click Close .
Create a Summary Page Display Definition To create a summary page display definition: In the Please input new custom page definition name for creation field, type a name. Click the Add button. From the Available Fields list, select one or more field titles. Click the Move button. If desired, in the Selected Fields list, select a field title and then use the sort buttons to adjust the position of the column. If desired, in the Sortable Fields list, select one or more field titles. Click the Move button. Note : To move all fields into the Selected Fields list, click the Move All button. If desired, in the Selected Fields list, select a field title and then use the sort buttons to adjust the position of the column. If necessary, select a sorting rule for each field. Click the Save button. Note : A confirmation message displays. Note : To clear all selections, click the Reset button. Note : To close the window without saving, click the Cancel button. Click Close .
To create a summary page display definition: In the Please input new custom page definition name for creation field, type a name. Click the Add button. From the Available Fields list, select one or more field titles. Click the Move button. If desired, in the Selected Fields list, select a field title and then use the sort buttons to adjust the position of the column. If desired, in the Sortable Fields list, select one or more field titles. Click the Move button. Note : To move all fields into the Selected Fields list, click the Move All button. If desired, in the Selected Fields list, select a field title and then use the sort buttons to adjust the position of the column. If necessary, select a sorting rule for each field. Click the Save button. Note : A confirmation message displays. Note : To clear all selections, click the Reset button. Note : To close the window without saving, click the Cancel button. Click Close .
Create a Summary Page Display Definition To create a summary page display definition: In the Please input new custom page definition name for creation field, type a name. Click the Add button. From the Available Fields list, select one or more field titles. Click the Move button. If desired, in the Selected Fields list, select a field title and then use the sort buttons to adjust the position of the column. If desired, in the Sortable Fields list, select one or more field titles. Click the Move button. Note : To move all fields into the Selected Fields list, click the Move All button. If desired, in the Selected Fields list, select a field title and then use the sort buttons to adjust the position of the column. If necessary, select a sorting rule for each field. Click the Save button. Note : A confirmation message displays. Note : To clear all selections, click the Reset button. Note : To close the window without saving, click the Cancel button. Click Close .
To view the event calendar summary and details: To change the calendar display, click the Weekly Format or Monthly Format button, if desired. To display the details for a specific event, click the event title. To print the calendar display or the details of a specific event, click the Print button. To close the event details, click the Close button. The calendar only displays those events related to your permissions.
View the Event Calendar Summary and Details To view the event calendar summary and details: To change the calendar display, click the Weekly Format or Monthly Format button, if desired. To display the details for a specific event, click the event title. To print the calendar display or the details of a specific event, click the Print button. To close the event details, click the Return button. The calendar only displays those events related to your role, geography, or access permissions.
To search for campaign information by campaign ID: In the Campaign ID field, type the campaign ID you want to review. Click the Search icon.
Search for Information by Campaign ID To search for campaign information by campaign ID: In the Campaign ID field, type the campaign ID you want to review. Click the Search icon.
To open the Replicate Report page: Select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Replicate option. Note : The Replicate Report page appears.
Access the Replicate Report Page To access the Replicate Report page: From the List of Reports section, select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Replicate option. Note : The Replicate Report page appears.
To open the Replicate Report page: Select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Replicate option. Note : The Replicate Report page appears.
Access the Replicate Report Page To access the Replicate Report page: From the List of Reports section, select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Replicate option. Note : The Replicate Report page appears.
To open the Replicate Report page: Select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Replicate option. Note : The Replicate Report page appears.
Access the Replicate Report Page To access the Replicate Report page: From the List of Reports section, select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Replicate option. Note : The Replicate Report page appears.
To open the Replicate Report page: Select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Replicate option. Note : The Replicate Report page appears.
Access the Replicate Report Page To access the Replicate Report page: From the List of Reports section, select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Replicate option. Note : The Replicate Report page appears.
To open the Replicate Report page: Select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Replicate option. Note : The Replicate Report page appears.
Access the Replicate Report Page To access the Replicate Report page: From the List of Reports section, select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Replicate option. Note : The Replicate Report page appears.
View Overview Information PDC Inquiry Page Overview VOR Inquiry Page Overview Perform Tasks Add Parts to the PDC Inquiry List by Dealer Reference Number Add a Part to the PDC Inquiry List Delete a Part from the PDC Inquiry List Inquire on Parts Availability Perform Common DBS Tasks Select Parts to Place on Order Filter VOR Orders Perform Common DBS Tasks View VOR Order Detail
The Notifications function is currently disabled in DBS at Nissan request. View Overview Information Notifications Page Overview Create or Edit a Notification Workflow Perform Tasks About the Notifications Summary Page Access the Create Notification Page Access the Edit Notification Page Change the Status of a Notification Copy a Notification Delete a Notification Filter the Notifications Summary Perform Common DBS Tasks Resend a Notification View or Print Notification Detail About the Notifications Summary Page Access the Create Notification Page Access the Edit Notification Page Change the Status of a Notification Copy a Notification Delete a Notification Filter the Notifications Summary Perform Common DBS Tasks Resend a Notification View or Print Notification Detail View Notifications Summary
Create Edit Modify Notifications Processes Text Message Create or Edit a Notification Workflow Note : This workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating and editing a notification. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create or Edit a Notification Workflow. Create or Edit an Alert Workflow Create or Edit an Announcement Workflow Create or Edit a Calendar Event Workflow
To grant or remove full access to a menu (tab) and its contents: Show the Menu section, if collapsed. Note : To show the Menu section, click the + icon in the section header. Select or clear the checkbox for the applicable menu. Note : When you select or clear a menu checkbox, all items under that menu are selected or cleared, including its pages, actions, and custom fields, if applicable. Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm, or click the No button to close the window without confirming. The function tree displays permission options in hierarchical order, starting with the menu items at the top and ending with the specific functional items at the bottom.
Grant or Remove Full Access to a Menu and Its Contents To grant or remove full access to a menu (tab) and its contents: Show the Menu section, if collapsed. Note : To show the Menu section, click the + icon in the section header. Select or clear the checkbox for the applicable menu. Note : When you select or clear a menu checkbox, all items under that menu are selected or cleared, including its pages, actions, and custom fields, if applicable. Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm, or click the No button to close the window without confirming. The function tree displays permission options in hierarchical order, starting with the menu items at the top and ending with the specific functional items at the bottom.
To grant or remove full access to a menu (tab) and its contents: Show the Menu section, if collapsed. Note : To show the Menu section, click the + icon in the section header. Select or clear the checkbox for the applicable menu. Note : When you select or clear a menu checkbox, all items under that menu are selected or cleared, including its pages, actions, and custom fields, if applicable. Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm, or click the No button to close the window without confirming. The function tree displays permission options in hierarchical order, starting with the menu items at the top and ending with the specific functional items at the bottom.
Grant or Remove Full Access to a Menu and Its Contents To grant or remove full access to a menu (tab) and its contents: Show the Menu section, if collapsed. Note : To show the Menu section, click the + icon in the section header. Select or clear the checkbox for the applicable menu. Note : When you select or clear a menu checkbox, all items under that menu are selected or cleared, including its pages, actions, and custom fields, if applicable. Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm, or click the No button to close the window without confirming. The function tree displays permission options in hierarchical order, starting with the menu items at the top and ending with the specific functional items at the bottom.
To access Dealer Portal / NNAnet.com to view your documents: Click the My Documents link. Note : Clicking this link opens the Dealer Portal / NNAnet.com site in a new window. This link opens an external application. Follow the procedures within that application to complete this task.
Access NNAnet (Dealer Portal) to View My Documents To access the Dealer Portal / NNAnet.com to view your documents from any application page: Click the My Documents link. Note: Clicking this link the Dealer Portal / NNAnet.com site in a new window. This link opens an external application. Follow the procedures within that application to complete this task.
To change the parts return schedule for multiple dealers: In the Dealer List section, select the checkbox for each dealer which will be included in the parts return due date change. Click the Change Return Due Date button. If necessary, from the Return Period drop-down list, select the desired return period. Note : By default, the Return Period list displays all returns from the start of the return period specified through the end of the return year. For each parts return time you want to change, from the Return Week drop-down list, select the desired week. From the Return Day drop-down list, select the day of the return week on which the parts return will be due. When you have adjusted all return week and day information, click the Save button.
Change the Parts Return Schedule for Multiple Dealers To change the parts return schedule for multiple dealers: In the Dealer List section, select the checkbox for each dealer which will be included in the parts return due date change. Click the Change Return Due Date button. If necessary, from the Return Period drop-down list, select the desired return period. Note : By default, the Return Period list displays all returns from the start of the return period specified through the end of the return year. For each parts return time you want to change, from the Return Week drop-down list, select the desired week. From the Return Day drop-down list, select the day of the return week on which the parts return will be due. When you have adjusted all return week and day information, click the Save button.
To open the View Report page: Select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the View option. Note : The View Report page appears.
Access the View Report Page To access the View Report page: From the List of Reports section, select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the View option. Note : The View Report page appears.
To open the View Report page: Select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the View option. Note : The View Report page appears.
Access the View Report Page To access the View Report page: From the List of Reports section, select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the View option. Note : The View Report page appears.
To open the View Report page: Select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the View option. Note : The View Report page appears.
Access the View Report Page To access the View Report page: From the List of Reports section, select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the View option. Note : The View Report page appears.
To open the View Report page: Select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the View option. Note : The View Report page appears.
Access the View Report Page To access the View Report page: From the List of Reports section, select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the View option. Note : The View Report page appears.
To open the View Report page: Select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the View option. Note : The View Report page appears.
Access the View Report Page To access the View Report page: From the List of Reports section, select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the View option. Note : The View Report page appears.
To delete a part from a return: Select the part you want to delete. Move your cursor over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Delete option. Note : A confirmation message may appear. Note : To prevent the confirmation from appearing in the future, select the Do not ask me again checkbox. If a confirmation message appears, click the Yes button to confirm the deletion, or the No button to cancel the deletion. Click the Save button. To delete a part from a parts return, the return must be in "New" or "Open" status.
Delete a Part from a Return To delete a part from a return: Select the part you want to delete. Move your cursor over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Delete option. If a confirmation message appears, click the Yes button to confirm the deletion, or the No button to cancel the deletion. Note : To prevent the confirmation from appearing in the future, select the Do not ask me again checkbox. Click the Save button. To delete a part from a parts return, the return must be in "New" or "Open" status.
Create Return Create Return Create Return Create Parts Return Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating a parts return. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create Parts Return Workflow. Manage Parts Return Workflow Modify Parts Return Workflow
Edit Return Edit Return Edit Return Edit Parts Return Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for modifying a parts return. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Edit Parts Return Workflow. Create Parts Return Workflow Manage Parts Return Workflow
To change a report definition to public or private: Select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Make Public or Private option. Note : The Report Category Options window appears. Select a report category. Click the Change button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to cancel without saving. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm, or click the No button to close the window without confirming. Note : The category is changed to the category selected.
Change a Report Definition to Public or Private To change a report definition to public or private: In the report summary section, select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Make Public Or Private option. Note : The Report Category Options window appears. Select a report category. Private - report is viewable by the user only Dealership Public - report is viewable by all authorized users in the selected dealership DBS Public - report is viewable by all authorized DBS users Click the Change button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to cancel without saving. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm, or click the No button to close the window without confirming. Note : The category is changed to the category selected.
To change a report definition to public or private: Select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Make Public or Private option. Note : The Report Category Options window appears. Select a report category. Click the Change button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to cancel without saving. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm, or click the No button to close the window without confirming. Note : The category is changed to the category selected.
Change a Report Definition to Public or Private To change a report definition to public or private: In the report summary section, select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Make Public Or Private option. Note : The Report Category Options window appears. Select a report category. Private - report is viewable by the user only Dealership Public - report is viewable by all authorized users in the selected dealership DBS Public - report is viewable by all authorized DBS users Click the Change button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to cancel without saving. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm, or click the No button to close the window without confirming. Note : The category is changed to the category selected.
To change a report definition to public or private: Select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Make Public or Private option. Note : The Report Category Options window appears. Select a report category. Click the Change button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to cancel without saving. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm, or click the No button to close the window without confirming. Note : The category is changed to the category selected.
Change a Report Definition to Public or Private To change a report definition to public or private: In the report summary section, select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Make Public Or Private option. Note : The Report Category Options window appears. Select a report category. Private - report is viewable by the user only Dealership Public - report is viewable by all authorized users in the selected dealership DBS Public - report is viewable by all authorized DBS users Click the Change button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to cancel without saving. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm, or click the No button to close the window without confirming. Note : The category is changed to the category selected.
To change a report definition to public or private: Select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Make Public or Private option. Note : The Report Category Options window appears. Select a report category. Click the Change button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to cancel without saving. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm, or click the No button to close the window without confirming. Note : The category is changed to the category selected.
Change a Report Definition to Public or Private To change a report definition to public or private: In the report summary section, select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Make Public Or Private option. Note : The Report Category Options window appears. Select a report category. Private - report is viewable by the user only Dealership Public - report is viewable by all authorized users in the selected dealership DBS Public - report is viewable by all authorized DBS users Click the Change button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to cancel without saving. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm, or click the No button to close the window without confirming. Note : The category is changed to the category selected.
To change a report definition to public or private: Select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Make Public or Private option. Note : The Report Category Options window appears. Select a report category. Click the Change button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to cancel without saving. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm, or click the No button to close the window without confirming. Note : The category is changed to the category selected.
Change a Report Definition to Public or Private To change a report definition to public or private: In the report summary section, select a report. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Make Public Or Private option. Note : The Report Category Options window appears. Select a report category. Private - report is viewable by the user only Dealership Public - report is viewable by all authorized users in the selected dealership DBS Public - report is viewable by all authorized DBS users Click the Change button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to cancel without saving. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm, or click the No button to close the window without confirming. Note : The category is changed to the category selected.
To print vehicle detail from the Inventory Search page: Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon for the vehicle for which you want to print detail. From the Action menu, select the Print Vehicle Detail option. Note : A PDF file of the vehicle details displays. Click the Print icon in the PDF file to print the details.
Print Vehicle Detail from Inventory Search To print vehicle detail from the Inventory Search page: Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon for the selected vehicle. From the Action menu, select the Print Vehicle Detail option. Note : A PDF file containing the vehicle details displays. Click the Print icon in the PDF display to print the details.
Inventory Search Inventory Search Processes Search Inventory Search Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for searching and viewing inventory for a particular vehicle model with specified features and options. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Inventory Search workflow. Vehicle Inventory Workflow
The type of sale selected can impact the information required in the Buyer section. See the Step by Step tab in Full Help for complete details. To complete the Buyer section of a used vehicle RDR: From the Title drop-down list, select a title. Enter or update the customer name, address, and contact information. Note : If you select "Commercial Account" from the Title drop-down list, you must enter the company name and details instead of the customer details. Note : Type all 9s in the Daytime or Evening field if the customer does not have a phone. In the Email field, type the customer email address. Note : Type three asterisks (*) if the customer does not have an email address. Complete the Driver section of the RDR. Click here for more information.
Complete the Buyer Section of a Used Vehicle RDR To complete the Buyer section of a used vehicle RDR: From the Title drop-down list, select a title. Enter or update the customer name, address, and contact information. Note : If you select "Commercial Account" from the Title drop-down list, you must enter the company name and details instead of the customer details. Note : Type all 9s in the Daytime or Evening field if the customer does not have a phone. In the Email field, type the customer email address. Note : Type three asterisks (*) if the customer does not have an email address. Complete the Driver section of the RDR. Click here for more information. Buyer Section: Wholesale Sales If you selected "Wholesale" from the Sale Type drop-down list in the Vehicle section of the RDR, follow these steps to enter the wholesaler information: From the Wholesaler drop-down list, select an existing wholesaler, or type a new wholesaler name in the field. In the address, phone, and email fields, review the information displayed and make any updates necessary, or add information for a new wholesaler. If you made any changes to an existing wholesaler record or added a new wholesaler, select the Save or Update this wholesaler for future use checkbox.
To complete the Comments section of an express entry warranty claim: In the Advisor Comments field, type comments from the service advisor. In the Technician Comments field, type comments from the service technician. Note : To save a claim with errors or warnings, click the Save button. To validate the information in the claim, click the Validate button. To submit a claim with no errors, click the Submit button.
Complete the Comments Section of an Express Entry Warranty Claim To complete the Comments section of an express entry warranty claim: In the Advisor Comments field, type comments from the service advisor. In the Technician Comments field, type comments from the service technician.
This section of a study is not required, but provides the opportunity to customize or limit a study's results. Use optional study sections to clearly define study parameters, but use caution as conflicting selections will result in no data being returned. An engine type pre-defined combination of the model year, channel, line series, and description, e.g. 13-N-Maxima-3.8L. DBS maintains engine type information for the current model year and five previous model years (ten previous model years for Infiniti), beginning from the 2011 model year for both divisions. If desired, you can select one or more engine types to limit the study results. To complete the Engine Type section of a study: Select each engine type which should be included in the study, and then use the center buttons as necessary to customize the Selected Engines list. When you have selected all desired engine types, click the Save button.
Complete the Engine Type Section of a Study This section of a study is not required, but provides the opportunity to customize or limit a study's results. Use optional study sections to clearly define study parameters, but use caution as conflicting selections will result in no data being returned. An engine type pre-defined combination of the model year, channel, line series, and description, e.g. 13-N-Maxima-3.8L. DBS maintains engine type information for the current model year and five previous model years (ten previous model years for Infiniti), beginning from the 2011 model year for both divisions. If desired, you can select one or more engine types to limit the study results. To complete the Engine Type section of a study: Select each engine type which should be included in the study, and then use the center buttons as necessary to customize the Selected Engines list. When you have selected all desired engine types, click the Save button.
Early Detection System (EDS) EDS: Study Dashboard Processes EDS: Study Dashboard Study Study Dashboard Technical Service Bulletin (TSB) Create or Modify a Study Workflow Note : The Create or Modify a Study workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for defining or modifying a study that integrates appointment and repair order data collected by the Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Define or Modify a Study Workflow. Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow View One Study Result Workflow
View Overview Information Vehicle Inventory Page Overview Manage Vehicle Inventory Workflow Report or Edit the Sale of a Vehicle (RDR) Workflow Vehicle Inventory Page Overview Manage Vehicle Inventory Workflow Perform Tasks About Vehicle Inventory Access OMS to Locate a Vehicle Access OMS to Trade a Vehicle Access OMS to View OMS Vehicle Detail Access the Inventory Search Page Access the RDR Vehicle Page Create an Advanced Filter Edit Vehicle Stock Number Export Vehicle Inventory Information Filter Vehicle Inventory Manage Vehicle Notes Perform Common DBS Tasks Print RDR Detail Set Custom Search Group Set the Distance Search Range View Invoice View Campaign Information for a Vehicle in Inventory View, Print, or Email Window Sticker from Vehicle Inventory View the Dealer Campaign Report View Vehicle Detail About Vehicle Inventory Access the Inventory Search Page Create an Advanced Filter Edit Vehicle Stock Number Export Vehicle Inventory Information Filter Vehicle Inventory Manage Vehicle Notes Perform Common DBS Tasks Set Custom Search Group Set the Distance Search Range View Invoice View, Print, or Email Window Sticker from Vehicle Inventory View Vehicle Detail
Vehicle Inventory Management Inventory Managment Processes Inventory Managment Vehicle Inventory Management Vehicle Inventory Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing vehicle inventory data at the dealerships. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Vehicle Inventory workflow. Report the Sale of a Vehicle (RDR) Workflow Search Vehicle Inventory Workflow Search Vehicle Inventory Workflow
Processes RDR RDR RDR a Vehicle Workflow Note : This workflow is for NNA users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for retail delivery reporting (RDR) or editing the sale of a vehicle. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Report or Edit the Sale of a Vehicle workflow. Vehicle Inventory Workflow Inventory Search Workflow View RDR History Workflow
Vehicle Inventory Management Inventory Managment Processes Inventory Managment Vehicle Inventory Management Vehicle Inventory Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing vehicle inventory data at the dealerships. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Vehicle Inventory workflow. Report the Sale of a Vehicle (RDR) Workflow Search Vehicle Inventory Workflow Search Vehicle Inventory Workflow
To delete a campaign part: Select the part you want to delete. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Delete Part option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm, or click the No button to close the window without confirming.
Delete a Campaign Part To delete a campaign part: Select the part you want to delete. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Delete Part option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm, or click the No button to close the window without confirming.
Campaign Campaign Part Management Campaign Parts Campaign Campaign Part Management Campaign Part Management Manage Campaign Parts Workflow Note : This workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing campaign parts. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Campaign Parts Workflow. View Service Campaign Order Workflow Manage Service Campaign Order Workflow
To create a custom search group: Click the Customize icon to open the Configure Inventory Search page. Type a name for the new search group in the Search Group name field. Click the + icon to add the new name to the Group Name list. Move your pointer pointer over the Action icon for the selected group. From the Action menu, select the View/Edit option. In the Available Dealers list, select a dealer to include in the new group. Click the >> icon to add the dealer to the Selected Dealers list. Click the Save button to save your changes. Note : You can add a maximum of 20 dealers to a custom search group. Click the Close button to return to the Search Inventory page. You can add a maximum of 20 dealers to a custom search group. The option to change the search radius is available only after you have performed an inventory search.
Set Custom Search Group Click the Customize icon to open the Configure Inventory Search page. Note : The Configure Inventory Search page opens. Type a search group name in the Search Group name field. Click the + button to add the desired group name. Note : The new group appears in the Group Name list. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon for the new group. From the Action menu, select the View/Edit option. Note : DBS provides a list of available dealers so that you can select the dealers to include in this group. In the Available Dealers list, select a dealer to include in the new group. Note : By default, your dealership is not included in the dealer list. You can add your dealership by entering your dealer number in the Enter Dealer Number for quick entry field and clicking the Add button. Click the >> icon to add the dealer to the Selected Dealers list. Note : To select multiple individual dealers, press and hold the CTRL key while selecting. Or, to select multiple dealers in a row, press and hold the Shift key while selecting. Note : Alternately, if you know the dealer's number, type it in the Enter Dealer Number for quick entry field, then click the Add button. Note : To remove a dealer from the Selected Dealers list, select the dealer and click the << icon to move the dealer back to the Available Dealers list. Click the Save button to save your changes. Note : You can add a maximum of 20 dealers to a custom search group. Note : You can create multiple custom search groups. Click the Close button to return to the Search Inventory page. You can create multiple custom search groups. To remove a custom search group, remove all the dealers from the Selected Dealers box, delete the custom group name, and then click the Save button.
Inventory Search Inventory Search Processes Search Inventory Search Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for searching and viewing inventory for a particular vehicle model with specified features and options. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Inventory Search workflow. Vehicle Inventory Workflow
To view the Technical Service Bulletin (TSB) or campaign information for a vehicle on the Retailed Vehicle Open Campaign Report page: In the Campaign Description column, click the hyperlinked description. Note : Campaign details are not available for all vehicles. The TSB or campaign details display in a new window. Close the window when you have finished reviewing the content.
View a TSB for a Vehicle Listed on the Retailed Vehicle Open Campaign Report Page To view the Technical Service Bulletin (TSB) or campaign information for a vehicle on the Retailed Vehicle Open Campaign Report page: In the Campaign Description column, click the hyperlinked description. Note : Campaign details are not available for all vehicles. The TSB or campaign details display in a new window. Close the window when you have finished reviewing the content.
View Overview Information User Summary Page Overview View User Permissions Workflow User Summary Workflow Perform Tasks About the User Summary Page Access the Copy User Permissions Page Access the Edit User Permissions Page Access the View User Permissions Page Deactivate or Reactivate a User Perform Common DBS Tasks Search for a Dealer User Search for an Internal User About the User Summary Page Access the Copy User Permissions Page Access the Edit User Permissions Page Access the View User Permissions Page Deactivate or Reactivate a User Perform Common DBS Tasks Retrieve a List of New or Updated Users Search for a Dealer User by Dealer Code (Dealer Number) Search for a Dealer User by Hierarchy Search for a Dealer User by Name Search for an Internal User by Hierarchy Search for an Internal User by Name Search for an Internal User by User ID View User Summary
Edit User Processes User Permissions Users User Summary Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for editing user permissions. Related Workflows The following workflow may have one or more tasks in common with the User Summary workflow . View User Permissions Workflow
User Processes User Permissions Users View View User Permissions Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing user permissions. Related Workflows The following workflow may have one or more tasks in common with the View User Permissions Workflow. User Summary Workflow
To export the dealer operation code summary: Click the Export button. Select the output format. Note : The File Download window opens. Save the file to your local drive. If you filter the page before exporting, only those records that meet the filter criteria export. You can filter, sort, and print the data if you export the information to Microsoft ® Excel ® .
Export the Dealer Operation Code Summary To export the dealer operation code summary: Click the Export button. Select the output format. Note: The File Download window opens. Save the file to your local drive. If you filter the page before exporting, only those records that meet the filter criteria will export. You can filter, sort, and print the data if you export the information to Microsoft® Excel®.
Dealer Operation Code Dealer Operation Codes ReRun Dealer Operation Codes Translation Manage Dealer Operation Codes Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing dealer operation codes. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Dealer Operation Codes Workflow. Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes Workflow Manage Standard Operation Categories Workflow Manage Standard Operation Codes Workflow
Before you add a new claim line, you must save the current claim information or the information you have entered will be lost. To add a new claim line on an express entry warranty claim: Click the New Claim Line button. Note : DBS adds a new claim line to the claim and clears the information displayed in the Claim Information, Parts, Operations, and Expenses sections. Continue adding the required claim information, and then click the Save button to save the claim line. Note : To validate the information in the claim, click the Validate button. To submit a claim with no errors, click the Submit button. You can save a warranty claim with warnings and error messages, and update the claim at a later time.
Add a New Claim Line on an Express Entry Warranty Claim Before you add a new claim line, you must save the current claim information or the information you have entered will be lost. To add a new claim line on an express entry warranty claim: Click the New Claim Line button. Note : DBS adds a new claim line to the claim and clears the information displayed in the Claim Information, Parts, Operations, and Expenses sections. Continue adding the required claim information, and then click the Save button to save the claim line. Note : To validate the information in the claim, click the Validate button. To submit a claim with no errors, click the Submit button.
View Overview Information Clean Cache Page Overview Perform Tasks Clean the Cache Perform Common DBS Tasks Clean the Cache Perform Common DBS Tasks
View Overview Information Application Auditing Page Overview Perform Tasks Filter Application Audit Information Interpret Application Audit Information Perform Common DBS Tasks Filter Application Audit Information Interpret Application Audit Information Perform Common DBS Tasks
Search for Transactions Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for searching and viewing transactions.
To open the Create Parts Return page: Click the Create New Return button. Note : The Create Parts Return page appears.
Open the Create Parts Return Page To open the Create Parts Return page: Click the Create New Return button. Note : The Create Parts Return page appears.
Manage Returns Manage Returns Manage Returns Manage Parts Return Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing parts returns. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Parts Return Workflow. Create Parts Return Workflow Modify Parts Return Workflow
Create Return Create Return Create Return Create Parts Return Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating a parts return. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create Parts Return Workflow. Manage Parts Return Workflow Modify Parts Return Workflow
To open the Create Parts Return page: Click the Create New Return button. Note : The Create Parts Return page appears.
Open the Create Parts Return Page To open the Create Parts Return page: Click the Create New Return button. Note : The Create Parts Return page appears.
Manage Returns Manage Returns Manage Returns Manage Parts Return Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing parts returns. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Parts Return Workflow. Create Parts Return Workflow Modify Parts Return Workflow
Create Return Create Return Create Return Create Parts Return Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating a parts return. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create Parts Return Workflow. Manage Parts Return Workflow Modify Parts Return Workflow
9CB28B79-A892-4170-BC9D-AC1932768FAC\DBS System Administrators Quick Reference Guide - Nissan 092017.pdf
To add a custom search group: In the Search Range section, select a search range. Type the desired name, and then click the + button. Note : The new custom group name appears in the list. From the Available Dealers list, select one or more dealers and then click the >> icon to move them to the Select Dealers list. Note : To select multiple individual items, press and hold the CTRL key. To select multiple items, press and hold the SHIFT key while selecting items. Note : If you selected either District or Region in the Search Range section, select a district or region from the drop-down lists. Click the Save button. If you know the dealer code, you can type the dealer code in the Enter Dealer Code for quick entry field and then click the Add button. You can view the list of dealers by name only or by name and number. To display by dealer name only, click the Dealer Name link. To display by dealer number and dealer name, click the Dealer Code link. You can also narrow the list of dealers by letter. To display all dealers that start with a specific letter, click the link for the desired letter. You can have no more than 20 dealers in a custom group.
Add a Custom Search Group To add a custom search group: In the Custom group name field, type the desired custom group name. Click the + icon. Note : The new custom group name appears in the list. From the Available Dealers list, select one or more dealers. Note : To select multiple individual items, press and hold the CTRL key. To select multiple items, press and hold the SHIFT key while selecting items. Note : If you selected either District or Region in the Search Range section, select a district or region from the drop-down lists. Click the >> icon to move the dealers to the Selected Dealers list Note : To change the sort order in both dealer lists, click either the Dealer Name or Dealer Code link. Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. If you know the dealer code, you can type the dealer code in the Enter Dealer Code for quick entry field and then click the Add button. You can view the Available Dealers list by name only or by name and number. To display by dealer name only, click the Dealer Name link. To display by dealer number and dealer name, click the Dealer Code link. You can also view the Available Dealers list by letter. To display all dealers that start with a specific letter, click the link for the desired letter. You can have no more than 20 dealers in a custom group.
Custom Search Group Manage Custom Search Group Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing custom search groups. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Custom Search Group (Parts Metrics) Workflow. View Parts Metrics Workflow
To view a repair order from the Edit/Create Warranty Claim page: At the bottom of the page, click the RO button. Note : The Repair Order Information window opens. Click the Print button to print the RO, or click the Close button to return to the previous screen.
View Repair Order from Edit/Create Warranty Claim Page To view a repair order (RO): At the bottom of the page, click the RO button. Note : The Repair Order Information window opens. Click the Print button to print the RO, or click the Close button to return to the previous screen.
Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Edit Warranty Claims Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Warranty Claims Edit or Create Warranty Claims Workflow *** Nissan Canada Inc. (NCI) recommends dealers create Warranty Claims in an NCI DBS certified dealer management system and then log into NCI DBS to review, validate and submit the claim to NCI. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating and editing claims. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Warranty Claims Workflow or View Warranty Claims Workflow. Manage Warranty Claims Workflow View Warranty Claims Workflow
To view an invoice from the RDR History page: Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon for the selected vehicle. From the Action menu, select the View Invoice option. Note : The Vehicle Invoice Detail windows appears. After viewing the vehicle invoice detail, click the Close button. Note : Before closing the detail, you may choose to email the invoice.
View Vehicle Invoice from RDR History To view an invoice from the RDR History page: Select the vehicle for which you want to view the invoice. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon for the selected vehicle. From the Action menu, select the View Invoice menu option. Note : The Vehicle Invoice Detail windows appears. After viewing the vehicle invoice detail, click the Close button. Note : Before closing the detail, you may choose to email the invoice. Email Invoice Detail from the RDR History Page To email the invoice detail from the RDR History page: On the Vehicle Invoice Detail window, click the Email button. In the Receiver field, type the email address of the person who should receive the invoice. In the CC field (carbon copy), type the email address of any other individuals who should receive a copy of the invoice. Click the Send button.
To look up a part from the View Part Master Information page: At the end of the Part Number field, click the Lookup icon. Note : The Part Lookup page appears. In the fields provided, type full or partial information. Note : You must include an asterisk (*) when typing partial information. Note : To remove search criteria, click the Clear icon. Click the Search icon. Note : DCS displays a list of records matching the search criteria in the Parts section. Select the desired part. Note : DCS displays part detail in the Part Detail section. To determine if the part is superseded, scroll down in the Part Detail section. Note : If a " Y " appears in the Supersession Flag field, the part is superseded. Note : The new part number appears in the New Part field above the Supersession Flag field. If the part is superseded, copy the value in the New Part field, paste it into the Part Number field, and repeat steps 3-6. To select the part, click the Select button. Note : To cancel the lookup, click the Cancel button.
Look Up a Part from the View Part Master Information Page To look up a part from the View Part Master Information page:
Master Part Master Master View Parts Master Information Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for displaying parts master information. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the View Parts Master Information Workflow. Request Full Parts Master Workflow
To view search results: Click a link in a category. Note : If you click a link to an alert, announcement, or calendar event, a window appears that contains the content of the item you selected. To close the window, click the Close button. If you click a menu link, you will go to that part of DBS . Note : If multiple pages display, click a page number or click the forward or backward arrow to navigate from page to page.
View Search Results To view search results: In the results, click a link in a category. Note : If you click a link to an alert, announcement, or calendar event, a window appears that contains the content of the item you selected. To close the window, click the Close button. If you click a menu link, you will go to that part of DBS . Note : If multiple pages display, click a page number or click the forward or backward arrow to navigate from page to page.
To select recipients for dealer user by input a dealer option: Click the Dealer Users button. Select the Input a Dealer Number option. Click the Next button to continue. Type a dealer number. Click the Next button to continue, or click the Back button to return to the previous window. Select either the Position or User option. Note: The appropriate options display based on your selection. Select either the available positions or available users. Note: To select multiple items, press and hold the CTRL key while selecting items. Click the Copy button to move the selected options to the Selected box, or click the Copy All button to move all options. Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the Back button to return to the previous window. To view your recipient selections after you select them, use the View/Print option in the Action menu.
Select Recipients by Dealer User for Input a Dealer Option To select recipients for dealer user by input a dealer option: Click the Dealer Users button. Select the Input a Dealer Number option. Click the Next button to continue. In the Enter Dealer Number field, type a dealer number. Click the Next button to continue, or click the Back button to return to the previous window. Select either the Position or User option. Note : The appropriate options display based on your selection. From the Available Fields box, select either the positions or users. Note : To select multiple items, press and hold the CTRL key while selecting items. Click the Copy button to move the selected options to the Selected box, or click the Copy All button to move all options. Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the Back button to return to the previous window. To view your recipient selections after you select them, use the View/Print option in the Action menu.
Note : This task is performed by internal users only. To search for and monitor transactions: In the fields provided, select or type search options to limit the summary display. Click the Search button. View the status information that meets the selected criteria. To prevent an excessive number of search results, provide a date or time range to limit the search results.
Search for and Monitor Transactions Note : This task is performed by internal users only. To search for and monitor transactions: In the fields provided, select or type search options to limit the summary display. Click the Search button. Note : Click the Reset button to clear the search criteria entered. View the status information that meets the selected criteria. To prevent an excessive number of search results, provide a date or time range in order to limit the search results.
View Overview Information My Profile Page Overview Perform Tasks Manage My Profile Perform Common DBS Tasks Manage My Profile Perform Common DBS Tasks
Need to verify tasks for Request Labor Time Guide and Request Full Flat Rate Manual. Service Landing Page Overview Purpose Use the Service Landing page to view alerts, announcements, and other news related to the Service application in DBS . Description The content area of the Service landing page displays the following sections: Alerts - Appear at the top of the landing page, if applicable. The Alert messages continually scroll across the top of the page, when applicable. Alerts typically provide information that is system critical. Announcements - As applicable, high-priority messages appear in the Regional or National Announcements section. When the message is no longer considered a high priority, the text automatically moves to the Other News section. Other News - Displays the announcements that are not as high priority. When an announcement is no longer one of the high-priority announcements, the announcement automatically moves to the Other News section. Tasks You can perform the following tasks from or on the Service Landing page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. View Alerts View Announcements and Other News View Alerts View Announcements and Other News Page Preview
DSP STAR Web Service Overview Purpose DSP STAR refers to Dealer Service Provider (DSP) Standards for Technology in Automotive Retail (STAR) . Use the DSP STAR Web Service page to select or update the transactions such as parts orders, repair orders, financial statements, and so on that a Dealer Management System (DMS) vendor can access. Description The content area of the DSP STAR Web Service page displays the following sections: DSP List - Allows you to select a DMS vendor for whom you desire to configure the STAR Web service Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the DSP STAR Web Service page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Configure DSP STAR Web Services Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Configure DSP STAR Web Service page. Configure DSP STAR Web Service Workflow Page Preview
To print the information: Click the Print icon. Note : Depending on the application page, a preview of the content appears or a File Download dialog box opens. If a preview appears, click the Print button, or click Close to close the preview without printing. Note : Continue with the printing procedures applicable for your location. - Or - If a dialog box appears, click the Open or Save button, or click the Cancel button to close without opening or saving. Note : Continue with the procedures for viewing or printing PDF files as applicable for your location. If you are on a summary page, the Print icon prints all the information in the summary list.
Print Information To print information: Click the Print icon. Note : Depending on the application page, a preview of the content appears or a File Download dialog box appears. If a preview appears, click the Print button, or click Close to close the preview without printing. Note : Continue with the printing procedure applicable for your location. - Or - If a dialog box appears, click the Open or Save buttons, or click the Cancel button to close without opening or saving. Note : Continue with the procedure for viewing, printing, or saving PDF files. If you are on a summary page, the Print icon prints the information in the summary list. To print details, use the applicable button or Action menu option.
View Page Overview or Field Definitions RDR Vehicle Page Overview Report or Edit the Sale of a Vehicle Workflow Perform Tasks Access OMS to View Vehicle Detail Access Reports Delete RDR Perform Common DBS Tasks Report or Edit the Sale of a Vehicle Complete the Vehicle Section of an RDR Complete the Buyer Section of an RDR Complete the Co-Buyer Section of an RDR Complete the Driver Section of an RDR Complete the Legal Owner Section of an RDR Complete the Finance Section of an RDR (For lease sales only)
Processes RDR RDR RDR a Vehicle Workflow Note : This workflow is for NNA users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for retail delivery reporting (RDR) or editing the sale of a vehicle. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Report or Edit the Sale of a Vehicle workflow. Vehicle Inventory Workflow Inventory Search Workflow View RDR History Workflow
To delete all of a user's report definitions: Click the General Action icon. From the General Action menu, select the Delete All Reports option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm and save, or click the No button to close the window without saving. Dealer users may delete all of their own report definitions. Dealer administrators and internal users can delete all of a user's report definitions.
Delete All of a User's Report Definitions Dealer users may delete all of their own report definitions. Dealer administrators and internal users can delete all of a user's report definitions. To delete all of a user's report definitions: Click the General Action icon. From the General Action menu, select the Delete All Reports option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm and save, or click the No button to close the window without saving.
To delete all of a user's report definitions: Click the General Action icon. From the General Action menu, select the Delete All Reports option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm and save, or click the No button to close the window without saving. Dealer users may delete all of their own report definitions. Dealer administrators and internal users can delete all of a user's report definitions.
Delete All of a User's Report Definitions Dealer users may delete all of their own report definitions. Dealer administrators and internal users can delete all of a user's report definitions. To delete all of a user's report definitions: Click the General Action icon. From the General Action menu, select the Delete All Reports option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm and save, or click the No button to close the window without saving.
To delete all of a user's report definitions: Click the General Action icon. From the General Action menu, select the Delete All Reports option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm and save, or click the No button to close the window without saving. Dealer users may delete all of their own report definitions. Dealer administrators and internal users can delete all of a user's report definitions.
Delete All of a User's Report Definitions Dealer users may delete all of their own report definitions. Dealer administrators and internal users can delete all of a user's report definitions. To delete all of a user's report definitions: Click the General Action icon. From the General Action menu, select the Delete All Reports option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm and save, or click the No button to close the window without saving.
To delete all of a user's report definitions: Click the General Action icon. From the General Action menu, select the Delete All Reports option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm and save, or click the No button to close the window without saving. Dealer users may delete all of their own report definitions. Dealer administrators and internal users can delete all of a user's report definitions.
Delete All of a User's Report Definitions Dealer users may delete all of their own report definitions. Dealer administrators and internal users can delete all of a user's report definitions. To delete all of a user's report definitions: Click the General Action icon. From the General Action menu, select the Delete All Reports option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm and save, or click the No button to close the window without saving.
To delete all of a user's report definitions: Click the General Action icon. From the General Action menu, select the Delete All Reports option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm and save, or click the No button to close the window without saving. Dealer users may delete all of their own report definitions. Dealer administrators and internal users can delete all of a user's report definitions.
Delete All of a User's Report Definitions Dealer users may delete all of their own report definitions. Dealer administrators and internal users can delete all of a user's report definitions. To delete all of a user's report definitions: Click the General Action icon. From the General Action menu, select the Delete All Reports option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm and save, or click the No button to close the window without saving.
Edit Position Permissions Page Overview Note : The Edit Position Permissions Page applies to internal users only. Purpose Use the Edit Position Permissions page to view, set up, or modify the default permissions for a specific position. Description The content area of the Edit Position Permissions page displays the following sections: Quick Jump menu - Appears on the left-hand side of the page. The Quick Jump menu allows you to show one section at a time, or you can show or hide the default view for all sections. Permission Function Tree - By default, the function tree expands two sections: Menu and User Information. The function tree also includes a Host Report section and a Report Writer section. Use the + and - icons to show or hide a section. Use the expand all | collapse all features to expand or collapse a section. Save and Cancel buttons - Allows you to submit or cancel requested changes . Cancel returns you to the Position Summary page. Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Edit Position Permissions page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Grant or Remove Access to a Host Report Grant or Remove Access to a Page, Action, Custom Field, or Website Grant or Remove Access to a Report Writer View Grant or Remove Full Access to a Menu and Its Contents Use the Quick Jump Menu Grant or Remove Access to a Host Report Grant or Remove Access to a Page, Action, Custom Field, or Website Grant or Remove Access to a Report Writer View Grant or Remove Full Access to a Menu and Its Contents Use the Quick Jump Menu Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Edit Position Permissions page. Edit Position Permissions Workflow Page Preview
Note : Internal users who want to view campaign information for other dealerships should use the Campaign Report page, available from the Sales menu. To view the dealer campaign report: Click the Reports button. Select the Campaign Report menu option. Use the page navigation buttons or the Go to Page field to navigate within the Campaign Report window. If desired, click the Print button to print the report information. If desired, click the Export button and follow your browser-specific instructions to download a Microsoft ® Excel ® spreadsheet of the report information. Click the Cancel button to close the Campaign Report window and return to the Vehicle Inventory page.
View the Dealer Campaign Report Note : Internal users who want to view campaign information for other dealerships should use the Campaign Report page, available from the Sales menu. To view the dealer campaign report: Click the Reports button. Select the Campaign Report menu option. Use the page navigation buttons or the Go to Page field to navigate within the Campaign Report window. If desired, click the Print button to print the report information. If desired, click the Export button and follow your browser-specific instructions to download a Microsoft © Excel © spreadsheet of the report information. Click the Cancel button to close the Campaign Report window and return to the Vehicle Inventory page.
To export information from the Serviced with Open Campaign Report Page: Use the search and filter fields to customize the Vehicle Campaign List. Note : At a minimum, you must select an affiliate, region, area, district, and campaign. Click the Export button. Follow your browser-specific instructions to open or save the Microsoft ® Excel ® file.
Export the Serviced with Open Campaign Report Page To export information from the Serviced with Open Campaign Report Page: Use the search and filter fields to customize the Vehicle Campaign List. Note : At a minimum, you must select an affiliate, region, area, district, and campaign. Click the Export button. Follow your browser-specific instructions to open or save the Microsoft ® Excel ® file.
View Overview Information Dealer Information Page Overview Edit Dealer Information Workflow Dealer Summary Workflow Perform Tasks Edit Dealer Information Perform Common DBS Tasks View Dealer Information Edit Dealer Information Perform Common DBS Tasks View Dealer Information
Dealer Dealer Permissions Dealer Processes View Dealer Summary Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing dealer information or permissions. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the View Dealer Information or Permissions Workflow. Edit Dealer Information Workflow Edit Dealer Permissions Workflow (NNA Only)
Dealer Dealer Permissions Edit Dealer Processes Edit Dealer Information Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for editing dealer information. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Edit Dealer Information Workflow. View Dealer Information or Permissions Workflow
D19E7BAB-5E73-4D80-96B2-0A7C3EF14923\Express Entry Warranty Claim User Guide 2015 V3.pdf
Contact Us Page Overview Purpose Use the Contact Us page to view phone and email contact information for the Dealer Business System (DBS) help desk. Description The content area of the Contact Us page displays the following sections: DBS Help Desk - Provides the email address for the help desk as a hyperlink which opens your default mail program Toll Free Phone Number - Displays the toll free phone number(s) established for the help desk Support Hours - Provides information about the support hours for the help desk and live chat Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Contact Us page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Contact the DBS Help Desk by Email Contact the DBS Help Desk by Phone Contact the DBS Help Desk by Email Contact the DBS Help Desk by Phone Page Preview
To open the Hold Study Result page: At the bottom of the Early Detection System pane, click the Hold Status Summary link. Note : The Hold Study Result page opens with a list of vehicles that are included in Hold Studies.
Open the Hold Status Summary To open the Hold Study Result page: At the bottom of the Early Detection System pane, click the Hold Status Summary link. Note : The Hold Study Result page opens with a list of vehicles that are included in hold studies. Vehicles in the Hold Study list are color-coded yellow.
Early Detection System (EDS) EDS: Study Dashboard Processes EDS: Study Dashboard Study Study Dashboard Technical Service Bulletin (TSB) Create or Modify a Study Workflow Note : The Create or Modify a Study workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for defining or modifying a study that integrates appointment and repair order data collected by the Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Define or Modify a Study Workflow. Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow View One Study Result Workflow
Dashboard Early Detection System (EDS) EDS: Study Dashboard Processes EDS: Study Dashboard Study Study Dashboard View View One Study Result Workflow Note : The View One Study Result workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing a study that integrates appointment and repair order data collected by the Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the View One Study Result workflow. Define or Modify Study Workflow Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow
Dashboard Early Detection System (EDS) Hold Status Processes Study View Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow Note: The Manage Early Detection System Studies workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing Early Detection System (EDS) studies that integrate appointment and repair order data collected by the Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow. Define or Modify a Study Workflow View One Study Result Workflow View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow
Dashboard Early Detection System (EDS) EDS: Study Dashboard Processes EDS: Study Dashboard Study Study Dashboard View View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow Note : The View a Dealer's Study Results workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing one dealer's study results that integrate appointment and repair order data collected by the Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the View a Dealer's Study Results workflow. Define or Modify a Study Workflow Manage Early Detection Studies Workflow View One Study Result Workflow
The Batch Validate function is available from the Edit/Create Warranty Claim, Express Entry Warranty Claim, and Quick Entry Warranty claim pages. This function sends the claim to the DBS batch-validate queue and validates the claim in the background; allowing you to proceed to the next claim. To perform a batch validation on a warranty claim: Access the desired warranty claim. Note : See the Step by Step tab in full help to view the steps for accessing a warranty claim. Once you have finished entering in all the information for a claim, click the Batch Validate button at the bottom of the screen from the Edit/Create Warranty Claim, Express Entry Warranty Claim, or the Quick Entry Warranty claim page. Note : DBS sends this claim to the batch-validate queue and validates the claim in the background. The cursor automatically goes back to the Repair Order field at the top of the page for you to begin entering the next RO.
Batch Validate a Warranty Claim To perform a batch validation on a warranty claim: If necessary, access the repair order. In the Repair Order field, type the appropriate RO number. In the Line Number field, type the appropriate line number. Click the Search icon. Note : DBS populates the page with data from the repair order. Review these fields and update them as needed before proceeding to the next step. Click the Batch Validate button. Note : DBS sends this claim to the batch-validate queue and validates the claim in the background. The cursor automatically goes back to the Repair Order field at the top of the page for you to begin entering the next RO. Repeat steps 1 - 4 until you have entered all ROs/line numbers.
Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Edit Warranty Claims Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Warranty Claims Edit or Create Warranty Claims Workflow *** Nissan Canada Inc. (NCI) recommends dealers create Warranty Claims in an NCI DBS certified dealer management system and then log into NCI DBS to review, validate and submit the claim to NCI. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating and editing claims. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Warranty Claims Workflow or View Warranty Claims Workflow. Manage Warranty Claims Workflow View Warranty Claims Workflow
The Batch Validate function is available from the Edit/Create Warranty Claim, Express Entry Warranty Claim, and Quick Entry Warranty claim pages. This function sends the claim to the DBS batch-validate queue and validates the claim in the background; allowing you to proceed to the next claim. To perform a batch validation on a warranty claim: Access the desired warranty claim. Note : See the Step by Step tab in full help to view the steps for accessing a warranty claim. Once you have finished entering in all the information for a claim, click the Batch Validate button at the bottom of the screen from the Edit/Create Warranty Claim, Express Entry Warranty Claim, or the Quick Entry Warranty claim page. Note : DBS sends this claim to the batch-validate queue and validates the claim in the background. The cursor automatically goes back to the Repair Order field at the top of the page for you to begin entering the next RO.
Batch Validate a Warranty Claim To perform a batch validation on a warranty claim: If necessary, access the repair order. In the Repair Order field, type the appropriate RO number. In the Line Number field, type the appropriate line number. Click the Search icon. Note : DBS populates the page with data from the repair order. Review these fields and update them as needed before proceeding to the next step. Click the Batch Validate button. Note : DBS sends this claim to the batch-validate queue and validates the claim in the background. The cursor automatically goes back to the Repair Order field at the top of the page for you to begin entering the next RO. Repeat steps 1 - 4 until you have entered all ROs/line numbers.
Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Edit Warranty Claims Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Warranty Claims Edit or Create Warranty Claims Workflow *** Nissan Canada Inc. (NCI) recommends dealers create Warranty Claims in an NCI DBS certified dealer management system and then log into NCI DBS to review, validate and submit the claim to NCI. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating and editing claims. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Warranty Claims Workflow or View Warranty Claims Workflow. Manage Warranty Claims Workflow View Warranty Claims Workflow
The Batch Validate function is available from the Edit/Create Warranty Claim, Express Entry Warranty Claim, and Quick Entry Warranty claim pages. This function sends the claim to the DBS batch-validate queue and validates the claim in the background; allowing you to proceed to the next claim. To perform a batch validation on a warranty claim: Access the desired warranty claim. Note : See the Step by Step tab in full help to view the steps for accessing a warranty claim. Once you have finished entering in all the information for a claim, click the Batch Validate button at the bottom of the screen from the Edit/Create Warranty Claim, Express Entry Warranty Claim, or the Quick Entry Warranty claim page. Note : DBS sends this claim to the batch-validate queue and validates the claim in the background. The cursor automatically goes back to the Repair Order field at the top of the page for you to begin entering the next RO.
Batch Validate a Warranty Claim To perform a batch validation on a warranty claim: If necessary, access the repair order. In the Repair Order field, type the appropriate RO number. In the Line Number field, type the appropriate line number. Click the Search icon. Note : DBS populates the page with data from the repair order. Review these fields and update them as needed before proceeding to the next step. Click the Batch Validate button. Note : DBS sends this claim to the batch-validate queue and validates the claim in the background. The cursor automatically goes back to the Repair Order field at the top of the page for you to begin entering the next RO. Repeat steps 1 - 4 until you have entered all ROs/line numbers.
Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Edit Warranty Claims Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Warranty Claims Edit or Create Warranty Claims Workflow *** Nissan Canada Inc. (NCI) recommends dealers create Warranty Claims in an NCI DBS certified dealer management system and then log into NCI DBS to review, validate and submit the claim to NCI. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating and editing claims. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Warranty Claims Workflow or View Warranty Claims Workflow. Manage Warranty Claims Workflow View Warranty Claims Workflow
To view NSH (National Service History) from the View Warranty Claim page: At the bottom of the page, click the NSH button. Note : The National Service History window opens. Click Print to print the NSH report, or click Close to return to the previous screen. You can view NSH information regardless of the status of a claim.
View NSH from View Warranty Claim Page To view NSH (National Service History): At the bottom of the page, click the NSH button. Note : The National Service History window opens. Click the Expand and Collapse buttons to view the sections of the NSH detail. If desired, click the Print button to print the NSH detail. When you have finished reviewing the NSH information, click the Close button to return to the View Warranty Claim page. You can view NSH information regardless of the status of a claim.
View Warranty Claim View Warranty Claims View Warranty Claims Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing warranty claims. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the (Insert workflow title) Workflow. Edit or Create Warranty Claims Workflow Manage Warranty Claims Workflow
Manage Parts Return Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing parts returns. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Parts Return Workflow. Create Parts Return Workflow Modify Parts Return Workflow
User Summary Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for editing user permissions. Related Workflows The following workflow may have one or more tasks in common with the User Summary workflow . View User Permissions Workflow
To access the Support page from any DBS application page: Click the Support link.
Access the Support Page To access the Support page from any DBS application page: Click the Support link.
To filter the Alerts summary list: From the Filter By drop-down list, select a filter option. If a text-entry field appears, type a filter value and then click the Search icon. If a drop-down list appears, select an option from the list. Note : The page refreshes to display only those alerts that match your selection. Note : To reset the filter criteria to the default options and clear the search criteria, click the Clear icon.
Filter the Alerts Summary List To filter the alerts summary list: From the Filter By drop-down list, select a filter option. If a text-entry field appears, type a filter value and then click the Search icon. If a drop-down list appears, select an option from the list. Note : The page refreshes to display only those alerts that match your selection. Note : To reset the filter criteria to the default options and clear the search criteria, click the Clear icon.
Alerts Create Edit Modify Processes Create or Edit an Alert Workflow Note : This workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating or editing an alert. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create or Edit an Alert Workflow. Create or Edit an Announcement Workflow Create or Edit a Calendar Event Workflow Create or Edit a Notification Workflow
To delete a parts return from the Create or Edit Parts Return page: Click the Delete Entire Return button. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm, or click the No button to close the window without confirming. To delete a parts return, the return must be in "New" or "Open" status.
Delete a Parts Return from the Create or Edit Parts Return Page To delete a parts return from the Create or Edit Parts Return page: Click the Delete Entire Return button. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm, or click the No button to close the window without confirming. To delete a parts return, the return must be in "New" or "Open" status.
Create Return Create Return Create Return Create Parts Return Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating a parts return. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create Parts Return Workflow. Manage Parts Return Workflow Modify Parts Return Workflow
Edit Return Edit Return Edit Return Edit Parts Return Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for modifying a parts return. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Edit Parts Return Workflow. Create Parts Return Workflow Manage Parts Return Workflow
To export a parts return from the Edit or Create Parts Return page: Click the Export button. Note : The download begins automatically. Follow your browser-specific instructions to open or save the download file.
Export a Parts Return from the Create or Edit Parts Return Page To export a parts return from the Edit or Create Parts Return page: Click the Export button. Note : The download begins automatically. Follow your browser-specific instructions to open or save the download file.
To look up a dealer number: Beside the Select Dealer field, click the Lookup icon. Note : The Dealer Lookup window opens. To search for a dealer by number, in the Dealer field, type the full or partial number. To search for a dealer by name, in the Dealer Name field, type the full or partial dealer name. Press the Enter key. Select the option button for the desired dealer. Click the Select button. Note : The Dealer Lookup window closes and the name of the dealer appears in the Dealer Name field.
Look up a Dealer To look up a dealer number: Beside the Select Dealer field, click the Lookup icon. Note : The Dealer Lookup window opens. To search for a dealer by number, in the Dealer field, type the full or partial number. -OR- To search for a dealer by name, in the Dealer Name field, type the full or partial dealer name. Press the Enter key. Select the option button for the desired dealer. Click the Select button. Note : The Dealer Lookup window closes and the name of the dealer appears in the Dealer Name field. To clear your search criteria, click the Clear icon. To cancel the lookup, click the Cancel button.
Customer Customer Pay Reimbursement Reimbursement Customer Pay Reimbursement Customer Pay Reimbursement View Customer Pay Reimbursement Analysis Workflow : Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for customer pay reimbursement analysis.
To delete a summary page display configuration: Select the page definition you want to delete. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Delete option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm the deletion, or the No button to cancel the deletion. Click the Close button.
Delete a Summary Page Display Definition To delete a summary page display configuration: Select the page definition you want to delete. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Delete option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm the deletion, or the No button to cancel the deletion. Click the Close button.
To delete a summary page display configuration: Select the page definition you want to delete. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Delete option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm the deletion, or the No button to cancel the deletion. Click the Close button.
Delete a Summary Page Display Definition To delete a summary page display configuration: Select the page definition you want to delete. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Delete option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm the deletion, or the No button to cancel the deletion. Click the Close button.
To delete a summary page display configuration: Select the page definition you want to delete. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Delete option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm the deletion, or the No button to cancel the deletion. Click the Close button.
Delete a Summary Page Display Definition To delete a summary page display configuration: Select the page definition you want to delete. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Delete option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm the deletion, or the No button to cancel the deletion. Click the Close button.
To delete a summary page display configuration: Select the page definition you want to delete. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Delete option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm the deletion, or the No button to cancel the deletion. Click the Close button.
Delete a Summary Page Display Definition To delete a summary page display configuration: Select the page definition you want to delete. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Delete option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm the deletion, or the No button to cancel the deletion. Click the Close button.
To delete a summary page display configuration: Select the page definition you want to delete. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Delete option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm the deletion, or the No button to cancel the deletion. Click the Close button.
Delete a Summary Page Display Definition To delete a summary page display configuration: Select the page definition you want to delete. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Delete option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm the deletion, or the No button to cancel the deletion. Click the Close button.
To delete a summary page display configuration: Select the page definition you want to delete. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Delete option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm the deletion, or the No button to cancel the deletion. Click the Close button.
Delete a Summary Page Display Definition To delete a summary page display configuration: Select the page definition you want to delete. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Delete option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm the deletion, or the No button to cancel the deletion. Click the Close button.
To delete a summary page display configuration: Select the page definition you want to delete. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Delete option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm the deletion, or the No button to cancel the deletion. Click the Close button.
Delete a Summary Page Display Definition To delete a summary page display configuration: Select the page definition you want to delete. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Delete option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm the deletion, or the No button to cancel the deletion. Click the Close button.
View Overview Information Site Map Page Overview Perform Tasks Access an Application Page from the Site Map Browse the Site Map Perform Common DBS Tasks Search the Site Map Access an Application Page from the Site Map Browse the Site Map Perform Common DBS Tasks Search the Site Map
Reports Introduction Description The Dealer Business System (DBS) provides access to Host (system-generated) reports, as well as custom-defined reports created in Report Writer. You can view and print the Host reports at any time. With Report Writer, you can define and generate reports to meet your needs. Report Writer also allows you to modify or copy your report definitions and transfer the definitions to other users. Note : The items you see in the menu tabs and menu links vary based on your permissions. If you need to request changes to your permissions, please contact your dealership's System Administrator. You can find the System Administrator(s) for you dealership by viewing your profile. For more information, click here . The Reports menu in DBS help is unique in that it appears in every section because the Reports menu options are available from each menu tab. When you first begin using DBS and the DBS help system, we recommend that you review the help system menu and then view the page overview, workflow, and task information for the tasks you will be performing in DBS .
Reports Introduction Description The Dealer Business System (DBS) provides access to Host (system-generated) reports, as well as custom-defined reports created in Report Writer. You can view and print the Host reports at any time. With Report Writer, you can define and generate reports to meet your needs. Report Writer also allows you to modify or copy your report definitions and transfer the definitions to other users. Note : The items you see in the menu tabs and menu links vary based on your permissions. If you need to request changes to your permissions, please contact your dealership's System Administrator. You can find the System Administrator(s) for you dealership by viewing your profile. For more information, click here . The Reports menu in DBS help is unique in that it appears in every section because the Reports menu options are available from each menu tab. When you first begin using DBS and the DBS help system, we recommend that you review the help system menu and then view the page overview, workflow, and task information for the tasks you will be performing in DBS .
Reports Introduction Description The Dealer Business System (DBS) provides access to Host (system-generated) reports, as well as custom-defined reports created in Report Writer. You can view and print the Host reports at any time. With Report Writer, you can define and generate reports to meet your needs. Report Writer also allows you to modify or copy your report definitions and transfer the definitions to other users. Note : The items you see in the menu tabs and menu links vary based on your permissions. If you need to request changes to your permissions, please contact your dealership's System Administrator. You can find the System Administrator(s) for you dealership by viewing your profile. For more information, click here . The Reports menu in DBS help is unique in that it appears in every section because the Reports menu options are available from each menu tab. When you first begin using DBS and the DBS help system, we recommend that you review the help system menu and then view the page overview, workflow, and task information for the tasks you will be performing in DBS .
Reports Introduction Description The Dealer Business System (DBS) provides access to Host (system-generated) reports, as well as custom-defined reports created in Report Writer. You can view and print the Host reports at any time. With Report Writer, you can define and generate reports to meet your needs. Report Writer also allows you to modify or copy your report definitions and transfer the definitions to other users. Note : The items you see in the menu tabs and menu links vary based on your permissions. If you need to request changes to your permissions, please contact your dealership's System Administrator. You can find the System Administrator(s) for you dealership by viewing your profile. For more information, click here . The Reports menu in DBS help is unique in that it appears in every section because the Reports menu options are available from each menu tab. When you first begin using DBS and the DBS help system, we recommend that you review the help system menu and then view the page overview, workflow, and task information for the tasks you will be performing in DBS .
Reports Introduction Description The Dealer Business System (DBS) provides access to Host (system-generated) reports, as well as custom-defined reports created in Report Writer. You can view and print the Host reports at any time. With Report Writer, you can define and generate reports to meet your needs. Report Writer also allows you to modify or copy your report definitions and transfer the definitions to other users. Note : The items you see in the menu tabs and menu links vary based on your permissions. If you need to request changes to your permissions, please contact your dealership's System Administrator. You can find the System Administrator(s) for you dealership by viewing your profile. For more information, click here . The Reports menu in DBS help is unique in that it appears in every section because the Reports menu options are available from each menu tab. When you first begin using DBS and the DBS help system, we recommend that you review the help system menu and then view the page overview, workflow, and task information for the tasks you will be performing in DBS .
Site Map Search Results Page Overview Purpose Use the Site Map Search Results page to review the links that match the search criteria you entered on the Site Map page. Description The content area of the Site Map Search Results page displays the following sections: Search Results - The Search Results section allows you to quickly navigate to any hyperlinked page Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Site Map Search Results page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Open an Application Page Open an Application Page Page Preview
To add a key word to a standard operation category or standard operation code: In the Key Words field, type a key word or phrase. Click the Add icon. Note : The key word or phrase appears in the list of key words. The steps for adding a key word are the same for standard operation categories and standard operation codes.
Add a Key Word To add a key word to a standard operation category or standard operation code: In the Key Words field, type a key word or phrase. Click the Add icon. Note : The key word or phrase appears in the list of key words.
ReRun Standard Operation Category Translation Manage Standard Operation Categories Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing and creating standard operation categories. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Standard Operation Categories Workflow. Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes Workflow Manage Dealer Operation Codes Workflow Manage Standard Operation Codes Workflow
Standard Operation Codes Standard Operation Code Standard Operation Codes Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating or editing standard operation groups and codes. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes workflow. Manage Dealer Operation Codes Workflow Manage Standard Operation Categories Workflow Manage Standard Operation Codes Workflow
To add a key word to a standard operation category or standard operation code: In the Key Words field, type a key word or phrase. Click the Add icon. Note : The key word or phrase appears in the list of key words. The steps for adding a key word are the same for standard operation categories and standard operation codes.
Add a Key Word To add a key word to a standard operation category or standard operation code: In the Key Words field, type a key word or phrase. Click the Add icon. Note : The key word or phrase appears in the list of key words.
ReRun Standard Operation Category Translation Manage Standard Operation Categories Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing and creating standard operation categories. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Standard Operation Categories Workflow. Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes Workflow Manage Dealer Operation Codes Workflow Manage Standard Operation Codes Workflow
Standard Operation Codes Standard Operation Code Standard Operation Codes Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating or editing standard operation groups and codes. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes workflow. Manage Dealer Operation Codes Workflow Manage Standard Operation Categories Workflow Manage Standard Operation Codes Workflow
To add a key word to a standard operation category or standard operation code: In the Key Words field, type a key word or phrase. Click the Add icon. Note : The key word or phrase appears in the list of key words. The steps for adding a key word are the same for standard operation categories and standard operation codes.
Add a Key Word To add a key word to a standard operation category or standard operation code: In the Key Words field, type a key word or phrase. Click the Add icon. Note : The key word or phrase appears in the list of key words.
ReRun Standard Operation Category Translation Manage Standard Operation Categories Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing and creating standard operation categories. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Standard Operation Categories Workflow. Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes Workflow Manage Dealer Operation Codes Workflow Manage Standard Operation Codes Workflow
Standard Operation Codes Standard Operation Code Standard Operation Codes Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating or editing standard operation groups and codes. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes workflow. Manage Dealer Operation Codes Workflow Manage Standard Operation Categories Workflow Manage Standard Operation Codes Workflow
View Overview Information Manage Invalid Postal Codes Page Overview Perform Tasks Confirm Validated Temporary Postal Codes Fix an Invalid Postal Code Perform Common DBS Tasks Update a Not Yet Valid Postal Code
As of February 1, 2018 - dealers will no longer need to submit warranty claims for PDI fuel and labor charges. All PDI charges will automatically be paid to the dealer when the vehicle is invoiced to the retailer. Dealers should review the Automated PDI Payments Quick Reference Guide and/or contact the PDI help desk at 615-725-0588 with any questions or concerns. Note : Any warranty claims submitted for PDI charges after February 1 st will be automatically suspended. To create an express warranty claim: Complete each section of the warranty claim. Click the links below for instructions on how to complete/view these sections: Summary Claim Information Parts Operations Expenses Comments Customer Summary Claim Information Parts Operations Expenses Comments Customer Click the Save button to save your changes. Note : To validate the information in the claim, click the Validate button. Any errors that exist will be identified in red text. Errors must be corrected in order for the Submit button to be active. To submit a claim with no errors, click the Submit button. You can save a warranty claim with warnings and error messages, and update the claim at a later time.
Create an Express Entry Warranty Claim As of February 1, 2018 - dealers will no longer need to submit warranty claims for PDI fuel and labor charges. All PDI charges will automatically be paid to the dealer when the vehicle is invoiced to the retailer. Dealers should review the Automated PDI Payments Quick Reference Guide and/or contact the PDI help desk at 615-725-0588 with any questions or concerns. Note : Any warranty claims submitted for PDI charges after February 1 st will be automatically suspended. To create an express warranty claim: Complete each section of the warranty claim. Click the links below for instructions on how to complete/view these sections: Summary Claim Information Parts Operations Expenses Comments Customer Summary Claim Information Parts Operations Expenses Comments Customer Click the Save button to save your changes, or click one of the other warranty claim action buttons. Navigate Using Quick Keys Use the quick keys below to navigate the sections of a warranty claim. CTRL+2 = Claim Info CTRL+3 = Parts CTRL+4 = Operations CTRL+5 = Expenses CTRL+6 = Comments CTRL+7 = Customer
View Overview Information Report Writer Copy or Transfer Report Page Overview Change User, Copy All, Transfer All, or Delete All Report Definitions Workflow Copy, Transfer, Delete, or Make Report Definition Public Workflow Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Workflow Perform Tasks Perform Common DBS Tasks Select a User to Receive Report Definitions Perform Common DBS Tasks Select a User to Receive Report Definitions
Create Edit Modify Processes Report Writer Report Writer Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating, modifying, or replicating a personalized report definition in Report Writer. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create, Modify, or Replicate Report Definition Workflow. Change User in Report Writer Workflow Copy All, Transfer All, or Delete All Report Definitions Workflow Copy, Transfer, Delete, or Make a Report Definition Public Workflow Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow View a Host Report Workflow
Copy, Transfer, Delete, or Make Report Definition Public Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for copying, transferring, or deleting a report definition in Report Writer. The diagram also illustrates the workflow for changing a report definition to public or private. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Copy, Transfer, Delete, or Make Report Definition Public Workflow. Change User in Report Writer Workflow Copy All, Transfer All, or Delete All Report Definitions Workflow Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Workflow Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow View a Host Report Workflow
Copy All, Transfer All, or Delete All Report Definitions Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for copying, transferring, or deleting all of a user's report definitions in Report Writer. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Copy All, Transfer All, or Delete All Report Definitions Workflow. Change User in Report Writer Workflow Copy, Transfer, Delete, or Make Report Definition Public Workflow Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Workflow Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow View a Host Report Workflow
Complete the Co-Buyer section when financial or legal liability for the vehicle is vested in more than one person. For example: A father co-signs a loan for his daughter. To complete the optional Co-Buyer section of an RDR: From the Title drop-down list, select a title. Enter or update the co-buyer name, address, and contact information. Note : Type all 9s in the Daytime or Evening field if the buyer does not have a phone. In the Email field, type the co-buyer email address. Note : Type three asterisks (*) if the co-buyer does not have an email address. Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. A will display for any missing or incorrect data. Correct all errors before submitting the RDR. Note : If you are ready to submit the RDR, click here for more information.
Complete the Co-Buyer Section of an RDR To complete the Co-Buyer section of an RDR: From the Title drop-down list, select a title. Enter or update the co-buyer name, address, and contact information. Note : Type all 9s in the Daytime or Evening field if the buyer does not have a phone. In the Email field, type the co-buyer email address. Note : Type three asterisks (*) if the co-buyer does not have an email address. Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. A will display for any missing or incorrect data. Correct all errors before submitting the RDR. Note : If you are ready to submit the RDR, click here for more information.
Processes RDR RDR RDR a Vehicle Workflow Note : This workflow is for NNA users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for retail delivery reporting (RDR) or editing the sale of a vehicle. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Report or Edit the Sale of a Vehicle workflow. Vehicle Inventory Workflow Inventory Search Workflow View RDR History Workflow
To open the View Dealer Permissions page: Select the dealer. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the View Dealer Permissions option. Note : The application displays a function tree. The tree lists the items that are assigned to the specific dealer.
Open the View Dealer Permissions Page To open the View Dealer Permissions page: Select the dealer. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the View Dealer Permissions option. Note : The application displays a function tree. The tree lists the items that are assigned to the specific dealer.
Note : You can only delete warranty claims in New, Open, Error, Warning, Suspended-dealer, or Rejected status. Proceed with caution - you cannot recover a deleted warranty claim. To delete a warranty claim from the Quick Entry Warranty Claim page: Click the Delete button. Click the Yes button to confirm the deletion. Note : DBS deletes the warranty claim from the system and displays the Manage Warranty Claim page.
Delete a Warranty Claim Note : You can only delete warranty claims in New, Open, Error, Warning, Suspended-dealer, or Rejected status. Proceed with caution - you cannot recover a deleted warranty claim. To delete a warranty claim from the Edit/Create Warranty Claim page: Click the Delete button. Click the Yes button to confirm the deletion. Note : DBS deletes the warranty claim from the system and displays the Manage Warranty Claim page.
Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Edit Warranty Claims Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Warranty Claims Edit or Create Warranty Claims Workflow *** Nissan Canada Inc. (NCI) recommends dealers create Warranty Claims in an NCI DBS certified dealer management system and then log into NCI DBS to review, validate and submit the claim to NCI. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating and editing claims. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Warranty Claims Workflow or View Warranty Claims Workflow. Manage Warranty Claims Workflow View Warranty Claims Workflow
View Overview Information View Parts Order Page Overview View Parts Order Workflow Perform Tasks Cancel a Backorder Perform Common DBS Tasks Perform CSC Upgrade for a VOR or TOS Order in Backorder Status View Parts Order View Related Order Detail for a CSC Order Perform Common DBS Tasks View Parts Order
View View Orders View Order View Order View Order View View Order View Orders View Order View Parts Order Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing a submitted parts order. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the View Parts Order Workflow. Create Parts Order Workflow Edit Parts Order Workflow Manage Parts Order Workflow Inquire on the Availability of Parts at the Parts Distribution Centers Workflow
To print the criteria for a study: Select the study for which you want to print the study criteria. Click the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Print Study Criteria menu option. Select the option to save or open the document. Click the OK button.
Print Study Criteria To print the criteria for a study: Select the study for which you want to print the study criteria. Click the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Print Study Criteria menu option. Select the option to save or open the document. Click the OK button.
3/18 - MH: Graphic has changed on View and Edit Permisions pages. To use a quick jump menu: To open the quick jump menu, click the expand (>>) icon. Click one of the options in the menu. To display a specific section of the page, click a section title in the menu. To show or hide all sections, click the expand all or collapse all link. To jump to the top or bottom of the page, click the top or bottom link. To return to the top of the page from any section, click the Top button. To close the quick jump menu, click the collapse (<<) icon.
3/18 - MH: Graphic has changed on View and Edit Permisions pages. Use the Quick Jump Menu To use the quick jump menu: Click the expand (>>) icon. Click one of the options in the menu. To display a specific section of the page, click a section title in the menu. To show or hide all sections, click the expand all or collapse all link. To jump to the top or bottom of the page, click the top or bottom link. To return to the top of the page from any section, click the Top button. To close the quick jump menu, click the collapse (<<) icon.
To view processing results: Click the View Processing Results link. Note : You see the processing results of the financial statement. Note : If your financial statement status is "Preprocessing Error", please call the help desk for assistance. Click here for information on contacting the help desk.
View Processing Results The View Processing Results link only displays for a statement if the statement was submitted to the corporate financial management system and a response was received. To view processing results: Click the View Processing Results link. Note : You see the processing results of the financial statement in a new window.
Financial Statement Financial Statements Financial Statements Processes Statement Status View Submit Financial Statements Workflow Note : This workflow is for NNA users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for submitting the financial statement.
Note : The Print Warranty Claim function is available from the Edit/Create Warranty Claim, View Warranty Claim, Express Entry Warranty Claim, and Quick Entry Warranty Claim pages. To print a warranty claim from either the Edit/Create Warranty Claim page or the View Warranty Claim page: Click the Print button in the upper-right of the page. If the repair order has more than one line, select whether you want to print the displayed line only, or all claim lines; and then click the Print button. Follow your browser-specific instructions to open or save the print file. Use the Printer icon available in the PDF application toolbar and proceed as you normally would to print a file.
Print a Warranty Claim Note : The Print Warranty Claim function is available from the Edit/Create Warranty Claim, View Warranty Claim, Express Entry Warranty Claim, and Quick Entry Warranty Claim pages. To print a warranty claim: Click the Print button. Note : The File Download window opens. Click the Open button to open the file now or click the Save button to save the file to your computer. Note : If you click the Open button, the warranty claim data opens in a PDF file. If you click the Save button, you can save the PDF to your local computer and then open the file in Adobe Reader or a similar program. Click the Printer icon available in the PDF application toolbar and proceed as you normally would to print a file. Note : The Print Warranty Claim function is available from the Edit/Create Warranty Claim, View Warranty Claim, Express Entry Warranty Claim, and Quick Entry Warranty Claim pages. To print a warranty claim from either the Edit/Create Warranty Claim page or the View Warranty Claim page: Click the Print button in the upper-right portion of the page. If the repair order has more than one line, select whether you want to print the displayed line only, or all claim lines; and then click the Print button. Follow your browser-specific instructions to open or save the print file. Use the Printer icon available in the PDF application toolbar and proceed as you normally would to print a file.
Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Edit Warranty Claims Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Warranty Claims Edit or Create Warranty Claims Workflow *** Nissan Canada Inc. (NCI) recommends dealers create Warranty Claims in an NCI DBS certified dealer management system and then log into NCI DBS to review, validate and submit the claim to NCI. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating and editing claims. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Warranty Claims Workflow or View Warranty Claims Workflow. Manage Warranty Claims Workflow View Warranty Claims Workflow
Manage Warranty Claims Processes Manage Warranty Claims Manage Warranty Claims Manage Warranty Claims Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing warranty claims. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create or Edit Warranty Claims Workflow or View Warranty Claims Workflow. Edit or Create Warranty Claims Workflow View Warranty Claims Workflow
Note : The Print Warranty Claim function is available from the Edit/Create Warranty Claim, View Warranty Claim, Express Entry Warranty Claim, and Quick Entry Warranty Claim pages. To print a warranty claim from either the Edit/Create Warranty Claim page or the View Warranty Claim page: Click the Print button in the upper-right of the page. If the repair order has more than one line, select whether you want to print the displayed line only, or all claim lines; and then click the Print button. Follow your browser-specific instructions to open or save the print file. Use the Printer icon available in the PDF application toolbar and proceed as you normally would to print a file.
Print a Warranty Claim Note : The Print Warranty Claim function is available from the Edit/Create Warranty Claim, View Warranty Claim, Express Entry Warranty Claim, and Quick Entry Warranty Claim pages. To print a warranty claim: Click the Print button. Note : The File Download window opens. Click the Open button to open the file now or click the Save button to save the file to your computer. Note : If you click the Open button, the warranty claim data opens in a PDF file. If you click the Save button, you can save the PDF to your local computer and then open the file in Adobe Reader or a similar program. Click the Printer icon available in the PDF application toolbar and proceed as you normally would to print a file. Note : The Print Warranty Claim function is available from the Edit/Create Warranty Claim, View Warranty Claim, Express Entry Warranty Claim, and Quick Entry Warranty Claim pages. To print a warranty claim from either the Edit/Create Warranty Claim page or the View Warranty Claim page: Click the Print button in the upper-right portion of the page. If the repair order has more than one line, select whether you want to print the displayed line only, or all claim lines; and then click the Print button. Follow your browser-specific instructions to open or save the print file. Use the Printer icon available in the PDF application toolbar and proceed as you normally would to print a file.
Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Edit Warranty Claims Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Warranty Claims Edit or Create Warranty Claims Workflow *** Nissan Canada Inc. (NCI) recommends dealers create Warranty Claims in an NCI DBS certified dealer management system and then log into NCI DBS to review, validate and submit the claim to NCI. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating and editing claims. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Warranty Claims Workflow or View Warranty Claims Workflow. Manage Warranty Claims Workflow View Warranty Claims Workflow
Manage Warranty Claims Processes Manage Warranty Claims Manage Warranty Claims Manage Warranty Claims Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing warranty claims. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create or Edit Warranty Claims Workflow or View Warranty Claims Workflow. Edit or Create Warranty Claims Workflow View Warranty Claims Workflow
Note : The Print Warranty Claim function is available from the Edit/Create Warranty Claim, View Warranty Claim, Express Entry Warranty Claim, and Quick Entry Warranty Claim pages. To print a warranty claim from either the Edit/Create Warranty Claim page or the View Warranty Claim page: Click the Print button in the upper-right of the page. If the repair order has more than one line, select whether you want to print the displayed line only, or all claim lines; and then click the Print button. Follow your browser-specific instructions to open or save the print file. Use the Printer icon available in the PDF application toolbar and proceed as you normally would to print a file.
Print a Warranty Claim Note : The Print Warranty Claim function is available from the Edit/Create Warranty Claim, View Warranty Claim, Express Entry Warranty Claim, and Quick Entry Warranty Claim pages. To print a warranty claim: Click the Print button. Note : The File Download window opens. Click the Open button to open the file now or click the Save button to save the file to your computer. Note : If you click the Open button, the warranty claim data opens in a PDF file. If you click the Save button, you can save the PDF to your local computer and then open the file in Adobe Reader or a similar program. Click the Printer icon available in the PDF application toolbar and proceed as you normally would to print a file. Note : The Print Warranty Claim function is available from the Edit/Create Warranty Claim, View Warranty Claim, Express Entry Warranty Claim, and Quick Entry Warranty Claim pages. To print a warranty claim from either the Edit/Create Warranty Claim page or the View Warranty Claim page: Click the Print button in the upper-right portion of the page. If the repair order has more than one line, select whether you want to print the displayed line only, or all claim lines; and then click the Print button. Follow your browser-specific instructions to open or save the print file. Use the Printer icon available in the PDF application toolbar and proceed as you normally would to print a file.
Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Edit Warranty Claims Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Warranty Claims Edit or Create Warranty Claims Workflow *** Nissan Canada Inc. (NCI) recommends dealers create Warranty Claims in an NCI DBS certified dealer management system and then log into NCI DBS to review, validate and submit the claim to NCI. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating and editing claims. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Warranty Claims Workflow or View Warranty Claims Workflow. Manage Warranty Claims Workflow View Warranty Claims Workflow
Manage Warranty Claims Processes Manage Warranty Claims Manage Warranty Claims Manage Warranty Claims Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing warranty claims. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create or Edit Warranty Claims Workflow or View Warranty Claims Workflow. Edit or Create Warranty Claims Workflow View Warranty Claims Workflow
Edit the Campaign Master Information for a Campaign To edit the campaign master information for a campaign: Select the campaign for which you want to edit the campaign master information. Move your cursor over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Edit menu option. From the Repair By drop-down list, select whether the repair is applicable to dealer or dealer and fleet facilities. From the Stop Sale drop-down list, select whether or not dealers should stop sales of vehicles associated with this campaign until the required repairs have been completed. Move your cursor over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Save menu option.
Edit the Campaign Master Information for a Campaign To edit the campaign master information for a campaign: Select the campaign for which you want to edit the campaign master information. Move your cursor over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Edit menu option. From the Repair By drop-down list, select whether the repair is applicable to dealer or dealer and fleet facilities. From the Stop Sale drop-down list, select whether or not dealers should stop sales of vehicles associated with this campaign until the required repairs have been completed. Note : Dealers will receive a warning if they try to RDR a vehicle with an open Stop Sale campaign. Dealers will then have the opportunity to acknowledge the warning and continue the RDR, or to cancel the RDR. Move your cursor over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Save menu option.
System Monitoring Pages The table below provides a brief description of the system monitoring pages in the Dealer Business System (DBS) . Page Name Description Application Auditing Displays the information collected by the logging function in DBS . The type of information collected for each record varies based on the logging level selected at the time the information was logged. Monitor System Displays information about the overall health of DBS and the host environment. Monitors response time and system availability for each application. Monitor User Status Displays the transaction and system access information for an individual DBS user. Monitor Transaction Displays transaction errors and response time information for individual transactions in DBS . Transaction Status Displays information about the status of individual transactions within DBS and provides a hyperlink to individual transaction details.
To access the Edit Parts Order page: Select the parts order you want to edit. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Edit Order option. Note : The Edit Parts Order page displays. The Edit option is available only if the order status is "New" or "Open." For all other statuses, use the View option. To modify a parts order, the order must be in "New" or "Open" status.
Open the Edit Parts Order Page To open the Edit Parts Order page: Select the parts order you want to edit. Move your cursor over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Edit Order option. Note : The Edit Parts Order page displays. The Edit option is available only if the order status is "New" or "Open." For all other statuses, use the View option. To modify a parts order, the order must be in "New" or "Open" status.
Edit Edit Order Edit Order Edit SVC Order Edit Order Edit Order Edit SVC Order Edit Order Edit Order Edit Order Edit SVC Order Edit Order Edit Order Edit Parts Order Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for modifying an existing new or open parts order. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Edit Parts Order Workflow. Create Parts Order Workflow Manage Parts Order Workflow Inquire on the Availability of Parts at the Parts Distribution Centers Workflow View Parts Order Workflow
Manage Orders Manage Orders Manage Orders Manage Orders Parts Order Management Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing parts orders. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Parts Order workflow. Create Parts Order Workflow Edit Parts Order Workflow Inquire on the Availability of Parts at the Parts Distribution Centers Workflow View Parts Order Workflow Create Parts Order Workflow Edit Parts Order Workflow View Parts Order Workflow
To access the Edit Parts Order page: Select the parts order you want to edit. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Edit Order option. Note : The Edit Parts Order page displays. The Edit option is available only if the order status is "New" or "Open." For all other statuses, use the View option. To modify a parts order, the order must be in "New" or "Open" status.
Open the Edit Parts Order Page To open the Edit Parts Order page: Select the parts order you want to edit. Move your cursor over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Edit Order option. Note : The Edit Parts Order page displays. The Edit option is available only if the order status is "New" or "Open." For all other statuses, use the View option. To modify a parts order, the order must be in "New" or "Open" status.
Edit Edit Order Edit Order Edit SVC Order Edit Order Edit Order Edit SVC Order Edit Order Edit Order Edit Order Edit SVC Order Edit Order Edit Order Edit Parts Order Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for modifying an existing new or open parts order. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Edit Parts Order Workflow. Create Parts Order Workflow Manage Parts Order Workflow Inquire on the Availability of Parts at the Parts Distribution Centers Workflow View Parts Order Workflow
Manage Orders Manage Orders Manage Orders Manage Orders Parts Order Management Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing parts orders. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Parts Order workflow. Create Parts Order Workflow Edit Parts Order Workflow Inquire on the Availability of Parts at the Parts Distribution Centers Workflow View Parts Order Workflow Create Parts Order Workflow Edit Parts Order Workflow View Parts Order Workflow
To release a vehicle from dealer hold: For the vehicle you want to release, move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Release option. Click the Release button to confirm. Note : You cannot undo a vehicle release. If you release a vehicle from dealer hold, the vehicle is released and the repair order is removed from the hold study result display. The Release Vehicle option is only available for vehicles that have been confirmed as held by the servicing dealer.
Release a Vehicle from Dealer Hold To release a vehicle from dealer hold: For the vehicle you want to release, move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Release option. Click the Release button to confirm. Note : You cannot undo a vehicle release. If you release a vehicle from dealer hold, the vehicle is released and the repair order is removed from the hold study result display. The Release Vehicle option is only available for vehicles that have been confirmed as held by the servicing dealer.
Early Detection System (EDS) EDS: Study Dashboard Processes EDS: Study Dashboard Study Study Dashboard Technical Service Bulletin (TSB) Create or Modify a Study Workflow Note : The Create or Modify a Study workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for defining or modifying a study that integrates appointment and repair order data collected by the Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Define or Modify a Study Workflow. Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow View One Study Result Workflow
Dashboard Early Detection System (EDS) EDS: Study Dashboard Processes EDS: Study Dashboard Study Study Dashboard View View One Study Result Workflow Note : The View One Study Result workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing a study that integrates appointment and repair order data collected by the Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the View One Study Result workflow. Define or Modify Study Workflow Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow
Dashboard Early Detection System (EDS) Hold Status Processes Study View Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow Note: The Manage Early Detection System Studies workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing Early Detection System (EDS) studies that integrate appointment and repair order data collected by the Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow. Define or Modify a Study Workflow View One Study Result Workflow View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow
Dashboard Early Detection System (EDS) EDS: Study Dashboard Processes EDS: Study Dashboard Study Study Dashboard View View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow Note : The View a Dealer's Study Results workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing one dealer's study results that integrate appointment and repair order data collected by the Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the View a Dealer's Study Results workflow. Define or Modify a Study Workflow Manage Early Detection Studies Workflow View One Study Result Workflow
Note : This task applies to internal users only. To look up a part from the Campaign Part Management page: At the end of the Part Number field, click the Lookup icon. Note : The Part Lookup page appears. In the fields provided, type full or partial information. Note : You must include an asterisk (*) when typing partial information. Note : To remove search criteria, click the Clear icon. Click the Search icon. Note : DBS displays a list of records matching the search criteria in the Parts section. Select the part. Note : DBS displays part detail in the Part Detail section. To determine if the part is superseded, scroll down in the Part Detail section. Note : If a "Y" appears in the Supersession Flag field, the part is superseded. Note : The new part number appears in the New Part field above the Supersession Flag field. If the part is superseded, copy the value in the New Part field, paste it into the Part Number field, and repeat steps 3-6. To select the part, click the Select button. Note : To cancel the lookup, click the Cancel button.
Look Up a Part from the Campaign Part Management Page Note : This task applies to internal users only. To look up a part from the Campaign Part Management page:
Campaign Campaign Part Management Campaign Parts Campaign Campaign Part Management Campaign Part Management Manage Campaign Parts Workflow Note : This workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing campaign parts. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Campaign Parts Workflow. View Service Campaign Order Workflow Manage Service Campaign Order Workflow
This section of a study is not required, but provides the opportunity to customize or limit a study's results. Use optional study sections to clearly define study parameters, but use caution as conflicting selections will result in no data being returned. DBS maintains repair order information for the body types available during the current model year and five previous model years (ten previous model years for Infiniti), beginning from the 2011 model year for both divisions. If desired, you can select one or more body types to limit the study results. To complete the Body Type section of a study: Select each body type which should be included in the study, and then use the center buttons as necessary to customize the Selected Body Types list. When you have selected all desired climatic zones, click the Save button.
Complete the Body Type Section of a Study This section of a study is not required, but provides the opportunity to customize or limit a study's results. Use optional study sections to clearly define study parameters, but use caution as conflicting selections will result in no data being returned. DBS maintains repair order information for the body types available during the current model year and five previous model years (ten previous model years for Infiniti), beginning from the 2011 model year for both divisions. If desired, you can select one or more body types to limit the study results. To complete the Body Type section of a study: Select each body type which should be included in the study, and then use the center buttons as necessary to customize the Selected Body Types list. When you have selected all desired climatic zones, click the Save button.
Early Detection System (EDS) EDS: Study Dashboard Processes EDS: Study Dashboard Study Study Dashboard Technical Service Bulletin (TSB) Create or Modify a Study Workflow Note : The Create or Modify a Study workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for defining or modifying a study that integrates appointment and repair order data collected by the Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Define or Modify a Study Workflow. Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow View One Study Result Workflow
Host Reports Quick Reference Guide The Host Reports Quick Reference Guide provides information for Host report users on how to find and print Host reports, add reports to your favorites list, and print overnight reports. Click here to download the Host Reports Quick Reference Guide.
Host Reports Quick Reference Guide The Host Reports Quick Reference Guide provides information for Host report users on how to find and print Host reports, add reports to your favorites list, and print overnight reports. Click here to download the Host Reports Quick Reference Guide.
Host Reports Quick Reference Guide The Host Reports Quick Reference Guide provides information for Host report users on how to find and print Host reports, add reports to your favorites list, and print overnight reports. Click here to download the Host Reports Quick Reference Guide.
Host Reports Quick Reference Guide The Host Reports Quick Reference Guide provides information for Host report users on how to find and print Host reports, add reports to your favorites list, and print overnight reports. Click here to download the Host Reports Quick Reference Guide.
Host Reports Quick Reference Guide The Host Reports Quick Reference Guide provides information for Host report users on how to find and print Host reports, add reports to your favorites list, and print overnight reports. Click here to download the Host Reports Quick Reference Guide.
Host Reports Quick Reference Guide The Host Reports Quick Reference Guide provides information for Host report users on how to find and print Host reports, add reports to your favorites list, and print overnight reports. Click here to download the Host Reports Quick Reference Guide.
To complete the Vehicle section of a used vehicle RDR: Locate existing information for the VIN by selecting an option from the Filter by drop-down list. Note : The default search is VIN number. In the filter criteria field, enter the criteria for which you want to search. Press the Enter key on your keyboard or click the Search icon to view information that matches the filter criteria. Note : If found, DBS populates the vehicle data in the VIN, Stock Number, Model Description, and Model Year fields. You may modify this information if necessary. From the Type of Sale drop-down list, select the type of sale. From the Deal drop-down list, select a deal type. Note : If you select a deal, the sale date, salesperson, and most customer information is provided for you. Click in the Sale Date field, and then use the calendar to select the desired date. From the Salesperson drop-down list, select the salesperson. From the F&I Manager drop-down list, select the F&I manager. From the Spanish Language drop-down list, indicate if this is a Spanish language sale. From the State/Province drop-down list, select the state or province of the dealer. Scroll to the bottom of the page and click the Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. A will display for any missing or incorrect data. Complete the Buyer section of the RDR. Click here for more information. It is incredibly important that you verify and correct all RDR data before submission. You cannot modify a submitted RDR.
Complete the Vehicle Section of a Used Vehicle RDR To complete the Vehicle section of a used vehicle RDR: Locate existing information for the VIN by selecting an option from the Filter by drop-down list. Note : The default search is VIN number. In the filter criteria field, enter the criteria for which you want to search. Press the Enter key on your keyboard or click the Search icon to view information that matches the filter criteria. Note : If found, DBS populates the vehicle data in the VIN, Stock Number, Model Description, and Model Year fields. You may modify this information if necessary. From the Type of Sale drop-down list, select the type of sale. From the Deal drop-down list, select a deal type. Note : If you select a deal, the sale date, salesperson, and most customer information is provided for you. Click in the Sale Date field, and then use the calendar to select the desired date. From the Salesperson drop-down list, select the salesperson. From the F&I Manager drop-down list, select the F&I manager. From the Spanish Language drop-down list, indicate if this is a Spanish language sale. From the State/Province drop-down list, select the state or province of the dealer. Scroll to the bottom of the page and click the Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. A will display for any missing or incorrect data. Complete the Buyer section of the RDR. Click here for more information.
To select recipients by dealer user for hierarchy option: Click the Dealer Users button. Select the Choose recipients by Hierarchy option. Click the Next button to continue. Select a hierarchy by clicking on the box before the hierarchy. Note : To expand the hierarchy to select specific options, click the plus sign. Note : To de-select a hierarchy, click the box to remove the check mark. Click the Next button to continue, or click the Back button to return to the previous window. Select the available eligibility options. Note : To select multiple items, press and hold the CTRL key while selecting items. Click the Copy button to move the selected options to the Selected box, or click the Copy All button to move all options. Note : To remove a selection, select the options in the Selected box and click the Remove button. Click the Next button to continue, or click the Back button to return to the previous window. Select the available position options. Click the Copy button to move the selected options to the Selected box, or click the Copy All button to move all options. Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the Back button to return to the previous window. To view your recipient selections after you select them, use the View/Print option in the Action menu.
Select Recipients by Dealer User for Hierarchy Option To select recipients by dealer user for hierarchy option: Click the Dealer User button. Select the Choose recipients by Hierarchy option. Click the Next button to continue. Select a hierarchy by clicking on the box before the hierarchy. Note : To expand the hierarchy to select specific options, click the plus sign. Note : To de-select a hierarchy, click the box to remove the check mark. Click the Next button to continue, or click the Back button to return to the previous window. From the Available Fields box, select the eligibility options. Note : To select multiple items, press and hold the CTRL key while selecting items. Click the Copy button to move the selected options to the Selected box, or click the Copy All button to move all options. Note : To remove a selection, select the options in the Selected box and click the Remove button. Click the Next button to continue, or click the Back button to return to the previous window. From the Available Fields box, select the positions. Click the Copy button to move the selected options to the Selected box, or click the Copy All button to move all options. Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the Back button to return to the previous window. To view your recipient selections after you select them, use the View/Print option in the action menu.
View Overview Information RDR History Page Overview View RDR History Workflow About RDR History: What You Need to Know Perform Tasks RDR History: What You Need to know about RDRs and Unwinds About RDR History Export RDR History Information Filter RDR History Filter the RDR History Page by Sales Type Perform Common DBS Tasks Print RDR Detail from RDR History Unwind RDR View OMS Vehicle Detail from RDR History View Vehicle Detail from RDR History View Vehicle Invoice RDR History: What You Need to know about RDRs and Unwinds About RDR History Export RDR History Information Filter RDR History Perform Common DBS Tasks Print RDR Detail from the RDR History Page Unwind RDR View Vehicle Detail from RDR History View Vehicle Invoice
History Processes RDR History RDR History Retail Delivery Reporting (RDR) History View RDR History Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing Retail Delivery Reporting (RDR) history. Related Workflows The following workflows may have similar tasks in common with the Viewing RDR History Workflow. RDR a Vehicle Workflow
Note : You can only delete warranty claims in New, Open, Error, Warning, Suspended-dealer, or Rejected status. Proceed with caution - you cannot recover a deleted warranty claim. To delete a warranty claim from the Edit/Create Warranty Claim page: Click the Delete button. Click the Yes button to confirm the deletion. Note : DBS deletes the warranty claim from the system and displays the Manage Warranty Claim page.
Delete a Warranty Claim Note : You can only delete warranty claims in New, Open, Error, Warning, Suspended-dealer, or Rejected status. Proceed with caution - you cannot recover a deleted warranty claim. To delete a warranty claim from the Edit/Create Warranty Claim page: Click the Delete button. Click the Yes button to confirm the deletion. Note : DBS deletes the warranty claim from the system and displays the Manage Warranty Claim page.
Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Edit Warranty Claims Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Warranty Claims Edit or Create Warranty Claims Workflow *** Nissan Canada Inc. (NCI) recommends dealers create Warranty Claims in an NCI DBS certified dealer management system and then log into NCI DBS to review, validate and submit the claim to NCI. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating and editing claims. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Warranty Claims Workflow or View Warranty Claims Workflow. Manage Warranty Claims Workflow View Warranty Claims Workflow
Configure DSP STAR Web Services Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for configuring DSP STAR Web Services.
To view or print the calendar event detail: Select the calendar event for which you want to view or print detail. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. Select the View/Print option. Note : The View Details window appears. To print, click the Print button. To close, click the Close button. Use the View/Print option to view the contents and recipients of a calendar event.
View or Print Calendar Event Detail To view or print the calendar event detail: Select the calendar event for which you want to view or print detail. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. Select the View/Print option. Note : The View Details window appears. To print, click the Print button. To close, click the Close button.
To view the announcements summary: Review the list of announcements. To sort the displayed information, click the arrow beside a column title.
View Announcements Summary To view the announcements summary: Review the list of announcements. To sort the displayed information, click the arrow beside a column title.
Edit Dealer Permissions Page Overview Note : The Edit Dealer Permissions Page applies to internal users only. Purpose Use the Edit Dealer Permissions page to view or modify permissions for a specific dealer. Description The content area of the Edit Dealer Permissions page displays the following sections: Quick Jump menu - Appears on the left-hand side of the page. The quick jump menu allows you to show one section at a time, or you can show or hide the default view for all sections. Permission Function Tree - By default, the function tree expands two sections: Menu and User Information. The function tree also includes a Host Report section and a Report Writer section. For internal users, the function tree also includes a Star Web Services section. Use the + and - icons to show or hide a section. Use the expand all | collapse all features to expand or collapse a section. Save and Cancel - Allows you to submit or cancel requested changes . Cancel returns you to the Dealer Summary page. Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Edit Dealer Permissions page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Grant or Remove Access to a Host Report Grant or Remove Access to a Page, Action, Custom Field, or Website Grant or Remove Access to a Report Writer View Grant or Remove Access to a Star Web Service Grant or Remove Full Access to a Menu and Its Contents Use the Quick Jump Menu Grant or Remove Access to a Host Report Grant or Remove Access to a Page, Action, Custom Field, or Website Grant or Remove Access to a Report Writer View Grant or Remove Access to a Star Web Service Grant or Remove Full Access to a Menu and Its Contents Perform Common DBS Tasks Use the Quick Jump Menu Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Edit Dealer Permissions page. Edit Dealer Permissions Workflow Page Preview
To view dealer permissions: Show the section, if collapsed. Note : To show a section, click the + icon in the section header. Use the function tree to expand or collapse the nodes, as desired. Note : To expand all items in the section, click the expand all link in the section header. Note : The active permissions contain a check. To return to the Dealer Summary page, click the Cancel button. The function tree displays permission options in hierarchical order, starting with the menu items at the top and ending with the specific functional items at the bottom.
View Dealer Permissions To view dealer permissions: Show the section, if collapsed. Note : To show a section, click the + icon in the section header. Use the function tree to expand or collapse the nodes, as desired. Note : To expand all items in the section, click the expand all link in the section header. Note : The active permissions contain a check. To return to the Dealer Summary page, click the Cancel button. The function tree displays permission options in hierarchical order, starting with the menu items at the top and ending with the specific functional items at the bottom.
To open the Create Alerts page: Click the Create button.
Open the Create Alerts Page To open the Create Alerts page: Click the Create button.
To view a repair order (RO) from the View Warranty Claim page: At the bottom of the page, click the RO button. Note : The Repair Order Information window opens. Click the Print button to print the RO, or click the Close button to return to the previous screen.
View Repair Order from View Warranty Claim Page To view a repair order (RO): At the bottom of the page, click the RO button. Note : The Repair Order Information window opens. Click the Print button to print the RO, or click the Close button to return to the previous screen.
Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Edit Warranty Claims Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Warranty Claims Edit or Create Warranty Claims Workflow *** Nissan Canada Inc. (NCI) recommends dealers create Warranty Claims in an NCI DBS certified dealer management system and then log into NCI DBS to review, validate and submit the claim to NCI. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating and editing claims. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Warranty Claims Workflow or View Warranty Claims Workflow. Manage Warranty Claims Workflow View Warranty Claims Workflow
View Overview Information Quick Entry RDR Page Overview Perform Tasks Access OMS to View Vehicle Detail Access Reports Complete the Customer Section of an RDR Complete the Finance Section of an RDR Complete the Vehicle Section of an RDR Delete RDR Perform Common DBS Tasks RDR a Vehicle Using Quick Entry RDR RDR a Vehicle Not in Your Inventory Using Quick Entry RDR
View Overview Information Create or Edit Standard Operation Group Page Overview Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes Workflow Create or Edit Standard Operation Group Page Overview Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes Workflow Perform Tasks Add a Key Word Add a PNC Add a Standard Operation Code Create or Edit Standard Operation Group Delete a Key Word Delete a PNC Delete Standard Operation Code Assignment Edit a Key Word Edit a PNC Edit a Standard Operation Code Assignment Look Up a PNC from the Standard Operation Group Page Perform Common DBS Tasks Add a Key Word Add a Standard Operation Code Create or Edit Standard Operation Group Delete a Key Word Delete Standard Operation Code Assignment Edit a Key Word Edit a Standard Operation Code Assignment Perform Common DBS Tasks
Standard Operation Codes Standard Operation Code Standard Operation Codes Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating or editing standard operation groups and codes. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes workflow. Manage Dealer Operation Codes Workflow Manage Standard Operation Categories Workflow Manage Standard Operation Codes Workflow
Standard Operation Codes Standard Operation Code Standard Operation Codes Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating or editing standard operation groups and codes. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes workflow. Manage Dealer Operation Codes Workflow Manage Standard Operation Categories Workflow Manage Standard Operation Codes Workflow
To open the Create Study page: Click the New button. Note : The Create Study page opens.
Open the Create Study Page To open the Create Study page: Click the New button. Note : The Create Study page opens.
Early Detection System (EDS) EDS: Study Dashboard Processes EDS: Study Dashboard Study Study Dashboard Technical Service Bulletin (TSB) Create or Modify a Study Workflow Note : The Create or Modify a Study workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for defining or modifying a study that integrates appointment and repair order data collected by the Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Define or Modify a Study Workflow. Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow View One Study Result Workflow
Dashboard Early Detection System (EDS) EDS: Study Dashboard Processes EDS: Study Dashboard Study Study Dashboard View View One Study Result Workflow Note : The View One Study Result workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing a study that integrates appointment and repair order data collected by the Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the View One Study Result workflow. Define or Modify Study Workflow Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow
Dashboard Early Detection System (EDS) Hold Status Processes Study View Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow Note: The Manage Early Detection System Studies workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing Early Detection System (EDS) studies that integrate appointment and repair order data collected by the Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow. Define or Modify a Study Workflow View One Study Result Workflow View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow
Dashboard Early Detection System (EDS) EDS: Study Dashboard Processes EDS: Study Dashboard Study Study Dashboard View View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow Note : The View a Dealer's Study Results workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing one dealer's study results that integrate appointment and repair order data collected by the Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the View a Dealer's Study Results workflow. Define or Modify a Study Workflow Manage Early Detection Studies Workflow View One Study Result Workflow
Authorized PDC users have the ability to reject submitted parts returns for dealerships within their PDC permissions. To reject a parts return, the return must be in "Submitted" status. Rejecting the parts return sets the parts return status to "Open" so that dealers can make changes. To reject a submitted parts return: Select the parts return you want to reject. Note : The parts return must be in "Submitted" status. Move your cursor over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Reject Return menu option. Note : The Reject Part Return dialog box appears. Click the Yes button to confirm the rejection, or click the No button to close the dialog box without rejecting the return.
Approve a Submitted Parts Return Authorized PDC users have the ability to approve submitted parts returns for dealerships within their PDC permissions. To approve a parts return, the return must be in "Submitted" status. Approving the parts return cannot be undone. To approve a submitted parts return: Select the parts return you want to approve. Note : The parts return must be in "Submitted" status. Move your cursor over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Approve Return menu option. Note : The Approve Part Return dialog box appears. In the PDC Return Due Date field, use the calendar to select the date by which parts must be returned to the PDC. Note : The return due date must be a weekday at least one day past the current date. Note : Holidays are excluded from the return due date calendar. Click the Yes button to confirm the approval, or click the No button to close the dialog box without approving the return.
Reject a Submitted Parts Return Authorized PDC users have the ability to reject submitted parts returns for dealerships within their PDC permissions. To reject a parts return, the return must be in "Submitted" status. Rejecting the parts return sets the parts return status to "Open" so that dealers can make changes. To reject a submitted parts return: Select the parts return you want to reject. Note : The parts return must be in "Submitted" status. Move your cursor over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Reject Return menu option. Note : The Reject Part Return dialog box appears. Click the Yes button to confirm the rejection, or click the No button to close the dialog box without rejecting the return.
This section of a study is not required, but provides the opportunity to customize or limit a study's results. Use optional study sections to clearly define study parameters, but use caution as conflicting selections will result in no data being returned. DBS maintains repair order information for the vehicle models available during the current model year and five previous model years (ten previous model years for Infiniti), beginning from the 2011 model year for both divisions. If desired, you can select one or more models to limit the study results. To complete the Model/Series section of a study: Select each model/series which should be included in the study, and then use the center buttons as necessary to customize the Selected Model/Series list. When you have selected all desired model years, click the Save button.
Complete the Model Series/Section of a Study This section of a study is not required, but provides the opportunity to customize or limit a study's results. Use optional study sections to clearly define study parameters, but use caution as conflicting selections will result in no data being returned. DBS maintains repair order information for the vehicle models available during the current model year and five previous model years (ten previous model years for Infiniti), beginning from the 2011 model year for both divisions. If desired, you can select one or more models to limit the study results. To complete the Model/Series section of a study: Select each model/series which should be included in the study, and then use the center buttons as necessary to customize the Selected Model/Series list. When you have selected all desired model years, click the Save button.
Early Detection System (EDS) EDS: Study Dashboard Processes EDS: Study Dashboard Study Study Dashboard Technical Service Bulletin (TSB) Create or Modify a Study Workflow Note : The Create or Modify a Study workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for defining or modifying a study that integrates appointment and repair order data collected by the Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Define or Modify a Study Workflow. Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow View One Study Result Workflow
To open NNAnet (Dealer Portal) from any DBS page: Click the NNAnet link. Note : The Dealer Portal page displays in a new browser window. Opening the Dealer Portal page does not close your DBS session. If you have completed your DBS session, log out of DBS .
Access NNAnet (Dealer Portal) To access NNAnet (Dealer Portal) from any DBS page: Click the NNAnet link. Note : The Dealer Portal page displays in a new browser window.
Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating, modifying, or replicating a personalized report definition in Report Writer. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create, Modify, or Replicate Report Definition Workflow. Change User in Report Writer Workflow Copy All, Transfer All, or Delete All Report Definitions Workflow Copy, Transfer, Delete, or Make a Report Definition Public Workflow Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow View a Host Report Workflow
Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating, modifying, or replicating a personalized report definition in Report Writer. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create, Modify, or Replicate Report Definition Workflow. Change User in Report Writer Workflow Copy All, Transfer All, or Delete All Report Definitions Workflow Copy, Transfer, Delete, or Make a Report Definition Public Workflow Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow View a Host Report Workflow
Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating, modifying, or replicating a personalized report definition in Report Writer. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create, Modify, or Replicate Report Definition Workflow. Change User in Report Writer Workflow Copy All, Transfer All, or Delete All Report Definitions Workflow Copy, Transfer, Delete, or Make a Report Definition Public Workflow Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow View a Host Report Workflow
Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating, modifying, or replicating a personalized report definition in Report Writer. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create, Modify, or Replicate Report Definition Workflow. Change User in Report Writer Workflow Copy All, Transfer All, or Delete All Report Definitions Workflow Copy, Transfer, Delete, or Make a Report Definition Public Workflow Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow View a Host Report Workflow
Create, Modify, or Replicate a Report Definition Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating, modifying, or replicating a personalized report definition in Report Writer. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create, Modify, or Replicate Report Definition Workflow. Change User in Report Writer Workflow Copy All, Transfer All, or Delete All Report Definitions Workflow Copy, Transfer, Delete, or Make a Report Definition Public Workflow Generate a Report in Report Writer Workflow View a Host Report Workflow
To change the logging level: In the Logger Name field, type the name of the person or group who is changing the logging level. From the Logging Level drop-down list, select the appropriate option. Listed below is a description of what each logging level logs. Debug - Information when failure or success of significant steps occurs in processing. Info - Application life-cycle events such as application startup, initialization and shutdown. Error - The cause stack when an exception occurs. Fatal - The event that causes an unexpected termination of an application such as the failure to connect to the host. Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Note: A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm and save, or click the No button to close the window without saving.
Change the Logging Level To change the logging level: In the Logger Name field, type the first and last name of the person or team changing the logging level. From the Logging Level drop-down list, select the appropriate option. Listed below is a description of what each logging level logs. Debug - Information when failure or success of significant steps occur in processing. Info - Application life-cycle events such as application startup, initialization and shutdown. Error - The cause stack when an exception occurs. Fatal - The event that causes an unexpected termination of an application such as failure to connect to the host. Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm and save, or click the No button to close the window without saving.
View SVC Order Page Overview Note : The SVC Order page applies to internal users only. You can view SVC orders from the SVC Order Management page. You must first search for and locate the desired SVC order that you want to view. Use the Action menu to open the View SVC Order page. Purpose Use the View SVC Order page to view, approve, or reject a service campaign (SVC) order, and modify the quantity, if needed. Description The content area of the View SVC Order page displays the following sections: SVC Order header - Appears at the top of the page and allows you to view general information about an SVC order including the order status, order total, campaign ID, and backorder or cross ship preferences SVC Order Detail - Allows you to view the parts on the SVC order Buttons - Allow you to approve or reject an SVC order Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the View SVC Order page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Approve an SVC Order Modify SVC Order Quantity Print Information Reject an SVC Order Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflow are performed on the View SVC Order page. View Service Campaign Order Workflow Page Preview
367327D1-3373-42C1-AB8B-61452B061999\Campaign SVC Parts Orders BUY SELLS Quick Reference NISSAN 062017.pdf
To filter the announcements summary list: From the Filter By drop-down list, select a filter option. If a text-entry field appears, type a filter value and then click the Search icon. If a drop-down list appears, select an option from the list. Note : The page refreshes to display only those items that match your selection. Note : To reset the filter criteria to the default options and clear the search criteria, click the Clear icon.
Filter the Announcements Summary To filter the Announcements summary list: From the Filter By drop-down list, select a filter option. If a text-entry field appears, type a filter value and then click the Search icon. If a drop-down list appears, select an option from the list. Note : The page refreshes to display only those items that match your selection. Note : To reset the filter criteria to the default options and remove any search criteria, click the Clear button.
View Overview Information Pre-RDR Reporting Page Overview View Pre-RDR Reporting Workflow Perform Tasks Access Reports Export Pre-RDR Reporting Information Perform Common DCS Tasks View Pre-RDR Reporting Data Access Reports Export Pre-RDR Reporting Information Perform Common DBS Tasks View Pre-RDR Reporting Data
Pre-RDR Pre-Retail Delivery Reporting (Pre-RDR) Processes Pre-RDR View View Pre-RDR Reporting Workflow Note : The Pre-RDR Reporting workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing pre-RDR reporting information. Related Workflows The following workflows may have similar tasks in common with the Viewing Pre-RDR Reporting workflow. Report Sale of a Vehicle (RDR) Workflow View RDR History Workflow View RDR History Workflow
Keywords in the DBS help system allow you to view information using a keyword, or index. For example: some users may be used to using the word "punched" to refer to a vehicle that has been sold. In DBS , vehicle sales are recorded as an RDR, or Retail Delivery Report. When you search by keyword and view the "Punched" keyword, you will find all of the topics related to the RDR process. To search DBS help using keywords: Click the Keywords button at the bottom of the Table of Contents window. Click the letter corresponding to the first letter of the keyword you want to view. Letters in gray indicate that no keywords have been defined that start with that letter. Keywords that begin with the letter you selected appear in a list. Select the keyword you want to view to display the topics associated with the keyword. Click the hyperlink for the topic you want to view. To close the Keywords panel and display the Table of Contents, click the Explorer button. .
Search DBS Help by Keyword Keywords in the DBS help system allow you to view information using a keyword, or index. For example: some users may be used to using the word "punched" to refer to a vehicle that has been sold. In DBS , vehicle sales are recorded as an RDR, or Retail Delivery Report. When you search by keyword and view the "Punched" keyword, you will find all of the topics related to the RDR process. To search DBS help using keywords: Click the Keywords button at the bottom of the Table of Contents window. Click the letter corresponding to the first letter of the keyword you want to view. Letters in gray indicate that no keywords have been defined that start with that letter. Keywords that begin with the letter you selected appear in a list. Select the keyword you want to view to display the topics associated with the keyword. Click the hyperlink for the topic you want to view. To close the Keywords panel and display the Table of Contents, click the Explorer button.
To view the alerts summary: Review the list of alerts. To sort the displayed information, click the arrow beside a column title. Note : If multiple pages display, click a page number or click the forward or backward arrow to navigate from page to page.
View Alerts Summary To view the alerts summary: Review the list of alerts. To sort the displayed information, click the arrow beside a column title. Note : If multiple pages display, click a page number or click the forward or backward arrow to navigate from page to page.
View Overview Information Campaign Master Table Page Overview Perform Tasks Edit the Campaign Master Information for a Campaign Export Campaign Master Table Information Perform Common DBS Tasks Search for Campaign Master Table Information Edit the Campaign Master Information for a Campaign Export Campaign Master Table Information Perform Common DBS Tasks Search for Campaign Master Table Information
To view a repair order from the Express Entry Warranty Claim page: At the bottom of the page, click the RO button. Note : The Repair Order Information window opens. Click the Print button to print the RO, or click the Close button to return to the previous screen.
View a Repair Order from the Express Entry Warranty Claim Page To view a repair order (RO) from the Express Entry Warranty Claim page: At the bottom of the page, click the RO button. Note : The Repair Order Information window opens. Click the Print button to print the RO, or click the Close button to return to the previous screen.
Note : This task is performed by internal users only. To monitor user status: Type a dealer code in the Dealer field. To limit the results displayed to a specific date range, click in the System Usage From field, and then use the calendar to select the desired date. Click the Search button. Note : The system displays the user records that match the search criteria entered.
Monitor User Status Note : This task is performed by internal users only. To monitor user status: Type a dealer code in the Dealer field to view system usage for all users at the dealership entered, or type a user ID in the User ID field to view system usage for a single user. Click in the System Usage From field, and then use the calendar to select the desired date. Click the Search icon to initiate the search, or click the Clear icon to clear the search criteria entered. Note : The system displays the user records that match the search criteria entered.
To search the vehicle inventory list: From the Model Year drop-down list, select a model year. From the Select Model drop-down list, select a vehicle model. Note : You must select a model for the inventory search results to display. From the Model Description drop-down list, select an option. From the Search Radius drop-down list, the default is the "My Inventory" option, which searches the dealer's inventory, or you may select a distance range or a group search. From the Location Status drop-down list, select the location status. If desired, select the checkbox for a color to limit the results to vehicles in that color. Note : You can select only colors that are available in the inventory; all others are grey and cannot be selected. In the Options, Packages and Accessories area, select the checkbox for each desired item. Note : See the Step by Step tab in full help for additional information. To sort the inventory search results, click the carat for the column by which you wish to sort the results. Click the CV button to change the display from Dealer View to Customer View of the summary vehicle information. Note : The customer view of the inventory search results display, and the button name changes from CV to DV. View the search results. Click the DV button to toggle back to the Dealer View of summary vehicle information. If an option is not available, that option is not displayed.
Search Inventory Select Model is a required field. All other fields are optional fields and enable you to narrow your inventory search. To filter the vehicle inventory list: From the Model Year drop-down list, select a model year. From the Select Model drop-down list, select a vehicle model. Note : You must select a model for the inventory search results to display. This is a required field. Note : If an option is not available, that option is not displayed. Note : All available vehicles matching the selected model appear in the Results pane. The numbers within the brackets are the number of matches that are found as a result of the search. Note : If your inventory search results in a large number of returns, a navigation bar appears in the Results area. To view additional search results, click a page number or click the Previous or Next arrows. To view a specific page, in the Go to Page field, type a page number and then click the Go button. From the Model Description drop-down list, select an option. From the Search Radius drop-down list, the default is the "My Inventory" option which searches the dealer's inventory, or you may select a distance range or a search radius. Note : To configure the search radius options, click the Customize icon. You can customize your search radius by setting the distance search range and the custom search group. Click here for more information on how to customize the distance search range. Click here for more information on how to customize the custom search group. From the Location Status drop-down list, select the location status. Note : You can select a vehicle by either dealer inventory, in transit, or in production. In the Colors area, select the checkbox for a desired color. Note : You can only view results for one color at a time. Note : You can select only colors that are available in the inventory; all others are grey and cannot be selected. In the Options, Packages and Accessories area, select the checkbox for each desired option. Click the checkbox one time to include the option. A check mark indicates that the option is selected. Click the checkbox twice to exclude the option. An "x" indicates that the option is excluded. Click the checkbox a third time to clear the checkbox entirely. Note : Only the options that are available for the selected model are displayed. Note : If an option is dimmed, it means that even though the selected model offers that option, no vehicles containing that option are available in the selected search range. To sort the inventory search results, click the column header. Click the CV button to change the display from Dealer View to Customer View of the summary vehicle information. Note : The Customer View of the inventory search results display, and the button name changes from CV to DV. Note : The Customer View does not include the dealer name, the invoice amount, or the days in stock. Customers should ONLY see the customer view of the inventory search results. View the search results. Click the DV button to toggle back to the Dealer View of summary vehicle information.
Inventory Search Inventory Search Processes Search Inventory Search Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for searching and viewing inventory for a particular vehicle model with specified features and options. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Inventory Search workflow. Vehicle Inventory Workflow
To view the claim history of a warranty claim, expand the History section: View the historical activity of the claim, listed by status date. Note : The Status column shows warnings and errors associated with the claim. Note : The Details column shows actions performed against the claim. Note : The User column shows the name of the user who entered, edited, or submitted the warranty claim in DBS . You can view claim history on any of the following pages: Edit/Create Warranty Claim, Quick Entry Warranty Claim, Express Entry Warranty Claim, and View Warranty Claim.
View the Claim History Section of a Claim To view the claim history of a warranty claim, expand the History section: View the historical activity of the claim, listed by status date. Note : The Status column shows warnings and errors associated with the claim. Note : The Details column shows actions performed against the claim. Note : The User column shows the name of the user who entered, edited, or submitted the warranty claim in DBS . You can view claim history on any of the following pages: Edit/Create Warranty Claim, Quick Entry Warranty Claim, Express Entry Warranty Claim, and View Warranty Claim.
Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Edit Warranty Claims Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Warranty Claims Edit or Create Warranty Claims Workflow *** Nissan Canada Inc. (NCI) recommends dealers create Warranty Claims in an NCI DBS certified dealer management system and then log into NCI DBS to review, validate and submit the claim to NCI. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating and editing claims. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Warranty Claims Workflow or View Warranty Claims Workflow. Manage Warranty Claims Workflow View Warranty Claims Workflow
To view the claim history of a warranty claim, expand the History section: View the historical activity of the claim, listed by status date. Note : The Status column shows warnings and errors associated with the claim. Note : The Details column shows actions performed against the claim. Note : The User column shows the name of the user who entered, edited, or submitted the warranty claim in DBS . You can view claim history on any of the following pages: Edit/Create Warranty Claim, Quick Entry Warranty Claim, Express Entry Warranty Claim, and View Warranty Claim.
View the Claim History Section of a Claim To view the claim history of a warranty claim, expand the History section: View the historical activity of the claim, listed by status date. Note : The Status column shows warnings and errors associated with the claim. Note : The Details column shows actions performed against the claim. Note : The User column shows the name of the user who entered, edited, or submitted the warranty claim in DBS . You can view claim history on any of the following pages: Edit/Create Warranty Claim, Quick Entry Warranty Claim, Express Entry Warranty Claim, and View Warranty Claim.
Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Edit Warranty Claims Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Warranty Claims Edit or Create Warranty Claims Workflow *** Nissan Canada Inc. (NCI) recommends dealers create Warranty Claims in an NCI DBS certified dealer management system and then log into NCI DBS to review, validate and submit the claim to NCI. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating and editing claims. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Warranty Claims Workflow or View Warranty Claims Workflow. Manage Warranty Claims Workflow View Warranty Claims Workflow
To view the claim history of a warranty claim, expand the History section: View the historical activity of the claim, listed by status date. Note : The Status column shows warnings and errors associated with the claim. Note : The Details column shows actions performed against the claim. Note : The User column shows the name of the user who entered, edited, or submitted the warranty claim in DBS . You can view claim history on any of the following pages: Edit/Create Warranty Claim, Quick Entry Warranty Claim, Express Entry Warranty Claim, and View Warranty Claim.
View the Claim History Section of a Claim To view the claim history of a warranty claim, expand the History section: View the historical activity of the claim, listed by status date. Note : The Status column shows warnings and errors associated with the claim. Note : The Details column shows actions performed against the claim. Note : The User column shows the name of the user who entered, edited, or submitted the warranty claim in DBS . You can view claim history on any of the following pages: Edit/Create Warranty Claim, Quick Entry Warranty Claim, Express Entry Warranty Claim, and View Warranty Claim.
Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Edit Warranty Claims Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Warranty Claims Edit or Create Warranty Claims Workflow *** Nissan Canada Inc. (NCI) recommends dealers create Warranty Claims in an NCI DBS certified dealer management system and then log into NCI DBS to review, validate and submit the claim to NCI. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating and editing claims. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Warranty Claims Workflow or View Warranty Claims Workflow. Manage Warranty Claims Workflow View Warranty Claims Workflow
The retrieve new user function is designed to quickly highlight those user records that have been added or changed in NNAnet. Records added or changed in NNAnet can then be immediately processed in DBS . To retrieve a list of added or updated user records: Click the Retrieve New User button. The User Summary List section updates. New and changed records display a check mark in the Updated user column, and the number or records retrieved displays in blue just above the User Summary List header. Once you have retrieved the list of records, you may need to grant the users DBS access or grant update the user's DBS permissions. See the Related Links tab on the right for links to these tasks.
Retrieve a List of New or Updated Users The retrieve new user function is designed to quickly highlight those user records that have been added or changed in NNAnet. Records added or changed in NNAnet can then be immediately processed in DBS . To retrieve a list of added or updated user records: Click the Retrieve New User button. The User Summary List updates. New and changed records display a check mark in the Updated User column, and the number or records retrieved displays in blue just above the User Summary List header. Once you have retrieved the list of records, you may need to grant the users DBS access or update the user's DBS permissions . The retrieve new user function is designed to quickly highlight those user records that have been added or changed in NNAnet. Records added or changed in NNAnet can then be immediately processed in DBS . To retrieve a list of added or updated user records: Click the Retrieve New User button. The User Summary List updates. New and changed records display a check mark in the Updated User column, and the number or records retrieved displays in blue just above the User Summary List header. Once you have retrieved the list of records, you may need to grant the users DBS access or update the user's DBS permissions.
To use the NSH Quick Jump menu: To move to a specific section of the page, click a section title in the menu. To show or hide all sections, click the expand all or collapse all link. To jump to the top or bottom of the page, click the top or bottom link. To minimize the Quick Jump menu, click the Collapse (<<) icon. To expand the Quick Jump menu, click the Expand (>>) icon. To return to the top of the page from any section, click the Top button.
Use the View National Service History Quick Jump Menu To use the National Service History Quick Jump menu: To move to a specific section of the page, click a section title in the menu. To show or hide all sections, click the expand all or collapse all link. To jump to the top or bottom of the page, click the top or bottom link. To minimize the Quick Jump menu, click the Collapse (<<) icon. To expand the Quick Jump menu, click the Expand (>>) icon. To return to the top of the page from any section, click the Top button.
National Service History National Service History (NSH) National Service History National Service History Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing national service history information for a vehicle.
Create Parts Return Page Overview Purpose Use the Create Parts Return page to create a new parts return. To create a parts return access the Parts Return Management link from the Parts menu. Description The content area of the Create Parts Return page displays the following sections: Create Parts Return header - Allows you to add general information about the parts return, including the type of return and the dealer return reference number Parts Return Detail - Allows you to add, delete, or modify parts on the parts return Buttons - Allow you to save, submit, delete, or cancel the parts return Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Create Parts Return page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Add a Part to a Return Add Multiple Parts to a Return Create a Parts Return Delete a Part from a Return Delete a Parts Return Export a Parts Return Filter Parts Return Detail Look up a Part Modify a Detail Line on a Return Submit a Parts Return Add a Part to a Return Add Multiple Parts to a Return Create a Parts Return Delete a Part from a Return Delete a Parts Return Export a Parts Return Filter Parts Return Detail Look up a Part Modify a Detail Line on a Return Submit a Parts Return Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Create Parts Return page. Create Parts Return Workflow Page Preview
To grant publisher authorization: Show the Publishing section, if collapsed. Select the checkboxes for each affiliate, division, or region for which the individual will be allowed to create publications. In the Select Surrogate Publisher section, from the Available Surrogates box, select the desired surrogate(s). Note : You can select up to three users from the list of users who are publishers within the same hierarchy. Click the Copy or Copy All button to move the selection(s) to the Selected Surrogates box. In the Approver section, click the Select button. Filter or search to locate the desired approver. Click the Select button. From the list of communication items, select or clear the items applicable to the publisher. If the publisher has authority to create announcements, select or deselect the level of announcements that the publisher is authorized to create. Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Click the Yes button to confirm, or click the No button to close the window without confirming.
Grant Publisher Authorization To grant publisher authorization: Show the Publishing section, if collapsed. Note : To show the Publishing section, click the + icon in the section header. In the Affiliate Division Region section, expand the function tree to view the divisions and regions for the desired affiliate(s). Select the checkboxes for the desired region(s). Note : To select all regions for a desired division, select the checkbox for the division. Note : To remove a region, clear the checkbox. In the Select Surrogate Publisher section, from the Available Surrogates box, select the desired surrogate(s). Note : You can select up to three users from the list of users who are publishers within the same hierarchy. Click the Copy (>>) or Copy All (>>I) button to move the selection(s) to the Selected Surrogates box. Note : To remove a surrogate from the Selected Surrogates box, select the surrogate and click the Remove button. In the Approver section, click the Select button. Note : The Designate Approver page appears. To filter by user ID, from the User ID field, type the approver's user ID and click the Search button. To filter by approver name, in the Last Name and First Name fields, type the approver's name. To filter by business hierarchy, from the Affiliate , Division , and Region drop-down lists, select the desired values. Note : To navigate through the list of users, click a page number or click the forward or backward arrow to navigate from page to page. Click the Search button to display approvers that match the search criteria you entered. Click the Select radio button next to the name of the person you want to add as an approver. Click the Select button to confirm your selection and close the Designate Approver window. From the list of communication items, select or clear the items applicable to the publisher. Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm, or click the No button to close the window without confirming. Note : The publisher now has authority to create, modify, copy, and delete the applicable communication items.
Create or Edit a Notification Workflow Note : This workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating and editing a notification. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create or Edit a Notification Workflow. Create or Edit an Alert Workflow Create or Edit an Announcement Workflow Create or Edit a Calendar Event Workflow
To view dealer information: Review the dealer information. To expand or collapse a section, click the + or - icon. -OR- To expand or collapse all sections, click the expand all or collapse all link. To return to the Dealer Summary page, click the Cancel button.
View Dealer Information To view the dealer information: Review the dealer information. To expand or collapse a section, click the + or - icon. -OR- To expand or collapse all sections, click the expand all or collapse all link. To return to the Dealer Summary page, click the Cancel button.
To open the Create Report page: Click the Create button. Note : The Create Report page appears.
Open the Create Report Page To open the Create Report page: Click the Create button. Note : The Create Report page appears.
To open the Create Report page: Click the Create button. Note : The Create Report page appears.
Open the Create Report Page To open the Create Report page: Click the Create button. Note : The Create Report page appears.
To open the Create Report page: Click the Create button. Note : The Create Report page appears.
Open the Create Report Page To open the Create Report page: Click the Create button. Note : The Create Report page appears.
To open the Create Report page: Click the Create button. Note : The Create Report page appears.
Open the Create Report Page To open the Create Report page: Click the Create button. Note : The Create Report page appears.
To open the Create Report page: Click the Create button. Note : The Create Report page appears.
Open the Create Report Page To open the Create Report page: Click the Create button. Note : The Create Report page appears.
Click the Step by Step tab for additional information on constructing searches. Note :To use the Search feature, you must be viewing Full Help. To search the DBS help system: Click in the Search field and type your search term or phrase. Note : See the Search Tips section below for additional information. Press the Enter key on your keyboard, or click the Search icon. The search results display in the Table of Contents panel organized by major topic area. Individual topics display in the center list. Topics that appear in the list include those that contain the search term in the topic title, topics that have the search term as a keyword, and topics that have a "Related Topics" link with the search term. Click a topic name in the Table of Contents panel or the center list to display the topic contents.
Search the DBS Help System Note : To use the Search feature, you must be viewing Full Help. To search the DBS help system: Click in the Search field and type your search term or phrase. Note : See the Search Tips section below for additional information. Press the Enter key on your keyboard, or click the Search icon. The search results display in the Table of Contents panel organized by major topic area. Individual topics display in the center list. Topics that appear in the list include those that contain the search term in the topic title, topics that have the search term as a keyword, and topics that have a "Related Topics" link with the search term. Click a topic name in the Table of Contents panel or the center list to display the topic contents. Search Tips The DBS help system search function is a simple text search. Included in the text search are topic titles, keywords, the Glossary, and the text portion of all topics. Graphics and the contents of any uploaded documents such as the Quick Reference Guides are not included in the search. Note : the search function is not case-sensitive, so searching for RDR produces the same results as searching for rdr. Description Sample Text Help searches for... Expected results... Simple text search : use when you want the most search results. Part All instances of the word part All Parts topics, all topics that contain words such as particular, participant, or partial. Simple phrase search : use when you want the most search results. RDR History All topics which contain either the word RDR or the word History All RDR topics, all RDR History topics, all National Service History topics, all topics which have either RDR or History as a keyword. Phrase search : use when you want to limit to a specific phrase. "RDR History" All topics which contain the word RDR immediately followed by the word History" RDR History Workflow, Export RDR History, RDR History Page Overview. Plural search : the search function is a simple text search, so searching for Parts is NOT the same as searching for Part. Parts All topics which contain the entire word Parts, but NOT topics which contain only the word Part Add Parts to an Order, Complete the Parts Section of a Claim, etc..
7D63A230-10BE-46C5-938A-34B597C068AE\DBS - How to SUBMIT Financial Statements v1.4.pdf
Monitor System Page Overview Purpose Use the Monitor System page to view information about the Dealer Business System (DBS) The DBS Monitor System page provides a summary of the health of the major environments including transaction response time, transaction errors, and communication with the DBS network host. Description The content area of the Monitor System page displays the following sections: Environment Status - Displays the current environment status or the status based on the date entered. The status includes transaction volume and average response time. Application Status - If selected, the Application Status section displays information about the DBS functional areas such as Sales, Service, Parts, or Administration. Host Availability - If selected, the Host Availability section displays information about the availability of each functional area or application within DBS . Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Monitor System page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Monitor Environment Status View Application or Transaction Status Information View Current Host Availability View NCI Host Availability Page Preview
To print the detail for a parts order on the Parts Order Management page: Select the parts order. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Print Detail option. Note : The File Download dialog opens. Click the Open button. Note : A PDF file opens. From the toolbar, click the Printer icon to print the report.
Print Part Order Detail from the Parts Order Management Page To print the detail for a parts order from the Parts Order Management page: Select the parts order. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Print Detail option. Note : The File Download dialog appears. Click the Open button. Note : A PDF file opens. From the toolbar, click the Printer icon to print the report.
Manage Orders Manage Orders Manage Orders Manage Orders Parts Order Management Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing parts orders. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Parts Order workflow. Create Parts Order Workflow Edit Parts Order Workflow Inquire on the Availability of Parts at the Parts Distribution Centers Workflow View Parts Order Workflow Create Parts Order Workflow Edit Parts Order Workflow View Parts Order Workflow
Create or Edit an Alert Workflow Note : This workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating or editing an alert. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create or Edit an Alert Workflow. Create or Edit an Announcement Workflow Create or Edit a Calendar Event Workflow Create or Edit a Notification Workflow
The Manage Host Report page allows you to add and edit information on the page as desired, and then save all changes you have made to the page. Additional features in this new user interface allow you to customize your experience on this page. Please see the About the Manage Host Report Page topic for additional information. Click the Edit icon for the row you wish to edit. Note : The fields you are allowed to update are activated. If desired, from the Frequency drop-down list, select the schedule for when the report will be generated. If desired, from the Division drop-down list, select whether the report is intended for Nissan or Infiniti users. If desired, in the Report # field, type the unique report number assigned to this report. Note : the report number should match the ID assigned to the report in the Host system. If desired, from the Orientation drop-down list, select whether the report should display and print in portrait orientation or landscape orientation. Note : To review a discussion of portrait vs landscape orientation, please see the Glossary (keyword Orientation). In the Name in English , Name in French , or Name in Spanish fields, update the report titles as necessary. Note : The French and Spanish report titles only display to those users who have selected a different display language in the DBS header. Click the Save icon for the row to save the row changes, or click the Cancel icon to cancel the row changes and close the row edit. Note : An error message will display at the top of the page and the Save and Cancel icons will change to red if there are any errors in the row. Correct all errors and click the Save icon again. Note : Clicking the Save or Cancel icon for a row impacts only that row, and does not save or cancel any other pending changes. Click the Save button to process all of changes that you have made on the Manage Host Report page since the last Save action, or click the Cancel button to cancel all changes you have made since the last Save action. Note : A confirmation window appears. Click the Yes button to save all of your changes, or click the No button to close the confirmation window and return to the Manage Host Report page where you can make additional changes.
Edit a Host Report on the Manage Host Report Page The Manage Host Report page allows you to add and edit information on the page as desired, and then save all changes you have made to the page. Additional features in this new user interface allow you to customize your experience on this page. Please see the About the Manage Host Report Page topic for additional information. To edit a Host report on the Manage Host Report page: Click the Edit icon for the row you wish to edit. Note : The fields you are allowed to update are activated. If desired, from the Frequency drop-down list, select the schedule for when the report will be generated. If desired, from the Division drop-down list, select whether the report is intended for Nissan or Infiniti users. If desired, in the Report # field, type the unique report number assigned to this report. Note : the report number should match the ID assigned to the report in the Host system. If desired, from the Orientation drop-down list, select whether the report should display and print in portrait orientation or landscape orientation. Note : To review a discussion of portrait vs landscape orientation, please see the Glossary (keyword Orientation). In the Name in English , Name in French , or Name in Spanish fields, update the report titles as necessary. Note : The French and Spanish report titles only display to those users who have selected a different display language in the DBS header. Click the Save icon for the row to save the row changes, or click the Cancel icon to cancel the row changes and close the row edit. Note : An error message will display at the top of the page and the Save and Cancel icons will change to red if there are any errors in the row. Correct all errors and click the Save icon again. Note : Clicking the Save or Cancel icon for a row impacts only that row, and does not save or cancel any other pending changes. Click the Save button to process all of changes that you have made on the Manage Host Report page since the last Save action, or click the Cancel button to cancel all changes you have made since the last Save action. Note : A confirmation window appears. Click the Yes button to save all of your changes, or click the No button to close the confirmation window and return to the Manage Host Report page where you can make additional changes.
To view the Manage Warranty Claims page: Review the claim status information in the Claims Summary pane. Note : The Claims Summary pane displays a count of the number of claims by claim status within the time period that you specify using the filter drop-down fields. Note : Click here for instructions on filtering the Warranty Claims summary. To view additional claims, click a page number or click the Previous or Next icons. To view a specific page, in the Go to Page field, type a page number, and then click the Go button. To sort the displayed information, click the arrow beside a column title. To view error or warning information, move your cursor over the or icons. A icon indicates that the claim has one or more errors and the claim cannot be submitted until the errors are corrected. A icon indicates that the claim has one or more warnings but the claim may still be submitted. A red circle icon on a row indicates that the warranty claim has an error associated with it. An orange circle icon on a row indicates that the warranty claim has a warning associated with it. For additional assistance with warranty information, contact the Warranty Claims Help Desk: Nissan 1-800-258-7008 opt 7, Infiniti 1-800-933-3712 opt 7, NCI 1-866-297-1734
Manage Warranty Claims Page Basics To view the Manage Warranty Claims page: Review the claim status information in the Claims Summary pane. Note : The Claims Summary pane displays a count of the number of claims by claim status within the time period that you specify using the filter drop-down fields. To view additional claims, click a page number or click the Previous or Next icons. To view a specific page, in the Go to Page field, type a page number, and then click the Go button. To sort the displayed information, click the arrow beside a column title. To view error or warning information, move your cursor over the or icons. A icon indicates that the claim has one or more errors and the claim cannot be submitted until the errors are corrected. A icon indicates that the claim has one or more warnings but the claim may still be submitted. Notes: The RO (Repair Order) column displays the number of repair orders associated with the warranty claim. The Line column indicates an RO job line. The Serial column displays the last 8 characters of the VIN (Vehicle Identification Number) of the vehicle with which the warranty claim is associated.
Manage Warranty Claims Processes Manage Warranty Claims Manage Warranty Claims Manage Warranty Claims Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing warranty claims. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create or Edit Warranty Claims Workflow or View Warranty Claims Workflow. Edit or Create Warranty Claims Workflow View Warranty Claims Workflow
Study Dashboard Page Overview Purpose The Study Dashboard page allows internal users to view the various studies that have been created. From the Study Dashboard, you can open studies to view repair order (RO) and dealership-level data to get more information. You can also use the Study Dashboard to track holds on vehicles. The information can help you work with the dealerships to provide more specific instructions on what to do with the vehicles. Description The content area of the Study Dashboard page displays the following sections: Component Navigation - Allows you to select the type of study by component group to display in the Study Dashboard summary Filter by - Allows you to filter the information to display only the records that match your criteria Page Navigation Bar - Allows you to navigate from page to page, if multiple pages exist Summary - Displays general information for all records on the page Tasks You can perform the following tasks from or on the Study Dashboard page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Access a Study to View Results Access Hold Study Result Page Access the Create Study Page to Create a Study Access the Create Study Page to Modify a Study Delete a Study Export Study Dashboard Information Filter the Study Summary List Print Study Criteria Print Study Results Restart a Study Suspend a Study View the Study Dashboard Access a Study to View Results Access Hold Study Result Page Access the Create Study Page to Create a Study Access the Create Study Page to Modify a Study Delete a Study Export Study Dashboard Information Filter the Study Summary List Print Study Criteria Print Study Results Restart a Study Suspend a Study View the Study Dashboard View Study Dashboard Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Study Dashboard page. Define or Modify a Study Workflow Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow View One Study Result Workflow View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow Page Preview
View Overview Information Manage Dealer Operation Code Page Overview Manage Dealer Operation Codes Workflow Perform Tasks Change a Dealer Operation Code Export the Dealer Operation Code Summary Filter the Dealer Operation Code Summary Perform Common DBS Tasks Re-Run Translation Process - Dealer Operation Code View the Dealer Operation Code Summary Change a Dealer Operation Code Export the Dealer Operation Code Summary Filter the Dealer Operation Code Summary Perform Common DBS Tasks Re-Run Translation Process - Dealer Operation Code View the Dealer Operation Code Summary
Dealer Operation Code Dealer Operation Codes ReRun Dealer Operation Codes Translation Manage Dealer Operation Codes Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing dealer operation codes. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Dealer Operation Codes Workflow. Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes Workflow Manage Standard Operation Categories Workflow Manage Standard Operation Codes Workflow
View User Permissions Page Overview Purpose Use the View User Permissions page to view permissions for a specific user. Description The content area of the View User Permissions page displays the following sections: Quick Jump menu - Appears on the left-hand side of the page. The Quick Jump menu allows you to show one section at a time, or show or hide the default view for all sections. Permission Function Tree - By default, the function tree expands two sections: Menu and User Information. The function tree also includes a Host Report section and a Report Writer section. For internal users, the function tree also includes a Publishing section. Use the + and - icons to show or hide a section. Use the expand all | collapse all features to expand or collapse a section. Cancel button - Returns you to the User Summary page Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the View User Permissions page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Use the Quick Jump Menu View User Permissions Use the Quick Jump Menu View User Permissions Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflow are performed on the View User Permissions page. View User Permissions Workflow Page Preview
Create or Edit a Calendar Event Workflow Note : This workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating or modifying a calendar event. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create or Edit a Calendar Event workflow. Create or Edit an Alert Workflow Create or Edit an Announcement Workflow Create or Edit a Notification Workflow
User Summary Page Overview Purpose Use the User Summary page to search for and view the list of users for whom you can set permissions. You can also designate a system administrator, specify primary and secondary contacts, deactivate or reactivate a user, or open pages that allow you to view, copy, set up, or edit permissions for a selected user. Description The content area of the User Summary page displays the following sections: Search and filter criteria - Allows you to search for records that match your criteria Show Active User and Inactive User button - Allows you to toggle between active users only or active and inactive users Save and Cancel buttons - Allows you to submit or cancel requested changes User Summary List - Displays general information for all records on the page Page Navigation - Allows you to navigate from page to page, if multiple pages exist Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the User Summary page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. About the User Summary Page Access the Copy User Permissions Page (Internal Users) Access the Edit User Permissions Page (Internal Users) Access the View User Permissions Page (Internal Users) Deactivate or Reactivate a User (Internal Users) Designate Dealer Administrator and Contacts Grant or Remove access to DBS Retrieve a List of New or Updated Users Search for a Dealer User (Dealer Users) Search for a Dealer User (Internal Users) Search for an Internal User (Internal Users) About the User Summary Page Access the Copy User Permissions Page Access the Edit User Permissions Page Access the View User Permissions Page Deactivate or Reactivate a User Designate Dealer Administrator and Contacts Filter the User Summary by Position Grant or Remove Access to DBS Retrieve a List of New or Updated Users Search for a Dealer User by Dealer Code (Dealer Number) Search for a Dealer User by Name Search for a Dealer User by Hierarchy Search for an Internal User by Hierarchy Search for an Internal User by Name Search for an Internal User by User ID Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the User Summary page. User Summary Workflow View User Permissions Workflow Page Preview
View Overview Information Customer Pay Reimbursement Page Overview View Customer Pay Reimbursement Workflow Perform Tasks Exclude a Job Line Export Customer Pay Results Filter and View Customer Pay Reimbursement Results Perform Common DBS Tasks Print Customer Pay Reimbursement Results View Repair Orders Exclude a Job Line Export Customer Pay Results Filter and View Customer Pay Reimbursement Results Perform Common DBS Tasks Print Customer Pay Reimbursement Results View Repair Orders
Customer Customer Pay Reimbursement Reimbursement Customer Pay Reimbursement Customer Pay Reimbursement View Customer Pay Reimbursement Analysis Workflow : Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for customer pay reimbursement analysis.
Hold Study Result Page Overview Purpose Use the Hold Study Result page to view a list of all vehicles, and the associated Repair Orders, that meet the criteria for Hold studies. Note : The Hold Study Result page is available to internal users only. Description The content area of the Hold Study Result page displays the following sections: Component Navigation - Allows you to select the type of study by component group to display Filter By - Allows you to filter the information to display only the records that match your criteria Hold Status - Allows you to narrow your results further by showing either "Confirmed" or "Requested" hold statuses Results - Allows you to view the results of the selected criteria Tasks You can perform the following tasks from or on the Hold Status Summary page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Access a Study to View Results Access One Dealer Study Results Export Hold Status Summary Information Filter Hold Status Summary Release a Vehicle from Dealer Hold View Dealer Study Results View NSH for a Vehicle in a Study View One Study Result View Repair Order for Vehicle in a Study Access a Study to View Results Access One Dealer Study Results Export Hold Status Summary Information Filter Hold Status Summary Release a Vehicle from Dealer Hold View Dealer Study Results View NSH for a Vehicle in a Study View One Study Result View Repair Order for Vehicle in a Study View Hold Status Summary Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Hold Status Summary page. Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow View One Study Result Workflow Page Preview
To view part master information: In the Part Number field, type the part number. - OR - Perform a part lookup. Note : Click here for information on how to look up a part. Note : If you are an internal user, select the desired division. Click the Search icon. Review the information in the Price Book Flag field. If the field displays a "Y", orders may be placed for this part. If the field displays an "N" or is empty, no parts orders will be accepted for this part. To view a description of a code, move your mouse pointer over the field label. Review the information in the Wholesale Type Code field. If the field displays code "P" (Mechanical) or "Z" (Collision), the part may qualify for an incentive as determined by the Parts Business Team. Note : Not all parts will qualify for incentives. If the value in the Supersession field is "Y", in the Supersession Info section, click the new part link to open and view the current part number. If a part is superseded, you must view the current part number. If a part is superseded, you must view the current part number.
View Part Master Information To view part master information: In the Part Number field, type the part number. - OR - Perform a part lookup. Note : Click here for information on how to look up a part. Note : If you are an internal user, select the desired division. Click the Search icon. Note : To remove search criteria, click the Clear icon. Review the information in the Price Book Flag field. If the field displays a "Y", orders may be placed for this part. If the field displays an "N" or is empty, no parts orders will be accepted for this part. To view a description of a code, move your mouse pointer over the field label. Review the information in the Wholesale Type Code field. If the field displays code "P" (Mechanical) or "Z" (Collision), the part may qualify for an incentive as determined by the Parts Business Team. Note : Not all parts will qualify for incentives. If the value in the Supersession field is "Y", in the Supersession Info section, click the new part link to open and view the current part number. If a part is superseded, you must view the current part number.
Master Part Master Master View Parts Master Information Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for displaying parts master information. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the View Parts Master Information Workflow. Request Full Parts Master Workflow
To export the Campaign Master Table data: Filter or sort the table data as desired, and then click the Export button. Select the "Excel" option. Follow your browser-specific instructions to open or save the file. You can filter, sort, and print the data if you export the information to Microsoft ® Excel ® .
Export Campaign Master Table Information To export the Campaign Master Table data: Filter or sort the table data as desired. Click the Export button. Select the " Microsoft ® Excel ® " option. Follow your browser-specific instructions to open or save the file.
To filter the dealer operation code summary: From the Filter by drop down list, select the desired option. As applicable, type or select a secondary filter value. Click the Search icon to view the results or click the Clear icon to clear the fields and enter new criteria. View the updated list that matches your filter criteria.
Filter the Dealer Operation Code Summary To filter the dealer operation code summary: From the Filter by drop down list, select the desired option. As applicable, type or select a secondary filter value. Click the Search icon to view the results or click the Clear icon to clear the fields and enter new criteria. View the updated list that matches your filter criteria.
Dealer Operation Code Dealer Operation Codes ReRun Dealer Operation Codes Translation Manage Dealer Operation Codes Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing dealer operation codes. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Dealer Operation Codes Workflow. Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes Workflow Manage Standard Operation Categories Workflow Manage Standard Operation Codes Workflow
View One Study Result Workflow Note : The View One Study Result workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing a study that integrates appointment and repair order data collected by the Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the View One Study Result workflow. Define or Modify Study Workflow Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow
To delete a parts order from the Parts Order Management page: Select the parts order you want to delete. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Delete Order option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm, or click the No button to close the window without confirming. To delete a parts order, the order must be in "New" or "Open" status.
Delete a Parts Order from the Parts Order Management Page To delete a parts order from the Parts Order Management page: Select the part order you want to delete. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Delete Order option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm, or click the No button to close the window without confirming. To delete a parts order, the order must be in "New" or "Open" status.
Manage Orders Manage Orders Manage Orders Manage Orders Parts Order Management Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing parts orders. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Parts Order workflow. Create Parts Order Workflow Edit Parts Order Workflow Inquire on the Availability of Parts at the Parts Distribution Centers Workflow View Parts Order Workflow Create Parts Order Workflow Edit Parts Order Workflow View Parts Order Workflow
Note : The View NSH function is available from the Edit/Create Warranty Claim, View Warranty Claim, Quick Entry Warranty Claim, and Express Entry Warranty Claim pages. To view NSH (National Service History) for a warranty claim: At the bottom of the page, click the NSH button. Note : The National Service History window opens. Click Print to print the NSH report, or click Close to return to the previous screen. You can view NSH information regardless of the status of a claim.
View NSH for a Warranty Claim Note : The View NSH function is available from the Edit/Create Warranty Claim, View Warranty Claim, Quick Entry Warranty Claim, and Express Entry Warranty Claim pages. To view the National Service History (NSH) for a warranty claim: At the bottom of the page, click the NSH button. Note : The National Service History window opens. Click Print to print the NSH report, or click Close to return to the previous page. You can view NSH information regardless of the status of a claim.
Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Edit Warranty Claims Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Warranty Claims Edit or Create Warranty Claims Workflow *** Nissan Canada Inc. (NCI) recommends dealers create Warranty Claims in an NCI DBS certified dealer management system and then log into NCI DBS to review, validate and submit the claim to NCI. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating and editing claims. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Warranty Claims Workflow or View Warranty Claims Workflow. Manage Warranty Claims Workflow View Warranty Claims Workflow
Note : The View NSH function is available from the Edit/Create Warranty Claim, View Warranty Claim, Quick Entry Warranty Claim, and Express Entry Warranty Claim pages. To view NSH (National Service History) for a warranty claim: At the bottom of the page, click the NSH button. Note : The National Service History window opens. Click Print to print the NSH report, or click Close to return to the previous screen. You can view NSH information regardless of the status of a claim.
View NSH for a Warranty Claim Note : The View NSH function is available from the Edit/Create Warranty Claim, View Warranty Claim, Quick Entry Warranty Claim, and Express Entry Warranty Claim pages. To view the National Service History (NSH) for a warranty claim: At the bottom of the page, click the NSH button. Note : The National Service History window opens. Click Print to print the NSH report, or click Close to return to the previous page. You can view NSH information regardless of the status of a claim.
Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Edit Warranty Claims Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Warranty Claims Edit or Create Warranty Claims Workflow *** Nissan Canada Inc. (NCI) recommends dealers create Warranty Claims in an NCI DBS certified dealer management system and then log into NCI DBS to review, validate and submit the claim to NCI. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating and editing claims. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Warranty Claims Workflow or View Warranty Claims Workflow. Manage Warranty Claims Workflow View Warranty Claims Workflow
Note : The View NSH function is available from the Edit/Create Warranty Claim, View Warranty Claim, Quick Entry Warranty Claim, and Express Entry Warranty Claim pages. To view NSH (National Service History) for a warranty claim: At the bottom of the page, click the NSH button. Note : The National Service History window opens. Click Print to print the NSH report, or click Close to return to the previous screen. You can view NSH information regardless of the status of a claim.
View NSH for a Warranty Claim Note : The View NSH function is available from the Edit/Create Warranty Claim, View Warranty Claim, Quick Entry Warranty Claim, and Express Entry Warranty Claim pages. To view the National Service History (NSH) for a warranty claim: At the bottom of the page, click the NSH button. Note : The National Service History window opens. Click Print to print the NSH report, or click Close to return to the previous page. You can view NSH information regardless of the status of a claim.
Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Edit Warranty Claims Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Warranty Claims Edit or Create Warranty Claims Workflow *** Nissan Canada Inc. (NCI) recommends dealers create Warranty Claims in an NCI DBS certified dealer management system and then log into NCI DBS to review, validate and submit the claim to NCI. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating and editing claims. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Warranty Claims Workflow or View Warranty Claims Workflow. Manage Warranty Claims Workflow View Warranty Claims Workflow
To view vehicle details from the RDR History page: Select the vehicle for which you want to view the vehicle detail. Move your cursor over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the View Vehicle Detail menu option. Note : The vehicle detail opens in a new window. To print the vehicle detail, click the Print button. Note : A PDF file of the vehicle detail displays. Click the Print icon to print the detail. To email the vehicle detail, click the Email button. In the Receiver and CC fields, type the email address for each person who should receive a copy of the vehicle detail. Click the Send button. Click the Close button to return to the RDR History page.
View Vehicle Detail from RDR History To view vehicle details from the RDR History page: Select the vehicle for which you want to view the vehicle detail. Move your cursor over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the View Vehicle Detail menu option. Note : The vehicle detail opens in a new window. Click the Close button to return to the RDR History page. To print the vehicle detail, click the Print button. Note : A PDF file of the vehicle detail displays. Click the Printer icon to print the PDF file. To email the vehicle detail, click the Email button. In the Receiver and CC (Carbon Copy) fields, type the email address of each person who will receive a copy of the vehicle detail. Click the Send button. To close the vehicle detail and return to the RDR History page, click the Close button.
History Processes RDR History RDR History Retail Delivery Reporting (RDR) History View RDR History Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing Retail Delivery Reporting (RDR) history. Related Workflows The following workflows may have similar tasks in common with the Viewing RDR History Workflow. RDR a Vehicle Workflow
One Study Result Page Overview Purpose Use the One Study Result page to view a summary of a selected study and a listing of vehicles that satisfy the conditions of the study. Note : The One Study Result page is available for internal users only. Description The content area of the One Study Result page displays the following sections: Filter by - Allows you to filter the information to display only the records that match your criteria Study Information - Allows you to view the criteria for inclusion in the study Result - Allows you to view the results of the selected study Tasks You can perform the following tasks from or on the One Study Result page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Access One Dealer's Study Results View NSH for a Vehicle in a Study View One Study Result View Repair Order Access One Dealer's Study Results View NSH for a Vehicle in a Study View One Study Result View Repair Order Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the One Study Result page. Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow View One Study Result Workflow Page Preview
To filter the One Study Result page: From the Filter By drop-down list, select the desired filter option. Type or select a secondary search value. Click the Search icon. Note : The Result section lists only results related to the filter criteria entered. If an option is not available, that option is not displayed.
Filter the One Study Result Page To filter information on the One Study Result page: From the Filter By drop-down list, select the desired filter option. Type or select a secondary filter value. Click the Search icon. Note : The Result section updates to display only those results which match the filter criteria you entered.
Dashboard Early Detection System (EDS) Hold Status Processes Study View Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow Note: The Manage Early Detection System Studies workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing Early Detection System (EDS) studies that integrate appointment and repair order data collected by the Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow. Define or Modify a Study Workflow View One Study Result Workflow View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow
Dashboard Early Detection System (EDS) EDS: Study Dashboard Processes EDS: Study Dashboard Study Study Dashboard View View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow Note : The View a Dealer's Study Results workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing one dealer's study results that integrate appointment and repair order data collected by the Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the View a Dealer's Study Results workflow. Define or Modify a Study Workflow Manage Early Detection Studies Workflow View One Study Result Workflow
To export the results of customer pay analysis: After you have run the customer pay analysis as desired, click the Export button. Note : Click here for instructions on how to run the customer pay analysis. Select the Excel option. Save the file to your local drive. You can filter, sort, and print the data if you export the customer pay results information to Microsoft® Excel®.
Export Customer Pay Results To export the results of customer pay analysis: After you have run the customer pay analysis as desired, click the Export button. Note : Click here for instructions on how to run the customer pay analysis. Select the Excel option. Save the file to your local drive. You can filter, sort, and print the data if you export the customer pay results to Microsoft® Excel®.
Customer Customer Pay Reimbursement Reimbursement Customer Pay Reimbursement Customer Pay Reimbursement View Customer Pay Reimbursement Analysis Workflow : Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for customer pay reimbursement analysis.
MRW: 11/1: Need order that has related order information. Related to CSC - after a part's order has been upgraded to csc order, the new CSC order will have the related order number, which is the original order upgraded to CSC. so TOS or VOR order?
MRW: 1/7/13: Related order number is now on the detail line all the way to the right (scroll). Cannot find a CSC order with a related part number - so I manually mocked it up. To view related order detail for a CSC order: In the Parts Order Detail section, scroll right. Click the Related Order Number link. Note : The detail for the related order appears. To view related order detail, the order must a CSC order that was previously a VOR or TOS order. The related order number is the original VOR or TOS order number.
MRW: 11/1: Need order that has related order information.
MRW: 1/7/13: Related order number is now on the detail line all the way to the right (scroll). Cannot find a CSC order with a related part number. So I manually mocked it up. View Related Order Detail for a CSC Order To view related order detail for a CSC order: In the Parts Order Detail section, Use the scroll bar to scroll to the right. For the desired order, click the Related Order Number link. Note : The detail for the related order appears. To view related order detail, the order must be a CSC order that was previously a VOR or TOS order. The related order number is the original VOR or TOS order number.
To reject all selected parts returns: Select the checkbox for each part return you want to reject. To select all returns in "Submitted" status, select the checkbox in the navigation header. Click the Reject All button. Note : The Reject All button is only enabled when you have selected one or more returns. Note : The Reject Part Return dialog box appears. To reject the selected parts returns and reset the part return status to "Open", click the Yes button. To close the dialog box without rejecting the selected returns, click the No button.
Reject All Returns on the Parts Return Summary Page To reject all selected parts returns: Select the checkbox for each part return you want to reject. To select all returns in "Submitted" status, select the checkbox in the navigation header. Click the Reject All button. Note : The Reject All button is only enabled when you have selected one or more returns. Note : The Reject Part Return dialog box appears. To reject the selected parts returns and reset the part return status to "Open", click the Yes button. To close the dialog box without rejecting the selected returns, click the No button.
Parts Order Management Page Overview Purpose Use the Parts Order Management page to view open, new, allocated, and backordered part orders. Access the Parts Order Management page by clicking the Parts Order Management link from the Parts menu. Description The content area of the Parts Order Management page displays the following sections: Filter by - Allows you to filter the information to display only the records that match your criteria Page navigation bar - Allows you to navigate from page to page, if multiple pages exist Parts Orders summary - Displays general information for all records on the page Parts Orders Detail - Displays specific information for a selected record Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Parts Order Management page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Access the Create Parts Order Page Access the Edit Parts Order Page Access the PDC Inquiry Page to View Part Availability Access the View Parts Order Page Access Reports Delete a Parts Order Export Parts Order Management Information Filter Parts Order Management Summary Look Up a Part Print Parts Order Detail Submit a Parts Order View Parts Order Management Summary and Detail Definitions for Fields on the Parts Order Management Page Access the Create Parts Order Page Access the Edit Parts Order Page Access the Parts Locator Page Access the View Parts Order Page Access the VOR Inquiry Page to View Part Availability Access Reports Delete a Parts Order Export Parts Order Management Information Filter Parts Order Management Summary Look Up a Part Print Parts Order Detail Submit a Parts Order View Parts Order Management Summary and Detail Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Parts Order Management page. Create Parts Order Workflow Edit Parts Order Workflow Manage Parts Order Workflow Page Preview
About Vehicle Inventory: What You Need to Know Vehicle trades are done using OMS and the results are immediately reflected in OMS, but inventory updates into DBS only occur every 30 minutes. If you have completed a vehicle trade in OMS, this vehicle may not display in your vehicle inventory for up to 30 minutes. Check your vehicle inventory for open campaigns to ensure repairs are performed before retail sale. Vehicles with campaigns are color-coded for quick visibility. Note : Use the "Open Campaign" option in the Filter By drop-down list to view all vehicles in your inventory with open campaigns, or click the Reports button and select the Campaign Report menu option to print a list of vehicles in your inventory with open campaigns. If the text for a vehicle row is in bold red, then it has an open campaign. Move your cursor over the text in the Serial field to view the campaign(s) for the vehicle. If the text for a vehicle row is in bold black, then a repair order has been completed for this vehicle and the campaign repairs have been completed, but the warranty claim is waiting for payment. All vehicles with normal text have no campaign, or have one or more completed campaigns that have been paid by NNA. A red asterisk to the left of a stock umber indicates that a vehicle has a note attached. You can view the note content by moving your cursor over the asterisk. Note : Click here for additional information on managing vehicle notes. An "H" (meaning "hidden") displays next to those vehicles that have the "Do not show this vehicle in Locator Search results or allow any Trade activity" selected in OMS. These vehicles will also be hidden from any Inventory Search results in DBS if another dealer views your inventory. Move your mouse over the fields on the Vehicle Inventory page to get additional data: Serial - displays the model code or any open campaigns. Note : Click the serial number to view the Vehicle Inventory Detail page for the vehicle. Status - displays the date and time when the vehicle status was updated. Ext - displays the vehicle's exterior color. Int - displays the vehicle's interior color. Click the MSRP link to view print, or email the window sticker. Note : Click here for additional information.
RDR History Page Overview Purpose Use the Retail Delivery Reporting (RDR) History page to view historical reported sales activity and to unwind completed and reported RDRs. RDR history includes all RDR records for a period of 13 months which includes the current sales month plus the 12 prior months. RDR displays on the RDR History page immediately after RDRs are submitted and accepted. Note : When a vehicle is reported as sold, unwound for any reason, and then reported as sold again, the RDR History page shows multiple lines for that single vehicle. Description The content area of the RDR History page displays the following sections: Filter - Allows you to list either fleet or retail records and filter the list by selecting a Filter By category and entering specific criteria RDR History summary list - Displays the RDR records that match your selections in the Filter section Totals - Provides a statistical breakdown of the RDR records matching the filter criteria, for a period of 13 months Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the RDR History page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. RDR History: What You Need to know about RDRs and Unwinds About RDR History Export RDR History Information Filter RDR History Filter the RDR History Page by Sales Type Print RDR Detail from RDR History Unwind RDR View OMS Vehicle Detail from RDR History View Vehicle Detail from RDR History View Vehicle Invoice RDR History: What You Need to know about RDRs and Unwinds About RDR History Export RDR History Information Filter RDR History Print RDR Detail from the RDR History Page Unwind RDR View Vehicle Detail from RDR History View Vehicle Invoice Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflow are performed on the RDR History page. View RDR History Workflow Page Preview
To view vehicle detail: Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon for the selected vehicle. From the Action menu, select the View Vehicle Detail option. Note : The Vehicle Inventory Detail window appears. View the information in the Vehicle Inventory Detail window. Note : If desired, click the Print button and follow the prompts to print the vehicle detail. To close the Vehicle Inventory Detail window, click the Close button.
View Vehicle Detail from Inventory Search To view vehicle detail from the Inventory Search page: Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon for the selected vehicle. From the Action menu, select the View Vehicle Detail option. Note : The Vehicle Inventory Detail window appears. Click the Print icon to print the vehicle detail.
Inventory Search Inventory Search Processes Search Inventory Search Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for searching and viewing inventory for a particular vehicle model with specified features and options. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Inventory Search workflow. Vehicle Inventory Workflow
To submit a parts return from the Parts Return Management page: Select the parts return. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Submit option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to submit the parts return or the No button to cancel. Note : If the parts return contains warnings, DCS displays a warning message. Note: If a warning message appears, click OK to proceed or No to cancel. Note : If you cancel the submission, edit the parts return to resolve any errors and resubmit. To submit a parts return, the return must be in "New," "Open," or blank status. You cannot submit a parts return to the host more than five days prior to the return due date.
Submit a Parts Return from the Parts Return Management Page To submit a Parts Return from the Parts Return Management Page: Select the parts return. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Submit option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to submit the parts return or click the No button to cancel. Note : You cannot submit a parts return if you have a previous return that is not in Completed or Canceled status. To submit a parts return, the return must be in "New" or "Open" status. You cannot submit a parts return to the host more than five days prior to the return due date.
Manage Returns Manage Returns Manage Returns Manage Parts Return Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing parts returns. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Parts Return Workflow. Create Parts Return Workflow Modify Parts Return Workflow
View Overview Information View Dealer Information Page Overview Dealer Summary Workflow Perform Tasks Edit Dealer Information Perform Common DBS Tasks View Dealer Information Edit Dealer Information Perform Common DBS Tasks View Dealer Information
Dealer Dealer Permissions Dealer Processes View Dealer Summary Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing dealer information or permissions. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the View Dealer Information or Permissions Workflow. Edit Dealer Information Workflow Edit Dealer Permissions Workflow (NNA Only)
To add comments to an SVC (service campaign) order: Select the SVC order to which you want to add comments. Move your cursor over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Create Comments option. In the area provided, type your desired comments. Click the Save button to save your comments. Note : To close the Create Comments window without saving your comments, click the Cancel button.
Add Comments to an SVC Order To add comments to an SVC (service campaign) order: Select the SVC order to which you want to add comments. Move your cursor over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Create Comments option. In the area provided, type your desired comments. Click the Save button to save your comments. Note : To close the Create Comments window without saving your comments, click the Cancel button.
Approve or Reject SVC Order Reject Approve or Reject SVC Order Approve or Reject SVC Order Manage Service Campaign Order Workflow Note : This workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing a Service Campaign (SVC) order. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Service Campaign Order Workflow. Manage Campaign Parts Workflow View Service Campaign Order Workflow
To delete an RDR: Click the Delete button at the bottom of the page. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to delete, or click the No button to close without deleting.
Delete RDR To delete an RDR: Click the Delete button at the bottom of the page. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to delete, or click the No button to close without deleting.
Processes RDR RDR RDR a Vehicle Workflow Note : This workflow is for NNA users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for retail delivery reporting (RDR) or editing the sale of a vehicle. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Report or Edit the Sale of a Vehicle workflow. Vehicle Inventory Workflow Inventory Search Workflow View RDR History Workflow
To delete an RDR: Click the Delete button at the bottom of the page. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to delete, or click the No button to close without deleting.
Delete RDR To delete an RDR: Click the Delete button at the bottom of the page. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to delete, or click the No button to close without deleting.
Processes RDR RDR RDR a Vehicle Workflow Note : This workflow is for NNA users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for retail delivery reporting (RDR) or editing the sale of a vehicle. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Report or Edit the Sale of a Vehicle workflow. Vehicle Inventory Workflow Inventory Search Workflow View RDR History Workflow
To print RFC Detail: Select the desired RFC claim. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Print RFC Detail option. Note: A File Download dialog opens. Click the Open button. Note: A PDF file opens. From the toolbar, click the Printer icon to print the report.
Print RFC Detail To print RFC Detail: Select the desired RFC application. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Print RFC Detail option. Note: A File Download dialog opens. Click the Open button. Note: A PDF file opens. From the toolbar, click the Printer icon to print the report.
Applications Request for Credit RFC Request for Credit Status Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing Request for Credit (RFC) status.
To open the Edit Dealer Information page: Select the dealer. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Edit Dealer Information option. Note : The Edit Dealer Information page appears.
Open the Edit Dealer Information Page To open the Edit Dealer Information page: Select the dealer. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Edit Dealer Information option. Note : The Edit Dealer Information page appears.
To open the Edit Dealer Information page: Select the dealer. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Edit Dealer Information option. Note : The Edit Dealer Information page appears.
Open the Edit Dealer Information Page To open the Edit Dealer Information page: Select the dealer. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Edit Dealer Information option. Note : The Edit Dealer Information page appears.
To filter the Campaign Report page: Note : This page is available to internal users only. To quickly limit the results of the display to vehicles at a specific dealership, in the Dealer field, type the dealer number, or click the Search icon to search by dealer name. Note : If you make additional selections from the hierarchy drop-down lists, your dealer name/number search will only produce results if the dealership falls within the selected hierarchy. From the Affiliate , Division , Region , Area , and District drop-down lists, select the desired information to limit the search results by hierarchy. By default, the Campaign Report page displays information for new vehicles. If desired, from the Vehicle Type drop-down list, select the "Used" vehicle type to display campaign information for used vehicles. To limit the search results to a specific campaign, in the Campaign ID field, type the unique campaign identifier. To limit the search results to display only those vehicles which should not be sold until the campaign repairs are complete, select "Yes" from the Stop Sale drop-down list. To limit the search results to display only those vehicles involved in campaigns where the campaign parts are restricted, select "Yes" from the Parts Restriction drop-down list. Click the Search icon. If more than one page of results displays, the navigation section of the page displays page numbers and arrows you can use to navigate from page to page, and the Go to Page field, where you can type the page number you want to view. Click the Go button to view the page number entered in the Go to Page field.
Filter the Campaign Report Page To filter the Campaign Report page: Note : This page is available to internal users only. To quickly limit the results of the display to vehicles at a specific dealership, in the Dealer field, type the dealer number, or click the Search icon to search by dealer name. Note : If you make additional selections from the hierarchy drop-down lists, your dealer name/number search will only produce results if the dealership falls within the selected hierarchy. From the Affiliate , Division , Region , Area , and District drop-down lists, select the desired information to limit the search results by hierarchy. By default, the Campaign Report page displays information for new vehicles. If desired, from the Vehicle Type drop-down list, select the "Used" vehicle type to display campaign information for used vehicles. To limit the search results to a specific campaign, in the Campaign ID field, type the unique campaign identifier. To limit the search results to display only those vehicles which should not be sold until the campaign repairs are complete, select "Yes" from the Stop Sale drop-down list. To limit the search results to display only those vehicles involved in campaigns where the campaign parts are restricted, select "Yes" from the Parts Restriction drop-down list. Click the Search icon. If more than one page of results displays, the navigation section of the page displays page numbers and arrows you can use to navigate from page to page, and the Go to Page field, where you can type the page number you want to view. Click the Go button to view the page number entered in the Go to Page field.
Note : This task applies to internal users only. To view a custom search group: Select the group you want to view. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the View / Edit option. Note : The Selected Dealers list displays all the dealers for the selected group. You can view the list of dealers by name only or by name and number. To display by dealer name only, click the Dealer Name link. To display by dealer number and dealer name, click the Dealer Code link. You can also view the list of dealers by letter. To display all dealers that start with a specific letter, click the link for the desired letter.
View Custom Search Group Note : This task applies to internal users only. To view a custom search group: From the custom search group list, select the group you want to view. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the View / Edit option. Note : The Selected Dealers list displays all the dealers for the selected group. You can view the list of dealers by name only or by name and number. To display by dealer name only, click the Dealer Name link. To display by dealer number and dealer name, click the Dealer Code link. You can also view the list of dealers by letter. To display all dealers that start with a specific letter, click the link for the desired letter.
Custom Search Group Manage Custom Search Group Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing custom search groups. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Custom Search Group (Parts Metrics) Workflow. View Parts Metrics Workflow
To submit an RDR batch: Select one or more RDRs from the Batch RDR summary list. Note : To select all RDRs, select the checkbox in the gray header area. Click the Batch Submit button. Only RDRs saved without errors appear in the Batch RDR summary list.
Submit an RDR Batch To submit an RDR batch: Select one or more RDRs from the Batch RDR summary list. Note : To select all RDRs, select the checkbox in the gray header area. Click the Batch Submit button. Only RDRs saved without errors appear in the Batch RDR summary list.
To view repair order (RO) information for a vehicle in a study: In the RO column, click the repair order number link. Note : The Repair Order Information window opens. View the RO details. Note : To print the RO, click the Print button. To close, click the Close button. In DBS , you can view repair order (RO) information in multiple ways.
View Repair Order Information for a Vehicle in a Study To view repair order (RO) information for a vehicle in a study: In the RO column, click the repair order number link. Note : The Repair Order Information window opens. View the RO details. Note : To print the RO, click the Print button. To close, click the Close button.
Dashboard Early Detection System (EDS) EDS: Study Dashboard Processes EDS: Study Dashboard Study Study Dashboard View View One Study Result Workflow Note : The View One Study Result workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing a study that integrates appointment and repair order data collected by the Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the View One Study Result workflow. Define or Modify Study Workflow Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow
Dashboard Early Detection System (EDS) EDS: Service Dashboard EDS: Service Dashboard Service Dashboard Study Technical Service Bulletin (TSB) View the Service Dashboard Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing the Service Dashboard. You may view study alerts generated regarding vehicles that meet the criteria of informational or hold studies or technical service bulletins. You may also view open repair orders or National Service History.
Dashboard Early Detection System (EDS) Hold Status Processes Study View Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow Note: The Manage Early Detection System Studies workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing Early Detection System (EDS) studies that integrate appointment and repair order data collected by the Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow. Define or Modify a Study Workflow View One Study Result Workflow View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow
Dashboard Early Detection System (EDS) EDS: Study Dashboard Processes EDS: Study Dashboard Study Study Dashboard View View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow Note : The View a Dealer's Study Results workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing one dealer's study results that integrate appointment and repair order data collected by the Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the View a Dealer's Study Results workflow. Define or Modify a Study Workflow Manage Early Detection Studies Workflow View One Study Result Workflow
Service Dashboard Page Overview Purpose The Service Dashboard allows you to view service alerts and open repair orders (ROs) in one, user-friendly interface. DBS automatically updates the Service Dashboard page each time a vehicle alert or RO is created or modified. All entries in the Alerts section match keywords from an EDS study. Note : An EDS study is created by DBS Internal users to track information related to vehicle performance or construction. The main study categories are general, hold, and informational. Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) are part of informational studies. It is very important to look at the Alerts section regularly so you can respond appropriately to service alerts, especially to vehicle holds. Each dealership may have different procedures for responding to vehicle holds. For example, a dealership might respond by telling customers about the issue and then communicating with the Engineering department for items to be addressed. At times, vehicles may also need to be recalled. Tip : In addition to checking the Service Dashboard page regularly, you may also receive notifications when EDS studies are created. Typically, service managers are part of the DBS notification process in which they receive an email when one or more study types are created. Description The content area of the Service Dashboard page displays the following sections: Filter - Allows you to filter the information to display only the records that match your criteria Alerts - Displays job lines from ROs that have alerts associated with them. DBS places a repair order job line in the Alerts section when the job line matches any of the following criteria: Active Hold Study Active Informational Study Technical Service Bulletin (TSB) keywords defined in one or more EDS studies Open ROs - Displays all open repair orders without alerts Color-Coding in Alerts Section Color-coding in the Alerts section is designed to help you quickly identify the type of alert being issued by NNA/NCI, as described in the following table. Matched Study Type Color Highlight Vehicle Hold Only Red Vehicle Hold and Informational Red Informational Only Yellow Linked TSB with matching keywords Yellow Tasks You can perform the following tasks from or on the Service Dashboard page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Filter the Service Dashboard Hold Vehicle or Ignore Request View NSH from the Service Dashboard View Repair Order Information View Study Alert Detail View Technical Service Bulletin (TSB) View the Service Dashboard Filter the Service Dashboard Hold Vehicle or Ignore Request View NSH from the Service Dashboard View Repair Order Information View Study Alert Detail View Technical Service Bulletin (TSB) View the Service Dashboard Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Service Dashboard page. View the Service Dashboard Workflow Page Preview
To add a part to a parts return: Type a valid part number or perform a part lookup. Note : Click here for more information on how to look up a part. Type a valid return quantity. Note : The return quantity must be a multiple of the unit pack. For example, if the unit pack is 15, you must specify a return quantity of 15, 30, 45, and so on. Click the Add button. Click the Save button. To add a part to a parts return, the return must be in "New" or "Open" status.
Add a Part to a Return To add a part to a return: In the Part Number field, type a valid part number or perform a part lookup. Note : Click here for more information on how to look up a part. In the Return Quantity field, type a valid return quantity. Note : The return quantity must be a multiple of the unit pack. For example, if the unit pack is 15, you must specify a return quantity of 15, 30, 45, and so on. In the Box Number field, type the box number where the part is located. Click the Add button. Note : If an error icon appears, move your mouse over the icon to view and correct any errors. Click the Save button. To add a part to a return: In the Part Number field, type a valid part number or perform a part lookup. Note : Click here for more information on how to look up a part. In the Return Quantity field, type a valid return quantity. Note : If an error icon appears, move your mouse pointer over the icon to view any errors associated with the part or any remaining required detail. Correct the error as needed. Click the Add button. Note : If an error icon appears, move your mouse pointer over the icon to view and correct any errors. Click the Save button. To add a part to a parts return, the return must be in "New" or "Open" status.
Create Return Create Return Create Return Create Parts Return Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating a parts return. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create Parts Return Workflow. Manage Parts Return Workflow Modify Parts Return Workflow
Edit Return Edit Return Edit Return Edit Parts Return Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for modifying a parts return. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Edit Parts Return Workflow. Create Parts Return Workflow Manage Parts Return Workflow
To edit a claim on the Express Entry Warranty Claim page: Select the claim you want to edit. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Edit Claim in Express Entry Screen option.
Edit a Warranty Claim on the Express Entry Warranty Claim Page To edit a claim on the Express Entry Warranty Claim page: Select the claim you want to edit. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Edit Claim in Express Entry Screen option.
View Overview Information Monitor System Page Overview Perform Tasks Monitor Environment Status Perform Common DBS Tasks View Application or Transaction Status Information View Current Host Availability View NCI Host Availability Monitor Environment Status Monitor the Host Socket Listener Perform Common DBS Tasks View Application or Transaction Status Information View Current Host Availability View NCI Host Availability
To view a warranty claim: Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon for the warranty claim you want to view. From the Action menu, select the View Claim option. Note : DCS displays the selected warranty claim. The View Claim option is available for warranty claims with the following status types: Submitted, Suspended-Region, Suspended-National, Denied, Approved, and Approved-Adjusted.
View a Warranty Claim To view a warranty claim: Select the warranty claim you want to view. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon for the warranty claim you want to view. From the Action menu, select View Claim .
Manage Warranty Claims Processes Manage Warranty Claims Manage Warranty Claims Manage Warranty Claims Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing warranty claims. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create or Edit Warranty Claims Workflow or View Warranty Claims Workflow. Edit or Create Warranty Claims Workflow View Warranty Claims Workflow
To complete the Comments section of a claim on either the Edit/Create Warranty Claim page or the Quick Entry Warranty Claim page: If you are the service advisor, in the Advisor Comments field, type applicable comments. If you are the technician, in the Technician Comments field, type applicable comments. Note: Click here for instructions to complete the Customer section of a claim.
Complete the Comments Section of a Claim To complete the Comments section of a claim on either the Edit/Create Warranty Claim page or the Quick Entry Warranty Claim page: If you are the service advisor, in the Advisor Comments field, type applicable comments. If you are the service technician, in the Technician Comments field, type applicable comments. Each comments section has a maximum character limit of 300 characters.
Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Edit Warranty Claims Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Warranty Claims Edit or Create Warranty Claims Workflow *** Nissan Canada Inc. (NCI) recommends dealers create Warranty Claims in an NCI DBS certified dealer management system and then log into NCI DBS to review, validate and submit the claim to NCI. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating and editing claims. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Warranty Claims Workflow or View Warranty Claims Workflow. Manage Warranty Claims Workflow View Warranty Claims Workflow
To complete the Comments section of a claim on either the Edit/Create Warranty Claim page or the Quick Entry Warranty Claim page: If you are the service advisor, in the Advisor Comments field, type applicable comments. If you are the technician, in the Technician Comments field, type applicable comments. Note: Click here for instructions to complete the Customer section of a claim.
Complete the Comments Section of a Claim To complete the Comments section of a claim on either the Edit/Create Warranty Claim page or the Quick Entry Warranty Claim page: If you are the service advisor, in the Advisor Comments field, type applicable comments. If you are the service technician, in the Technician Comments field, type applicable comments. Each comments section has a maximum character limit of 300 characters.
Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Edit Warranty Claims Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Warranty Claims Edit or Create Warranty Claims Workflow *** Nissan Canada Inc. (NCI) recommends dealers create Warranty Claims in an NCI DBS certified dealer management system and then log into NCI DBS to review, validate and submit the claim to NCI. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating and editing claims. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Warranty Claims Workflow or View Warranty Claims Workflow. Manage Warranty Claims Workflow View Warranty Claims Workflow
Manage Service Campaign Order Workflow Note : This workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing a Service Campaign (SVC) order. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Service Campaign Order Workflow. Manage Campaign Parts Workflow View Service Campaign Order Workflow
To view parts return and accrual information: By default, the Returns and Accrual Information page displays information for the current calendar year. To view information for the previous calendar year, from the Calendar Year drop-down list, select the previous calendar year. In the Accrual Earnings section, view the accrual information for the current and future financial quarter. Note : Use the key provided on the right to understand any icons displayed in this section. In the Returns and Accrual Details section, view the details for previous, current, and future return periods in the current calendar year. Full return status and accrual details are provided to assist you in understanding your current accruals balance and return submission status. To return to the Parts Return Management page, click the Close button. The accrual for any parts rejected at the PDC will be added to your next month's accrual.
View Returns and Accrual Information To view parts return and accrual information: By default, the Returns and Accrual Information page displays information for the current calendar year. To view information for the previous calendar year, from the Calendar Year drop-down list, select the previous calendar year. In the Accrual Earnings section, view the accrual information for the current and future financial quarter. Note : Use the key provided on the right to understand any icons displayed in this section. In the Returns and Accrual Details section, view the details for previous, current, and future return periods in the current calendar year. Full return status and accrual details are provided to assist you in understanding your current accruals balance and return submission status. To return to the Parts Return Management page, click the Close button.
To use the quick jump menu: Click the expand (>>) icon. Click one of the options in the menu. To move to a specific section of the page, click a section title in the menu. To show or hide all sections, click the expand all or collapse all link. To jump to the top or bottom of the page, click the top or bottom link. To return to the top of the page from any section, click the Top button. To close the quick jump menu, click the collapse (<<) icon.
Use the Quick Jump Menu from Reports To use the quick jump menu: Click the expand (>>) icon. Click one of the options in the menu. To move to a specific section of the page, click a section title in the menu. To show or hide all sections, click the expand all or collapse all link. To jump to the top or bottom of the page, click the top or bottom link. To return to the top of the page from any section, click the Top button. To close the quick jump menu, click the collapse (<<) icon.
To use the quick jump menu: Click the expand (>>) icon. Click one of the options in the menu. To move to a specific section of the page, click a section title in the menu. To show or hide all sections, click the expand all or collapse all link. To jump to the top or bottom of the page, click the top or bottom link. To return to the top of the page from any section, click the Top button. To close the quick jump menu, click the collapse (<<) icon.
Use the Quick Jump Menu from Reports To use the quick jump menu: Click the expand (>>) icon. Click one of the options in the menu. To move to a specific section of the page, click a section title in the menu. To show or hide all sections, click the expand all or collapse all link. To jump to the top or bottom of the page, click the top or bottom link. To return to the top of the page from any section, click the Top button. To close the quick jump menu, click the collapse (<<) icon.
To use the quick jump menu: Click the expand (>>) icon. Click one of the options in the menu. To move to a specific section of the page, click a section title in the menu. To show or hide all sections, click the expand all or collapse all link. To jump to the top or bottom of the page, click the top or bottom link. To return to the top of the page from any section, click the Top button. To close the quick jump menu, click the collapse (<<) icon.
Use the Quick Jump Menu from Reports To use the quick jump menu: Click the expand (>>) icon. Click one of the options in the menu. To move to a specific section of the page, click a section title in the menu. To show or hide all sections, click the expand all or collapse all link. To jump to the top or bottom of the page, click the top or bottom link. To return to the top of the page from any section, click the Top button. To close the quick jump menu, click the collapse (<<) icon.
To use the quick jump menu: Click the expand (>>) icon. Click one of the options in the menu. To move to a specific section of the page, click a section title in the menu. To show or hide all sections, click the expand all or collapse all link. To jump to the top or bottom of the page, click the top or bottom link. To return to the top of the page from any section, click the Top button. To close the quick jump menu, click the collapse (<<) icon.
Use the Quick Jump Menu from Reports To use the quick jump menu: Click the expand (>>) icon. Click one of the options in the menu. To move to a specific section of the page, click a section title in the menu. To show or hide all sections, click the expand all or collapse all link. To jump to the top or bottom of the page, click the top or bottom link. To return to the top of the page from any section, click the Top button. To close the quick jump menu, click the collapse (<<) icon.
To use the quick jump menu: Click the expand (>>) icon. Click one of the options in the menu. To move to a specific section of the page, click a section title in the menu. To show or hide all sections, click the expand all or collapse all link. To jump to the top or bottom of the page, click the top or bottom link. To return to the top of the page from any section, click the Top button. To close the quick jump menu, click the collapse (<<) icon.
Use the Quick Jump Menu from Reports To use the quick jump menu: Click the expand (>>) icon. Click one of the options in the menu. To move to a specific section of the page, click a section title in the menu. To show or hide all sections, click the expand all or collapse all link. To jump to the top or bottom of the page, click the top or bottom link. To return to the top of the page from any section, click the Top button. To close the quick jump menu, click the collapse (<<) icon.
To select the report fields to be sorted: Select the fields to be sorted. Note : To select multiple items, press and hold the CTRL key while selecting items. Click the Move button. Note : To move all fields into the Selected Fields list, click the Move All button. To indicate the order in which the columns are to be sorted, select one or more items in the Selected Fields list and use the First , Up , Down , and Last buttons to adjust the sort order. If the report requires the data to be grouped by the values of the first sort field, select the Check here if you would like the report to add grouping levels to your report? checkbox. Note : The report will be broken into sections based on the first sort field selected. Select the sorting rule for each field. Select the fields to be totaled. Click here for instructions to select the fields to be totaled. The sort criteria section is optional. You can leave this section blank when you create a report. If you specify a grouping, the report will be broken into sections based on the first sort field selected. If you specify a grouping and specify a total, a total line appears at the end of each grouping section. A total line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you do not specify a grouping but specify a total, a total line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you specify a grouping and specify a count, a count line appears at the end of each grouping section. A count line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you do not specify a grouping but specify a count, a count line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents.
Complete the Sort Criteria Section of a Report To select the report fields to be sorted: From the Available Sortable Fields list, select the fields to be sorted. Note : To select multiple items, press and hold the CTRL key while selecting items. Click the Move button. Note : To move all fields into the Selected Fields list, click the Move All button. To indicate the order in which the columns are to be sorted, select one or more items in the Selected Fields list and use the First , Up , Down , and Last buttons to adjust the sort order. If the report requires the data to be grouped by the values of the first sort field, select the Check here if you would like the report to add grouping levels to your report? checkbox. Note : The report will be broken into sections based on the first sort field selected. In the Ascend and Descend lists, select the sorting rule for each field Select the fields to be totaled, as applicable. Click here for instructions to select the fields to be totaled. The sort criteria section is optional. You can leave this section blank when you create a report. If you specify a grouping, the report will be broken into sections based on the first sort field selected. If you specify a grouping and specify a total, a total line appears at the end of each grouping section. A total line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you do not specify a grouping but specify a total, a total line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you specify a grouping and specify a count, a count line appears at the end of each grouping section. A count line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you do not specify a grouping but specify a count, a count line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents.
To select the report fields to be sorted: Select the fields to be sorted. Note : To select multiple items, press and hold the CTRL key while selecting items. Click the Move button. Note : To move all fields into the Selected Fields list, click the Move All button. To indicate the order in which the columns are to be sorted, select one or more items in the Selected Fields list and use the First , Up , Down , and Last buttons to adjust the sort order. If the report requires the data to be grouped by the values of the first sort field, select the Check here if you would like the report to add grouping levels to your report? checkbox. Note : The report will be broken into sections based on the first sort field selected. Select the sorting rule for each field. Select the fields to be totaled. Click here for instructions to select the fields to be totaled. The sort criteria section is optional. You can leave this section blank when you create a report. If you specify a grouping, the report will be broken into sections based on the first sort field selected. If you specify a grouping and specify a total, a total line appears at the end of each grouping section. A total line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you do not specify a grouping but specify a total, a total line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you specify a grouping and specify a count, a count line appears at the end of each grouping section. A count line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you do not specify a grouping but specify a count, a count line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents.
Complete the Sort Criteria Section of a Report To select the report fields to be sorted: From the Available Sortable Fields list, select the fields to be sorted. Note : To select multiple items, press and hold the CTRL key while selecting items. Click the Move button. Note : To move all fields into the Selected Fields list, click the Move All button. To indicate the order in which the columns are to be sorted, select one or more items in the Selected Fields list and use the First , Up , Down , and Last buttons to adjust the sort order. If the report requires the data to be grouped by the values of the first sort field, select the Check here if you would like the report to add grouping levels to your report? checkbox. Note : The report will be broken into sections based on the first sort field selected. In the Ascend and Descend lists, select the sorting rule for each field Select the fields to be totaled, as applicable. Click here for instructions to select the fields to be totaled. The sort criteria section is optional. You can leave this section blank when you create a report. If you specify a grouping, the report will be broken into sections based on the first sort field selected. If you specify a grouping and specify a total, a total line appears at the end of each grouping section. A total line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you do not specify a grouping but specify a total, a total line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you specify a grouping and specify a count, a count line appears at the end of each grouping section. A count line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you do not specify a grouping but specify a count, a count line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents.
To select the report fields to be sorted: Select the fields to be sorted. Note : To select multiple items, press and hold the CTRL key while selecting items. Click the Move button. Note : To move all fields into the Selected Fields list, click the Move All button. To indicate the order in which the columns are to be sorted, select one or more items in the Selected Fields list and use the First , Up , Down , and Last buttons to adjust the sort order. If the report requires the data to be grouped by the values of the first sort field, select the Check here if you would like the report to add grouping levels to your report? checkbox. Note : The report will be broken into sections based on the first sort field selected. Select the sorting rule for each field. Select the fields to be totaled. Click here for instructions to select the fields to be totaled. The sort criteria section is optional. You can leave this section blank when you create a report. If you specify a grouping, the report will be broken into sections based on the first sort field selected. If you specify a grouping and specify a total, a total line appears at the end of each grouping section. A total line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you do not specify a grouping but specify a total, a total line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you specify a grouping and specify a count, a count line appears at the end of each grouping section. A count line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you do not specify a grouping but specify a count, a count line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents.
Complete the Sort Criteria Section of a Report To select the report fields to be sorted: From the Available Sortable Fields list, select the fields to be sorted. Note : To select multiple items, press and hold the CTRL key while selecting items. Click the Move button. Note : To move all fields into the Selected Fields list, click the Move All button. To indicate the order in which the columns are to be sorted, select one or more items in the Selected Fields list and use the First , Up , Down , and Last buttons to adjust the sort order. If the report requires the data to be grouped by the values of the first sort field, select the Check here if you would like the report to add grouping levels to your report? checkbox. Note : The report will be broken into sections based on the first sort field selected. In the Ascend and Descend lists, select the sorting rule for each field Select the fields to be totaled, as applicable. Click here for instructions to select the fields to be totaled. The sort criteria section is optional. You can leave this section blank when you create a report. If you specify a grouping, the report will be broken into sections based on the first sort field selected. If you specify a grouping and specify a total, a total line appears at the end of each grouping section. A total line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you do not specify a grouping but specify a total, a total line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you specify a grouping and specify a count, a count line appears at the end of each grouping section. A count line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you do not specify a grouping but specify a count, a count line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents.
To select the report fields to be sorted: Select the fields to be sorted. Note : To select multiple items, press and hold the CTRL key while selecting items. Click the Move button. Note : To move all fields into the Selected Fields list, click the Move All button. To indicate the order in which the columns are to be sorted, select one or more items in the Selected Fields list and use the First , Up , Down , and Last buttons to adjust the sort order. If the report requires the data to be grouped by the values of the first sort field, select the Check here if you would like the report to add grouping levels to your report? checkbox. Note : The report will be broken into sections based on the first sort field selected. Select the sorting rule for each field. Select the fields to be totaled. Click here for instructions to select the fields to be totaled. The sort criteria section is optional. You can leave this section blank when you create a report. If you specify a grouping, the report will be broken into sections based on the first sort field selected. If you specify a grouping and specify a total, a total line appears at the end of each grouping section. A total line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you do not specify a grouping but specify a total, a total line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you specify a grouping and specify a count, a count line appears at the end of each grouping section. A count line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you do not specify a grouping but specify a count, a count line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents.
Complete the Sort Criteria Section of a Report To select the report fields to be sorted: From the Available Sortable Fields list, select the fields to be sorted. Note : To select multiple items, press and hold the CTRL key while selecting items. Click the Move button. Note : To move all fields into the Selected Fields list, click the Move All button. To indicate the order in which the columns are to be sorted, select one or more items in the Selected Fields list and use the First , Up , Down , and Last buttons to adjust the sort order. If the report requires the data to be grouped by the values of the first sort field, select the Check here if you would like the report to add grouping levels to your report? checkbox. Note : The report will be broken into sections based on the first sort field selected. In the Ascend and Descend lists, select the sorting rule for each field Select the fields to be totaled, as applicable. Click here for instructions to select the fields to be totaled. The sort criteria section is optional. You can leave this section blank when you create a report. If you specify a grouping, the report will be broken into sections based on the first sort field selected. If you specify a grouping and specify a total, a total line appears at the end of each grouping section. A total line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you do not specify a grouping but specify a total, a total line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you specify a grouping and specify a count, a count line appears at the end of each grouping section. A count line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you do not specify a grouping but specify a count, a count line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents.
To select the report fields to be sorted: Select the fields to be sorted. Note : To select multiple items, press and hold the CTRL key while selecting items. Click the Move button. Note : To move all fields into the Selected Fields list, click the Move All button. To indicate the order in which the columns are to be sorted, select one or more items in the Selected Fields list and use the First , Up , Down , and Last buttons to adjust the sort order. If the report requires the data to be grouped by the values of the first sort field, select the Check here if you would like the report to add grouping levels to your report? checkbox. Note : The report will be broken into sections based on the first sort field selected. Select the sorting rule for each field. Select the fields to be totaled. Click here for instructions to select the fields to be totaled. The sort criteria section is optional. You can leave this section blank when you create a report. If you specify a grouping, the report will be broken into sections based on the first sort field selected. If you specify a grouping and specify a total, a total line appears at the end of each grouping section. A total line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you do not specify a grouping but specify a total, a total line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you specify a grouping and specify a count, a count line appears at the end of each grouping section. A count line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you do not specify a grouping but specify a count, a count line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents.
Complete the Sort Criteria Section of a Report To select the report fields to be sorted: From the Available Sortable Fields list, select the fields to be sorted. Note : To select multiple items, press and hold the CTRL key while selecting items. Click the Move button. Note : To move all fields into the Selected Fields list, click the Move All button. To indicate the order in which the columns are to be sorted, select one or more items in the Selected Fields list and use the First , Up , Down , and Last buttons to adjust the sort order. If the report requires the data to be grouped by the values of the first sort field, select the Check here if you would like the report to add grouping levels to your report? checkbox. Note : The report will be broken into sections based on the first sort field selected. In the Ascend and Descend lists, select the sorting rule for each field Select the fields to be totaled, as applicable. Click here for instructions to select the fields to be totaled. The sort criteria section is optional. You can leave this section blank when you create a report. If you specify a grouping, the report will be broken into sections based on the first sort field selected. If you specify a grouping and specify a total, a total line appears at the end of each grouping section. A total line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you do not specify a grouping but specify a total, a total line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you specify a grouping and specify a count, a count line appears at the end of each grouping section. A count line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents. If you do not specify a grouping but specify a count, a count line appears at the end of the report for the entire report contents.
This section of a study is not required, but provides the opportunity to customize or limit a study's results. Use optional study sections to clearly define study parameters, but use caution as conflicting selections will result in no data being returned. To complete the States/Provinces section of a study: Select each state or province which should be included in the study, and then use the center buttons as necessary to customize the Selected States/Provinces list. Note : The repair orders included in a study with a state or province selection are determined by the address entered in the Customer section of the vehicle's National Service History. When you have selected all desired states and provinces, click the Save button.
Complete the States/Provinces Section of a Study This section of a study is not required, but provides the opportunity to customize or limit a study's results. Use optional study sections to clearly define study parameters, but use caution as conflicting selections will result in no data being returned. To complete the States/Provinces section of a study: Select each state or province which should be included in the study, and then use the center buttons as necessary to customize the Selected States/Provinces list. Note : The repair orders included in a study with a state or province selection are determined by the address entered in the Customer section of the vehicle's National Service History. When you have selected all desired states and provinces, click the Save button.
Early Detection System (EDS) EDS: Study Dashboard Processes EDS: Study Dashboard Study Study Dashboard Technical Service Bulletin (TSB) Create or Modify a Study Workflow Note : The Create or Modify a Study workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for defining or modifying a study that integrates appointment and repair order data collected by the Dealer Business System (DBS) from dealers. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Define or Modify a Study Workflow. Manage Early Detection System Studies Workflow View a Dealer's Study Results Workflow View One Study Result Workflow
To delete a parts return from the Parts Return Management page: Select the parts return you want to delete. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Delete option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm, or click the No button to close the window without confirming. To delete a parts return, the return must be in "New" or "Open" status.
Delete a Parts Return from Parts Return Management To delete a parts return from the Parts Return Management page: Select the parts return you want to delete. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Delete option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to confirm, or click the No button to close the window without confirming. To delete a parts return, the return must be in "New" or "Open" status.
Manage Returns Manage Returns Manage Returns Manage Parts Return Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing parts returns. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Parts Return Workflow. Create Parts Return Workflow Modify Parts Return Workflow
Monitor Interface Page Overview Purpose Use the Monitor Interface page to view information about the processing of transactions within the Dealer Business System (DBS) . DBS provides the ability to search for and review transactions including information about the transaction creator, any error codes, and system response time. Description The content area of the Monitor Interface page displays the following sections: Search Criteria - Allows you to specify search criteria to limit the results displayed in the summary area Summary - Displays general information for all records on the page Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Monitor Interface page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Search for and Monitor Transactions on the Monitor Interface Page Page Preview
To view the detail of an error message on the Monitor Vehicle Inventory page: In the Error Data column for the selected record, click the View Detail link. Review the detail information for the error, and then click the Close link.
View Detail on the Monitor Vehicle Inventory Page To view the detail of an error message on the Monitor Vehicle Inventory page: In the Error Data column for the selected record, click the View Detail link. Review the detail information for the error, and then click the Close link.
To edit a claim on the Quick Entry Warranty Claim page: Select the claim you want to edit. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Edit Claim in Quick Entry Screen option.
Edit a Warranty Claim on the Quick Entry Warranty Claim Page To edit a claim on the Quick Entry Warranty Claim page: Select the claim you want to edit. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Edit Claim in Quick Entry Screen option.
To open an application page from the Site Map: On the page footer, click the Site Map link. Click the Expand (+) icon to display the application page names of a section. Click the application page link you want to access. Note : The application page will open on a separate window. The Site Map is a central location where users can access multiple screens from a single location in the DBS application. Use it as an alternate way to access the pages and application links.
Manage Custom Search Group Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing custom search groups. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Custom Search Group (Parts Metrics) Workflow. View Parts Metrics Workflow
Note : This task is performed by internal users only. To view current host availability: Click the View Current Host Availability button. Note : The host availability for each DBS application appears.
View Current Host Availability Note : This task is performed by internal users only. To view current host availability: Click the View Current Host Availability button. Note : The host availability for each DBS application appears.
Note : This task is performed by internal users only. To view system transaction status information: Click the View Application Information button. Click the Action icon for the application you want to review. From the Action menu, select the Drill Down menu option. View the status information displayed for the selected application.
View System Transaction Information Note : This task is performed by internal users only. To view system transaction status information: Click the View Application Information button. Click the Action icon for the application you want to review. From the Action menu, select the Drill Down menu option. View the status information displayed for the selected application.
To open a submitted parts return: Select the parts return you want to view. Note : The parts return must not be in "New" or "Open" status. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the View Return option. Note : The View Parts Return page appears.
Open a Submitted Parts Return To open a submitted parts return: Select the parts return you want to view. Note : The parts return must not be in "New" or "Open" status. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the View Return option. Note : The View Parts Return page appears.
Manage Returns Manage Returns Manage Returns Manage Parts Return Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing parts returns. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Parts Return Workflow. Create Parts Return Workflow Modify Parts Return Workflow
To complete the Buyer section of an RDR: From the Title drop-down list, select a title. Enter or update the customer name, address, and contact information. Note : If you select "Commercial Account" from the Title drop-down list, you must enter the company name and details instead of the customer details. Note : Type all 9s in the Daytime or Evening field if the customer does not have a phone. In the Email field, type the customer email address. Note : Type three asterisks (*) if the customer does not have an email address. Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. A will display for any missing or incorrect data. Correct all errors before submitting the RDR. Note : If you are ready to submit the RDR, click here for more information.
Complete the Buyer Section of an RDR To complete the Buyer section of an RDR: From the Title drop-down list, select a title. Enter or update the buyer name, address, and contact information. Note : If you select "Commercial Account" from the Title drop-down list, you must enter the company name and details instead of the buyer details. Note : Type all 9s in the Daytime or Evening field if the buyer does not have a phone. In the Email field, type the buyer email address. Note : Type three asterisks (*) if the buyer does not have an email address. Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. A will display for any missing or incorrect data. Correct all errors before submitting the RDR. Note : If you are ready to submit the RDR, click here for more information. Buyer Section: Fleet Sales To complete the Buyer section of an RDR for a fleet vehicle: In the Primary Purchaser Certification Number field, type the certification number which identifies the primary purchaser. Click the Retrieve button. Note : DBS populates the remaining fields with the fleet purchaser's information. Click the Save button to save your changes, or click the Cancel button to close without saving. A will display for any missing or incorrect data. Correct all errors before submitting the RDR. Note : If you are ready to submit the RDR, click here for more information.
Processes RDR RDR RDR a Vehicle Workflow Note : This workflow is for NNA users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for retail delivery reporting (RDR) or editing the sale of a vehicle. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Report or Edit the Sale of a Vehicle workflow. Vehicle Inventory Workflow Inventory Search Workflow View RDR History Workflow
To submit a warranty claim from the Manage Warranty Claim page: Select the warranty claim you want to submit. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Submit Claim option.
Submit a Warranty Claim from the Manage Warranty Claim Page To submit a warranty claim from the Manage Warranty Claim page: Select the line for the warranty claim you want to submit. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Submit Claim option.
Manage Warranty Claims Processes Manage Warranty Claims Manage Warranty Claims Manage Warranty Claims Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing warranty claims. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create or Edit Warranty Claims Workflow or View Warranty Claims Workflow. Edit or Create Warranty Claims Workflow View Warranty Claims Workflow
View Overview Information National Service History Page Overview View National Service History Workflow Perform Tasks Perform Common DBS Tasks Search for a Customer or Vehicle Perform Common DBS Tasks Search for a Customer or Vehicle
National Service History National Service History (NSH) National Service History National Service History Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing national service history information for a vehicle.
To exclude a job line from the analysis results: In the Parts Markup or Labor Rate results area, move your mouse pointer over the Action icon for the job line you want to exclude. From the Action menu, select the Exclude option. Note : The Exclude Repair Order Job Line window opens. Click the OK button to confirm exclusion of the job line from the analysis results. Note : The RO job line is excluded from the analysis results and the total amounts are automatically recalculated. When you access the Customer Pay Reimbursement page, no filters are set and no results are visible.
Exclude a Job Line To exclude a job line from the analysis results: In the Parts Markup or Labor Rate results area, move your mouse pointer over the Action icon for the job line you want to exclude. From the Action menu, select the Exclude option. Note : The Exclude Repair Order Job Line window opens. Click the OK button to confirm exclusion of the job line from the analysis results. Note : The RO job line is excluded from the analysis results and the total amounts are automatically recalculated. When you access the Customer Pay Reimbursement page, no filters are set and no results are visible.
Customer Customer Pay Reimbursement Reimbursement Customer Pay Reimbursement Customer Pay Reimbursement View Customer Pay Reimbursement Analysis Workflow : Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for customer pay reimbursement analysis.
To complete the Customer section of a claim on either the Edit/Create Warranty Claim page or the Quick Entry Warranty Claim page: From the Owner Type drop-down list, select an owner type. Enter the customer name, address, email address, and telephone numbers to add or change the default customer information. Note : Click here for instructions to view the Claim Activity section.
Complete the Customer Section of a Claim To complete the Customer section of an express entry warranty claim: Note : If you search for a repair order and line number, the information in the Customer section is populated with the repair order information. Add additional information as necessary. From the Owner Type drop-down list, select an owner type. Note : The information required to complete the Customer section varies by owner type. In the Name fields, type the owner or principal driver's first, middle initial, and last name. If applicable, in the Company field, type the name of the customer's company. In the Address fields, type the customer's postal mail and electronic mail addresses. In the Phone fields, type the customer's daytime, evening, and mobile phone numbers and extensions. To complete the Customer section of an express entry warranty claim: Note : If you search for a repair order and line number, the information in the Customer section is populated with the repair order information. Add additional information as necessary. From the Owner Type drop-down list, select an owner type. Note : The information required to complete the Customer section varies by owner type. If necessary, select the Privacy Blocking Flags checkbox. In the Name fields, type the owner or principal driver's first, middle initial, and last name. If applicable, in the Company field, type the name of the customer's company. In the Address fields, type the customer's postal mail and electronic mail addresses. In the License Plate Number field, type the customer's license plate number. In the Service Contract Number filed, type the service contract number. In the Phone fields, type the customer's daytime, evening, and mobile phone numbers and extensions.
Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Edit Warranty Claims Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Warranty Claims Edit or Create Warranty Claims Workflow *** Nissan Canada Inc. (NCI) recommends dealers create Warranty Claims in an NCI DBS certified dealer management system and then log into NCI DBS to review, validate and submit the claim to NCI. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating and editing claims. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Warranty Claims Workflow or View Warranty Claims Workflow. Manage Warranty Claims Workflow View Warranty Claims Workflow
To complete the Customer section of a claim on either the Edit/Create Warranty Claim page or the Quick Entry Warranty Claim page: From the Owner Type drop-down list, select an owner type. Enter the customer name, address, email address, and telephone numbers to add or change the default customer information. Note : Click here for instructions to view the Claim Activity section.
Complete the Customer Section of a Claim To complete the Customer section of an express entry warranty claim: Note : If you search for a repair order and line number, the information in the Customer section is populated with the repair order information. Add additional information as necessary. From the Owner Type drop-down list, select an owner type. Note : The information required to complete the Customer section varies by owner type. In the Name fields, type the owner or principal driver's first, middle initial, and last name. If applicable, in the Company field, type the name of the customer's company. In the Address fields, type the customer's postal mail and electronic mail addresses. In the Phone fields, type the customer's daytime, evening, and mobile phone numbers and extensions. To complete the Customer section of an express entry warranty claim: Note : If you search for a repair order and line number, the information in the Customer section is populated with the repair order information. Add additional information as necessary. From the Owner Type drop-down list, select an owner type. Note : The information required to complete the Customer section varies by owner type. If necessary, select the Privacy Blocking Flags checkbox. In the Name fields, type the owner or principal driver's first, middle initial, and last name. If applicable, in the Company field, type the name of the customer's company. In the Address fields, type the customer's postal mail and electronic mail addresses. In the License Plate Number field, type the customer's license plate number. In the Service Contract Number filed, type the service contract number. In the Phone fields, type the customer's daytime, evening, and mobile phone numbers and extensions.
Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Edit Warranty Claims Create Warranty Claim Create Warranty Claims Edit Warranty Claims Edit or Create Warranty Claims Workflow *** Nissan Canada Inc. (NCI) recommends dealers create Warranty Claims in an NCI DBS certified dealer management system and then log into NCI DBS to review, validate and submit the claim to NCI. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating and editing claims. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Warranty Claims Workflow or View Warranty Claims Workflow. Manage Warranty Claims Workflow View Warranty Claims Workflow
View Parts Order Page Overview Purpose Use the View Parts Order page to view part orders that cannot be modified, including parts orders that are manually created due to special circumstances, or parts orders that are in backorder status that you want to cancel. You can view a parts order from the Parts Order Management page. You must first search for and locate the desired parts order that you want to view. Use the Action context menu to open the View Parts Order page. Description The content area of the View Parts Order page displays the following sections: View Parts Order header - Appears at the top of the page and allows you to view general information about the part order including the order status, order type, shipping information, and backorder or cross ship preferences Parts Order Detail - Allows you to view the parts on the order and, if the original order was upgraded to a CSC order, you can also scroll right to view the related order number Buttons - Allow you to cancel, upgrade, or close Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the View Parts Order page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Cancel a Backorder Perform a CSC Upgrade for a Backorder View Related Order Detail for a CSC Order View Parts Order Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the View Parts Order page. View Parts Order Workflow Page Preview
To export vehicle inventory information: Click the Export button. Select the Excel ® output format. Note : Save the file to your local drive. If you filter the page before exporting, only those records that meet the filter criteria export. You can filter, sort, and print the data if you export the vehicle summary information to Microsoft ® Excel ® .
Export Vehicle Inventory Information To export vehicle inventory information: Click the Export button. Select the Excel ® output format. Note : Save the file to your local drive. If you filter the page before exporting, only those records that meet the filter criteria will export. You can filter, sort, and print the data if you export the vehicle summary information to Microsoft ® Excel ® .
Vehicle Inventory Management Inventory Managment Processes Inventory Managment Vehicle Inventory Management Vehicle Inventory Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing vehicle inventory data at the dealerships. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Vehicle Inventory workflow. Report the Sale of a Vehicle (RDR) Workflow Search Vehicle Inventory Workflow Search Vehicle Inventory Workflow
To monitor the host socket listener: Click the Monitor Host Socket Listener button. Review the information that displays in the Monitor Host Socket Listener section.
Monitor the Host Socket Listener To monitor the host socket listener: Click the Monitor Host Socket Listener button. Review the information that displays in the Monitor Host Socket Listener section.
To open the Create Standard Operation Group page: Click the Create button. Note : The Create Standard Operation Group page opens.
Open the Create Standard Operation Group Page To open the Create Standard Operation Group page: Click the Create button. Note : The Create Standard Operation Group page opens.
Standard Operation Codes Standard Operation Code Standard Operation Codes Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating or editing standard operation groups and codes. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes workflow. Manage Dealer Operation Codes Workflow Manage Standard Operation Categories Workflow Manage Standard Operation Codes Workflow
The Manage Host Report page presents a new user interface for DBS that makes it quicker and easier to get things done. For example, in this page, the summary list and create functions have been combined into one page. See the About the Manage Host Report Page topic for additional details. To filter the Manage Host Report page or any page with the new user experience: From the drop-down lists below the header for a column, select one or more filter criteria. To use a text filter, simply begin typing the text you wish to view. DBS updates with each letter you type to automatically display those records which contain the typed text. Note : The text filter is a simple filter that searches for the letters typed in any order. For example: if you begin by typing the letter "F", all records which contain an "F" such as FAR0165-R1 and HRF0150-R1 will display as results. Continue typing additional characters to further limit the results displayed. The upper section of the Manage Host Report page is NOT where you apply filter criteria, the new user interface includes the ability to add new information in the upper section. The gray bar at the top of the Summary section is where filter criteria is applied.
Filter the Manage Host Report Page The Manage Host Report page presents a new user interface for DBS that makes it quicker and easier to get things done. For example, in this page, the summary list and create functions have been combined into one page. See the About the Manage Host Report Page topic for additional details. It is worth noting that the upper section of the page is NOT where you apply filter criteria, the new user interface includes the ability to add new reports in the upper section. The gray bar at the top of the Summary section is where filter criteria is applied. Other pages using the new user experience MAY have the ability to apply filters in this section. The Manage Host Report page presents a new user interface for DBS that makes it quicker and easier to get things done. For example, in this page, the summary list and create functions have been combined into one page. See the About the Manage Host Report Page topic for additional details. To filter the Manage Host Report page or any page with the new user experience: From the drop-down lists below the header for a column, select one or more filter criteria. To use a text filter, simply begin typing the text you wish to view. DBS updates with each letter you type to automatically display those records which contain the typed text. Note : The text filter is a simple filter that searches for the letters typed in any order. For example: if you begin by typing the letter "F", all records which contain an "F" such as FAR0165-R1 and HRF0150-R1 will display as results. Continue typing additional characters to further limit the results displayed.
MRW: Internal user only
Note : This task applies to internal users only. To view the SVC Order Management summary and detail: Review the list of orders. To sort the displayed information, click the arrow beside a column title. To select an order, click anywhere in the row that contains the order. To show detail or hide detail, select an order and then click the Show Detail or Hide Detail link. Note : The Service Campaign Order Detail pane appears. If error or warning icons appear, move your mouse over the icons to view a description. If multiple pages exist: To view additional records, click a page number or click the forward or backward arrow to navigate from page to page. To view a specific page, in the Go to Page field, type a page number, then click the Go button.
Internal user only View SVC Order Management Summary and Detail Note : This task applies to internal users only. To view the SVC Order Management summary and detail: Review the list of orders. To sort the displayed information, click the arrow beside a column title. To select an order, click anywhere in the row that contains the order. To show detail or hide detail, select an order and then click the Show Detail or Hide Detail link. Note : The Service Campaign Order Detail pane appears. If error or warning icons appear, move your mouse over the icons to view a description.
Approve or Reject SVC Order Reject Approve or Reject SVC Order Approve or Reject SVC Order Manage Service Campaign Order Workflow Note : This workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing a Service Campaign (SVC) order. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Service Campaign Order Workflow. Manage Campaign Parts Workflow View Service Campaign Order Workflow
Note: This task applies to internal users only. To import changes to position permissions: Click the Import button. Note : The Select files to upload dialog appears. Locate the Microsoft © Excel © file on your computer and then click the Open button. Note : The system updates the permissions for the positions in the spreadsheet. To import position permission changes, you must have the file that contains the changes on your computer.
Import Changes to Position Permissions Note: This task applies to internal users only. To import changes to position permissions: Click the Import button. Note : The Select file to upload dialog appears. Locate the Microsoft © Excel © file on your computer and then click the Open button. Note : The system updates the permissions for the positions in the spreadsheet. To import position permission changes, you must have the file that contains the changes on your computer.
To view alerts: View alerts as they scroll at the top of the page. Note: If you move your cursor over an alert it will stop scrolling until you move the cursor away. Alerts display system critical information such as when a system is down. Different alerts can appear for each landing page because alerts are specific to a functional area.
View Alerts To view alerts: View alerts as they scroll at the top of the page. Note: If you move your cursor over an alert it will stop scrolling until you move the cursor away. Alerts display system critical information such as when a system is down. Different alerts can appear for each landing page because alerts are specific to a functional area.
Alerts Create Edit Modify Processes Create or Edit an Alert Workflow Note : This workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating or editing an alert. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create or Edit an Alert Workflow. Create or Edit an Announcement Workflow Create or Edit a Calendar Event Workflow Create or Edit a Notification Workflow
To perform a CSC upgrade for a VOR or TOS order: Select the order you want to upgrade. Click the CSC Upgrade button. Note : The NissanNet/INET Backorder/Customer Care Upgrade page appears. Note : Proceed with the upgrade in NissanNet/INET and then exit NissanNet/INET. Note : DBS creates the new CSC order overnight and makes it available for viewing the next day. Note : If the order has a related order number, a link to the related order appears on the CSC order, which is the original order upgraded to CSC. To perform a CSC upgrade, the VOR or TOS order must be in "Backorder" status.
Perform a CSC Upgrade for a VOR or TOS Order Developer Note: Infiniti DR graphic goes in this table. This is a Default table style. Do not delete this table, this will be used for Infiniti development later in the project. To perform a CSC Upgrade for a VOR or TOS order: Select the order you want to upgrade. Click the CSC Upgrade button. Note : The NissanNet/INET Backorder/Customer Care Upgrade page appears. Note : Proceed with the upgrade in NissanNet/INET and then exit NissanNet/INET. Note : DCS creates the new CSC order overnight and makes it available for viewing the next day. Note : If the order has a related order number, a link to the related order appears on the CSC order, which is the original order upgraded to CSC. To perform a CSC upgrade, the VOR or TOS order must be in "Backorder" status.
Edit Edit Order Edit Order Edit SVC Order Edit Order Edit Order Edit SVC Order Edit Order Edit Order Edit Order Edit SVC Order Edit Order Edit Order Edit Parts Order Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for modifying an existing new or open parts order. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Edit Parts Order Workflow. Create Parts Order Workflow Manage Parts Order Workflow Inquire on the Availability of Parts at the Parts Distribution Centers Workflow View Parts Order Workflow
To access the site map from any DBS application page: Click the Site Map link.
Access the Site Map To Access the site map from any DBS application page: Click the Site Map link.
To open the View RFC Detail page: Select the desired RFC claim. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the View RFC option. Note : The View RFC Detail page appears. Note : To return to the Request For Credit (RFC) Status page, click the Close button. -OR- Click the RFC Number hyperlink for the desired RFC claim.
Open the View RFC Detail Page To open the View RFC Detail page: Select an RFC claim. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the View RFC option. Note : The View RFC Detail page appears. Note : To return to the Request For Credit (RFC) Status page, click the Close button. -OR- Click the RFC Number hyperlink for the desired RFC claim.
Applications Request for Credit RFC Request for Credit Status Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for viewing Request for Credit (RFC) status.
To open the Edit Standard Operation Category page. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Edit Category option. Note : The Edit Standard Operation Category page opens.
Open the Edit Standard Operation Category Page To open the Edit Standard Operation Category page: Select a category. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Edit Category option. Note : The Edit Standard Operation Category page opens.
ReRun Standard Operation Category Translation Manage Standard Operation Categories Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing and creating standard operation categories. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Standard Operation Categories Workflow. Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes Workflow Manage Dealer Operation Codes Workflow Manage Standard Operation Codes Workflow
To filter vehicle inventory: From the Fleet Filter drop-down list, select a fleet option. Note : Each time you make a selection from a drop-down list, DBS applies the filter and refreshes the list of vehicles. From the Vehicle Type drop-down list, select a vehicle type. From the Model drop-down list, select a model. From the Filter By drop-down list, select a filter option and then complete additional filter values, as needed. Note : When filtering by serial number, you are only allowed to enter six digits for the serial number, full VINs or additional characters are not allowed. Type or select a secondary filter value, as needed. Note : For more customized filter control, click the Advanced Filter icon to create a custom filter. View the vehicles that meet the selected criteria. To reset the filter criteria to the default options, click the Clear icon. If an option is not available, that option is not displayed.
Filter Vehicle Inventory To filter vehicle inventory: From the Fleet Filter drop-down list, select a fleet option. From the Vehicle Type drop-down list, select a vehicle option. Note : Each time you make a selection from a drop-down list, DBS applies the filter and refreshes the list of vehicles. From the Model drop-down list, select a model. From the Filter By drop-down list, select a filter option and then complete additional filter values, as needed. Note : When filtering by serial number, you are only allowed to enter six digits for the serial number, full VINs or additional characters are not allowed. Click the Search icon. Note : To reset the filter criteria to the default options, click the Clear icon. Note : For more customized filter control, click the Advanced Filter icon to create a custom filter. View the vehicles that meet the selected criteria. To filter vehicle inventory: From the Vehicle Type drop-down list, select a vehicle option. Note : Each time you make a selection from a drop-down list, DBS applies the filter and refreshes the list of vehicles. From the Model drop-down list, select a model. From the Filter By drop-down list, select a filter option and then complete additional filter values, as needed. Note : When filtering by serial number, you are only allowed to enter six digits for the serial number, full VINs or additional characters are not allowed. Click the Search icon. Note : To reset the filter criteria to the default options, click the Clear icon. Note : For more customized filter control, click the Advanced Filter icon to create a custom filter. View the vehicles that meet the selected criteria. For Nissan Canada, Inc. ( NCI ), the location status of a vehicle is a derived value based on the movement of vehicles. The location status can also be combined with or replaced by the physical location.
Vehicle Inventory Management Inventory Managment Processes Inventory Managment Vehicle Inventory Management Vehicle Inventory Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing vehicle inventory data at the dealerships. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Vehicle Inventory workflow. Report the Sale of a Vehicle (RDR) Workflow Search Vehicle Inventory Workflow Search Vehicle Inventory Workflow
Processes RDR RDR RDR a Vehicle Workflow Note : This workflow is for NNA users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for retail delivery reporting (RDR) or editing the sale of a vehicle. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Report or Edit the Sale of a Vehicle workflow. Vehicle Inventory Workflow Inventory Search Workflow View RDR History Workflow
View Overview Information Event Calendar Page Overview Perform Tasks Perform Common DBS Tasks Search for a Specific Date View the Event Calendar Summary and Detail Perform Common DBS Tasks Search for a Specific Date View the Event Calendar Summary and Detail
To open the Edit Dealer Permissions page: Select the dealer. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Edit Dealer Permissions option. Note : The Edit Permissions page appears.
Open the Edit Dealer Permissions Page To open the Edit Dealer Permission page: Select the dealer. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Edit Dealer Permissions option. Note : The Edit Permission page appears.
To view position permissions: Show the section, if collapsed. Note : To show a section, click the + icon in the section header. Use the function tree to expand or collapse the nodes, as desired. Note : To expand all items in the section, click the expand all link in the section header. Note : The active permissions contain a check. To return to the Positions Summary page, click the Cancel button. The function tree displays permission options in hierarchical order, starting with the menu items at the top and ending with the specific functional items at the bottom.
View Position Permissions Note : This task applies to internal users only. To view position permissions: Show the section, if collapsed. Note : To show a section, click the + icon in the section header. Use the function tree to expand or collapse the nodes, as desired. Note : To expand all items in the section, click the expand all link in the section header. Note : The active permissions contain a check. To return to the Positions Summary page, click the Cancel button. The function tree displays permission options in hierarchical order, starting with the menu items at the top and ending with the specific functional items at the bottom.
To search application audit information: To limit the summary display, select or type search options in the fields provided. Click the Search button. View the audit information that meets the selected criteria. Note : To reset the search criteria to the default options and remove any search criteria, click the Reset button. Note : Click the arrow to the right of any column name to sort the summary information. The search selection fields at the top of the content area will vary based on your user role. Due to the number of transactions logged for auditing in DCS, it is important that you reduce the strain on the application resources by conducting targeted searches.
Filter Application Audit Information To filter application audit information: To limit the summary display, select or type search options in the fields provided. Click the Search button. View the audit information that meets the selected criteria. Note : To reset the search criteria to the default options and remove any search criteria, click the Reset button. Due to the number of transactions logged for auditing in DBS , it is important that you reduce the strain on the application resources by conducting targeted searches.
Announcements Page Overview Purpose Use the Announcements page to review the list of announcements you have the authority to act upon based on your user profile and security settings. The announcements you created and any announcements created by those you have surrogate authority for display in the summary view. Description The content area of the Announcements page displays the following sections: Filter By - Allows you to filter the information to display only the records that match your criteria Summary - Displays general information for all records on the page Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Announcements page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Access the Create Announcement Page Access the Edit Announcement Page Change the Status of an Announcement Copy an Announcement Delete an Announcement Filter the Announcements Summary View Announcements Summary View or Print Announcement Detail Access the Create Announcement Page Access the Edit Announcement Page Change the Status of an Announcement Copy an Announcement Delete an Announcement Filter the Announcements Summary View Announcements Summary View or Print Announcement Detail Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflows are performed on the Announcements page. Create or Edit an Announcement Workflow Page Preview
Create or Edit an Announcement Workflow Note : This workflow applies to internal users only. Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for creating, modifying, and approving an announcement. Related Workflows The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Create or Edit an Announcement Workflow. Create or Edit an Alert Workflow Create or Edit a Calendar Event Workflow Create or Edit a Notification Workflow
To copy an announcement: Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Copy option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Copy button to confirm, or click the Cancel button to close the window without confirming. The default status of a copied announcement is "Needs Approval".
Copy an Announcement To copy an announcement: Select the announcement you want to copy. Move your mouse pointer over the Action icon. From the Action menu, select the Copy option. Note : A confirmation message appears. Click the Copy button to confirm, or click the Cancel button to close the window without confirming. The default status of a copied announcement is "Needs Approval".
To use a summary page display definition: From the Select Definition drop-down list, select a definition. Note : The summary display updates according to the configuration of the selected definition.
Use a Summary Page Display Definition To use a summary page display definition: From the Select Definition drop-down list, select a definition. Note : The summary display updates according to the configuration of the selected definition.
To use a summary page display definition: From the Select Definition drop-down list, select a definition. Note : The summary display updates according to the configuration of the selected definition.
Use a Summary Page Display Definition To use a summary page display definition: From the Select Definition drop-down list, select a definition. Note : The summary display updates according to the configuration of the selected definition.
To use a summary page display definition: From the Select Definition drop-down list, select a definition. Note : The summary display updates according to the configuration of the selected definition.
Use a Summary Page Display Definition To use a summary page display definition: From the Select Definition drop-down list, select a definition. Note : The summary display updates according to the configuration of the selected definition.
To use a summary page display definition: From the Select Definition drop-down list, select a definition. Note : The summary display updates according to the configuration of the selected definition.
Use a Summary Page Display Definition To use a summary page display definition: From the Select Definition drop-down list, select a definition. Note : The summary display updates according to the configuration of the selected definition.
To use a summary page display definition: From the Select Definition drop-down list, select a definition. Note : The summary display updates according to the configuration of the selected definition.
Use a Summary Page Display Definition To use a summary page display definition: From the Select Definition drop-down list, select a definition. Note : The summary display updates according to the configuration of the selected definition.
To use a summary page display definition: From the Select Definition drop-down list, select a definition. Note : The summary display updates according to the configuration of the selected definition.
Use a Summary Page Display Definition To use a summary page display definition: From the Select Definition drop-down list, select a definition. Note : The summary display updates according to the configuration of the selected definition.
To use a summary page display definition: From the Select Definition drop-down list, select a definition. Note : The summary display updates according to the configuration of the selected definition.
Use a Summary Page Display Definition To use a summary page display definition: From the Select Definition drop-down list, select a definition. Note : The summary display updates according to the configuration of the selected definition.
Retailed Vehicle with Open Campaign Report (Takata Campaign) Quick Reference Guide The Retailed Vehicle with Open Campaign Report (Takata Campaign) quick reference guide provides instructions for using the new Retailed Vehicle Open Campaign Report page to access, export, and print a list of vehicles that have open Takata, service, and safety campaigns. Click here to view the PDF file. Note : Use of the Retailed Vehicle Open Campaign Report page is limited to authorized dealer and corporate users only. This page may NOT be used for any marketing purpose, and the information contained therein is strictly confidential.
Retailed Vehicle with Open Campaign Report (Takata Campaign) Quick Reference Guide The Retailed Vehicle with Open Campaign Report (Takata Campaign) quick reference guide provides instructions for using the new Retailed Vehicle Open Campaign Report page to access, export, and print a list of vehicles that have open Takata, service, and safety campaigns. Click here to view the PDF file. Note : Use of the Retailed Vehicle Open Campaign Report page is limited to authorized dealer and corporate users only. This page may NOT be used for any marketing purpose, and the information contained therein is strictly confidential.
Manage Standard Operation Codes Workflow Click a task in the diagram to navigate to the instructions to perform the task. After reviewing the instructions, use the Back arrow in the navigation bar to return to this workflow. Description The diagram illustrates the workflow for managing standard operation codes. Related Workflows ( Note to developer : List the related workflows and link to them.) The following workflows may have one or more tasks in common with the Manage Standard Operation Codes Workflow. Create or Edit Standard Operation Codes Workflow Manage Dealer Operation Codes Workflow Manage Standard Operation Categories Workflow
Copy User Permissions Page Overview Purpose Use the Copy User Permissions page to designate the user or users to whom you want to copy permissions. Description The content area of the Copy User Permissions page displays the following sections: Copy User Permissions of First Name Last Name - Shows you the selected user for whom you want to copy permissions Filter By - Allows you to filter the information to display only the records that match your criteria Page Navigation - Allows you to navigate from page to page, if multiple pages exist (internal user only) Buttons - Allow you to proceed with the request to copy or cancel the request. User List - Allows you to select a user or users to whom you want to copy permissions Tasks You can perform the following tasks on the Copy User Permissions page. Depending on your user role, you may not be able to perform all tasks. Copy User Permissions Copy User Permissions Workflows One or more tasks in the following workflow is performed on the Copy User Permissions page. User Summary Workflow Page Preview
To search for an internal user by user ID: If necessary, select the Internal User radio button. In the User ID field, type the user's identification number. Click the Search icon.
Search for an Internal User by User ID To search for an internal user by user ID: If necessary, select the Internal User radio button. In the User ID field, type the user's identification number. Click the Search icon.